Contents — 23 sections
- Book 1, §§1–25
- Book 1, §§26–50
- Book 1, §§51–75
- Book 1, §§76–100
- Book 1, §§101–125
- Book 1, §§126–150
- Book 1, §§151–175
- Book 1, §§176–200
- Book 1, §§201–225
- Book 1, §§226–250
- Book 1, §§251–256; Book 2, §§1–19
- Book 2, §§20–44
- Book 2, §§45–69
- Book 2, §§70–94
- Book 2, §§95–119
- Book 2, §§120–144
- Book 2, §§145–169
- Book 2, §§170–194
- Book 2, §§195–219
- Book 2, §§220–244
- Book 2, §§245–269
- Book 2, §§270–294
- Book 2, §§295–302
Book 1, §§1–25
1:1The treatise before this one has contained our opinions on those visions sent from heaven which are classed under the first species; in reference to which subject we delivered our opinion that the Deity sent the appearances which are beheld by man in dreams in accordance with the suggestions of his own nature. But in this treatise we will, to the best of our power, describe those dreams which come under the second species.
1:2Now the second species is that in which our mind, being moved simultaneously with the mind of the universe, has appeared to be hurried away by itself and to be under the influence of divine impulses, so as to be rendered capable of comprehending beforehand, and knowing by anticipation some of the events of the future. Now the first dream which is akin to the species which I have been describing, is that which appeared on the ladder which reached up to heaven, and which was of this kind.
1:3"And Jacob dreamed, and behold a ladder was firmly planted on the earth, the head of which reached up to heaven; and the angels of God were ascending and descending on it. And behold there was a ladder firmly planted on the earth, and the Lord was standing steadily upon it; and he said, I am the God of Abraham thy father, and the God of Isaac: be not afraid. The earth on which thou art sleeping I will give unto thee and unto thy seed, and thy seed shall be as the dust of the earth, and it shall be multiplied as the sand on the seashore, and shall spread to the south, and to the north, and to the east; and in thee shall all the kindreds of the earth be blessed, and in thy seed also. And, behold, I am with thee, keeping thee in all thy ways, by whichever is goest, and I will bring thee again into this land; because I will not leave thee until I have done everything which I have said unto thee."
1:4But the previous considerations of the circumstances of this vision requires that we should examine them with accuracy, and then perhaps we shall be able to comprehend what is indicated by the vision. What, then, are the previous circumstances? The scripture tells us, "And Jacob went up from the well of the oath, and came to Charran, and went into a place and lay down there until the sun arose. And he took one of the stones of the place and placed it at his head, and went to sleep in that place." And immediately afterwards came the dream.
1:5Therefore it is well at the outset to raise a question on these three points:—One, What was the well of the oath, and why was it called by this name? Secondly, What is Charran, and why, after Jacob had departed from the well beforementioned, did he immediately go to Charran? Thirdly, What was the place, and why, when he was in it, did the sun at once set, and did he go to sleep?
1:6Let us then at once begin and consider the first of these points. To me, then, the well appears to be an emblem of knowledge; for its nature is not superficial, but very deep. Nor does it lie in an open place, but a well is fond of being hidden somewhere in secret. Nor is it found with ease, but only after great labour and with difficulty; and this too is seen to be the case with sciences, not only with such as have great and indescribable subjects of speculation, but even with respect to such as are the most insignificant.
1:7Choose, therefore, whichever art you please; not the most excellent, but even the most obscure of all, which perhaps no one who has been bred a free man in the whole city would ever study of his own accord, and which scarcely any servant in the field would attend to, who, against his will, was a slave to some morose and ill-tempered master who compelled him to do many unpleasant things.
1:8For the matter will be found to be not a simple one, but rather one of great complications and variety, not easy to be seized upon, but difficult to discover, difficult to master, hostile to delay, and indolence and indifference, full of earnestness and contention, and sweat, and care. For which reason "those who dig in this well say that they cannot find even water in it;" because the ends of science are not only hard to discover, but are even altogether undiscoverable;
1:9and it is owing to this that one man is more thoroughly skilled in grammar or in geometry than another, because of its being impossible to circumscribe, increase, and extend one within certain limits; for there is always more that is left behind than what comes to be learnt; and what is left watches for and catches the learner, so that even he who fancies that he has comprehended and mastered the very extremities of knowledge would be considered but half perfect by another person who was his judge, and if he were before the tribunal of truth would appear to be only beginning knowledge;
1:10for life is short, as some one has said, but art is long; of which that man most thoroughly comprehends the magnitude, who sincerely and honestly plunges deeply into it, and who digs it out like a well. And such a man, when he is at the point of death, being now grey-headed and exceedingly old, it is said, wept, not that he feared death as being a coward, but out of a desire for instruction, as feeling that he was now, for the first time, entering upon it when he was finally departing from life.
1:11For the soul flourishes for the pursuit of knowledge when the prime vigour of the body is withering away from the lapse of time; therefore, before one has arrived at one’s prime and vigour by reason of a more accurate comprehension of things, it is not difficult to be tripped up. But this accident is common to all people who are fond of learning, to whom new subjects of contemplation are continually rising up and striving after old ones, the soul itself producing many such subjects when it is not barren and unproductive. And nature, also, unexpectedly and spontaneously displaying a great number to those who are gifted with acute and penetrating intellects. Therefore the well of knowledge is shown to be of this kind, having no boundary and no end.
1:12We must now explain why it was called the well of the oath. Those matters which are doubted about are decided by an oath, and those which are uncertain are confirmed in the same manner, and so, too, those which want certification receive it; from which facts this inference is drawn, that there is no subject respecting which any one can make an affirmation with greater certainty than he can respecting the fact that the race of wisdom is without limitation and without end.
1:13It is well, therefore, to enrol one’s self under the banners of one who discusses these matters without an oath; but he who is not very much inclined to assent to the assertions of another will at least assent to them when he has made oath to their correctness. But let no one refuse to take an oath of this kind, well knowing that he will have his name inscribed on pillars among those who are faithful to their oaths.
1:14However, enough of this. The next thing must be to consider why it is that as four wells had been dug by the servants of Abraham and Isaac, the fourth and last was called the well of the oath.
1:15May it not be that the sacred historian here desires to represent, in a figurative manner, that as in the universe there are four elements of which this world is composed, and as there are an equal number in ourselves, of which we have been fashioned before we were moulded into our human shape, three of them are capable of being comprehended somehow or other, but the fourth is unintelligible to all who come forward as judges of it.
1:16Accordingly, we find that the four elements in the world are the earth, and the water, and the air, and the heaven, of which, even if some are difficult to find, they are still not classed in the utterly undiscoverable portion.
1:17For that the earth, because it is a heavy, and indissoluble, and solid substance, is divided into mountains and champaign districts, and intersected by rivers and seas, so that some portion of it consists of islands, and some portions are continent. And again, some of it has a shallow and some a deep soil; and some is rough, and rugged, and strong, and altogether barren; and some is smooth and delicate, and exceedingly fertile; and besides all these facts we know a great number of others relative to the earth.
1:18And again, there is the water, which we know has many of the aforesaid qualities in common with the earth, and many also peculiar to itself; for some of it is sweet, and some brackish, and some is mixed up of various characteristics; and some is good to drink, and some is not drinkable; and, moreover, neither of these last qualities is invariable with respect to every creature, but there are some to which it is the one and not the other, and vice versa. Again, some water is by nature cold, and other water naturally hot;
1:19for there is in all sorts of places an infinite number of springs pouring forth hot water, not on the land only but even in the sea: at all events, there have appeared before now veins pouring up warm water in the middle of the sea, which all the enormous efflux of salt water in all the sea that encircles the world, pouring over them from all eternity, has never been able to extinguish, nor even in the least degree to diminish.
1:20Again, we know that the air has an attractive nature, yielding to such bodies as surround it in an altitude of resistance, being the organ of life, and breath, and sight, and hearing, and all the rest of the external senses, admitting of rarification, and condensation, and motion, and tranquillity, and changes, and variations of every kind, by which it is altered and modified, and generating summers and winters, and the seasons of autumn and spring, by means of which the circle of the year is at last brought to a conclusion.
1:21All these things, then, we feel: but the heaven has a nature which is incomprehensible, and it has never conveyed to us any distinct indication by which we can understand its nature; for what can we say? that it is solid ice, as some persons have chosen to assert? or that it is the purest fire? or that it is a fifth body, moving in a circle having no participation in any of the four elements? For what can we say? Has that most remote sphere of the fixed stars any density in an upward direction? or is it merely a superficies devoid of all depth, something like a plane figure?
1:22And what are the stars? Are they masses of earth full of fire? For some persons have said that they are hills, and valleys, and thickets, men who are worthy of a prison and a treadmill, or of any place where there are instruments proper for the punishment of impious persons; or are they, as some one has defined them, a continuous and dense harmony, the closely packed, indissoluble mass of aether? Again, are they animated and intelligent? or are they destitute alike of mind and vitality? Have they their motions in consequence of any choice of their own? or merely because they are compulsory?
1:23What, again, are we to say of the moon? Does she show us a light of her own, or a borrowed and illegitimate one, only reflected from the rays of the sun? or is neither of these things true, but has she something mixed, as it were, so as to be a sort of combination of her own light and of that which belongs to some other body? For all these things, and others like them, belonging to the fourth and most excellent of the bodies in the world, namely, the heaven, are uncertain and incomprehensible, and are spoken of in accordance with conjectures and guesses, and not with the solid, certain reasoning of truth,
1:24so that a person might venture to swear that no mortal man will ever be able to comprehend any one of these matters clearly. At all events, the fourth and dry well was called the well of the oath on this account, because the search after the fourth element in the world, that is to say the heaven, is without any result, and is in every respect fruitless. But let us now see in what manner that fourth element in us is by nature in such an especial and singular manner incomprehensible.
1:25There are, then, four principal elements in us, the body, the external sense, the speech, and the mind. Now of these, three are not uncertain or unintelligible in every respect, but they contain some indication in themselves by which they are comprehended.
Book 1, §§26–50
1:26Now what is my meaning in this statement? We know already that the body is divisible into three parts, and that it is capable of motion in six directions, inasmuch as it has three dimensions, in length, in depth, in breadth; and twice as many motions, namely six, the upward motion, the downward motion, that to the right, that to the left, the forward, and the backward motion. But, moreover, we are not ignorant that it is the vessel of the soul; and we are also aware that it is subject to the changes of being young, of decaying, of growing old, of dying, of undergoing dissolution.
1:27And with respect to the outward senses, we are not, so far as that is concerned, utterly dull and mutilated, but we are able to say that that also is divided into five divisions, and that there are appropriate organs for the development of each sense formed by nature; for instance, the eyes for seeing, the ears for hearing, the nostrils for smelling, and the other organs for the exercise of the respective senses to which they are adapted, and also that we may call these outward senses messengers of the mind which inform it of colours, and shapes, and sounds, and the peculiar differences of vapours, and flavours, and, in short, which describe to it all bodies, and all the distinctive qualities which exist in them. They also may be looked upon as body-guards of the soul, informing it of all that they see or hear; and if anything injurious attacks it from without, they foresee it, and guard against it, so that it may not enter by chance and unawares, and so become the cause of irremediable disaster to their mistress.
1:28Again, the voice does not entirely escape our comprehension; but we know that one voice is shrill and another deep; that one is tuneful and harmonious, and another dissonant and very unmusical; and again, one voice is more powerful, and another less so. And they differ also in ten thousand other particulars, in kind, in complexion, in distance, in combined and separate tension of the tones, in the symphonies of fourths, of fifths, and of the diapason.
1:29Moreover, there are some things which we know also with respect to that articulate voice which has been allotted to man alone of all animals, as, for instance, we know that it is emitted by the mind, that it receives its articulate distinctness in the mouth, that it is by the striking of the tongue that articulate utterance is impressed upon the tones of the voice, and which renders the uttered sound not only a bare, naked, useless noise, void of all characteristic, and that it discharges the office of a herald or interpreter towards the mind which suggests it.
1:30Now then is the fourth element which exists within us, the dominant mind, comprehensible to us in the same manner as these other divisions? Certainly not; for what do we think it to be in its essence? Do we look upon it as spirit, or as blood, or, in short, as any bodily substance! But it is not a substance, but must be pronounced incorporeal. Is it then a limit, or a species, or a number, or a continued act, or a harmony, or any existing thing whatever?
1:31Is it, the very first moment that we are born, infused into us from without, or is it some warm nature in us which is cooled by the air which is diffused around us, like a piece of iron which has been heated at a forge, and then being plunged into cold water, is by that process tempered and hardened? (And perhaps it is from the cooling process (ψύξις) to which it is thus submitted that the soul (ἡ ψυχή) derives its name.) What more shall we say? When we die, is it extinguished and destroyed together with our bodies? or does it continue to live a long time? or, thirdly, is it wholly incorruptible and immortal?
1:32Again, where, in what part does this mind lie hid? Has it received any settled habitation? For some men have dedicated to it our head, as the principal citadel, around which all the outward senses have their lairs; thinking it natural that its body-guards should be stationed near it, as near the palace of a mighty king. Some again contend earnestly in favour of the position which they assign it, believing that it is enshrined like a statue in the heart.
1:33Therefore now the fourth element is incomprehensible, in the world the heaven, in comparison of the nature of the earth, of the water, and of the air; and the mind in man, in comparison of the body and the outward sense, and the speech, which is the interpreter of the mind; may it not be the case also, that for this reason the fourth year is described as holy and praiseworthy in the sacred scriptures?
1:34For among created things, the heaven is holy in the world, in accordance with which body, the imperishable and indestructible natures revolve; and in man the mind is holy, being a sort of fragment of the Deity, and especially according to the statement of Moses, who says, "God breathed into his face the breath of life, and man became a living soul."
1:35And it appears to me, that it is not without reason that both these things are called praiseworthy; for these two things, the heaven and the mind, are the things which are able to utter, with all becoming dignity, the praises, and hymns, and glory, and beatitude of the Father who created them: for man has received an especial honour beyond all other animals, namely, that of ministering to the living God. And the heaven is always singing melodies, perfecting an all-musical harmony, in accordance with the motions of all the bodies which exist therein;
1:36of which, if the sound ever reached our ears, love, which could not be restrained, and frantic desires, and furious impetuosity, which could not be put an end to or pacified, would be engendered, and would compel us to give up even what is necessary, nourishing ourselves no longer like ordinary mortals on the meat and drink, which is received by means of our throat, but on the inspired songs of music in its highest perfection, as persons about to be made immortal through the medium of their ears: and it is said that Moses was an incorporeal hearer of these melodies, when he went for forty days, and an equal number of nights, without at all touching any bread or any water.
1:37Therefore the heaven, which is the archetypal organ of music, appears to have been arranged in a most perfect manner, for no other object except that the hymns sung to the honour of the Father of the universe, might be attuned in a musical manner; and we hear that virtue, that is to say, Leah, after the birth of her fourth son, was no longer able to bring forth any more, but restrained, or perhaps I should say, was restrained, as to her generative powers; for she found, I conceive, all her generative power dry and barren, after she had brought forth Judah, that is to say, "confession," the perfect fruit:
1:38and the phrase, "Leah desisted from bearing children," differs in no respect from the statement, that the children of Isaac found no water in the fourth well." Since it appears from both these figurative expressions, that every creature thirsts for God, by whom all their births take place, and from whom nourishment is bestowed to them when they are born.
1:39Perhaps therefore some petty cavilling critics will imagine that all this statement about the digging of the wells is a superfluous piece of prolixity on the part of the lawgiver: but those who deserve a larger classification, being citizens not of some petty state but of the wide world, being men of more perfect wisdom, will know well that the real question is not about the four wells, but about the parts of the universe that the men who are gifted with sight, and are fond of contemplation exercise their powers of investigation; namely, about the earth, the water, the air, and the heaven.
1:40And examining each of these matters with the most accurately refined conception, in three of them they have found some things within the reach of their comprehension; on which account they have given these names, injustice, enmity, and latitude to what they have discovered. But in the fourth, that is to say in heaven, they have found absolutely nothing whatever, which they could comprehend; as we explained a little time ago: for the fourth is found to be a well destitute of water, and dry; and for the reason above mentioned it is called a well.
1:41We will now investigate what comes next, and inquire what Charran is, and why the man who went up from the well came to it. Charran then, as it appears to me, is a sort of metropolis of the outward senses: and it is interpreted at one time a pit dug, at another time holes; one fact being intimated by both these names;
1:42for our bodies are in a manner dug out to furnish the organs of the outward senses, and each of the organs is a sort of hole for the corresponding outward sense in which it shelters itself as in a cave: when therefore any one goes up from the well which is called the well of the oath, as if he were leaving a harbour, he immediately does of necessity come to Charran: for it is a matter of necessity that the outward senses should receive one who comes on an emigration from that most excellent country of knowledge, unbounded as it is in extent, without any guide.
1:43For our soul is very often set in motion by its own self after it has put off the whole burden of the body, and has escaped from the multitude of the outward senses; and very often too, even while it is still clothed in them. Therefore by its own simple motion it has arrived at the comprehension of those things which are appreciable only by the intellect; and by the motion of the body, it has attained to an understanding of those things which are perceptible by the outward senses;
1:44therefore, if any one is unable altogether to associate with the mind alone, he then finds for himself a second refuge, namely, the external senses; and whoever fails in attaining to a comprehension of the things which are intelligible only by the intellect is immediately drawn over to the objects of the outward senses; for the second organ is always to the outward senses, in the case of those things which are not able to make a successful one as far as the dominant mind.
1:45But it is well for man not to grow old or to spend all his time in this course either, but rather, as if they were straying in a foreign country like sojourners, to be always seeking for second migration, and for a return to their native land. Therefore Laban, knowing absolutely nothing of either species or genus, or form, or conception, or of anything else whatever which is comprehended by the intellect alone, and depending solely on what lies externally visible, and such things as come under the notice of the eyes, and the ears, and the other hundred faculties, is thought worthy of Charran for his country, which Jacob, the lover of virtue, inhabits as a foreign land for a short time, always bearing in his recollection his return homewards;
1:46therefore his mother, perseverance, that is Rebecca, says to him, "Rise up and flee to Laban, my brother, to Charran, and dwell with him certain days." Do you not perceive then that the practiser of virtue will not endure to live permanently in the country of the outward senses, but only to remain there a few days and a short time, on account of the necessities of the body to which he is bound? But a longer time and an entire life is allotted to him in the city which is appreciable only by the intellect.
1:47In reference to which fact, also, it appears to me to be that his grandfather also, by name Abraham, so called from his knowledge, would not endure to remain any great length of time in Charran, for it is said in the scriptures that "Abraham was seventy-five years old when he departed from Charran;" although his father Terah, which name being interpreted means, "the investigation of a smell," lived there till the day of his death.
1:48Therefore it is expressly stated in the sacred scriptures that "Terah died in Charran," for he was only a reconnoitrer of virtue, not a citizen. And he availed himself of smells, and not of the enjoyments of food, as he was not able as yet to fill himself with wisdom, nor indeed even to get a taste of it, but only to smell it;
1:49for as it is said that those dogs which are calculated for hunting can by exerting their faculty of smell, find out the lurking places of their game at a great distance, being by nature rendered wonderfully acute as to the outward sense of smell; so in the same manner the lover of instruction tracks out the sweet breeze which is given forth by justice, and by any other virtue, and is eager to watch those qualities from which this most admirable source of delight proceeds, and while he is unable to do so he moves his head all round in a circle, smelling out nothing else, but seeking only for that most sacred scent of excellence and food, for he does not deny that he is eager for knowledge and wisdom.
1:50Blessed therefore are they to whom it has happened to enjoy the delights of wisdom, and to feast upon its speculations and doctrines, and even of the being cheered by them still to thirst for more, feeling an insatiable and increasing desire for knowledge.
Book 1, §§51–75
1:51And those will obtain the second place who are not allured indeed to enjoy the sacred table, but who nevertheless refresh their souls with its odours; for they will be excited by the fragrances of virtue like those languid invalids who, because they are not as yet able to take solid food, nevertheless feed on the smell of such viands as the sons of the physicians prepare as a sort of remedy for their impotency.
1:52Therefore, having left the land of the Chaldaeans, Terah is said to have migrated to Charran; bringing with him his son Abraham and the rest of his household who agreed with him in opinion, not in order that we might read in the account of the historical chronicles that some men had become emigrants, leaving their native country and becoming inhabitants of a foreign land as if it were their own country, but in order that a lesson of the greatest importance to life and full of wisdom, and adapted to man alone, might not be neglected.
1:53And what is the lesson? The Chaldaeans are great astronomers, and the inhabitants of Charran occupy themselves with the topics relating to the external senses. Therefore the sacred account says to the investigator of the things of nature, why are you inquiring about the sun, and asking whether he is a foot broad, whether he is greater than the whole earth put together, or whether he is even many times as large? And why are you investigating the causes of the light of the moon, and whether it has a borrowed light, or one which proceeds solely from itself? Why, again, do you seek to understand the nature of the rest of the stars, of their motion, of their sympathy with one another, and even with earthly things?
1:54And why, while walking upon the earth do you soar above the clouds? And why, while rooted in the solid land, do you affirm that you can reach the things in the sky? And why do you endeavour to form conjectures about matters which cannot be ascertained by conjecture? And why do you busy yourself about sublime subjects which you ought not to meddle with? And why do you extend your desire to make discoveries in mathematical science as far as the heaven? And why do you devote yourself to astronomy, and talk about nothing but high subjects? My good man, do not trouble your head about things beyond the ocean, but attend only to what is near you; and be content rather to examine yourself without flattery.
1:55How, then, will you find out what you want, even if you are successful? Go with full exercise of your intellect to Charran, that is, to the trench which is dug, into the holes and caverns of the body, and investigate the eyes, the ears, the nostrils, and the other organs of the external senses; and if you wish to be a philosopher, study philosophically that branch which is the most indispensable and at the same time the most becoming to a man, and inquire what the faculty of sight is, what hearing is, what taste, what smell, what touch is, in a word, what is external sense; then seek to understand what it is to see, and how you see; what it is to hear, and how you hear; what it is to smell, or to taste, or to touch, and how each of these operations is ordinarily effected.
1:56But is it not the very extravagance of insane folly to seek to comprehend the dwelling of the universe, before your own private dwelling is accurately known to you? But I do not as yet lay the more important and extensive injunction upon you to make yourself acquainted with your own soul and mind, of the knowledge of which you are so proud; for in reality you will never be able to comprehend it.
1:57Mount up then to heaven, and talk arrogantly about the things which exist there, before you are as yet able to comprehend, according to the words of the poet, "All the good and all the evil Which thy own abode contains;" and, bringing down that messenger of yours from heaven, and dragging him down from his search into matters existing there, become acquainted with yourself, and carefully and diligently labour to arrive at such happiness as is permitted to man.
1:58Now this disposition the Hebrews called Terah, and the Greeks Socrates; for they say also that the latter grew old in the most accurate study by which he could hope to know himself, never once directing his philosophical speculations to the subjects beyond himself. But he was really a man; but Terah is the principle itself which is proposed to every one, according to which each man should know himself, like a tree full of good branches, in order that these persons who are fond of virtue might without difficulty gather the fruit of pure morality, and thus become filled with the most delightful and saving food.
1:59Such, then, are those men who reconnoitre the quarters of wisdom for us; but those who are actually her athletes, and who practise her exercises, are more perfect. For these men think fit to learn with complete accuracy the whole question connected with the external senses, and after having done so, then to proceed to another and more important speculation, leaving all consideration of the holes of the body which they call Charran.
1:60Of the number of these men is Abraham, who attained to great progress and improvement in the comprehension of complete knowledge; for when he knew most, then he most completely renounced himself in order to attain to the accurate knowledge of him who was the truly living God. And, indeed, this is a very natural course of events; for he who completely understands himself does also very much, because of his thorough appreciation of it, renounce the universal nothingness of the creature; and he who renounces himself learns to comprehend the living God.
1:61We have now, then, explained what Charran is, and why he who left the well of the oath came thither. We must now consider the third point which comes next in order, namely, what the place is to which this man came; for it is said, "He met him in the place."
1:62Now place is considered in three ways: firstly, as a situation filled by a body; secondly, as the divine word which God himself has filled wholly and entirely with incorporeal powers; for says the scripture, "I have seen the place in which the God of Israel stood," in which alone he permitted his prophet to perform sacrifice to him, forbidding him to do so in other places. For he is ordered to go up into the place which the Lord God shall choose, and there to sacrifice burnt offerings and sacrifices for salvation, and to bring other victims also without spot.
1:63According to the third signification, God himself is called a place, from the fact of his surrounding the universe, and being surrounded himself by nothing whatever, and from the fact of his being the refuge of all persons, and since he himself is his own district, containing himself and resembling himself alone.
1:64I, indeed, am not a place, but I am in a place, and every existing being is so in a similar manner. So that which is surrounded differs from that which surrounds it; but the Deity, being surrounded by nothing, is necessarily itself its own place. And there is an evidence in support of my view of the matter in the following sacred oracle delivered with respect to Abraham: "He came unto the place of which the Lord God had told him: and having looked up with his eyes, he saw the place afar off."
1:65Tell me, now, did he who had come to the place see it afar off? Or perhaps it is but an identical expression for two different things, one of which is the divine world, and the other, God, who existed before the world.
1:66But he who was conducted by wisdom comes to the former place, having found that the main part and end of propitiation is the divine word, in which he who is fixed does not as yet attain to such a height as to penetrate to the essence of God, but sees him afar off; or, rather, I should say, he is not able even to behold him afar off, but he only discerns this fact, that God is at a distance from every creature, and that any comprehension of him is removed to a great distance from all human intellect.
1:67Perhaps, however, the historian, by this allegorical form of expression, does not here mean by his expression, "place," the Cause of all things; but the idea which he intends to convey may be something of this sort; —he came to the place, and looking up with his eyes he saw the very place to which he had come, which was a very long way from the God who may not be named nor spoken of, and who is in every way incomprehensible.
1:68These things, then, being defined as a necessary preliminary, when the practiser of virtue comes to Charran, the outward sense, he does not "meet" the place, nor that place either which is filled by a mortal body; for all those who are born of the dust, and who occupy any place whatever, and who do of necessity fill some position, partake of that; nor the third and most excellent kind of place, of which it was scarcely possible for that man to form an idea who made his abode at the well which was entitled the "well of the oath," where the self-taught race, Isaac, abides, who never abandons his faith in God and his invisible comprehension of him, but who keeps to the intermediate divine word, which affords him the best suggestions, and teaches him everything which is suitable to the times.
1:69For God, not condescending to come down to the external senses, sends his own words or angels for the sake of giving assistance to those who love virtue. But they attend like physicians to the diseases of the soul, and apply themselves to heal them, offering sacred recommendations like sacred laws, and inviting men to practise the duties inculcated by them, and, like the trainers of wrestlers, implanting in their pupils strength, and power, and irresistible vigour.
1:70Very properly, therefore, when he has arrived at the external sense, he is represented no longer as meeting God, but only the divine word, just as his grandfather Abraham, the model of wisdom, did; for the scripture tells us, "The Lord departed when he had finished conversing with Abraham, and Abraham returned to his place." From which expression it is inferred, that he also met with the sacred words from which God, the father of the universe, had previously departed, no longer displaying visions from himself but only those which proceed from his subordinate powers.
1:71And it is with exceeding beauty and propriety that it is said, not that he came to the place, but that he met the place: for to come is voluntary, but to meet is very often involuntary; so that the divine Word appearing on a sudden, supplies an unexpected joy, greater than could have been hoped, inasmuch as it is about to travel in company with the solitary soul; for Moses also "brings forward the people to a meeting with God," well knowing that he comes invisibly towards those souls who have a longing to meet with him.
1:72And he subsequently alleges a reason why he "met the place;" for, says he, "the sun was set." Not meaning the sun which appears to us, but the most brilliant and radiant light of the invisible and Almighty God. When this light shines upon the mind, the inferior beams of words (that is of angels) set. And much more are all the places perceptible by the external senses overshadowed; but when he departs in a different direction, then they all rise and shine.
1:73And do not wonder if, according to the rules of allegorical description, the sun is likened to the Father and Governor of the universe; for in reality nothing is like unto God; but those things which by the vain opinion of men are thought to be so, are only two things, one invisible and the other visible; the soul being the invisible thing, and the sun the visible one.
1:74Now he has shown the similitude of the soul in another passage, where he says, "God made man, in the image of God created he him." And again, in the law enacted against homicides, he says, "Whoso sheddeth man’s blood, by man shall his blood be shed in requital for that blood, because in the image of God did I make him." But the likeness of the sun he only indicates by symbols.
1:75And it is easy otherwise by means of argument to perceive this, since God is the first light, "For the Lord is my light and my Saviour," is the language of the Psalms; and not only the light, but he is also the archetypal pattern of every other light, or rather he is more ancient and more sublime than even the archetypal model, though he is spoken of as the model; for the real model was his own most perfect word, the light, and he himself is like to no created thing.
Book 1, §§76–100
1:76Since, as the sun divides day and night, so also does Moses say that God divided the light from the darkness; for "God made a division between the light and between the darkness." And besides all this, as the sun, when he arises, discovers hidden things, so also does God, who created all things, not only bring them all to light, but he has even created what before had no existence, not being only their maker, but also their founder.
1:77And the sun is also spoken of in many passages of holy writ in a figurative manner. Once as the human mind, which men build up as a city and furnish, who are compelled to serve the creature in preference to the uncreated God, of whom it is said that, "They built strong cities for Pharaoh and Peitho," that is, for discourse; to which persuasion (τὸ πείθειν) is attributed, and Rameses, or the outward sense, by which the soul is devoured as if by moths; for the name Rameses, being interpreted, means, "the shaking of a moth;" and On, the mind, which they called Heliopolis, since the mind, like the sun, has the predominance over the whole mass of our body, and extends its powers like the beams of the sun, over everything.
1:78But he who appropriates to himself the regulation of corporeal things, by name Joseph, takes the priest and minister of the mind to be his father-in-law; for says the scripture, "he gave him Aseneth, the daughter of Peutephres, the priest of Heliopolis, for his wife."
1:79And, using symbolical language, he calls the outward sense a second sun, inasmuch as it shows all the objects of which it is able to form a judgment to the intellect, concerning which he speaks thus, "The sun rose upon him when he passed by the appearance of God." For in real truth, when we are no longer able to endure to pass all our time with the most sacred appearances, and as it were with incorporeal images, but when we turn aside in another direction, and forsake them, we use another light, that, namely, in accordance with the external sense, which in real truth, is in no respect different from darkness,
1:80which, after it has arisen, arouses as if from sleep the senses of seeing, and of hearing, and also of taste, and of touch, and of smell, and sends to sleep the intellectual qualities of prudence, and justice, and knowledge, and wisdom, which were all awake.
1:81And it is for this reason that the sacred scripture says, that no one can be pure before the evening, as the disorderly motions of the outward senses agitate and confuse the intellect. Moreover, he establishes a law for the priests also which may not be avoided, combining with it an expression of a grave opinion when it says, "He shall not eat of the holy things unless he have washed his body in water, and unless the sun has set, and he has become pure."
1:82For by these words it is very clearly shown that there is no one whatever completely pure, so as to be fit to be initiated into the holy and sacred mysteries, to whose lot it has fallen to be honoured with these glories of life which are appreciable by the external senses. But if any one rejects these glories, he is deservedly made conspicuous by the light of wisdom, by means of which he will be able to wash off the stains of vain opinion and to become pure.
1:83Do you not see that even the sun itself produces opposite effects when he is setting from those which he causes when rising? For when he rises everything upon the earth shines, and the things in heaven are hidden from our view; but, on the other hand, when he sets then the stars appear and the things on earth are overshadowed.
1:84In the same manner, also, in us, when the light of the outward senses rises like the sun, the celestial and heavenly sciences are really and truly hidden from view; but when this light is near setting, then the starlike radiance of the virtues appears, when the mind is pure, and concealed by no object of the outward senses.
1:85But according to the third signification, when he speaks of the sun, he means the divine word, the model of that sun which moves about through the heaven, as has been said before, and with respect to which it is said, "The sun went forth upon the earth, and Lot entered into Segor, and the Lord rained upon Sodom and Gomorrah brimstone and fire."
1:86For the word of God, when it reaches to our earthly constitution, assists and protects those who are akin to virtue, or whose inclinations lead them to virtue; so that it provides them with a complete refuge and salvation, but upon their enemies it sends irremediable overthrow and destruction.
1:87And in the fourth signification, what is meant by the sun is the God and ruler of the universe himself, as I have said already, by means of whom such offences as are irremediable, and which appear to be overshadowed and concealed, are revealed; for as all things are possible, so, likewise, all things are known to God.
1:88In reference to which faculty of his it is that he drags those persons who are living dissolutely as regards their souls, and who are in a debauched and intemperate manner, cohabiting with the daughters of the mind the outward senses, as prostitutes and harlots, to the light of the sun, in order to display their true characters;
1:89for the scripture says, "And the people abode in Shittim;" now the meaning of the name Shittim is, "the thorns of the passions" which sting and wound the soul. "And the people was polluted, and began to commit whoredom with the daughters of Moab," and these who are called daughters are the outward senses, for the name Moab is interpreted, "of a father;" and the scripture adds, "Take all the chiefs of the people, and make an example of them unto the Lord in the face of the sun, and the anger of the Lord shall be turned from Israel."
1:90For he not only desires that the wicked deeds which are hidden shall be made manifest, and therefore turns upon them the beams of the sun, but he also by this symbolical language calls the father of the universe the sun, that being by whom all things are seen beforehand, and even all those things which are invisibly concealed in the recesses of the mind; and when they are made manifest, then he promises that he who is the only merciful being, will become merciful to the people.
1:91Why so? Because, even if the mind, fancying that though it does wrong it can escape the notice of the Deity as not being able to see everything, should sin secretly and in dark places, and should after that, either by reason of its own notions or through the suggestions of some one else, conceive that it is impossible that anything should be otherwise than clear to God, and should disclose itself and all its actions, and should bring them forward, as it were, out of the light of the sun, and display them to the governor of the universe, saying, that it repents of the perverse conduct which it formerly exhibited when under the influence of foolish opinion (for that nothing is indistinct before God, but all things are known and clear to him, not merely such as have been done, but even such are merely hoped or designed, by reason of the boundless character of his wisdom), it then is purified and benefited, and it propitiates the chastiser who was ready to punish it, namely, conscience, who was previously filled with just anger towards it, and who now admits repentance as the younger brother of perfect innocence and freedom from sin.
1:92Moreover, it appears that Moses has in other passages also taken the sun as a symbol of the great Cause of all things, of which I see an instance in the law which is enacted with respect to those who borrow on pledges: let us recite the law, "If thou takest as a pledge the garment of thy neighbour, thou shalt give it back before the setting of the sun: for it is his covering, it is the only covering of his nakedness, in which he lies down. If he cries unto me I will hearken unto him, for I am merciful."
1:93Is it not natural that those who fancy that the lawgiver displays such earnestness about a garment should, if they do not reproach him, at least make a suggestion, saying, "What are ye saying, my good men? Do ye affirm that the Creator and ruler of the world calls himself merciful with respect to so trivial a matter, as that of a garment not being restored to the borrower by the lender?"
1:94These are the opinions and notions of men who have never had the least conception or comprehension of the virtue of the almighty God, and who, contrary to all human and divine law, impart the triviality of human affairs to the uncreate and immortal nature, which is full of happiness, and blessedness, and perfection;
1:95for in what respect do those lenders act unreasonably, who retain in their own hands the pledges which are deposited with them as security, until they receive back their own which they have lent? The debtors are poor, some one will perhaps say, and it is right to pity them: would it not then have been reasonable and better to enact a law in accordance with which a contribution should be made to assist their necessities, rather than allow them to appear as debtors, or else one which should forbid the lending on pledges at all? But the law which has permitted the lending on pledges, cannot fairly be indignant against those who will not give up the pledges which they have received before the proper time, as if they were acting unjustly.
1:96But if any one having come, so to say, to the very farthest limits of poverty, and, being clothed in rags, loads himself with new debts, neglecting the pity which he receives from the bystanders, which is freely bestowed, upon those who fall into such misfortunes, in their own houses, and in the temples, and in the market-place, and everywhere;
1:97such a one brings and offers to his creditor, the only covering which he had for his shame, with which he has been wont to cover the secret parts of his nature, as a pledge for something. For what, I pray? Is it for some other and better garment? For no one is unprovided with necessary food as long as the springs of the rivers bubble up, and the torrents flow abundantly, and the earth gives forth its annual fruits.
1:98Again, is any creditor so covetous of riches, or so very cruel, or so perverse, as not to be willing to contribute a tetradrachm, or even less, to one in distress? Or is any one so stingy as to be willing to lend it, but to refuse to give it? or as to take the only garment that the poor man has as a pledge? which indeed under another name may fairly be called running away with a man’s clothes; for men who do this are accustomed to put on other peoples’ clothes, and steal them, and to leave the proper owners naked.
1:99And why has the law provided so carefully that the debtor may not be without his clothes by night, and that he may not lie down to sleep without them, but has not paid the same attention to the fact of his being indecorously naked by day? Are not all things concealed by night and darkness, so as to cause less shame, or rather none at all at that time, but are they not disclosed by day and by light, so as then to compel persons to blush more freely?
1:100And why does the law not use the expression "to give," but "to restore?" For restoration takes place with respect to the property of other persons, but pledges belong rather to those who have lent on them than to those who have borrowed on them. Moreover, do you not perceive that the law has not enjoined the debtor, who has received back his garment that it may serve as bed-clothes, to bring it back again to his creditor at the return of daylight?
Book 1, §§101–125
1:101And, indeed, if the exact propriety of the language be considered, even the most stupid person may see that there is something additional meant beyond what is formally expressed. For the injunction rather resembles a maxim than a recommendation. For, if a person had been giving a recommendation, he would have said: "Give back to your debtor, at the approach of evening, the garment which has been pledged to you, if it be the only garment that he is possessed of, that he may have something with which to cover himself at night." But one who was laying down a maxim would speak thus; as indeed the law does here, "For it is his garment, the only covering of his nakedness, in which he will lie down to sleep."
1:102These things then, and other things of the same kind, may be urged in reply to those assertors of the literal sense of a passage; and who superciliously reject all other explanations. We will now, in accordance with the usual laws of allegorical speaking, say what is becoming with respect to these subjects. We say, therefore, that a garment is here spoken of symbolically, to signify speech; for clothes keep off the injuries which are wont to visit the body, from cold and heat, and they also conceal the unmentionable parts of nature, and moreover, a cloak is a fitting garment for the body.
1:103In much the same manner, speech has been given to man by God, as the most excellent of gifts; for in the first place, it is a defensive weapon against those who would attack him with innovations. For as nature has fortified all other animals with their own appropriate and peculiar means of defence, by which they are able to repel those who attempt to injure them, so also has it bestowed upon man that greatest defence and most impregnable protection of speech, with which, as with a panoply, every one who is completely clothed, will have a domestic and most appropriate bodyguard; and employing it as a champion, will be able to ward off all the injuries which can be brought against him by his enemies.
1:104In the second place, it is a most necessary defence against shame and reproach; for speech is very well calculated to conceal and obscure the faults of men. In the third place, it conduces to the whole ornament of life: for this is the thing which improves every one, and which conducts every one to what is best;
1:105for there are many disgraceful and mischievous men, who take conversation as a pledge, and deprive its proper owners of it, and utterly cut off what they ought to seek to increase; like men who ravage the lands of their enemies, and who attempt to destroy their corn and all the rest of their crops, which, if it were left unhurt, would be a great advantage to those who would use it.
1:106For some men carry on an irreconcilable and never-ending war against rational nature, and utterly extirpate its every shoot and beginning, and destroy all its first appearances of propagation, and render it, as one may say, utterly unproductive and barren of all good practises.
1:107For sometimes, when it is borne onwards towards sacred instruction with irresistible impetuosity, and when it is smitten with a love of the speculations of true philosophy, they—out of jealousy and envy, fearing lest, when it has derived strength from its noble aspirations and has been elevated to a splendid height, it may overwhelm all their petty cavils and plausible devices against the truth, like an irresistible torrent—turn its energy in another direction by their own evil artifices, guiding it in another channel to vulgar and illiberal acts: and very often they seek to blunt it or to hedge it in, and in this way leave the nobility of its nature uncultivated, just as at times wicked guardians of orphan children have rendered a deep-soiled and fertile land barren. And these most pitiless of all men have not been restrained by shame from stripping the man of his only garment, namely, speech; "For," says the scripture, "it is his only covering."—What is a man’s only covering, except speech?
1:108For, as neighing is the peculiar attribute of a horse, and barking of a dog, and lowing of an ox, and roaring of a lion, so also is speaking, and speech itself, the peculiar property of man: for this is what man has received above all other animals as his peculiar gift, as a protection, and bulwark, and panoply, and wall of defence; he being, of all living creatures, the most beloved by God.
1:109On which account the scripture adds, "This is the only covering of his nakedness;" for what can so becomingly overshadow and conceal the reproaches and disgraces of life, as speech? For ignorance is a disgrace akin to irrational nature, but education is the brother of speech, and an ornament properly belonging to man.
1:110In what then will a man lie down to rest? That is to say, in what will a man find tranquillity and a respite from his labours, except in speech? For speech is a relief to our most miserable and afflicted race? As therefore, when men have been overwhelmed by grief, or by fear, or by any other evil, tranquillity, and constancy, and the kindness of friends have often restored them; so it happens, not often, but invariably, that speech, the only real averter of evil, wards off that most heavy burden which the necessities of that body in the which we are bound up, and the unforeseen accidents of external circumstances which attack us, impose upon us;
1:111for speech is a friend, and an acquaintance, and a kinsman, and a companion bound up within us; I should rather say, fitted close and united to us by some indissoluble and invisible cement of nature. On this account it is, that it forewarns us of what will be expedient for us, and when any unexpected event befalls us it comes forward of its own accord to assist us; not only bringing advantage of one kind only, such as that which he who is an adviser without acting, or an agent who can give no advice, may supply, but of both kinds:
1:112for he does not display a half-complete power, but one which is perfect in every part. Inasmuch, as even if it were to fail in his endeavour, and in any conceptions which may have been formed, or efforts which may have been made, it still can have recourse to the third species of assistance, namely, consolation. For speech is, as it were, a medicine for the wounds of the soul, and a saving remedy for its passions, which, "even before the setting of the sun," the lawgiver says one must restore: that is to say, before the all-brilliant beams of the almighty and all-glorious God are obscured, which he, out of pity for our race, sends down from heaven upon the human mind.
1:113For while that most God-like light abides in the soul, we shall be able to give back the speech, which was deposited as a pledge, as if it were a garment, in order that he who has received this peculiar possession of man, may by its means conceal the discreditable circumstances of life, and reap the benefit of the divine gift, and indulge in a respite combined with tranquillity, in consequence of the presence of so useful an adviser and defender, who will never leave the ranks in which he has been stationed.
1:114Moreover, while God pours upon you the light of his beams, do you hasten in the light of day to restore his pledge to the Lord; for when the sun has set, then you, like the whole land of Egypt, will have an everlasting darkness which may be felt, and being stricken with blindness and ignorance, you will be deprived of all those things of which you thought that you had certain possession, by that sharp-sighted Israel, whose pledges you hold, having made one who was by nature exempt from slavery a slave to necessity.
1:115We have discussed this subject at this length with no other object except that of teaching that the mind, which is inclined to practise virtue, having irregular motions towards prolificness and sterility, and as one may say, being in a manner always ascending and descending, when it becomes prolific and is elevated to a height is illuminated with the archetypal and incorporeal beams of the rational spring of the all-perfecting sun; but when it descends and becomes unproductive, then it is again illuminated by those images of those beams, the immortal words which it is customary to call angels.
1:116On which account we now read in the scripture, "He met the place; for the sun was set." For when those beams of God desert the soul by means of which the clearest comprehensions of affairs are engendered in it, then arises that second and weaker light of words, and the light of things is no longer seen, just as is the case in this lower world. For the moon, which occupies the second rank next to the sun, when that body has set, pours forth a somewhat weaker light than his upon the earth;
1:117and to meet a place or a word is a most sufficient gift for those who cannot discern that God is superior to every place or word; because they have not a soul wholly destitute of light, but because, since that most unmixed and brilliant light has set, they have been favoured with one which is alloyed. "For the children of Israel had light in all their dwellings," says the sacred historian in the book of the Exodus, so that night and darkness were continually banished from them, though it is in night and darkness that those men live who have lost the eyes of the soul rather than those of the body, having no experience of the beams of virtue.
1:118But some persons—supposing that what is meant here by the figurative expression of the sun is the external sense and the mind, which are looked upon as the things which have the power of judging; and that what is meant by place is the divine word—understand the allegory in this manner: the practiser of virtue met with the divine word, after the mortal and human light had set;
1:119for as long as the mind thinks that it attains to a firm comprehension of the objects of intellect, and the outward sense conceives that it has a similar understanding of its appropriate objects, and that it dwells amid sublime objects, the divine word stands aloof at a distance; but when each of these comes to confess its own weakness, and sets in a manner while availing itself of concealment, then immediately the right reason of a soul well-practised in virtue comes in a welcome manner to their assistance, when they have begun to despair of their own strength, and await the aid which is invisibly coming to them from without.
1:120Therefore, the scripture says in the next verses, "That he took one of the stones of the place and placed it at his head, and slept in that place." Any one may wonder not only at the interior and mystical doctrine contained in these words, but also at the distinct assertion, which gives us a lesson in labour and endurance:
1:121for the historian does not think it becoming, that the man who is devoted to the study of virtue should adopt a luxurious life, and live softly, imitating the pursuits and rivalries of those who are called indeed happy, but who are in reality full of all unhappiness; whose entire life is a sleep and a dream, according to the holy lawgiver.
1:122These men, after they have during the whole day been doing all sorts of injustice to others, in courts of justice, and council halls, and theatres, and everywhere, then return home, like miserable men as they are, to overturn their own house. I mean not that house which comes under the class of buildings, but that which is akin to the soul, I mean the body. Introducing immoderate and incessant food, and irrigating it with an abundance of pure wine, until the reason is overwhelmed, and disappears; and the passions which have their seat beneath the belly, the offspring of satiety, rise up, being carried away by unrestrained frenzy, and falling upon, and vehemently attacking all that they meet with, are only at last appeased after they have worked off their excessive violence of excitement.
1:123But by night, when it is time to turn towards rest, having prepared costly couches and the most exquisite of beds, they lie down in the most exceeding softness, imitating the luxury of women, whom nature has permitted to indulge in a more relaxed system of life, inasmuch as their maker, the Creator of the universe, has made their bodies of a more delicate stamp.
1:124Now no such person as this is a pupil of the sacred word, but those only are the disciples of that who are real genuine men, lovers of temperance, and orderliness, and modesty, men who have laid down continence, and frugality, and fortitude, as a kind of base and foundation for the whole of life; and safe stations for the soul, in which it may anchor without danger and without changeableness: for being superior to money, and pleasure, and glory, they look down upon meats and drinks, and everything of that sort, beyond what is necessary to ward off hunger: being thoroughly ready to undergo hunger, and thirst, and heat, and cold, and all other things, however hard they may be to be borne, for the sake of the acquisition of virtue. And being admirers of whatever is most easily provided, so as not to be ashamed of ever such cheap or shabby clothes, thinking rather, on the other hand, that sumptuous apparel is a reproach and great scandal to life.
1:125To these men, the soft earth is their most costly couch; their bed is bushes, and grass, and herbage, and a thick layer of leaves; and the pillows for their head are a few stones, or any little mounds which happen to rise a little above the surface of the plain. Such a life as this, is, by luxurious men, denominated a life of hardship, but by those who live for virtue, it is called most delightful; for it is well adapted, not for those who are called men, but for those who really are such.
Book 1, §§126–150
1:126Do you not see, that even now, also, the sacred historian represents the practiser of honourable pursuits, who abounds in all royal materials and appointments, as sleeping on the ground, and using a stone for his pillow; and a little further on, he speaks of him as asking in his prayers for bread and a cloak, the necessary wealth of nature? like one who has at all times held in contempt, the man who dwells among vain opinions, and who is inclined to revile all those who are disposed to admire him; this man is the archetypal pattern of the soul which is devoted to the practise of virtue, and an enemy of every effeminate person.
1:127Hitherto I have been uttering the praises of the man devoted to labour and to virtue, as it occurred to me naturally; but now we must examine what is symbolically signified under the expressions made use of. Now it is well that we should know, that the divine place and the sacred region are full of incorporeal intelligences; and these intelligences are immortal souls.
1:128Taking then one of these intelligences, and selecting one of them according as it appears to be the most excellent, this lover of virtue, of whom we are speaking, applies it to our own mind, to it as to the head of a united body; for, indeed, the mind is in a manner the head of the soul; and he does this, using the pretext indeed as if he were going to sleep, but, in reality, as being about to rest upon the word of God, and to place the whole of his life as the lightest possible burden upon it;
1:129and it listens to him gladly, and receives the labourer in the paths of virtue at first, as if he were going to become a disciple; then when he has shown his approbation of the dexterity of his nature, he gives him his hand, like a gymnastic trainer, and invites him to the gymnasia, and standing firmly, compels him to wrestle with him, until he has rendered his strength so great as to be irresistible, changing his ears by the divine influences into eyes, and calling this newly-modelled disposition Israel, that is, the man who sees.
1:130Then also he crowns him with the garland of victory. But this garland has a singular and foreign, and, perhaps, not altogether a well-omened name, for it is called by the president of the games torpor, for it is said, that the breadth became torpid of all the rewards and of the proclamations of the heralds, and of all those most wonderful prizes for preeminent excellence which are had in honour;
1:131for the soul which has received a share of irresistible power, and which has been made perfect in the contests of virtue, and which has arrived at the very furthest limit of what is honourable, will never be unduly elated or puffed up by arrogance, nor stand upon tiptoes, and boast as if it were well to make vast strides with bare feet; but the breadth which was extended wide by opinion, will become torpid and contracted, and then will voluntarily succumb and yield to tameness, so as being classed in an inferior order to that of the incorporeal natures, it may carry off the victory while appearing to be defeated;
1:132for it is accounted a most honourable thing to yield the palm to those who are superior to one’s self, voluntarily rather than through compulsion; for it is incredible how greatly the second prize in this contest is superior in real dignity and importance to the first prize in the others.
1:133Such then may be said, by way of preface, to the discussion of that description of visions which are sent from God. But it is time now to turn to the subject itself, and to investigate, with accuracy, every portion of it. The scripture therefore says, "And he dreamed a dream. And behold a ladder was planted firmly on the ground, the head of which reached to heaven, and the angels of God were ascending and descending along it."
1:134By the ladder in this thing, which is called the world, is figuratively understood the air, the foundation of which is the earth, and the head is the heaven; for the large interior space, which being extended in every direction, reaches from the orb of the moon, which is described as the most remote of the order in heaven, but the nearest to us by those who contemplate sublime objects, down to the earth, which is the lowest of such bodies, is the air.
1:135This air is the abode of incorporeal souls, since it seemed good to the Creator of the universe to fill all the parts of the world with living creatures. On this account he prepared the terrestrial animals for the earth, the aquatic animals for the sea and for the rivers, and the stars for the heaven; for every one of these bodies is not merely a living animal, but is also properly described as the very purest and most universal mind extending through the universe; so that there are living creatures in that other section of the universe, the air. And if these things are not comprehensible by the outward senses, what of that? For the soul also is invisible.
1:136And yet it is probable that the air should nourish living animals even more than the land or the water. Why so? Because it is the air which has given vitality to those animals which live on the earth and in the water. For the Creator of the universe formed the air so that it should be the habit of those bodies which are immoveable, and the nature of those which are moved in an invisible manner, and the soul of such as are able to exert an impetus and visible sense of their own.
1:137Is it not then absurd that that element, by means of which the other elements have been filled with vitality, should itself be destitute of living things? Therefore let no one deprive the most excellent nature of living creatures of the most excellent of those elements which surround the earth; that is to say, of the air. For not only is it not alone deserted by all things besides, but rather, like a populous city, it is full of imperishable and immortal citizens, souls equal in number to the stars.
1:138Now of these souls some descend upon the earth with a view to being bound up in mortal bodies, those namely which are most nearly connected with the earth, and which are lovers of the body. But some soar upwards, being again distinguished according to the definitions and times which have been appointed by nature.
1:139Of these, those which are influenced by a desire for mortal life, and which have been familiarised to it, again return to it. But others, condemning the body of great folly and trifling, have pronounced it a prison and a grave, and, flying from it as from a house of correction or a tomb, have raised themselves aloft on light wings towards the aether, and have devoted their whole lives to sublime speculations.
1:140There are others, again, the purest and most excellent of all, which have received greater and more divine intellects, never by any chance desiring any earthly thing whatever, but being as it were lieutenants of the Ruler of the universe, as though they were the eyes and ears of the great king, beholding and listening to everything.
1:141Now philosophers in general are wont to call these demons, but the sacred scripture calls them angels, using a name more in accordance with nature. For indeed they do report (διαγγέλλουσι) the injunctions of the father to his children, and the necessities of the children to the father.
1:142And it is in reference to this employment of theirs that the holy scripture has represented them as ascending and descending, not because God, who knows everything before any other being, has any need of interpreters; but because it is the lot of us miserable mortals to use speech as a mediator and intercessor; because of our standing in awe of and fearing the Ruler of the universe, and the all-powerful might of his authority;
1:143having received a notion of which he once entreated one of those mediators, saying: "Do thou speak for us, and let not God speak to us, lest we die." For not only are we unable to endure his chastisements, but we cannot bear even his excessive and unmodified benefits, which he himself proffers us of his own accord, without employing the ministrations of any other beings.
1:144Very admirably therefore does Moses represent the air under the figurative symbol of a ladder, as planted solidly in the earth and reaching up to heaven. For it comes to pass that the evaporations which are given forth by the earth becoming rarefied, are dissolved into air, so that the earth is the foundation and root of the air, and that the heaven is its head.
1:145Accordingly it is said that the moon is not an unadulterated consolidation of pure aether, as each of the other stars is, but is rather a combination of the aether-like and air-like essence. For that black spot which appears in it, which some call a face, is nothing else but the air mingled with it, which is by nature black, and which extends as far as heaven.
1:146The ladder therefore in the world which is here spoken of in this symbolical manner, was something of this sort. But if we carefully investigate the soul which exists in men, the foundation of which is something corporeal, and as it were earth-like, we shall find that foundation to be the outward sense; and the head to be something heavenly, as it were the most pure mind.
1:147But all the words of God move incessantly upwards and downwards through the whole of it, dragging it upwards along with them whenever they soar aloft, and separating it from whatever is mortal, and exhibiting to it a sight of those things which alone are worthy of being beheld; but yet not casting it down when they descend. For neither is God himself, nor the word of God, worthy of blame. But they join with them in their descent, by reason of their love for mankind and compassion for our race, for the sake of being their allies and rendering them assistance, in order that by breathing in a saving inspiration they may recall to life the soul which was still being tossed about in the body as in the river.
1:148Now the God and governor of the universe does by himself and alone walk about invisibly and noiselessly in the minds of those who are purified in the highest degree. For there is extant a prophecy which was delivered to the wise man, in which it is said: "I will walk among you, and I will be your God." But the angels—the words of God—move about in the minds of those persons who are still in a process of being washed, but who have not yet completely washed off the life which defiles them, and which is polluted by the contact of their heavy bodies, making them look pure and brilliant to the eyes of virtue.
1:149But it is plain enough what vast numbers of evils are driven out, and what a multitude of wicked inhabitants is expelled in order that one good man may be introduced to dwell there. Do thou, therefore, O my soul, hasten to become the abode of God, his holy temple, to become strong from having been most weak, powerful from having been powerless, wise from having been foolish, and very reasonable from having been doting and childless.
1:150And perhaps too the practiser of virtue represents his own life as like to a ladder; for the practise of anything is naturally an anomalous thing, since at one time it soars up to a height, and at another it turns downwards in a contrary direction; and at one time has a fair voyage like a ship, and at another has but an unfavourable passage; for, as some one says, the life of those who practise virtue is full of vicissitudes: being at one time alive and waking, and at another dead or sleeping.
Book 1, §§151–175
1:151And perhaps this is no incorrect statement; for the wise have obtained the heavenly and celestial country as their habitation; having learnt to be continually mounting upwards, but the wicked have received as their share the dark recesses of hell, having from the beginning to the end of their existence practised dying, and having been from their infancy to their old age familiarised with destruction.
1:152But the practisers of virtue, for they are on the boundary between two extremities, are frequently going upwards and downwards as if on a ladder, being either drawn upwards by a more powerful fate, or else being dragged down by that which is worse; until the umpire of this contention and conflict, namely God, adjudges the victory to the more excellent class and utterly destroys the other.
1:153There is also in this dream another sort of similitude or comparison apparent, which must not be passed over in silence; the affairs of mankind are naturally compared to a ladder, on account of their irregular motion and progress:
1:154for as some one or other has said; "One day has cast one man down from on high and destroyed him, and another it has raised up, nothing that belongs to our human race being formed by nature so as to remain long in the same condition, but all such things changing with all kinds of alteration.
1:155Do not men become rulers from having been private individuals, and private individuals from having been rulers, poor from having been rich, and very rich from having been poor; glorious from being despised, and most illustrious from having been infamous?" [...] A very beautiful way of life: for it is very possible that the being whose habitation is the whole world, may dwell with you also, and take care of your house, so that it may be completely protected and free from injury for ever;
1:156and there is such a way as this in which human affairs move upwards and downwards, meeting with an unstable and variable fortune, the anomalous character of which, unerring time proves by evidence which is not indistinct but manifest and legible.
1:157But the dream also represented the archangel, namely the Lord himself, firmly planted on the ladder; for we must imagine that the living God stands above all things, like the charioteer of a chariot, or the pilot of a ship; that is, above bodies, and above souls, and above all creatures, and above the earth, and above the air, and above the heaven, and above all the powers of the outward senses, and above the invisible natures, in short, above all things whether visible or invisible; for having made the whole to depend upon himself, he governs it and all the vastness of nature.
1:158But let no one who hears that he was firmly planted thus suppose that any thing at all assists God, so as to enable him to stand firmly, but let him rather consider this fact that what is here indicated is equivalent to the assertion that the firmest position, and the bulwark, and the strength, and the steadiness of everything is the immoveable God, who stamps the character of immobility on whatever he pleases; for, in consequence of his supporting and consolidating things, those which he does combine remain firm and indestructible.
1:159Therefore he who stands upon the ladder of heaven says to him who is beholding the dream, "I am the Lord God of Abraham thy father, and the God of Isaac; be not afraid." This oracle and this vision were also the firmest support of the soul devoted to the practise of virtue, inasmuch as it taught it that the Lord and God of the universe is both these things also to his own race, being entitled both the Lord and God of all men, and of his grandfathers and ancestors, and being called by both names in order that the whole world and the man devoted to virtue might have the same inheritance; since it is also said, "The Lord himself is his inheritance."
1:160But do not fancy that it is an accidental thing here for him to be called in this place the God and Lord of Abraham, but only the God of Isaac; for this latter is the symbol of the knowledge which exists by nature, which hears itself, and teaches itself, and learns of itself; but Abraham is the symbol of that which is derived from the teaching of others; and the one again is an indigenous and native inhabitant of his country, but the other is only a settler and a foreigner;
1:161for having forsaken the language of those who indulge in sublime conversations about astronomy, a language imitating that of the Chaldaeans, foreign and barbarous, he was brought over to that which was suited to a rational being, namely, to the service of the great Cause of all things.
1:162Now this disposition stands in need of two powers to take care of it, the power that is of authority, and that of conferring benefits, in order that in accordance with the authority of the governor, it may obey the admonitions which it receives, and also that it may be greatly benefited by his beneficence. But the other disposition stands in need of the power of beneficence only; for it has not derived any improvement from the authority which admonishes it, inasmuch as it naturally claims virtue as its own, but by reason of the bounty which is showered upon it from above, it was good and perfect from the beginning;
1:163therefore God is the name of the beneficent power, and Lord is the title of the royal power. What then can any one call a more ancient and important good, than to be thought worthy to meet with unmixed and unalloyed beneficence? And what can be less valuable than to receive a mixture of authority and liberality? And it appears to me that it was because the practiser of virtue saw that he uttered that most admirable prayer that, "the Lord might be to him as God;" for he desired no longer to stand in awe of him as a governor, but to honour and love him as a benefactor.
1:164Now is it not fitting that even blind men should become sharp-sighted in their minds to these and similar things, being endowed with the power of sight by the most sacred oracles, so as to be able to contemplate the glories of nature, and not to be limited to the mere understanding of the words? But even if we voluntarily close the eye of our soul and take no care to understand such mysteries, or if we are unable to look up to them, the hierophant himself stands by and prompts us. And do not thou ever cease through weariness to anoint thy eyes until you have introduced those who are duly initiated to the secret light of the sacred scriptures, and have displayed to them the hidden things therein contained, and their reality, which is invisible to those who are uninitiated.
1:165It is becoming then for you to act thus; but as for ye, O souls, who have once tasted of divine love, as if you had even awakened from deep sleep, dissipate the mist that is before you; and hasten forward to that beautiful spectacle, putting aside slow and hesitating fear, in order to comprehend all the beautiful sounds and sights which the president of the games has prepared for your advantage.
1:166There are then a countless number of things well worthy of being displayed and demonstrated; and among them one which was mentioned a little while ago; for the oracle calls the person who was really his grandfather, the father of the practiser of virtue, and to him who was really his father, it has not given any such title; for the scripture says, "I am the Lord God of Abraham thy father," but in reality Abraham was his grandfather; and then proceeds, "And the God of Isaac," and in this case he does not add, "thy father:"
1:167is it not then worth while to examine into the cause of this difference? Undoubtedly it is; let us then in a careful manner apply ourselves to the consideration of the cause. Philosophers say that virtue exists among men, either by nature, or by practise, or by learning. On which account the sacred scriptures represent the three founders of the nation of the Israelites as wise men; not indeed originally endowed with the same kind of wisdom, but arriving rapidly at the same end.
1:168For the eldest of them, Abraham, had instruction for his guide in the road which conducted him to virtue; as we shall show in another treatise to the best of our power. And Isaac, who is the middle one of the three, had a self-taught and self-instructed nature. And Jacob, the third, arrived at this point by industry and practise, in accordance with which were his labours of wrestling and contention.
1:169Since then there are thus three different manners by which wisdom exists among men, it happens that the two extremes are the most nearly and frequently united. For the virtue which is acquired by practise, is the offspring of that which is derived from learning. But that which is implanted by nature is indeed akin to the others, for it is set below them, as the root for them all. But it has obtained its prize without any rivalry or difficulty.
1:170So that it is thus very natural for Abraham, as one who had been improved by instruction, to be called the father of Jacob, who arrived at his height of virtue by practise. By which expression is indicated not so much the relationship of one man to the other, but that the power which is fond of hearing is very ready for learning; the power which is devoted to practise being also well suited for wrestling.
1:171If, however, this practiser of virtue runs on vigorously towards the end and learns to see clearly what he previously only dreamed of in an indistinct way, being altered and re-stamped with a better character, and being called Israel, that is, "the man who sees God," instead of Jacob, that is, "the supplanter," he then is no longer set down as the son of Abraham, as his father, of him who derived wisdom from instruction, but as the son of Israel, who was born excellent by nature.
1:172These statements are not fables of my own invention, but are the oracle written on the sacred pillars. For, says the scripture: "Israel having departed, he and all that he had came to the well of the oath, and there he sacrificed a sacrifice to the God of his father Isaac." Do you not now perceive that this present assertion has reference not to the relationship between mortal men, but, as was said before, to the nature of things? For look at what is before us. At one time, Jacob is spoken of as the son of his father Abraham, and at another time he is called Israel, the son of Isaac, on account of the reason which we have thus accurately investigated.
1:173Having then said: "I am the Lord God of Abraham, the father and the God of Isaac," he adds: "Be not afraid," very consistently. For how can we any longer be afraid when we have thee, O God, as our armour and defender? Thee, the deliverer from fear and from every painful feeling? Thee, who hast also fashioned the archetypal forms of our instruction while they were still indistinct, so as to make them visible, teaching Abraham wisdom, and begetting Isaac, who was wise from his birth. For you condescended to be called the guide of the one and the father of the other, assigning to the one the rank of a pupil, and to the other that of a son.
1:174For this reason, too, God promised that he would give him the land. I mean by the land here, all-prolific virtue, on which the practiser rests from his contests and sleeps, from the fact of the life according to the outward sense being lulled asleep, and that of the soul being awakened. Receiving gladly peaceful repose there, which he did not obtain without war, and the afflictions which arise from war, not by means of bearing arms and slaying men; away with any such notion! but by overthrowing the array of vices and passions which are the adversaries of virtue.
1:175But the race of wisdom is likened to the sand of the sea, by reason of its boundless numbers, and because also the sand, like a fringe, checks the incursions of the sea; as the reasonings of instruction beat back the violence of wickedness and iniquity. And these reasonings, in accordance with the divine promises, are extended to the very extremities of the universe. And they show that he who is possessed of them is the inheritor of all the parts of the world, penetrating everywhere, to the east, and to the west, to the south, and to the north. For it is said in the scripture: "He shall be extended towards the sea, and towards the south, and towards the north, and towards the east."
Book 1, §§176–200
1:176But the wise and virtuous man is not only a blessing to himself, but he is also a common good to all men, diffusing advantages over all from his own ready store. For as the sun is the light of all those beings who have eyes, so also is the wise man light to all those who partake of a rational nature.
1:177"For in thee shall all the nations of the earth be blessed." And this oracle applies to the wise man in respect of himself, and also in respect of others. For if the mind which is in me is purified by perfect virtue, and if the tribes of that earthly part which is about me are purified at the same time, which tribes have fallen to the lot of the external senses, and of the greatest channel of all, namely the body; and if any one, either in his house, or in his city, or in his country, or in his nation, becomes a lover of wisdom, it is inevitable that that house, and that city, and that country, and that nation, must attain to a better life.
1:178For, as those spices which are set on fire fill all persons near them with their fragrance, so in the same manner do all those persons who are neighbours of and contiguous to the wise man catch some of the exhalations which reach to a distance from him, and so become improved in their characters.
1:179And it is the greatest of all advantages to a soul engaged in labours and contests, to have for its fellow traveller, God, who penetrates everywhere. "For behold," says God, "I am with thee." Of what then can we be in need while we have for our wealth Thee, who art the only true and real riches, who keepest us in the road which leads to virtue in all its different divisions? For it is not one portion only of the rational life which conducts to justice and to all other virtue, but the parts are infinite in number, from which those who desire to arrive at virtue can set out.
1:180Very admirably therefore is it said in the scripture: "I will lead thee back to this land." For it was fitting that the reason should remain with itself, and should not depart to the outward sense. And if it has departed, then the next best thing is for it to return back again.
1:181And perhaps also a doctrine bearing on the immortality of the soul is figuratively intimated by this expression. For the soul, having left the region of heaven, as was mentioned a little while before, came to the body as to a foreign country. Therefore the father who begot it promises that he will not permit it to be for ever held in bondage, but that he will have compassion on it, and will unloose its chains, and will conduct it in safety and freedom as far as the metropolis, and will not cease to assist it till the promises which he has made in words are confirmed by the truth of actions. For it is by all means the peculiar attribute of God to foretell what is to happen.
1:182And why do we say this? for his words do not differ from his actions; therefore the soul which is devoted to the practise of virtue, being set in motion, and roused up to the investigations relating to the living God, at first suspected that the living God existed in place; but after a short space it became perplexed by the difficulty of the question, and began to change its opinion.
1:183"For," says the scripture, "Jacob awoke and said, Surely the Lord is in this place, and I knew it not;" and it would have been better, I should have said; not to know it, than to fancy that God existed in any place, he who himself contains all things in a circle.
1:184Very naturally, therefore, was Jacob afraid, and said in a spirit of admiration, "how dreadful is this place." For, in truth, of all the topics or places in natural philosophy, the most formidable is that in which it is inquired where the living God is, and whether in short he is in any place at all. Since some persons affirm that everything which exists occupies some place or other, and others assign each thing a different place, either in the world or out of the world, in some space between the different bodies of the universe. Others again affirm that the uncreated God resembles no created being whatever, but that he is superior to everything, so that the very swiftest conception is outstripped by him, and confesses that it is very far inferior to the comprehension of him;
1:185wherefore it speedily cries out, This is not what I expected, because the Lord is in the place; for he surrounds everything, but in truth and reason he is not surrounded by anything. And this thing which is demonstrated and visible, this world perceptible by the outward senses, is nothing else but the house of God, the abode of one of the powers of the true God, in accordance with which he is good;
1:186and he calls this world an abode, and he has also pronounced it with great truth to be the gate of heaven. Now, what does this mean? We cannot comprehend the world which consists of various species, in that which is fashioned in accordance with the divine regulations, appreciable only by the intellect, in any other manner than by making a migration upwards from this other world perceptible by the outward senses and visible;
1:187for it is not possible either to perceive any other existing being which is incorporeal, without deriving our principles of judgment from bodies. For while they are quiet, their place is perceived, and when they are in motion we judge of their time; but the points, and the lines, and the superficies, and in short the boundaries. [...] as of a garment wrapped externally around it.
1:188According to analogy, therefore, the knowledge of the world appreciable by the intellect is attained to by means of our knowledge of that which is perceptible by the outward senses, which is as it were a gate to the other. For as men who wish to see cities enter in through the gates, so also they who wish to comprehend the invisible world are conducted in their search by the appearance of the visible one. And the world of that essence which is only open to the intellect without any visible appearance or figure whatever, and which exists only in the archetypal idea which exists in the mind, which is fashioned according to its appearance, will be brought on without any shade; all the walls, and all the gates which could impede its progress being removed, so that it is not looked at through any other medium, but by itself, putting forth a beauty which is susceptible of no change, presenting an indescribable and exquisite spectacle.
1:189But enough of this. There is another dream also which belongs to the same class, that one I mean about the spotted flock, which the person who beheld it relates after he had awoke, saying, "The angel of God spake unto me in a dream, and said, Jacob; and I said, What is it? And he said unto me, Look up with thine eyes, and see the goats and the rams mounting on the flocks, and the she-goats, some white, and spotted, and ring-straked, and speckled: for I have beheld all that Laban does unto thee. I am that God who was seen by thee in the place of God, where thou anointedst the pillar, and vowedst a vow unto me. Now therefore, rise up and depart out of this land, and go into the land of thy birth, and I will be with thee."
1:190You see here, that the divine word speaks of dreams as sent from God; including in this statement not those only which appear through the agency of the chief cause itself, but those also which are seen through the operation of his interpreters and attendant angels, who are thought by the father who created them to be worthy of a divine and blessed lot:
1:191consider, however, what comes afterwards. The sacred word enjoins some persons what they ought to do by positive command, like a king; to others it suggests what will be for their advantage, as a preceptor does to his pupils; to others again, it is like a counsellor suggesting the wisest plans; and in this way too, it is of great advantage to those who do not of themselves know what is expedient; to others it is like a friend, in a mild and persuasive manner, bringing forward many secret things which no uninitiated person may lawfully hear.
1:192For at times it asks some persons, as for instance, Adam, "Where art thou?" And any one may properly answer to such a question, "No where?" Because all human affairs never remain long in the same condition, but are moved about and changed, whether we speak of their soul or their body, or of their external circumstances; for their minds are unstable, not always having the same impressions from the same things, but such as are diametrically contrary to their former ones. The body also is unstable, as all the changes of the different ages from infancy to old age show; their external circumstances also are variable, being tossed up and down by the impetus of everagitated fortune.
1:193When, however, he comes into an assembly of friends, he does not begin to speak before he has first accosted each individual among them, and addressed him by name, so that they prick up their ears, and are quiet and attentive, listening to the oracles thus delivered, so as never to forget them or let them escape their memory: since in another passage of scripture we read, "Be silent and listen."
1:194In this manner, too, Moses is called up to the bush. For, the scripture says, "When he saw that he was turning aside to see, God called him out of the bush, and said, Moses, Moses: and he said, What is it, Lord?" And Abraham also, on the occasion of offering up his beloved and only son as a burnt-offering, when he was beginning to sacrifice him, and when he had given proof of his piety, was forbidden to destroy the self-taught race, Isaac by name, from among men;
1:195for at the beginning of his account of this transaction, Moses says that "God did tempt Abraham, and said unto him, Abraham, Abraham; and he said, Behold, here am I. And he said unto him, Take now thy beloved son Isaac, whom thou lovest, and offer him up." And when he had brought the victim to the altar, then the angel of the Lord called him out of heaven, saying, "Abraham, Abraham," and he answered, "Behold, here am I. And he said, Lay not thy hand upon the child, and do nothing to him."
1:196Also the practiser of virtue is also called one of this company dear to God, being deservedly accounted worthy of the same honour; for, says the scripture, "The angel of God said to me in my sleep, Jacob: and I answered, and said, What is it?"
1:197But after he has been called he exerts his attention, endeavouring to arrive at an accurate knowledge of the symbols which are displayed to him; and these symbols are the connection and generation of reasonings, as flocks and herds. For, says the scripture, "Jacob, looking up with his eyes, saw the goats and the rams leaping upon the she-goats and upon the sheep."
1:198Now the he-goat is the leader of the flock of goats, and the ram is the leader of the flock of sheep, and these two animals are symbols of perfect reasonings, one of which purifies and cleanses the soul of sins, and the other nourishes it and renders it full of good actions. Such then are the leaders of the flocks in us, namely, reasons; and the flocks themselves, resembling the sheep and goats whose names they bear, rush forwards and hasten with zeal and earnestness towards justice.
1:199Therefore, looking up with the eye of his mind, which up to that time had been closed, he saw the perfect and thoroughly sharpened reasons analogically resembling the goats and rams, prepared for the diminution of offences and the increase of good actions. And he beheld how they leap upon the sheep and the goats, that is on those souls which are still young and tender, and in the vigour of youth, and beautiful in the flower of their age; not pursuing irrational pleasure, but indulging in the invisible sowing of the doctrines of prudence.
1:200For this is a marriage which is blessed in its children; not uniting bodies, but adapting perfect virtues to well-disposed souls. Therefore do all ye right reasons of wisdom leap up, form connections, sow seed, and pass by no soul which you see rich and fertile, and well-disposed, and virgin; but inviting it to association and connection with you, render it perfect and pregnant; for so you will become the parents of all kinds of good things, of a male offspring, white, variegated, ring-straked, and speckled.
Book 1, §§201–225
1:201But we must now examine what power each of these offspring has. Now those which are purely white (διάλευκοι) are the most beautiful and the most conspicuous: the word διά being often prefixed in composition by way of adding force to the word, so that the words διάδηλος and διάσημον are commonly used to signify what is very conspicuous (δη̃λον) and very remarkable (ἐπίσημον);
1:202therefore the meaning here is that the first-born offspring of the soul which has received the sacred seed, is purely white; being like light in which there is no obscurity, and like the most brilliant radiance: like the unclouded beam which might proceed from the rays of the sun in fine weather at mid-day. Again, by the statement that some are variegated, what is meant is, not that the flocks are marked by such a multiform and various spottedness as to resemble the unclean leprosy, and which is an emblem of a life unsteady and tossed about in any direction by reason of the fickleness of the mind, but only that they have marks drawn in regular lines and different characters, shaped and impressed with all kinds of well approved forms, the peculiarities of which, being mingled together and combined properly, will produce a musical harmony.
1:203For some persons have looked upon the art of variegating as so random and obscure a matter, that they have referred it to weavers. But I admire not only the art itself, but the name likewise, and most especially so when I look upon the divisions of the earth and the spheres in heaven, and the differences between various plants and various animals, and that most variegated texture, I mean the world;
1:204for I am compelled to suppose, that the maker of this universal textile fabric was also the inventor of all varied and variegating science; and I look with reverence upon the inventor, and I honour the art which he invented, and I am amazed at the work which is the result, and this too, though it is but a very small portion of it which I have been able to see, but still, from the portion which has been unfolded to me, if indeed I may say that it has been unfolded, I hope to form a tolerably accurate judgment of the whole, guiding my conjectures by the light of analogy.
1:205Nevertheless I admire the lover of wisdom for having studied the same art, collecting and thinking fit to weave together many things, though different, and proceeding from different sources, into the same web; for taking the two first elements from the grammatical knowledge imparted to children, that is to say, reading and writing, and taking from the more perfect growth of knowledge the skill which is found among poets, and the comprehension of ancient history, and deriving certainty and freedom from deception from arithmetic and geometry, in which sciences there is need of proportions and calculations; and borrowing from music rhyme, and metre, and harmonies, and chromatics, and diatonics, and combined and disjoined melodies; and having derived from rhetoric invention, and language, and arrangement, and memory, and action; and from philosophy, whatever has been omitted in any of these separate branches, and all the other things of which human life consists, he has put together in one most admirably arranged work, combining great learning of one kind with great learning of another kind.
1:206Now the sacred scripture calls the maker of this compound work Besaleel, which name, being interpreted, signifies "in the shadow of God;" for he makes all the copies, and the man by name Moses makes all the models, as the principal architect; and for this reason it is, that the one only draws outlines as it were, but the other is not content with such sketches,
1:207but makes the archetypal natures themselves, and has already adorned the holy places with his variegating art; but the wise man is called the only adorner of the place of wisdom in the oracles delivered in the sacred scriptures. And the most beautiful and varied work of God, this world, has been created in this its present state of perfection by all-wise knowledge; and how can it be anything but right to receive the art of variegating as a noble effort of knowledge?
1:208the most sacred copy of which is the whole word of wisdom, which will bear about in its bosom the things of heaven and of earth, from which the practiser of virtue elaborates his notions of various things. For after the white sheep he immediately beheld the variegated animals, stamped with the impression of instruction.
1:209The third kind are the ring-straked and speckled; and what man in his senses would deny that these also are, as to their genus, variegated? but still he is not so very eager about the varieties of the members of the flocks, as about the road which leads to virtue and excellence;
1:210for the prophet intends that he who proceeds along this road shall be besprinkled with dust and water; because it is related that the earth and water being kneaded together and fashioned into shape by the Creator of man, was formed into one body, not being made by hand, but being the work of invisible nature.
1:211Therefore it is the first principle of wisdom not to forget one’s self, and always to keep before one’s eyes the materials of which one has been compounded; for in this way a man will get rid of boasting and arrogance, which of all evils is the one most hated by God; for who that ever admits into his mind the recollection that the first principles of his formation are dust and water, would ever be so puffed by vanity as to be unduly elated?
1:212On this account the prophet has thought it fit that those who are about to offer sacrifice shall be be sprinkled with the aforesaid things; thinking no one worthy to appear at a sacrifice who has not first of all learnt to know himself, and to comprehend the nothingness of mankind, and the elements of which he is composed, conjecturing from them that he himself is utterly insignificant.
1:213These three signs, the white, the variegated, and the ring-straked and speckled, are as yet imperfect in the practiser of virtue, who has not himself as yet attained to perfection. But, in the case of him who is perfect, they also appear to be perfect. And in what manner they appear so we will examine.
1:214The sacred scripture has appointed that the great High Priest, when he was about to perform the ministrations appointed by the law, should be besprinkled with water and ashes in the first place, that he might come to a remembrance of himself. For the wise Abraham also, when he went forth to converse with God, pronounced himself to be dust and ashes. In the second place, it enjoins him to put on a tunic reaching down to his feet, and the variously-embroidered thing which was called his breast-plate, an image and representation of the light-giving stars which appear in heaven.
1:215For there are, as it seems, two temples belonging to God; one being this world, in which the high priest is the divine word, his own first-born son. The other is the rational soul, the priest of which is the real true man, the copy of whom, perceptible to the senses, is he who performs his paternal vows and sacrifices, to whom it is enjoined to put on the aforesaid tunic, the representation of the universal heaven, in order that the world may join with the man in offering sacrifice, and that the man may likewise co-operate with the universe.
1:216He is now therefore shown to have these two things, the speckled and the variegated character. We will now proceed to explain the third and most perfect kind, which is denominated thoroughly white. When this same high priest enters into the innermost parts of the holy temple, he is clothed in the variegated garment, and he also assumes another linen robe, made of the very finest flax.
1:217And this is an emblem of vigour, and incorruptibility, and the most brilliant light. For such a veil is a thing very difficult to be broken, and it is made of nothing mortal, and when it is properly and carefully purified it has a most clear and brilliant appearance.
1:218And these injunctions contain this figurative meaning, that of those who in a pure and guileless spirit serve the living God, there is no one who does not at first depend upon the firmness and obstinacy of his mind, despising all human affairs, which allure men with their specious bait, and injure them, and produce weakness in them. In the next place, he aims at immortality, laughing at the blind inventions with which mortals delude themselves. And last of all, he shines with the unclouded and most brilliant light of truth, no longer desiring any of the things which belong to false opinion, which prefer darkness rather than light.
1:219The great high priest of the confession, then, may have now been sufficiently described by us, being stamped with the impressions above-mentioned, the white, the variegated, and the ring-straked and speckled. But he who is desirous of the administration of human affairs, by name Joseph, does not, as it appears, claim for himself any of the extreme characteristics, but only that variegated one which is in the middle between the others.
1:220For we read that Joseph had a "coat of many colours," not being sprinkled with the sacred purifications, by means of which he might have known that he himself was only a compound of dust and water, and not being able to touch that thoroughly white and most shining raiment, virtue. But being clothed in the much-variegated web of political affairs, with which the smallest possible portion of truth is mixed up; and also many and large portions of plausible, probable, and likely falsehoods, from which all the sophists of Egypt, and all the augurs, and ventriloquists, and sorcerers spring; men skilful in juggling, and in incantations, and in tricks of all kinds, from whose treacherous arts it is very difficult to escape.
1:221And it is on this account that Moses very naturally represents this robe as stained with blood; since the whole life of the man who is mixed up in political affairs is tainted, warring on others and being warred against, and being aimed at, and attacked, and shot at by all the unexpected chances which befall him.
1:222Examine now the man who has great influence with the people, on whom the affairs of the city depend. Do not be alarmed at those who look with admiration upon him; and you will find many diseases lurking within him, and you will see that he is entangled in many disasters, and that fortune is dragging him violently in different directions, though he bends his neck the other way, and resists, although invisibly, and in fact that fortune is seeking to overthrow and destroy him; or else the people themselves are impatient at his supremacy, or he is exposed to the attacks of some more powerful rival.
1:223And envy is a formidable enemy, and one hard to be shaken off, clinging also to everything that is called good fortune, and it is not easy to escape from it.
1:224What reason is there then for our congratulating ourselves on the administration of political affairs as if we were clothed in a garment of many colours, deceived by its external splendour, and not perceiving its ugliness, which is kept out of sight, and hidden, and full of treachery and guile?
1:225Let us then put off this flowery robe, and put on that sacred one woven with the embroideries of virtue; for thus we shall escape the snares which want of skill, and ignorance, and want of knowledge, and education lay for us, of which Laban is the companion.
Book 1, §§226–250
1:226For when the sacred word has purified us with the sprinklings prepared beforehand for purification, and when it has adorned us with the select reasonings of true philosophy, and, having led us to that man who has stood the test, has made us genuine, and conspicuous, and shining, it blames the treacherous disposition which seeks to raise itself up to invalidate what is said.
1:227For the scripture says: "I have seen what Laban does unto thee," namely, things contrary to the benefits which I conferred on you, things impure, wicked, and altogether suited to darkness. But it is not right for the man who anchors on the hope of the alliance of God to crouch and tremble, to whom God says, "I am the God who was seen by thee in the place of God."
1:228A very glorious boast for the soul, that God should think fit to appear to and to converse with it. And do not pass by what is here said, but examine it accurately, and see whether there are really two Gods. For it is said: "I am the God who was seen by thee;" not in my place, but in the place of God, as if he meant of some other God.
1:229What then ought we to say? There is one true God only: but they who are called Gods, by an abuse of language, are numerous; on which account the holy scripture on the present occasion indicates that it is the true God that is meant by the use of the article, the expression being, "I am the God (ὁ Θεός);" but when the word is used incorrectly, it is put without the article, the expression being, "He who was seen by thee in the place," not of the God (του̃ Θεου̃), but simply "of God" (Θεου̃);
1:230and what he here calls God is his most ancient word, not having any superstitious regard to the position of the names, but only proposing one end to himself, namely, to give a true account of the matter; for in other passages the sacred historian, when he considered whether there really was any name belonging to the living God, showed that he knew that there was none properly belonging to him; but that whatever appellation any one may give him, will be an abuse of terms; for the living God is not of a nature to be described, but only to be.
1:231And a proof of this may be found in the oracular answer given by God to the person who asked what name he had, "I am that I am," that the questioner might know the existence of those things which it was not possible for man to conceive not being connected with God.
1:232Accordingly, to the incorporeal souls which are occupied in his service, it is natural for him to appear as he is, conversing with them as a friend with his friends; but to those souls which are still in the body he must appear in the resemblance of the angels, though without changing his nature (for he is unchangeable), but merely implanting in those who behold him an idea of his having another form, so that they fancy that it is his image, not an imitation of him, but the very archetypal appearance itself.
1:233There is then an old story much celebrated, that the Divinity, assuming the resemblance of men of different countries, goes round the different cities of men, searching out the deeds of iniquity and lawlessness; and perhaps, though the fable is not true, it is a suitable and profitable one.
1:234But the scripture, which at all times advances its conceptions with respect to the Deity, in a more reverential and holy tone, and which likewise desires to instruct the life of the foolish, has spoken of God under the likeness of a man, though not of any particular man;
1:235attributing to him, with this view, the possession of a face, and hands, and feet, and of a mouth and voice, and also anger and passion, and moreover, defensive weapons, and goings in and goings out, and motions upwards and downwards, and in every direction, not indeed using all these expressions with strict truth, but having regard to the advantage of those who are to learn from it;
1:236for the writers knew that some men are very dull in their natures, so as to be utterly unable to form any conception whatever of God apart from a body, whom it would be impossible to admonish if they were to speak in any other style than the existing one, of representing God as coming and departing like a man; and as descending and ascending, and as using his voice, and as being angry with sinners, and being implacable in his anger; and speaking too of his darts and swords, and whatever other instruments are suitable to be employed against the wicked, as being all previously ready.
1:237For we must be content if such men can be brought to a proper state, by the fear which is suspended over them by such descriptions; and one may almost say that these are the only two paths taken, in the whole history of the law; one leading to the plain truth, owing to which we have such assertions as, "God is not as a man;" the other, that which has regard to the opinions of foolish men, in reference to whom it is said, "The Lord God shall instruct you, like as if a man instructs his son."
1:238Why then do we any longer wonder, if God at times assumes the likeness of the angels, as he sometimes assumes even that of men, for the sake of assisting those who address their entreaties to him? so that when he says, "I am the God who was seen by thee in the place of God;" we must understand this, that he on that occasion took the place of an angel, as far as appearance went, without changing his own real nature, for the advantage of him who was not, as yet, able to bear the sight of the true God;
1:239for as those who are not able to look upon the sun itself, look upon the reflected rays of the sun as the sun itself, and upon the halo around the moon as if it were the moon itself; so also do those who are unable to bear the sight of God, look upon his image, his angel word, as himself.
1:240Do you not see that encyclical instruction, that is, Hagar, says to the angel, "Art thou God who seest me?" for she was not capable of beholding the most ancient cause, inasmuch as she was by birth a native of Egypt. But now the mind begins to be improved, so as to be able to contemplate the governor of all the powers;
1:241on which account he says himself, "I am the Lord God," I whose image you formerly beheld instead of me, and whose pillar you set up, engraving on it a most sacred inscription; and the inscription indicated that I stood alone, and that I established the nature of all things, bringing disorder and irregularity into order and regularity, and supporting the universe firmly, so that it might rest on a firm and solid foundation, my own ministering word.
1:242For the pillar is the symbol of three things; of standing, of dedication, and of an inscription: now the standing and the inscription have been described, but the dedication it is necessary should be explained to all men.
1:243For heaven and the world are an offering dedicated to God who made them; and all the cosmopolitan and God-loving souls, which dedicate and consecrate themselves to him, not allowing any mortal thing to drag them in an opposite direction, are never weary of hallowing their own life, and adorning it with every kind of beauty as a meet offering for him.
1:244And he is a foolish man who does not set up a pillar to God, but who erects one to himself instead, attributing stability to the things of creation, which is tossed about in every direction, and thinking those things worthy of inscriptions and panegyrics, which are in reality full of matter for blame and accusation, and which as such had better never have been mentioned in an inscription at all, or if they had, had better have been speedily erased again.
1:245On which account the holy scripture says distinctly, "Thou shalt not set up a pillar to thyself;" for in truth there is nothing belonging to man that is stable, no, not though some persons persist even so obstinately in affirming it.
1:246But they not only think that they stand firmly, but also that they are worthy of honours and inscriptions, forgetting him who is alone worthy of honour, and who is alone firmly fixed; for while they are turning aside and wandering away from the path which leads to virtue, the outward sense leads them still more astray, that is to say, the woman who is akin to them, she also compels them to run ashore;
1:247therefore, the whole soul, like a ship, being shut in all around, is offered up as a pillar; for the sacred scriptures tell us that Lot’s wife having turned back to look behind her, became a pillar of salt,
1:248and this is said very naturally and fitly; for if any one does not look forwards at those things which are worthy of being seen and heard (and these things are the virtues and the actions done in accordance with virtue), but looks backwards at the things which are behind him, at deaf glory, and blind riches, and senseless vigour of body, and an empty elegance of mind, pursuing these objects only, and such as are akin to them, he will lie as a lifeless pillar melting away by itself; for salt is not a thing to preserve his firmness.
1:249Very admirably therefore does the practiser of virtue, having learnt by continued study that creation is a thing in its own nature moveable, but that the uncreated God is unchangeable and immoveable, erect a pillar to God, and anoint it after he has erected it; for God says, "Thou hast anointed my pillar."
1:250But do not fancy that that stone was anointed with oil, but understand rather that that opinion, that God is the only being who stands firmly, was thoroughly hardened by exercise, and established in the soul by the science of wrestling, not that science by which bodies are made fat, but that by which the mind acquires strength and irresistible vigour;
Book 1, §§251–256; Book 2, §§1–19
1:251for the man who is eager in the pursuit of good studies and virtuous objects is fond of labours, and fond of exercises; so that very naturally, having worked out the science of training which is the sister of the art of medicine, he anoints and brings to perfection all the reasonings of virtue and piety, and dedicates them, as a most beautiful and lasting offering to God.
1:252For this reason, after mentioning the dedication of the pillar, God adds that, "Thou vowedst a vow to me." Now a vow also is, to speak properly, a dedication, since he who makes a vow is said to offer up, as a gift to God, not only his own possessions, but himself likewise, who is the owner of them;
1:253for says the scripture, "the man is holy who nourishes the locks of the hair of his head; who has vowed a vow." But if he is holy he is undoubtedly an offering to God, no longer meddling with anything unholy or profane;
1:254and there is an evidence in favour of my argument, in the conduct of the prophetess, and mother of a prophet, Hannah, whose name being translated, signifies grace; for she says that she gives her son, "Samuel, as a gift to the Holy One," not dedicating him more as a human being, than as a disposition full of inspiration, and possessed by a divinely sent impulse; and the name Samuel being interpreted means, "appointed to God."
1:255Why then, O my soul, do you any longer waste yourself in vain speculations and labours? and why do you not go as a pupil to the practiser of virtue, taking up arms against the passions, and against vain opinion, to learn from him the way to wrestle with them? For as soon as you have learnt this art, you will become the leader of a flock, not of one which is destitute of marks, and of reason, and of docility, but of one which is well approved, and rational, and beautiful,
1:256of which, if you become the leader, you will pity the miserable race of mankind, and will not cease to reverence the Deity; and you will never be weary of blessing God, and moreover you will engrave hymns suited to your sacred subject upon pillars, that you may not only speak fluently, but may also sing musically the virtues of the living God; for by these means you will be able to return to your father’s house, being delivered from a long and profitless wandering in a foreign land.
2:1In describing the third species of dreams which are sent from God, we very naturally call on Moses as an ally, in order that as he learnt, having previously been ignorant, so he may instruct us who are also ignorant, concerning these signs, illustrating each separate one of them. Now this third species of dreams exists, whenever in sleep the mind being set in motion by itself, and agitating itself, is filled with frenzy and inspiration, so as to predict future events by a certain prophetic power.
2:2For the first kind of dreams which we mentioned, was that which proceeded from God as the author of its motion, and, as some invisible manner prompted us what was indistinct to us, but well known to himself. The second kind was when our own intellect was set in motion simultaneously with the soul of the universe, and became filled with divine madness, by means of which it is allowed to prognosticate events which are about to happen;
2:3and for this reason the interpreter of the sacred will very plainly and clearly speaks of dreams, indicating by this expression the visions which appear according to the first species, as if God, by means of dreams, gave suggestions which were equivalent to distinct and precise oracles. Of the visions according to the second species he speaks neither very clearly nor very obscurely; an instance of which is afforded by the vision which was exhibited of the ladder reaching up to heaven; for this vision was an enigmatical one; nevertheless, the meaning was not hidden from those who were able to see with any great acuteness.
2:4But these visions which are afforded according to the third species of dreams, being less clear than the two former kinds by reason of their having an enigmatical meaning deeply seated and fully coloured, require the science of an interpreter of dreams. At all events all the dreams of this class, which are recorded by the lawgiver, are interpreted by men who are skilled in the aforesaid art.
2:5Whose dreams then am I here alluding to? Surely every one must see to those of Joseph, and of Pharaoh king of Egypt, and to those which the chief baker and the chief butler saw themselves;
2:6and it may be well at all times to begin our instruction with the first instances. Now the first dreams are those which Joseph beheld, receiving two visions from the two parts of the world, heaven and earth. From the earth the dream about the harvest; and that is as follows, "I thought that we were all binding sheaves in the middle of the field; and my sheaf stood up."
2:7And the other relates to the circle of the zodiac, and is, "They worshipped me as the sun and the moon and the eleven stars." And the interpretation of the former one, which was delivered with great violence of reproof, is as follows, "Shall you be a king and reign over us? or shall you be a lord and lord it over us?" The interpretation of the second is again full of just indignation, "Shall I, and thy mother, and thy brethren come and fall down upon the ground and worship thee?"
2:8Let these things be laid down first by way of foundation; and on this foundation let us raise up the rest of the building, following the rules of that wise architect, allegory, and accurately investigating each particular of the dreams; but first we must mention what it is requisite should be attended to before the dreams. Some persons have extended the nature of good over many things, and others have attributed it to the most excellent Being alone; some again have mixed it with other things, while others have spoken of it as unalloyed.
2:9Those then who have called only what is honourable good, have preserved this nature free from alloy, and have attributed it only to what is most excellent, namely to the reason that is in us; but those who have mixed it have combined it with three things, the soul, the body, and external circumstances. And they who act thus are persons of a somewhat effeminate and luxurious way of life, being bred up the greater part of their time, from their earliest infancy, in the women’s apartments and among the effeminate race which is found in the women’s apartments. But those who argue differently are men inclined to a harder regimen, being bred up from their boyhood among men, and being themselves men in their minds, embracing what is right in preference to what is pleasant, and devoting themselves to nourishment fit for athletes for the sake of strength and vigour, not of pleasure.
2:10Moses moreover represents two persons as leaders of these two companies. The leader of the noble and good company is the self-taught and self-instructed Isaac; for he records that he was weaned, not choosing to avail himself at all of tender, and milk-like, and childish, and infantine food, but only of such as was vigorous and perfect, inasmuch as he was formed by nature, from his very infancy, for acts of virtue, and was always in the prime and vigour of youth and energy. But the leader of the company, which yields and which is inclined to softer measures, is Joseph;
2:11for he does not indeed neglect the virtues of the soul, but he likewise shows anxiety about the stability and permanence of the body, and also desires an abundance of worldly treasures; and it is in strict accordance with natural truth, that he is represented as drawn in different directions, since he proposes to himself many different objects in life; and being attracted by each of them, he is kept in a state of commotion and agitation, without being able to stand firm.
2:12And his case is not like that of cities, which having made a truce enjoy peace, and yet after a time are again attacked, so as to gain the victory and to be defeated alternately; for at times a great influx of riches and glory coming upon them, subdues all their cares for the body and the soul, but afterwards, being repelled by both these things, they are conquered by the adversary;
2:13and in the same manner all the pleasures of the body coming upon the soul in a compact array overwhelm and efface all the objects of the intellect one after the other; and then, after a short time, wisdom, changing its course and blowing in the opposite direction with a fresh and violent breeze, causes the stream of the pleasures to slacken, and altogether moderates all the eagerness, and impetuosity, and rivalry of the external senses.
2:14Such a circle then of never-ending war revolves around the soul, subject as it is to so many changes; for when one enemy has been destroyed, then immediately there springs up another more powerful, after the fashion of the many-headed hydra; for they say, that in the case of this monster, instead of the head which was cut off another sprung up, by which statement they mean to intimate the multiform, and prolific, and almost invincible character of undying wickedness.
2:15Do not, therefore, answer [...] Joseph [...] but know that he is the image of multiform and mixed knowledge. For there appears in him a rational species of continence, which is of the masculine kind, being fashioned in accordance with his father Jacob;
2:16and also that kind which is devoid of reason is likewise visible, that of the outward sense I mean, being made in the likeness of his maternal race, according to Rachel. There appears in him also the seed of bodily pleasure, , which his association with the chief butlers, and chief bakers, and chief cooks has stamped upon him. There is, also visible the seed of vain opinion, on which he mounts as on a chariot by reason of his levity, being puffed up, and elated, and raising himself to a height to the destruction of equality.
2:17Now the character of Joseph is sketched out by the foregoing outlines. But each of his dreams must be investigated with accuracy; and first of all we must examine the one about the sheaves. "I thought," says he, "that we were all binding sheaves." The expression, "I thought," is clearly that of a person who is not certain, but who is hesitating and supposing with some amount of indistinctness, not of one who sees positively and clearly;
2:18for it is very natural for persons just awakening out of a deep sleep, and still dozing as it were, to say, "I thought;" but not so for people who are thoroughly awake, and who can see distinctly.
2:19And the practiser of virtue, Jacob, does not say, "I thought," but his language is, "Behold, a ladder firmly set, the head of which reached up to heaven." And again he says, when "the sheep conceived I saw them with my eyes in my sleep, and behold the he-goats and the rams leapt upon the ewes and upon the she-goats, white, and variegated, and ring-straked, and speckled."
Book 2, §§20–44
2:20For it happens of necessity that the sleeping conceptions also of those who think what is honourable eligible for its own sake are more distinct and more pure, just as their waking actions are also more deserving of approbation.
2:21But when I hear Jacob relating his dream I marvel at his having fancied that he was binding up the sheaves, and not reaping the corn; for the one is the task of the lower classes and of servants, but the other is the occupation of the employers, and of men more skilled in agriculture.
2:22For to be able to distinguish what is necessary from what is mischievous, and what is nutritious from what is not so, and what is genuine from what is spurious, and useful fruit from a worthless root, not only in reference to those things which the land bears, but also in those which the intellect bears, is the work of most perfect virtue.
2:23Accordingly the holy scripture represents those who see, that is the sons of Israel, as reaping, and what is a most extraordinary thing, as reaping not barley or wheat, but the harvest itself; accordingly the language of Moses is, "When you reap your harvest, you shall not wholly reap the corners of your harvest."
2:24For he means here that the virtuous man is not merely the judge of things which differ from one another, and that he does not only distinguish the things from which some produce is derived from the produce itself; but that he is able also to distinguish while reaping the harvest, to remove this opinion of his ability to distinguish, and to eradicate a man’s own opinion of himself; because he is firmly persuaded, and believes Moses when he affirms that "judgment belongs to God alone," with whom are the comparisons and distinctions between all things; to whom it is well for a man to confess that he is inferior, a confession more glorious than the most renowned victory.
2:25Now the reaping a harvest is like cutting a second time what has been cut already; which when some persons fond of novelty applied themselves to they found a circumcision of circumcision, and a purification of purification; that is to say, they found that the purification of the soul was itself purified, attributing the power of making bright to God, and never fancying that they themselves were competent, without the assistance of the divine wisdom, to wash and cleanse a life which is full of stains.
2:26Akin to this is the double cave, which is a symbol of the twofold and excellent recollections (the one existing in reference to the creature, and the other to the Creator), in which the virtuous man is bred up, contemplating the things which are in the world, and being also fond of inquiring about the father who made them;
2:27and it is owing to these twofold recollections, in my opinion, that the double symphony in music, that of the double diapason, was invented.
2:28For it was necessary that the work and the creator should be made happy in two most perfect melodies, and not both in the same one. For since the excellencies which were to be celebrated by them differed from one another, it followed of necessity that the melodies and symphonies should likewise differ from one another. The combined symphony being assigned to the world, which is a compound creation, composed of many different parts; and the disjoined melody being appropriated to him who, as to his essence, is separated from every creature, namely, to God.
2:29Moreover, the interpreter of the sacred will again enunciates an opinion friendly to virtue, saying that it is not proper "to thoroughly reap every corner of the harvest field;" remembering the original proposition, according to which he agreed that "the tribute belonged to the Lord," to whom the authority and the conformation of these things also belong;
2:30but he who is uninitiated in reaping boasts, so far as to say, "I thought that I was with the others binding up the sheaves which I had reaped." And he does not consider that this is the occupation of servants and of unskilful hands, as I have said a little while ago.
2:31But this word sheaves is an allegorical expression by which affairs are really meant, such as each man takes in hand for the support of his house, in which he hopes to live and dwell for ever.
2:32There are, therefore, an infinite number of differences between sheaves, that is to say, between such affairs as support a house. There are also a countless host of differences between those who gather and take up the sheaves in their hand, so that it is impossible to mention or even to imagine them all. Still it is not out of place to describe a few of them by way of example, which he too mentioned, when he was recounting his dream.
2:33For he says to his brethren, "I thought that we were binding up sheaves." Now, of brethren he has ten, who are sons of the same father as himself, and one who is by the same mother; and the name of each individual among them is an emblem of some most necessary thing. Reuben is an emblem of natural acuteness, for he is called "the son who sees," being in so far as he is a son not perfect, but in so far as he is endowed with the faculty of sight and sees acutely, he is naturally well qualified.
2:34Simeon is an emblem of learning, for his name being interpreted means, "listening." Levi is a symbol of virtuous energies and actions, and of holy ministrations. Judas is an emblem of songs and hymns addressed to God. Issachar, of wages which are given for good works; but perhaps the works themselves are their own perfect reward. Zabulon is a symbol of light, since his name means the departure of night; and when the night departs and leaves us, then of necessity light arises.
2:35Dan is a symbol of the distinction between, and division of, different things. Gad is an emblem of the invasion of pirates, and of a counter attack made upon them. Asser is a symbol of natural wealth, for his name being interpreted, signifies "a calling blessed," since wealth is accounted a blessed possession.
2:36Napthali is a symbol of peace, for all things are opened and extended by peace, as on the other hand they are closed by war; and his name being interpreted means, "widening," or "that which is opened." Benjamin is an emblem of young and old times; for being interpreted his name means "the son of days," and both young time and old time are measured by days and nights.
2:37Accordingly, every one of them takes up in his hand what belongs to himself; and having taken it up, binds all the parts together; the man well endowed by nature taking up the parts of dexterity, and perseverance, and memory, of which good natural endowments consist; the man who has learnt well takes up the parts of listening, tranquillity, and attention; the man willing to endeavour takes up courage and a happy confidence which does not shrink from danger;
2:38the man inclined to gratitude takes up praises, panegyrics, hymns, and blessings, both in speaking and in singing; the - man who is eager for wages takes up unhesitating industry, most enduring gratitude, and care, armed with a promptitude which is not to be despised;
2:39he who pursues light rather than darkness takes up wakefulness and acuteness of sight; the man who is an admirer of the division of and distinction between things takes up well-sharpened reasons so as not to be deceived by things similar to one another as if they were identical, impartiality so as not to be led away by favour, and incorruptibility;
2:40he who, in something of a piratical fashion, lays ambuscades against those who counterplot against him, takes up deceit, cajolery, trickery, sophistry, pretence, and hypocrisy, which being in their own nature blamable, are nevertheless praised when employed against an enemy; he who studies to be rich in the riches of nature takes up temperance and frugality; he who loves peace takes up obedience to law, a good reputation, freedom from pride, and equality.
2:41It is of these things, then, that the sheaves of his brethren by the same father are composed and bound up; but the sheaf of his uterine brother is composed of days and of time, which are the causes of nothing, as if they were the causes of all things.
2:42But the dreamer and interpreter of dreams himself, for he united both characters, makes a sheaf of empty opinion as of the greatest and most brilliant of possessions and the most useful to life. For which reason it is originally by his dreams, which are things dear to night, that he is made known to the king of the bodily country, and not by any performance of conspicuous actions, which require day for their exhibition.
2:43After that, he is appointed overseer or governor of all Egypt, and is honoured with the second rank in the kingdom, and made inferior in honour only to the king. All which things are in the eye of wisdom, if that were the judge, more inglorious and more ridiculous than even defeat and dishonour.
2:44After that he puts on a golden necklace, a most illustrious halter, the circlet and wheel of interminable necessity, not the consequence and regular order of things in life, nor the connection of the affairs of nature as Thamar was; for her ornament was not a necklace, but an armlet. Moreover, he assumes a ring, a royal gift which is no gift, a pledge devoid of good faith, the very contrary gift to that which was given to the same Thamar by Judah the son of the seeing king, Israel;
Book 2, §§45–69
2:45for God gives to the soul a seal, a very beautiful gift, to show that he has invested with shape the essence of all things which was previously devoid of shape, and has stamped with a particular character that which previously had no character, and has endowed with form that which had previously no distinctive form, and having perfected the entire world, he has impressed upon it an image and appearance, namely, his own word.
2:46But Joseph also mounts the second chariot, being puffed up with elation of mind and vain arrogance. And he is regulator of the provisions, laying up and preserving the treasures for the body, and providing it with food from all quarters: and this is a very formidable fortification against the soul.
2:47Moreover, his deliberate choice of life, and the life which he admires, is testified to in no slight degree by his name; for Joseph, being interpreted, means "addition;" and vain opinion is always adding what is spurious to what is genuine, and what is the property of others to what is one’s own, and what is false to what is true, and what is superfluous to what is adequate, and luxury to what is sufficient to support existence, and pride to life.
2:48Consider now what it is which I am here desirous to prove. We are nourished by meat and drink, even though the meat be the most ordinary corn, and the drink plain water from the stream. Moreover, besides this, vain opinion has added to it an infinite number of varieties of cakes, and cheese-cakes, and sweetmeats, and costly and various mixtures of an indescribable multitude of wines, for the enjoyment of pleasure rather than for a participation in necessary food properly prepared.
2:49Again, the necessary seasonings for eating, are leeks, and vegetables, and many fruits of trees, and cheese, and other things of that sort; and if you wish to include carnivorous men, we must, besides, add fish and meat to these items.
2:50Would it not, then, have been sufficient to broil these things upon the coals, or to roast them at the fire, and then eat them at once, after the fashion of those true heroes of old times? But the epicure is eager not only for such things as these, but he takes vain opinion for his ally, and excites the gluttonous passions which are within him, and seeks out and hunts all about for confectioners and pastrycooks of high reputation in their art.
2:51And they, bringing forward the different baits for his miserable stomach, which have been invented after long consideration, and preparing all kinds of peculiar flavours, and arranging them in due order, tickle, and allure, and subdue the tongue. Then, immediately they circumvent that foundation of the outward senses, the taste, by means of which the banquet-hunter in a very short time is rendered a slave instead of a free man.
2:52For who is there who does not know that clothes were originally made as a defence against the injuries which might arise to the body from cold and heat? as the poets say somewhere:— "Taming the wind in the winter."
2:53Who, therefore, thinks of costly purple garments? Who cares about transparent and thin summer robes? Who wishes for a garment delicate as a spider’s web? Who is eager to have embroidered for him apparel flowered over with dyes and brocaded figures, by those who are skilful in sewing and weaving cunning embroidery, and are superior in their handiwork to the imitative skill of the painter? Who, I say? Who, but vain opinion?
2:54And, indeed, it is for these same reasons that we had need of houses, requiring them also for protection against the attacks of wild beasts, or of men more savage in their nature than even wild beasts. Why is it, then, that we adorn the pavements and floors with costly stones? And why do we travel over Asia, and Africa, and all Europe, and the islands, searching for pillars and capitals, and architraves, and selecting them with reference to their superior beauty?
2:55And why are we anxious for, and why do we vie with one another in specimens of Doric, and Ionic, and Corinthian sculpture, and in all the refinements which luxurious men have devised in addition to the existing customs, adorning the capitals of their pillars? And why do we furnish our chambers for men and for women with golden ornaments? Is it not all from our being influenced by vain opinion?
2:56And yet, for sound sleep, the mere ground was sufficient (since, even to the present day, the accounts tell us that the gymnosophists, among the Indians, sleep on the ground in accordance with their ancient customs); and if it were not, at all events a couch made of carefully chosen stones or plain pieces of wood, would be a sufficient bed;
2:57but now the poles of our ladders are ornamented with ivory feet, and workmen inlay our beds with costly mother-of-pearl and variegated tortoise-shell, at great expense of labour, and money, and time: and some beds are even made of solid silver or solid gold, and inlaid with precious stones, with all kinds of flowery work, and embossed golden ornaments strewed about them, as if for mere display and magnificence, and not for daily use. The contriver of all which is again the same vain opinion.
2:58Again: why need we seek for more in the way of ointment than the juice pressed out of the fruit of the olive? For that softens the limbs, and relieves the labour of the body, and produces a good condition of the flesh; and if anything has got relaxed or flabby, it binds it again, and makes it firm and solid, and it fills us with vigour and strength of muscle, no less than any other unguent.
2:59But the pleasant unguents of vain opinion, are set up in opposition to those that are merely useful, on which the perfumers work, and to which vast regions contribute, such as Syria, Babylon, the Indians, and the Scythians; in which nations the origins of all perfumes are found.
2:60Again, with respect to drinking; what more could man really have need of than the cup of nature wrought with the perfection of art? Now such a cup our own hands supply, which, if any one brings together and forms into a hollow, applying them closely to his mouth, while another pours in the liquid to be drank, he gets not only a remedy for his thirst, but also a most indescribable pleasure.
2:61Still, if one were absolutely in need of something else, would not the ivy cup of the agricultural labourer be sufficient? and why should it be requisite to have recourse to the arts of other eminent artists? And what can be the use of providing a countless multitude of gold and silver goblets, if it be not for the gratification of boastful and vain-glorious arrogance, and of vain opinion raising itself to an undue height?
2:62Again, when men wear crowns, they are not content with fragrant garlands of laurel, or ivy, or violets, or lilies, or roses, or of any tree whatever, or of any flower, neglecting all the gifts of God, which he bestows upon us at the various seasons of the year, but they put golden crowns on their heads, which are a very grievous weight, wearing them in the middle of the crowded market-place without any shame. And what can we think of such men, but that they are slaves of vain opinion, in spite of their asserting themselves not only to be free, but even to be rulers over many other persons?
2:63The day would fail me if I were to go through all the varieties of human life; and yet, why need I dwell on the subject with prolixity? For who is there who has not heard, or who has not seen, such men as these? Who is there who does not associate with, and who is not familiar with them? So that the sacred scripture has very appropriately named "addition" the enemy of simplicity and the companion of pride;
2:64for as superfluous shoots do grow on trees, which are a great injury to the genuine useful branches, and which the cultivators destroy and cut out from a prudent foreknowledge of what is necessary: so likewise the life of falsehood and arrogance often grows up by the side of the true life devoid of pride, of which, to this day, no cultivator has been found who has been able to cut away the injurious superfluous growth by the roots.
2:65Therefore the practisers of wisdom, knowing this in the first instance by the outward sense, and secondly, pursuing it by the mind, cry out loudly and say, "A wicked beast has seized and devoured Joseph."
2:66But does not that most ferocious beast, the various pride which springs up in the life of men living in irregularity and confusion, whose chief workmen are covetousness and unscrupulous cunning, devour every one who comes within his reach? Therefore grief will be added to them, even while they are alive, as though they were dead, since they have a life worthy of lamentation and mourning, since Jacob mourns for Joseph, even while he is alive.
2:67But Moses will not allow the sacred reasonings about Nadab to be bewailed; for they have not been carried off by a savage beast, but have been taken up by unextinguishable violence and imperishable light; because, having discarded all fear and hesitation, they had duly consecrated the fervent and fiery zeal, consuming the flesh, and very easily and vehemently excited towards piety, which is unconnected with creation, but is akin to God, not going up to the altar by the regular steps, for that was forbidden by law, but proceeding rapidly onwards with a favourable gale, and being conducted up even to the threshold of heaven, becoming dissolved into ethereal beams like a whole burnt-offering.
2:68Therefore, O thou soul, that art obedient to thy teacher! thou must cut off thine hand and thy power when it begins to take hold of the parts of generation; that is to say, of things created, or of human pursuits;
2:69for very often ... to cut off the hand which has laid hold of the privy parts," in the first place, because it has gladly received the pleasure which it ought rather to hate; and, secondly, because it has thought that the faculty of propagating seed was in our own power, and also, because it has attributed to the creature the power which belongs to the Creator.
Book 2, §§70–94
2:70Dost thou not see that the earthly mass, Adam, when it lays its hand upon the two trees, dies, because it has preferred the number two to the unit, and because it has admired the creature in preference to the Creator? But do thou go forth beyond the reach of the smoke and the tempest, and flee from the ridiculous pursuits of mortal life as a fearful whirlpool, and do not, as the proverb has it, touch them even with the tip of thy finger.
2:71And when thou hast girded thyself up for the sacred ministrations, having made broad thy whole hand and thy whole power, then take a firm hold of the speculations of instruction and wisdom; for the command is of this kind, "If a soul brings a gift or a sacrifice, the gift shall be of fine wheaten flour." After that the lawgiver adds: "And when he has taken a full handful of the fine wheaten flour, with the oil, and with all the frankincense, he places the memorial on the altar of sacrifice."
2:72Is not this a very beautiful and appropriate expression of Moses, to call that soul incorporeal which is about to offer sacrifice, but not to call the double mass which consists of mortality and immortality by any such name? For that which vows the vow—that which is full of gratitude—that which offers such sacrifices as are truly without spot, is one thing only, namely, the soul.
2:73What then is the offering of the incorporeal soul? What is the fine wheaten flour, a symbol of the mind purified by the suggestions of instruction, which is able to render the friend of education free from all disease, and life free from all reproach?
2:74From which the priest taking a handful with his whole hand, that is to say, with the whole grasp of his mind, is commanded to offer up the whole soul itself, full of the most unalloyed and pure doctrines, as the most excellent of sacrifices, fat and in good condition, rejoicing in divine light, and redolent of the exhalations which are given forth by justice, and by the other virtues, so as always to enjoy a most fragrant, and delicious, and happy life; for the oil and the frankincense, of which the priest takes a handful with the white wheat, contain a figurative assertion of this.
2:75It is on this account that Moses set apart an especial festival for the sheaf; however, not for every sheaf, but for that which came from the sacred land. "For when," says he, "you come into the land which I give unto you, and when you reap its harvest, you shall bring sheaves as a first fruit of your harvest to the priest."
2:76And the meaning of this injunction is, when, O mind, you come into the country of virtue, which it is fitting should be offered up to God alone, being a land good for pasture, a land of rich soil, a land which beareth fruit, and when you reap the fruit (either that afforded by the land spontaneously or that which thou hast sown), which has been brought to perfection by the God who gives perfection; carry it not home to thy house; that is to say, do not store it up, and do not attribute to thyself the cause of the crop which has arisen to thee, before thou hast offered the first fruits to the Cause of all wealth, and to him who persuaded thee to study the operations which confer riches.
2:77And it is enjoined that you shall offer the "first fruits of your own harvest;" not of the harvest of the land, in order that we may reap and gather in the harvest for ourselves; dedicating to God all good and nutritious, and beneficial fruits.
2:78But the man who is at the same time initiated in dreams and also an interpreter of dreams, is bold to say that his sheaf rose and stood upright; for in real truth, as spirited horses lift their necks high, so all who are companions of vain opinion place themselves above all things, above all cities, and laws, and national customs, and above all the circumstances which affect each individual of them.
2:79Then proceeding onwards from being demagogues to being leaders of the people, and overthrowing the things which belong to their neighbours, and setting up and establishing on a solid footing what belongs to themselves, that is to say, all such dispositions as are free and by nature impatient of slavery, they attempt to reduce these also under their power;
2:80on which account the dreamer adds, "And your sheaves turning towards my sheaf made obeisance unto it." For the lover of modesty marvels at and fears the stiffnecked, and the cautious person fears the self-willed man, and he who reverences holiness fears that which is impious both for himself and for others.
2:81And is not this reasonable? For inasmuch as the good man is a spectator, not only of human life but also of all the things which exist in the world, he knows how many things are accustomed to be caused by necessity, and chance, and opportunity, and violence, and authority; and what numbers of propositions, and what great instances of prosperity proceeding onwards with rapidity towards heaven, the same causes have shaken and overthrown;
2:82so that he will of necessity take up caution as a shield, as a protection to prevent his suffering any sudden and unexpected evil; for as I imagine what a wall is to a city, that caution is to an individual.
2:83Do not these men then talk foolishly, are they not mad, who desire to display their inexperience and freedom of speech to kings and tyrants, at times daring to speak and to do things in opposition to their will? Do they not perceive that they have not only put their necks under the yoke like brute beasts, but that they have also surrendered and betrayed their whole bodies and souls likewise, and their wives and their children, and their parents, and all the rest of the numerous kindred and community of their other relations? And it is lawful for the charioteer, and also for the passenger, with all freedom to spur, and to urge forward, and to check, and to hold back, according as he desires to arrange things, so as to make them greater or smaller.
2:84Therefore, being pricked with goads, and flogged, and mutilated, and suffering all the cruelties which can be inflicted in an inhuman and pitiless manner before death, all together, they are led away to execution and put to death.
2:85These are the rewards of unseemly freedom of speech, not of that which is accounted such by right-thinking judges, but of that license which is full of folly, and insanity of mind, and of incurable distemper. What do you mean? Does anyone, when he sees a storm at its height, and a violent gale opposing him, and a hurricane raging tempestuously, and the sea full of vast waves, when he ought to anchor his ship, does anyone, I say, at such a moment weigh anchor and put to sea?
2:86What pilot, or what captain of a ship, was ever so drunk and intoxicated, as, while all the dangers which I have just enumerated were threatening him, to be willing to set sail, lest, if his vessel became water-logged by the sea breaking over it from above, it might be swallowed up with all its crew? For, if he had been inclined to meet with a voyage free from danger, it was in his power to wait for calm weather and a smooth and favourable breeze.
2:87What would one say, suppose anyone were to see a bear or a lion coming on with violence, and, while he might pacify and tame him, were to provoke him and make him savage, in order to give up himself as an unpitied meal and feast to those ravenous monsters?
2:88Unless indeed anyone will assert that it is of no use to anyone to oppose the asps and serpents of Egypt, and all the other things which ... destructive poison ... inflict inevitable death on those who are once bitten by them; for that men must be content to use incantations, and so to tame those beasts, and by such means to avoid suffering any evil from them.
2:89Moreover, are there not certain men who are more savage and more treacherous than boars, or serpents, or asps? whose treacherous and malignant disposition it is impossible to escape otherwise than by gentleness and caresses? Therefore the wise Abraham will offer adoration to the sons of Cheth, and their name being interpreted, means "admiring," because the occasion persuades him to do so.
2:90For he has not come to this action of adoration because he honours persons who, by nature, and by hereditary qualities, and by their own habits, are enemies to reason, and who miserably waste that coinage of the soul, namely instruction, corrupting, and adulterating, and clipping it, but because he fears their present power and their scarcely conquerable strength, and is on his guard not to provoke them, he takes refuge in that great and powerful possession and weapon of virtue, that most excellent place of abode for wise souls, the double cave, which he could not occupy while warring and fighting, but only by acting as a champion and servant of reason.
2:91What? Do not we also, when we are spending our time in the market-place, frequently wonder at the masters, and also at the beasts of burden? But we wonder at these two classes, with different and not the same feelings. For we look upon the masters with honour, and upon the beasts of burden with fear, lest some injury should be done to us by them.
2:92And when an opportunity offers, it is a good thing to attack our enemies and put down their power; but when we have no such opportunity, it is better to be quiet; but if we wish to find perfect safety as far as they are concerned, it is advantageous to caress them.
2:93On which account it is even now proper to praise those persons who do not yield to the president of vain opinion but who withstand him and say, "Shall you be a king and rule over us?" For they do not as yet see him actually in possession of kingly power, they do not see him as yet kindled like a flame, and shining and blazing in the unlimited fuel, but only smouldering like a spark, dreaming of glory, and not visibly having attained to it;
2:94for they also suggest favourable hopes to themselves as if they will not be able to be overcome by him; for which reason they say, "Shall you reign over us?" Which is equivalent to saying, Do you expect to be a king over us while we are living, existing, strong, and breathing? Perhaps, indeed, you may make yourself master of such as are weak people, but with respect to us who are strong you will be looked upon by us as a subject.
Book 2, §§95–119
2:95And, indeed, this is the natural state of the case. For when right reason is powerful in the soul, vain opinion is put down; but when right reason is weak, vain opinion is strong. As long, therefore, as the soul has its own power still safe, and as long as it is not mutilated in any part of it, it may well have confidence to attack and aim its arrows at the pride which resists it, and it may indulge in freedom of speech, saying, "You shall not be a king, you shall not be a lord either over us, or during our lifetime over others;
2:96but we, with our body-guards and shield-bearers, the offspring of wisdom, will overthrow your attacks and baffle your threats with one single sally of ours. In reference to which circumstances it is said, "They began to hate him because of his dreams and because of his words."
2:97But are not all the images which pride sets up and worships mere words and dreams, while, on the contrary, those things alone deserve to be called actions and real energies which are referable to correct life and right reason? And the one class are worthy of hatred as being false, and the other class deserve friendship as being full of desirable and lovely truth.
2:98Let no one, therefore, venture to bring accusations against the virtues of such men, as if they exhibited a specimen of an inhuman and unbrotherly disposition; but let any one who is disposed to do so, learn that it is not a man who is now being judged of, but the disposition which exists in the soul of each individual, which is mad on the subject of glory and arrogant pride; let him embrace these men who have adopted irreconcileable enmity and hatred towards this disposition, and let him never love what is hated by them.
2:99Knowing thoroughly that such judges are never deceived so as to wander from a sound opinion, but that, having learnt from the beginning to understand who is the true king, namely, the Lord, they indignantly refuse to worship him who deprives God of his honour, and seeks to appropriate it to himself, and who invites his fellow servants to do him service.
2:100On which account they say with confidence, "Shall you be a king and reign over us?" Are you ignorant that we are not independent, but that we are under the government of an immortal king, the only God? And why should you be a lord and lord it over us? for are we not under domination, and have we not now, and shall we not have for ever, and ever the same one Lord? in being whose servants we rejoice more than any one else can do in his liberty; for to be the servant of God is the most excellent of all things which are honoured in creation.
2:101I, therefore, should pray that I myself also might be able to abide firmly in the things which have been decided by these men; for they are accurate investigators, and superintendents, and overseers of things, not of bodies, and just, and sober all their lives, so as never to be deceived by any of those things which are accustomed to deceive mankind.
2:102But up to this time I am in a state of intoxication, and I am labouring under much uncertainty, and I have need of a staff and of a guide like a blind man; for if I had a staff to support me, then, perhaps, I might neither stumble nor fall.
2:103But if any persons who are conscious that they are but inconsiderate and precipitate, pay no attention to and do not care to follow those who have investigated all necessary matters with diligence and circumspection, nor, though they themselves are ignorant of the road, submit to the guidance of those who are acquainted with it, let them know that they have entered a course which it is very difficult to travel through, and that they are entangled in it, and will not be able to advance further;
2:104but I am so bound by treaties to these men, the moment I have a little recovered from my intoxication, that I think the same person both a friend and an enemy. But at present I will drive from me and hate that dreamer no less than they do; for no one in his senses could blame me for this, that the majority of opinions and votes does always prevail;
2:105but when he changes to a better course of life, and no longer dreams, and no longer worries himself by entangling himself in the vain imaginations of the slaves of vain opinion, and when he no longer dreams about night, and darkness, and the changes of uncertain matters which cannot be guessed at;
2:106he, then, having awakened from deep sleep, continues awake and receives certainty instead of indistinctness, and truth instead of false conceptions, and day instead of night, and light instead of darkness, and rejects an Egyptian wife, that is to say, the pleasure of the body, when she invites him to come in to her, and to enjoy her conversation, out of an indescribable love of continence and admiration for piety,
2:107and asserts his right to a share in those kindred and inherited blessings from which he appeared to be alienated, again desiring to recover that portion of virtue which properly belongs to him. For proceeding by small and gradual improvements, as if he were now established on the summit and perfection of his own life, he cries out, what indeed he knows to a certainty from what has happened to him, that he "belongs to God," and that he belongs no more to any object of external sense which can affect any creature;
2:108and then his brethren will come to a permanent reconciliation with him, changing their hatred into friendship, and their malignity into good will. But I who am the follower of these men, for I have learnt to obey them as a servant obeys his master, will never cease to praise him for his change of mind.
2:109Since Moses, also, that priest of sacred things, preserves his change of mind as what is worthy of love and of being preserved in men’s recollection, from being forgotten, by the symbol of the bones which he did not think proper to have buried in Egypt for ever, looking upon it as a hard thing, if the soul put forth any beautiful flower to suffer that to wither away, and to be overwhelmed and destroyed by the torrents which the Egyptian river of the passions, namely the body, which is incessantly flowing through all the outward senses, sends forth.
2:110The vision, therefore, which appeared proceeding from the earth, with reference to the sheaves and the interpretation thereof, has now been sufficiently discussed. It is time now to consider the other vision; and to examine how that is interpreted by the art of the explanation of dreams.
2:111"He saw then," says the scripture, "a second dream, and he related it to his father, and to his brethren, and he said, I saw that the sun, and the moon, and the eleven stars worshipped me. And his father rebuked him, and said, What is this dream that thou hast dreamed? Shall I, and thy mother, and thy brethren, come forward and advance, and fall down to the earth and worship thee? And his brethren were jealous of him; but his father regarded his words."
2:112The studiers of sublime wisdom now say that the zodiac, the greatest of all the circles in heaven, is studded with twelve animals (ζώδια), from which it has derived its name. And that the sun and the moon are always revolving around it, and go through each of the animals, not indeed with equal rapidity, but in unequal numbers and periods; the one doing so in thirty days, and the other in as near as may be a twelfth part of that time, that is in two days and a half;
2:113therefore, he who saw this heaven-sent vision, thought that he was being worshipped by eleven stars, ranking himself among them as the twelfth, so as to complete the whole circle of the zodiac.
2:114And I recollect having before now heard some man who had applied himself to learning in no careless or indolent spirit, say that men were not the only beings which went mad with vain opinions, but that the stars did so too. And they also, said he, contend with one another for precedence, and those which are the greater claim to be attended by the lesser stars as their guards;
2:115these matters, however, we may leave for the studiers of sublime subjects to investigate, and to settle how much truth and how much random assertion there is in them. But we say, that the lover of indiscriminate study, and unreasonable contention, and vain opinion, being always puffed up by folly, wishes to assert a precedence, not only over men, but also above the nature of all existing things;
2:116and he thinks that all things were created for his sake, and that it is necessary that everything, whether earth or heaven, or water or air, should bring him tribute; and he has gone to such an extravagant pitch of folly, that he is not able to reason upon such matters as even a young child might understand, and to see that no artist ever makes the whole for the sake of the part, but rather makes the part for the sake of the whole. Now the part of the whole is the man, so that he is properly asserted to have been made for the sake of perfecting the world in which he is rightly classed.
2:117But some persons are full of such exceeding folly, that they are indignant if the whole world does not follow their intentions: for this reason Xerxes, the king of Persia, being desirous to strike terror into his enemies, made a display of very mighty undertakings, altering the whole face of nature;
2:118for he changed the nature of the elements of the earth and of the sea, giving land to the sea and sea to the land, by joining the Hellespont with a bridge, and breaking up Mount Athos into deep gulfs, which, being filled with sea, became so many new and artificially-cut seas, being entirely changed from the ancient course of nature.
2:119And having worked wonders with respect to the earth, according to his wishes, he mounted up upon daring conceptions, like a miserable man as he was, contracting the guilt of impiety, and seeking to soar up to heaven, as if he would move what cannot be moved, and would subjugate the host of heaven, and, as the proverb has it, he began with a sacred thing.
Book 2, §§120–144
2:120For he aimed his arrows at the most excellent of the heavenly bodies, the sun, the ruler of the day, as if he had not himself been wounded by the invisible dart of insanity, not only because of his desiring things which were impossible, but such as were also most impious, either of which is a great disgrace to him who attempts them.
2:121It is related, also, that the very populous nation of the Germans, and theirs is a country where the sea is subject to the ebb and flow of the tide, ran down to the reflux which occurs in their country with great impetuosity, and drawing their naked swords charged and encountered the billowy sea as if it were a phalanx of enemies:
2:122and these men deserve to be hated because they dare impiously to take up the arms of enemies against the free and invincible parts of nature; but they deserve also to be ridiculed for attempting what is impossible, as if they thought it practicable to wound the water as though it were a living animal, or to stab it and kill it. And again, one should grieve at the sight of such men, and fear, and flee out of fear at their attacks, and submit to all the affections of the soul which are conversant with pleasures and pains.
2:123Moreover, it is only a very short time ago that I knew a man of very high rank, one who was prefect and governor of Egypt, who, after he had taken it into his head to change our national institutions and customs, and in an extraordinary manner to abrogate that most holy law guarded by such fearful penalties, which relates to the seventh day, and was compelling us to obey him, and to do other things contrary to our established custom, thinking that that would be the beginning of our departure from the other laws, and of our violation of all our national customs, if he were once able to destroy our hereditary and customary observance of the seventh day.
2:124And as he saw that those to whom he offered violence did not yield to his injunctions, and that the rest of our people was not disposed to submit in tranquillity, but was indignant and furious at the business, and was mourning and dispirited as if at the enslaving, and overthrow, and utter destruction of their country; he thought fit to endeavour by a speech to persuade them to transgress, saying:
2:125"If an invasion of enemies were to come upon you on a sudden, or the violence of a deluge, from the river having broken down all its barriers by an inundation, or any terrible fire, or a thunderbolt, or famine, or pestilence, or an earthquake, or any other evil, whether caused by men or inflicted by God, would you still remain quiet and unmoved at home?
2:126And would you still go on in your habitual fashion, keeping your right hand back, and holding the other under your garments close to your sides, in order that you might not, even without meaning it, do anything to contribute to your own preservation?
2:127And would you still sit down in your synagogues, collecting your ordinary assemblies, and reading your sacred volumes in security, and explaining whatever is not quite clear, and devoting all your time and leisure with long discussions to the philosophy of your ancestors?
2:128Nay: rather shaking off all these ideas, you would gird yourselves up for the preservation of yourselves, and of your parents, and of your children, and, if one must tell the plain truth, of your possessions and treasures, to save them from being utterly destroyed.
2:129And, indeed, I myself, am," said he, "all the evils which I have just enumerated: I am a whirlwind, I am war, and deluge, and thunderbolt, and the calamity of famine, and the misery of pestilence, and an earthquake which shakes and overthrows what stood firm before, not being merely the name of a necessity of fate, but actual, visible power, standing close to you."
2:130What then can we say that a man who says, or who merely thinks such things as these, is? Is he not an evil of an extraordinary nature? He surely must be some foreign calamity, brought from over the sea, or from some other world, since he, a man in every respect miserable, has dared to compare himself to the all-blessed God.
2:131We must likewise add, that he is daring here to utter blasphemies against the sun, and the moon, and the rest of the stars, whenever anything which had been looked for according to the seasons of the year, either does not happen at all, or is brought about with difficulty; if, for instance, the summer causes too much heat, or the winter too excessive a cold, or if the spring or autumn were unseasonable, so that the one were to become barren and unfruitful, and the other to be prolific only in diseases.
2:132Therefore, giving all imaginable license to an unbridled mouth and abusive tongue, such a man will reproach the stars as not bringing their customary tribute, all but claiming for the things of earth the reverence and adoration of the heavenly bodies, and for himself above them all, in proportion as he, as being a man, looks upon himself as superior to the other animals.
2:133Such men then are classed by us as the very teachers of vain opinion. Let us now in turn look at their followers by themselves. These men are always laying plots against the practisers of virtue, and when they see them labouring to make their own life pure with guileless truth, and to exhibit it, as one may say, to the light of the moon, or of the sun, as able to stand inspection, they endeavour by deceit, or even by open violence, to hinder them, trying to drive them into the sunless country of impious men, which is occupied by deep night, and endless darkness, and ten thousand tribes of images, and appearances, and dreams, and then, having thrust them down thither, they compel them to fall down and worship them as masters.
2:134For we look upon the practiser of virtue as the sun, since the one gives light to our bodies, and the other to the things which belong to the soul: and the education which such a man uses we look upon as the moon, for the use of each is most pure and most useful in the night; and the brethren are those virtuous reasonings which are the offspring of instruction, and of a soul devoted to the practise of virtue, all of which make straight the right path of life, and which they, therefore, by all kinds of wary and cunning wrestlings, seek to overcome, and to trip up, and overthrow, and break the neck of, because they have determined neither to think nor to say anything sound themselves.
2:135For this reason his father rebukes this intractable youth (I do not mean Jacob, but right reason, which is older even than he), saying,
2:136"What is this dream which thou hast dreamt?" but thou hast not seen any dream at all; hast thou fancied that things which are free by nature are to be of necessity slaves to human things, and that things which are rulers are to become subjects? and, what is more paradoxical still, subject, not to anything else but to the very things which they govern? and to be the slaves of no other things except those very things which are their own slaves? unless indeed a change of all established things to their direct contraries is to take place, by the power of God, who is able to effect all things, and to move what is immovable, and to fix what is in a constant state of agitation.
2:137Since on what principle can you be angry with or reproach a man who sees a vision in his sleep? For he will say, I did not see it intentionally, why do you bring accusations against me, for errors which I have not committed from any deliberate purpose? I have related to you what fell upon me and made an impression on my mind suddenly, and without my desiring it.
2:138But the present question is not about dreams, but about things which resemble dreams; which, to those whose minds are not highly purified appear great, and beautiful, and desirable things; while they are, in reality, trifling, and obscure, and deserving of ridicule, in the eyes of honest judges of the truth.
2:139Shall I then, says he, I, that is to say, right reason, come to you? And shall the soul, which is both the mother and nurse of the company devoted to learning virtuous instruction, also come to thee?
2:140And are the offspring of us too to come likewise? And are we all to stand in a row, laying aside all our former dignity, and holding up our hands and praying to thee? And are we then to prostrate ourselves on the ground, and endeavour to propitiate and adore thee? But may the sun never shine upon such transactions, since deep darkness is suited to evil deeds, and brilliant light to good deeds. And what could be a greater evil than for pride, that deceiver and beguiler, to be praised and admired, instead of sincere and honest simplicity?
2:141And it is with great propriety that the statement is added, "And his father took notice of his words." For it is the occupation of a soul which is not young, nor barren, nor wholly unfruitful, but rather of one which is really older and able to beget offspring, to cohabit with prudent caution, and to despise and overlook nothing whatever, but to have a reverential fear of the power of God, from which we cannot escape, and which we cannot overcome; and to look all around to see what its very end shall be.
2:142For this reason they say, that the sister of Moses also (and she is called Hope by us, when speaking in a figurative manner) was contemplated at a distance by the sacred scriptures, inasmuch as she kept her eyes fixed on the end of life, hoping that some good fortune might befall her, sent by the Giver of all good from above, from heaven;
2:143for it has often happened that many persons, after having taken long voyages, and having sailed over a great expanse of sea with a fair wind, and without any danger, have suddenly been shipwrecked in the harbour itself, when they have been on the very point of casting anchor;
2:144and many persons too, who have successfully come to the end of formidable wars of long duration, and have come off unwounded so as never to have received even a scratch on the surface of the skin, but to have escaped whole and entire as if they had only been at some popular assembly or national festival, having returned home with joy and cheerfulness, have been plotted against in their houses by those who, of all the world, least ought to have done so; being, as the proverb says, like oxen slain in their stall.
Book 2, §§145–169
2:145As these unexpected events, which no one could ever have anticipated, do frequently happen in this manner and overthrow people, so also do they often drive the powers of the soul in a contrary direction to the proper one, and drag it in an opposite way, according to their power, and compel it to change its course: for what man, who has ever descended into the arena of life, has come off without a fall?
2:146And who is there who has never been tripped up in that contest? He is happy who has not often been so. And for whom has not fortune laid snares, blowing upon him at intervals, and collecting its strength, that it may twine itself around him, and speedily carry him off before its adversary is ready for the contest?
2:147Do we not know, that some persons have come from infancy to old age who have never been sensible of any irregularity, whether it be from the happy condition of their nature, or from the care of those who brought them up and educated them, or owing to both circumstances? But then, being filled with profound peace in themselves, which is real peace, and the archetypal model of that which exists in cities, and being considered happy on that account, because they have never had a notion, not even in a dream, of the intestine war which arises from the violence of the passions, and which is the most piteous of all wars, have at last, at the very close of their lives, run on shore and made shipwreck, either through some intemperance of language or some insatiable gluttony, or some incontinent licentiousness of the parts below the belly.
2:148For some, while— "Still on the threshold of extreme old age," have admired the youthful, unhonoured, detestable, and disgraceful life of debauchees; and others have given in to the cunning, and wicked, and calumnious, and desperate way of life of others, pursuing the first fruits of a quarrelsome curiosity, when they ought rather to have discarded such habits now, even if they had been familiar to them.
2:149For which reason one ought to propitiate God, and to supplicate him perseveringly, that he will not pass by our miserable race, but that he will allow his saving mercy to be everlastingly shown towards us; for it is difficult for those who have tasted unalloyed peace to be prevented from glutting themselves with it.
2:150But, come now, this hunger is a lighter evil than thirst, inasmuch as it has love and desire for its comforters; but when, through the desire of drinking, it is necessary to to satisfy one’s self with that other fountain, the water of which is dirty and unwholesome, then it is indispensable for the drinkers, being filled with a bitter-sweet pleasure, to live an unenviable life, betaking themselves to pernicious things as though they were advantageous, from ignorance of what is really desirable.
2:151But the impetuous course of these evils is most grievous when the irrational powers of the soul attack the powers of the reason and get the better of them;
2:152for as long as the herds of oxen obey their drivers, and the flocks obey their shepherds, and the goats obey the goatherds, the herds and all belonging to them go on well; but when the herdsmen who are appointed to look after the cattle become weaker than the beasts committed to their care, then everything goes wrong, and instead of regularity there arises irregularity, and disorder in the place of order, and confusion instead of steadiness, and disturbance in the place of good arrangement, since there is no longer any lawful superintending power properly established; for if there had been such a thing, it would have been destroyed before this time.
2:153What then? Do we not think that even in ourselves there is a herd of irrational cattle, inasmuch as the irrational multitude of the soul is deprived of reason, and that the shepherd is the governing mind? But as long as that is vigorous and competent to act as the manager of the herd, everything goes on in a just, and prosperous, and advantageous manner;
2:154but when any weakness or want of power supervenes to the king, then it follows of necessity that the subjects also labour with a like infirmity; and when they most completely seem to be in enjoyment of liberty, then they are a prize, lying most entirely ready for any one who pleases to contend for it to seize; for the natural course is for anarchy to be treacherous, and for government to be salutary, especially in a state where law and justice are honoured. And this is such a state as is consistent with reason.
2:155We have now, then, spoken with sufficient accuracy about the dreams of vain opinion. Now, the different species of gluttony are conversant about drinking and eating. But the one has no need of any great variety, while the other requires a countless number of seasonings and sauces. These things, then, are referred to two managers. The matters relating to excessive drinking are referred to the chief butler, and those which belong to luxurious eating to the chief baker.
2:156Now these men are, with excessive propriety, recorded to have seen visions of dreams in one night; for they, each of them, labour to gratify the same need of their master, providing not simple food, but such as is accompanied with pleasure and extraordinary gratification; and each of them, separately, labours about half the food, but the two together are employed about the whole, and the one part draws on the other;
2:157for men, when they have eaten, immediately desire drink; and men who have drunk immediately wish to eat; so that it is in no slight degree on this account that a vision is ascribed to them both at the same time.
2:158Therefore the chief butler has the office of ministering to the appetite for wine, and the chief baker to the voracity. And each of them sees in his vision what relates to his own business: the one sees wine and the plant which engenders wine, namely the vine; the other sees white bread lying on dishes, and himself serving up the dishes.
2:159Now perhaps it may be proper first of all to examine the first dream. And it is as follows:—"In my sleep there was a vine before me; and on the vine were three branches, and it flourished and brought forth shoots, and there were on it ripe bunches of grapes. And Pharaoh’s cup was in my hand, and I took the bunch of grapes and pressed it into the cup, and I gave the cup into Pharaoh’s hand."
2:160He speaks here in an admirable manner, and the expression, "in my sleep," is quite correct. For, in real truth, he who follows not so much the inebriety which arises from wine as that which proceeds from folly, being indignant at an upright and wakeful position, like people asleep, is thrown down and relaxed, and shuts the eyes of his soul, not being able either to see or to hear anything which is worthy of being seen or of being heard.
2:161And being overthrown, he goes on a blind and guideless (I will not say path, but pathless) way through life, being pricked with thorns and briars; and sometimes too he falls down steep places, and tumbles down upon other people, so as to hurt both them and himself in a pitiable manner.
2:162But the deep and long-enduring sleep in which every wicked man is held, removes all true conceptions, and fills the mind with all kinds of false images, and unsubstantial visions, persuading it to embrace what is shameful as praiseworthy. For at one time it dreams of grief as joy, and does not perceive that it is looking at the vine, the plant of folly and error.
2:163"For," says the chief butler, "the vine was before me," the desired object was before him who desired it, wickedness was before the wicked man: which we, foolish men that we are, cultivate, without being aware that we are doing so to our own injury, the fruit of which we eat and drink, classing it under both species of food, which, as it would seem, we appropriate, not for one half the evils that affect us for the whole of our complete and entire misfortunes.
2:164But it is desirable not to be ignorant that the intoxication which proceeds from the vine does not affect all who indulge in it in a similar manner, but very often affects different people in contrary ways, so that it makes some better and others worse than they are naturally.
2:165For in the case of some men, it relaxes the sternness and moroseness of their character, and relieves them of their cares, and assuages their anger and their sorrow, and brings their dispositions into a milder mood, and makes their souls placable. But of others again, it cherishes the angry passions, and binds their pains firmly, and excites their feelings of love, and stimulates their rudeness; rendering their mouth talkative, their tongue unbridled, emancipating their external senses from all restraint, rendering their passions furious, and their whole mind violent and excited towards every object.
2:166So that the condition of the men first-mentioned appears to resemble an untroubled calm in fine weather, or a waveless tranquillity at sea, or a most peaceful and steady state of affairs in a city. But the condition of those whom I have last described, is more like a violent and unremitting gale, or a sea tossed by a storm into vast billows, or a sedition, an evil more fearful than even interminable and irreconcileable war.
2:167Therefore, of these two banquet parties, the one is filled with laughter, with men promising amusement, and hoping for good fortune, and enjoying cheerfulness, and pleasant language, and mirth, and joy, and freedom from anxiety;
2:168but the other is full of melancholy, and seriousness, and downcast looks, and offences, and reproaches, and wounds; of men gnashing their teeth, looking fiercely at one another, barking, strangling one another, contending with one another in every conceivable way, mutilating one another’s ears and noses, and whatever parts of the body they can reach, displaying the intoxication of their whole life and their drunkenness in this unholy contest, with every kind of unseemly behaviour.
2:169It would therefore be naturally consistent to consider next that the vine is the symbol of two things: of folly, and of mirth. And each of these two, though it is indicated by many circumstances, we will explain in a few words, to avoid prolixity.
Book 2, §§170–194
2:170When any one leading us along the road, deserted by the passions and by acts of wickedness, the road, that is, of philosophy, has led right reason to a height, and placed it like a scout upon a watch-tower, and has commanded it to look around, and to survey the whole country of virtue, and to see whether it be blessed with a deep soil, and rich, and productive of herbage and of fruit, since deep soil is good to cause the learning which has been sown in it to increase, and to make the doctrines which have been planted in it, and which have grown to trees, to form solid trunks, or whether it be of a contrary character; and also to examine into actions, as one might into cities, and see whether they are strongly fortified, or whether they are defenceless and deprived of all the security which might be afforded by walls around them. Also to inquire into the condition of the inhabitants, whether they are considerable in numbers and in valour, or whether their courage is weak and their numbers scanty, the two causes acting reciprocally on one another.
2:171Then because we were not able to bear the weight of the whole trunk of wisdom, we cut off one branch and one bunch of grapes, and carried it with us as a most undeniable proof of our joy, and a burden very easy to be borne, wishing to display at the same time the branch and the fruit of excellence to those who are gifted with acuteness of mental sight, to show them, that is, the strongly-shooting and grape-bearing vine.
2:172They then very fairly compare this vine of which we were only able to take a part, to happiness. And one of the ancient prophets bears his testimony in favour of my view of the matter, who speaking under divine inspiration has said, "The vineyard of the Lord Almighty is the house of Israel."
2:173Now Israel is the mind inclined to the contemplation of God and of the world; for the name Israel is interpreted, "seeing God," and the abode of the mind is the whole soul; and this is the most sacred vineyard, bearing as its fruit the divine shoot, virtue:
2:174thus thinking well (τὸ εὖ φρονει̃ν) is the derivation of the word joy (εὐφροσὑνη), being a great and brilliant thing so that, says Moses, even God himself does not disdain to exhibit it; and most especially at that time when the human race is departing from its sins, and inclining and bending its steps towards justice, following of its own accord the laws and institutions of nature.
2:175"For," says Moses, "the Lord thy God will return, that he may rejoice in thee for thy good as he rejoiced in thy fathers, if thou wilt hear his voice to keep all his commandments and his ordinances and his judgments which are written in the book of this law."
2:176Who could implant in man a desire for virtue and excellence, more strongly than is here done? Dost thou wish, says the scripture, O mind, that God should rejoice? Do thou rejoice in virtue thyself, and bring no costly offering, (for what need has God of anything of thine?) But, on the other hand, receive with joy all the good things which he bestows upon thee;
2:177for he rejoices in giving, when they who receive are worthy of his grace; unless you think that those men who live blameably may be justly said to make God indignant and to excite his anger, but that those who live in a praiseworthy manner do not make him rejoice.
2:178But there is nothing which gives so much pleasure to fathers and mothers, our mortal parents, as the virtues of their children, even though they may be in want of numbers of necessary things; And does not the excellence of these aforesaid persons in like manner rejoice the Creator of the universe, who is in no want of anything whatever?
2:179Do thou therefore, O mind, having learnt how mighty a thing the anger of God is, and how great a good the joy of God is, do not do anything worthy to excite his anger to thy own destruction, but study only such things as may be the means of your pleasing God.
2:180And you will find these actions to be not the making of long and unusual journeys, nor the passing over unnavigable seas, or wandering without stopping to take breath to the furthest boundaries of earth and sea: for good actions do not dwell at a distance and have not been banished beyond the confines of the habitable world, but, as Moses says, good is situated near you, and is planted along with you, being united to you in three necessary parts, in the heart, in the mouth, and in the hands: that is to say, in the mind, in the speech, and in the actions; since it is necessary to think and to say, and to do good things, which are made perfect by a union of good design, good execution, and good language.
2:181I say therefore to him whose occupation is to gratify one description of gluttony, the fondness for drinking, namely to the chief butler, "Why are you labouring hard, O unhappy man? For you think that you are preparing pleasant things to give delight, but in reality you are kindling a flame of folly and intemperance, and contributing great and abundant quantities of fuel to it."
2:182But perhaps he may reply, do not blame me precipitately before you have considered my case; I was appointed to pour out wine, not indeed for a man who was endowed with temperance, and piety, and all the other virtues, but for a violent, and intemperate, and unjust master, one who was very proud in his impiety, and who dared once to say, "I do not know the Lord;" so that I very naturally studied what would afford him gratification:
2:183and do not wonder that God is delighted with one thing, and the mind which is hostile to God, namely Pharaoh, with the contrary. Who then is the chief butler of God? The priest who offers libations to him, the truly great high priest, who, having received a draught of everlasting graces, offers himself in return, pouring in an entire libation full of unmixed wine. You see that there are differences between butlers in proportion to the differences existing between those whom they are waiting on;
2:184on this account I, the butler of Pharaoh, who exerts his stiff-necked, and in all respects intemperate reason, in the direction of indulgences of his passions, am a eunuch, having had all the generative parts of my soul removed, and being compelled to migrate from the apartments of the men, and am a fugitive also from the women’s chambers, inasmuch as I am neither male nor female; nor am I able to disseminate seed nor to receive it, being of an ambiguous nature, neither one thing nor the other; a mere false coin of human money, destitute of immortality, which is from time to time kept alive by the constant succession of children and offspring: being also excluded from the assembly and sacred meeting of the people, for it is expressly forbidden that any one who has suffered any injury or mutilation such as I have should enter in thereto.
2:185But the high priest of whom we are speaking is a perfect man, the husband of a virgin (a most extraordinary statement), who has never been made a woman; but who on the contrary, has ceased to be influenced by the customs of women in regard to her connection with her husband. And not only is this man competent to sow the seeds of unpolluted and virgin opinions, but he is also the father of sacred reasonings,
2:186some of which are overseers and superintendents of the affairs of nature, such as Eleazar and Ithamar; others are ministers of the worship of God, earnestly occupied in kindling and burning up the flame of heaven; for, as they are always uttering discourses relating to holiness, they cause it to shine, bringing forth the most divine kind of piety like fire from a flint;
2:187and the being who is at the same time the guide and father of those men is no insignificant part of the sacred assembly, but he is rather the person without whom the duly convened assembly of the parts of the soul could never be collected together at all; he is the president, the chairman, the creator of it, who, without the aid of any other being, is able by himself alone to consider and to do everything.
2:188He, when taken in conjunction with others, is insignificant in point of number, but when he is looked at by himself he becomes numerous; he is a tribunal, an entire council, the whole people, a complete multitude, the entire race of mankind, or rather, if one is to speak the real truth, he is a sort of nature bordering on God, inferior indeed to him, but superior to man;
2:189"for when," the scripture says, "the high priest goes into the Holy of Holies he will not be a man." What then will he be if he is not a man? Will he be God? I would not venture to say that (for the chief prophet, Moses, did receive the inheritance of this name while he was still in Egypt, being called "the god of Pharaoh;") nor again is he man, but he touches both these extremities as if he touched both the feet and the head.
2:190So now one kind of vine, which has been assigned as the portion of cheerfulness, and the intoxication which arises from it, namely unmingled goodness of counsel, and the cup-bearer too who drew the wine from the divine goblet, which God himself has filled with virtues up to the lip, has been explained;
2:191but the other kind, that of folly, and grief, and drunkenness, is also already depicted in a fashion but in another character, by other expressions which are used in the greater canticle; "for," says the scripture, "their vine is of the vine of Sodom and their tendrils are of the vine of Gomorrah; their grapes are the grapes of gall; their bunches are full of bitterness itself. Their wine is the madness of dragons and the incurable fury of asps."
2:192You see here what great effects are produced by the drunkenness of folly: bitterness, an evil disposition, exceeding gall, excessive anger, implacability, a biting and treacherous disposition. The lawgiver most emphatically asserts the branch of the vine of folly to be in Sodom; and the name Sodom, being interpreted, means "blindness," or "barrenness;" since folly is a thing which is blind, and also barren of all good things; though, nevertheless, some people have been so greatly influenced by it as to measure, and weigh, and count everything with reference to themselves alone.
2:193Gomorrah, being interpreted, means "measure;" but Moses conceived that God was the standard of weight, and measure, and number, in the universe, but he had not the same opinion of the human mind. And he shows this in the following passage, where he says, "There shall not be in thy sack one weight, and another weight, a great and a small; there shall not be in thy house one measure, and another measure, a great and a small;
2:194thy weight shall be a true and just one." But a true and just measure is, to conceive that it is the only just God alone who measures and weighs everything, and who has circumscribed the nature of the universe with numbers, and limitations, and boundaries. But it is unjust and false to imagine that these things are regulated in accordance with the human mind.
Book 2, §§195–219
2:195But the eunuch and chief butler of Pharaoh, having beheld the plant generative of folly, namely, the vine, adds besides to his delineation there stocks, that he may signify the three extremities of error according to the three different times; for a root is equivalent to extremity.
2:196When, therefore, folly has overshadowed and occupied the whole soul, and when it has left no portion of it unoccupied or free, it not only compels it to commit such errors as are remediable, but such also as are irremediable.
2:197Now those which admit of a remedy are set down as the easiest and the first; but those which are irremediable are altogether terrible, and are the last of all, being so far analogous to roots.
2:198And as, in my notions, wisdom begins to benefit a man in small matters, and ends at last in the absolute perfection of all well-doing, so, in the same manner folly, constraining the soul from above and leading it away from instruction by small degrees, establishes it at last at a long distance from right reason, and finally leads it to the extreme point, and utterly overthrows it.
2:199And the dream showed that after the roots appeared the vine flourished and put forth shoots and bore fruit; for, says the chief butler, "It was flourishing and bearing shoots, around which were bunches of grapes." The foolish man is accustomed to display barrenness, and never to put forth even leaves, and, in fact, to be withered all his life;
2:200for what could be a greater evil than folly flourishing and bearing fruit? But, says he, "the cup of Pharaoh," the vessel which is the receptacle of folly and drunkenness, and of the ceaseless intoxication of life, "is in my hand;" an expression equivalent to saying, depends upon my administration, and endeavours, and powers; for without my contrivances, the passion will not proceed rightly by its own efforts;
2:201for as it is proper that the reins should be in the hands of the charioteer, and the rudder in the hands of the pilot—for this is the only way in which the course of the chariot and the voyage of the vessel can proceed successfully—so, also, the filling of the goblet with wine is in the hands and depends upon the power of him who by his art brings to perfection one of the two kinds of gluttony, namely, satiety of wine.
2:202But why has he endured to boast in respect of a matter which deserved rather to be denied than to be confessed? Would it not have been better not to have confessed at all that he was a teacher of intemperance, and not to admit that he increased the excitement of the passions by wine in the case of the intemperate man, as being an inventor and producer of a luxurious, and debauched, and most disgraceful way of life.
2:203Such, however, is the case. Folly boasts of those things which ought to be concealed; and in this present case it prides itself, not only on holding in its hands the receptacle of the intemperate soul, that is to say, the cup of wine, and in showing it to all men, but also in pressing out the grapes into it; that is to say, in making that which satisfies the passion, and bringing what is concealed to light.
2:204For as children which require food, when they are about to receive the milk, squeeze and press out the breast of the nurse that feeds them, so likewise does the workman and cause of intemperance vigorously press the fountain from which the evil of abundance of wine pours forth, that he may derive food in a most agreeable manner from the drops which are squeezed out.
2:205Such a description then as I have here given may be applied to the man who is made frantic by the influence of unmixed wines, that he is a drunken, and foolish, and irremediable evil. We must now, in turn, investigate the character of the glutton, who is akin to the drunkard, and who is a sworn companion of all kinds of voracity and greediness, labouring, without any restraint, at the artificial gratification of his appetite.
2:206And yet it does not require a great deal of care to arrive at his true character; for the dream which was seen is a representation of his likeness very closely resembling him; and when we have accurately examined him, let us look upon him as we would upon a representation in a mirror;
2:207for "I thought," said the chief cook, "that I had three baskets of fine wheaten loaves upon my head." Now, using the word "head" in an allegorical manner, we mean by it the dominant part of the soul, that is, the mind, and we say that everything rests or depends upon that; for he once exclaimed concerning it, "All these things were in my charge."
2:208Therefore when he had completed the preparation of these things which he had devised against the miserable belly, he displayed himself also, and, like a foolish man as he was, he was not ashamed to be weighed down with so great a burden, namely, the weight of three baskets; that is to say, with three portions of time.
2:209For those who advocate the cause of pleasure affirm that it consists of three times, of the memory of past delights, and of the enjoyment of those that are present, and of the hope of what are to come;
2:210so that the three baskets are likened unto the three portions of time, and the cakes upon the baskets to those circumstances which are suitable to each of the portions; to the recollection of past joys, to the enjoyment of present pleasures, to the hope of future delights. And he who carries all these things is likened unto the lover of pleasure, who has filled his faithless table, a table destitute of all hospitable and friendly salt, not with one kind of luxury only, but with almost every description and species of intemperance;
2:211and this is enjoyed by king Pharaoh alone, as if he were sitting at a public banquet, and devoting himself to a dispersion, and scattering, and defeat, and destruction of temperance; for the name Pharaoh, being interpreted, means "dispersion." And it is a magnificent and royal piece of conduct in him not to exult in the specious advantages of wisdom, but to pride himself on those pursuits of profligacy which it is unseemly to mention, wrecking himself on insatiable appetite, and gluttony, and effeminacy of life.
2:212Therefore the birds, that is to say, the chances which never could have been anticipated by conjecture, coming from outward quarters and hovering around him, will attack and kindle every thing like fire, and will destroy every thing with their all-devouring power, so that there is not a single fragment left to the bearer of the baskets for his enjoyment though he had hoped to proceed with his inventions and contrivances, for ever and ever carrying them on in a safe place, so that they could never be taken from him.
2:213And thanks be to God who giveth the victory and who renders the labours of the man who is a slave to his passions, though ever so carefully carried out, still unproductive and useless, sending down winged natures in an invisible manner for their destruction and overthrow. Therefore, the mind, being deprived of those things which it had made for itself, having, as it were, its neck cut through, will be found headless and lifeless, and like those who are fixed to a cross, nailed as it were to the tree of hopeless and helpless ignorance.
2:214For as long as none of these things come upon one which arrive suddenly and unexpectedly, then those acts which are directed to the enjoyment of pleasure appear to be successful; but when such evils descend upon them unexpectedly, they are overthrown, and their maker is destroyed with them.
2:215The dreams, therefore, of those men who divide those things which produce the taste according to every species of food, whether it be meat or drink, and such as is not necessary but superfluous, and sought only by the intemperate, have been sufficiently explained. But those of Pharaoh, who appears to exercise sovereignty over these men and over all the powers of the soul, must now be investigated if we would proceed in order and consistently with our plan.
2:216Pharaoh says, "In my dream I thought that I was standing by the bank of a river, and seven oxen came up as it were out of the river, of eminent plumpness in their flesh, and beautiful to the view, and fed in the green marsh; and behold, seven other oxen came up out of the river after them, evil to look at and ill-favoured, and lean in their flesh, such that I never saw any leaner in all Egypt;
2:217and the lean and ill-favoured oxen devoured the seven former oxen which were beautiful, and picked out, and they entered into their stomachs, and still their appearance remained ill-favoured, as I have described it at first.
2:218And when I had awoke I fell asleep again; and again I saw in my dream, and as it were seven ears of corn grew up on one stalk, full and beautiful. And seven other ears of corn also came up, lean and wind-beaten, close to them, and these last seven ears did swallow up the seven beautiful and full ears."
2:219You see now the preface of the lover of self who being easily moved, and changeable, and fickle, both in his body and soul, says, "I thought that I was standing," and did not consider that unchangeableness and steadiness belong to God alone, and to him who is dear to God.
Book 2, §§220–244
2:220And the most evident proof of the unchangeable power which exists in him is this world, which is always in the same place and in the same condition. And if the world is immovable how can the Creator of it be any thing but firm? In the second place the sacred scriptures are likewise most infallible witnesses;
2:221for it is said in them, where the words are put into the mouth of God, "I stand here and there, before you were dwelling upon the rock," which is an expression equivalent to, Thus am I who am visible to you, and am here: and I am there and everywhere, filling all places, standing and abiding in the same condition, being unchangeable, before you or any one of the objects of creation had any existence, being beheld upon the highest and most ancient authority of power, from which the creation of all existing things was shed forth, and the stream of wisdom flowed;
2:222"for I am he who brought the stream of water out of the solid rock," is said in another place. And Moses also bears witness to the immutability of the Deity, where he says, "I saw the place where the God of Israel Stood;" intimating enigmatically that he is not given to change by speaking here of his standing, and of his being firmly established.
2:223But there is in the Deity such an excessive degree of stability and firmness, that he gave even to the most excellent natures a share of his durability as his most excellent possession: and presently afterwards he, the most ancient author of all things, namely God, says that he is about to erect firmly his covenant full of grace (and that means his law and his word) in the soul of the just man as on a solid foundation, which shall be an image in the likeness of God, when he says to Noah, "I will establish my covenant with thee."
2:224And besides this, he also indicates two other things, one that justice is in no respect different from the covenant of God, the other that other beings bestow gifts which are different from the persons who receive them; but God gives not only those gifts, but he gives also the very persons who receive them to themselves, for he has given me to myself, and every living being has he given to himself; for the expression, "I will establish my covenant with thee," is equivalent to, I will give thee to thyself.
2:225And all those who are truly lovers of God desire eagerly to escape from the storm of multiplied affairs and business in which there is always tempestuous weather, and rough sea, and confusion, and to anchor in the calm and safe untroubled haven of virtue.
2:226Do you not see what is said about the wise Abraham who "is standing before the Lord?" For when was it likely that the mind would be able to stand, no longer inclining to different sides like the balance in a scale, except when it is opposite to God, beholding him and being beheld by him?
2:227For perfect absence of motion comes to it in two ways, either from beholding him with whom nothing can be compared, because he is not attracted by anything resembling himself, or from being beheld by him, because which he considered worthy, the ruler has assigned to himself alone as the most excellent of beings. And indeed a divine admonition was given in the following terms to Moses: "Stand thou here with me," by which injunction both these things appear to be intimated, first, the fact that the good man is not moved, and secondly, the universal stability of the living God.
2:228For, in real truth, whatever is akin or near to God is appropriated by him, becoming steady and stationary by reason of his unchangeableness; and the mind, being at rest, well knows how great a blessing rest is, and admiring, its own beauty, it conceives that either it is assigned to God alone as his, or else to that intermediate nature which is between the mortal and the immortal race;
2:229at all events, it says, "And I stood in the midst between the Lord and you," not meaning by these words that he was standing on his own feet, but wishing to indicate that the mind of the wise man, being delivered from all storms and wars, and enjoying unruffled calm and profound peace, is superior indeed to man, but inferior to God.
2:230For the ordinary human mind is influenced by opinion, and is thrown into confusion by any passing circumstances; but the other is blessed and happy, and free from all participation in evil. And the good man is on the borders, so that one may appropriately say that he is neither God nor man, but that he touches the extremities of both, being connected with the mortal race by his manhood, and with the immortal race by his virtue.
2:231And there is something which closely resembles this in the passage of scripture concerning the high priest; "For when," says the scripture, "he goes into the holy of holies, he will not be a man till he has gone out again." But if at that time he is not a man, it is clear that he is not God either, but a minister of God, belonging as to his mortal nature to creation, but as to his immortal nature to the uncreated God.
2:232And he is placed in the middle class until he again goes forth among the things which belong to the body and to the flesh. And this is the order of things according to nature, when the mind, being entirely occupied with divine love, bends its course towards the temple of God, and approaches it with all possible earnestness and zeal, it becomes inspired, and forgets all other things, and forgets itself also. It remembers him alone, and depends on him alone, who is attended by it as by a body-guard, and who receives its ministrations, to whom it consecrates and offers up the sacred and untainted virtues.
2:233But when the inspiration has ceased, and the excessive desire has relaxed, then it returns from divine things and becomes a man again, mixing with human affairs, which were awaiting him in the vestibule, that they might carry him off while gazing only on the things in them.
2:234Moses therefore describes the perfect man as being neither God nor man, but, as I said before, something on the border between the uncreated and the perishable nature. Again, he classes him who is improving and advancing towards perfection in the region between the dead and the living, meaning by "the living" those persons who dwell with wisdom, and by "the dead" those who rejoice in folly;
2:235for it is said with respect to Aaron, that "He stood between the dead and the living, and the plague was stayed." For he who is making progress is not reckoned among those who are dead as to the life of virtue, inasmuch as he has a desire and admiration of what is honourable, nor among those who are living in extreme and perfect prosperity, for there is still something wanting to the end, but he touches both extremes;
2:236on which account the expression, "the plague was stayed," is very properly used rather than "the plague ceased;" for in those who are perfect the things which break, and crush, and destroy the soul cease; but in those who are advancing towards perfection, they are only diminished, as if they were only cut short and checked.
2:237Since then all steadiness, and stability, and the abiding for ever in the same place unchangeably and immovably, is first of all seen in the living God, and next in the word of the living God, which he has called his covenant; and in the third place in the wise man, and in the fourth degree in him who is advancing towards perfection, what could induce the wicked mind, which is liable to all sorts of curses, to think that it is able to stand by itself, while it is in reality borne about as in a deluge, and dragged hither and thither by the incessant eddies of things flowing in through the dead and agitated body?
2:238"For I thought," says the scripture, "that I was standing on the bank of the river:" and by the word river we say that speech is symbolically meant, since both these things are borne outward, and flow on with a vigorous and sustained speed. And the one is at one time filled up with a great abundance of water, and the other with a quantity of verbs and nouns, and at another time they are both empty and relaxed, and in a state of quiescence;
2:239again, they are of use inasmuch as the one irrigates the fields, and the other fertilizes the souls of those who receive it. And at times they are injurious by reason of overflowing, as then the one deluges the land on its borders, and the other troubles and confuses the reason of those who do not attend to it.
2:240Therefore speech is compared to a river, and the nature of speech is twofold, the one sort being better and the other worse; that is, the better kind which does good, and that of necessity is the worse kind which does harm;
2:241and Moses has given most conspicuous examples of each kind to those who are able to see, for he says, "For a river goes out of Eden to water the Paradise, and from thence it is divided into four branches:"
2:242and by the name Eden he means the wisdom of the living God, and the interpretation of the name Eden is "delight," because I imagine wisdom is the delight of God, and God is the delight of wisdom, as it is said also in the Psalms, "Delight thou in the Lord." And the divine word, like a river, flows forth from wisdom as from a spring, in order to irrigate and fertilize the celestial and heavenly shoots and plants of such souls as love virtue, as if they were a paradise.
2:243And this sacred word is divided into four beginnings, by which I mean it is portioned out into four virtues, each of which is a princess, for to be divided into beginnings, does not resemble divisions of place, but a kingdom, in order that any one, after having shown the virtues as boundaries, may immediately proceed to show the wise man who follows them to be a king, being elected as such, not by men, but by the only free nature which cannot err, and which cannot be corrupted;
2:244for those who behold the excellence of Abraham say unto him, "Thou art a king, sent from God among us:" proposing as a maxim, for those who study philosophy, that the wise man alone is a ruler and a king, and that virtue is the only irresponsible authority and sovereignty.
Book 2, §§245–269
2:245Accordingly, one of the followers of Moses, having compared this speech to a river, has said in the Psalms, "The river of God was filled with water;" and it is absurd to give such a title to any of the rivers which flow upon the earth. But as it seems the psalmist is here speaking of the divine word, which is full of the streams of wisdom, and which has no part of itself empty or desolate, or rather, as some one has said, which is diffused everywhere over the universe, and is raised up on high, on account of the continued and incessant rapidity of that ever-flowing spring.
2:246There is also another expression in the Psalms, such as this, "The course of the river makes glad the city of God." What city? For the holy city, which exists at present, in which also the holy temple is established, at a great distance from any sea or river, so that it is clear, that the writer here means, figuratively, to speak of some other city than the visible city of God.
2:247For, in good truth, the continual stream of the divine word, being borne on incessantly with rapidity and regularity, is diffused universally over everything, giving joy to all.
2:248And in one sense he calls the world the city of God, as having received the whole cup of the divine draught, and being gladdened thereby, so as to have derived from it an imperishable joy, of which it cannot be deprived for ever. But in another sense he applies this title to the soul of the wise man, in which God is said also to walk, as if in a city, "For," says God, "I will walk in you, and I will be your God in you."
2:249And who can pour over the happy soul which proffers its own reason as the most sacred cup, the holy goblets of true joy, except the cup-bearer of God, the master of the feast, the word? not differing from the draught itself, but being itself in an unmixed state, the pure delight and sweetness, and pouring forth, and joy, and ambrosial medicine of pleasure and happiness; if we too may, for a moment, employ the language of the poets.
2:250But that which is called by the Hebrews the city of God is Jerusalem, which name being interpreted means, "the sight of peace." So they do not look for the city of the living God in the region of the earth, for it is not made of wood or of stone, but seek it in the soul which is free from war, and which proposes to those who are endowed with acuteness of sight a contemplative and peaceful life;
2:251since where could any find a more venerable and holy abode for God amid all existing things, than the mind fond of contemplation, which is eager to behold every thing and which does not, even in a dream, feel a wish for sedition or disturbance?
2:252And again, the invisible spirit which is accustomed to converse with me in an unseen manner prompts me with a suggestion, and says, O my friend, you seem to be ignorant of an important and most desirable matter which I will explain to you completely; for I have also in a most seasonable manner explained many other things to you also.
2:253Know, then, O excellent man, that God alone is the truest, and most real, and genuine peace, and that every created and perishable essence is continual war. For God is something voluntary, and mortal essence is necessity. Whoever, therefore, is able to forsake war, and necessity, and creation, and destruction, and to pass over to the uncreated being, to the immortal God, to the voluntary principle, and to peace, may justly be called the abode and city of God.
2:254Do not, therefore, consider it a different thing whether you speak of the sight of peace or the sight of God, as they are the same thing; because peace is not only the companion but also the chief of the powers of the living God, which are distinguished by many names.
2:255And, moreover, he says to the wise Abraham, "that he will give him an inheritance of land from the river of Egypt to the great river, the river Euphrates," not meaning a portion of the land so much as a better portion in respect of our own selves. For our own body, and the passions which exist in it, and which are engendered by it, are likened to the river of Egypt, but the soul and the passions which are dear to that are likened to the river Euphrates.
2:256And here a doctrine is laid down, at once most profitable to life and of the highest importance, that the good man has received for his inheritance the soul and the virtues of the soul: just as, on the contrary, the wicked man has received for his share the body and the vices of the body, and those which are engendered by the body.
2:257And the expression "from," has a double sense. One, that by which the starting point from which it begins is included; the other that by which it is excluded. For when we say that from morning to evening there are twelve hours, or from the new moon to the end of the month there are thirty days, we are including in our enumeration both the first hour and the day of the new moon. And when any one says that such and such a field is three or four furlongs distant from the city, he clearly means to leave the city itself out of that measurement.
2:258So that now, too, we must consider that the expression, "from the river of Egypt," is to be understood so as not to include that river; for the writer intends to remove us to a distance from the things of the body which are seen to exist in a constant flow and course which is being destroyed and destroying, that so we may receive the inheritance of the soul with the imperishable virtues, which are, moreover, deserving of immortality.
2:259Thus, therefore, by tracing it out diligently, we have found that praiseworthy speech is likened to a river; but speech which is deserving of blame is the very river of Egypt itself, untractable, unwilling to learn, as one may say in a word, lifeless speech; for which reason it is also changed into blood, as not being able to afford sustenance. For the speech of ignorance is not wholesome, and it is productive of bloodless and lifeless frogs, which utter only a novel and harsh sound, a noise painful to the ear.
2:260And it is said, likewise, that all the fish in that river were destroyed. And by the fish are here figuratively meant the conceptions; for these things float about and exist in speech as in a river, resembling living things and filling the river with life. But in uninstructed speech all conceptions die; for it is not possible to find any thing intelligent in it, but only, as some one has said, some disorderly and unmusical voices of jackdaws.
2:261We have now then said enough on these subjects. But since he not only confesses that he saw in his dream, a standing and a river, but also the banks of a river, as his words are, "I thought that I was standing by the bank (χεῖλος) of the river." It must be desirable to say a few seasonable things also about the bank.
2:262Now there appears to be two most necessary objects on account of which nature has adapted lips (χείλη) to all animals, and especially to men; one for the sake of tranquillity, for they are the strongest bulwark and fortification of the voice; the other for the sake of distinctness, for it is through them that the stream of words issues forth. For when they are closed speech is checked; for it is impossible that it should be borne outward if they are not parted.
2:263And by these means nature prepares and trains man for both objects, speech and silence, watching the appropriate time for each employment. As for instance, is anything said worth listening to? Then attend, raising no obstacle, in perfect quiet, according to the injunction of Moses, "Be silent and hear."
2:264For of those persons who mix themselves up in contentious discussions there is not one who can properly be considered as either speaking or listening; but this is only advantageous to him who is about to do so.
2:265Again, when you see, amid the wars and disasters of life, the merciful hand of God and his favourable power held over you and standing in defence of you, be silent yourself; for that champion stands in no need of any assistance. And there are proofs of this fact recorded in the sacred writings; such, for instance, as the verse, "The Lord will fight for us, and ye shall be silent."
2:266And if you see the genuine offspring and the firstborn of Egypt destroyed, namely desire, and pleasures, and pain, and fear, and iniquity, and mirth, and intemperance, and all the other qualities which are similar and akin to these, then marvel and be silent, dreading the terrible power of God;
2:267for, say the scriptures, "Not a dog shall move his tongue, nor shall anything, man or beast, utter a sound;" which is equivalent to saying, It does not become either the impudent tongue to bark and curse—nor the man that is within us, that is to say, our dominant mind; nor the cattle-like beast which is within us, that is to say, the outward sense—to boast, when all the evil that was in us has been utterly destroyed, and when an ally from without comes of his own accord to hold his shield over us.
2:268But there are many occasions which are not well suited to silence: and if we go to the language of ordinary prose, of which we may again see memorials laid up, how did there, ever an unexpected participation in good take place to any one? It is well, therefore, to give thanks and to sing hymns in honour of him who bestowed it.
2:269What, then, is the good? The passion which is attacking us is dead, and is thrown out on its face without burial. Let not us delay, but standing still, let us sing that most sacred and becoming hymn, feeling that we are commanded to say to all men, "Let us sing unto the Lord, for he has triumphed gloriously; the horse and his rider hath he thrown into the sea."
Book 2, §§270–294
2:270But the rout and destruction of the passions is indeed a good, but not a perfect good; but the discovery of wisdom is a surpassing good, and when that is found all the people will sing harmonies and melodies, not with one kind of music only, but with every sort;
2:271for then, says the scripture, "Israel sang this song at the well;" that is to say, in triumph for the fact that knowledge, which had long been hidden but which was sought for, had at length been found by all men, though lying deep by nature; the duty of which was to irrigate the rational fields existing in the souls of those men who are fond of contemplation.
2:272What, then, shall we say? When we bring home the legitimate fruit of the mind, does not the sacred scripture enjoin us to display in our reason, as in a sacred basket, the first fruits of our fertility; a specimen of the glorious flowers, and shoots, and fruits which the soul has brought forth, bidding us speak out distinctly, and to utter panegyrics on the God who brings things to perfection, and to say, "I have cleared away the things which were holy out of my house, and I have arranged them in the house of God:" appointing as stewards and guardians of them, men selected for their superior merit, and giving them the charge of these sacred things;
2:273and these persons are Levites, proselytes, and orphans, and widows. But some are suppliants, some are emigrants and fugitives, some are persons widowed and destitute of all created things, but enrolled as belonging to God, the genuine husband and father of the soul which is inclined to worship.
2:274In this way, then, it is most proper both to speak and to be silent. But the wicked adopt an exactly contrary course; for they are admirers of a blamable kind of silence, and of an interpretation open to reproach, practising both lines of conduct to their own destruction and that of others.
2:275But the greater part of their employment consists in saying what they ought not; for having opened their mouth and leaving it unbridled, like an unrestrained torrent, they allow their speech to run on indiscriminately, as the poets say, dragging on thousands of profitless sayings;
2:276therefore those who have devoted themselves to the advocacy of pleasure and appetite, and every sort of excessive desire, building up irrational passion as a fortification against dominant reason, and preparing themselves for a contentious sort of discussion, have come at last to a regular dispute, hoping to be able to blind the race which is endowed with the faculty of sight, and to throw it down precipices, and into depths from which it will not be able at any future time to emerge.
2:277But some have not only put themselves forward as rivals to human virtue, but have proceeded to such a pitch of folly as to oppose themselves also to divine virtue. Therefore Pharaoh, the king of the land of Egypt, is spoken of as the leader of the company which is devoted to the passions; for it is said to the prophet, "Behold, he is going forth to the river, and thou shalt stand in the way to meet him, on the bank of the river;"
2:278for it is the peculiar characteristic of the one man to go forth to the rapidity and continual pouring forth of the irrational passion; and it is also characteristic of the wise man to oppose with exceeding vigour the arguments on behalf of pleasure and desire, not with his feet, but with his mind, firmly and immoveably, standing on the bank of the river; that is to say, on the mouth and on the tongue, which are the organs of speech. For standing firmly on these, he will be able to overturn and defeat the plausible specious arguments which advocate the cause of passion.
2:279But the enemy of the race which is endowed with the power of seeing, is the people of Pharaoh, which never ceased attacking, and persecuting, and enslaving virtue, until ... it paid the penalty for the evils which it inflicted being overwhelmed in the sea of those iniquities ... which it excited ... So that that period exhibited an extraordinary sight, a victory which was in no doubt, and a joy greater than could have been hoped for.
2:280On which account it is said, "And Israel saw the Egyptians dead upon the sea-shore." Great indeed was the hand which fought for them, compelling those who had sharpened these organs against the truth to fall by the mouth, and lips, and speech, so that they who had taken up these weapons against others should perish by their own arms and not by those of others.
2:281And this announces three most glorious things to the soul; one, the destruction of the passions of Egypt; another, that this has taken place in no other spot than near the salt and bitter springs, as if on the shore of the sea, by which sophistical reason, that enemy of virtue, is poured forth; and, lastly, the sight of the disaster.
2:282For no glorious thing can be invisible, but should be brought to the light and brilliancy of the sun. For so also the contrary, namely evil, should be thrust into deep darkness, and should be accounted deserving of night. And may it indeed by chance happen to some one to behold this: but what is really good should be always beheld by more piercing eyes. And what is so good as that what is good should live, and what is evil should die?
2:283There were, therefore, three persons who uttered atrocious words which were to reach even to heaven; these men devoted themselves to studies against nature, or rather against their own souls, saying that this universe was the only thing which was perceptible to the outward senses, and visible, having never been created, and being never destined to be destroyed, but being uncreated and imperishable, not requiring any superintendence, or care, or regulation, or management.
2:284Afterwards piling up fresh attempts one upon another, they built up a doctrine which was not approved, and raised it to a height like a tower; for it is said, "And the whole earth spoke one language," an inharmonious agreement of all the portions of the soul, for the purpose of overthrowing that which is the most comprehensive of all existing principles, namely, authority.
2:285Therefore, a great and irresistible hand overthrew them when they were hoping to mount up even to heaven by their devices, for the purpose of destroying the everlasting kingdom; and it also dashed down the doctrine which they had built up; and the place is called confusion:
2:286a very appropriate name for such an audacious and wicked attempt; for what can be more productive of confusion than anarchy? Are not houses which have no manager full of offences and disturbances?
2:287And are not cities which are left unprovided with a king destroyed by the domination of the mob, the opposite evil to kingly power, and at the same time the greatest of all evils? And have not countries, and nations, and regions of the earth, the governments of which have been put down, lost all their ancient and great prosperity?
2:288And why need I speak of matters of human history? For even the other species of animals, flocks of birds, and herds of terrestrial beasts, and shoals of aquatic creatures, never exist without some leader of their company; but they always desire and always pay attention to their own leader, as being the sole cause of the advantages they receive; at whose absence they are scattered and destroyed.
2:289Do we suppose then, that in the case of earthly creatures, which are the most insignificant portion of the universe, authority is the cause of good things and anarchy the cause of evils, but that the world itself is not filled with extreme happiness by reason of the administration of God its king?
2:290Therefore they have suffered punishment corresponding to their iniquities: for having polluted the sacred doctrine, they saw themselves polluted in like manner, all authority being taken away from among them; and being thrown themselves into confusion, but not having really caused any. But as long as they were left unpunished, being puffed up by insane pride, they sought to overthrow the authority of the universe by unholy speeches; and they set themselves up as rulers and kings, attributing the irresistible power of God to creatures which are perpetually coming to an end and being destroyed.
2:291Therefore these ridiculous men giving themselves tragic airs and using inflated language, are accustomed to speak thus: we are they who are leaders; we are kings; On us all things depend. Who, except ourselves, is the cause of good and of the contrary? To whom, except to us, can the doing well or ill be truly attributed? They talk nonsense too in another manner, saying, that all things depend upon an invisible power, which they fancy presides over all human and divine affairs in the whole world.
2:292Uttering such insolent falsehoods as these, if after intoxication they have become sober, and have come to themselves again, and feel ashamed of the intoxication to which they have given way coming under the dominion of the external senses, and if they reproach themselves for the evil actions which they have been led on to commit by folly, giving ear to their new counsellor, which never flatters, and which cannot be corrupted, namely, repentance, having propitiated the merciful power of the living God by sacred hymns of repentance instead of profane songs, they will find entire forgiveness.
2:293But if they are restive and obstinate for ever, and indulge in wanton behaviour, as if they were independent, and free, and the rulers of others, then by a necessity which is deaf to all entreaties and implacable, they will learn to feel their own nothingness in all things both small and great;
2:294for the driver who mounts upon them, putting a bridle, upon this world, as though it were a winged chariot, drawing back with main strength the reins which before were loose, and pressing the bits severely, will remind them by whip and spur of his authority as master, which they, like wicked servants, have forgotten by reason of the gentle and merciful temper of their manager;
Book 2, §§295–302
2:295for bad servants, looking upon the gentleness of masters as anarchy, fancy themselves entirely free from the power of any master at all, until their owner checks their great and increasing disease by applying punishment as a remedy.
2:296For which reason the expression is used of "a lawless soul, which with its lips distinguishes well-doing and evil-doing, and then will subsequently announce its own sin." What sayest thou, O soul, full of insolence? For dost thou know what real good or real evil, real justice or real holiness, are? or what is suited to what?
2:297The knowledge of those things and the power of regulating them belongs to God alone, and to whoever is dear to him. And witness is borne to this assertion by the scripture in which it is said, "I will kill and I will cause to live; I will smite and I will heal."
2:298But the mind which was wise in its own conceit had not even a superficial dreaming intimation of the things placed above it; but, wretched that it was, it was so completely carried away by the wind of vain opinion that it swore that those things which it had erroneously imagined stood firmly and solidly.
2:299If, therefore, the violence and convulsion of the disease begin to relax, the sparks of returning health becoming gradually re-kindled, will compel it at first to confess its error, that is to say, to reproach itself, and afterwards to become a suppliant at the altar, entreating with prayers, and supplications, and sacrifices, that it may only obtain pardon.
2:300After this who can fairly raise the question why the historian of the scriptures has spoken of the river of Egypt only as having banks and has made no such mention of the Euphrates or of any other of the sacred rivers; for here he says, "Thou shalt stand in the way to meet him by the bank of the river."
2:301And yet perhaps some persons in a spirit of ridicule will say that it is not right to bring such matters as these forward for investigation, for that it rather displays a spirit of cavilling than does any good. But I imagine that such things, like sweetmeats, are prepared in the sacred scriptures, for the improvement of those who read them, and that we ought not to condemn the curiosity of those who investigate such matters, but that we should rather blame their indolence if they did not investigate them.
2:302For our present discussion is not about the history of rivers but about ways of life, which are compared to the streams of rivers, running in opposite directions to one another. For the life of the good man consists in actions; but that of the wicked man is seen to consist only in words. And speech in the tongue, and mouth, and lips, and
Contents — 23 sections
- Book 1, §§1–25
- Book 1, §§26–50
- Book 1, §§51–75
- Book 1, §§76–100
- Book 1, §§101–125
- Book 1, §§126–150
- Book 1, §§151–175
- Book 1, §§176–200
- Book 1, §§201–225
- Book 1, §§226–250
- Book 1, §§251–256; Book 2, §§1–19
- Book 2, §§20–44
- Book 2, §§45–69
- Book 2, §§70–94
- Book 2, §§95–119
- Book 2, §§120–144
- Book 2, §§145–169
- Book 2, §§170–194
- Book 2, §§195–219
- Book 2, §§220–244
- Book 2, §§245–269
- Book 2, §§270–294
- Book 2, §§295–302
Book 1, §§1–25
1:1Ἡ μὲν πρὸ ταύτης γραφὴ περιεῖχε τῶν θεοπέμπτων ὀνείρων τοὺς κατὰ τὸ πρῶτον εἶδος ταττομένους, ἐφ’ οὗ τὸ θεῖον ἐλέγομεν κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν ἐπιβολὴν τὰς ἐν τοῖς ὕπνοις ἐπιπέμπειν φαντασίας. ἐν ταύτῃ δ’, ὡς ἂν οἷόν τε ᾖ, δηλώσομεν τοὺς ἐφαρμόττοντας τῷ δευτέρῳ.
1:2δεύτερον δ’ εἶδος, ἐν ᾧ ὁ ἡμέτερος νοῦς τῷ τῶν ὅλων συγκινούμενος ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ κατέχεσθαί τε καὶ θεοφορεῖσθαι δοκεῖ, ὡς ἱκανὸς εἶναι προλαμβάνειν καὶ προγινώσκειν τι τῶν μελλόντων. ὄναρ δ’ ἐστὶ πρῶτον οἰκεῖον εἴδει τῷ σημαινομένῳ τὸ φανὲν ἐπὶ τῆς οὐρανοῦ κλίμακος τόδε·
1:3„καὶ ἐνυπνιάσθη· καὶ ἰδοὺ κλῖμαξ ἐστηριγμένη ἐν τῇ γῇ, ἧς ἡ κεφαλὴ ἀφικνεῖτο εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, καὶ οἱ ἄγγελοι τοῦ θεοῦ ἀνέβαινον καὶ κατέβαινον ἐπ’ αὐτῆς· ὁ δὲ κύριος ἐπεστήρικτο ἐπ’ αὐτῆς· καὶ εἶπεν· ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ τοῦ πατρός σου καὶ ὁ θεὸς Ἰσαάκ· μὴ φοβοῦ· ἡ γῆ, ἐφ’ ἧς σὺ καθεύδεις, σοὶ δώσω αὐτὴν καὶ τῷ σπέρματί σου, καὶ ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα σου ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς γῆς, καὶ πλατυνθήσεται ἐπὶ θάλασσαν καὶ λίβα καὶ βορρᾶν καὶ ἀνατολάς· καὶ ἐνευλογηθήσονται ἐν σοὶ πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαὶ τῆς γῆς καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου. καὶ ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ μετὰ σοῦ, διαφυλάσσων σε ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ πάσῃ, ᾗ ἂν πορευθῇς· καὶ ἀποστρέψω σε εἰς τὴν γῆν ταύτην, ὅτι οὐ μή σε ἐγκαταλίπω, ἕως τοῦ ποιῆσαί με πάντα ὅσα ἐλάλησα σοι“ (Gen. 28,12—15).
1:4προκατασκευὴ δ’ ἐστὶ τῆς φαντασίας ἀναγκαία, ἣν ἀκριβώσαντες εὐμαρῶς ἴσως δυνησόμεθα καὶ τὰ δηλούμενα ὑπὸ τῆς φαντασίας καταλαβεῖν. τίς οὖν ἡ προκατασκευή; „καὶ ἐξῆλθε“ φησίν „Ἰακὼβ ἀπὸ τοῦ φρέατος τοῦ ὅρκου καὶ ἐπορεύθη εἰς Χαρράν, καὶ ἀπήντησε τόπῳ· ἔδυ γὰρ ὁ ἥλιος· καὶ ἔλαβεν ἀπὸ τῶν λίθων τοῦ τόπου καὶ ἔθηκε πρὸς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐκοιμήθη ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ἐκείνῳ“ (ibid. 10. 11)· κἄπειτ’ εὐθύς ἐστι τὸ ὄναρ.
1:5οὐκοῦν ἄξιον ἐν ἀρχῇ ταυτὶ τρία διαπορῆσαι· ἓν μὲν τί τὸ τοῦ ὅρκου φρέαρ καὶ διὰ τί οὕτως ὠνομάσθη, δεύτερον δὲ τίς ἡ Χαρρὰν καὶ διὰ τί ἀπὸ τοῦ λεχθέντος φρέατος ἐξελθὼν εἰς Χαρρὰν ἔρχεται εὐθύς, τρίτον τίς ὁ τόπος καὶ διὰ τί, ὅταν γένηται κατ’ αὐτόν, ὁ μὲν ἥλιος δύεται, αὐτὸς δὲ κοιμᾶται.
1:6Σκοπῶμεν οὖν αὐτίκα τὸ πρῶτον. ἐμοὶ τοίνυν δοκεῖ σύμβολον εἶναι τὸ φρέαρ ἐπιστήμης· οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἐπιπόλαιος αὐτῆς ἡ φύσις, ἀλλὰ πάνυ βαθεῖα· οὐδ’ ἐν φανερῷ πρόκειται, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀφανεῖ που κρύπτεσθαι φιλεῖ· οὐδὲ ῥᾳδίως, ἀλλὰ μετὰ πολλῶν πόνων καὶ μόλις ἀνευρίσκεται. καὶ ταῦτ’ οὐ μόνον ἐπὶ τῶν μεγάλα καὶ ἀμύθητα ὅσα θεωρήματα ἐχουσῶν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν εὐτελεστάτων θεωρεῖται.
1:7ἣν γοῦν ἂν ἐθέλῃς ἑλοῦ τῶν τεχνῶν, μή μοι τὴν ἀρίστην, ἀλλὰ τὴν πασῶν ἀφανεστάτην, ἣν ἐλεύθερος μὲν ἴσως οὐδεὶς ἐν πόλει τραφεὶς ἑκὼν ἐπιτηδεύσειεν ἄν, ἐν ἀγρῷ δὲ μόλις ἄκων οἰκέτης δυσκόλῳ καὶ δυστρόπῳ παλαίων δεσπότῃ βιαζομένῳ πολλὰ δρᾶν τῶν ἀβουλήτων.
1:8εὑρεθήσεται γὰρ οὐχ ἁπλοῦν, ἀλλὰ ποικίλον τὸ πρᾶγμα, οὐ θήρᾳ ληπτόν, δυσεύρετον, δυσπεριγένητον, ἐχθρὸν μὲν ὄκνῳ καὶ ἀμελείᾳ καὶ ῥᾳθυμίᾳ, σπουδῆς δὲ καὶ φιλοτιμίας ἱδρώτων τε καὶ φροντίδων μεστόν. οὗ χάριν οὐδ’ ὕδωρ ἐν τῷ φρέατι τούτῳ φασὶν οἱ ὀρύττοντες εὑρεῖν (Gen. 26,32), ἐπειδὴ τὰ τέλη τῶν ἐπιστημῶν οὐ δυσεύρετα μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀνεύρετα παντελῶς εἶναι συμβέβηκε.
1:9γραμματικώτερος δὲ διὰ τοῦτο καὶ γεωμετρικώτερος ἕτερος ἑτέρου γίνεται τῷ τὰς ἐπιτάσεις καὶ παραυξήσεις ἀμήχανον εἶναι ὅροις περιγραφῆναι· πλείω γὰρ ἀεὶ τῶν εἰς μάθησιν ἡκόντων τὰ ἀπολειπόμενα ἐκδέχεται καὶ ἐφεδρεύει, ὡς καὶ τὸν ἅπτεσθαι περάτων ἐπιστήμης ὑπολαμβανόμενον ἡμιτελῆ παρ’ ἑτέρῳ κριτῇ νομίζεσθαι, παρὰ δὲ ἀληθείᾳ δικαζούσῃ καὶ ἄρτι ἄρχεσθαι δοκεῖν.
1:10„βραχὺς μὲν γὰρ ὁ βίος,“ ἔφη τις, „ἡ δὲ τέχνη μακρά,“ ἧς ἄριστα καταλαμβάνει τὸ μέγεθος ὁ ἀψευδῶς ἐμβαθύνων αὐτῇ καὶ ὥσπερ φρέαρ αὐτὴν ὀρύττων. διὸ καὶ τελευτῶντά τινα πολιὸν ἤδη καὶ ὑπέργηρων λόγος ἔχει δακρύειν, οὐ δι’ ἀνανδρίαν φόβῳ θανάτου, ἀλλὰ διὰ παιδείας ἵμερον ὡς νῦν πρῶτον εἰς αὐτὴν εἰσιόντα, ὅτε πανύστατ’ ἔξεισιν.
1:11ἀνθεῖ γὰρ ἡ ψυχὴ πρὸς ἐπιστήμην, ὁπότε αἱ τοῦ σώματος ἀκμαὶ χρόνου μήκει μαραίνονται. πρὶν οὖν ἡβῆσαι καὶ ἐννεάσαι τῇ τῶν πραγμάτων ἀκριβεστέρᾳ καταλήψει, χαλεπὸν ὑποσκελισθῆναι. τὸ δὲ πάθος τοῦτο κοινὸν ἁπάντων ἐστὶ τῶν φιλομαθῶν, οἷς νέα ἐπὶ παλαιοῖς ἀνίσχει καὶ ἀναλάμπει θεωρήματα, πολλὰ μὲν καὶ τῆς ψυχῆς, ὁπότε μὴ στεῖρα καὶ ἄγονος εἴη, τικτούσης, πολλὰ δὲ καὶ τῆς φύσεως ἀτεκμάρτως ἐκ ταὐτομάτου προφαινούσης τοῖς διάνοιαν ὀξυδορκοῦσι. τὸ μὲν οὖν ἐπιστήμης φρέαρ ὅρον καὶ τελευτὴν οὐκ ἔχον τοιοῦτον ἀπεδείχθη.
1:12διὰ τί δὲ ὅρκος ὠνομάσθη (Gen. 26,33), λεκτέον· τὰ ἐνδοιαζόμενα τῶν πραγμάτων ὅρκῳ διακρίνεται καὶ τὰ ἀβέβαια βεβαιοῦται καὶ τὰ ἄπιστα λαμβάνει πίστιν· ἐξ ὧν ἐκεῖνο συνάγεται, ὅτι περὶ οὐδενὸς ἄν τις οὕτως βεβαιώσαιτο, ὡς περὶ τοῦ τὸ σοφίας γένος ἀπερίγραφον καὶ ἀτελεύτητον εἶναι.
1:13καλὸν μὲν οὖν καὶ ἀνωμότῳ διεξιόντι περὶ τούτων συνεπιγράφεσθαι· ὁ δὲ μὴ λίαν εἰς συναίνεσιν εὐχερὴς ἐνωμότῳ γενομένῳ συναινείτω. μηδεὶς δὲ ὀμνύναι τὸν τοιοῦτον ὅρκον ἀναδυέσθω σαφῶς εἰδώς, ὅτι ἐν εὐόρκων γραφήσεται στήλαις.
1:14ἅλις μὲν δὴ τούτων. ἑπόμενον δ’ ἂν εἴη σκέψασθαι, διὰ τί τεττάρων ὀρυττομένων φρεάτων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀμφὶ τὸν Ἀβραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαὰκ (Gen. 21, 25. 26,19—23) τὸ τέταρτον καὶ τελευταῖον „ὅρκος“ προσερρήθη.
1:15μήποτ’ οὖν δι’ ὑπονοιῶν ἐκεῖνο βούλεται παραστῆσαι, ὅτι κἀν τῷ παντὶ τεττάρων ὄντων, ἐξ ὧν συνέστηκεν ὅδε ὁ κόσμος, καὶ ἐν ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς ἰσαρίθμων, ἐξ ὧν διαπλασθέντες εἰς ἀνθρωπόμορφον εἶδος ἐτυπώθημεν, τὰ μὲν [[οὖν]ὗν] τρία πέφυκεν ἀμηγέπῃ καταλαμβάνεσθαι, τὸ δὲ τέταρτον ἀκατάληπτον πᾶσι τοῖς κριταῖς ἐστιν.
1:16ἐν μὲν οὖν τῷ κόσμῳ γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ καὶ ἀέρα καὶ οὐρανὸν τέτταρα τὰ πάντα εἶναι συμβέβηκεν· ὧν τὰ μὲν ἄλλα κἂν δυσευρέτου, ἀλλ’ οὐκ εἰσάπαν ἀνευρέτου μοίρας ἠξίωται.
1:17καὶ γὰρ γῆν, ὅτι ἐστὶ σῶμα βαρὺ καὶ ἀδιάλυτον καὶ στερέμνιον καὶ τεμνόμενον εἰς ὄρη καὶ πεδιάδας χώρας καὶ ποταμοῖς καὶ θαλάττῃ διαιρούμενον, ὡς τὰ μὲν νησιάζειν, τὰ δὲ ἠπειροῦσθαι, καὶ ὅτι τὸ μὲν αὐτῆς λεπτόγεων, τὸ δὲ βαθύγειον, καὶ τὸ μὲν τραχὺ καὶ στρυφνὸν καὶ λιθῶδες καὶ εἰσάπαν ἄγονον, τὸ δὲ λεῖον καὶ μαλακὸν καὶ γονιμώτατον, καὶ μυρία πρὸς τούτοις ἕτερα καταλαμβάνομεν·
1:18καὶ πάλιν ὕδωρ ὅτι πολλά τε τῶν εἰρημένων ἔχει κοινὰ πρὸς γῆν καὶ ἐξαίρετα ἕτερα· τὸ μὲν γὰρ αὐτοῦ γλυκύ, τὸ δ’ ἁλμυρόν, τὸ δ’ ἄλλαις διακεκριμένον ἰδέαις· καὶ τὸ μὲν πότιμον, τὸ δ’ οὐ πότιμον—καὶ ἑκάτερον οὐ πᾶσιν, ἀλλ’ οἷς θάτερον, οὐ τὸ ἕτερον, καὶ οἷς μὴ θάτερον, πάντως τὸ ἕτερον —, καὶ τὸ μὲν φύσει ψυχρόν, τὸ δὲ φύσει θερμόν —
1:19εἰσὶ γὰρ μυρίαι πολλαχόθι πηγαὶ ζέον ὕδωρ ἐκδιδοῦσαι, οὐ κατὰ γῆν μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ κατὰ θάλατταν· ἤδη γοῦν ἐφάνησαν φλέβες ἀνομβροῦσαι ζέον ὕδωρ ἐν μέσοις πελάγεσιν, ἃς ἡ τοσαύτη τῶν ἐν κύκλῳ πελαγῶν ἀνάχυσις ἐξ αἰῶνος ἐπικλύζουσα οὐκ ἴσχυσε σβέσαι, ἀλλ’ οὐδ’ ἐπὶ ποσὸν ἀνεῖναι —·
1:20καὶ πάλιν ὅτι ὁ ἀὴρ ἔχει φύσιν εἴκουσαν ἀντιπεριιστάμενος τοῖς σώμασιν, ὄργανον ὢν ζωῆς, ἀναπνοῆς, ὁράσεως, ἀκοῆς, τῶν ἄλλων αἰσθήσεων, πυκνότητας καὶ μανότητας κινήσεις τε καὶ ἠρεμίας ἐνδεχόμενος, τροπὰς καὶ μεταβολὰς παντοίας τρεπόμενός τε καὶ μεταβάλλων, χειμῶνας καὶ θέρη γεννῶν καὶ τὰς μετοπωρινὰς καὶ ἐαρινὰς ὥρας, ἐξ ὧν ὁ ἐνιαυτοῦ κύκλος πέφυκε περατοῦσθαι.
1:21τούτων μὲν δὴ πάντων αἰσθανόμεθα, ὁ δ’ οὐρανὸς ἀκατάληπτον ἔχει τὴν φύσιν, οὐδὲν ἑαυτοῦ σαφὲς γνώρισμα πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἀποστείλας. τί γὰρ ἂν εἴποιμεν; ὅτι πεπηγώς ἐστι κρύσταλλος, ὡς ἠξίωσάν τινες; ἢ ὅτι πῦρ τὸ καθαρώτατον; ἢ ὅτι πέμπτον κυκλοφορικὸν σῶμα, μηδενὸς τῶν τεττάρων στοιχείων μετέχον; τί δ’; ἡ ἀπλανὴς καὶ ἐξωτάτω σφαῖρα πρὸς τὸ ἄνω βάθος ἔχει ἢ αὐτὸ μόνον ἐστὶν ἐπιφάνεια βάθους ἐρήμη, τοῖς ἐπιπέδοις σχήμασιν ἐοικυῖα; τί δ’;
1:22οἱ ἀστέρες πότερον γῆς εἰσιν ὄγκοι πυρὸς πλήρεις — ἄγκεα γὰρ καὶ νάπας καὶ μύδρους διαπύρους εἶπον αὐτοὺς εἶναί τινες, αὐτοὶ δεσμωτηρίου καὶ μύλωνος, ἐν οἷς τὰ τοιαῦτά ἐστιν ἐπὶ τιμωρίᾳ τῶν ἀσεβῶν, ὄντες ἐπάξιοι — ἢ συνεχὴς καί, ὡς εἶπέ τις, πυκνὴ ἁρμονία, πιλήματα ἀδιάλυτα αἰθέρος; ἔμψυχοι δὲ καὶ νοεροὶ ἢ νοῦ καὶ ψυχῆς ἀμέτοχοι; προαιρετικὰς δὲ ἢ κατηναγκασμένας αὐτὸ μόνον κινήσεις ἔχοντες; τί δέ;
1:23σελήνη πότερον γνήσιον ἢ νόθον ἐπιφέρεται φέγγος ἡλιακαῖς ἐπιλαμπόμενον ἀκτῖσιν ἢ καθ’ αὑτὸ μὲν ἰδίᾳ τούτων οὐδέτερον, τὸ δ’ ἐξ ἀμφοῖν ὡς ἂν ἐξ οἰκείου καὶ ἀλλοτρίου πυρὸς κρᾶμα; πάντα γὰρ ταῦτα καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα τοῦ ἀρίστου τε καὶ τετάρτου τῶν ἐν κόσμῳ σώματος ὄντα, οὐρανοῦ, ἄδηλα καὶ ἀκατάληπτα, στοχασμοῖς καὶ εἰκασίαις, οὐ παγίῳ λόγῳ τῆς ἀληθείας, ἐφορμοῦντα·
1:24ὥστε κἂν ὀμόσαι τινὰ θαρρήσαντα, ὅτι θνητὸς οὐδεὶς πώποτε ἰσχύσει τούτων ἐναργῶς καταλαβεῖν οὐδέν. ὅρκος διὰ τοῦτ’ ὠνομάσθη τὸ τέταρτον καὶ ξηρὸν φρέαρ, ἡ τοῦ τετάρτου τῶν ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ ζήτησις
1:25ἀτελεύτητος καὶ πάντῃ δυσεύρετος, οὐρανοῦ. ἴδωμεν δέ, ὃν τρόπον καὶ τὸ ἐν ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς τέταρτον διαφερόντως καὶ κατ’ ἐξαίρετον λόγον ἀκατάληπτον εἶναι πέφυκεν. οὐκοῦν τέτταρα τὰ ἀνωτάτω τῶν περὶ ἡμᾶς ἐστι, σῶμα, αἴσθησις, λόγος, νοῦς· τούτων μὲν δὴ τὰ τρία οὐ κατὰ πάσας ἄδηλα τὰς ἰδέας ἐστίν, ἀλλ’ ἔχει τινὰ δείγματα ἐν ἑαυτοῖς τοῦ καταλαμβάνεσθαι.
Book 1, §§26–50
1:26τί δ’ ἔσθ’ ὅ φημι; ὅτι τὸ σῶμα καὶ τριχῇ διαστατὸν καὶ ἑξαχῇ κινητόν, ἴσμεν, διαστάσεις μὲν τρεῖς ἔχον, μῆκος, βάθος, πλάτος, κινήσεις δὲ τὰς διπλασίας ἕξ, τὴν ἄνω, τὴν κάτω, τὴν ἐπὶ δεξιά, τὴν ἐπὶ εὐώνυμα, τὴν πρόσω, τὴν εἰς τὸ κατόπιν· ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅτι ψυχῆς ἐστιν ἀγγεῖον, οὐκ ἀγνοοῦμεν· ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅτι ἡβᾷ, φθίνει, γηράσκει, τελευτᾷ, διαλύεται,
1:27σαφῶς ἴσμεν. καὶ πρὸς αἴσθησιν μέντοι γε οὐ παντάπασιν ἀμβλεῖς καὶ πηροὶ γεγόναμεν, ἀλλ’ ἔχομεν εἰπεῖν, ὅτι καὶ πενταχῇ σχίζεται καὶ ὄργανα ἑκάστης ἐστὶν ὑπὸ φύσεως δημιουργηθέντα οἰκεῖα, ὁράσεως μὲν ὀφθαλμοί, ἀκοῆς δὲ ὦτα, ῥῖνες δὲ ὀσφρήσεως καὶ τῶν ἄλλων τὰ οἷς ἐναρμόζεται, καὶ ὅτι ἄγγελοι διανοίας εἰσὶ διαγγέλλουσαι χρώματα, σχήματα, φωνάς, ἀτμῶν καὶ χυλῶν ἰδιότητας, συνόλως σώματα καὶ ὅσαι ποιότητες ἐν τούτοις, καὶ ὅτι δορυφόροι ψυχῆς εἰσιν, ὅσα ἂν ἴδωσιν ἢ ἀκούσωσι δηλοῦσαι κἂν εἴ τι βλαβερὸν ἔξωθεν ἐπίοι προορώμεναί τε καὶ φυλαττόμεναι, ὡς μὴ λάθρᾳ παρεισρευὲν αἴτιον ζημίας ἀνηκέστου τῇ
1:28δεσποίνῃ γένηται. καὶ φωνὴ δ’ οὐκ εἰσάπαν ἀποδιδράσκει τὴν ἡμετέραν κρίσιν, ἀλλ’ ἴσμεν ὅτι ἡ μὲν ὀξεῖα, ἡ δὲ βαρεῖα, καὶ ἡ μὲν ἐμμελὴς καὶ ἐναρμόνιος, ἡ δὲ ἀπῳδὸς καὶ λίαν ἀνάρμοστος, καὶ πάλιν ἡ μὲν μείζων, ἡ δὲ ἐλάττων· διαφέρουσι καὶ ἄλλοις μυρίοις, γένεσι, χρώμασι, διαστήμασι, συνημμέναις τάσεσι καὶ διεζευγμέναις, ταῖς διὰ τεττάρων, ταῖς διὰ πέντε, ταῖς διὰ πασῶν συμφωνίαις.
1:29καὶ μὲν δὲ καὶ τῆς ἐνάρθρου φωνῆς, ἣν μόνος ἐκ πάντων ζῴων ἔλαχεν ἄνθρωπος, ἔστιν ἃ γνωρίζομεν· οἷον ὅτι ἀπὸ διανοίας ἀναπέμπεται, ὅτι ἐν τῷ στόματι ἀρθροῦται, ὅτι ἡ γλῶσσα πλήττουσα τῇ τῆς φωνῆς τάσει τὸ ἔναρθρον ἐνσφραγίζεται καὶ λόγον, ἀλλ’ οὐ ψιλὴν αὐτὸ μόνον φωνὴν ἀργὴν καὶ ἀδιατύπωτον ἦχον ἀπεργάζεται, ὅτι κήρυκος ἢ ἑρμηνέως ἔχει τάξιν πρὸς τὸν ὑποβάλλοντα νοῦν.
1:30ἆρ’ οὖν καὶ τὸ τέταρτον τῶν ἐν ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς, ὁ ἡγεμὼν νοῦς, καταληπτός ἐστιν; οὐ δήπου. τί γὰρ αὐτὸν οἰόμεθα κατὰ τὴν οὐσίαν εἶναι; πνεῦμα ἢ αἷμα ἢ σῶμα συνόλως — ἀλλ’ οὐ σῶμα, ἀσώματον δὲ λεκτέον — ἢ πέρας ἢ εἶδος ἢ ἀριθμὸν ἢ ἐνδελέχειαν ἢ ἁρμονίαν ἢ τί τῶν ὄντων;
1:31γεννώμενον δ’ εὐθὺς ἢ ἔξωθεν εἰσκρίνεται ἢ ὑπὸ τοῦ περιέχοντος ἀέρος ἡ ἔνθερμος ἐν ἡμῖν φύσις οἷα σίδηρος ἐν χαλκέως πεπυρωμένος ὕδατι ψυχρῷ πρὸς τὸ κραταιότατον στομοῦται; διότι καὶ παρὰ τὴν ψῦξιν ὠνομάσθαι ψυχὴ δοκεῖ. τί δέ; τελευτώντων σβέννυται καὶ συμφθείρεται τοῖς σώμασιν ἢ πλεῖστον ἐπιβιοῖ χρόνον ἢ κατὰ τὸ παντελὲς ἄφθαρτόν ἐστι;
1:32ποῦ δ’ ἐμπεφώλευκεν ὁ νοῦς αὐτῷ; ἆρα οἶκον κεκλήρωται; οἱ μὲν γὰρ τὴν ἀκρόπολιν ἐν ἡμῖν ἀνιέρωσαν αὐτῷ κεφαλήν, περὶ ἣν καὶ αἱ αἰσθήσεις λοχῶσιν, εἰκὸς εἶναι νομίσαντες ἐγγὺς οἷα μεγάλου βασιλέως ἐφεδρεύειν τοὺς δορυφόρους· οἱ δ’ ὑπὸ καρδίας αὐτὸν ἀγαλματοφορεῖσθαι διανοηθέντες γνωσιμαχοῦσιν. ἀεὶ δὴ τὸ τέταρτον ἀκατάληπτον,
1:33οὐρανὸς μὲν ἐν κόσμῳ παρὰ τὴν ἀέρος καὶ γῆς καὶ ὕδατος φύσιν, νοῦς δὲ ἐν ἀνθρώπῳ παρὰ σῶμα καὶ αἴσθησιν καὶ τὸν ἑρμηνέα λόγον. μήποτε μέντοι καὶ τὸ τέταρτον ἔτος „ἅγιον καὶ αἰνετὸν“ ταύτης ἕνεκα τῆς αἰτίας ἐν ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἀναγραφαῖς δηλοῦται (Lev. 19,24)·
1:34τὸ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς γεγονόσιν ἅγιον οὐρανὸς μέν ἐστιν ἐν κόσμῳ, καθ’ ὃν αἱ ἄφθαρτοι καὶ μακραίωνες φύσεις περιπολοῦσιν, ἐν ἀνθρώπῳ δὲ νοῦς, ἀπόσπασμα θεῖον ὤν, καὶ μάλιστα κατὰ Μωυσέα λέγοντα· „ἐνεφύσησεν εἰς τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ πνοὴν ζωῆς, καὶ ἐγένετο ὁ ἄνθρωπος εἰς ψυχὴν ζῶσαν“ (Gen. 2, 7).
1:35καὶ ἑκάτερον δὲ αἰνετὸν οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ μοι δοκεῖ προσειρῆσθαι· τὰ γὰρ δυνάμενα τοὺς ἐπαίνους καὶ ὕμνους καὶ εὐδαιμονισμοὺς ἐκτραγῳδεῖν τοῦ γεννήσαντος πατρὸς ταῦτ’ ἐστίν, οὐρανός τε καὶ νοῦς. ἄνθρωπος μὲν γὰρ ἐξαιρέτου παρὰ τὰ ἄλλα ζῷα γέρως ἔλαχε, θεραπεύειν τὸ ὄν, ὁ δὲ οὐρανὸς ἀεὶ μελῳδεῖ, κατὰ τὰς κινήσεις τῶν ἐν ἑαυτῷ τὴν πάμμουσον ἁρμονίαν ἀποτελῶν·
1:36ἧς εἰ συνέβαινε τὴν ἠχὴν εἰς τὰς ἡμετέρας φθάνειν ἀκοάς, ἔρωτες ἂν ἀκάθεκτοι καὶ λελυττηκότες ἵμεροι καὶ ἄπαυστοι καὶ μανιώδεις ἐγίνοντο οἶστροι, ὡς καὶ τῶν ἀναγκαίων ἀπέχεσθαι τρεφομένους μηκέθ’ ὡς θνητοὶ σιτίοις καὶ ποτοῖς διὰ φάρυγγος, ἀλλ’ ὡς οἱ μέλλοντες ἀπαθανατίζεσθαι δι’ ὤτων μουσικῆς τελείας ἐνθέοις ᾠδαῖς· ὧν ἀκροατὴν Μωυσῆν ἀσώματον γενόμενον λόγος ἔχει τεσσαράκοντα ἡμέρας καὶ τὰς ἴσας νύκτας μήτε ἄρτου μήτε ὕδατος ψαῦσαι τὸ παράπαν (Exod. 24,18).
1:37ὁ τοίνυν οὐρανός, τὸ μουσικῆς ἀρχέτυπον ὄργανον, ἄκρως ἡρμόσθαι δοκεῖ δι’ οὐδὲν ἕτερον ἢ ἵνα οἱ ἐπὶ τιμῇ τοῦ τῶν ὅλων πατρὸς ᾀδόμενοι ὕμνοι μουσικῶς ἐπιψάλλωνται. καὶ τὴν ἀρετὴν μέντοι Λείαν ἀκούομεν ἐπὶ τῆς τοῦ τετάρτου γενέσεως υἱοῦ μηκέτι τίκτειν δυναμένην, ἀλλ’ ἐπέχουσαν ἢ ἐπεχομένην τὰς γονάς· εὕρισκε γάρ, οἶμαι, πᾶσαν τὴν γένεσιν ἐξ αὐτῆς ξηράν τε καὶ στεῖραν, ἡνίκα Ἰούδαν, τὴν ἐξομολόγησιν, τὸν τέλειον καρπόν, ἤνθησε.
1:38διαφέρει δ’ οὐδὲν τὸ λέγειν "ἵστασθαι τίκτουσαν” (Gen. 29, 35) τοῦ μὴ εὑρίσκειν ἐν τῷ τετάρτῳ φρέατι τοὺς παῖδας Ἰσαὰκ ὕδωρ (Gen. 26,32), ἐπειδήπερ ἐξ ἑκατέρου τῶν συμβόλων ἐμφαίνεται τὸ πάντα διψῆν θεοῦ, παρ’ ὃν αἱ γενέσεις καὶ τροφαὶ τοῖς γεγονόσιν ἄρδονται.
1:39μικροπολῖται μὲν οὖν τινες ἴσως ὑπολήψονται περὶ φρεάτων διορυχῆς τὸν τοσοῦτον εἶναι λόγον τῷ νομοθέτῃ, οἱ δὲ δὴ μείζονι ἐγγραφέντες πατρίδι, τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ, τελειοτέρων φρονημάτων ὄντες, εἴσονται σαφῶς, ὅτι περὶ τεττάρων ἐστίν, οὐ φρεάτων, ἀλλὰ τῶν τοῦ παντὸς μερῶν ἡ ζήτησις τοῖς ὁρατικοῖς καὶ φιλοθεάμοσι, γῆς, ὕδατος, ἀέρος, οὐρανοῦ.
1:40ὧν ἕκαστον ἐπινοίαις εἰς ἄκρον πεποιημέναις διεξελθόντες ἐν μὲν τοῖς τρισὶν εὗρόν τινα καταληπτά — διὸ καὶ τρία ὀνόματα ἐπεφήμισαν τοῖς εὑρεθεῖσιν, ἀδικίαν, ἔχθραν, εὐρυχωρίαν (Gen. 26, 20. 21. 22) —, ἐν δὲ τῷ τετάρτῳ τὸ παράπαν οὐδέν, οὐρανῷ, καθάπερ ὀλίγῳ πρότερον ἐδηλώσαμεν· τὸ γὰρ τέταρτον φρέαρ ἄνυδρον καὶ ξηρὸν εὑρίσκεται καὶ ὅρκος διὰ τὴν εἰρημένην αἰτίαν προσαγορεύεται.
1:41Τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα ζητήσωμεν ἐρευνῶντες, τίς ἡ Χαρρὰν καὶ διὰ τί ὁ ἀπὸ τοῦ φρέατος ἐξελθὼν εἰς αὐτὴν ἔρχεται (Gen. 28,10). ἔστι τοίνυν, ὡς ἔμοιγε φαίνεται, Χαρρὰν μητρόπολίς τις αἰσθήσεων. ἑρμηνεύεται γὰρ τοτὲ μὲν ὀρυκτή, τοτὲ δὲ τρῶγλαι, δι’ ἀμφοτέρων τῶν ὀνομάτων ἑνὸς δηλουμένου πράγματος.
1:42τὸ γὰρ σῶμα ἡμῶν εἰς τὰ τῶν αἰσθήσεων ὄργανα τρόπον τινὰ ἐξορώρυκται, καὶ γέγονεν ἕκαστον τῶν ὀργάνων ἑκάστης ὀπή τις αἰσθήσεως, ἐν ᾗ πέφυκε φωλεύειν. ὅταν οὖν τις ἀπὸ τοῦ φρέατος, ὃ καλεῖται ὅρκος, ὥσπερ ἀπὸ λιμένος ἐξαναχθῇ, παραγίνεται εὐθὺς εἰς Χαρρὰν ἀναγκαίως· τὸν γὰρ ἀποδημίαν στελλόμενον ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀρίστου καὶ ἀπειρομεγέθους ἐπιστήμης χωρίου κατ’ ἀναγκαῖον αἰσθήσεις ἄνευ ξεναγῶν ὑποδέχονται.
1:43κινεῖται γὰρ ἡμῶν ἡ ψυχὴ πολλάκις μὲν ἐφ’ ἑαυτῆς, ὅλον τὸν σωματικὸν ὄγκον ἐκδῦσα καὶ τὸν τῶν αἰσθήσεων ὄχλον ἀποδρᾶσα, πολλάκις δὲ καὶ ταῦτα ἐπαμπισχομένη. τὴν μὲν οὖν γυμνὴν κίνησιν αὐτῆς τὰ νοήσει μόνῃ καταληπτὰ ἔλαχε, τὴν δὲ μετὰ σώματος τὰ αἰσθητά.
1:44εἴ τις οὖν ὁμιλεῖν εἰσάπαν ἀδυνατεῖ διανοίᾳ μόνῃ, δευτέραν καταφυγὴν αἴσθησιν εὑρίσκεται, καὶ ὅστις ἂν σφαλῇ τῶν νοητῶν, αὐτίκα πρὸς τὰ αἰσθητὰ κατασύρεται· δεύτερος γὰρ ἀεὶ πλοῦς ὁ πρὸς αἴσθησιν τοῖς μὴ δυνηθεῖσι πρὸς τὸν ἡγεμόνα νοῦν εὐπλοῆσαι.
1:45καλὸν δὲ κἀν τούτῳ γενομένους μὴ καταγηράσαι καὶ διαιωνίσαι, ἀλλ’ ὡς ἐν ξένῃ διατρίβοντας παροίκων τρόπον ἀεὶ μετανάστασιν ζητεῖν καὶ ἐπάνοδον εἰς τὴν πατρῴαν γῆν. Λάβαν μὲν γὰρ οὐκ εἶδος, οὐ γένος, οὐκ ἰδέαν, οὐκ ἐννόημα, οὐκ ἄλλο τῶν νοήσει μόνῃ καταλαμβανομένων οὐδὲν ἁπλῶς εἰδώς, ἠρτημένος δὲ τῶν ἐμφανῶν, ἅπερ εἰς ὄψεις καὶ ἀκοὰς καὶ τὰς συγγενεῖς δυνάμεις ἔρχεται, πατρίδος ἠξίωται Χαρράν, ἣν ὡς ξένην ὁ φιλάρετος Ἰακὼβ πρὸς ὀλίγον οἰκεῖ χρόνον, τῆς οἴκαδε ἐπανόδου διαμεμνημένος.
1:46φησὶ γοῦν ἡ μήτηρ, ἡ ὑπομονή, Ῥεβέκκα πρὸς αὐτόν· „ἀναστὰς ἀπόδραθι πρὸς Λάβαν τὸν ἀδελφόν μου εἰς Χαρράν, καὶ οἴκησον μετ’ αὐτοῦ ἡμέρας τινάς“ (Gen. 27, 43. 44). ἆρα οὖν κατανοεῖς, ὅτι οὐχ ὑπομένει ὁ ἀσκητὴς ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ τῶν αἰσθήσεων καταβιῶναι, ἀλλ’ ἡμέρας ὀλίγας καὶ βραχύν τινα χρόνον διὰ τὰς τοῦ συνδέτου σώματος ἀνάγκας, ὁ δὲ μακρὸς αἰὼν αὐτῷ καὶ βίος ἐν τῇ νοητῇ πόλει ταμιεύεται;
1:47παρό μοι δοκεῖ καὶ ὁ πάππος αὐτοῦ τῆς ἐπιστήμης, Ἀβραὰμ ὄνομα, μὴ πολὺν χρόνον ὑπομεῖναι τῇ Χαρρὰν ἐνδιατρῖψαι. λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι „Ἀβραὰμ ἦν ἐτῶν ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε, ὅτε ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ Χαρράν“ (Gen. 12, 4), καίτοι τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ Θάρρα, ὃς ἑρμηνεύεται κατασκοπὴ ὀσμῆς, μέχρι τελευτῆς ἐν αὐτῇ
1:48βιώσαντος. ῥητῶς γοῦν ἐν ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἀναγραφαῖς δηλοῦται, ὅτι „ἀπέθανε Θάρρα ἐν Χαρράν“ (Gen. 11,32)· κατάσκοπος γὰρ ἦν ἀρετῆς, οὐ πολίτης, καὶ ὀσμαῖς ἀλλ’ οὐ τροφῶν ἀπολαύσεσιν ἐχρῆτο, μήπω ἱκανὸς ὢν ἐμπίπλασθαι φρονήσεως, ἀλλὰ μηδὲ γεύεσθαι, τοῦτο δ’ αὐτὸ μόνον ὀσφραίνεσθαι.
1:49καθάπερ γὰρ τοὺς θηρατικοὺς τῶν σκυλάκων λόγος ἔχει καὶ τὰ πορρωτάτω τῶν θηρίων πτώματα ῥινηλατοῦντας ἀνευρίσκειν ἠκονημένους ὑπὸ φύσεως διαφερόντως τὴν περὶ τὰς ὀσμὰς αἴσθησιν, τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον τὴν ἀπὸ δικαιοσύνης καὶ τῆς ἄλλης ἀρετῆς ἀναδιδομένην ἡδεῖαν αὔραν ὁ παιδείας ἐραστὴς ἰχνηλατεῖ καὶ ποθεῖ μὲν ἐκείναις ἐντυχεῖν, ἐξ ὧν ἀναδίδοται τὸ θαυμασιώτατον γάνωμα τοῦτο, μὴ δυνάμενος δ’ ἐν κύκλῳ κενὴν περιάγει τὴν κεφαλήν, ὀσφραινόμενος αὐτὸ μόνον καλοκἀγαθίας καὶ σιτίων ἱερωτάτης κνίσσης· οὐ γὰρ ἀρνεῖται λίχνος ἐπιστήμης καὶ φρονήσεως εἶναι.
1:50μακάριοι μὲν οὖν οἷς ἐξεγένετο τῶν σοφίας φίλτρων ἀπόνασθαι καὶ τῶν θεωρημάτων καὶ δογμάτων αὐτῆς ἑστιαθῆναι καὶ ἐνευφρανθεῖσιν ἔτι διψῆν, ἄπληστον καὶ ἀκόρεστον ἐπιφερομένοις ἵμερον ἐπιστήμης.
Book 1, §§51–75
1:51δεύτερα δ’ οἴσονται, οἷς ἀπολαῦσαι μὲν οὐκ ἐξεγένετο τῆς ἱερᾶς τραπέζης, κνισσοῦν δὲ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ψυχάς· αὔραις γὰρ ἀρετῆς οὗτοι ζωπυρηθήσονται, καθάπερ τῶν καμνόντων οἱ παρειμένοι διὰ τὸ μὴ δύνασθαι τροφῇ χρῆσθαι τὰς εἰς ἀνάληψιν προσφέρονται ὀσμάς, ἃς ἰατρῶν παῖδες λιποθυμίας ἄκη σωτήρια προευτρεπίζονται.
1:52καταλιπὼν μέντοι τὴν Χαλδαίαν γῆν εἰς Χαρρὰν λέγεται μετανίστασθαι Θάρρα, τόν τε υἱὸν Ἀβραὰμ καὶ τοὺς ὁμογνίους τῆς οἰκίας ἐπαγόμενος, οὐχ ἵν’ ὡς παρὰ συγγραφέως ἱστορικοῦ μάθωμεν, ὅτι μετανάσται τινὲς ἐγένοντο, τὴν μὲν πατρῴαν γῆν καταλιπόντες, τὴν δὲ ξένην ὡς πατρίδα οἰκήσαντες, ἀλλ’ ὑπὲρ τοῦ μάθημα βιωφελέστατον καὶ ἁρμόττον ἀνθρώπῳ μὴ ἀμεληθῆναι. τί δὲ τοῦτό ἐστι;
1:53Χαλδαῖοι μὲν ἀστρονομοῦσιν, οἱ δὲ τῆς Χαρρὰν πολῖται περὶ τὸν τῶν αἰσθήσεων τόπον πραγματεύονται. φησὶν οὖν ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος τῷ κατασκόπῳ τῶν τῆς φύσεως πραγμάτων· τί περὶ ἡλίου ζητεῖς, εἰ ποδιαῖός ἐστιν, εἰ τῆς γῆς μείζων ἁπάσης, εἰ πολλαπλάσιος αὐτῆς; τί δὲ περὶ φωτισμῶν σελήνης, εἰ νόθον ἔχει φέγγος, εἰ γνησίῳ μόνῳ χρῆται; τί δὲ περὶ τῆς τῶν ἄλλων ἀστέρων φύσεως ἢ περιφορᾶς ἢ συμπαθείας πρός τε ἀλλήλους καὶ τἀπίγεια;
1:54τί δὲ βαίνων ἐπὶ γῆς ὑπὲρ νεφέλας πηδᾷς; τί δ’ ἅπτεσθαι τῶν ἐν αἰθέρι φῂς δύνασθαι προσερριζωμένος χέρσῳ; τί δὲ περὶ τῶν ἀτεκμάρτων τεκμαίρεσθαι τολμᾷς; τί δὲ πολυπραγμονεῖς ἃ μή σε δεῖ, τὰ μετέωρα; τί δὲ τὴν ἐν τοῖς μαθήμασιν εὑρεσιλογίαν ἄχρις οὐρανοῦ τείνεις; τί δ’ ἀστρονομεῖς μετεωρολεσχῶν; μὴ τὰ ὑπὲρ σὲ καὶ ἄνω, ὦ οὗτος, ἀλλὰ τὰ ἐγγὺς σαυτοῦ κατανόησον, μᾶλλον δὲ σαυτὸν ἀκολακεύτως ἐρεύνησον.
1:55πῶς οὖν ἐρευνήσεις; ἴθι νοερῶς εἰς Χαρρὰν τὴν ὀρυκτήν, τὰς τρώγλας καὶ ὀπὰς τοῦ σώματος, καὶ ἐπίσκεψαι ὀφθαλμούς, ὦτα, ῥῖνας, τὰ ἄλλα ὅσα καὶ αἰσθήσεως ὄργανα, καὶ φιλοσόφησον ἀναγκαιοτάτην καὶ πρεπωδεστάτην φιλοσοφίαν ἀνθρώπῳ, ζητῶν, τί ὅρασις, τί ἀκοή, τί γεῦσις, τί ὄσφρησις, τί ἁφή, τί καὶ συνόλως αἴσθησις· κἄπειτα τί τὸ ὁρᾶν καὶ πῶς ὁρᾷς, τί τὸ ἀκούειν καὶ πῶς ἀκούεις, τί τὸ ὀσφραίνεσθαι ἢ γεύεσθαι ἢ ἅπτεσθαι καὶ πῶς ἕκαστον αὐτῶν εἴωθε γίγνεσθαι.
1:56πρὶν δὲ τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον καλῶς ἐπεσκέφθαι, τὸν τοῦ παντὸς ἐξετάζειν οὐχ ὑπερβολὴ μανίας; καὶ οὔπω σοι μεῖζον ἐπίταγμα ἐπιτάττω, τὴν σαυτοῦ ψυχὴν ἰδεῖν καὶ τὸν νοῦν, ἐφ’ ᾧ μέγα φρονεῖς· καταλαβεῖν γὰρ αὐτὸν οὔποτε δυνήσῃ.
1:57ἀνάβαινε νῦν εἰς οὐρανὸν καὶ καταλαζονεύου περὶ τῶν ἐκεῖ, μήπω δεδυνημένος γνῶναι κατὰ τὸ ποιητικὸν γράμμα ὅττί τοι ἐν μεγάροισι κακόν τ’ ἀγαθόν τε τέτυκται, καταγαγὼν δ’ ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ τὸν κατάσκοπον καὶ ἀντισπάσας ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκεῖ ζητήσεως γνῶθι σαυτόν, εἶτα καὶ τοῦτ’ ἐπιμελῶς ἐκπόνησον, ἵνα τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης εὐδαιμονίας ἐπιλάχῃς.
1:58τὸν τρόπον τοῦτον Θάρρα μὲν Ἑβραῖοι, Σωκράτην δὲ Ἕλληνες ὀνομάζουσι· καὶ γὰρ ἐκεῖνον ἐγγηράσαι φασὶν τῇ περὶ τοῦ γνῶθι σαυτὸν ἀκριβεστάτῃ σκέψει, μηδὲν ἔξω τῶν καθ’ ἑαυτὸν φιλοσοφοῦντα. ἀλλ’ ὁ μὲν ἄνθρωπος ἦν, Θάρρα δ’ αὐτὸς ὁ λόγος ὁ περὶ τοῦ γνῶναί τινα ἑαυτὸν προκείμενος οἷα δένδρον εὐερνέστατον, ἵν’ ἔχοιεν εὐμαρῶς οἱ φιλάρετοι τὸν περὶ ἠθοποιίαν δρεπόμενοι καρπὸν σωτηρίου καὶ ἡδίστης ἐμπίπλασθαι τροφῆς.
1:59τοιοῦτοι μὲν ἡμῖν οἱ φρονήσεως κατάσκοποι, τῶν δὲ ἀθλητῶν καὶ ἀγωνιστῶν αὐτῆς αἱ φύσεις τελειότεραι· δικαιοῦσι γὰρ οὗτοι τὸν περὶ τῶν αἰσθήσεων σύμπαντα λόγον ἀκριβῶς καταμαθόντες ἐπί τι μεῖζον ἕτερον χωρεῖν θεώρημα, καταλιπόντες τὰς αἰσθήσεως ὀπάς, αἳ Χαρρὰν ὀνομάζονται.
1:60τούτων ἐστὶν ὁ ἐπιδόσεις καὶ βελτιώσεις πρὸς ἐπιστήμης ἄκρας ἀνάληψιν ἐσχηκὼς Ἀβραάμ· ὅτε γὰρ μάλιστα ἔγνω, τότε μάλιστα ἀπέγνω ἑαυτόν, ἵνα τοῦ πρὸς ἀλήθειαν ὄντος εἰς ἀκριβῆ γνῶσιν ἔλθῃ. καὶ πέφυκεν οὕτως ἔχειν· ὁ λίαν καταλαβὼν ἑαυτὸν λίαν ἀπέγνωκε τὴν ἐν πᾶσι τοῦ γενητοῦ σαφῶς προλαβὼν οὐδένειαν, ὁ δ’ ἀπογνοὺς ἑαυτὸν γινώσκει τὸν ὄντα.
1:61Τίς μὲν οὖν ἐστιν ἡ Χαρρὰν καὶ διὰ τί ὁ ἀπολείπων τὸ τοῦ ὅρκου φρέαρ εἰς αὐτὴν ἔρχεται, δεδήλωται. σκεπτέον δὲ τὸ τρίτον καὶ ἀκόλουθον, τίς ὁ τόπος, ᾧ ὑπαντᾷ· λέγεται γάρ, ὅτι „ἀπήντησε τόπῳ“ (Gen. 28, 11).
1:62τριχῶς δὲ ἐπινοεῖται τόπος, ἅπαξ μὲν χώρα ὑπὸ σώματος πεπληρωμένη, κατὰ δεύτερον δὲ τρόπον ὁ θεῖος λόγος, ὃν ἐκπεπλήρωκεν ὅλον δι’ ὅλων ἀσωμάτοις δυνάμεσιν αὐτὸς ὁ θεός. „εἶδον“ γάρ φησι „τὸν τόπον οὗ εἱστήκει ὁ θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ“ (Exod. 24, 10), ἐν ᾧ μόνῳ καὶ ἱερουργεῖν ἐφῆκεν ἀλλαχόθι κωλύσας· διείρηται γὰρ ἀναβαίνειν εἰς τὸν τόπον, ὃν ἂν ἐκλέξηται κύριος ὁ θεός, κἀκεῖ θύειν τὰ ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ τὰ σωτήρια καὶ τὰς ἄλλας ἀμώμους θυσίας ἀνάγειν (Deut. 12,5 ss.).
1:63κατὰ δὲ τρίτον σημαινόμενον αὐτὸς ὁ θεὸς καλεῖται τόπος τῷ περιέχειν μὲν τὰ ὅλα, περιέχεσθαι δὲ πρὸς μηδενὸς ἁπλῶς, καὶ τῷ καταφυγὴν τῶν συμπάντων αὐτὸν εἶναι, καὶ ἐπειδήπερ αὐτός ἐστι χώρα ἑαυτοῦ, κεχωρηκὼς ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμφερόμενος μόνῳ ἑαυτῷ.
1:64ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν οὔκ εἰμι τόπος, ἀλλ’ ἐν τόπῳ, καὶ ἕκαστον τῶν ὄντων ὁμοίως· τὸ γὰρ περιεχόμενον διαφέρει τοῦ περιέχοντος, τὸ δὲ θεῖον ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς περιεχόμενον ἀναγκαίως ἐστὶν αὐτὸ τόπος ἑαυτοῦ. μαρτυρεῖ δέ μοι λόγιον τὸ χρησθὲν ἐπὶ Ἀβραὰμ τόδε· „ἦλθεν εἰς τὸν τόπον ὃν εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ θεός· καὶ ἀναβλέψας τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς εἶδε τὸν τόπον μακρόθεν“ (Gen. 22,3. 4). ὁ ἐλθὼν εἰς τὸν τόπον, εἰπέ μοι, μακρόθεν αὐτὸν εἶδεν;
1:65ἀλλὰ μήποτε δυεῖν πραγμάτων ἐστὶν ὁμωνυμία διαφερόντων, ὧν τὸ μὲν ἕτερον θεῖός ἐστι λόγος, τὸ δὲ ἕτερον ὁ πρὸ τοῦ λόγου θεός.
1:66ὁ δὴ ξεναγηθεὶς ὑπὸ σοφίας εἰς τὸν πρότερον ἀφικνεῖται τόπον, εὑράμενος τῆς ἀρεσκείας κεφαλὴν καὶ τέλος τὸν θεῖον λόγον, ἐν ᾧ γενόμενος οὐ φθάνει πρὸς τὸν κατὰ τὸ εἶναι θεὸν ἐλθεῖν, ἀλλ’ αὐτὸν ὁρᾷ μακρόθεν· μᾶλλον δὲ οὐδὲ πόρρωθεν αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον θεωρεῖν ἱκανός ἐστιν, ἀλλὰ τὸ μακρὰν τὸν θεὸν εἶναι πάσης γενέσεως αὐτὸ μόνον ὁρᾷ καὶ τὸ πορρωτάτω τὴν κατάληψιν αὐτοῦ πάσης ἀνθρωπίνης διανοίας διῳκίσθαι.
1:67μήποτε μέντοι γε οὐδὲ τόπον νῦν ἀλληγορῶν ἐπὶ τοῦ αἰτίου παρείληφεν, ἀλλ’ ἔστι τὸ δηλούμενον τοιοῦτον· „ἦλθεν εἰς τὸν τόπον, καὶ ἀναβλέψας τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς εἶδεν“ αὐτὸν τὸν τόπον, εἰς ὃν ἦλθε, μακρὰν ὄντα τοῦ ἀκατονομάστου καὶ ἀρρήτου καὶ κατὰ πάσας ἰδέας ἀκαταλήπτου θεοῦ.
1:68τούτων προδιωρισμένων, ὅταν εἰς Χαρράν, τὴν αἴσθησιν, ἔλθῃ ὁ ἀσκητής, „ὑπαντᾷ τόπῳ“ (Gen. 28,11), οὔτε τῷ ἐκπεπληρωμένῳ ὑπὸ σώματος θνητοῦ — μετέχουσι γὰρ αὐτοῦ πάντες οἱ γηγενεῖς ἐκπεπληρωκότες χώραν καὶ τόπον τινὰ κατὰ τἀναγκαῖον ἐπέχοντες — οὔτε τῷ τρίτῳ καὶ ἀρίστῳ, οὗ μόλις ἔννοιαν λαβεῖν ἦν ἂν ἐπὶ τοῦ φρέατος ποιούμενον τὰς διατριβάς, ὃ προσηγορεύετο ὅρκος, ᾧ τὸ αὐτομαθὲς γένος, Ἰσαάκ, ἐνδιαιτᾶται μηδέποτε τῆς πρὸς θεὸν πίστεως καὶ ἀφανοῦς ὑπολήψεως ἀφιστάμενον, ἀλλὰ τῷ μέσῳ λόγῳ θείῳ, τὰ ἄριστα ὑφηγουμένῳ καὶ ὅσα πρόσφορα τοῖς καιροῖς ἀναδιδάσκοντι.
1:69οὐ γὰρ ἀξιῶν ὁ θεὸς εἰς αἴσθησιν ἔρχεσθαι τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ λόγους ἐπικουρίας ἕνεκα τῶν φιλαρέτων ἀποστέλλει· οἱ δ’ ἰατρεύουσι καὶ ἐκνοσηλεύουσι τὰ ψυχῆς ἀρρωστήματα, παραινέσεις ἱερὰς ὥσπερ νόμους ἀκινήτους τιθέντες καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ τούτων γυμνάσια καλοῦντες καὶ τρόπον ἀλειπτῶν ἰσχὺν καὶ δύναμιν καὶ ῥώμην ἀνανταγώνιστον ἐμφύοντες.
1:70δεόντως οὖν εἰς αἴσθησιν ἐλθὼν οὐκέτι θεῷ, λόγῳ δ’ ὑπαντᾷ θεοῦ, καθὰ καὶ ὁ πάππος αὐτοῦ τῆς σοφίας Ἀβραάμ. λέγεται γάρ· „ἀπῆλθε κύριος, ὡς ἐπαύσατο λαλῶν τῷ Ἀβραάμ, καὶ Ἀβραὰμ ἀπέστρεψεν εἰς τὸν τόπον αὐτοῦ“ (Gen. 18,33)· δι’ οὗ συνάγεται τὸ λόγοις τοιούτοις ἐντυγχάνειν ἱεροῖς, ὧν ὁ πρὸ τῶν ὅλων θεὸς ἀπήλλακται, μηκέτι τὰς ἀφ’ αὑτοῦ τείνων φαντασίας, ἀλλὰ τὰς ἀπὸ τῶν μεθ’ αὑτὸν δυνάμεων.
1:71ὑπερφυέστατα δ’ ἔχει τὸ μὴ φάναι ἐλθεῖν εἰς τὸν τόπον, ἀλλ’ ἀπαντῆσαι τόπῳ· ἑκούσιον μὲν γὰρ τὸ ἔρχεσθαι, τὸ δ’ ἀπαντᾶν πολλάκις ἀκούσιον, ἵν’ ἐξαπιναίως ὁ θεῖος λόγος ἐπιφαινόμενος ἀπροσδόκητον χαρὰν ἐλπίδος μείζονα ἐρήμῃ ψυχῇ συνοδοιπορεῖν μέλλων προτείνῃ. καὶ γὰρ Μωυσῆς „ἐξάγει τὸν λαὸν εἰς τὴν συνάντησιν τοῦ θεοῦ“ (Exod. 19, 17), σαφῶς εἰδὼς ἐρχόμενον αὐτὸν ἀοράτως πρὸς τὰς ποθούσας ψυχὰς ἐντυχεῖν αὐτῷ.
1:72Τὴν δ’ αἰτίαν ἐπιφέρει, δι’ ἣν τόπῳ ὑπήντησεν· „ἔδυ“ γάρ φησιν „ὁ ἥλιος“ (Gen. 28, 11), οὐχ ὁ φαινόμενος οὗτος, ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἀοράτου καὶ μεγίστου θεοῦ περιφεγγέστατον καὶ περιαυγέστατον φῶς. τοῦθ’ ὅταν μὲν ἐπιλάμψῃ διανοίᾳ, τὰ δεύτερα λόγων δύεται φέγγη, πολὺ δὲ μᾶλλον οἱ αἰσθητοὶ τόποι πάντες ἐπισκιάζονται· ὅταν δ’ ἑτέρωσε χωρήσῃ, πάντ’ εὐθὺς ἀνίσχει καὶ ἀνατέλλει.
1:73μὴ θαυμάσῃς δέ, εἰ ὁ ἥλιος κατὰ τοὺς τῆς ἀλληγορίας κανόνας ἐξομοιοῦται τῷ πατρὶ καὶ ἡγεμόνι τῶν συμπάντων· θεῷ γὰρ ὅμοιον πρὸς ἀλήθειαν μὲν οὐδέν, ἃ δὲ δόξῃ νενόμισται, δύο μόνα ἐστίν, ἀόρατόν τε καὶ ὁρατόν, ψυχὴ μὲν ἀόρατον, ὁρατὸν δὲ ἥλιος.
1:74τὴν μὲν οὖν ψυχῆς ἐμφέρειαν δεδήλωκεν ἐν ἑτέροις εἰπών· „ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν ἄνθρωπον, κατ’ εἰκόνα θεοῦ ἐποίησεν αὐτόν“ (Gen. 1,27), καὶ ἐν τῷ κατὰ ἀνδροφόνων τεθέντι νόμῳ πάλιν· „ὁ ἐκχέων αἷμα ἀνθρώπου ἀντὶ τοῦ αἵματος αὐτοῦ ἐκχυθήσεται, ὅτι ἐν εἰκόνι θεοῦ ἐποίησα τὸν ἄνθρωπον“ (Gen. 9,6), τὴν δὲ ἡλίου διὰ συμβόλων μεμήνυκε.
1:75ῥᾴδιον δὲ καὶ ἄλλως ἐξ ἐπιλογισμοῦ τοῦτο κατιδεῖν, ἐπειδὴ πρῶτον μὲν ὁ θεὸς φῶς ἐστι — „κύριος γὰρ φωτισμός μου καὶ σωτήρ μου“ ἐν ὕμνοις ᾄδεται (Psalm. 26, 1) — καὶ οὐ μόνον φῶς, ἀλλὰ καὶ παντὸς ἑτέρου φωτὸς ἀρχέτυπον, μᾶλλον δὲ παντὸς ἀρχετύπου πρεσβύτερον καὶ ἀνώτερον, λόγον ἔχον παραδείγματος. τὸ μὲν γὰρ παράδειγμα ὁ πληρέστατος ἦν αὐτοῦ λόγος, φῶς — „εἶπε“ γάρ φησιν „ὁ θεός· γενέσθω φῶς“ (Gen. 1,3) —, αὐτὸς δὲ οὐδενὶ τῶν γεγονότων ὅμοιος.
Book 1, §§76–100
1:76ἔπειθ’ ὡς ἥλιος ἡμέραν καὶ νύκτα διακρίνει, οὕτως φησὶ Μωυσῆς τὸν θεὸν φῶς καὶ σκότος διατειχίσαι· „διεχώρισε γὰρ ὁ θεὸς ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ φωτὸς καὶ ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ σκότους“ (Gen. 1,4)· ἄλλως τε ὡς ἥλιος ἀνατείλας τὰ κεκρυμμένα τῶν σωμάτων ἐπιδείκνυται, οὕτως καὶ ὁ θεὸς τὰ πάντα γεννήσας οὐ μόνον εἰς τοὐμφανὲς ἤγαγεν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἃ πρότερον οὐκ ἦν, ἐποίησεν, οὐ δημιουργὸς μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ κτίστης αὐτὸς ὤν.
1:77λέγεται δὲ πολλαχῶς κατὰ τὸν ἱερὸν λόγον ἐν ὑπονοίαις ἥλιος, ἅπαξ μὲν ὁ ἀνθρώπινος νοῦς, ὃν οἰκοδομοῦσιν ὡς πόλιν καὶ κατασκευάζουσιν οἱ γένεσιν πρὸ τοῦ ἀγενήτου θεραπεύειν ἀναγκαζόμενοι, ἐφ’ ὧν εἴρηται ὅτι „ᾠκοδόμησαν πόλεις ὀχυρὰς τῷ Φαραώ, τήν τε Πειθώ“, τὸν λόγον ᾧ τὸ πείθειν ἀνάκειται, „καὶ Ῥαμεσσή“, τὴν αἴσθησιν, ὑφ’ ἧς ὥσπερ ὑπὸ σέων ἡ ψυχὴ διεσθίεται — ἑρμηνεύεται γὰρ σεισμὸς σητός —, „καὶ τὴν Ὤν“, τὸν νοῦν, ἣν Ἡλίου πόλιν ὠνόμασεν (Exod. 1,11), ἐπειδὴ καθάπερ ἥλιος τοῦ παντὸς ἡμῶν ὄγκου τὴν ἡγεμονίαν ἀνῆπται καὶ τὰς αὑτοῦ δυνάμεις ὥσπερ ἀκτῖνας εἰς ὅλον τείνει.
1:78τὸν δὲ ἱερέα καὶ θεραπευτὴν τοῦ νοῦ πενθερὸν ἐπιγράφεται πᾶς ὁ τὴν τοῦ σώματος πολιτείαν ἀναψάμενος, ὄνομα Ἰωσήφ. „ἔδωκε“ γάρ φησιν „αὐτῷ τὴν Ἀσενὲθ θυγατέρα Πετεφρῆ ἱερέως Ἡλίου πόλεως“ (Gen. 41,45).
1:79δεύτερον δὲ ἥλιον καλεῖ συμβολικῶς τὴν αἴσθησιν, ἐπειδὴ τὰ αἰσθητὰ πάντα δείκνυται διανοίᾳ. περὶ ἧς λελάληκεν ὧδε· „ἀνέτειλεν ὁ ἥλιος αὐτῷ, ἡνίκα παρῆλθε τὸ εἶδος τοῦ θεοῦ“ (Gen. 32, 31)· τῷ γὰρ ὄντι ταῖς ἱερωτάταις ἰδέαις καὶ ὡς ἂν εἰκόσιν ἀσωμάτοις ὅταν μηκέτι δυνώμεθα συνδιατρίβειν, ἀλλ’ ἑτέρωσε τρεπόμενοι μεταχωρήσωμεν, ἄλλῳ φωτὶ τῷ κατὰ αἴσθησιν χρώμεθα σκότους πρὸς τὸν ὑγιῆ λόγον οὐδὲν ἁπλῶς διαφέροντι·
1:80ὅπερ ἀνατεῖλαν ὅρασιν μὲν καὶ ἀκοήν, ἔτι δὲ γεῦσιν καὶ ὄσφρησιν καὶ ἁφὴν ὥσπερ κοιμωμένας ἀνήγειρε, φρόνησιν δὲ καὶ δικαιοσύνην ἐπιστήμην τε καὶ σοφίαν ἐγρηγορυίας εἰς ὕπνον ἔτρεψεν.
1:81οὗ χάριν ἁγνεύειν οὐδένα πρὸ ἑσπέρας φησὶν ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος (Lev. 11,24 al.) δύνασθαι, τῆς διανοίας ὑπὸ τῶν κατ’ αἴσθησιν κινήσεων ἔτι παρευημερουμένης. ἄφυκτον δὲ καὶ τοῖς ἱερεῦσι νόμον ἐν ταὐτῷ καὶ γνώμην ἀποφαινόμενος τίθησιν, ἐπειδὰν λέγῃ· „Οὐκ ἔδεται ἀπὸ τῶν ἁγίων, ἐὰν μὴ λούσηται τὸ σῶμα ὕδατι καὶ δύῃ ὁ ἥλιος καὶ γένηται καθαρός“ (Lev. 22, 6. 7).
1:82δηλοῖ γὰρ σαφέστατα διὰ τούτων, ὅτι εὐαγὴς εἰσάπαν οὐδείς ἐστιν, ὡς ταῖς ἁγίαις καὶ ἱεροπρεπέσι χρῆσθαι τελεταῖς, ᾧ τὰς αἰσθητὰς τοῦ θνητοῦ βίου λαμπρότητας ἔτι τετιμῆσθαι συμβέβηκεν. εἰ δέ τις αὐτὰς οὐκ ἀποδέχεται, κατὰ τὸ ἀκόλουθον τῷ φρονήσεως ἐπιλάμπεται φέγγει, δι’ οὗ δυνήσεται τὰς τῶν κενῶν δοξῶν ἐκνίπτεσθαι καὶ ἀπολούεσθαι κηλῖδας.
1:83ἢ τὸν ἥλιον αὐτὸν οὐχ ὁρᾷς, ὅτι τἀναντία καὶ ἀνατέλλων καὶ δυόμενος ἐργάζεται; ἐπειδὰν γὰρ ἀνίσχῃ, τὰ μὲν κατὰ γῆν ἅπαντα περιλάμπεται, τὰ δὲ κατ’ οὐρανὸν ἀποκρύπτεται· δύντος δ’ ἔμπαλιν οἱ μὲν ἀστέρες προφαίνονται, τὰ δὲ περίγεια συσκιάζεται.
1:84τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον καὶ ἐν ἡμῖν, ὅταν μὲν τὸ τῶν αἰσθήσεων φέγγος ὡς ἥλιος ἀνατείλῃ, τὰς ὀλυμπίους καὶ οὐρανίους ὡς ἀληθῶς ἐπιστήμας κρύπτεσθαι συμβέβηκεν· ὅταν δὲ πρὸς δυσμὰς γένηται, τὰς ἀστεροειδεστάτας καὶ θειοτάτας ἀναφαίνεσθαι ἀρετῶν αὐγάς, ὅτε καὶ καθαρὸς ὁ νοῦς ὑπὸ μηδενὸς κρυπτόμενος αἰσθητοῦ γίνεται.
1:85κατὰ δὲ τὸ τρίτον σημαινόμενον ἥλιον καλεῖ τὸν θεῖον λόγον, τὸ τοῦ κατ’ οὐρανὸν περιπολοῦντος, ὡς πρότερον ἐλέχθη, παράδειγμα, ἐφ’ οὗ λέγεται· „ὁ ἥλιος ἐξῆλθεν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ Λὼτ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς Σηγώρ, καὶ κύριος ἔβρεξεν ἐπὶ Σόδομα καὶ Γόμορρα θεῖον καὶ πῦρ“ (Gen. 19, 23. 24).
1:86ὁ γὰρ τοῦ θεοῦ λόγος, ὅταν ἐπὶ τὸ γεῶδες ἡμῶν σύστημα ἀφίκηται, τοῖς μὲν ἀρετῆς συγγενέσι καὶ πρὸς αὐτὴν ἀποκλίνουσιν ἀρήγει καὶ βοηθεῖ, ὡς καταφυγὴν καὶ σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς πορίζειν παντελῆ, τοῖς δὲ ἀντιπάλοις ὄλεθρον καὶ φθορὰν ἀνίατον ἐπιπέμπει.
1:87λέγεται δὲ κατὰ τέταρτον σημαινόμενον ἥλιος μὲν αὐτὸς ὁ τῶν ὅλων ἡγεμών, ὡς εἶπον ἤδη, δι’ οὗ τὰ ἀνίατα τῶν ἁμαρτημάτων ἀνακαλύπτεται συσκιάζεσθαι δοκοῦντα·
1:88πάντα γὰρ ὡς δυνατά, οὕτως καὶ γνώριμα θεῷ. παρὸ καὶ τοὺς καταλυθέντας τῶν τόνων τῶν ψυχικῶν, ἀκολάστως καὶ λαγνίστερον ὁμιλοῦντας ταῖς νοῦ θυγατράσιν, αἰσθήσεσιν, ὡς χαμαιτύπαις καὶ πόρναις, ἐνδειχθησομένους πρὸς ἥλιον ἄγει.
1:89φησὶ γάρ· „καὶ κατέλυσεν ὁ λαὸς ἐν Σαττὶν“ — ἄκανθαι δ’ ἑρμηνεύεται, παθῶν κεντούντων καὶ τιτρωσκόντων ψυχὴν σύμβολον —, „καὶ ἐβεβηλώθη“ φησίν „ἐκπορνεῦσαι εἰς τὰς θυγατέρας Μωάβ“ — αἱ δέ εἰσιν αἱ αἰσθήσεις, κεκλημέναι νοῦ θυγατέρες· Μωὰβ γὰρ ἐκ πατρὸς ἑρμηνεύεται—, καὶ προστίθησι· „λάβε πάντας τοὺς ἀρχηγοὺς τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ παραδειγμάτισον τῷ κυρίῳ ἀπέναντι τοῦ ἡλίου, καὶ ἀποστραφήσεται ὀργὴ κυρίου ἀπὸ Ἰσραήλ“ (Num. 25, 1. 4).
1:90οὐ γὰρ μόνον τὰ κεκρυμμένα τῶν ἀδικημάτων ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι βουλόμενος ταῖς ἡλιακαῖς περιέλαμψεν ἀκτῖσιν, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ συμβόλων ἥλιον τὸν πατέρα τῶν ὅλων ἐκάλεσεν, ᾧ πάντα προὖπτα καὶ ὅσα ἐν μυχοῖς τῆς διανοίας ἀοράτως ἐπιτελεῖται· γενομένων δ’ ἐμφανῶν ἵλεώ φησιν ἔσεσθαι τὸν μόνον ἵλεω. διὰ τί;
1:91ὅτι, ἐὰν ὑπολαβοῦσα διάνοια λήσεσθαι τὸ θεῖον ἀδικοῦσα, ὡς μὴ πάντα καθορᾶν δυνάμενον, κρύφα καὶ ἐν μυχοῖς διαμαρτάνῃ καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα εἴτ’ ἐξ αὑτῆς εἴτε καὶ ὑφηγησαμένου τινὸς ἐννοήσῃ, ὅτι ἀμήχανον ἄδηλον εἶναί τι τῷ θεῷ, καὶ ἑαυτὴν καὶ τὰς ἑαυτῆς πράξεις ἁπάσας ἀναπτύξῃ καὶ εἰς μέσον προενεγκοῦσα καθάπερ εἰς ἡλιακὸν φῶς ἐπιδείξηται τῷ τῶν ὅλων ἐπισκόπῳ φήσασα μετανοεῖν ἐφ’ οἷς πρότερον ἀγνώμονι γνώμῃ χρωμένη κακῶς ἐδόξαζε — μηδὲν γὰρ ἄδηλον, γνώριμα δὲ καὶ δῆλα πάντα, οὐ τὰ πραχθέντα μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰ ἐλπιζόμενα κατὰ πολλὴν περιουσίαν ὑπάρχειν αὐτῷ —, κεκάθαρται καὶ ὠφέληται καὶ τὸν ἐφεστῶτα κολαστὴν ἔλεγχον ἡμέρωκεν ὀργῇ δικαίᾳ χρώμενον, εἰ τὸ μετανοεῖν ἀδελφὸν νεώτερον ὂν
1:92τοῦ μηδ’ ὅλως ἁμαρτεῖν ἀποδέχεται. φαίνεται μέντοι καὶ ἑτέρωθι κατὰ σύμβολον ἐπὶ τοῦ αἰτίου τὸν ἥλιον παραλαμβάνων, ὡς ἐν τῷ γραφέντι νόμῳ περὶ τῶν ἐπ’ ἐνεχύροις δανειζόντων· λέγε τὸν νόμον· „ἐὰν ἐνεχύρασμα ἐνεχυράσῃς τὸ ἱμάτιον τοῦ πλησίον, πρὸ δυσμῶν ἡλίου ἀποδώσεις αὐτῷ· ἔστι γὰρ τοῦτο περιβόλαιον αὐτῷ μόνον, τοῦτο τὸ ἱμάτιον ἀσχημοσύνης αὐτοῦ. ἐν τίνι κοιμηθήσεται; ἐὰν οὖν καταβοήσῃ πρὸς μέ, εἰσακούσομαι αὐτοῦ· ἐλεήμων γάρ εἰμι“ (Exod. 22, 26. 27).
1:93ἆρ’ οὐκ ἄξιον τοὺς οἰομένους τὴν τοσαύτην σπουδὴν εἶναι τῷ νομοθέτῃ περὶ ἀμπεχόνης, εἰ καὶ μὴ ὀνειδίζειν, ἀλλά τοί γε ὑπομιμνῄσκειν φάσκοντας· τί λέγετε, ὦ γενναῖοι; ὁ τῶν ὅλων κτίστης καὶ ἡγεμὼν ἐλεήμονα ἑαυτὸν ἐφ’ οὕτως εὐτελοῦς πράγματος, ἱματίου μὴ ἀποδοθέντος χρεώστῃ πρὸς δανειστοῦ, καλεῖ;
1:94τὸ μέγεθος καθάπαξ τῆς ἀρετῆς τοῦ πάντα μεγάλου θεοῦ μὴ συνεωρακότων τοιαῦτ’ ἐστὶν ὑπολαμβάνειν καὶ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην μικρολογίαν τῇ ἀγενήτῳ καὶ ἀφθάρτῳ καὶ πλήρει μακαριότητος καὶ εὐδαιμονίας φύσει παρὰ θέμιν καὶ δίκην προσνεμόντων.
1:95τί γὰρ ἄτοπον ποιοῦσιν οἱ τὰ ῥύσια κατέχοντες δανεισταὶ παρ’ αὑτοῖς, ἄχρις ἂν τὰ ἴδια ἀναπράξωνται; πένητες οἱ χρεῶσται, φήσει τις ἴσως, καὶ ἄξιον ἐλεεῖν αὐτούς. εἶτ’ οὐκ ἄμεινον ἦν γράψαι νόμον, δι’ οὗ τούτους ἐρανιοῦσι μᾶλλον ἢ χρεώστας ἀποφανοῦσιν ἢ ἐπ’ ἐνεχύροις τοῦ δανείζειν κωλύσουσιν; ὁ δὲ ἐφεὶς οὐκ ἂν εἰκότως ἐπὶ τοῖς ἃ ἔλαβον πρὸ καιροῦ μὴ προιεμένοις δυσχεραίνοι ὡς ἀσεβοῦσι.
1:96πενίας δ’ εἰς αὐτά τις ἐλθών, ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, τὰ πέρατα καὶ ῥάκιον ἓν ἀμπεχόμενος δανειστὰς καινοὺς ἐπάγεται τὸν ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρώντων παρεὶς ἔλεον, ὃς τοῖς κεχρημένοις ταῖς τοιαύταις κακοπραγίαις κατ’ οἰκίαν καὶ παρ’ ἱεροῖς καὶ ἐν ἀγορᾷ καὶ πανταχοῦ προκέχυται;
1:97νυνὶ δὲ καὶ ὃ μόνον εἶχε προκάλυμμα αἰδοῦς, ᾧ τὰ τῆς φύσεως ἀπόρρητα συνεσκίαζε, τοῦτο φέρων προὔτεινε· ῥύσιον ὑπὲρ τίνος, εἰπέ μοι; ἢ ὑπὲρ ἑτέρας ἀμείνονος ἐσθῆτος; τροφῆς μὲν γὰρ ἀναγκαίας ἄπορος οὐδείς, ἄχρις ἂν πηγαὶ μὲν ἀναβλύζωσι, ποταμοὶ δὲ χείμαρροι πλημμυρῶσι, γῆ δὲ τοὺς ἐτησίους ἀναδιδῷ καρπούς.
1:98οὕτω δὲ ἢ βαθύπλουτός τις ἢ λίαν ὠμὸς ὁ δανειστής, ὡς ἢ τετράδραχμον, τάχα δὲ καὶ ἔλαττον ἐθέλειν τῳ συμβαλεῖν ἢ οὕτω πενιχρῷ δανείζειν ἀλλὰ μὴ χαρίζεσθαι ἢ ὃ μόνον ἦν ἱμάτιον ἐκείνῳ λαμβάνειν ἐνέχυρον, ὅπερ ἑτέρῳ ὀνόματι λωποδυτεῖν εἰκότως ἂν λέγοιτο; καὶ γὰρ λωποδύταις ἔθος ἀπαμπίσχουσι τὰς μὲν ἐσθῆτας ἀφαιρεῖσθαι, γυμνοὺς δὲ τοὺς ἔχοντας ἀποφαίνειν.
1:99διὰ τί δὲ νυκτὸς μὲν καὶ τοῦ μὴ ἀνείμονά τινα κοιμηθῆναι προὐνόησεν, ἡμέρας δὲ καὶ τοῦ μὴ ἐγρηγορότα γυμνὸν ἀσχημονεῖν οὐκέθ’ ὁμοίως ἐφρόντισεν; ἢ οὐ νυκτὶ μὲν καὶ σκότῳ κρύπτεται πάντα, ὡς ἧττον ἢ μηδ’ ὅλως αἰδεῖσθαι, ἡμέρᾳ δὲ καὶ φωτὶ ἀνακαλύπτεται, ὡς τότε μᾶλλον ἐρυθριᾶν ἀναγκάζεσθαι;
1:100διὰ τί δ’ οὐ διδόναι τὸ ἱμάτιον, ἀλλ’ ἀποδιδόναι προσέταξεν; ἀπόδοσις γὰρ ἐπ’ ἀλλοτρίοις γίνεται, τὰ δ’ ἐνέχυρα τῶν δεδανεικότων μᾶλλον ἢ τῶν δεδανεισμένων ἐστίν. ἐκεῖνο δὲ οὐκ ἐννοεῖς, ὅτι λαβόντι τῷ χρεώστῃ πρόσκοιτον τὸ ἱμάτιον οὐ προσέταξε μεθ’ ἡμέραν περιελεῖν ἀναστάντι καὶ κομίσαι τῷ δανειστῇ;
Book 1, §§101–125
1:101καὶ μὴν τῷ γε τῆς ἑρμηνείας ἰδιοτρόπῳ καὶ ὁ βραδύτατος ἕτερόν τι τοῦ ῥητοῦ κατανοεῖν ἂν προαχθείη· μᾶλλον γὰρ ἀφορισμῷ ἢ παραινέσει ἔοικε τὸ διάταγμα. παραινῶν μὲν γὰρ εἶπεν ἄν τις· τὸ ἐνεχυρασθὲν ἱμάτιον, ἐὰν τοῦτ’ ᾖ μόνον τῷ χρεώστῃ, πρὸ ἑσπέρας ἀπόδος, ἵν’ ἔχῃ νύκτωρ ἀμπέχεσθαι, ἀφοριζόμενος δὲ οὕτως, ὡς νῦν ἔχει· „ἔστι γὰρ τοῦτο περιβόλαιον αὐτῷ μόνον, τοῦτο τὸ ἱμάτιον ἀσχημοσύνης αὐτοῦ· ἐν τίνι κοιμηθήσεται“ (Exod. 22,27) ;
1:102ταῦτα μὲν δὴ καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα πρὸς τοὺς τῆς ῥητῆς πραγματείας σοφιστὰς καὶ λίαν τὰς ὀφρῦς ἀνεσπακότας εἰρήσθω, λέγωμεν δὲ ἡμεῖς ἑπόμενοι τοῖς ἀλληγορίας νόμοις τὰ πρέποντα περὶ τούτων. φαμὲν τοίνυν λόγου σύμβολον ἱμάτιον εἶναι. τάς τε γὰρ ἀπὸ κρυμοῦ καὶ θάλπους εἰωθυίας τῷ σώματι κατασκήπτειν βλάβας ἐσθὴς ἀπωθεῖται καὶ ἐπισκιάζει τὰ τῆς φύσεως ἀπόρρητα καὶ ἔστιν ἁρμόττων σώματι κόσμος ἡ ἀμπεχόνη.
1:103κατὰ τὸ παραπλήσιον μέντοι καὶ ἀνθρώπῳ λόγος δώρημα κάλλιστον ἐδόθη παρὰ θεοῦ, πρῶτον μὲν κατὰ τῶν νεωτεριζόντων εἰς αὐτὸν ὅπλον ἀμυντήριον — ὡς γὰρ τῶν ἄλλων ἕκαστον ζῴων ἡ φύσις οἰκείοις ἕρκεσιν ὠχύρωσε, δι’ ὧν τοὺς ἐπιχειροῦντας ἀδικεῖν ἀποκρούσεται, καὶ ἀνθρώπῳ μέγιστον ἔρυμα καὶ φρουρὰν ἀκαθαίρετον λόγον δέδωκεν, οὗ κραταιῶς οἷα πανοπλίας ἐνειλημμένος οἰκεῖον καὶ προσφυέστατον ἕξει δορυφόρον· τούτῳ δὲ προαγωνιστῇ χρώμενος δυνήσεται τὰς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐχθρῶν ἐπιφερομένας ἀπωθεῖσθαι ζημίας —,
1:104δεύτερον δὲ καὶ αἰσχύνης καὶ ὀνειδῶν ἀναγκαιότατον περίβλημα — δεινὸς γὰρ συγκρύψαι καὶ συσκιάσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων λόγος —, τρίτον δὲ πρὸς ὅλου τοῦ βίου κόσμον· ὁ γὰρ βελτιῶν ἕκαστον καὶ πάντα ἄγων ἐπὶ τὸ κρεῖττον οὗτός ἐστιν.
1:105ἀλλὰ γάρ εἰσι λῶβαί τινες καὶ κῆρες ἀνθρώπων, οἳ καὶ τὸν λόγον ἐνεχυράζουσιν ἀφαιρούμενοι τοὺς ἔχοντας καί, συναυξῆσαι δέον, ὅλον ὑποτέμνονται, καθάπερ οἱ τὰ τῶν πολεμίων δῃοῦντες χωρία καὶ τόν τε σῖτον καὶ τὸν ἄλλον καρπὸν φθείρειν ἐπιχειροῦντες, ὃς ἀφεθεὶς μεγάλη τοῖς χρησαμένοις ἂν ὄνησις ἦν.
1:106πόλεμος οὖν ἐστιν ἐνίοις ἄσπονδος καὶ ἀκήρυκτος πρὸς τὴν λογικὴν φύσιν, οἵτινες τὰς βλάστας αὐτῆς ἀποκείρουσιν ἐν χρῷ καὶ τὰς πρώτας ἐπιφύσεις ἐκθλίβουσιν, ἄγονον καὶ στεῖραν, ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, καλῶν ἐπιτηδευμάτων ἀπεργαζόμενοι.
1:107ὁρμῶσαν γὰρ ἔστιν ὅτε πρὸς παιδείαν ἀκατασχέτῳ ῥύμῃ καὶ πληχθεῖσαν ἔρωτι τῶν φιλοσοφίας θεωρημάτων ὑπὸ βασκανίας καὶ φθόνου δείσαντες, μὴ μεγάλα πνεύσασα καὶ ἐπὶ μήκιστον ἀρθεῖσα τὰς γλισχρολογίας αὐτῶν καὶ πιθανὰς κατὰ τῆς ἀληθείας εὑρέσεις ἐπικλύσῃ χειμάρρου τρόπον, ἑτέρωσε ταῖς ἑαυτῶν κακοτεχνίαις τὴν φορὰν ἔτρεψαν, εἰς βαναύσους καὶ ἀνελευθέρους τέχνας μετοχετευσάμενοι· πολλάκις δὲ καὶ ἀμβλώσαντες καὶ ἐπιφράξαντες ἀργὸν τὸ μεγαλοφυὲς κατέλιπον, ὥσπερ βαθύγειον καὶ εὐδαίμονα γῆν ὀρφανῶν παίδων ἐπίτροποι κακοὶ χέρσον, καὶ οὐκ ᾐδέσθησαν οἱ πάντων ἀνηλεέστατοι τὸ μόνον ἱμάτιον ἀνθρώπου περισυλῶντες, λόγον· „ἔστι“ γάρ φησι „τοῦτο περιβόλαιον αὐτῷ μόνον“ (Exod. 22,27). τί πλὴν ὁ λόγος;
1:108ὥσπερ γὰρ ἵππου τὸ χρεμετίζειν ἴδιον καὶ τὸ ὑλακτεῖν κυνὸς καὶ βοὸς τὸ μυκᾶσθαι καὶ τὸ ὠρύεσθαι λέοντος, οὕτω καὶ ἀνθρώπου τὸ λέγειν καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ λόγος. τοῦτον γὰρ ἔρυμα, περίβλημα, πανοπλίαν, τεῖχος τὸ ζῷον τὸ θεοφιλέστατον,
1:109ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐκ πάντων ἴδιον κεκάρπωται. διὸ καὶ ἐπιφέρει· „τοῦτο τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτὸ μόνον ἀσχημοσύνης αὐτοῦ“ (Exod. 22,27). τίς ἄλλος γὰρ οὕτως τὰ ὀνείδη καὶ τὰ αἴσχη τοῦ βίου συσκιάζει καὶ συγκρύπτει, ὡς λόγος; ἀμαθία μὲν γὰρ ἀλόγου φύσεως συγγενὲς αἶσχος, παιδεία δὲ ἀδελφὸν λόγου, κόσμος οἰκεῖος.
1:110„ἐν τίνι οὖν κοιμηθήσεται“, τουτέστιν ἠρεμήσει καὶ διαναπαύσεται ἄνθρωπος, πλὴν ἐν λόγῳ; λόγος γὰρ τὸ βαρυποτμότατον ἡμῶν γένος ἐπικουφίζει. ὥσπερ οὖν τοὺς λύπαις ἢ φόβοις ἤ τισιν ἄλλοις κακοῖς πιεσθέντας εὐμένεια καὶ συνήθεια καὶ δεξιότης φίλων πολλάκις ἐθεράπευσεν, οὕτως οὐ πολλάκις ἀλλ’ ἀεὶ τὸ βαρύτατον ἄχθος, ὅπερ ἐπιτιθέασιν ἡμῖν αἵ τε τοῦ συνδέτου σώματος ἀνάγκαι καὶ αἱ τῶν ἔξωθεν κατασκηπτόντων ἀπροόρατοι συντυχίαι, μόνος ὁ ἀλεξίκακος λόγος ἀπωθεῖται.
1:111φίλος γὰρ καὶ γνώριμος καὶ συνήθης καὶ ἑταῖρος ἡμῖν ἐστιν, ἐνδεδεμένος, μᾶλλον δὲ ἡρμοσμένος καὶ ἡνωμένος κόλλῃ τινὶ φύσεως ἀλύτῳ καὶ ἀοράτῳ. διὰ τοῦτο καὶ προλέγει τὰ συνοίσοντα καὶ συμβάντος τινὸς ἀβουλήτου πάρεστιν αὐτοκέλευστος βοηθήσων, οὐ τὴν ἑτέραν φέρων μόνον ὠφέλειαν, ἣν ὁ μὴ δρῶν σύμβουλος ἢ ὁ συναγωνιστὴς ἥσυχος, ἀλλ’ ἀμφοτέρας.
1:112οὐ γὰρ ἡμίεργον ἐπιτετήδευκε δύναμιν, ἀλλὰ πᾶσι τοῖς μέρεσιν ὁλόκληρον· ὅς γε, κἂν σφαλῇ πείρας ἐν οἷς διανοεῖται ἢ ἔργῳ ἐπεξέρχεται, [ἢ] ἐπὶ τὸ τρίτον ἀφικνεῖται βοήθημα, παρηγορίαν. φάρμακον γὰρ ὡς τραυμάτων, καὶ ψυχῆς παθῶν ὁ λόγος ἐστὶ σωτήριον, ὃν "πρὸ δυσμῶν ἡλίου“ φησὶ δεῖν ὁ νομοθέτης ἀποδοῦναι (Exod. 22, 26), τουτέστι πρὶν τὰς τοῦ μεγίστου καὶ ἐπιφανεστάτου θεοῦ καταδῦναι περιλαμπεστάτας αὐγάς, ἃς δι’ ἔλεον τοῦ γένους ἡμῶν εἰς νοῦν τὸν ἀνθρώπινον οὐρανόθεν ἀποστέλλει.
1:113παραμένοντος γὰρ ἐν ψυχῇ τοῦ θεοειδεστάτου καὶ ἀσωμάτου φωτὸς ἀποδώσομεν τὸν ἐνεχυρασθέντα λόγον, ὡς ἱμάτιον, ἵν’ ἐγγένηται τῷ λαβόντι τὸ ἴδιον ἀνθρώπου κτῆμα τήν τε αἰσχύνην τοῦ βίου περιστεῖλαι καὶ τῆς θείας ἀπόνασθαι δωρεᾶς καὶ μετ’ ἠρεμίας ἀναπαύσασθαι παρουσίᾳ τοιούτου συμβούλου καὶ προασπιστοῦ τάξιν ἣν ἐτάχθη μηδέποτε λείψοντος.
1:114ἕως οὖν ἔτι σοι τὸ ἱερὸν φέγγος ὁ θεὸς ἀκτινοβολεῖ, σπούδασον ἐν ἡμέρᾳ τὸ ῥύσιον ἀποδοῦναι τῷ κυρίῳ· δύντος γάρ, ὡς πᾶσα Αἴγυπτος (Exod. 10, 21), ψηλαφητὸν ἕξεις σκότος τὸν αἰῶνα καὶ πληχθεὶς ἀορασίᾳ καὶ ἀγνοίᾳ, ὧν ἐδόκεις ἐπικρατεῖν πάντων ἀφαιρεθήσῃ, πρὸς τοῦ βλέποντος Ἰσραήλ, ὃν ἐρρυσίαζες ἀδούλωτον ὄντα φύσει, δουλούμενος ἀνάγκῃ.
1:115τοῦτον δὴ τὸν δόλιχον ἀπεμηκύναμεν οὐκ ἄλλου του χάριν ἢ τοῦ διδάξαι, ὅτι ἡ ἀσκητικὴ διάνοια κινήσεσιν ἀνωμάλοις πρός τε εὐφορίαν καὶ τοὐναντίον χρωμένη καὶ τρόπον τινὰ ἀνιοῦσα καὶ κατιοῦσα συνεχῶς, ὅταν μὲν εὐφορῇ καὶ πρὸς τὸ ὕψος αἴρηται, ταῖς ἀρχετύποις καὶ ἀσωμάτοις ἀκτῖσι τῆς λογικῆς πηγῆς τοῦ τελεσφόρου θεοῦ περιλάμπεται, ὅταν δὲ καταβαίνῃ καὶ ἀφορῇ, ταῖς ἐκείνων εἰκόσιν, ἀθανάτοις λόγοις, οὓς καλεῖν ἔθος ἀγγέλους.
1:116διὸ καὶ νῦν φησιν· „ἀπήντησε τόπῳ· ἔδυ γὰρ ὁ ἥλιος“ (Gen. 28, 11). ὅταν γὰρ τὴν ψυχὴν ἀπολίπωσιν αἱ τοῦ θεοῦ αὐγαί, δι’ ὧν σαφέσταται αἱ τῶν πραγμάτων γίνονται καταλήψεις, ἀνατέλλει τὸ δεύτερον καὶ ἀσθενέστερον λόγων, οὐκέτι πραγμάτων, φέγγος, καθάπερ καὶ ἐν τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ· σελήνη γὰρ τὰ δευτερεῖα ἡλίου φερομένη καταδύντος ἐκείνου φῶς ἀμυδρότερον ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν ἀποστέλλει.
1:117καὶ τὸ ὑπαντᾶν μέντοι τόπῳ ἢ λόγῳ τοῖς μὴ δυναμένοις τὸν πρὸ τόπου καὶ λόγου θεὸν ἰδεῖν αὐταρκεστάτη δωρεά, διότι τὴν ψυχὴν ἀφώτιστον εἰσάπαν οὐκ ἔσχον, ἀλλ’ ἐπειδὴ τὸ ἄκρατον ἐκεῖνο φέγγος ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ἔδυ, τὸ κεκραμένον ἐκαρπώσαντο. „τοῖς γὰρ υἱοῖς Ἰσραὴλ φῶς ἦν ἐν πᾶσιν οἷς κατεγίνοντο“, φησὶν ἐν Ἐξαγωγῇ (10, 23), ὡς νύκτα καὶ σκότος ἀεὶ πεφυγαδεῦσθαι, μεθ’ ὧν οἱ τὰ ψυχῆς ὄμματα πρὸ τῶν σώματος πεπηρωμένοι ζῶσιν, ἀρετῆς αὐγὰς οὐκ εἰδότες.
1:118ἔνιοι δὲ ἥλιον μὲν ὑποτοπήσαντες εἰρῆσθαι νυνὶ συμβολικῶς αἴσθησίν τε καὶ νοῦν, τὰ νενομισμένα καθ’ ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς εἶναι κριτήρια, τόπον δὲ τὸν θεῖον λόγον, οὕτως ἐξεδέξαντο· ἀπήντησεν ὁ ἀσκητὴς λόγῳ θείῳ δύντος τοῦ θνητοῦ καὶ ἀνθρωπίνου φέγγους.
1:119ἄχρι μὲν γὰρ ὁ νοῦς τὰ νοητὰ καὶ τὰ αἰσθητὰ αἴσθησις οἴεται παγίως καταλαμβάνειν καὶ ἄνω περιπολεῖν, μακρὰν ὁ θεῖος λόγος ἀφέστηκεν· ἐπειδὰν δ’ ἑκάτερον ἀσθένειαν ὁμολογήσῃ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ καὶ τρόπον τινὰ καταδύσει χρησάμενον ἀποκρυφθῇ, προϋπαντᾷ δεξιούμενος εὐθὺς ὁ ἔφεδρος ἀσκητικῆς ψυχῆς ὀρθὸς λόγος ἑαυτὴν μὲν ἀπογινωσκούσης, τὸν δὲ ἐπιφοιτῶντα ἔξωθεν ἀφανῶς ἀναμενούσης.
1:120Φησὶ τοίνυν ἑξῆς ὅτι „ἔλαβεν ἀπὸ τῶν λίθων τοῦ τόπου καὶ ἔθηκε πρὸς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐκοιμήθη ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ἐκείνῳ“ (Gen. 28, 11). θαυμάσαι ἄν τις οὐ μόνον τὴν ἐν ὑπονοίαις πραγματείαν καὶ φυσιολογίαν αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὴν ῥητὴν πρὸς πόνου καὶ καρτερίας μελέτην ὑφήγησιν.
1:121οὐ γὰρ ἀξιοῖ τὸν ἀρετῆς ἐπιμελούμενον ἁβροδιαίτῳ βίῳ χρῆσθαι καὶ τρυφᾶν ζηλοῦντα τὰς τῶν λεγομένων μὲν εὐδαιμόνων πρὸς ἀλήθειαν δὲ κακοδαιμονίας γεμόντων σπουδάς τε καὶ φιλοτιμίας, οἷς πᾶς ὁ βίος ὕπνος καὶ ἐνύπνιόν ἐστι κατὰ τὸν ἱερώτατον νομοθέτην.
1:122οὗτοι μεθ’ ἡμέραν, ὅταν τὰ ἐν δικαστηρίοις καὶ βουλευτηρίοις καὶ θεάτροις καὶ πανταχοῦ πρὸς τοὺς ἄλλους ἀδικήματα διεξέλθωσιν, οἴκαδε ἀφικνοῦνται τὸν ἑαυτῶν οἶκον, οἱ δυστυχεῖς, καταστρέψοντες, οὐ τὸν τῶν οἰκοδομημάτων, ἀλλὰ τὸν συμφυᾶ τῆς ψυχῆς οἶκον, τὸ σῶμα, τροφὰς ἀμέτρους καὶ ἐπαλλήλους εἰσφέροντες καὶ πολὺν ἄκρατον ἄρδοντες, ἕως ἂν βύθιος μὲν ὁ λογισμὸς οἴχηται, τὰ δ’ ὑπὸ γαστέρα πλησμονῆς ἔκγονα πάθη διαναστάντα, λύττῃ χρώμενα ἀκαθέκτῳ, προσπεσόντα καὶ ἐμπλακέντα τοῖς ἐπιτυχοῦσι, τὸν πολὺν οἶστρον ἀπερυγόντα λωφήσῃ.
1:123νύκτωρ δέ, ὁπότε καιρὸς εἴη πρὸς κοῖτον τραπέσθαι, πολυτελεῖς κλίνας καὶ εὐανθεστάτας στρωμνὰς εὐτρεπισάμενοι μαλακῶς σφόδρα κατακλίνονται, τὴν γυναικῶν ἐκμιμούμενοι τρυφήν, αἷς ἡ φύσις ἐπέτρεψεν ἀνειμένῃ χρῆσθαι διαίτῃ, παρὸ καὶ τὸ σῶμα τοῦ μαλθακωτέρου κόμματος ὁ τεχνίτης καὶ ποιητὴς αὐταῖς εἰργάζετο.
1:124τοιοῦτος οὐδεὶς γνώριμος τοῦ ἱεροῦ λόγου, ἀλλ’ οἱ πρὸς ἀλήθειαν ἄνδρες, σωφροσύνης καὶ κοσμιότητος καὶ αἰδοῦς ἐρασταί, ἐγκράτειαν, ὀλιγοδεΐαν, καρτερίαν ὥσπερ κρηπῖδάς τινας ὅλου τοῦ βίου καταβεβλημένοι, ψυχῆς ἀσφαλεῖς ὑποδρόμους, οἷς ἀκινδύνως καὶ βεβαίως ἐνορμιεῖται, χρημάτων καὶ ἡδονῆς καὶ δόξης κρείττους, σιτίων καὶ ποτῶν καὶ αὐτὸ μόνον τῶν ἀναγκαίων, ἐφ’ ὅσον μὴ νεωτερίζειν ἄρχεται λιμός, ὑπερόπται, πεῖναν δέχεσθαι καὶ δίψαν θάλπος τε καὶ κρύος καὶ ὅσα ἄλλα δυσκαρτέρητα ὑπὲρ ἀρετῆς κτήσεως ἑτοιμότατοι, ζηλωταὶ τῶν εὐποριστοτάτων, ὡς μηδ’ ἐπ’ εὐτελεῖ χλαίνῃ ποτὲ δυσωπηθῆναι, τοὐναντίον δὲ τὰς πολυτελεῖς ὄνειδος καὶ μεγάλην τοῦ βίου ζημίαν νομίσαι.
1:125τούτοις πολυτελὴς μέν ἐστι κλίνη μαλακὸν ἔδαφος, στρωμνὴ δὲ θάμνοι, πόαι, βοτάναι, φύλλων πολλὴ χύσις, τὰ δὲ πρὸς κεφαλῆς λίθοι τινὲς ἢ βραχεῖς γεώλοφοι τοῦ ἰσοπέδου μικρὸν ἀνέχοντες. τὸν βίον τοῦτον οἱ μὲν τρυφῶντες σκληροδίαιτον καλοῦσιν, οἱ δὲ πρὸς καλοκἀγαθίαν ζῶντες ἥδιστον ὀνομάζουσιν· ἀνδράσι γὰρ οὐ λεγομένοις ἀλλ’ οὖσιν ὄντως ἐφαρμόζει.
Book 1, §§126–150
1:126οὐχ ὁρᾷς, ὅτι καὶ νῦν βασιλικαῖς ὕλαις καὶ παρασκευαῖς περιουσιάζοντα τὸν ἀθλητὴν τῶν καλῶν ἐπιτηδευμάτων εἰσάγει χαμευνοῦντα καὶ λίθῳ προσκεφαλαίῳ χρώμενον καὶ μικρὸν ὕστερον ἐν ταῖς εὐχαῖς ἄρτον καὶ ἱμάτιον, τὸν φύσεως πλοῦτον, αἰτούμενον (Gen. 28, 20), ἐπειδὴ τὸν ἐν ταῖς κεναῖς δόξαις ἐχλεύαζεν ἀεὶ καὶ τοὺς θαυμαστικῶς ἔχοντας αὐτοῦ κατεκερτόμει; οὗτός ἐστι παράδειγμα ἀρχέτυπον ἀσκητικῆς
1:127ψυχῆς, ἐκτεθηλυσμένῳ καὶ ἀνδρογύνῳ παντὶ πολέμιος. ὁ μὲν οὖν τοῦ φιλοπόνου καὶ φιλαρέτου πρόχειρος ἔπαινος εἴρηται, τὸ δὲ κατὰ σύμβολον μηνυόμενον ἐρευνητέον. εἰδέναι δὲ νῦν προσήκει, ὅτι ὁ θεῖος τόπος καὶ ἡ ἱερὰ χώρα πλήρης ἀσωμάτων ἐστὶ λόγων·
1:128ψυχαὶ δ’ εἰσὶν ἀθάνατοι οἱ λόγοι οὗτοι. τούτων δὴ τῶν λόγων ἕνα λαβών, ἀριστίνδην ἐπιλεγόμενος τὸν ἀνωτάτω καὶ ὡσανεὶ σώματος ἡνωμένου κεφαλὴν πλησίον ἱδρύεται διανοίας τῆς ἑαυτοῦ (Gen. 28, 11)· καὶ γὰρ αὕτη τρόπον τινὰ τῆς ψυχῆς ἐστι κεφαλή. ποιεῖ δὲ τοῦτο πρόφασιν μὲν ὡς κοιμησόμενος, τὸ δ’ ἀληθὲς ὡς ἀναπαυσόμενος ἐπὶ λόγῳ θείῳ καὶ σύμπαντα ἑαυτοῦ τὸν βίον κουφότατον ἄχθος ἐπαναθήσων ἐκείνῳ.
1:129ὁ δὲ ἄσμενος ἐπακούει καὶ δέχεται τὸν ἀθλητὴν ὡς φοιτητὴν ἐσόμενον τὸ πρῶτον, εἶθ’ ὅταν αὐτοῦ τὴν ἐπιτηδειότητα τῆς φύσεως ἀποδέξηται, χειροδοτεῖ τρόπον ἀλείπτου καὶ πρὸς τὰ γυμνάσια καλεῖ, καὶ διερειδόμενος παλαίειν ἀναγκάζει, μέχρις ἂν ἀνανταγώνιστον αὐτῷ ῥώμην ἐγκατασκευάσῃ, τὰ ὦτα θείαις ἐπιπνοίαις μεταβαλὼν εἰς ὄμματα καὶ καλέσας αὐτὸν μεταχαραχθέντα καινὸν τύπον Ἰσραήλ, ὁρῶντα. τότε καὶ τὸν νικητήριον ἐπιτίθησιν αὐτῷ στέφανον.
1:130ὁ δὲ στέφανος ἔκτοπον ἔχει καὶ ξένον καὶ ἴσως οὐκ εὔφημον ὄνομα· καλεῖται γὰρ ὑπὸ τοῦ ἀγωνοθέτου νάρκα. λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι "ἐνάρκησε τὸ πλάτος“ (Gen. 32,25), βραβείων καὶ κηρυγμάτων καὶ τῶν ἐν τιμαῖς ἁπάντων θαυμασιώτατον ἀριστεῖον·
1:131εἰ γὰρ ἡ δυνάμεως ἀκαθαιρέτου ψυχὴ μεταλαβοῦσα καὶ τελειωθεῖσα ἐν ἄθλοις ἀρετῶν καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν ὅρον αὐτὸν ἀφικομένη τοῦ καλοῦ μὴ πρὸς ὕψος ὑπὸ μεγαλαυχίας ἀρθείη μηδ’ ἀκροβατοῦσα ἐπικομπάζοι, ὡς ἀρτίοις ποσὶ μακρὰ βαίνειν δυναμένη, ναρκήσειε δὲ καὶ σταλείη τὸ εὐρυνθὲν οἰήσει πλάτος, εἶθ’ ἑκουσίως ὑποσκελίσασα ἑαυτὴν χωλεύοι, τῶν ἀσωμάτων ὅπως ὑστερίζοι φύσεων, ἡττᾶσθαι δοκοῦσα νικηφορήσει.
1:132τὸ γὰρ πρεσβείων ἐξίστασθαι γνώμῃ μᾶλλον ἢ ἀνάγκῃ τοῖς ἀμείνοσιν λυσιτελέστατον νενόμισται, ἐπεὶ καὶ τὰ δευτερεῖα τῶν ἐν τῷδε τῷ ἀγῶνι τιθεμένων ἄθλων τὰ πρῶτα τῶν ἐν ἑτέροις ἀξιώματος μεγέθει πλεῖστον ὅσον ὑπερβάλλει.
1:133Τὸ μὲν δὴ προοίμιον τῆς θεοπέμπτου φαντασίας ὧδ’ ἔχει, τρέπεσθαι δ’ ἐπ’ αὐτὴν καιρὸς ἤδη καὶ τῶν ἐμφερομένων ἀκριβοῦν ἕκαστον. „ἐνυπνιάσθη“ φησί „καὶ ἰδοὺ κλῖμαξ ἐστηριγμένη ἐν τῇ γῇ, ἧς ἡ κεφαλὴ ἀφικνεῖτο εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, καὶ οἱ ἄγγελοι τοῦ θεοῦ ἀνέβαινον καὶ κατέβαινον ἐπ’ αὐτῆς· ὁ δὲ κύριος ἐπεστήρικτο ἐπ’ αὐτῆς“ (Gen. 28, 12. 13).
1:134κλῖμαξ τοίνυν ἐν μὲν τῷ κόσμῳ συμβολικῶς λέγεται ὁ ἀήρ, οὗ βάσις μέν ἐστι γῆ, κορυφὴ δ’ οὐρανός· ἀπὸ γὰρ τῆς σεληνιακῆς σφαίρας, ἣν ἐσχάτην μὲν τῶν κατ’ οὐρανὸν κύκλων, πρώτην δὲ τῶν πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἀναγράφουσιν οἱ φροντισταὶ τῶν μετεώρων, ἄχρι γῆς ἐσχάτης ὁ ἀὴρ πάντῃ ταθεὶς ἔφθακεν.
1:135οὗτος δ’ ἐστὶ ψυχῶν ἀσωμάτων οἶκος, ἐπειδὴ πάντα τῷ ποιητῇ τὰ τοῦ κόσμου μέρη καλὸν ἔδοξεν εἶναι ζῴων ἀναπληρῶσαι. διὰ τοῦτο γῇ μὲν τὰ χερσαῖα ἐγκατεσκεύαζε, θαλάτταις δὲ καὶ ποταμοῖς τὰ ἔνυδρα, οὐρανῷ δὲ τοὺς ἀστέρας — καὶ γὰρ ἕκαστος τούτων οὐ μόνον ζῷον, ἀλλὰ καὶ νοῦς ὅλος δι’ ὅλων ὁ καθαρώτατος εἶναι λέγεται —· ὥστε καὶ ἐν τῷ λοιπῷ τμήματι τοῦ παντός, ἀέρι, ζῷα γέγονεν. εἰ δὲ μὴ αἰσθήσει καταληπτά, τί τοῦτο; καὶ ψυχὴ γὰρ ἀόρατον.
1:136καὶ μὴν εἰκός γε ἀέρα γῆς μᾶλλον καὶ ὕδατος ζῳοτροφεῖν, διότι καὶ τὰ ἐν ἐκείνοις οὗτος ἐψύχωσεν· ἐποίει γὰρ αὐτὸν ὁ τεχνίτης ἀκινήτων μὲν σωμάτων ἕξιν, κινουμένων δὲ ἀφαντάστως φύσιν, ἤδη δὲ ὁρμῇ καὶ φαντασίᾳ χρῆσθαι δυναμένων ψυχήν.
1:137οὐκ ἄτοπον οὖν, δι’ οὗ τὰ ἄλλα ἐψυχώθη, ψυχῶν ἀμοιρεῖν; διὸ μηδεὶς τὴν ἀρίστην φύσιν ζῴων τοῦ ἀρίστου τῶν περιγείων, ἀέρος, ἀφαιρείσθω· οὐ γὰρ μόνος ἐκ πάντων ἔρημος οὗτος, ἀλλ’ οἷα πόλις εὐανδρεῖ πολίτας ἀφθάρτους καὶ ἀθανάτους ψυχὰς ἔχων ἰσαρίθμους ἄστροις.
1:138τούτων τῶν ψυχῶν αἱ μὲν κατίασιν ἐνδεθησόμεναι σώμασι θνητοῖς, ὅσαι προσγειότατοι καὶ φιλοσώματοι, αἱ δ’ ἀνέρχονται, διακριθεῖσαι πάλιν κατὰ τοὺς ὑπὸ φύσεως ὁρισθέντας ἀριθμοὺς καὶ χρόνους.
1:139τούτων αἱ μὲν τὰ σύντροφα καὶ συνήθη τοῦ θνητοῦ βίου ποθοῦσαι παλινδρομοῦσιν αὖθις, αἱ δὲ πολλὴν φλυαρίαν αὐτοῦ καταγνοῦσαι δεσμωτήριον μὲν καὶ τύμβον ἐκάλεσαν τὸ σῶμα, φυγοῦσαι δ’ ὥσπερ ἐξ εἱρκτῆς ἢ μνήματος ἄνω κούφοις πτεροῖς πρὸς αἰθέρα ἐξαρθεῖσαι μετεωροπολοῦσι τὸν αἰῶνα.
1:140ἄλλαι δ’ εἰσὶ καθαρώταται καὶ ἄρισται, μειζόνων φρονημάτων καὶ θειοτέρων ἐπιλαχοῦσαι, μηδενὸς μὲν τῶν περιγείων ποτὲ ὀρεχθεῖσαι τὸ παράπαν, ὕπαρχοι δὲ τοῦ πανηγεμόνος, ὥσπερ μεγάλου βασιλέως ἀκοαὶ καὶ ὄψεις, ἐφορῶσαι πάντα καὶ ἀκούουσαι.
1:141ταύτας δαίμονας μὲν οἱ ἄλλοι φιλόσοφοι, ὁ δὲ ἱερὸς λόγος ἀγγέλους εἴωθε καλεῖν προσφυεστέρῳ χρώμενος ὀνόματι· καὶ γὰρ τὰς τοῦ πατρὸς ἐπικελεύσεις τοῖς ἐγγόνοις καὶ τὰς τῶν ἐγγόνων χρείας τῷ πατρὶ διαγγέλλουσι.
1:142παρὸ καὶ ἀνερχομένους αὐτοὺς καὶ κατιόντας εἰσήγαγεν, οὐκ ἐπειδὴ τῶν μηνυσόντων ὁ πάντῃ ἐφθακὼς θεὸς δεῖται, ἀλλ’ ὅτι τοῖς ἐπικήροις ἡμῖν συνέφερε μεσίταις καὶ διαιτηταῖς λόγοις χρῆσθαι διὰ τὸ τεθηπέναι καὶ πεφρικέναι τὸν παμπρύτανιν καὶ τὸ μέγιστον ἀρχῆς αὐτοῦ κράτος.
1:143οὗ λαβόντες ἔννοιαν ἐδεήθημέν ποτέ τινος τῶν μεσιτῶν λέγοντες· „λάλησον σὺ ἡμῖν, καὶ μὴ λαλείτω πρὸς ἡμᾶς ὁ θεός, μή ποτε ἀποθάνωμεν“ (Exod. 20, 19). οὐ γὰρ ὅτι κολάσεις, ἀλλ’ οὐδ’ ὑπερβαλλούσας καὶ ἀκράτους εὐεργεσίας χωρῆσαι δυνάμεθα, ἃς ἂν αὐτὸς προτείνῃ δι’ ἑαυτοῦ μὴ χρώμενος ὑπηρέταις ἄλλοις.
1:144παγκάλως δὲ ἐστηριγμένον ἐν τῇ γῇ διὰ συμβόλου κλίμακος φαντασιοῦται τὸν ἀέρα· τὰς γὰρ ἀναδιδομένας ἐκ γῆς ἀναθυμιάσεις λεπτυνομένας ἐξαεροῦσθαι συμβέβηκεν, ὥστε βάσιν μὲν καὶ ῥίζαν ἀέρος εἶναι γῆν, κεφαλὴν δὲ οὐρανόν.
1:145λέγεται γοῦν, ὅτι σελήνη πίλημα μὲν ἄκρατον αἰθέρος οὔκ ἐστιν, ὡς ἕκαστος τῶν ἄλλων ἀστέρων, κρᾶμα δὲ ἔκ τε αἰθερώδους οὐσίας καὶ ἀερώδους· καὶ τό γε ἐμφαινόμενον αὐτῇ μέλαν, ὃ καλοῦσί τινες πρόσωπον, οὐδὲν ἄλλο εἶναι ἢ τὸν ἀναμεμιγμένον ἀέρα, ὃς κατὰ φύσιν μέλας ὢν ἄχρις οὐρανοῦ τείνεται.
1:146ἡ μὲν οὖν ἐν κόσμῳ λεγομένη συμβολικῶς κλῖμαξ τοιαύτη ἐστί, τὴν δ’ ἐν ἀνθρώποις σκοποῦντες εὑρήσομεν τὴν ψυχήν, ἧς βάσις μὲν τὸ ὡσανεὶ γεῶδές ἐστιν, αἴσθησις, κεφαλὴ δ’ ὡς ἂν τὸ οὐράνιον, ὁ καθαρώτατος νοῦς.
1:147ἄνω δὲ καὶ κάτω διὰ πάσης αὐτῆς οἱ τοῦ θεοῦ λόγοι χωροῦσιν ἀδιαστάτως, ὁπότε μὲν ἀνέρχοιντο, συνανασπῶντες αὐτὴν καὶ τοῦ θνητοῦ διαζευγνύντες καὶ τὴν θέαν ὧν ἄξιον ὁρᾶν μόνων ἐπιδεικνύμενοι, ὁπότε δὲ κατέρχοιντο, οὐ καταβάλλοντες — οὔτε γὰρ θεὸς οὔτε λόγος θεῖος ζημίας αἴτιος —, ἀλλὰ συγκαταβαίνοντες διὰ φιλανθρωπίαν καὶ ἔλεον τοῦ γένους ἡμῶν, ἐπικουρίας ἕνεκα καὶ συμμαχίας, ἵνα καὶ τὴν ἔτι ὥσπερ ἐν ποταμῷ, τῷ σώματι, φορουμένην ψυχὴν σωτήριον πνέοντες ἀναζωῶσι.
1:148ταῖς μὲν δὴ τῶν ἄκρως κεκαθαρμένων διανοίαις ἀψοφητὶ μόνος ἀοράτως ὁ τῶν ὅλων ἡγεμὼν ἐμπεριπατεῖ — καὶ γάρ ἐστι χρησθὲν τῷ σοφῷ θεοπρόπιον, ἐν ᾧ λέγεται· "περιπατήσω ἐν ὑμῖν, καὶ ἔσομαι ὑμῶν θεός“ (Lev. 26, 12) —, ταῖς δὲ τῶν ἔτι ἀπολουομένων, μήπω δὲ κατὰ τὸ παντελὲς ἐκνιψαμένων τὴν ῥυπῶσαν καὶ κεκηλιδωμένην ἐν σώμασι βαρέσι ζωὴν ἄγγελοι, λόγοι θεῖοι, φαιδρύνοντες αὐτὰς τοῖς καλοκἀγαθίας δόγμασιν.
1:149ὅσα δὲ ἐξοικίζεται κακῶν οἰκητόρων στίφη, ἵνα εἷς ὁ ἀγαθὸς εἰσοικίσηται, δῆλόν ἐστι. σπούδαζε οὖν, ὦ ψυχή, θεοῦ οἶκος γενέσθαι, ἱερὸν ἅγιον, ἐνδιαίτημα κάλλιστον· ἴσως γάρ, ἴσως ὃν ὁ κόσμος ἅπας, καὶ σὺ οἰκοδεσπότην σχήσεις ἐπιμελούμενον τῆς ἰδίας οἰκίας, ὡς εὐερκεστάτη καὶ ἀπήμων εἰσαεὶ διαφυλάττοιτο.
1:150ἴσως δὲ καὶ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ βίον ὁ ἀσκητὴς φαντασιοῦται κλίμακι ἐοικότα· φύσει γὰρ ἀνώμαλον πρᾶγμα ἄσκησις, τοτὲ μὲν προϊοῦσα εἰς ὕψος, τοτὲ δ’ ὑποστρέφουσα πρὸς τοὐναντίον, καὶ τοτὲ μὲν καθάπερ ναῦς εὐπλοίᾳ τῇ τοῦ βίου, τοτὲ δὲ δυσπλοίᾳ χρωμένη. ἑτερήμερος γάρ, ὡς ἔφη τις, τῶν ἀσκητῶν ὁ βίος, ἄλλοτε μὲν ζῶν καὶ ἐγρηγορώς, ἄλλοτε δὲ τεθνεὼς ἢ κοιμώμενος.
Book 1, §§151–175
1:151καὶ τάχα οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ τοῦτο λέγεται· σοφοὶ μὲν γὰρ τὸν ὀλύμπιον καὶ οὐράνιον χῶρον ἔλαχον οἰκεῖν, ἄνω φοιτᾶν ἀεὶ μεμαθηκότες, κακοὶ δὲ τοὺς ἐν Ἅιδου μυχούς, ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἄχρι τέλους ἀποθνῄσκειν ἐπιτετηδευκότες καὶ εἰς γῆρας ἐκ σπαργάνων φθορᾶς ἐθάδες ὄντες.
1:152οἱ δ’ ἀσκηταὶ — μεθόριοι γὰρ τῶν ἄκρων εἰσὶν — ἄνω καὶ κάτω πολλάκις ὡς ἐπὶ κλίμακος βαδίζουσιν, ἢ ὑπὸ τῆς κρείττονος μοίρας ἀνελκόμενοι ἢ ὑπὸ τῆς χείρονος ἀντισπώμενοι, μέχρις ἂν ὁ τῆς ἁμίλλης καὶ διαμάχης ταύτης βραβευτὴς θεὸς ἀναδῷ τὰ βραβεῖα τάξει τῇ βελτίονι, τὴν ἐναντίαν εἰσάπαν καθελών.
1:153ἐμφαίνεται δ’ ἔτι καὶ τοιοῦτον εἴδωλον, ὅπερ οὐκ ἄξιον ἡσυχασθῆναι. τὰ ἀνθρώπων πράγματα κλίμακι πέφυκεν ἐξομοιοῦσθαι διὰ τὴν ἀνώμαλον αὐτῶν φοράν.
1:154ἡ μία γάρ, ὡς ἔφη τις, ἡμέρα τὸν μὲν καθεῖλεν ὑψόθεν, τὸν δὲ ἦρεν ἄνω, μηδενὸς ἐν ὁμοίῳ πεφυκότος μένειν τῶν παρ’ ἡμῖν, ἀλλὰ παντοίας μεταβαλλόντων τροπάς.
1:155ἢ οὐκ ἄρχοντες μὲν ἐξ ἰδιωτῶν, ἰδιῶται δ’ ἐξ ἀρχόντων, πένητες δ’ ἐκ πλουσίων καὶ ἐκ πενήτων πολυχρήματοι καὶ ἔνδοξοι μὲν ἐξ ἠμελημένων, ἐπιφανέστατοι δὲ ἐξ ἀδόξων ἀεὶ γίνονται καὶ ἰσχυροὶ μὲν ἐξ ἀσθενῶν, ἐκ δὲ ἀδυνάτων δυνατοὶ καὶ συνετοὶ μὲν ἐξ ἀφραινόντων, εὐλογιστότατοι δὲ ἐκ παραπαιόντων·
1:156καὶ ὁδός τις ἥδ’ ἐστὶν ἄνω καὶ κάτω τῶν ἀνθρωπείων πραγμάτων, ἀστάτοις καὶ ἀνιδρύτοις χρωμένη συντυχίαις, ὧν τὸ ἀνώμαλον οὐκ ἀδήλοις ἀλλὰ σαφέσι τεκμηρίοις ὁ ἀψευδέστατος ἐλέγχει χρόνος.
1:157Ἐμήνυε δὲ τὸ ὄναρ ἐστηριγμένον ἐπὶ τῆς κλίμακος τὸν ἀρχάγγελον, κύριον· ὑπεράνω γὰρ ὡς ἅρματος ἡνίοχον ἢ ὡς νεὼς κυβερνήτην ὑποληπτέον ἵστασθαι τὸ ὂν ἐπὶ σωμάτων, ἐπὶ ψυχῶν, ἐπὶ πραγμάτων, ἐπὶ λόγων, ἐπὶ ἀγγέλων, ἐπὶ γῆς, ἐπ’ ἀέρος, ἐπ’ οὐρανοῦ, ἐπ’ αἰσθητῶν δυνάμεων, ἐπ’ ἀοράτων φύσεων, ὅσαπερ θεατὰ καὶ ἀθέατα· τὸν γὰρ κόσμον ἅπαντα ἐξάψας ἑαυτοῦ καὶ ἀναρτήσας τὴν τοσαύτην ἡνιοχεῖ φύσιν.
1:158μηδεὶς δ’ ἀκούων, ὅτι ἐπεστήρικτο, νομισάτω τι συνεργεῖν θεῷ πρὸς τὸ παγίως στῆναι, ἀλλ’ ἐκεῖνο λογισάσθω, ὅτι τὸ δηλούμενον ἴσον ἐστὶ τῷ στήριγμα καὶ ἔρεισμα καὶ ὀχυρότης καὶ βεβαιότης ἁπάντων ἐστὶν ὁ ἀσφαλὴς θεός, ἐνσφραγιζόμενος οἷς ἂν ἐθέλῃ τὸ ἀσάλευτον· ἐπερείδοντος γὰρ καὶ συστηρίζοντος αὐτοῦ μένει τὰ συσταθέντα ἀνώλεθρα κραταιῶς.
1:159ὁ τοίνυν ἐπιβεβηκὼς τῇ οὐρανοῦ κλίμακι λέγει τῷ φαντασιουμένῳ τὸ ὄναρ· „ἐγὼ κύριος ὁ θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ τοῦ πατρός σου καὶ ὁ θεὸς Ἰσαάκ· μὴ φοβοῦ“ (Gen. 28, 13). ὁ χρησμὸς οὗτος τὸ τέρμα τῆς ἀσκητικῆς ψυχῆς καὶ βεβαιότατον ἔρεισμα ἦν, ὃς αὐτὴν ἀνεδίδασκεν, ὅτι ὁ τῶν ὅλων κύριος καὶ θεὸς ἀμφότερα ταῦτα τοῦ γένους ἐστὶν αὐτῷ, πατέρων καὶ πάππων ἐπιγραφεὶς καὶ ἐπικληθεὶς ἑκάτερον, ἵνα τὸν αὐτὸν ὅ τε κόσμος ἅπας καὶ ὁ φιλάρετος ἔχῃ κλῆρον· ἐπεὶ καὶ λέλεκται· „κύριος αὐτὸς κλῆρος αὐτῷ“ (Deut. 10, 9).
1:160Μὴ νομίσῃς δὲ παρέργως τοῦ μὲν Ἀβραὰμ νυνὶ λέγεσθαι κύριον καὶ θεόν, τοῦ δὲ Ἰσαὰκ θεὸν αὐτὸ μόνον. ὁ μὲν γὰρ αὐτηκόου καὶ αὐτοδιδάκτου καὶ αὐτομαθοῦς φύσει περιγινομένης σύμβολον ἐπιστήμης ἐστίν, ὁ δὲ Ἀβραὰμ διδασκομένης· καὶ τῷ μὲν αὐτόχθονι καὶ αὐθιγενεῖ συμβέβηκεν εἶναι, τῷ δὲ μετανάστῃ καὶ ἐπηλύτῳ.
1:161τὴν γὰρ χαλδαΐζουσαν ἀλλογενῆ καὶ ἀλλόφυλον γλῶτταν τῶν περὶ ἀστρονομίαν μετεωρολεσχῶν ἀπολιπὼν ἐπὶ τὴν ἁρμόττουσαν λογικῷ ζῴῳ παρεγένετο, τὴν τοῦ πάντων αἰτίου θεραπείαν.
1:162οὗτος μὲν δὴ ὁ τρόπος δυεῖν δυνάμεων τῶν ἐπιμελησομένων ἐστὶ χρεῖος, ἡγεμονίας καὶ εὐεργεσίας, ἵνα τῷ μὲν κράτει τοῦ ἡγεμόνος ὑπακούῃ τῶν νομοθετουμένων, τῷ δὲ χαριστικῷ μεγάλα ὠφελῆται, ὁ δ’ ἕτερος τῆς κατὰ τὸ χαρίζεσθαι μόνης· οὐ γὰρ ὑπὸ νουθετούσης ἀρχῆς ἐβελτιώθη, φύσει περιπεποιημένος τὸ καλόν, ἀλλὰ διὰ τὰς ὀμβρηθείσας ἄνωθεν δωρεὰς ἀγαθὸς καὶ τέλειος ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἐγένετο.
1:163χαριστικῆς μὲν οὖν δυνάμεως θεός, βασιλικῆς δὲ κύριος ὄνομα. τί οὖν ἄν τις εἴποι πρεσβύτερον ἀγαθὸν ἢ τὸ τυχεῖν ἀκράτου καὶ ἀμιγοῦς εὐεργεσίας, τί δὲ νεώτερον ἢ τὸ κεκραμένης ἔκ τε ἡγεμονίας καὶ δωρεᾶς; ὅ μοι δοκεῖ συνιδὼν ὁ ἀσκητὴς εὔξασθαι θαυμασιωτάτην εὐχήν, ἵνα αὐτῷ γένηται κύριος εἰς θεόν (Gen. 28, 21)· ἐβούλετο γὰρ μηκέτι ὡς ἄρχοντα εὐλαβεῖσθαι, ἀλλ’ ὡς εὐεργέτην ἀγαπητικῶς τιμᾶν.
1:164ἆρ’ οὐχὶ τούτοις καὶ τοῖς παραπλησίοις εἰκὸς ἦν καὶ τοὺς τυφλοὺς διάνοιαν ὀξυδορκήσειν, πρὸς τῶν ἱερωτάτων ἐνομματουμένους λογίων, ὡς φυσιογνωμονεῖν καὶ μὴ μόνον τοῖς ῥητοῖς ἐφορμεῖν; ἀλλὰ κἂν ἡμεῖς καμμύσαντες τὸ τῆς ψυχῆς ὄμμα μὴ σπουδάζωμεν ἢ μὴ δυνώμεθα ἀναβλέπειν, αὐτός, ὦ ἱεροφάντα, ὑπήχει καὶ ἐπιστάτει καὶ ἐγχρίων μή ποτε ἀπείπῃς, ἕως ἐπὶ τὸ κεκρυμμένον ἱερῶν λόγων φέγγος ἡμᾶς μυσταγωγῶν ἐπιδείξῃς τὰ κατάκλειστα καὶ ἀτελέστοις ἀόρατα κάλλη.
1:165σοὶ μὲν δὴ ταῦτα ποιεῖν ἐμπρεπές· ψυχαὶ δ’ ὅσαι θείων ἐρώτων ἐγεύσασθε, καθάπερ ἐκ βαθέος ὕπνου διαναστᾶσαι καὶ τὴν ἀχλὺν ἀποσκεδάσασαι πρὸς τὴν περίβλεπτον θέαν ἐπείχθητε μεθέμεναι τὸν βραδὺν καὶ μελλητὴν ὄκνον, ἵν’ ὅσα θεάματα καὶ ἀκούσματα τῆς ὑμετέρας ἕνεκα ὠφελείας ὁ ἀγωνοθέτης εὐτρέπισε κατανοήσητε.
1:166Μυρία μὲν οὖν ἐστιν ἀοίδιμα τῶν πρὸς ἐπίδειξιν, ἓν δ’ οὖν καὶ τὸ λεχθὲν πρὸ μικροῦ· τὸν μὲν γὰρ γένει πάππον τοῦ ἀσκητοῦ πατέρα εἶπε τὸ λόγιον, τῷ δ’ ὡς ἀληθῶς πατρὶ τὸ τοῦ γεννήσαντος οὐκ ἐπεφήμισεν ὄνομα. λέγει γάρ· „ἐγὼ κύριος ὁ θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ τοῦ πατρός σου„ — καίτοι πάππος οὗτος ἦν — καὶ πάλιν „ὁ θεὸς Ἰσαάκ„ (Gen. 28, 13), εἶτ’ οὐ προστίθησι „τοῦ πατρός σου„.
1:167οὔκουν ἄξιον τὴν τούτων αἰτίαν ἐρευνῆσαι; πάνυ γε. τίς οὖν ἐστι, μὴ παρέργως σκοπήσωμεν. τὴν ἀρετὴν ἢ φύσει ἢ ἀσκήσει ἢ μαθήσει περιγίνεσθαί φησι, διὸ καὶ τρεῖς τοὺς γενάρχας τοῦ ἔθνους σοφοὺς πάντας ἀνέγραφεν, ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς αὐτῆς οὐχ ὁρμηθέντας ἰδέας, πρὸς δὲ τὸ αὐτὸ τέλος ἐπειχθέντας.
1:168ὁ μὲν γὰρ πρεσβύτατος αὐτῶν Ἀβραὰμ ἡγεμόνι ὁδοῦ τῆς πρὸς τὸ καλὸν ἀγούσης ἐχρήσατο διδασκαλίᾳ, ὡς ἐν ἑτέροις, ὡς ἂν οἷόν τε ᾖ, δείξομεν, ὁ δὲ μέσος Ἰσαὰκ αὐτηκόῳ καὶ αὐτομαθεῖ τῇ φύσει, ὁ δὲ τρίτος Ἰακὼβ ἀσκητικαῖς μελέταις, καθ’ ἃς οἱ ἔναθλοι καὶ ἐναγώνιοι πόνοι.
1:169τριῶν οὖν τρόπων ὑπαρχόντων, ἐξ ὧν σοφία περιγίνεται, τοὺς ἄκρους μάλιστα συμβέβηκεν ἡνῶσθαι· τὸ γὰρ ἀσκήσει ἔγγονον τοῦ μαθήσει, τὸ δὲ φύσει συγγενὲς μὲν — ὑποβέβληται γὰρ ὡς ῥίζα πᾶσιν —, ἀνανταγωνίστου δὲ καὶ ἑτοίμου γέρως ἔλαχεν.
1:170ὥστε εἰκότως Ἀβραὰμ ὁ βελτιωθεὶς διδασκαλίᾳ πατὴρ Ἰακὼβ λέγεται, τοῦ μελέτῃ συγκροτηθέντος, οὐκ ἄνθρωπος ἀνθρώπου μᾶλλον ἢ δύναμις ἀκουστικὴ πρὸς μάθησιν ἑτοιμοτάτη δυνάμεως ἀσκητικῆς καὶ ἐπιτηδείου πρὸς ἄθλησιν.
1:171ἐὰν μέντοι ὁ ἀσκητὴς οὗτος εὐτόνως δράμῃ πρὸς τὸ τέλος καὶ τηλαυγῶς ἴδῃ ἃ πρότερον ἀμυδρῶς ὠνειροπόλει, μετατυπωθεὶς τῷ κρείττονι χαρακτῆρι καὶ προσαγορευθεὶς Ἰσραήλ, ὁ θεὸν ὁρῶν, ἀντὶ τοῦ πτερνίζοντος Ἰακὼβ πατέρα οὐκέτι τὸν μαθόντα Ἀβραάμ, ἀλλὰ τὸν φύσει γεννηθέντα ἀστεῖον Ἰσαὰκ ἐπιγράφεται.
1:172ταῦτα δὲ οὐκ ἐμός ἐστι μῦθος, ἀλλὰ χρησμὸς ἐν ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἀναγεγραμμένος στήλαις. „ἀπάρας“ γάρ φησιν „Ἰσραὴλ αὐτὸς καὶ πάντα τὰ αὐτοῦ ἦλθεν ἐπὶ τὸ φρέαρ τοῦ ὅρκου, καὶ ἔθυσε θυσίαν τῷ θεῷ τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἰσαάκ“ (Gen. 46, 1). ἆρ’ ἤδη κατανοεῖς, ὅτι οὐ περὶ φθαρτῶν ἀνθρώπων, ἀλλ’, ὡς ἐλέχθη, περὶ φύσεως πραγμάτων ἐστὶν ὁ παρὼν λόγος; ἰδοὺ γὰρ τὸ αὐτὸ ὑποκείμενον τοτὲ μὲν Ἰακὼβ ὀνομάζεται πατρὸς Ἀβραάμ, τοτὲ δὲ Ἰσραὴλ πατρὸς Ἰσαὰκ καλεῖται διὰ τὴν ἠκριβωμένην αἰτίαν.
1:173Εἰπὼν τοίνυν „ἐγὼ κύριος ὁ θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ τοῦ πατρός σου καὶ ὁ θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ“ ἐπιφέρει· „μὴ φοβοῦ“ (Gen. 28,13), κατὰ τὸ ἀκόλουθον· πῶς γὰρ ἔτι φοβηθησόμεθα, τὸ φόβου καὶ παντὸς πάθους λυτήριον σὲ τὸν ὑπερασπιστὴν ὅπλον ἔχοντες; ὃς καὶ τοὺς ἀρχετύπους τῆς παιδείας ἡμῶν τύπους ἀδηλουμένους ἐμόρφωσας, ἵν’ ἐμφανεῖς ὦσιν, Ἀβραὰμ μὲν διδάξας, Ἰσαὰκ δὲ γεννήσας· τοῦ μὲν γὰρ ὑφηγητής, τοῦ δὲ πατὴρ ὑπέμεινας ὀνομασθῆναι, τῷ μὲν τὴν γνωρίμου τάξιν, τῷ δὲ τὴν υἱοῦ παρασχών.
1:174διὰ τοῦτο καὶ τὴν γῆν, λέγω δὲ τὴν παμφορωτάτην καὶ εὐκαρποτάτην ἀρετήν, ἐφ’ ἧς καθεύδει ὁ ἀσκητὴς ἀναπαυόμενος τῷ τὸν μὲν αἰσθήσεως κοιμᾶσθαι βίον, τὸν δὲ ψυχῆς ἐγρηγορέναι, δώσειν ὁμολογεῖς (Gen. 28, 13), ἀποδεξάμενος αὐτοῦ τὴν εἰρηνικὴν ἀνάπαυσιν, ἣν οὐκ ἄνευ πολέμου καὶ τῶν ἐν πολέμῳ ταλαιπωριῶν εἵλετο, οὐχ ὅπλα βαστάζων καὶ ἀνθρώπους ἀναιρῶν, ἄπαγε, ἀλλὰ τὸ ἀντίπαλον ἀρετῆς παθῶν καὶ κακιῶν στῖφος καθαιρῶν.
1:175τὸ δὲ σοφίας γένος ἄμμῳ γῆς (ibid. 14) ἐξομοιοῦται διά τε πληθὺν ἀπερίγραφον, καὶ διότι τὰς μὲν τῆς θαλάττης ἐπιδρομὰς ἡ ὑποταίνιος ἄμμος ἀνακρούεται, τὰς δὲ τῶν ἁμαρτημάτων καὶ ἀδικημάτων ὁ παιδείας λόγος. οὗτος δὲ κατὰ τὰς θείας ὑποσχέσεις ἄχρι τῶν περάτων τοῦ παντὸς εὐρύνεται καὶ τὸν ἔχοντα ἀποφαίνει τῶν τοῦ κόσμου κληρονόμον μερῶν, φθάνοντα πάντῃ, πρὸς τὰ ἑῷα, πρὸς τὰ ἑσπέρια, τὰ κατὰ μεσημβρίαν, τὰ προσάρκτια· λέγεται γάρ, ὅτι „πλατυνθήσεται ἐπὶ θάλασσαν καὶ λίβα καὶ βορρᾶν καὶ ἀνατολάς“ (ibid. 14).
Book 1, §§176–200
1:176ἔστι δ’ ὁ ἀστεῖος οὐκ ἴδιον μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ κοινὸν ἀγαθὸν ἅπασιν, ἐξ ἑτοίμου τὴν ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ προτείνων ὠφέλειαν. ὡς γὰρ ἥλιος ἁπάντων ἐστὶ φῶς τῶν ὄψεις ἐχόντων, οὕτω καὶ ὁ σοφὸς τῶν ὅσοι λογικῆς κεκοινωνήκασι φύσεως· „ἐνευλογηθήσονται γὰρ ἐν σοὶ“ φησί „πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαί“ (ibid. 14).
1:177ὁ δὲ χρησμὸς οὗτος ἐφαρμόττει καὶ αὐτῷ τινι πρὸς ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἑτέρῳ πρὸς ἕτερον. ἐάν τε γὰρ ὁ ἐν ἐμοὶ νοῦς ἀρετῇ τελείᾳ καθαρθῇ, καὶ αἱ τοῦ περὶ ἐμὲ γεώδους φυλαὶ συγκαθαίρονται, ἃς ἔλαχον αἱ αἰσθήσεις καὶ ἡ μεγίστη δεξαμενή, τὸ σῶμα· ἐάν τέ τις κατ’ οἰκίαν ἢ πόλιν ἢ χώραν ἢ ἔθνος γένηται φρονήσεως ἐραστής, ἀνάγκη τὴν οἰκίαν ἐκείνην καὶ τὴν πόλιν καὶ τὴν χώραν καὶ τὸ ἔθνος ἀμείνονι βίῳ χρῆσθαι.
1:178καθάπερ γὰρ τὰ ἐκθυμιώμενα τῶν ἀρωμάτων εὐωδίας τοὺς πλησιάζοντας ἀναπίμπλησι, τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον ὅσοι γείτονες καὶ ὅμοροι σοφοῦ, τῆς ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ σπῶντες αὔρας ἐπὶ μήκιστον χεομένης βελτιοῦνται τὰ ἤθη.
1:179Μεγίστη δέ ἐστιν εὐεργεσία ψυχῇ πονούσῃ καὶ διαθλούσῃ συνοδοιπόρον ἔχειν τὸν ἐφθακότα πάντῃ θεόν· „ἰδοὺ“ γάρ φησιν "ἐγὼ μετὰ σοῦ“ (ibid. 15). τίνος οὖν ἂν ἔτι χρεῖοι γενοίμεθα πλούτου, σὲ τὸν ἀληθείᾳ πλοῦτον ἔχοντες μόνον „διαφυλάσσοντα ἐν ὁδῷ“ (ibid.) τῇ πρὸς ἀρετὴν ἀγούσῃ κατὰ πάσας αὐτῆς τὰς τομάς; οὐ γὰρ ἓν μέρος ἐστὶ τοῦ λογικοῦ βίου τὸ πρὸς δικαιοσύνην καὶ τὴν ἄλλην τεῖνον ἀρετήν, ἀλλὰ μυρία ὅσα, ἐξ ὧν ἔστιν ὁρμωμένους φρονήσεως ἐφικνεῖσθαι.
1:180παγκάλως δὲ εἴρηται καὶ τὸ "ἀποστρέψω σε εἰς τὴν γῆν ταύτην“ (ibid.). καλὸν μὲν γὰρ ἦν, τὸν λογισμὸν ἐφ’ ἑαυτοῦ μείναντα μὴ ἀποδημῆσαι πρὸς αἴσθησιν· δεύτερος δὲ πλοῦς, ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν ὑποστρέψαι πάλιν.
1:181ἴσως δὲ καὶ τὸ περὶ ἀφθαρσίας ψυχῆς ὑπαινίττεται δόγμα διὰ τούτου· ἀπολιποῦσα μὲν γὰρ τὸν οὐράνιον τόπον, ὡς καὶ μικρῷ πρότερον ἐλέχθη, καθάπερ εἰς ξένην χώραν ἦλθε τὸ σῶμα. φησὶ δ’ οὐ μέχρι τοῦ παντὸς καθειργμένην αὐτὴν ὁ γεννήσας περιόψεσθαι πατήρ, ἀλλ’ οἶκτον λαβὼν λύσειν τὰ δεσμὰ καὶ ἐλευθέραν ἄχρι τῆς μητροπόλεως ἀσφαλῶς παραπέμψειν καὶ μὴ πρότερον ἀνήσειν ἢ τὰς διὰ λόγων ὑποσχέσεις ἀληθείας ἔργοις βεβαιωθῆναι· θεοῦ γὰρ ἴδιον λέγειν πάντως τὰ γενησόμενα. καίτοι τί τοῦτό φαμεν;
1:182ἔργων γὰρ ἀδιαφοροῦσιν αὐτοῦ οἱ λόγοι. διακινηθεῖσα οὖν καὶ διαναστᾶσα πρὸς τὰς περὶ τοῦ ὄντος ζητήσεις ἡ ἀσκητικὴ ψυχὴ τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ὑπετόπησεν εἶναι τὸ ὂν ἐν τόπῳ, μικρὸν δὲ ἐπισχοῦσα τῷ δυστοπάστῳ τῆς σκέψεως περιδεὴς γίνεται καὶ μετανοεῖν ἄρχεται.
1:183„ἐξηγέρθη“ γάρ φησιν „Ἰακὼβ καὶ εἶπεν, ὅτι ἔστι κύριος ἐν τῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ, ἐγὼ δὲ οὐκ ᾔδειν“ (ibid. 16). καὶ ἄμεινον ἦν, εἴποιμ’ ἂν, ἀγνοεῖν ἢ ἔν τινι θεὸν ὑπολαμβάνειν εἶναι, τὸν περιέχοντα αὐτὸν ἐν κύκλῳ τὰ πάντα.
1:184Δικαίως οὖν ἐφοβήθη καὶ εἶπε θαυμαστικῶς· „ὡς φοβερὸς ὁ τόπος οὗτος“ (ibid. 17). ὄντως γὰρ τῶν ἐν φυσιολογίᾳ τόπος ἀργαλεώτατος, ἐν ᾧ ζητεῖται, ποῦ καὶ εἰ συνόλως ἔν τινι τὸ ὄν, τῶν μὲν λεγόντων, ὅτι πᾶν τὸ ὑφεστὼς χώραν τινὰ κατείληφε, καὶ ἄλλων ἄλλην ἀπονεμόντων, ἢ ἐντὸς τοῦ κόσμου ἢ ἐκτὸς αὐτοῦ μετακόσμιόν τινα, τῶν δὲ φασκόντων, ὅτι οὐδενὶ τῶν ἐν γενέσει τὸ ἀγένητον ὅμοιον, ἀλλὰ τοῖς ὅλοις ὑπερβάλλον, ὡς καὶ τὴν ὠκυδρομωτάτην διάνοιαν ὑστερίζουσαν μακρῷ τῆς καταλήψεως ὁμολογεῖν ἡττᾶσθαι.
1:185διόπερ εὐθὺς ἀνέκραγεν· „οὐκ ἔστι τοῦτο“ (ibid.), ὃ ἐδόξασα, „ὅτι ἔστι κύριος ἔν τῳ τόπῳ“ (ibid. 16)· περιέχει γάρ, ἀλλ’ οὐ περιέχεται κατὰ τὸν ἀληθῆ λόγον. τοῦτο δὲ τὸ δεικνύμενον καὶ ὁρατόν, ὁ αἰσθητὸς οὑτοσὶ κόσμος, οὐδὲν ἄρα ἄλλο ἐστὶν ἢ οἶκος θεοῦ (ibid.), μιᾶς τῶν τοῦ ὄντος δυνάμεων, καθ’ ἣν ἀγαθὸς ἦν.
1:186τὸν δὲ κόσμον οἶκον ὠνόμασε καὶ πύλην τοῦ πρὸς ἀλήθειαν οὐρανοῦ (ibid. 17) προσεῖπε. τί δὲ τοῦτ’ ἐστί; τὸν ἐκ τῶν ἰδεῶν συσταθέντα, ἐν τῷ χειροτονηθέντι κατὰ τὰς θείας χορηγίας, κόσμον νοητὸν οὐκ ἔνεστιν ἄλλως καταλαβεῖν ὅτι μὴ κατὰ τὴν τοῦ αἰσθητοῦ καὶ ὁρωμένου τούτου μετάβασιν.
1:187οὐδὲ γὰρ ἄλλο τῶν ὄντων οὐδὲν ἀσώματον ἐννοῆσαι δυνατὸν ὅτι μὴ τὴν ἀρχὴν λαβόντας ἀπὸ σωμάτων· ἠρεμούντων μὲν γὰρ ἐνοήθη τόπος, χρόνος δὲ κινουμένων, σημεῖα δὲ καὶ γραμμαὶ καὶ ἐπιφάνειαι καὶ συνόλως πέρατα ἀπὸ τῆς ἐξωτάτω περικειμένης οἷον ἀμπεχόνης.
1:188κατὰ τὸ ἀνάλογον οὖν καὶ ὁ νοητὸς ἀπὸ τοῦ αἰσθητοῦ κόσμος ἐνοήθη, πύλη τις ὢν ἐκείνου. ὡς γὰρ οἱ βουλόμενοι τὰς πόλεις θεάσασθαι διὰ πυλῶν εἰσίασιν, οὕτως ὅσοι τὸν ἀειδῆ κόσμον καταλαβεῖν ἐθέλουσιν, ὑπὸ τῆς τοῦ ὁρατοῦ φαντασίας ξεναγοῦνται. [ὁ δὲ νοητῆς ὑποστάσεως κόσμος ἄνευ ἡστινοσοῦν σχημάτων ὄψεως, μόνης δὲ διὰ τῆς ἀρχετύπου ἰδέας τῆς ἐν τῷ διαχαραχθέντι πρὸς τὸ θεαθὲν αὐτῷ εἶδος ἄνευ σκιᾶς μετακληθήσεται, πάντων αὐτῷ τειχῶν καὶ πάσης πύλης ἀπαρθέντων εἰς τὸ μὴ ἀπό τινος ἀθρῆσαι, ἀλλ’ αὐτὸ καθ’ αὑτὸ ἀλέκτῳ τινὶ καὶ δυσερμηνεύτῳ θέᾳ διιδεῖν κάλλος ἀναλλοίωτον.]
1:189Περὶ μὲν δὴ τούτων ἅλις. ἐφαρμόζει δὲ τῷ αὐτῷ εἴδει καὶ ἕτερος ὄνειρος, ὁ περὶ τῆς ποικίλης ἀγέλης, ὃν περιαναστὰς ὁ φαντασιωθεὶς διηγεῖται φάσκων· "εἶπέ μοι ὁ ἄγγελος τοῦ θεοῦ καθ’ ὕπνον· Ἰακώβ. ἐγὼ δὲ εἶπα· τί ἐστι; καὶ εἶπεν· ἀνάβλεψον τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς σου καὶ ἴδε τοὺς τράγους καὶ τοὺς κριοὺς ἀναβαίνοντας ἐπὶ τὰ πρόβατα καὶ τὰς αἶγας διαλεύκους καὶ ποικίλους καὶ σποδοειδεῖς ῥαντούς. ἑώρακα γὰρ ὅσα σοι Λάβαν ποιεῖ. ἐγώ εἰμι ὁὁ θεὸς ὁὁ ὀφθείς σοι ἐν τόπῳ θεοῦ, οὗ ἤλειψάς μοι στήλην καὶ ηὔξω μοι εὐχήν. νῦν οὖν ἀνάστηθι καὶ ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς ταύτης καὶ ἄπελθε εἰς τὴν γῆν τῆς γενέσεώς σου, καὶ ἔσομαι μετὰ σοῦ“ (Gen. 31,11 — 13).
1:190ὁρᾷς ὅτι θεοπέμπτους ὀνείρους ἀναγράφει ὁ θεῖος λόγος οὐ μόνον τοὺς κατὰ τὸ πρεσβύτατον τῶν αἰτίων προφαινομένους, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοὺς διὰ τῶν ὑποφητῶν αὐτοῦ καὶ ὀπαδῶν ἀγγέλων, οἳ θείας καὶ εὐδαίμονος μοίρας πρὸς τοῦ γεννήσαντος ἠξίωνται πατρός. σκόπει μέντοι καὶ τὸ ἀκόλουθον.
1:191ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος τοῖς μὲν ὡς βασιλεὺς ἃ χρὴ πράττειν ἐξ ἐπιτάγματος παραγγέλλει, τοῖς δὲ ὡς γνωρίμοις διδάσκαλος τὰ πρὸς ὠφέλειαν ὑφηγεῖται, τοῖς δὲ ὡς σύμβουλος γνώμας εἰσηγούμενος τὰς ἀρίστας τὸ συμφέρον ἐξ ἑαυτῶν οὐκ εἰδότας μεγάλα ὠφελεῖ, τοῖς δὲ ὡς φίλος ἐπιεικῶς καὶ μετὰ πειθοῦς πολλὰ καὶ τῶν ἀρρήτων ἀναφέρει, ὧν οὐδένα τῶν ἀτελέστων ἐπακοῦσαι θέμις.
1:192ἔστι δ’ ὅτε καὶ πυνθάνεταί τινων, ὥσπερ τοῦ Ἀδάμ· „ποῦ εἶ“ (Gen. 3, 9), πρὸς ὃ ἀποκρίναιτ’ ἄν τις οἰκείως „οὐδαμοῦ“, τῷ τἀνθρώπεια πάντα ἐν ὁμοίῳ μὴ μένειν, ἀλλὰ κινεῖσθαι καὶ ψυχῇ καὶ σώματι καὶ τοῖς ἐκτός. ἀνίδρυτοι μὲν γὰρ οἱ λογισμοί, φαντασίας ἀπὸ τῶν αὐτῶν πραγμάτων οὐχὶ τὰς αὐτὰς ἀλλ’ ἐναντίας ἔχοντες, ἀνίδρυτον δὲ καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ὡς μηνύουσιν αἱ ἐκ βρέφους ἄχρι γήρως τῶν ἡλικιῶν ἁπασῶν τροπαί, ἀνίδρυτα δὲ καὶ τὰ
1:193ἐκτὸς ἐπῃωρημένα φορᾷ τύχης ἀεὶ σαλευούσης. ἐπειδὰν μέντοι πρὸς τὸ τῶν φίλων ἔλθῃ συνέδριον, οὐ πρότερον ἄρχεται λέγειν ἢ ἕκαστον αὐτῶν ἀνακαλέσαι καὶ ὀνομαστὶ προσειπεῖν, ἵνα τὰ ὦτα ἀνορθιάσαντες, ἡσυχίᾳ καὶ προσοχῇ χρώμενοι, τῶν θεσμῳδουμένων εἰς ἄληστον μνήμην ἀκούωσιν· ἐπεὶ καὶ ἑτέρωθι λέγεται· „σιώπα καὶ ἄκουε“ (Deut. 27, 9).
1:194τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον ἐπὶ μὲν τοῦ βάτου Μωϋσῆς ἀνακαλεῖται — „ὡς γὰρ εἶδε“ φησίν „ὅτι προσάγει ἰδεῖν, ἐκάλεσεν αὐτὸν κύριος ἐκ τοῦ βάτου λέγων· Μωυσῆ, Μωυσῆ. ὁ δὲ εἶπε· τί ἐστιν;„ (Exod. 3,4) —, Ἀβραὰμ δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς τοῦ ἀγαπητοῦ καὶ μόνου παιδὸς ὁλοκαυτώσεως, ἡνίκα τε ἱερουργεῖν ἤρχετο καὶ ὁπότε δοὺς ἀπόπειραν εὐσεβείας ἐξ ἀνθρώπων ἀφανίσαι τὸ αὐτομαθὲς γένος, ἐπίκλησιν Ἰσαάκ, ἐκωλύθη·
1:195ἀρχομένου μὲν γάρ φησιν, ὅτι „ὁ θεὸς ἐπείραζε τὸν Ἀβραὰμ καὶ εἶπε πρὸς αὐτόν· Ἀβραάμ, Ἀβραάμ. ὁ δὲ εἶπεν· ἰδοὺ ἐγώ. καὶ εἶπε· λάβε τὸν υἱόν σου τὸν ἀγαπητόν, ὃν ἠγάπησας, τὸν Ἰσαάκ, καὶ ἀνένεγκε„, ἤδη δὲ τὸ ἱερεῖον ἐπὶ τὸν βωμὸν ἀνενηνοχότος, τότε „ἐκάλεσεν αὐτὸν ἄγγελος κυρίου ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ λέγων· Ἀβραάμ, Ἀβραάμ. ὁ δὲ εἶπεν· ἰδοὺ ἐγώ. καὶ εἶπε· μὴ ἐπιβάλῃς τὴν χεῖρά σου ἐπὶ τὸ παιδάριον, μηδὲ ποιήσῃς αὐτῷ μηδέν„ (Gen. 22,1. 2. 9 — 12).
1:196εἷς δὲ δὴ τοῦ φιλικοῦ θιάσου καὶ ὁ ἀσκητὴς ὢν εἰκότως προνομίας τῆς αὐτῆς ἀξιωθεὶς ἀνακαλεῖται· „εἶπε γάρ μοι„ φησίν „ὁ ἄγγελος τοῦ θεοῦ καθ’ ὕπνον· Ἰακώβ. ἐγὼ δὲ εἶπα· τί ἐστιν„ (Gen. 31, 11) ;
1:197ἀνακληθεὶς δὲ προσοχῇ χρῆται, τὰ φανέντα σημεῖα πειρώμενος ἀκριβοῦν, ἔστι δὲ τὰ σημεῖα τῶν λόγων οἷα θρεμμάτων ὀχεῖαί τε καὶ γενέσεις· „ἀναβλέψας„ γάρ φησι „τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς εἶδε τοὺς τράγους καὶ τοὺς κριοὺς ἀναβαίνοντας ἐπὶ τὰ πρόβατα καὶ τὰς αἶγας„ (Gen. 31, 12).
1:198αἰπολίου μὲν δὴ τράγος, ποίμνης δὲ κριὸς ἡγεμών ἐστι· τὰ δὲ ζῷα ταῦτα δυεῖν λόγων σύμβολα τελείων, ὧν ὁ μὲν ἕτερος καθαίρει καὶ κενοῖ ψυχὴν ἁμαρτημάτων, ὁ δὲ ἕτερος τρέφει καὶ πλήρη κατορθωμάτων ἐργάζεται. τοιοῦτοι μὲν οἱ ἡγεμόνες ἐν ἡμῖν ἀγελάρχαι λόγοι· αἱ δὲ ἀγέλαι προβάτοις καὶ αἰξὶ φερωνύμως διατεθεῖσαι ᾄττουσι καὶ προβαίνουσι μετὰ σπουδῆς πρὸς δικαιοσύνην.
1:199ἀναβλέψας οὖν τὸ τέως μεμυκὸς ὄμμα τῆς διανοίας εἶδε τοὺς ἀναλογοῦντας τράγοις καὶ κριοῖς τελείους λόγους ἠκονημένους πρός τε μείωσιν ἀδικημάτων καὶ ὧν χρὴ πράττειν συναύξησιν, πῶς ἐπὶ τὰ πρόβατα καὶ τὰς αἶγας, τὰς ἔτι νέας καὶ ἁπαλὰς ψυχὰς ἄρτι ἡβώσας καὶ ἄνθει τῷ τῆς ἀκμῆς ὡραϊζομένας, ἀναβαίνουσιν οὐκ ἄλογον ἡδονὴν διώκοντες, ἀλλ’ ἀοράτῳ σπορᾷ φρονήσεως χρώμενοι δογμάτων.
1:200εὔπαις γὰρ ὁ γάμος οὗτος οὐ σώματα συμπλέκων, ἀλλ’ εὐφυέσι ψυχαῖς τελείας ἀρετὰς ἁρμοζόμενος. ἐπιβαίνετε οὖν οἱ σοφίας ὀρθοὶ λόγοι πάντες, ὀχεύετε, σπείρετε, καὶ ἣν ἂν ἴδητε ψυχὴν βαθεῖαν, εὔγειον, παρθένον, μὴ παρέλθητε, καλέσαντες δ’ εἰς τὴν ὁμιλίαν καὶ συνουσίαν ἑαυτῶν τελειώσατε καὶ ἐγκύμονα ἀπεργάσασθε· τέξεται γὰρ πάντα ἀστεῖα, γενεὰν ἄρρενα „διαλεύκων, ποικίλων, σποδοειδῶν ῥαντῶν“ (Gen. 31, 10).
Book 1, §§201–225
1:201Ἣν δ’ ἔχει τῶν γεννημάτων τούτων ἕκαστον δύναμιν, ἐρευνητέον. διάλευκοι μὲν τοίνυν εἰσὶν οἱ τηλαυγέστατοι καὶ ἀριδηλότατοι, τοῦ „διὰ“ πολλάκις ἐπὶ τοῦ μεγάλου τιθεμένου, ἀφ’ οὗ διάδηλον καὶ διάσημον τὸ μεγάλως δῆλον καὶ μεγάλως ἐπίσημον ἔθος ὀνομάζειν ἐστί.
1:202βούλεται οὖν τῆς τὸν ἱερὸν σπόρον παραδεξαμένης ψυχῆς τὰ πρωτότοκα γεννήματα διάλευκα εἶναι, φωτὶ ἐοικότα οὐκ ἀμυδρῷ, φέγγει δὲ τηλαυγεστάτῳ, οἵα γένοιτ’ ἂν ἀφ’ ἡλιακῶν ἀκτίνων ἄσκιος ἐν αἰθρίᾳ κατὰ μεσημβρίαν αὐγή· βούλεται δὲ καὶ ποικίλα οὐ πολυμόρφου καὶ πολυτρόπου λέπρας ἀκαθάρτου τρόπον, διὰ γνώμης ἀβεβαιότητα χρησόμενα ἀστάτῳ καὶ φορουμένῳ βίῳ, ἀλλὰ γράμμασιν ἐγκεκολαμμένα καὶ σφραγῖσι διαφόροις, δοκίμοις δὲ πάσαις τετυπωμένα, ὧν αἱ ἰδιότητες ἀναμιχθεῖσαι καὶ ἀνακραθεῖσαι μουσικὴν συμφωνίαν ἐργάσονται.
1:203τὴν γὰρ ποικιλτικὴν τέχνην ἐνόμισαν μέν τινες οὕτως ἠμελημένον καὶ ἀφανὲς εἶναι πρᾶγμα, ὥστε ὑφάνταις αὐτὴν ἀνέθεσαν. ἐγὼ δ’ οὐ μόνον αὐτήν, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοὔνομα τέθηπα, καὶ μάλισθ’ ὅταν εἰς τὰ γῆς τμήματα καὶ τὰς ἐν οὐρανῷ σφαίρας καὶ ζῴων καὶ φυτῶν διαφορὰς καὶ τὸ παμποίκιλον ὕφασμα, τουτονὶ τὸν κόσμον, ἀπίδω.
1:204τὸν γὰρ τοῦ πλέγματος παντὸς τούτου δημιουργὸν εὑρετὴν τῆς ποικιλτικῆς ἐπινοεῖν εὐθὺς ἐπιστήμης ἀναγκάζομαι, καὶ σέβομαι μὲν τὸν εὑρόντα, τιμῶ δὲ τὴν εὑρεθεῖσαν, τὸ δ’ ἔργον καταπέπληγμαι, καίτοι μηδὲ πολλοστὸν μέρος αὐτοῦ δυνηθεὶς ἰδεῖν, ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ φανέντος μοι μέρους, εἰ δὴ καὶ πέφηνεν, ἀκριβῶς τὸ ὅλον εἰκάζων ἀναλογίας ἐλπίδι.
1:205θαυμάζω μέντοι καὶ τὸν σοφίας ἐραστήν, ὅτι τὴν αὐτὴν τέχνην ἐπιτετήδευκε, πολλὰ καὶ διαφέροντα ἐκ διαφερόντων εἰς ταὐτὸ συνάγειν καὶ συνυφαίνειν ἀξιῶν. λαβὼν γὰρ ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς παιδικῆς γραμματικῆς δύο τὰ πρῶτα, τό τε γράφειν καὶ τὸ ἀναγινώσκειν, ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς τελειοτέρας τήν τε παρὰ ποιηταῖς ἐμπειρίαν καὶ τὴν ἀρχαίας ἱστορίας ἀνάληψιν, παρὰ δὲ ἀριθμητικῆς καὶ γεωμετρίας τὸ ἀνεξαπάτητον ἐν οἷς ἀναλογίας καὶ λογισμῶν ἐστι χρεία, παρὰ δὲ μουσικῆς ῥυθμοὺς καὶ μέτρα τά τε ἐναρμόνια καὶ χρωματικὰ καὶ διατονικά, συνημμένα τε αὖ καὶ διεζευγμένα μέλη, παρὰ δὲ ῥητορικῆς εὕρεσιν, φράσιν, τάξιν, οἰκονομίαν, μνήμην, ὑπόκρισιν, παρὰ δὲ φιλοσοφίας ὅσα τε ἐν ταύταις παραλέλειπται καὶ ἄλλα ἐξ ὧν ἅπας ὁ ἀνθρώπων βίος συνέστηκεν, ἓν ἔργον εὐανθέστατον ἡρμόσατο, εὐμάθειαν πολυμαθείᾳ μίξας.
1:206καὶ τὸν τούτου τοῦ πλέγματος δημιουργὸν ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος Βεσελεὴλ ἐκάλεσεν (Exod. 31, 2 ss.), ὃς ἑρμηνευθείς ἐστιν ἐν σκιᾷ θεοῦ. τὰ γὰρ μιμήματα οὗτος, τὰ δὲ παραδείγματα ἀρχιτεκτονεῖ Μωυσῆς· διὰ τοῦθ’ ὁὁ μὲν οἷα σκιὰς ὑπεγράφετο, ὁὁ δ’ οὐ σκιάς, αὐτὰς δὲ τὰς ἀρχετύπους ἐδημιούργει φύσεις.
1:207εἰ δὴ καὶ τὰ ἅγια ποικιλτικῇ τέχνῃ κατεσκεύασται καὶ ὁ σοφὸς ποικιλτὴς μόνος ἐν τοῖς ἱεροφαντηθεῖσι χρησμοῖς ἀνείρηται καὶ τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ καλὸν ποίκιλμα, ὅδε ὁ κόσμος, ἐπιστήμῃ πανσόφῳ τετελεσιούργηται, πῶς οὐκ ἄξιον ὡς ἐργαλεῖον τῆς ἐπιστήμης ἀποδέχεσθαι ποικιλτικήν;
1:208ἧς ἀφίδρυμα ἱερώτατον πᾶς ὁ σοφίας οἶκος ἀγαλματοφορήσει καὶ κατ’ οὐρανὸν καὶ ἐπὶ γῆς, ἀφ’ ἧς ποικίλων λόγων ἰδέας ὁ ἀσκητὴς ἐκπονεῖ· μετὰ γὰρ τοὺς διαλεύκους εὐθὺς τοὺς ποικίλους εἶδε, παιδείας κόμματι χαραχθέντας. τρίτοι δ’ εἰσὶν οἱ σποδοειδεῖς ῥαντοί.
1:209καίτοι τίς οὐκ ἂν εὖ φρονῶν εἴποι τῷ γένει καὶ τούτους εἶναι ποικίλους; ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὐκ ἔστιν αὐτῷ περὶ θρεμμάτων διαφορᾶς ἡ τοσαύτη σπουδή, περὶ μέντοι τῆς πρὸς καλοκἀγαθίαν ἀγούσης ὁδοῦ.
1:210βούλεται γὰρ τὸν ἐπὶ ταύτην ἰόντα σποδῷ καὶ ὕδατι περιρραίνεσθαι, διότι γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ λόγος ἔχει φυραθέντα καὶ μορφωθέντα πρὸς τοῦ ἀνθρωποπλάστου εἰς τὸ ἡμέτερον ἀποκριθῆναι σῶμα, οὐ χειρόκμητον, ἀλλὰ φύσεως ἔργον ἀοράτου.
1:211σοφίας οὖν ἐστιν ἀρχὴ μὴ ἐπιλανθάνεσθαι ἑαυτοῦ, τὰ δ’ ἐξ ὧν συνεκρίθη πρὸ ὀφθαλμῶν ἀεὶ λαμβάνειν· οὕτως γὰρ μεγαλαυχίαν, τὸ κακῶν θεομισέστατον, ἐκνίψαιτ’ ἄν. τίς γὰρ εἰς νοῦν βαλλόμενος, ὅτι τέφρα καὶ ὕδωρ εἰσὶν αὐτῷ τῆς γενέσεως αἱ ἀρχαί, φυσηθεὶς ὑπ’ οἰήσεως μετέωρος ἀρθήσεται;
1:212διὰ τοῦτο καὶ τοὺς μέλλοντας ἱερουργεῖν περιρραίνεσθαι τοῖς λεχθεῖσιν ἐδικαίωσεν, οὐδένα θυσιῶν ἄξιον νομίσας, ὃς μὴ πρότερον ἑαυτὸν ἔγνωκε καὶ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην οὐδένειαν κατείληφεν, ἐξ ὧν συνεκρίθη στοιχείων τὸ μηδενὸς ἄξιος εἶναι τεκμηράμενος.
1:213τὰ τρία ταῦτα σημεῖα, τὸ διάλευκον, τὸ ποικίλον, τὸ σποδοειδὲς ῥαντόν, περὶ μὲν τὸν ἀσκητὴν ἅτε μήπω τέλειον ἀτελῆ, περὶ δὲ τὸν τέλειον φαίνεται καὶ αὐτὰ τέλεια.
1:214ὃν δὲ τρόπον, θεασώμεθα· τὸν μέγαν ἀρχιερέα, ὁπότε μέλλοι τὰς νόμῳ προστεταγμένας ἐπιτελεῖν λειτουργίας, ὁ ἱερὸς ἐδικαίωσε λόγος ὕδατι καὶ τέφρᾳ περιρραίνεσθαι τὸ πρῶτον (Exod. 29, 4) εἰς ὑπόμνησιν ἑαυτοῦ — καὶ γὰρ ὁ σοφὸς Ἀβραάμ, ὅτε ἐντευξόμενος ᾔει τῷ θεῷ, γῆν καὶ σποδὸν εἶπεν ἑαυτόν (Gen. 18, 27) —, ἔπειτ’ ἐνδύεσθαι τὸν ποδήρη χιτῶνα καὶ τὸ ποικίλον ὃ κέκληκεν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ περιστήθιον (Exod. 29, 5), τῶν κατ’ οὐρανὸν φωσφόρων ἄστρων ἀπεικόνισμα καὶ μίμημα.
1:215δύο γάρ, ὡς ἔοικεν, ἱερὰ θεοῦ, ἓν μὲν ὅδε ὁὁ κόσμος, ἐν ᾧ καὶ ἀρχιερεὺς ὁὁ πρωτόγονος αὐτοῦ θεῖος λόγος, ἕτερον δὲ λογικὴ ψυχή, ἧς ἱερεὺς ὁ πρὸς ἀλήθειαν ἄνθρωπος, οὗ μίμημα αἰσθητὸν ὁ τὰς πατρίους εὐχὰς καὶ θυσίας ἐπιτελῶν ἐστιν, ᾧ τὸν εἰρημένον ἐπιτέτραπται χιτῶνα ἐνδύεσθαι, τοῦ παντὸς ἀντίμιμον ὄντα οὐρανοῦ, ἵνα συνιερουργῇ καὶ ὁ κόσμος ἀνθρώπῳ καὶ τῷ παντὶ ἄνθρωπος.
1:216δύο μὲν οὖν ἤδη, τόν τε ῥαντὸν καὶ τὸν ποικίλον τύπον, ἔχων ἐπιδέδεικται· τὸν δὲ τρίτον καὶ τελειότατον, ὃς ὀνομάζεται διάλευκος, αὐτίκα σημανοῦμεν. ὅταν εἰς τὰ ἐσωτάτω τῶν ἁγίων ὁ αὐτὸς οὗτος ἀρχιερεὺς εἰσίῃ, τὴν μὲν ποικίλην ἐσθῆτα ἀπαμπίσχεται, λινῆν δὲ ἑτέραν, βύσσου τῆς καθαρωτάτης πεποιημένην, ἀναλαμβάνει (Lev. 16, 4).
1:217ἡ δ’ ἐστὶ σύμβολον εὐτονίας, ἀφθαρσίας, αὐγοειδεστάτου φέγγους· ἀρραγής τε γὰρ ἡ ὀθόνη καὶ ἐξ οὐδενὸς τῶν ἀποθνῃσκόντων γίνεται καὶ ἔτι λαμπρότατον καὶ φωτοειδέστατον ἔχει μὴ ἀμελῶς καθαρθεῖσα χρῶμα.
1:218διὰ δὲ τούτων ἐκεῖνο αἰνίττεται, ὅτι τῶν ἀδόλως καὶ καθαρῶς θεραπευόντων τὸ ὂν οὐδείς ἐστιν ὃς μὴ πρῶτον μὲν ἰσχυρογνωμοσύνῃ κέχρηται καταφρονήσας τῶν ἀνθρωπείων πραγμάτων, ἃ δελεάζοντα κηραίνει καὶ ἀσθένειαν ἐργάζεται, ἔπειτα ἀφθαρσίας ἐφίεται γελάσας ὅσα οἱ θνητοὶ τυφοπλαστοῦσι, τελευταῖον δὲ ἀληθείας ἀσκίῳ φέγγει καὶ περιαυγεῖ καταλάμπεται, μηδὲν ἔτι τῶν τῆς ψευδοῦς δόξης, ἃ σκότῳ φίλα εἶναι συμβέβηκε, προσιέμενος.
1:219ὁ μὲν δὴ μέγας ἀρχιερεὺς τρισὶ ταῖς εἰρημέναις τυπωθεὶς σφραγῖσι, τῇ διαλεύκῳ, τῇ ποικίλῃ, τῇ σποδοειδεῖ ῥαντῇ, τοιοῦτος ἡμῖν ἀναγεγράφθω· τὸν δὲ τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης πολιτείας ἐφιέμενον, Ἰωσὴφ ὄνομα, τῶν μὲν ἄκρων ἰδεῖν ἔστι μὴ μεταποιούμενον χαρακτήρων, μόνου δὲ τοῦ μέσου καὶ ποικίλου.
1:220λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι χιτῶνα ποικίλον ἔσχεν (Gen. 37,3), οὔτε καθαρσίοις περιρρανάμενος ἱεροῖς, ἀφ’ ὧν ἑαυτὸν ἂν ἔγνω τέφρας καὶ ὕδατος συμφόρημα, οὔτε τῆς πανλεύκου καὶ φωτοειδεστάτης ἐσθῆτος, ἀρετῆς, ψαῦσαι δυνηθείς, ἀλλὰ τὸ τῆς πολιτείας ἐπαμπισχόμενος ὕφασμα παμποίκιλον, ᾧ βραχύτατον μέρος ἀληθείας ἐγκαταμέμικται, πολλαὶ δὲ καὶ μεγάλαι μοῖραι ψευδῶν εὐλόγων πιθανῶν εἰκότων, ἐξ ὧν οἱ Αἰγύπτου πάντες ἀνέβλαστον σοφισταί, οἰωνομάντεις, ἐγγαστρίμυθοι, τερατοσκόποι, δεινοὶ παλεῦσαι καὶ κατεπᾷσαι καὶ γοητεῦσαι, ὧν τὰς ἐπιβούλους τέχνας μέγα ἔργον διεκδῦναι.
1:221διὸ καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα τοῦτον εἰσάγει Μωυσῆς φυσικῶς αἵματι πεφυρμένον (Gen. 38, 31), ἐπειδὴ πᾶς ὁ τοῦ πολιτευομένου βίος πέφυρται, πολεμῶν τε καὶ πολεμούμενος καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν προσπιπτουσῶν ἀβουλήτων συντυχιῶν βαλλόμενος καὶ τοξευόμενος.
1:222ἐρεύνησον οὖν τὸν λίαν δημοτικόν, ᾧ τὰ πόλεως πράγματα ἐφορμεῖ, μὴ καταπλαγεὶς τοὺς θαυμαστικῶς ἔχοντας αὐτοῦ, καὶ πολλὰς μὲν ἐμφωλευούσας νόσους εὑρήσεις, πολλὰς δ’ ἐξημμένον κῆρας καὶ βιαίως ἑκάστην τὴν ψυχὴν αὐχενίζουσαν καὶ ἀφανῶς αὐτῇ προσπαλαίουσαν καὶ ζητοῦσαν ἀνατρέψαι καὶ καταβαλεῖν, ἢ τοῦ πλήθους τῇ προστασίᾳ δυσχεράναντος ἢ κατὰ ἀντεπίθεσιν δυνατωτέρου ἀνδρός.
1:223ἔστι δὲ καὶ ὁ φθόνος βαρὺς καὶ δυσαπότριπτος ἐχθρός, ἐπιφυόμενος ἀεὶ ταῖς λεγομέναις εὐπραγίαις, ὃν οὐ ῥᾴδιον ἐκφυγεῖν.
1:224τί οὖν ὡς ἐσθῆτα πολυτελῆ τὴν ἐπηνθισμένην πολιτείαν ἀναψάμενοι γαυριῶμεν, τῷ εὐπρεπεῖ τῆς φανερᾶς ὄψεως ἀπατώμενοι, τὸ δ’ ἀφανὲς καὶ κεκρυμμένον ἐπίβουλον καὶ σφαλερὸν αἶσχος αὐτῆς οὐ κατανοοῦντες;
1:225ἀποδυσάμενοι δὴ τὸν ἀνθηρὸν τοῦτον χιτῶνα τὸν ἱερὸν ἐνδυώμεθα ἀρετῶν ποικίλμασιν ἐνυφασμένον· οὕτως γὰρ καὶ τὰς ἐνέδρας ἀποδρασόμεθα, ἃς ἀτεχνία καὶ ἀνεπιστημοσύνη καὶ ἀπαιδευσία καθ’ ἡμῶν τιθέασιν, ὧν ὁ Λάβαν ἐστὶ θιασώτης.
Book 1, §§226–250
1:226ἐπειδὴ γὰρ ἐκάθηρεν ἡμᾶς ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος τοῖς εἰς ἁγιστείαν εὐτρεπισθεῖσι περιρραντηρίοις καὶ τοῖς ἀπορρήτοις φιλοσοφίας ἀληθοῦς κατεποίκιλε λόγοις ἀγαγὼν εἰς τὸ δοκίμιον καὶ διασήμους καὶ ἐπιφανεῖς καὶ λαμπροὺς ἐποίησεν, αἰτιᾶται τὸ ἐπίβουλον ἦθος, πρὸς τὴν τῶν λεχθέντων ἀνηρεθισμένον λώβην.
1:227φησὶ γάρ· „ἑώρακα ὅσα σοι Λάβαν ποιεῖ“ (Gen. 31, 12), τἀναντία δήπουθεν οἷς ἐδωρησάμην ἐγώ, τὸ δυσκάθαρτον καὶ τὸ ἀδόκιμον, τὸ πάντῃ σκοταῖον. ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὐ χρὴ κατεπτηχέναι τὸν ἐλπίδι θείας συμμαχίας ἐφορμοῦντα, ᾧ καὶ λέγεται· „ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ θεὸς ὁ ὀφθείς σοι ἐν τόπῳ θεοῦ“ (Gen. 31, 13).
1:228πάγκαλόν γε αὔχημα ψυχῇ, τὸ ἀξιοῦν θεὸν ἐπιφαίνεσθαι καὶ ἐνομιλεῖν αὐτῇ. μὴ παρέλθῃς δὲ τὸ εἰρημένον, ἀλλὰ ἀκριβῶς ἐξέτασον, εἰ τῷ ὄντι δύο εἰσὶ θεοί· λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι „ἐγώ εἰμι ὁὁ θεὸς ὁὁ ὀφθείς σοι“, οὐκ ἐν τόπῳ ἐμῷ, ἀλλ’ „ἐν τόπῳ θεοῦ,“ ὡς ἂν ἑτέρου. τί οὖν χρὴ λέγειν;
1:229ὁ μὲν ἀληθείᾳ θεὸς εἷς ἐστιν, οἱ δ’ ἐν καταχρήσει λεγόμενοι πλείους. διὸ καὶ ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος ἐν τῷ παρόντι τὸν μὲν ἀληθείᾳ διὰ τοῦ ἄρθρου μεμήνυκεν εἰπών· „ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ θεός“, τὸν δ’ ἐν καταχρήσει χωρὶς ἄρθρου φάσκων· „ὁ ὀφθείς σοι ἐν τόπῳ“, οὐ τοῦ θεοῦ, ἀλλ’ αὐτὸ μόνον „θεοῦ“.
1:230καλεῖ δὲ θεὸν τὸν πρεσβύτατον αὐτοῦ νυνὶ λόγον, οὐ δεισιδαιμονῶν περὶ τὴν θέσιν τῶν ὀνομάτων, ἀλλ’ ἓν τέλος προτεθειμένος, πραγματολογῆσαι. καὶ γὰρ ἐν ἑτέροις σκεψάμενος, εἰ ἔστι τι τοῦ ὄντος ὄνομα, σαφῶς ἔγνω ὅτι κύριον μὲν οὐδέν (Exod. 6, 3), ὃ δ’ ἂν εἴπῃ τις, καταχρώμενος ἐρεῖ· λέγεσθαι γὰρ οὐ πέφυκεν, ἀλλὰ μόνον εἶναι τὸ ὄν.
1:231μαρτυρεῖ δὲ καὶ τὸ θεσπισθὲν λόγιον τῷ πυνθανομένῳ, εἰ ἔστιν ὄνομα αὐτῷ, ὅτι „ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ὤν“ (Exod. 3, 14), ἵν’ ὧν δυνατὸν ἀνθρώπῳ καταλαβεῖν μὴ ὄντων περὶ θεόν, ἐπιγνῷ τὴν ὕπαρξιν.
1:232ταῖς μὲν οὖν ἀσωμάτοις καὶ θεραπευτρίσιν αὐτοῦ ψυχαῖς εἰκὸς αὐτὸν οἷός ἐστιν ἐπιφαίνεσθαι διαλεγόμενον ὡς φίλον φίλαις, ταῖς δὲ ἔτι ἐν σώματι ἀγγέλοις εἰκαζόμενον, οὐ μεταβάλλοντα τὴν ἑαυτοῦ φύσιν — ἄτρεπτος γάρ —, ἀλλὰ δόξαν ἐντιθέντα ταῖς φαντασιουμέναις ἑτερόμορφον, ὡς τὴν εἰκόνα οὐ μίμημα, ἀλλ’ αὐτὸ τὸ ἀρχέτυπον ἐκεῖνο εἶδος ὑπολαμβάνειν εἶναι.
1:233παλαιὸς μὲν οὖν ᾄδεται λόγος, ὅτι τὸ θεῖον ἀνθρώποις εἰκαζόμενον ἄλλοτε ἄλλοις περινοστεῖ τὰς πόλεις ἐν κύκλῳ, τάς τε ἀδικίας καὶ παρανομίας ἐξετάζον· καὶ τάχα μὲν οὐκ ἀληθῶς, πάντως δὲ λυσιτελῶς καὶ συμφερόντως ᾄδεται.
1:234ὁ δὲ λόγος σεμνότερον καὶ ἁγιώτερον ταῖς περὶ τοῦ ὄντος ἐννοίαις ἀεὶ χρώμενος, ἅμα δὲ καὶ τὸν τῶν ἀφρόνων βίον παιδεῦσαι γλιχόμενος ἀνθρώπῳ μὲν εἴκασεν, οὐ μέντοι τῶν ἐπὶ μέρους οὐδενί·
1:235πρόσωπον διὰ τοῦτο καὶ χεῖρας καὶ βάσεις καὶ στόμα καὶ φωνὴν ὀργάς τε καὶ θυμούς, ἔτι δὲ ἀμυντήρια ὅπλα καὶ εἰσόδους μέντοι καὶ ἐξόδους καὶ τὰς ἄνω καὶ κάτω καὶ πανταχῇ κινήσεις περιέθηκεν, οὐ πρὸς ἀλήθειαν τὸ κεφάλαιον τοῦτο τῶν λόγων ἀναφέρων, ἀλλὰ πρὸς τὸ λυσιτελὲς τῶν μανθανόντων.
1:236εἰσὶ γάρ τινες ἀμβλεῖς πάνυ τὰς φύσεις, ὡς μὴ δύνασθαι θεὸν ἄνευ σώματος ἐπινοῆσαι τὸ παράπαν· οὓς ἀμήχανον ἑτέρως ἢ τρόπον τοῦτον νουθετεῖν λέγοντας, ὅτι ὡς ἄνθρωπος ὁ θεὸς ἀφικνεῖται καὶ ἐξαναχωρεῖ καὶ κάτεισι καὶ ἀνέρχεται καὶ φωνῇ χρῆται καὶ τοῖς ἁμαρτανομένοις δυσχεραίνει καὶ ἀπαραιτήτως πρὸς τὰς ὀργὰς ἔχει καὶ βέλη μέντοι καὶ ξίφη καὶ τὰ ἄλλα ὅσα πρὸς τιμωρίας ὄργανα ἐπιτήδεια κατὰ τῶν ἀδίκων προευτρέπισται.
1:237ἀγαπητὸν γάρ, ἐὰν τῷ διὰ τούτων ἐπικρεμασθέντι φόβῳ σωφρονισθῆναι δυνηθῶσι. καὶ σχεδὸν δύο εἰσὶν αὗται μόναι αἱ τῆς νομοθεσίας πάσης ὁδοί, μία μὲν ἡ πρὸς τὸ ἀληθὲς ἀπονεύουσα, δι’ ἧς κατασκευάζεται „οὐχ ὡς ἄνθρωπος ὁ θεός“ (Num. 23, 19), ἑτέρα δὲ ἡ πρὸς τὰς τῶν νωθεστέρων δόξας, ἐφ’ ὧν λέγεται· „παιδεύσει σε κύριος ὁ θεὸς, ὡς εἴ τις παιδεύσειεν ἄνθρωπος τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ“ (Deut. 8,5).
1:238τί οὖν ἔτι θαυμάζομεν, εἰ ἀγγέλοις, ὁπότε καὶ ἀνθρώποις ἕνεκα τῆς τῶν δεομένων ἐπικουρίας ἀπεικάζεται; ὥσθ’ ὅταν φῇ· „ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ θεὸς ὁ ὀφθείς σοι ἐν τόπῳ θεοῦ" (Gen. 31,13), τότε νόησον, ὅτι τὸν ἀγγέλου τόπον ἐπέσχεν ὅσα τῷ δοκεῖν, οὐ μεταβάλλων, πρὸς τὴν τοῦ μήπω δυναμένου τὸν ἀληθῆ θεὸν ἰδεῖν ὠφέλειαν.
1:239καθάπερ γὰρ τὴν ἀνθήλιον αὐγὴν ὡς ἥλιον οἱ μὴ δυνάμενοι τὸν ἥλιον αὐτὸν ἰδεῖν ὁρῶσι καὶ τὰς περὶ σελήνην ἅλως ὡς αὐτὴν ἐκείνην, οὕτως καὶ τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ εἰκόνα, τὸν ἄγγελον αὐτοῦ λόγον, ὡς αὐτὸν κατανοοῦσιν.
1:240οὐχ ὁρᾷς τὴν ἐγκύκλιον παιδείαν Ἄγαρ, ὅτι τῷ ἀγγέλῳ φησί· „σὺ ὁ θεὸς ὁ ἐπιδών με“ (Gen. 16, 13) ; οὐ γὰρ ἦν ἱκανὴ τὸ πρεσβύτατον ἰδεῖν αἴτιον, γένος οὖσα τῶν ἀπ’ Αἰγύπτου. νυνὶ δὲ ὁ νοῦς ἄρχεται βελτιούμενος τὸν ἡγεμόνα πασῶν τῶν τοιούτων δυνάμεων φαντασιοῦσθαι.
1:241διὸ καὶ αὐτός φησιν· „ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ θεός“, οὗ τὴν εἰκόνα ὡς ἐμὲ πρότερον ἐθεάσω καὶ στήλην ἐπίγραμμα ἐγκολάψας ἱερώτατον ἀνέθηκας (Gen. 31, 13)· τὸ δὲ ἐπίγραμμα ἐμήνυεν, ὅτι μόνος ἕστηκα ἐγὼ (Exod. 17,6) καὶ τὴν τῶν πάντων φύσιν ἱδρυσάμην, τὴν ἀταξίαν καὶ ἀκοσμίαν εἰς κόσμον καὶ τάξιν ἀγαγὼν καὶ τὸ πᾶν ἐπερείσας, ἵνα στηριχθῇ
1:242βεβαίως τῷ κραταιῷ καὶ ὑπάρχῳ μου λόγῳ. στήλη γὰρ τριῶν πραγμάτων σύμβολον, στάσεως ἀναθέσεως ἐπιγράμματος. ἡ μὲν οὖν στάσις καὶ τὸ ἐπίγραμμα δεδήλωται, ἡ δὲ ἀνάθεσις ἀναγκαία μηνυθῆναι·
1:243πᾶς ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ὁ κόσμος ἀνάθημα θεοῦ τοῦ πεποιηκότος τὸ ἀνάθημα· καὶ ὅσαι μέντοι κοσμοπολίτιδες ψυχαὶ καὶ θεοφιλεῖς, ἑαυτὰς ἀνιεροῦσιν ὑπὸ μηδενὸς ἀντισπώμεναι θνητοῦ, καθαγιάζουσαι δὲ καὶ καλλιεροῦσαι τὸν ἑαυτῶν ἄφθαρτον βίον οὐδέποτε κάμνουσι.
1:244μάταιος δ’ ὅστις μὴ θεῷ στήλην ἀνατίθησιν, ἀλλ’ ἑαυτῷ, τὰ γενέσεως ἱστὰς τῆς πάντῃ σαλευομένης καὶ ἐπιγραμμάτων καὶ ἐπαίνων ἀξιῶν, ἃ ψόγου καὶ κατηγορίας μεστὰ ὄντα καλὸν ἦν ἢ μὴ γραφῆναι τὸ παράπαν ἢ γραφέντα εὐθὺς ἀπαλειφθῆναι.
1:245διὸ καί φησιν ἄντικρυς ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος· „οὐ στήσεις σεαυτῷ στήλην“ (Deut. 16, 22)· ἕστηκε γὰρ τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων πρὸς ἀλήθειαν οὐδέν, κἂν διαρραγῶσί τινες ψευδόμενοι.
1:246ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὐκ οἴονται μόνον παγίως ἐρηρεῖσθαι, ἀλλὰ καὶ τιμῶν ἄξιοι καὶ ἐπιγραμμάτων εἶναι, τοῦ μόνου τιμῆς ἀξίου καὶ ἑστῶτος ὄντως ἐπιλελησμένοι. ἀποκλίναντας γὰρ αὐτοὺς καὶ ἐκτραπομένους τὴν ἐπ’ ἀρετὴν ἄγουσαν ὁδὸν ἔτι μᾶλλον ἐξέτρεψεν αἴσθησις, ἡ σύμφυτος αὐτῶν γυνή, καὶ ἠνάγκασεν ἐξοκεῖλαι.
1:247τοιγάρτοι περικαταχθεῖσα ὡς ναῦς ἡ ὅλη ψυχὴ τρόπον στήλης ἀνετέθη. τὴν γὰρ Λὼτ γυναῖκα ἐπιστραφεῖσαν εἰς τοὐπίσω φασὶν οἱ χρησμοὶ γενέσθαι στήλην ἁλός (Gen. 19, 26), εἰκότως γε καὶ προσηκόντως·
1:248εἰ γάρ τις μὴ τὰ πρόσω, τὰ θέας καὶ ἀκοῆς ἄξια, διορᾷ — ταῦτα δ’ εἰσὶν ἀρεταὶ καὶ τὰ κατὰ ἀρετὰς ἔργα —, περιβλέπεται δὲ τὰ ὀπίσω καὶ τὰ νώτια, κωφὴν δόξαν καὶ τυφλὸν πλοῦτον καὶ ἀναίσθητον εὐσαρκίαν καὶ νοῦ κενὴν εὐμορφίαν καὶ ὅσα συγγενῆ τούτοις μεταδιώκων, ἄψυχος ἀνακείσεται στήλη περὶ ἑαυτὴν καταρρυεῖσα· οἱ γὰρ ἅλες οὐ βέβαιον.
1:249Παγκάλως οὖν ὁ ἀσκητὴς μελέτῃ συνεχεῖ μαθών, ὅτι γένεσις κινητὸν ἐξ ἑαυτῆς, τὸ δὲ ἀγένητον ἄτρεπτόν τε καὶ ἀκίνητον, ἀνίστησι τῷ θεῷ στήλην καὶ ἀναστήσας ἀλείφει· λέγεται γάρ· „ἤλειψάς μοι στήλην„ (Gen. 31, 13).
1:250ἀλλὰ μὴ νομίσῃς ἐλαίῳ λίθον ἀλείφεσθαι, ἀλλὰ τὸ περὶ τοῦ μόνον ἑστάναι τὸν θεὸν ἐν ψυχῇ δόγμα γυμνάζεσθαι καὶ συνασκεῖσθαι πρὸς ἀλειπτικῆς ἐπιστήμης, οὐχ ᾗ τὰ σώματα πιαίνεται, ἀλλ’ ὑφ’ ἧς διάνοια ἰσχὺν κτᾶται καὶ ῥώμην ἀνανταγώνιστον.
Book 1, §§251–256; Book 2, §§1–19
1:251φίλαθλος γὰρ καὶ φιλογυμναστὴς ὁ πρὸς τὴν τῶν καλῶν ἐπιτηδευμάτων ὡρμημένος θήραν· ὥστ’ εἰκότως τὴν ἀδελφὴν ἰατρικῆς τέχνης ἀλειπτικὴν ἐκπονήσας, πάντας τοὺς περὶ ἀρετῆς καὶ εὐσεβείας ἀλείψας καὶ συγκροτήσας λόγους, ἀνάθημα κάλλιστον καὶ ἐχυρώτατον ἀναθήσει θεῷ.
1:252διὸ καὶ μετὰ τὴν τῆς στήλης ἀνάθεσίν φησιν, ὅτι „ηὔξω μοι εὐχήν“ (ibid.). εὐχὴ δέ ἐστι κυρίως εἰπεῖν ἀνάθεσις, ὁπότε μὴ μόνον τὰ ἑαυτοῦ κτήματα, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸν κεκτημένον ἑαυτὸν ἀποδιδοὺς διδόναι λέγεται θεῷ δῶρον.
1:253„ἅγιος“ γάρ φησιν „ἐστὶν ὁ τρέφων κόμην τρίχα κεφαλῆς“ (Num. 6, 5) εὐξάμενος· εἰ δὲ ἅγιος, ἀνάθημα πάντως, μηδενὸς ἔτ’ ἀνιέρου καὶ βεβήλου προσαπτόμενος.
1:254ἐγγυᾶται δέ μου τὸν λόγον ἡ προφῆτις καὶ προφητοτόκος Ἄννα, ἧς μεταληφθὲν τοὔνομα καλεῖται χάρις. τὸν γὰρ υἱὸν διδόναι φησὶ τῷ ἁγίῳ δῶρον Σαμουήλ (I Reg. 1,28), οὐκ ἄνθρωπον μᾶλλον, ἀλλὰ τρόπον ἐνθουσιῶντα καὶ κατεχόμενον ἐκ μανίας θεοφορήτου. Σαμουὴλ δὲ ἑρμηνεύεται τεταγμένος θεῷ.
1:255τί οὖν ἔτι, ψυχή, ματαιάζεις καὶ κενὰ πονεῖς, ἀλλ’ οὐ φοιτᾷς πρὸς τὸν ἀσκητήν, τὰ κατὰ τοῦ πάθους καὶ τῆς κενῆς δόξης ἀναλαβεῖν ὅπλα καὶ παλαίσματα μαθησομένη; τάχα γὰρ μαθοῦσα ἀγελαρχήσεις, οὐκ ἀσήμου καὶ ἀλόγου καὶ ἀναγώγου, δοκίμου δὲ καὶ λογικῆς καὶ ποικίλης ἀγέλης·
1:256ἧς εἰ γένοιο ἡγεμών, τὸ μὲν οἰκτρὸν ἀνθρώπων γένος ὀλοφυρῇ, τὸ δὲ θεῖον οὐ παύσῃ προστρεπομένη, τὸν δὲ θεὸν οὐκ ἐπιλείψεις εὐδαιμονίζουσα, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὕμνους ἱεροπρεπεῖς στήλαις ἐγχαράξεις, ἵνα μὴ μόνον λέγῃς εὐτρόχως, ἀλλὰ καὶ ᾄδῃς μουσικῶς τὰς τοῦ ὄντος ἀρετάς. οὕτως γὰρ δυνήσῃ καὶ εἰς τὸν πατρῷον οἶκον ἐπανελθεῖν, τὴν ἐπὶ τῆς ξένης μακρὰν καὶ ἀνήνυτον ζάλην ἐκφυγοῦσα.
2:1Τὸ τρίτον εἶδος τῶν θεοπέμπτων ὀνείρων ἀναγράφοντες εἰκότως ἂν ἐπίμαχον Μωυσῆν καλοῖμεν, ἵν’, ὡς ἔμαθεν οὐκ εἰδώς, ἀγνοοῦντας καὶ ἡμᾶς ἀναδιδάξῃ περὶ τῶν σημείων, ἕκαστον αὐγάζων. συνίσταται δὲ τὸ τρίτον εἶδος, ὁπόταν ἐν τοῖς ὕπνοις ἐξ ἑαυτῆς ἡ ψυχὴ κινουμένη καὶ ἀναδονοῦσα ἑαυτὴν κορυβαντιᾷ καὶ ἐνθουσιῶσα δυνάμει προγνωστικῇ τὰ μέλλοντα θεσπίζῃ.
2:2τὸ μὲν γὰρ πρῶτον ἦν ἄρχοντος τῆς κινήσεως θεοῦ καὶ ὑπηχοῦντος ἀοράτως τὰ ἡμῖν μὲν ἄδηλα, γνώριμα δὲ ἑαυτῷ· τὸ δὲ δεύτερον τῆς ἡμετέρας διανοίας τῇ τῶν ὅλων συγκινουμένης ψυχῇ καὶ θεοφορήτου μανίας ἀναπιμπλαμένης, ᾗ θέμις πολλὰ τῶν ἀποβησομένων προαγορεύειν.
2:3διὸ ὁ ἱεροφάντης τὰς μὲν κατὰ τὸ πρῶτον σημαινόμενον φαντασίας τρανῶς πάνυ καὶ ἀριδήλως ἐμήνυσεν, ἅτε τοῦ θεοῦ χρησμοῖς σαφέσιν ἐοικότα διὰ τῶν ὀνείρων ὑποβάλλοντος, τὰς δὲ κατὰ τὸ δεύτερον οὔτε σφόδρα τηλαυγῶς οὔτε σκοτίως ἄγαν· ὧν ὑπόδειγμα ἡ ἐπὶ τῆς οὐρανοῦ κλίμακος φανεῖσα ὄψις. αὕτη γὰρ αἰνιγματώδης μὲν ἦν, τὸ δὲ αἴνιγμα οὐ λίαν τοῖς ὀξὺ καθορᾶν δυναμένοις ἀπεκρύπτετο.
2:4αἱ δὲ κατὰ τὸ τρίτον εἶδος φαντασίαι μᾶλλον τῶν προτέρων ἀδηλούμεναι διὰ τὸ βαθὺ καὶ κατακορὲς ἔχειν τὸ αἴνιγμα ἐδεήθησαν καὶ τῆς ὀνειροκριτικῆς ἐπιστήμης. πάντες γοῦν οἱ κατ’ αὐτὸ ἀναγραφέντες ὄνειροι τῷ νομοθέτῃ διακρίνονται πρὸς σοφῶν τὴν λεχθεῖσαν τέχνην ἀνδρῶν. τίνος οὖν εἰσιν οἱ ὄνειροι;
2:5ἢ παντί τῳ δῆλον, ὅτι οἱ τοῦ Ἰωσήφ, οἱ τοῦ βασιλέως Αἰγύπτου Φαραὼ καὶ οὓς ὅ τε ἀρχισιτοποιὸς καὶ ἀρχιοινοχόος εἶδον αὐτοί;
2:6πρέποι δ’ ἂν ἀπὸ τῶν πρώτων ἀεὶ τῆς διδασκαλίας ἀπάρχεσθαι· πρῶτοι δ’ εἰσὶν οὓς ἐθεάσατο Ἰωσήφ, ἀπὸ δυεῖν τῶν τοῦ κόσμου μερῶν, οὐρανοῦ τε καὶ γῆς, διττὰς φαντασίας λαβών· ἀπὸ μὲν γῆς τὸ περὶ τὸν ἀμητὸν ὄναρ — τοιοῦτον δ’ ἐστίν· „ᾤμην ἡμᾶς δεσμεύειν δράγματα ἐν μέσῳ τῷ πεδίῳ, ἀνέστη δὲ τὸ ἐμὸν δράγμα“ (Gen. 37, 7), — τὸ δὲ περὶ τὸν ζῳδιακὸν κύκλον * * * „ὥσπερ ὁ ἥλιος καὶ ἡ σελήνη καὶ ἕνδεκα ἀστέρες προσεκύνουν με“ (ibid. 9).
2:7διάκρισις δὲ τοῦ μὲν προτέρου μετὰ σφοδρᾶς ἐπανατάσεως τοιαύτη· „μὴ βασιλεύων βασιλεύσεις ἐφ’ ἡμῖν; ἢ κυριεύων κυριεύσεις ἡμῶν“ (ibid. 8) ; τοῦ δὲ ὑστέρου ὀργὴ πάλιν δικαία· „ἆρά γε ἐλευσόμεθα ἐγὼ καὶ ἡ μήτηρ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου προσκυνῆσαί σοι ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν“ (ibid. 10) ;
2:8Ταῦτα μὲν δὴ θεμελίων τρόπον προκαταβεβλήσθω, τὰ δὲ ἄλλα τοῖς σοφῆς ἀρχιτέκτονος, ἀλληγορίας, ἑπόμενοι παραγγέλμασιν ἐποικοδομῶμεν, ἑκάτερον δὴ τῶν ὀνειράτων ἀκριβοῦντες. ἃ δὲ χρὴ πρὸ ἀμφοτέρων ἀκοῦσαι, λεκτέον· τὴν τἀγαθοῦ φύσιν οἱ μὲν ἔτειναν ἐπὶ πολλά, οἱ δὲ τῷ ἀρίστῳ προσεκλήρωσαν μόνῳ· καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐκέρασαν, οἱ δὲ καὶ ἄκρατον εἴασαν.
2:9οἱ μὲν οὖν μόνον τὸ καλὸν ἀγαθὸν εἰπόντες, ἀμιγῆ διαφυλάξαντες αὐτήν, ἀπένειμαν τῷ κρατίστῳ τῶν ἐν ἡμῖν, λογισμῷ, οἱ δὲ μίξαντες τρισὶν ἐφήρμοσαν, ψυχῇ, σώματι, τοῖς ἐκτός. εἰσὶ δὲ οὗτοι μὲν τῆς μαλακωτέρας καὶ τρυφερᾶς διαίτης, τὸν πλείω χρόνον ἐν γυναικωνίτιδι καὶ τοῖς γυναικωνίτιδος ἐκτεθηλυμμένοις ἔθεσιν ἀπ’ αὐτῶν σπαργάνων ἀνατραφέντες· οἱ δ’ ἕτεροι σκληροδίαιτοι, πρὸς μὲν ἀνδρῶν κουροτροφηθέντες, ἄνδρες δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ τὰ φρονήματα, τὸ συμφέρον πρὸ τοῦ ἡδέος ἀσπαζόμενοι καὶ τροφαῖς ἀθλητικαῖς πρὸς ἰσχὺν καὶ ῥώμην, οὐ πρὸς ἡδονήν, χρώμενοι.
2:10δυεῖν δὴ θιάσων ἡγεμόνας εἰσάγει Μωυσῆς, τοῦ μὲν γενναίου τὸν αὐτομαθῆ καὶ αὐτοδίδακτον Ἰσαάκ — ἀναγράφει γὰρ αὐτὸν ἀπογαλακτιζόμενον (Gen. 21,8), ἁπαλαῖς καὶ γαλακτώδεσι νηπίαις τε καὶ παιδικαῖς τροφαῖς οὐ δικαιοῦντα χρῆσθαι τὸ παράπαν, ἀλλ’ εὐτόνοις καὶ τελείαις, ἅτε ἐκ βρέφους εὖ πρὸς ἀλκὴν πεφυκότα καὶ ἐπακμάζοντα καὶ ἀνηβῶντα ἀεί —, τοῦ δὲ εἴκοντος καὶ εὐενδότου τὸν Ἰωσήφ.
2:11οὗτος γὰρ οὐκ ἀλογεῖ μὲν τῶν κατὰ ψυχὴν ἀρετῶν, προμηθεῖται δὲ καὶ τῆς τοῦ σώματος εὐσταθείας, ἐφίεται δὲ καὶ τῆς τῶν ἐκτὸς εὐπορίας· ἀνθέλκεται δὲ εἰκότως πολλὰ τέλη τοῦ βίου προτεθειμένος, καὶ ἀντισπώμενος ὑφ’ ἑκάστου σείεται καὶ κλονεῖται μὴ δυνάμενος στηριχθῆναι.
2:12καὶ γὰρ οὐδ’ ὥσπερ αἱ ἔνσπονδοι πόλεις εἰρήνην ἄγουσι * * * καὶ ἀντεπιτίθενται, ὡς ἐν μέρει κρατεῖν τε καὶ ἡττᾶσθαι· πολλὴ γὰρ ἔστιν ὅτε ῥυεῖσα πρὸς πλοῦτον καὶ δόξαν ὁρμὴ τὰς περὶ σῶμα καὶ ψυχὴν φροντίδας ἐξενίκησεν, εἶτα ἀντιβιασθεῖσα πάλιν ὑπὸ ἀμφοῖν ὑπὸ τῆς ἑτέρας ἐνικήθη. τὸν αὐτὸν δὲ τρόπον
2:13ἀθρόαι καὶ αἱ σώματος ἡδοναὶ καταρραγεῖσαι πάντα ἑξῆς τὰ νοητὰ ἐπέκλυσάν τε καὶ ἠφάνισαν· εἶτ’ οὐκ εἰς μακρὰν ἀντιπνεύσασα σοφία λάβρῳ καὶ σφοδρῷ πνεύματι τό τε ῥεῦμα τῶν ἡδονῶν ἐχάλασε καὶ συνόλως τὰς διὰ τῶν αἰσθήσεων ἁπάσας σπουδάς τε καὶ φιλοτιμίας ἐπράυνε.
2:14τοιοῦτος μὲν δὴ κύκλος εἱλεῖται περὶ τὴν πολύτροπον ψυχὴν ἀιδίου πολέμου· καθαιρεθέντος γὰρ ἑνὸς ἐχθροῦ φύεται πάντως δυνατώτερος ἕτερος, ὕδρας τῆς πολυκεφάλου τὸν τρόπον· καὶ γὰρ ἐπ’ ἐκείνης φασὶν ἀντὶ τῆς ἐκτμηθείσης κεφαλῆς ἀναβλαστάνειν ἄλλην, αἰνιττόμενοι τὸ πολύμορφον καὶ πολύγονον τῆς ἀθανάτου κακίας δυσάλωτον γένος.
2:15μηδὲν οὖν ἓν ἀποκρίνας ποτὲ πρὸς * * * τῷ Ἰωσήφ, ἀλλ’ ἴσθι ὅτι πολυμιγοῦς καὶ κεκραμένης δόξης ἐστὶν εἰκών. ἐμφαίνεται γὰρ καὶ τὸ λογικὸν ἐγκρατείας εἶδος, ὃ τῆς ἄρρενος γενεᾶς ἐστι, κατὰ τὸν πατέρα Ἰακὼβ τυπωθέν·
2:16ἐμφαίνεται καὶ τὸ ἄλογον αἰσθήσεως, μητρῴῳ γένει τῷ κατὰ Ῥαχὴλ ἐξεικονισθέν· ἐμφαίνεται καὶ τὸ τῆς σωματικῆς ἡδονῆς σπέρμα, ὃ ἀρχιοινοχόων καὶ ἀρχισιτοποιῶν καὶ ἀρχιμαγείρων συνδιαιτήσεις ἐνεσφράγισαν· ἐμφαίνεται καὶ τὸ τῆς κενῆς δόξης, ἐφ’ ἣν ὡς ἐφ’ ἅρμα διὰ τὸ κοῦφον ἀναβαίνει (Gen. 41, 43), φυσώμενος καὶ μετέωρον αἰωρῶν ἑαυτὸν ἐπὶ καθαιρέσει ἰσότητος.
2:17Ὁ μὲν δὴ τοῦ Ἰωσὴφ χαρακτὴρ διὰ τῶν εἰρημένων ὑποτυποῦται· τῶν δ’ ὀνειράτων ἑκάτερον μὲν ἀκριβωτέον, πρότερον δὲ τὸ περὶ τῶν δραγμάτων ἐρευνητέον. „ᾤμην“ φησίν „ἡμᾶς δεσμεύειν δράγματα“ (Gen. 37, 7). τὸ μὲν „ᾤμην“ εὐθέως ἀδηλοῦντος καὶ ἐνδοιάζοντος καὶ ἀμυδρῶς ὑπολαμβάνοντος, οὐ παγίως καὶ τηλαυγῶς ὁρῶντος, ἀνάφθεγμά ἐστι.
2:18τοῖς γὰρ ἐκ βαθέος ὕπνου διανισταμένοις καὶ ἔτι ὀνειρώττουσιν ἁρμόττον λέγειν „ᾤμην“, οὐχὶ τοῖς ἐγρηγορόσι παντελῶς καὶ τρανῶς ἐμβλέπουσιν.
2:19ἀλλ’ οὐχ ὁ ἀσκητὴς Ἰακὼβ „ᾤμην“ ἐρεῖ, ἀλλ’ „ἰδοὺ κλῖμαξ ἐστηριγμένη, ἧς ἡ κεφαλὴ ἀφικνεῖτο εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν“ (Gen. 28, 12), καὶ πάλιν· „ἡνίκα ἐνεκίσσων τὰ πρόβατα, εἶδον τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς αὐτὰ ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ, καὶ ἰδοὺ οἱ τράγοι καὶ οἱ κριοὶ ἀνέβαινον ἐπὶ τὰ πρόβατα καὶ τὰς αἶγας, διάλευκοι καὶ ποικίλοι καὶ σποδοειδεῖς ῥαντοί“ (Gen. 31, 10. 11).
Book 2, §§20–44
2:20τῶν γὰρ τὸ καλὸν δι’ ἑαυτὸ αἱρετὸν νομιζόντων καὶ τὰς ἐν τοῖς ὕπνοις φαντασίας εἱλικρινεστέρας καὶ καθαρωτέρας ἐξ ἀνάγκης εἶναι συμβέβηκεν, ὥσπερ καὶ τὰς μεθ’ ἡμέραν δοκιμωτέρας πράξεις.
2:21Ἄγαμαι δ’, ὅταν ἀκούω τοῦ διηγουμένου τὸ ὄναρ, ὅτι ὑπέλαβε δράγματα καταδεῖν, οὐ θερίζειν. ἐκεῖνο μὲν ἰδιωτῶν καὶ ὑπηρετῶν ἔργον, τοῦτο δ’ ἡγεμόνων καὶ γεωργίας ἐμπειροτάτων τὸ ἐπιτήδευμα.
2:22τὸ γὰρ δύνασθαι διακρίνειν σκυβάλων ἀναγκαῖα καὶ τρόφιμα μὴ τροφίμων καὶ νόθων γνήσια καὶ ἀνωφελοῦς ῥίζης καρπὸν ὠφελιμώτατον, μὴ ἐν οἷς ἡ γῆ βλαστάνει μᾶλλον ἢ διάνοια φύει, τελειοτάτης ἀρετῆς ἐστιν.
2:23ὁ γοῦν ἱερὸς λόγος τοὺς ὁρῶντας εἰσάγει θερίζοντας καί, τὸ παραδοξότατον, οὐ κριθὰς ἢ πυρούς, ἀλλὰ τὸν θερισμὸν αὐτὸν ἐκθερίζοντας· λέγεται οὖν· „ὅταν θερίζητε τὸν θερισμὸν ὑμῶν, οὐ συντελέσετε τὸ λοιπὸν τοῦ θερισμοῦ“ (Lev. 19, 9).
2:24βούλεται γὰρ τὸν ἀστεῖον οὐ μόνον κριτὴν εἶναι τῶν διαφερόντων, διακρίνοντα καὶ διαστέλλοντα ἐξ ὧν γίνεταί τινα καὶ τὰ γεννώμενα, ἀλλὰ καὶ αὐτὸ τὸ δύνασθαι διακρίνειν δοκεῖν ἀναιρεῖν, ἀμῶντα τὸν ἀμητὸν καὶ τὴν ἰδίαν ἐπιβουλὴν ἀποτέμνοντα διὰ τὸ καὶ πεποιθέναι καὶ Μωυσεῖ λέγοντι πιστεύειν, ὅτι „μόνου τοῦ θεοῦ ἡ κρίσις ἐστί“ (Deut. 1, 17), παρ’ ὃν αἱ συγκρίσεις καὶ αἱ διακρίσεις τῶν ἁπάντων· ὑφ’ οὗ καλὸν ὁμολογεῖν ἡττᾶσθαι καὶ τῆς ἀοιδίμου νίκης εὐκλεέστερον.
2:25ὅμοιόν ἐστι τῷ τὸν θερισμὸν θερίζειν τὸ δὶς περιτέμνειν, ὅπερ ὡς ὅτε ἐκαινούργησεν ἐξευρὼν περιτομῆς περιτομήν (Gen. 17, 13), τὴν „ἁγνείαν ἀφαγνίζεσθαι“ (Num. 6,2), τὴν κάθαρσιν τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτὴν καθαίρεσθαι, παραχωροῦντας τῷ θεῷ τὸ φαιδρύνειν καὶ μηδέποτε νομίσαντας ἱκανοὺς εἶναι ἑαυτοὺς ἄνευ θείας ἐπιφροσύνης τὸν κηλίδων ἀνάμεστον ἐκνίψασθαι καὶ ἀπολούσασθαι βίον.
2:26ταύτης ἐστὶ τῆς συγγενείας καὶ τὸ διπλοῦν σπήλαιον (Gen. 23, 9), αἱ διπλαῖ καὶ περιμάχητοι γνῶμαι, ἥ τε περὶ τοῦ γεγονότος καὶ ἡ περὶ τοῦ πεποιηκότος, αἷς ἐντρέφεται ὁ ἀστεῖος, θεωρῶν μὲν τὰ ἐν κόσμῳ, φιλοπευστῶν δὲ καὶ περὶ τοῦ γεννήσαντος πατρός.
2:27ἀφ’ ὧν οἶμαι καὶ τὴν ἐν μουσικῇ δὶς διὰ πασῶν εὑρεθῆναι συμφωνίαν· ἔδει γὰρ καὶ τὸ ἔργον καὶ τὸν δημιουργὸν τελειοτάταις μελῳδίαις εὐδαιμονίζεσθαι δυσίν, οὐχὶ ταῖς αὐταῖς.
2:28ἐπειδὴ γὰρ τὰ ὑμνούμενα διέφερεν, ἀναγκαῖον καὶ τὰς μελῳδίας καὶ συμφωνίας διακεκρίσθαι, τὴν μὲν συνημμένην ἀπονέμοντας τῷ συνημμένῳ καὶ ἐκ διαφερόντων ἁρμοσθέντι κόσμῳ, τὴν δὲ διεζευγμένην τῷ πάσης γενέσεως διεζευγμένῳ κατὰ τὴν οὐσίαν θεῷ.
2:29γνώμην δὲ ἀποφαίνεται πάλιν ὁ ἱεροφάντης φιλάρετον λέγων· „οὐ συντελέσετε τὸ λοιπὸν τοῦ θερισμοῦ“ (Lev. 19, 9), μεμνημένος τῆς ἐξ ἀρχῆς ὑποθέσεως, καθ’ ἣν ὡμολόγει „τὸ τέλος εἶναι κυρίου“ (Num. 31, 28 ss.), παρ’ ὃν τὸ κῦρος καὶ ἡ τούτων βεβαίωσίς ἐστιν.
2:30ἀλλὰ γὰρ ὁ τοῦ θερίζειν ἀμύητος αὐχεῖ λέγων· „ᾤμην ἃ μὴ ἐθέρισα καταδεῖν σὺν ἑτέροις δράγματα“ (Gen. 37, 7), καὶ οὐκ ἐλογίσατο παρ’ ἑαυτῷ, ὅτι δούλων καὶ ἀνεπιστημόνων ἥδε ἐστὶν ὑπηρεσία, καθὰ καὶ μικρῷ πρότερον εἶπον.
2:31Δράγματα δ’ ἀλληγοροῦντές φαμεν εἶναι πράγματα, ὧν ἕκαστος ὡς οἰκείας τροφῆς ἐπιδράττεται, ἐν ᾗ ζήσεσθαι καὶ βιώσεσθαι τὸν αἰῶνα
2:32ἐλπίζει. μυρίαι μὲν οὖν τῶν δραγμάτων, λέγω δὴ τῶν ὡσανεὶ τρεφόντων πραγμάτων, διαφοραί, μυρίαι δὲ καὶ τῶν ἐπιδραττομένων καὶ αἱρουμένων τὰ δράγματα, ὡς ἁπάσας οὔτ’ εἰπεῖν οὔτ’ ἐπινοῆσαι δυνατόν· τινὰς δ’ οὐκ ἄτοπον δείγματος ἕνεκα ἑρμηνεῦσαι, ὧν καὶ τὸ ὄναρ διηγούμενος ἐπεμνήσθη.
2:33φησὶ γὰρ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς· „ᾤμην ἡμᾶς δεσμεύειν δράγματα“ (l. c.). ἀδελφοὶ δ’ εἰσὶν ὁμοπάτριοι μὲν δέκα, ὁμογάστριος δὲ εἷς· ἑκάστου δὲ αὐτῶν τοὔνομα σύμβολον ἀναγκαιοτάτου πράγματός ἐστι, Ῥουβὴν μὲν εὐφυΐας — υἱὸς γὰρ ὁρῶν καλεῖται, ᾗ μὲν υἱός, οὐ τέλειος, ᾗ δὲ ὁρατικὸς καὶ ὀξὺ καθορῶν, εὐφυής —, μαθήσεως δὲ Συμεών — εἰσακοὴ γὰρ ἑρμηνεύεται —,
2:34ἐνεργειῶν δὲ καὶ πράξεων σπουδαίων καὶ λειτουργιῶν ἁγίων Λευί, τῶν δὲ εἰς θεὸν ᾠδῶν τε καὶ ὕμνων Ἰούδας, Ἰσσάχαρ δὲ μισθῶν, οἳ ἐπ’ ἔργοις καλοῖς ἀποδίδονται — τάχα δ’ αὐτὰ τὰ ἔργα ὁ τέλειος μισθὸς ἦν —, Ζαβουλὼν δὲ φωτός, ἐπειδὴ ῥύσις νυκτερίας ὀνομάζεται — ῥεούσης δὲ καὶ ἀπολιπούσης νυκτὸς ἐξ ἀνάγκης φῶς ἀνίσχει —,
2:35διακρίσεως δὲ καὶ τομῆς πραγμάτων Δάν, ἐπιθέσεως δὲ καὶ ἀντεπιθέσεως πειρατικῆς Γάδ, Ἀσὴρ δὲ τοῦ φυσικοῦ πλούτου — μακαρισμὸς γὰρ ἑρμηνεύεται, ἐπειδὴ μακάριον κτῆμα νενόμισται πλοῦτος —, εἰρήνης δὲ Νεφθαλείμ — διανοίγεται γὰρ καὶ εὐρύνεται πάντα εἰρήνῃ, ὡς συγκλείεται πολέμῳ·
2:36τὸ δὲ ὄνομα μεταληφθὲν πλατυσμὸς ἢ διανεῳγμένον ἐστί —, Βενιαμὶν δὲ τοῦ νέου καὶ γέροντος χρόνου· λέγεται γὰρ ἑρμηνευθεὶς υἱὸς ἡμερῶν εἶναι, ἡμέραις δὲ καὶ νυξὶν ὁ νέος ὁμοῦ καὶ γέρων αἰὼν ἀναμετρεῖται.
2:37ἐπιδράττεται γοῦν ἕκαστος τῶν οἰκείων καὶ ἐπιδραξάμενος τὰ μέρη πάντα συνδεῖ· ὁ μὲν εὐφυὴς εὐθιξίας, ἐπιμονῆς, μνήμης, ἐν οἷς ἡ εὐφυΐα· ὁ δὲ εὐμαθὴς ἀκροάσεως, ἡσυχίας, προσοχῆς· ὁ δὲ ἐγχειρητὴς [τῆς] θαρραλεότητος, παρακεκινδυνευμένης εὐτολμίας·
2:38ὁ δὲ εὐχάριστος ἐπαίνων, ἐγκωμίων, ὕμνων, εὐδαιμονισμῶν κατά τε τὸ λέγειν καὶ τὸ ᾄδειν· ὁ δὲ μισθῶν ἐφιέμενος ἀόκνου συνεχείας τλητικωτάτης καρτερίας καὶ ἐπιμελείας σὺν ἀνανταγωνίστῳ ταχυτῆτι·
2:39ὁ δὲ φῶς ἀντὶ σκότους μεταδιώκων ἐγρηγόρσεως, ὀξυωπίας· ὁ δὲ τομῆς καὶ διακρίσεως πραγμάτων ζηλωτὴς λόγων ἠκονημένων, τοῦ μὴ ὑφ’ ὁμοίων ὡς τῶν αὐτῶν ἀπατᾶσθαι, τοῦ μὴ πρὸς χάριν, τοῦ ἀδεκάστου·
2:40ὁ δὲ πειρατικώτερον ἐνεδρεύων τοὺς ἀντιλοχῶντας ἀπάτης, φενακισμοῦ, γοητείας, σοφισμάτων, προσποιήσεως, ὑποκρίσεως, ἅπερ ἐξ ἑαυτῶν ψεκτὰ ὄντα κατ’ ἐχθρῶν γινόμενα ἐπαινεῖται· ὁ δὲ πλουτεῖν τὸν φύσεως πλοῦτον ἐπιτηδεύων ἐγκρατείας, ὀλιγοδεΐας· ὁ δὲ εἰρήνης ἐρῶν εὐνομίας, εὐδικίας, ἀτυφίας, ἰσότητος.
2:41ἐκ τούτων τὰ τῶν ὁμοπατρίων ἀδελφῶν δράγματα καταδεῖται, τὰ δὲ τοῦ ὁμογαστρίου ἐξ ἡμερῶν καὶ χρόνου, τῶν οὐδενὸς αἰτίων ὡς ἁπάντων αἰτίων.
2:42αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ ἐνυπνιαστὴς καὶ ὀνειροπόλος — ἦν γὰρ ἀμφότερα — τῆς κενῆς δόξης ὡς μεγίστου καὶ λαμπροτάτου καὶ βιωφελεστάτου κτήματος ἐπιδράττεται. διὸ πρῶτον μὲν ἀπ’ ὀνειράτων, ἃ νυκτὶ φίλα, τῷ βασιλεῖ τῆς σωματικῆς χώρας γνωρίζεται, οὐκ ἀπὸ πραγμάτων τηλαυγῶν ἐναργείας, ἃ πρὸς ἐπίδειξιν ἡμέρας δεῖται.
2:43εἶτ’ ἐπίτροπος ἢ κηδεμὼν Αἰγύπτου πάσης ἀνακηρύττεται, ταῖς τιμαῖς τοῦ βασιλέως οἰσόμενος δευτερεῖα, ἅπερ ἥττης καὶ ἀτιμίας ἀφανέστερα καὶ καταγελαστότερα παρὰ φρονήσει γράφεται δικαζούσῃ.
2:44εἶτα „κλοιὸν χρυσοῦν“ (Gen. 41,41.42), ἀγχόνην ἐπιφανῆ, κύκλον καὶ τροχὸν ἀνάγκης ἀτελευτήτου, περιτίθεται — οὐκ ἀκολουθίαν καὶ τὸ ἑξῆς ἐν βίῳ καὶ τὸν εἱρμὸν τῶν τῆς φύσεως πραγμάτων, ὡς ἡ Θάμαρ· οὐ γὰρ κλοιός, ἀλλὰ ὁρμίσκος αὐτῆς ὁ κόσμος (Gen. 38, 18) — καὶ δακτύλιον μέντοι βασιλικόν (Gen. 41, 42), δῶρον ἄδωρον, πίστιν ἄπιστον, ἐναντιούμενον τῷ δοθέντι πάλιν τῇ Θάμαρ ὑπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως τοῦ ὁρῶντος, Ἰσραήλ, Ἰούδα.
Book 2, §§45–69
2:45δίδωσι γὰρ οὗτος τῇ ψυχῇ σφραγῖδα (Gen. 38, 18), πάγκαλον δῶρον, διδάσκων ὅτι ὁ θεὸς ἀσχημάτιστον οὖσαν τὴν τῶν πάντων οὐσίαν ἐσχημάτισε καὶ ἀτύπωτον ἐτύπωσε καὶ ἄποιον ἐμόρφωσε καὶ τελειώσας τὸν ὅλον ἐσφράγισε κόσμον εἰκόνι καὶ ἰδέᾳ, τῷ ἑαυτοῦ λόγῳ.
2:46ἀλλ’ ἐκεῖνός γε καὶ ἐπὶ τὸ δευτερεῖον ἄνεισιν ἅρμα (Gen. 41,43) [ἢ] ὑποτυφούμενος ὑπ’ αἰώρας φρενῶν καὶ κενοῦ φυσήματος καὶ σιταρχεῖ (ibid. 48), τῷ σώματι θησαυροφυλακῶν καὶ πανταχόθεν αὐτῷ πορίζων τὰς τροφάς· ἐπιτειχισμὸς δὲ κατὰ τῆς ψυχῆς βαρὺς οὗτός ἐστι.
2:47τῇ δὲ προαιρέσει καὶ ζηλώσει τοῦ βίου μαρτυρεῖ καὶ τοὔνομα οὐχ ἥκιστα· πρόσθεσις γὰρ Ἰωσὴφ ἑρμηνεύεται. κενὴ δὲ δόξα προστίθησιν ἀεὶ γνησίῳ μὲν τὸ νόθον, οἰκείῳ δὲ τὸ ἀλλότριον, ἀληθεῖ δὲ τὸ ψεῦδος, αὐτάρκει δὲ τὸ πλεονάζον, ζωῇ δὲ θρύψιν, βίῳ δὲ τῦφον.
2:48Τί δ’ ἐστὶν ὃ βούλομαι δηλοῦν, σκόπει. σιτίοις καὶ ποτοῖς τρεφόμεθα, κἂν ᾖ εὐτελεστάτη μᾶζα καὶ ὕδωρ ναματιαῖον. τί οὖν ἡ κενὴ δόξα προσεπέθηκεν ἀμήτων καὶ μελιπήκτων πεμμάτων γένη μυρία καὶ οἴνων ἀμυθήτων πολυέργους καὶ παμποικίλους κράσεις πρὸς ἀπόλαυσιν ἡδονῆς μᾶλλον ἢ πρὸς μετουσίαν τροφῆς παρηρτυμένας;
2:49πάλιν ἡδύσματα πρὸς ἐδωδὴν ἀναγκαῖα γήτεια καὶ λάχανα καὶ πολλὰ τῶν ἀκροδρύων καὶ ἔτι τυρὸς καὶ εἴ τι ἄλλο ὁμοιότροπον· εἰ δὲ θέλεις, ἐπὶ σαρκοβόρων ἀνθρώπων ἰχθῦς ἔτι καὶ κρέας πρὸς τούτοις γράφομεν.
2:50ἆρ’ οὖν οὐκ αὔταρκες ἦν ἀπανθρακίσαντας καὶ αὐτοσχεδίως ὀπτήσαντας πυρὶ τρόπον ἡρωικῶν ὄντως ἀνδρῶν προσφέρεσθαι; ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐπὶ ταῦτα ὁ γαστρίμαργος μόνον ὁρμᾷ, σύμμαχον δὲ τὴν κενὴν δόξαν λαβὼν καὶ τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ λίχνον πάθος ἐγείρας ὀψαρτύτας καὶ τραπεζοποιοὺς εὐδοκίμους τὴν τέχνην ἀναζητεῖ καὶ περιβλέπεται.
2:51οἱ δὲ τὰ κατὰ τῆς ταλαίνης γαστρὸς ἐκ πολλῶν χρόνων ἀνευρημένα δελέατα ἀνακινήσαντες καὶ χυλῶν ἰδιότητας σκευάσαντές τε καὶ διαθέντες ἐν κόσμῳ προσσαίνουσι καὶ τιθασεύουσι γλῶτταν· εἶτ’ εὐθὺς ἀγκιστρεύονται τῶν αἰσθήσεων τὴν ἐπιβάθραν, γεῦσιν, δι’ ἧς ἀντ’ ἐλευθέρου δοῦλος ὁ δειπνοθήρας οὐκ εἰς μακρὰν ἀνεφάνη.
2:52τίς γε μὴν οὐκ οἶδεν, ὅτι ἀμπεχόνη πρὸς τὰς ἀπὸ κρυμοῦ | καὶ θάλπους ἐγγινομένας βλάβας τῷ σώματι κατεσκευάσθη τὸ πρῶτον;
2:53ἀλεξάνεμος μέν, ὡς οἱ ποιηταί πού φασι, χειμῶνι * * *. τίς οὖν τὰς πολυτελεῖς ἁλουργίδας, τίς τὰ διαφανῆ καὶ λεπτὰ θέριστρα, τίς τὰς ἀραχνοϋφεῖς ἀμπεχόνας, τίς τὰ ἐπηνθισμένα ἢ βαφαῖς ἢ πλοκαῖς διὰ τῶν βάπτειν ἢ ὑφαίνειν ποικίλα ἐπισταμένων καὶ τὴν ἐν ζῳγραφίᾳ μίμησιν παρευημερούντων δαιδαλεύεται; τίς; οὐχ ἡ κενὴ δόξα;
2:54ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ οἰκίας διὰ τὰς αὐτὰς ἐδέησεν ἡμῖν αἰτίας, καὶ ὅπως μὴ πρὸς θηρίων ἢ θηριωδεστάτων τὰς φύσεις ἀνθρώπων ἐπιτρεχόντων βλαπτώμεθα. τί οὖν τὰ μὲν ἐδάφη καὶ τοὺς τοίχους πολυτελέσι λίθοις διακοσμοῦμεν; τί δὲ Ἀσίαν καὶ Λιβύην καὶ πᾶσαν Εὐρώπην καὶ τὰς νήσους ἐπερχόμεθα, κίονας ἀριστίνδην ἐπιλελεγμένους καὶ ἐπιστυλίδας ἐρευνῶντες;
2:55τί δὲ περὶ Δωρίους καὶ Ἰωνικὰς καὶ Κορινθιακὰς γλυφὰς καὶ ὅσα οἱ ἐντρυφῶντες τοῖς καθεστῶσι νόμοις προσεξεῦρον σπουδάζομέν τε καὶ φιλοτιμούμεθα, κιονόκρανα κοσμοῦντες; τί δὲ χρυσορόφους ἀνδρῶνας καὶ γυναικωνίτιδας κατασκευάζομεν;
2:56ἆρ’ οὐ διὰ τὴν κενὴν δόξαν; καὶ μὴν πρός γε ὕπνον μαλακὸν μὲν ἔδαφος αὔταρκες ἦν — ἐπεὶ καὶ μέχρι νῦν τοὺς Γυμνοσοφιστὰς παρ’ Ἰνδοῖς χαμευνεῖν ἐκ παλαιῶν ἐθῶν κατέχει λόγος —, εἰ δὲ μή, στιβὰς γοῦν ἐκ λίθων λογάδων ἢ ξύλων εὐτελῶν πεποιημένη κλίνη.
2:57ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἐλεφαντόποδες τὰ ἐνήλατα καὶ κλιντῆρες ὀστράκοις πολυτελέσι καὶ ποικίλαις χελώναις ἐνδεδεμέναις μετὰ πολλῶν πόνων καὶ δαπανημάτων ἐν πολλῷ χρόνῳ κατασκευάζονται, τινὲς δὲ ὁλοάργυροι καὶ ὁλόχρυσοι καὶ λιθοκόλλητοι στρωμναί, ἀνθηροποικίλοις καὶ χρυσοπάστοις ὡς πρὸς ἐπίδειξιν καὶ πομπήν, οὐ τὴν καθ’ ἡμέραν χρῆσιν, διακεκοσμημέναι, ὧν δημιουργὸς ἡ κενὴ δόξα.
2:58τί δὲ τοῦ ἀπὸ τῆς ἐλαίας ἐκθλιβομένου καρποῦ πλέον ἔδει ζητεῖν πρὸς ἀλείμματα; καὶ γὰρ λεαίνει καὶ κάματον σώματος λύει καὶ εὐσαρκίαν ἐμποιεῖ, κἂν εἴ τι κεχαλασμένον εἴη, σφίγγει πυκνότητι καὶ οὐδενὸς ἧττον ἑτέρου ῥώμην καὶ εὐτονίαν ἐντίθησιν.
2:59ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἐπετειχίσθη τοῖς ὠφελοῦσι τὰ ἡδέα τῆς κενῆς δόξης ἀλείμματα, εἰς ἃ καὶ μυρεψοὶ πονοῦσι καὶ χῶραι μεγάλαι συντελοῦσι, Συρία, Βαβυλών,
2:60Ἰνδοί, Σκύθαι, παρ’ οἷς αἱ τῶν ἀρωμάτων γενέσεις εἰσί. πρός γε μὴν τὸ πίνειν τίνος ἔδει μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ φύσεως ἐκπώματος ἀκρότησι τέχνης εἰργασμένου; τὸ δὲ ἔκπωμα αἱ ἡμέτεραι χεῖρές εἰσιν, ἃς εἰς ταὐτό τις συναγαγὼν καὶ κοιλάνας, εὖ μάλα τῷ στόματι προσθείς, ἐπιχέοντος ἑτέρου τὸ ποτὸν οὐ μόνον ἄκος τῆς δίψης, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἄλεκτον ἡδονὴν κτᾶται.
2:61εἰ δὲ ἔδει πάντως ἑτέρου, τὸ γεωργικὸν κισσύβιον οὐχ ἱκανὸν ἦν, ἀλλὰ ἄλλων ἐπιφανῶν τέχνας ἀναζητεῖν ἔδει; τί δὲ ἀργυρῶν καὶ χρυσῶν κυλίκων ἄφθονον πλῆθος κατασκευάζεσθαι, εἰ μὴ διὰ τὸν φρυαττόμενον μεγάλα τῦφον καὶ τὴν ἐπ’ αἰώρας φορουμένην κενὴν δόξαν;
2:62ὅταν καὶ στεφανοῦσθαί τινες ἀξιῶσι μὴ δάφνης μηδὲ κιττοῦ, μὴ ἴων ἢ κρίνων ἢ ῥόδου ἢ θαλλοῦ συνόλως ἤ τινος ἄνθους εὐώδει στεφάνῳ παρελθόντες τὰ θεοῦ δῶρα, ἃ διὰ τῶν ἐτησίων ὡρῶν ἀναδίδωσι, χρυσοῦς δ’ ὑπὲρ κεφαλῆς, βαρύτατον ἄχθος, αἰωρῶσιν ἐν ἀγορᾷ μέσῃ καὶ πληθούσῃ χωρὶς αἰδοῦς, ἄλλο τι νομιστέον ἢ ὅτι κενῆς δόξης εἰσὶ δοῦλοι, φάσκοντες οὐκ ἐλεύθεροι μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ πολλῶν ἄλλων ἡγεμόνες εἶναι;
2:63ἐπιλείψει με ἡ ἡμέρα τὰς διαφθορὰς τοῦ ἀνθρωπείου βίου διεξιόντα. καίτοι τί δεῖ μακρηγορεῖν; τίς γὰρ αὐτῶν ἀνήκοός ἐστι, τίς δὲ οὐ θεατής; τίς μὲν οὖν οὐ τρίβων καὶ ἐθάς; ὥστε παγκάλως προσθήκην τὸν ἀτυφίας μὲν ἐχθρόν, τύφου δ’ ἑταῖρον ὠνόμασεν ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος.
2:64καθάπερ γὰρ τοῖς δένδρεσιν ἐπιφύονται βλάσται περισσαί, μεγάλαι τῶν γνησίων λῶβαι, ἃς καθαίρουσι καὶ ἀποτέμνουσι προνοίᾳ τῶν ἀναγκαίων οἱ γεωργοῦντες, οὕτω τῷ ἀληθεῖ καὶ ἀτύφῳ βίῳ παρανέβλαστεν ὁ κατεψευσμένος καὶ τετυφωμένος, οὗ μέχρι ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας οὐδεὶς εὕρηται γεωργὸς ὃς τὴν βλαβερὰν ἐπίφυσιν αὐταῖς ῥίζαις ἀπέκοψε.
2:65τοιγαροῦν εἰδότες οἱ φρονήσεως ἀσκηταὶ τὸ κατάπλαστον τοῦτ’ αἰσθήσει πρῶτον, εἶτα διανοίᾳ μεταδιώκοντα ἄντικρυς ἐκβοῶσι· „θηρίον πονηρὸν ἥρπασε καὶ κατέφαγεν Ἰωσήφ“ (Gen. 37, 33).
2:66ἀλλ’ οὐ θηρίον ἐξηγριωμένον ὢν ὁ πολυπλοκώτατος τῶν πεφυρμένων ἀνθρώπων τυφοπλαστηθεὶς βίος, οὗ πλεονεξία καὶ πανουργία σοφαὶ δημιουργοί, τοὺς προσιόντας ἅπαντας εὐωχεῖται; τοιγάρτοι καὶ ἔτι ζῶσιν αὐτοῖς ὡς νεκροῖς προτεθήσεται πένθος, ἀξίαν ὀλοφύρσεως καὶ θρήνων καρπουμένοις ζωήν· ἐπεὶ καὶ Ἰακὼβ τὸν Ἰωσὴφ ἔτι ζῶντα πενθεῖ.
2:67ἀλλ’ οὐ Μωυσῆς ἐάσει τοὺς περὶ Ναδὰβ ἱεροὺς λόγους πενθεῖσθαι (Lev. 10, 6)· οὐ γὰρ ὑπ’ ἀγρίου πονηροῦ θηρὸς ἁρπασθέντες, ἀλλ’ ὑπὸ ῥιπῆς ἀσβέστου καὶ ἀθανάτου φέγγους ἀνελήφθησαν, ὅτι τὴν ἔνθερμον καὶ διάπυρον καὶ σαρκῶν ἀναλωτικὴν καὶ ὀξυκίνητον πρὸς τὴν εὐσέβειαν σπουδήν, ἣ γενέσεως μέν ἐστιν ἀλλοτρία, θεοῦ δὲ οἰκεία, τὸν μελλητὴν ὄκνον ἐκποδὼν ἀνελόντες, εὐαγῶς καθιέρωσαν, οὐ δι’ ἀναβαθμῶν ἐπὶ τὸν βωμὸν ἐλθόντες — ἀπείρηται γὰρ νόμῳ —, ἀλλὰ δεξιῷ πνεύματι ἐπουρίσαντες καὶ ἄχρι τῶν οὐρανοῦ περιόδων παραπεμφθέντες, θυσίας ὁλοκαύτου καὶ ὁλοκάρπου
2:68τρόπον εἰς αἰθερίους αὐγὰς ἀναλυθέντες. ἀποκοπτέον οὖν, ὦ ψυχὴ πειθαρχοῦσα τῷ διδάσκοντι, τὴν σεαυτῆς χεῖρα καὶ δύναμιν, ἐπειδὰν ἄρξηται τῶν γεννητικῶν ἢ γενέσεως ἢ ἀνθρωπείων σπουδασμάτων ἐπιλαμβάνεσθαι.
2:69πολλάκις γὰρ ὑφ’ * * * προσαψαμένην τῶν διδύμων χεῖρα ἀποκόπτειν (Deut. 25, 11. 12), πρῶτον μὲν ὅτι ἐδεξιώσατο ἣν ἐχθαίρειν ἐχρῆν ἡδονήν, δεύτερον δὲ ὅτι παρ’ ἡμᾶς τὸ σπείρειν ἐνόμισεν, εἶθ’ ὅτι τῷ γενομένῳ τὴν τοῦ ποιοῦντος ἀνέθηκε δύναμιν.
Book 2, §§70–94
2:70οὐχ ὁρᾷς, ὅτι ὁ γήινος ὄγκος, Ἀδάμ, ὅταν ἅψηται τοῦ διδύμου ξύλου (Gen. 2, 9), θνῄσκει, δυάδα τιμήσας πρὸ μονάδος καὶ τὸ γενόμενον πρὸ τοῦ πεποιηκότος ἐκθαυμάσας; ἀλλὰ σύ γε τοῦ μὲν καπνοῦ καὶ κύματος ἐκτὸς βαῖνε καὶ τὰς καταγελάστους τοῦ θνητοῦ βίου σπουδὰς ὡς τὴν φοβερὰν ἐκείνην χάρυβδιν ἀποδίδρασκε καὶ μηδὲ ἄκρῳ, τὸ τοῦ λόγου δὴ τοῦτο, δακτύλῳ ψαύσῃς.
2:71ἐπειδὰν δὲ ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἐπαποδύσῃ λειτουργίαις, ὅλην τὴν χεῖρα καὶ δύναμιν εὐρύνασα εὖ μάλα τῶν παιδείας καὶ σοφίας θεωρημάτων ἐπίδραξαι. καὶ γὰρ πρόσταξίς ἐστι τοιαύτη· „ἐὰν ψυχὴ προσφέρῃ δῶρον ἢ θυσίαν, σεμίδαλις ἔσται τὸ δῶρον,“ εἶτ’ ἐπιφέρει· „καὶ δραξάμενος πλήρη τὴν δράκα ἀπὸ τῆς σεμιδάλεως σὺν τῷ ἐλαίῳ καὶ παντὶ τῷ λιβάνῳ ἐπιθήσει τὸ μνημόσυνον ἐπὶ τὸ θυσιαστήριον“ (Lev. 2, 1. 2).
2:72ἆρ’ οὐ παγκάλως ψυχὴν εἶπεν ἀσώματον τὴν μέλλουσαν ἱερουργεῖν, ἀλλ’ οὐ τὸν δίδυμον ἐκ θνητοῦ καὶ ἀθανάτου συνεστῶτα ὄγκον; τὸ γὰρ εὐχόμενον, τὸ εὐχάριστον, τὸ θυσίας ἀμώμους ἀληθῶς ἀνάγον ἓν μόνον ἦν ἄρα, ἡ ψυχή.
2:73τίς οὖν ἡ ψυχῆς ἀσωμάτου θυσία; τίς ἢ σεμίδαλις, ἐκκεκαθαρμένης ταῖς παιδείας ὑποθήκαις γνώμης σύμβολον, τροφὴν ἄνοσον καὶ ζωὴν ἀνυπαίτιον ποιεῖν ἱκανῆς;
2:74ἀφ’ ἧς δραξάμενον τὸν ἱερέα ὅλῃ τῇ δρακί, τὸ δ’ ἐστὶ πάσαις ταῖς διανοίας λαβαῖς, πλήρη τὴν ὅλην ψυχὴν εἱλικρινεστάτων καὶ καθαρωτάτων δογμάτων γενομένην αὐτὴν ὡς ἱερεῖον τὸ κάλλιστον ἀνάγειν προστέτακται, πίονα καὶ λιπῶσαν, θείῳ φωτὶ χαίρουσαν καὶ ταῖς ἀπὸ δικαιοσύνης καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἀρετῶν ἀναδιδομέναις καταπνεομένην αὔραις, ὡς εὐωδέστατον καὶ προσηνέστατον ἀεὶ καρποῦσθαι βίον· τὸ γὰρ ἔλαιον καὶ ὁ λιβανωτός, ὧν ἐπιδράττεται σὺν τοῖς λευκοπύροις ὁ ἱερεύς, ταῦτα αἰνίττεται.
2:75διὰ τοῦτο καὶ Μωυσῆς ἐξαίρετον ἑορτὴν ἀνέθηκε τῷ δράγματι, πλὴν οὐ παντί, ἀλλὰ τῷ ἀπὸ τῆς ἱερᾶς γῆς. „ὅταν“ γάρ φησιν „εἰσέλθητε εἰς τὴν γῆν, ἣν ἐγὼ δίδωμι ὑμῖν, καὶ θερίζητε τὸν θερισμὸν αὐτῆς, οἴσετε δράγματα ἀπαρχὴν τοῦ θερισμοῦ ὑμῶν πρὸς τὸν ἱερέα“ (Lev. 23, 10), τὸ δέ ἐστιν·
2:76ὅταν εἰσέλθῃς, ὦ διάνοια, εἰς τὴν ἀρετῆς χώραν, ἣν ἐμπρεπὲς μόνῳ δωρεῖσθαι θεῷ, τὴν εὔβοτον, τὴν εὔγειον, τὴν καρποφόρον, εἶτα οἰκεῖα [εἴ γε] σπείρας’ ἀγαθὰ θερίζῃς αὐξηθέντα ὑπὸ τοῦ τελεσφόρου, μὴ πρότερον οἴκαδε συγκομίσῃς, τουτέστι μὴ ἀναθῇς μηδ’ ἐπιγράψῃς σεαυτῇ τὴν τῶν περιγινομένων αἰτίαν, ἢ ἀπάρξασθαι τῷ πλουτάρχῳ καὶ τὰ πλουτιστήρια ἔργα ἐπιτηδεύειν ἀναπείθοντι.
2:77καὶ λέγεται „τὴν ἀπαρχὴν τοῦ θερισμοῦ ὑμῶν“ αὐτῶν, ἀλλ’ οὐχὶ τῆς γῆς, προσφέρειν, ἵνα ἀμῶμεν καὶ θερίζωμεν ἑαυτοῖς, πάνθ’ ὅσα καλὰ καὶ τρόφιμα καὶ σπουδαῖα βλαστήματα καθιεροῦντες.
2:78Ἀλλ’ ὅ γε τῶν ἐνυπνίων μύστης ὁμοῦ καὶ μυσταγωγὸς θαρρεῖ λέγειν, ὅτι ἀνέστη τὸ αὐτοῦ δράγμα καὶ ὠρθώθη (Gen. 37, 7). τῷ γὰρ ὄντι καθάπερ οἱ γαῦροι τῶν ἵππων τὸν αὐχένα μετέωρον ἐξάραντες, ὅσοι θιασῶται τῆς κενῆς δόξης εἰσίν, ἐπάνω πάντων ἑαυτοὺς ἱδρύουσι, πόλεων, νόμων, ἐθῶν πατρίων, τῶν παρ’ ἑκάστοις πραγμάτων·
2:79εἶτα ἀπὸ δημαγωγίας ἐπὶ δημαρχίαν βαδίζοντες καὶ τὰ μὲν τῶν πλησίον καταβάλλοντες, τὰ δὲ οἰκεῖα διανιστάντες καὶ παγίως ὀρθοῦντες, ὅσα ἐλεύθερα καὶ ἀδούλωτα φύσει φρονήματα, καὶ ταῦθ’ ὑπάγεσθαι μηχανῶνται.
2:80διὸ προστίθησι· „περιστραφέντα δὲ τὰ δράγματα ὑμῶν προσεκύνησαν τὸ ἐμὸν δράγμα“ (ibid.). τέθηπε γὰρ ὁ μὲν αἰδοῦς ἐραστὴς τὸν σκληραύχενα, ὁ δὲ εὐλαβὴς τὸν αὐθάδη, ὁ δὲ ἰσότητα τιμῶν τὸν ἑαυτῷ τε καὶ ἄλλοις ἄνισον, καὶ μήποτ’ εἰκότως·
2:81ἅτε γὰρ θεωρὸς ὢν οὐ μόνον τοῦ ἀνθρωπείου βίου ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ἐν κόσμῳ συμπάντων ὁ ἀστεῖος οἶδεν ὅσον εἴωθε πνεῖν ἀνάγκη, τύχη, καιρός, βία, δυναστεία, καὶ ὅσας ὑποθέσεις καὶ ἡλίκας εὐπραγίας ἀπνευστὶ δραμούσας ἄχρις οὐρανοῦ κατέσεισαν καὶ κατέρραξαν.
2:82ὥστε ἀναγκαίως εὐλάβειαν ἐπασπιδήσεται, τοῦ μηδὲν ἐξ ἐπιδρομῆς δεινὸν παθεῖν συγγενὲς φυλακτήριον· ὃ γάρ, οἶμαι, πρὸς πόλιν τεῖχος, τοῦτ’ εὐλάβεια πρὸς ἕκαστον.
2:83ἆρ’ οὖν οὐ παραπαίουσι καὶ μεμήνασιν ὅσοι παρρησίαν ἄκαιρον σπουδάζουσιν ἐπιδείκνυσθαι, βασιλεῦσι καὶ τυράννοις ἔστιν ὅτε λέγειν τε καὶ ποιεῖν ἐναντία τολμῶντες, οὐκ αἰσθανόμενοι, ὅτι οὐ τοὺς αὐχένας μόνον ὥσπερ τὰ θρέμματα ὑπεζεύχθησαν, ἀλλ’ ὅλα τὰ σώματα καὶ τὰς ψυχὰς γύναιά τε καὶ τέκνα καὶ γονεῖς καὶ τὴν ἄλλων ἑταίρων καὶ συγγενῶν πολυάνθρωπον οἰκειότητα καὶ κοινωνίαν ἐκδέδενται, καὶ ἔξεστι τῷ ἡνιόχῳ καὶ ἐπόχῳ μετὰ πάσης εὐμαρείας κεντεῖν, ἐλαύνειν, ἐπέχειν, ἀναχαιτίζειν, ἅττ’ ἂν ἐθελήσῃ μικρὰ καὶ μείζω διατιθέναι;
2:84τοιγαροῦν στιζόμενοι καὶ μαστιγούμενοι καὶ ἀκρωτηριαζόμενοι καὶ ὅσα πρὸ τοῦ θανάτου χαλεπὰ πάντα ὠμῶς καὶ ἀνηλεῶς ἀθρόα ὑπομένοντες, ἀπαχθέντες
2:85ἐπὶ πᾶσι θνῄσκουσι. ταῦτ’ ἐστὶ τῆς ἀκαίρου παρρησίας τὰ ἐπίχειρα, οὐ παρρησίας παρά γε εὖ φρονοῦσι κριταῖς, ἀλλ’ εὐηθείας καὶ φρενοβλαβείας καὶ μελαγχολίας ἀνιάτου γέμοντα. τί λέγεις; χειμῶνά τις ὁρῶν ἀκμάζοντα καὶ βαρὺ πνεῦμα ἐναντίον καὶ λαίλαπα καταιγίζουσαν καὶ κυματούμενον πέλαγος, ἐνορμίζεσθαι δέον, ἐξορμίζεται καὶ ἐξανάγεται;
2:86τίς ἢ κυβερνήτης ἢ ναύκληρος οὕτω ποτὲ ἐμεθύσθη καὶ παρῴνησεν, ὡς ὅσων εἶπον κατασκηψάντων ἐθελῆσαι πλεῖν, ἵνα ὑπέραντλος ἄνωθεν ἐπιχυθείσης τῆς θαλάσσης ἡ ναῦς γενομένη πλωτῆρσιν αὐτοῖς ἐγκαταποθῇ; τῷ γὰρ βουλομένῳ πλεῖν ἀκινδύνως εὔδιον πνεῦμα οὔριόν τε καὶ λεῖον ἀναμένειν ἐξῆν. τί δέ;
2:87ἄρκτον τις ἢ σῦν ἄγριον ἢ λέοντα μετὰ συρμοῦ θεασάμενος ἐπιόντα, πραῧναι καὶ τιθασεῦσαι δέον, ἐξαγριαίνει καὶ ἀνερεθίζει, ὅπως θοίναν καὶ εὐωχίαν ὠμοβόροις ἀνηλεεστάτοις εὐτρεπίσῃ ἑαυτόν;
2:88εἰ μὴ καὶ φαλαγγίοις καὶ ἀσπίσι ταῖς Αἰγυπτίαις καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ὅσα τὸν φθοροποιὸν ἰὸν ἐπιφέρεται οὐδενὶ λυσιτελὲς ἀνθίστασθαι, θάνατον ἀπαραίτητον τοῖς ἅπαξ δηχθεῖσιν ἐπάγουσιν· ἀγαπητὸν γὰρ κατεπᾴδοντας καὶ χειροήθη ποιοῦντας μηδὲν ἀπ’ αὐτῶν δεινὸν παθεῖν.
2:89εἶτ’ οὔκ εἰσιν ἄνθρωποί τινες συῶν, φαλαγγίων, ἀσπίδων ἀγριώτεροι καὶ ἐπιβουλότεροι; ὧν τὸ ἐπίβουλον καὶ δυσμενὲς ἀμήχανον ἑτέρως ἢ τιθασείαις καὶ μειλίγμασι χρωμένους διεκδῦναι. τοιγάρτοι ὁ σοφὸς Ἀβραὰμ τοὺς υἱοὺς τοῦ Χὲτ — ἑρμηνεύονται δὲ ἐξιστάντες — προσκυνήσει (Gen. 23, 7), τῶν καιρῶν τοῦτο δρᾶν ἀναπειθόντων.
2:90οὐ γὰρ τιμῶν γε τοὺς ἐκ φύσεως καὶ γένους καὶ ἐθῶν ἐχθροὺς λογισμοῦ, οἳ τὸ τῆς ψυχῆς νόμισμα, παιδείαν, ἐξιστάντες καὶ κατακερματίζοντες οἰκτρῶς ἀναλίσκουσιν, ἐπὶ τὸ προσκυνεῖν ἦλθεν, ἀλλὰ τὸ παρὸν κράτος αὐτῶν καὶ τὴν δυσάλωτον ἰσχὺν δεδιὼς καὶ φυλαττόμενος ἐρεθίζειν, μέγα καὶ ἐχυρὸν κτῆμα καὶ ἀγώνισμα ἀρετῆς, σοφῶν ψυχῶν ἄριστον ἐνδιαίτημα, τὸ διπλοῦν σπήλαιον, ὃ μαχόμενον μὲν καὶ πολεμοῦντα οὐκ ἐνῆν, ὑπερχόμενον δὲ καὶ θεραπεύοντα τῷ λόγῳ, κομιεῖται. τί δέ;
2:91οὐχὶ καὶ ἡμεῖς, ὅταν ἐν ἀγορᾷ διατρίβωμεν, εἰώθαμεν ἐξίστασθαι μὲν τοῖς ἄρχουσιν, ἐξίστασθαι δὲ καὶ τοῖς ὑποζυγίοις; ἀλλ’ ἀπ’ ἐναντίας γνώμης καὶ οὐχὶ τῆς αὐτῆς· τοῖς μὲν γὰρ ἄρχουσιν ἐν τιμῇ, τοῖς δὲ ὑποζυγίοις διὰ φόβον τοῦ μηδὲν ἀπ’ αὐτῶν εἰς ἡμᾶς νεωτερισθῆναι.
2:92καὶ διδόντων μὲν τῶν καιρῶν ἐπιτιθεμένους τὴν τῶν ἐχθρῶν βίαν καλὸν καταλῦσαι, μὴ ἐπιτρεπόντων δὲ ἀσφαλὲς ἡσυχάσαι, βουλομένοις δέ τιν’ ὠφέλειαν εὑρίσκεσθαι παρ’ αὐτῶν ἁρμόττον τιθασεῦσαι.
2:93Διὸ καὶ νῦν ἄξιον ἐπαινεῖν τοὺς μὴ ὑποχωροῦντας τῷ τῆς κενῆς προστάτῃ δόξης, ἀλλὰ ἀνθισταμένους καὶ λέγοντας· „μὴ βασιλεύων βασιλεύσεις ἐφ’ ἡμῖν“ (Gen. 37,8) ; οὔπω γὰρ ἰσχυκότα ὁρῶσιν αὐτόν, οὐχ ὡς φλόγα ἡμμένον τε καὶ λάμποντα ἐν ἀφθόνῳ ὕλῃ νεμόμενον, ἀλλ’ ἔθ’ ὡς σπινθῆρα ἐντυφόμενον, ὀνειρώττοντα δόξαν, οὐκ ἐναργῶς ἤδη μετιόντα.
2:94χρηστὰς γὰρ ἐλπίδας ὑποβάλλουσιν ἑαυτοῖς, ὡσεὶ καὶ μὴ ἁλῶναι δυνησόμενοι. παρὸ λέγουσι· „μὴ ἐφ’ ἡμῖν βασιλεύσεις“; ἴσον τῷ ζώντων, ὄντων, ἰσχυόντων, ἐμπνεόντων ἡμῶν οἴει δυναστεύσειν; ἀσθενησάντων μὲν γὰρ ἴσως ἐπικρατήσεις, ἐρρωμένων δὲ ἐν ὑπηκόου μοίρᾳ τετάξῃ.
Book 2, §§95–119
2:95καὶ πέφυκεν οὕτως ἔχειν· ἐπειδὰν μὲν γὰρ ἐν διανοίᾳ ὁ ὀρθὸς ἰσχύῃ λόγος, ἡ κενὴ καταλύεται δόξα, ῥώννυται δὲ ἀσθενήσαντος. ἕως οὖν ἔτι σῴαν ἔχει τὴν ἑαυτῆς δύναμιν ἡ ψυχὴ καὶ μηδὲν αὐτῆς μέρος ἠκρωτηρίασται, θαρρείτω βάλλειν καὶ τοξεύειν τὸν ἐναντιούμενον τῦφον καὶ ἐλευθεροστομείτω φάσκουσα· οὔτε βασιλεύσεις οὔτε κυριεύσεις (ibid.) οὔτε ἡμῶν οὔτε ἐφ’ ἡμῶν ἑτέρων·
2:96ἀλλά σου τὰς ἐπανατάσεις καὶ τὰς ἀπειλὰς ἐφόδῳ μιᾷ καταδραμούμεθα σὺν τοῖς δορυφόροις καὶ ὑπασπισταῖς, φρονήσεως ἐγγόνοις· ἐφ’ ὧν λέγεται ὅτι „προσέθεντο μισεῖν αὐτὸν ἕνεκα τῶν ἐνυπνίων αὐτοῦ καὶ ἕνεκα τῶν ῥημάτων αὐτοῦ“ (ibid.).
2:97ἀλλ’ οὐ ῥήματα μὲν καὶ ἐνύπνια πάνθ’ ὅσα ὁ τῦφος ἂν εἰδωλοποιῇ, πράγματα δὲ καὶ σαφεῖς ἐνάργειαι τὰ ὅσα ἐπ’ ὀρθὸν βίον καὶ λόγον ἀναφέρεται; καὶ τὰ μὲν μίσους ἅτε κατεψευσμένα, τὰ δὲ φιλίας ἅτε ἀληθείας τῆς ἐπεράστου γέμοντα ἐπάξια.
2:98μηδεὶς οὖν ἔτι κατηγορεῖν ἐπιτολμάτω τῶν τοσούτων τὰς ἀρετὰς ἀνδρῶν ὡς μισανθρώπου καὶ μισαδέλφου δεῖγμα ἤθους ἐκφερόντων, ἀλλὰ μαθών, ὅτι οὐκ ἄνθρωπος ὁ νῦν ἐπικρινόμενός ἐστιν, ἀλλὰ τῶν ἐν ἑκάστου τῇ ψυχῇ τρόπων ὁ δοξομανὴς καὶ φιλότυφος, ἀποδεχέσθω τοὺς ἄσπονδον ἔχθραν καὶ μῖσος ἀκατάλλακτον πρὸς αὐτὸν αἰρομένους καὶ μηδέποτε τὸν στυγηθέντα πρὸς ἐκείνων στερξάτω, γνοὺς ἀκριβῶς,
2:99ὅτι οἱ τοιοῦτοι δικασταὶ γνώμης οὐκ ἄν ποτε ἐσφάλησαν ὑγιοῦς, ἀλλὰ μαθόντες καὶ παιδευθέντες ἐξ ἀρχῆς τὸν ὄντως βασιλέα, τὸν κύριον, προσκυνεῖν τε καὶ τιμᾶν ἀγανακτοῦσιν, εἴ τις τὴν θεοῦ τιμὴν νοσφίζεται καὶ τοὺς ἱκέτας αὐτοῦ μετακαλεῖ πρὸς τὴν ἰδίαν θεραπείαν.
2:100διὸ θαρροῦντες ἐροῦσιν· „μὴ βασιλεύων βασιλεύσεις ἐφ’ ἡμῖν“; ἢ ἀγνοεῖς, ὅτι οὔκ ἐσμεν αὐτόνομοι, ἀλλ’ ὑπὸ ἀθανάτου βασιλέως, τοῦ μόνου θεοῦ, βασιλευόμεθα; τί δέ; „κυριεύων κυριεύσεις ἡμῶν“ (Gen. 37,8) ; μὴ γὰρ οὐ δεσποζόμεθα καὶ ἔχομέν τε καὶ ἕξομεν εἰς τὸν ἀεὶ χρόνον τὸν αὐτὸν κύριον; ᾧ δουλεύοντες οὕτω γεγήθαμεν, ὡς οὐδεὶς ἕτερος ἐπ’ ἐλευθερίᾳ· καὶ γάρ ἐστι τὸ δουλεύειν θεῷ πάντων ἄριστον, ὅσα ἐν γενέσει τετίμηται.
2:101εὐξαίμην ἂν οὖν καὶ αὐτὸς δυνηθῆναι τοῖς γνωσθεῖσιν ὑπὸ τούτων ἐμμεῖναι βεβαίως· ὀπτῆρες γὰρ καὶ κατάσκοποι καὶ ἔφοροι πραγμάτων, οὐ σωμάτων, εἰσὶν ἀκριβοδίκαιοι, πάντα νήφοντες τὸν αἰῶνα, ὡς ὑπὸ μηδενὸς ἔτι τῶν εἰωθότων δελεάζειν ἀπατᾶσθαι.
2:102μεθύω δὲ ἄχρι νῦν ἐγὼ καὶ ἀσαφείᾳ πολλῇ κέχρημαι καὶ βάκτρων καὶ τῶν ποδηγετησόντων ὥσπερ οἱ τυφλοὶ δέομαι· σκηριπτομένῳ γὰρ ἐγγένοιτ’ ἂν ἴσως μήτε προσπταίειν μήτε ὀλισθαίνειν.
2:103εἰ δέ τινες ἀνεξετάστους καὶ ἀπερισκέπτους εἰδότες ἑαυτοὺς οὐ σπουδάζουσι τοῖς ἐξητακόσιν ἃ χρὴ πάντα ἀκριβῶς καὶ περιεσκεμμένως ἀκολουθεῖν, ἀγνοοῦντες τὴν ὁδὸν ἐπισταμένοις, ἴστωσαν ὅτι δυσαναπορεύτοις βαράθροις περιπαρέντες οὐδ’ ἐπειγόμενοι προελθεῖν ἔτι δυνήσονται.
2:104ἐγὼ δὲ ἐκείνοις, ὅταν μικρὸν ἀνεθῶ τῆς μέθης, οὕτως εἰμὶ ἔνσπονδος, ὡς τὸν αὐτὸν ἐχθρὸν καὶ φίλον εἶναι νομίζειν. καὶ νῦν οὐδὲν ἧττον τὸν ἐνυπνιαστήν, ὅτι γε καὶ ἐκεῖνοι, προβαλοῦμαι καὶ στυγήσω· καὶ οὐδεὶς εὖ φρονῶν ἐπὶ τούτῳ μέμψαιτ’ ἄν με τῷ τὰς πλειόνων γνώμας τε καὶ ψήφους ἀεὶ νικᾶν.
2:105ἐπειδὰν δὲ πρὸς ἀμείνω βίον μεταβάλῃ καὶ μηκέτ’ ἐνυπνιάζηται μηδὲ ταῖς κεναῖς τῶν κενοδόξων φαντασίαις ἰλυσπώμενος κακοπαθῇ μηδὲ νύκτα καὶ σκότος καὶ πραγμάτων ἀδήλων καὶ ἀτεκμάρτων συντυχίας ὀνειροπολῇ,
2:106περιαναστὰς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ βαθέος ὕπνου διατελῇ μὲν ἐγρηγορώς, ἐνάργειαν δὲ πρὸ ἀσαφείας καὶ πρὸ ψευδοῦς ὑπολήψεως ἀλήθειαν καὶ πρὸ νυκτὸς ἡμέραν καὶ φῶς πρὸ σκότους ἀποδέχηται καὶ τὴν μὲν γυναῖκα τοῦ Αἰγυπτίου, σώματος ἡδονήν, εἰς αὐτὴν εἰσελθεῖν καὶ τῆς ὁμιλίας αὐτῆς ἀπολαῦσαι παρακαλοῦσαν ἀποστρέφηται (Gen. 39,7) διὰ πόθον ἐγκρατείας καὶ ζῆλον εὐσεβείας ἄλεκτον,
2:107ὧν δὲ ἔδοξεν ἀλλοτριωθῆναι συγγενικῶν καὶ πατρῴων ἀγαθῶν μεταποιῆται πάλιν τὸ ἐπιβάλλον ἀρετῆς ἑαυτῷ μέρος δικαιῶν ἀνακτᾶσθαι καὶ ταῖς κατὰ μικρὸν ἐπανιὼν βελτιώσεσιν ὡς ἐπὶ κορυφῆς τοῦ ἑαυτοῦ βίου καὶ τέλους ἱδρυθεὶς ἀναφθέγξηται, ὃ παθὼν ἀκριβῶς ἔμαθεν, ὅτι „τοῦ θεοῦ“ (Gen. 50, 19) ἐστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐδενὸς ἔτι τῶν εἰς γένεσιν ἡκόντων αἰσθητοῦ τὸ παράπαν,
2:108οἱ μὲν ἀδελφοὶ καταλλακτηρίους ποιήσονται συμβάσεις, τὸ μῖσος εἰς φιλίαν καὶ τὸ κακόνουν εἰς εὔνοιαν μεταβαλόντες, ἐγὼ δ’ ὁ τούτων ὀπαδὸς — πείθεσθαι γὰρ ὡς δεσπόταις οἰκέτης ἔμαθον — ἐπαινῶν οὐκ ἐπιλείψω τῆς μετανοίας ἐκεῖνον·
2:109εἴ γε καὶ Μωυσῆς ὁ ἱεροφάντης ἀξιέραστον καὶ ἀξιομνημόνευτον οὖσαν αὐτοῦ τὴν μετάνοιαν ἐκ φθορᾶς ἀνασῴζει διὰ συμβόλου τῶν ὀστέων, ἃ κατορωρύχθαι μέχρι τοῦ παντὸς οὐκ ᾤετο δεῖν ἐᾶν ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ (Exod. 13, 19), παγχάλεπον ἡγούμενος, εἴ τι ἤνθησεν ἡ ψυχὴ καλόν, τοῦτ’ ἐᾶσαι μαρανθῆναι καὶ κατακλυσθὲν ἀφανισθῆναι πλημμύραις, ἃς ὁ τῶν παθῶν Αἰγύπτιος ποταμός, τὸ σῶμα, διὰ πασῶν τῶν αἰσθήσεων ῥέων ἐνδελεχῶς ἐκδίδωσιν.
2:110Ἡ μὲν οὖν ἐπὶ τῶν δραγμάτων φανεῖσα ὄψις ἀπὸ γῆς καὶ διάκρισις εἴρηται· τὴν δὲ ἑτέραν καιρὸς ἤδη σκοπεῖν, καὶ ὡς ὀνειροκριτικῇ
2:111τέχνῃ διαστέλλεται. „εἶδεν“ οὖν φησιν „ἐνύπνιον ἕτερον καὶ διηγήσατο τῷ πατρὶ καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ εἶπεν· ὥσπερ ὁ ἥλιος καὶ ἡ σελήνη καὶ ἕνδεκα ἀστέρες προσεκύνουν με. καὶ ἐπετίμησεν αὐτῷ ὁ πατὴρ καὶ εἶπε· τί τὸ ἐνύπνιον ὃ ἐνυπνιάσθης; ἆρά γε ἐλθόντες ἐλευσόμεθα ἐγὼ καὶ ἡ μήτηρ σου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου προσκυνῆσαί σοι ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν; ἐζήλωσαν δὲ αὐτὸν οἱ ἀδελφοί, ὁ δὲ πατὴρ διετήρησε τὸ ῥῆμα“ (Gen. 37,9—11).
2:112φασὶ τοίνυν οἱ μετεωρολογικοί, τὸν ζῳδιακὸν κύκλον μέγιστον ὄντα τῶν κατ’ οὐρανὸν δυοκαίδεκα ζῳδίοις, ἀφ’ ὧν καὶ τὴν ἐπωνυμίαν ἔσχε, κατηστερίσθαι, ἥλιον δὲ καὶ σελήνην ἀεὶ περὶ αὐτὸν εἱλουμένους ἕκαστον διεξέρχεσθαι τῶν ζῳδίων, οὐκ ἰσοταχεῖς, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀριθμοῖς καὶ χρόνοις ἀνίσοις, τὸν μὲν ἐν ἡμέραις τριάκοντα, τὴν δὲ δωδεκατημορίῳ τούτων μάλιστα, ὅπερ ἡμερῶν δυεῖν καὶ ἡμίσους ἐστίν.
2:113ἔδοξεν οὖν ὁ τὴν θεόπεμπτον φαντασίαν ἰδὼν ὑπ’ ἀστέρων ἕνδεκα προσκυνεῖσθαι, δωδέκατον συντάττων ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὴν τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ συμπλήρωσιν κύκλου.
2:114μέμνημαι δὲ καὶ πρότερόν τινος ἀκούσας ἀνδρὸς οὐκ ἀμελῶς οὐδὲ ῥᾳθύμως τῷ μαθήματι προσενεχθέντος, ὅτι οὐκ ἄνθρωποι μόνοι δοξομανοῦσιν, ἀλλὰ καὶ οἱ ἀστέρες καὶ περὶ πρωτείων ἁμιλλώμενοι δικαιοῦσιν οἱ μείζους | ἀεὶ πρὸς τῶν ἐλαττόνων δορυφορεῖσθαι.
2:115ταῦτα μὲν οὖν, ὅπως ἂν ἀληθείας ἢ εἰκαιολογίας ἔχῃ, παρετέον τοῖς μετεωροθήραις σκοπεῖν. λέγομεν δὲ ἡμεῖς, [ὡς] ὅτι ὁ σπουδῆς ἀκρίτου καὶ φιλονεικίας ἀλόγου καὶ κενῆς δόξης ἐραστής, ἀεὶ φυσώμενος ὑπ’ ἀνοίας, οὐ μόνον ἀνθρώπους ὑπερκύπτειν ἀλλὰ καὶ τὴν τῶν ὄντων φύσιν ἀξιοῖ.
2:116καὶ νομίζει μὲν ἑαυτοῦ χάριν τὰ πάντα γεγενῆσθαι, ἀναγκαῖον δ’ εἶναι δασμὸν ἕκαστον ὡς βασιλεῖ φέρειν αὑτῷ, γῆν, ὕδωρ, ἀέρα, οὐρανόν· καὶ τοσαύτῃ τῆς εὐηθείας ὑπερβολῇ χρῆται, ὥστε οὐκ ἰσχύει λογίσασθαι, ὃ κἂν παῖς ἄφρων ἐννοηθείη, ὅτι τεχνίτης οὐδεὶς ἕνεκα μέρους ποτὲ ὅλον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ ὅλου μέρος δημιουργεῖ· μέρος δὲ τοῦ παντὸς ἄνθρωπος, ὥστε γεγονὼς εἰς τὸ συμπλήρωμα τοῦ κόσμου δικαίως ἂν αὐτὸς ἐκείνῳ συντελοίη.
2:117φλυαρίας δὲ ἄρα τοσαύτης γέμουσί τινες, ὥστε ἀγανακτοῦσιν, εἰ μὴ ὁ κόσμος τοῖς βουλήμασιν αὐτῶν ἕποιτο. διὰ τοῦτο Ξέρξης μὲν ὁ Περσῶν βασιλεύς, βουλόμενος τοὺς ἐχθροὺς καταπλῆξαι, μεγαλουργίας ἐπίδειξιν ἐποιεῖτο, καινουργῶν τὴν φύσιν·
2:118γῆν μὲν γὰρ μετεστοιχείου καὶ θάλατταν, ἀντιδιδοὺς πελάγει μὲν ἤπειρον, ἠπείρῳ δὲ πέλαγος, τὸν μὲν Ἑλλήσποντον ζευγνὺς γεφύραις, ὄρος δὲ τὸν Ἄθω ῥηγνὺς εἰς βαθεῖς κόλπους, οἳ πληρούμενοι θαλάττης ὁ νέος καὶ χειρόκμητος εὐθὺς πόντος ἦσαν, τὸ παλαιὸν τῆς φύσεως ἐξαλλοιωθείς·
2:119τὰ δὲ περίγεια, ὡς ἐδόκει, θαυματουργήσας ἀνέβαινε ταῖς τετολμημέναις ἐπινοίαις συνανάγων ἀσέβειαν ἑαυτῷ καὶ εἰς οὐρανὸν ὁ δύστηνος, ὡς τὰ ἀκίνητα κινήσων καὶ τὸν θεῖον στρατὸν καθαιρήσων, καί, τὸ λεγόμενον, ἀφ’ ἱερᾶς ἤρχετο·
Book 2, §§120–144
2:120τὸν γὰρ ἄριστον τῶν ἐκεῖ, τὸν ἡγεμόνα ἡμέρας ἥλιον, ἐτόξευεν, ὥσπερ οὐκ αὐτὸς ἀφανεῖ βέλει φρενοβλαβείας τιτρωσκόμενος οὐ μόνον διὰ τὸ ἀδυνάτων ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὸ ἀνοσιωτάτων ἔργων ἐρᾶν, ὧν καὶ θάτερον μεγάλη τῷ ἐγχειροῦντι δύσκλεια ἦν.
2:121Γερμανῶν δὲ πολυανθρωποτάτην μοῖραν — ἀμπωτίζει δὲ παρ’ αὐτοῖς ἡ θάλαττα — λόγος ἔχει κατὰ τὰς ἐκεῖ παλιρροίας ἐπιδρομὰς ὠθουμένους μετὰ σπουδῆς, ἐπανατεινομένους γυμνὰ τὰ ξίφη, θέοντας ὡς στῖφος πολεμίων τὸ κυματούμενον πέλαγος ὑπαντιάζειν·
2:122οὓς ἄξιον μισεῖν μέν, ὅτι ἐναντία ὅπλα δι’ ἀθεότητα κατὰ τῶν ἀδουλώτων τῆς φύσεως αἱρεῖσθαι τολμῶσι μερῶν, χλευάζειν δέ, ὅτι ἀδυνάτοις ἐγχειροῦσιν ὡς δυνατοῖς, νομίζοντες ὡς ζῷον καὶ ὕδωρ κεντεῖσθαι, τιτρώσκεσθαι, κτείνεσθαι δύνασθαι, καὶ πάλιν ἀλγεῖν, δεδιέναι, φόβῳ τῶν ἐπιόντων ἀποδιδράσκειν καὶ ὅσα ψυχῆς πάθη κατά τε ἡδονὰς καὶ ἀλγηδόνας
2:123ἀναδέχεσθαι. χθὲς δ’ οὐ πρῴην ἄνδρα τινὰ οἶδα τῶν ἡγεμονικῶν, ὅς, ἐπειδὴ τὴν προστασίαν καὶ ἐπιμέλειαν εἶχεν Αἰγύπτου, τὰ πάτρια κινεῖν ἡμῶν διενοήθη καὶ διαφερόντως τὸν ἁγιώτατον καὶ φρικωδέστατον περὶ τῆς ἑβδόμης ὑπάρχοντα νόμον καταλύειν καὶ ὑπηρετεῖν ἠνάγκαζεν αὐτῷ καὶ τὰ ἄλλα ποιεῖν παρὰ τὸ καθεστὼς ἔθος, νομίζων ἀρχὴν ἔσεσθαι καὶ τῆς περὶ τὰ ἄλλα ἐκδιαιτήσεως καὶ τῆς τῶν ὅλων παραβάσεως, εἰ τὸ ἐπὶ τῇ ἑβδόμῃ πάτριον ἀνελεῖν δυνηθείη.
2:124καὶ μήθ’ οὓς ἐβιάζετο ὁρῶν εἴκοντας τοῖς ἐπιτάγμασι μήτε τὴν ἄλλην πληθὺν ἠρεμοῦσαν, ἀλλὰ βαρέως καὶ τραχέως φέρουσαν τὸ πρᾶγμα καὶ ὡς ἐπ’ ἀνδραποδισμῷ καὶ πορθήσει καὶ κατασκαφῇ πατρίδος πενθοῦντάς τε καὶ κατηφοῦντας, ἠξίου λόγῳ διδάσκειν παρανομεῖν, φάσκων·
2:125εἰ πολεμίων ἔφοδος αἰφνίδιον γένοιτο ἢ κατακλυσμοῦ φορὰ τοῦ ποταμοῦ ταῖς πλημμύραις παραρρήξαντος τὸ χῶμα ἢ ῥιπὴ πυρὸς ἢ κεραυνία φλὸξ ἢ λιμὸς ἢ λοιμὸς ἢ σεισμὸς ἢ ὅσα ἄλλα κακὰ χειροποίητα καὶ θεήλατα, μεθ’ ἡσυχίας πάσης οἴκοι διατρίψετε;
2:126ἢ μετὰ τοῦ συνήθους σχήματος προελεύσεσθε, τὴν μὲν δεξιὰν εἴσω χεῖρα συναγαγόντες, τὴν δὲ ἑτέραν ὑπὸ τῆς ἀμπεχόνης παρὰ ταῖς λαγόσι πήξαντες, ἵνα μηδ’ ἄκοντές τι τῶν εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι παράσχησθε;
2:127καὶ καθεδεῖσθε ἐν τοῖς συναγωγίοις ὑμῶν, τὸν εἰωθότα θίασον ἀγείροντες καὶ ἀσφαλῶς τὰς ἱερὰς βίβλους ἀναγινώσκοντες κἂν εἴ τι μὴ τρανὲς εἴη διαπτύσσοντες καὶ τῇ πατρίῳ φιλοσοφίᾳ διὰ μακρηγορίας ἐνευκαιροῦντές τε καὶ ἐνσχολάζοντες;
2:128ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἀποσεισάμενοι πάντα ταῦτα πρὸς τὴν ἑαυτῶν καὶ γονέων καὶ τέκνων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων οἰκειοτάτων καὶ φιλτάτων σωμάτων, εἰ δὲ δεῖ τἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν, καὶ κτημάτων καὶ χρημάτων, ὡς μηδὲ ταῦτα ἀφανισθείη, βοήθειαν ἀποδύσεσθε.
2:129καὶ μὴν οὗτος αὐτὸς ἐγὼ τὰ λεχθέντα, ἔφη, πάντα εἰμί, τυφώς, πόλεμος, κατακλυσμός, κεραυνός, λιμηρὰ καὶ λοιμώδης νόσος, ὁ τινάττων καὶ κυκῶν τὰ παγίως ἑστῶτα σεισμός, εἱμαρμένης ἀνάγκης οὐκ ὄνομα, ἀλλ’ ἐμφανὴς ἐγγὺς ἑστῶσα δύναμις.
2:130τί οὖν τὸν ταῦτα λέγοντα ἢ διανοούμενον αὐτὸ μόνον εἶναι φῶμεν; ἆρ’ οὐκ ἐκτόπιον; ὑπερωκεάνιον μὲν οὖν ἢ μετακόσμιόν τι καινὸν κακόν, εἴ γε τῷ πάντα μακαρίῳ ὁ πάντα βαρυδαίμων ἑαυτὸν ἐξομοιοῦν ἐτόλμησεν.
2:131ὑπερθεῖτ’ ἂν οὗτος ἥλιον καὶ σελήνην καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἀστέρας βλασφημεῖν, ὁπότε τι τῶν ἐλπισθέντων κατὰ τὰς ἐτησίους ὥρας ἢ μὴ συνόλως ἢ μὴ ῥᾳδίως ἀποβαίνοι, φλογμὸν μὲν θέρους, κρυμὸν δὲ [καὶ] χειμῶνος βαρὺν κατασκήπτοντος, ἔαρος δὲ καὶ μετοπώρου, τοῦ μὲν πρὸς εὐκαρπίαν ἐστειρωμένου, τοῦ δὲ πρὸς νοσημάτων γενέσεις εὐτοκίᾳ χρωμένου;
2:132πάντα μὲν οὖν ἀνασείων κάλων ἀχαλίνου στόματος καὶ κακηγόρου γλώττης, ὥσπερ τὸν εἰωθότα δασμὸν οὐκ ἐνεγκόντας τοὺς ἀστέρας αἰτιάσεται, τιμᾶσθαι μονονοὺ καὶ προσκυνεῖσθαι δικαιῶν ὑπὸ τῶν οὐρανίων τἀπίγεια καὶ περιττότερον ἑαυτόν, ὅσῳ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἄνθρωπος ὢν διενηνοχέναι ζῴων
2:133δοκεῖ. τοιοῦτοι μὲν οἱ κορυφαῖοι τῆς κενῆς ἡμῖν δόξης γράφονται, τοὺς δὲ χορευτὰς ἐν μέρει κατ’ αὐτοὺς ἴδωμεν. οὗτοι μὲν ἐπιβουλεύουσιν ἀεὶ τοῖς ἀσκηταῖς ἀρετῆς· οὓς ὅταν ἴδωσι σπουδάζοντας τὸν αὐτῶν βίον ἀληθείᾳ ἀδόλῳ φαιδρύνειν καὶ ὡς πρὸς σεληνιακὸν ἢ τὸ ἀφ’ ἡλίου καθαρὸν φέγγος αὐγάζειν, ἀπατῶντες ἢ βιαζόμενοι κωλύουσιν, εἰς τὸν ἀσεβῶν ἀνήλιον χῶρον εἰσελαύνοντες, ὃν ἐπέχουσι νὺξ βαθεῖα καὶ σκότος ἀτελεύτητον καὶ εἰδώλων καὶ φασμάτων καὶ ὀνειράτων ἔθνη μυρία, κἀκεῖ καταδύσαντες προσκυνεῖν ὡς δεσπότας ἀναγκάζουσι.
2:134τὸν μὲν γὰρ φρονήσεως ἀσκητὴν ὑπολαμβάνομεν ἥλιον, ἐπειδήπερ ὁ μὲν τοῖς σώμασιν, ὁ δὲ τοῖς κατὰ ψυχὴν πράγμασιν ἐμπαρέχει φῶς, τὴν δὲ παιδείαν, ᾗ κέχρηται, σελήνην — ἐν νυκτὶ γὰρ ἡ ἑκατέρας εἱλικρινεστάτη καὶ ὠφελιμωτάτη χρῆσίς ἐστιν —, ἀδελφοὺς δὲ τοὺς παιδείας καὶ ἀσκητικῆς ψυχῆς ὡς ἂν ἐγγόνους ἀστείους λόγους, οὓς πάντας ὀρθὴν ἀτραπὸν εὐθύνοντας τοῦ βίου παλαίσμασι πολυτρόποις καὶ πολυμηχάνοις αὐχενίζοντες ἐκτραχηλίζειν καὶ καταρράττειν ὑποσκελίζοντες οἱ μηδὲν ὑγιὲς μήτε λέγειν μήτε φρονεῖν ἐγνωκότες ἀξιοῦσι.
2:135διὸ καὶ ἐπιτιμᾷ τῷ τοιούτῳ τιθασῶς ὁὁ πατήρ, οὐκ Ἰακώβ, ἀλλ’ ὁὁ καὶ τούτου πρεσβύτερος ὀρθὸς λόγος φάσκων· „τί τὸ ἐνύπνιον τοῦτο ἐνυπνιάσθης“ (Gen. 37, 10) ;
2:136ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐνύπνιον εἶδες; ἢ ὑπέλαβες, ὅτι τὰ φύσει ἐλεύθερα ἀνθρωπείων ἀνάγκῃ δοῦλα ἔσται καὶ ὑπήκοα τὰ ἄρχοντα καί, τὸ ἔτι παραδοξότερον, οὐκ ἄλλων ὑπήκοα ἀλλὰ τῶν ἀρχομένων, οὐδ’ ἑτέρων δοῦλα ἀλλὰ τῶν δουλευόντων; εἰ μὴ ἄρα κράτει θεοῦ τοῦ μόνου πάντα δυνατοῦ, ᾧ καὶ τὰ ἀκίνητα κινεῖν καὶ τὰ φορούμενα θέμις ἱδρύσασθαι, μεταβολὴ τῶν καθεστώτων γένοιτο πρὸς τἀναντία.
2:137ἐπεὶ τίνα ἕξει λόγον τὸ ὀργίζεσθαι καὶ ἐπιτιμᾶν τῷ τὴν καθ’ ὕπνον φαντασίαν ἰδόντι; μὴ γὰρ ἑκὼν εἶδον αὐτήν; ἐρεῖ, τί μοι τὰ τῶν ἐκ προνοίας ἠδικηκότων ἐπάγεις ἐγκλήματα; τὸ προσπεσὸν ἔξωθεν καὶ πλῆξάν μου τὴν διάνοιαν αἰφνίδιον ἄκοντος διηγησάμην.
2:138ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὐκ ἔστι περὶ ὀνείρατος ὁ παρὼν λόγος, ἀλλὰ περὶ πραγμάτων ἐοικότων ἐνυπνίοις· ἃ τοῖς μὴ λίαν κεκαθαρμένοις μεγάλα καὶ λαμπρὰ καὶ περιμάχητα εἶναι δοκεῖ, μικρὰ ὄντα καὶ ἀμυδρὰ καὶ χλεύης ἐπάξια παρ’ ἀδεκάστοις ἀληθείας βραβευταῖς.
2:139Ἆρ’ οὖν, φησίν, ἐλεύσομαι μὲν ὁ ὀρθὸς λόγος, ἐγώ, ἀφίξεται δὲ καὶ ἡ τοῦ φιλομαθοῦς θιάσου [ψυχὴ] μήτηρ ὁμοῦ καὶ τροφός, ἀρετῶσα παιδεία, συντενοῦσι δὲ καὶ οἱ ἀμφοτέρων ἡμῶν ἔγγονοι καὶ στάντες ἀντικρὺς οὕτω κατὰ στοῖχον ἐν κόσμῳ τὰς χεῖρας ἐξάραντες προσευξώμεθα τῦφον πρότερον ἀφέντες;
2:140εἶτα καταβαλόντες ἑαυτοὺς εἰς τὸ ἔδαφος ποτνιᾶσθαι καὶ προσκυνεῖν ἐπιχειρήσωμεν; ἀλλὰ μὴ ἐπιλάμψαι ποτὲ τούτοις γινομένοις ἥλιος, ἐπεὶ βαθὺ μὲν σκότος κακοῖς, τηλαυγὲς δὲ φῶς ἀγαθοῖς ἐφαρμόζει. τί δ’ ἂν γένοιτο μεῖζον κακὸν ἢ τὸν πλαστὸν καὶ φένακα τῦφον ἀντὶ τῆς ἀπλάστου καὶ ἀψευδοῦς ἀτυφίας ἐπαινεῖσθαί τε καὶ θαυμάζεσθαι;
2:141παγκάλως δὲ προσδιέσταλται τὸ "διετήρησεν ὁ πατὴρ τὸ ῥῆμα“ (Gen. 37,11)· ψυχῆς γὰρ οὐ νεωτέρας οὐδὲ ἀγόνου καὶ ἐστειρωμένης, ἀλλὰ τῷ ὄντι πρεσβυτέρας καὶ γεννᾶν ἐπισταμένης ἔργον ἐστὶ συζῆν εὐλαβείᾳ καὶ μηδενὸς καταφρονεῖν τὸ παράπαν, ἀλλὰ τὸ ἄδραστον καὶ ἀνίκητον τοῦ θεοῦ κράτος κατεπτηχέναι καὶ περιαθρεῖν ἐν κύκλῳ, τί ἄρα ἀποβήσεται τὸ τέλος αὐτῇ.
2:142διὰ τοῦτο καὶ τὴν Μωυσέως ἀδελφὴν — ἐλπὶς δὲ παρ’ ἡμῖν τοῖς ἀλληγορικοῖς ὀνομάζεται — φασὶν ἀποσκοπεῖν μακρόθεν (Exod. 2, 4) οἱ χρησμοί, πρὸς τὸ τοῦ βίου δήπου τέλος ἐμβλέπουσαν, ἵνα αἴσιον ἀπαντήσῃ, τοῦ τελεσφόρου καταπέμψαντος αὐτὸ ἄνωθεν ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ.
2:143πολλοὶ γὰρ πολλάκις ἄπλωτα πελάγη διαβαλόντες καὶ μακρὸν πλοῦν οὐρίοις πνεύμασιν ἀκίνδυνοι παραπεμφθέντες ἐν αὐτοῖς λιμέσιν ἐξαίφνης ἐναυάγησαν, μέλλοντες ἤδη προσορμίζεσθαι.
2:144μυρίοι δὲ καὶ βαρεῖς καὶ πολυετεῖς πολέμους ἀνὰ κράτος ἑλόντες καὶ ἄτρωτοι διατελέσαντες, ὡς μηδ’ ἐπιφάνειαν ἄκραν νυχθῆναι, ἀλλ’ ὥσπερ ἐκ πανηγύρεως κοινοδήμου καὶ δημοτελοῦς ἑορτῆς τελεῖν * * * ὁλοκλήροις καὶ παντελέσι, μεθ’ ἱλαρᾶς ἐπιστρέψαντες εὐθυμίας ἐν ταῖς ἰδίαις ὑφ’ ὧν ἥκιστ’ ἐχρῆν ἐπεβουλεύθησαν οἰκίαις, τὸ λεγόμενον τοῦτο, „βόες ἐπὶ φάτνῃ“ σφαγέντες.
Book 2, §§145–169
2:145ὥσπερ δὴ ταῦτα ἀπροσδόκητοι καὶ ἀτέκμαρτοι συντυχίαι κατασκήπτειν φιλοῦσιν, οὕτω καὶ τὰς περὶ ψυχὴν δυνάμεις ἀντωθοῦσι πρὸς τἀναντία καὶ ἀντιμετακλίνουσιν, ἢν οἷαί τε ὦσι, καὶ ἀνατρέψαι βιάζονται. τίς γὰρ εἰς τὸν ἀγῶνα τοῦ βίου παρελθὼν ἄπτωτος ἔμεινε;
2:146τίς δ’ οὐχ ὑπεσκελίσθη; εὐδαίμων δ’ ὁ μὴ πολλάκις. τίνι δ’ οὐκ ἐφήδρευεν ἡ τύχη, διαπνέουσα καὶ συλλεγομένη ῥώμην, ἵνα συμπλακεῖσα εὐθὺς ἐξαρπάσῃ, πρὶν φθάσαι τὸν ἀντίπαλον κονίσασθαι;
2:147οὐκ ἤδη τινὰς ἴσμεν ἐκ παίδων εἰς γῆρας ἀφιγμένους, οἳ μηδεμιᾶς ἐπῄσθοντο ταραχῆς εἴτε δι’ εὐμοιρίαν φύσεως εἴτε διὰ τὴν τῶν τρεφόντων καὶ παιδευόντων ἐπιμέλειαν εἴτε καὶ ἀμφότερα, βαθείας δ’ εἰρήνης ἀναπλησθέντας τῆς ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἣ πρὸς ἀλήθειάν ἐστιν εἰρήνη, τῆς κατὰ τὰς πόλεις ἀρχέτυπον, καὶ διὰ τοῦτ’ εὐδαίμονας νομισθέντας, ὅτι τὸν ὑπὸ τῶν παθῶν ἀναρριπιζόμενον ἐμφύλιον πόλεμον, ἀργαλεώτατον ὄντα πολέμων, οὐδ’ ὄναρ ἐπῄσθοντο, εἶτ’ ἐν αὐταῖς τοῦ βίου ταῖς δυσμαῖς ἐξοκείλαντάς τε καὶ ναυαγήσαντας ἢ περὶ γλῶτταν ἄθυρον ἢ περὶ γαστέρα ἄπληστον ἢ περὶ τὴν τῶν ὑπογαστρίων ἀκράτορα λεγνείαν;
2:148οἱ μὲν γὰρ τὸν μειρακιώδη τῶν ἀσώτων, ἄτιμον, ἀποκήρυκτον, αἰσχρὸν βίον ἐζήλωσαν „ἐπὶ γήραος οὐδῷ“, οἱ δὲ τὸν πανοῦργον καὶ συκοφάντην καὶ ῥᾳδιουργόν, ἀπαρχόμενοι φιλοπραγμοσύνης, ὅτε εἰκὸς ἦν ἤδη καὶ παλαιὰν οὖσαν καταλῦσαι.
2:149διὸ χρὴ τὸν θεὸν ποτνιᾶσθαι καὶ λιπαρῶς ἱκετεύειν, ὅπως τὸ ἐπίκηρον ἡμῶν γένος μὴ παρέλθῃ, κελεύσῃ δὲ διαιωνίζειν αὐτοῦ τὸν σωτήριον ἔλεον· χαλεπὸν γὰρ εἰρήνης ἀκράτου γευσαμένους κωλυθῆναι κορεσθῆναι.
2:150ἀλλὰ φέρε, δίψης κουφότερόν ἐστι κακὸν ὁ λιμὸς οὗτος, ἔρωτα καὶ πόθον ἔχων παρηγοροῦντας. ὅταν δὲ ἀφ’ ἑτέρας πηγῆς, ἧς θολερὸν καὶ νοσερὸν τὸ νᾶμα, διὰ τὸν τοῦ πιεῖν ἵμερον ἐμφορεῖσθαι δέῃ, τότε ἀνάγκη γλυκυπίκρου πληρουμένους ἡδονῆς ἐν ἀβιώτῳ βίῳ διαζῆν, τοῖς βλαβεροῖς ὡς ὠφελίμοις ἐπιτρέχοντας ἀγνοίᾳ τοῦ συμφέροντος.
2:151ἡ δὲ τῶν κακῶν ἀνιαροτάτη φορὰ γίνεται τούτων, ἐπειδὰν αἱ ἄλογοι δυνάμεις τῆς ψυχῆς ἐπιθέμεναι ταῖς τοῦ λογισμοῦ κρατήσωσιν.
2:152ἕως μὲν γὰρ ἢ βουκόλια βουκόλοις ἢ ποιμέσι ποίμνια ἢ αἰπόλοις αἰπόλια πειθαρχεῖ, τὰ περὶ τὰς ἀγέλας κατορθοῦται· ἐπειδὰν δὲ ἀσθενέστεροι τῶν θρεμμάτων οἱ ἐπιστατοῦντες ἀγελάρχαι γίνωνται, πλημμελεῖται τὰ πάντα καὶ συμβαίνει ἀταξία μὲν ἐκ τάξεως, ἀκοσμία δ’ ἐξ εὐκοσμίας, ταραχὴ δ’ ἐξ εὐσταθείας καὶ σύγχυσις ἐκ διακρίσεως, ἅτε μηδεμιᾶς ἔτι νομίμου καθεστώσης ἐπιστασίας· εἰ γὰρ ἦν, ἤδη καθῄρητο.
2:153τί οὖν; οὐκ οἰόμεθα καὶ ἐν ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς θρεμμάτων μὲν ἀγέλην εἶναι, παρόσον ἀποτέτμηται ψυχῆς τὸ ἄλογον στῖφος, ἀγελάρχην δὲ τὸν ἡγεμόνα νοῦν; ἀλλ’ ἕως μὲν ἔρρωταί τε καὶ ἱκανὸς ἀγελαρχεῖν ἐστιν, ἐνδίκως ἅπαντα καὶ συμφερόντως ἐπιτελεῖται.
2:154ὅταν δὲ ἀσθένειά τις ἐπιγένηται τῷ βασιλεῖ, συγκάμνειν ἀνάγκη καὶ τὸ ὑπήκοον· καὶ ὅτε μάλιστα ἠλευθερῶσθαι δοκεῖ, τότε μάλιστα γίνεται ἑτοιμότατον ἆθλον κείμενον τοῖς βουλομένοις αὐτὸ μόνον κονίσασθαι. πέφυκε γὰρ ἀναρχία μὲν ἐπίβουλον, ἀρχὴ δ’ εἶναι σωτήριον, καὶ μάλισθ’ ᾗ νόμος καὶ δίκη τετίμηται· αὕτη δ’ ἐστὶν ἡ σὺν λόγῳ.
2:155Τὰ μὲν δὴ τῆς κενῆς δόξης ὀνείρατα ὧδε ἠκριβώσθω· τὰ δὲ τῆς γαστριμαργίας εἴδη πόσις τε καὶ βρῶσις, ἀλλὰ τῇ μὲν οὐ ποικίλων, τῇ δὲ μυρίων ὅσων ἡδυσμάτων καὶ παραρτυμάτων χρεία. ταῦτα μέντοι δυσὶ φροντισταῖς ἐπανατίθεται, τὰ μὲν τῆς περιέργου πόσεως ἀρχιοινοχόῳ, τὰ δὲ τῆς ἀναγκαιοτέρας ἐδωδῆς ἀρχισιτοποιῷ. σφόδρα δ’ ἐξητασμένως μιᾷ νυκτὶ φαντασιούμενοι τοὺς ὀνείρους εἰσάγονται·
2:156πρὸς γὰρ τὴν αὐτὴν χρείαν σπεύδουσιν ἀμφότεροι, τροφὴν οὐχ ἁπλῆν, ἀλλὰ τὴν μεθ’ ἡδονῆς καὶ τέρψεως εὐτρεπιζόμενοι. καὶ ἑκάτερος μὲν περὶ τροφῆς ἥμισυ πονεῖται, ἀμφότεροι δὲ περὶ πᾶσαν.
2:157ἔστι δὲ καὶ θάτερον μέρος ὁλκὸν θατέρου· καὶ γὰρ οἱ φαγόντες εὐθὺς ὀρέγονται ποτοῦ καὶ αὐτίκα ἐδωδῆς οἱ πιόντες· ὥστε οὐχ ἥκιστα καὶ διὰ τοῦτο χρόνον τὸν αὐτὸν τῆς φαντασίας ἀμφοτέροις ἀναγεγράφθαι.
2:158ὁ μὲν οὖν ἀρχιοινοχόος οἰνοφλυγίαν, ὁ δὲ ἀρχισιτοποιὸς λαιμαργίαν ἔλαχε. φαντασιοῦται δὲ ἑκάτερος τὰ οἰκεῖα, ὁ μὲν οἶνον καὶ τὸ γεννητικὸν οἴνου φυτόν, ἄμπελον, ὁ δ’ ἐπὶ κανῶν διακειμένους ἐκκεκαθαρμένους ἄρτους καὶ κανηφοροῦντα ἑαυτόν (Gen. 40, 16. 17).
2:159ἁρμόττον δὲ ἂν εἴη πρότερον τὸ πρότερον ἐξετάζειν ὄναρ, ἔστι δὲ τοιόνδε· „ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ μου ἦν ἄμπελος ἐναντίον μου· ἐν δὲ τῇ ἀμπέλῳ τρεῖς πυθμένες καὶ αὐτὴ θάλλουσα ἀνενηνοχυῖα βλαστούς· πέπειροι βότρυες σταφυλῆς. καὶ τὸ ποτήριον Φαραὼ ἐν τῇ χειρί μου· καὶ ἔλαβον τὴν σταφυλὴν καὶ ἐξέθλιψα αὐτὴν εἰς τὸ ποτήριον, καὶ ἔδωκα τὸ ποτήριον εἰς τὰς χεῖρας Φαραώ“ (Gen. 40, 9 — 11).
2:160θαυμασίως γε προανεφθέγξατο καὶ ἀψευδῶς ἔχει τὸ „ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ μου.“ τῷ γὰρ ὄντι ὁ μὴ τὴν δι’ οἴνου μέθην μᾶλλον ἢ τὴν δι’ ἀφροσύνης ἐπιτηδεύων, ὀρθότητι καὶ ἐγρηγόρσει δυσχεραίνων, ὥσπερ οἱ κοιμώμενοι καταβέβληται καὶ παρεῖται καὶ καταμέμυκε τὰ τῆς ψυχῆς ὄμματα, οὐδὲν οὔθ’ ὁρᾶν οὔτ’ ἀκούειν τῶν θέας καὶ ἀκοῆς ἀξίων οἷός τε ὤν·
2:161ἡττημένος δὲ τυφλὴν καὶ ἀχειραγώγητον, οὐχ ὁδόν, ἀλλ’ ἀνοδίαν τοῦ βίου διεξέρχεται, βάτοις καὶ τριβόλοις περιπειρόμενος, ἔστι δ’ ὅτε καὶ κατὰ κρημνῶν κυλιόμενος καὶ ἄλλοις ἐπιφερόμενος, ὡς ἐκείνους τε καὶ ἑαυτὸν οἰκτρῶς διαφθείρειν.
2:162ὁ δὲ βαθὺς καὶ διωλύγιος ὕπνος, ᾧ πᾶς κατέχεται φαῦλος, τὰς μὲν ἀληθεῖς καταλήψεις ἀφαιρεῖται, ψευδῶν δὲ εἰδώλων καὶ ἀβεβαίων φαντασμάτων ἀναπίμπλησι τὴν διάνοιαν, τὰ ὑπαίτια ὡς ἑπαινετὰ ἀναπείθων ἀποδέχεσθαι. καὶ γὰρ νυνὶ λύπην ὡς χαρὰν ὀνειροπολεῖ καὶ οὐκ αἰσθάνεται, ὅτι τὸ ἀφροσύνης καὶ τοῦ παραπαίειν * * * φυτόν, ἄμπελον, ὁρᾷ.
2:163„ἦν“ γάρ φησιν „ἄμπελος ἐναντίον μου“ (Gen. 40, 9), τὸ ποθούμενον τῷ ποθοῦντι, κακία κακῷ· ἣν καθ’ ἑαυτῶν λελήθαμεν οἱ ἀνόητοι γεωργοῦντες, ἧς τὸν καρπὸν ἐσθίομέν τε καὶ πίνομεν εἰς ἑκάτερον τροφῆς κατατάττοντες εἶδος, ἧς ὡς ἔοικεν οὐκ ἐφ’ ἡμισείᾳ τῇ βλάβῃ ἀλλ’ ἀρτίῳ καὶ ὁλοκλήρῳ καὶ παντελεῖ μεταποιούμεθα.
2:164Προσήκει δὲ μὴ ἀγνοεῖν, ὅτι τὸ ἀμπέλιον μέθυσμα τοὺς χρησομένους ἅπαντας οὐχ ὁμοίως, ἀλλὰ πολλάκις ἐναντίως διατίθησιν, ὡς τοὺς μὲν ἀμείνους, τοὺς δὲ χείρους ἑαυτῶν ἐξετάζεσθαι.
2:165τῶν μὲν γὰρ τὸ σύννουν καὶ σκυθρωπὸν ἐπανῆκε καὶ τὰς φροντίδας ἐχάλασεν ὀργάς τε καὶ λύπας ἐπράυνε τά τε ἤθη πρὸς τὸ ἐπιεικὲς ἐπαιδαγώγησε καὶ τὰς ψυχὰς ἑαυταῖς ἵλεως ἐποίησε· τῶν δὲ ἔμπαλιν τοὺς θυμοὺς ἐπήλειψε καὶ τὰς ὀδύνας ἐπέσφιγξε καὶ τοὺς ἔρωτας ἐκίνησε καὶ τὰς ἀγροικίας ἀνήγειρεν, ἄκλειστον στόμα καὶ γλῶτταν ἀχαλίνωτον καὶ αἰσθήσεις ἀθύρους καὶ λελυττηκότα πάθη κἀξηγριωμένον καὶ ἐπτοημένον πρὸς πάντα νοῦν ἀποτελοῦν·
2:166ὡς δοκεῖν τὴν μὲν τῶν προτέρων κατάστασιν ἢ τῇ κατὰ τὸν ἀέρα νηνέμῳ αἰθρίᾳ ἢ τῇ κατὰ θάλατταν ἀκύμονι γαλήνῃ ἢ τῇ κατὰ τὰς πόλεις εἰρηνικωτάτῃ εὐσταθείᾳ ἐοικέναι, τὴν δὲ τῶν ὑστέρων ἢ βιαίῳ καὶ συντόνῳ πνεύματι ἢ χειμαίνοντι καὶ κυματουμένῳ πελάγει ἢ στάσει, ἀσπόνδου καὶ ἀκηρύκτου πολέμου δυσωνυμωτέρᾳ ταραχῇ.
2:167δυεῖν γοῦν συμποσίων τὸ μὲν πέπλησται γέλωτος, παιδιᾶς, ἐπαγγελλομένων, ἀγαθὰ ἐλπιζόντων, χαριζομένων, εὐθυμίας, εὐφημίας, ἱλαρότητος, εὐφροσύνης, ἀδείας·
2:168τὸ δὲ συννοίας, κατηφείας, προσκρουσμάτων, λοιδοριῶν, τραυμάτων, βριμουμένων, ὑποβλεπομένων, ὑλακτούντων, ἀγχόντων, καταπαγκρατιαζόντων, ἀκρωτηριαζόντων ὦτα καὶ ῥῖνας καὶ ἅπερ ἂν τύχῃ τοῦ σώματος μέρη καὶ μέλη, τὴν [τοῦ] παντὸς τοῦ βίου μέθην καὶ παροινίαν ἐν ἀνιέρῳ ἀγῶνι μετὰ αἰσχρουργίας τῆς πάσης ἐπιδεικνυμένων.
2:169ἀκόλουθον οὖν ἂν εἴη λογίζεσθαι, ὅτι καὶ ἄμπελος δυεῖν σύμβολον πραγμάτων ἐστίν, ἀνοίας τε καὶ εὐφροσύνης. ἑκάτερον δέ, καίτοι μηνυόμενον ἐκ πολλῶν, ἵνα μὴ μακρηγορῶμεν, δι’ ὀλίγων ἐπιδείξομεν.
Book 2, §§170–194
2:170ἡνίκα ἡμᾶς διὰ τῆς τῶν παθῶν καὶ ἀδικημάτων ἐρήμης ὁδοῦ, φιλοσοφίας, ἀγαγὼν καὶ ὥσπερ ἔμπορος ἀναβιβάσας τὸν ὀρθὸν λόγον ἔστησεν ἐπὶ σκοπῆς καὶ ἐκέλευε περιαθρεῖν τὴν ἅπασαν ἀρετῆς χώραν, εἴτε εὔγειος καὶ βαθεῖα καὶ χλοηφόρος καὶ καρποτόκος ἐστὶ καὶ ἀγαθὴ μὲν καὶ τὰ σπειρόμενα μαθήματα συναυξῆσαι, ἀγαθὴ δὲ τὰ φυτευόμενα καὶ δενδρούμενα δόγματα στελεχῶσαι, εἴτε καὶ τοὐναντίον, καὶ περὶ τῶν ὡσανεὶ πόλεων πράξεων, εἰ εὐερκέσταται καὶ ὀχυρώταται ἢ γυμναὶ καὶ ἀπημφιασμέναι οἷα κύκλων τὸ βέβαιον, καὶ περὶ οἰκητόρων, εἰ πρός τε πλῆθος καὶ πρὸς ἀλκὴν ἐπιδεδώκασιν ἢ δι’ ἀσθένειαν ὀλιγανδροῦσιν ἢ δι’ ὀλιγανδρίαν ἀσθενοῦσιν,
2:171τότε οὐ δυνηθέντες ὅλον τὸ σοφίας στέλεχος βαστάσαι κληματίδα μίαν καὶ βότρυν σταφυλῆς τεμόντες ἤραμεν χαρᾶς σαφέστατον δεῖγμα, κουφότατον ἄχθος, βλάστημα καὶ καρπὸν ὁμοῦ καλοκἀγαθίας ἐπιδειξόμενοι τοῖς διάνοιαν ὀξυδορκοῦσι τὴν εὐκληματοῦσαν καὶ βοτρυηφόρον ἄμπελον (cf.
2:172νυμ. 13). ταύτην, ἧς μοῖράν τινα λαβεῖν ἐδυνήθημεν, εὐσκόπως ἐξομοιοῦσιν εὐφροσύνῃ. μαρτυρεῖ δέ μοί τις τῶν πάλαι προφητῶν, ὃς ἐπιθειάσας εἶπεν· „ἀμπελὼν κυρίου παντοκράτορος οἶκος τοῦ Ἰσραήλ“ (Ies. 5,7).
2:173ὁ μὲν Ἰσραήλ ἐστι νοῦς θεωρητικὸς θεοῦ τε καὶ κόσμου — καὶ γὰρ ἑρμηνεύεται θεὸν ὁρῶν —, οἶκος δὲ διανοίας ὅλη ψυχή. αὕτη δ’ ἐστὶν ἀμπελὼν ἱερώτατος, τὸ θεῖον βλάστημα καρποφορῶν, ἀρετήν.
2:174οὕτω μέντοι τὸ φρονεῖν εὖ, τὸ εὐφροσύνης ἔτυμον, μέγα καὶ λαμπρόν, ὥστε φησὶ Μωυσῆς καὶ θεὸν αὐτῷ μὴ ἀπαξιῶσαι χρῆσθαι, καὶ τότε μάλιστα, ὁπότε τὸ ἀνθρώπων γένος ἐκτρέποιτο μὲν ἁμαρτήματα, ἐπικλίνοι δὲ καὶ ἐπιστρέφοι πρὸς δικαιοσύνην, ἑκουσίῳ γνώμῃ φύσεως νόμοις καὶ θεσμοῖς ἑπόμενον. „ἐπιστρέψει“
2:175γάρ φησι „κύριος ὁ θεός σου εὐφρανθῆναι ἐπὶ σὲ εἰς ἀγαθά, καθότι ηὐφράνθη ἐπὶ τοῖς πατράσι σου, ἐὰν εἰσακούσῃς τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ, φυλάσσειν πάσας τὰς ἐντολὰς καὶ τὰ δικαιώματα καὶ τὰς κρίσεις τὰς γεγραμμένας ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τοῦ νόμου τούτου“ (Deut. 30, 9. 10).
2:176τίς ἂν δύναιτο μᾶλλον ἀρετῆς ἵμερον ἢ καλοκἀγαθίας ζῆλον ἐμφῦσαι; βούλει, φησίν, ὦ διάνοια, εὐφραίνεσθαι θεόν; εὐφράνθητι αὐτὴ καὶ ἀνάλωμα μὲν μὴ εἰσενέγκῃς μηδέν — τίνος γὰρ τῶν σῶν χρεῖός ἐστιν; —, ἀλλ’ ἔμπαλιν ὅσα σοι δίδωσιν ἀγαθὰ χαίρουσα δέξαι.
2:177διδοὺς γάρ, ὅταν ἄξιοι χάριτος ὦσιν οἱ λαμβάνοντες, εὐφραίνεται· εἰ μὴ νομίζεις, ὅτι οἱ μὲν ὑπαιτίως ζῶντες παραπικραίνειν καὶ παροργίζειν ἐνδίκως λέγοιντ’ ἂν θεόν, οἱ δ’ ἐπαινετῶς οὐχὶ εὐφραίνειν.
2:178ἀλλὰ πατέρας μὲν καὶ μητέρας, τοὺς θνητοὺς γονεῖς, οὐδὲν οὕτως ὡς τέκνων εὐφραίνουσιν ἀρεταί, μυρίων ὅσων ἐνδεεῖς ὄντας· τὸν δὲ τῶν ὅλων γεννητὴν καὶ μηδενὸς ἐνδεᾶ τὸ παράπαν οὐχ ἡ καλοκἀγαθία τῶν λεγομένων;
2:179μαθοῦσα οὖν, ὦ διάνοια, ἡλίκον κακὸν μέν ἐστιν ὀργὴ θεοῦ, ἡλίκον δὲ ἀγαθὸν εὐφροσύνη θεοῦ, μηδὲν μὲν τῶν ὀργῆς ἀξίων ἐπ’ ὀλέθρῳ κίνει τῷ σεαυτῆς, μόνα δὲ δι’ ὧν εὐφρανεῖς θεὸν ἐπιτήδευε.
2:180ταῦτα δὲ εὑρήσεις οὐ μακρὰς καὶ ἀτριβεῖς διεξιὼν ὁδοὺς ἢ ἄπλωτα πελάγη περαιούμενος ἢ ἐπὶ τοὺς γῆς καὶ θαλάττης ἀπνευστὶ συντείνων ὅρους· οὐ γὰρ πορρωτάτω διῴκισται καὶ τῆς οἰκουμένης ἔξω πεφυγάδευται, ἀλλ’, ᾗ φησι Μωυσῆς (Deut. 30, 12 — 14), ἐγγὺς οὑτωσὶ τἀγαθὸν παρίδρυταί σοι καὶ συμπέφυκε, τρισὶ τοῖς ἀναγκαιοτάτοις μέρεσιν ἡρμοσμένον, καρδίᾳ, στόματι, χερσί, τὸ δ’ ἐστὶ διανοίᾳ, λόγῳ, πράξεσιν, ἐπειδὴ τὰ καλὰ καὶ φρονεῖν καὶ λέγειν καὶ ποιεῖν ἀναγκαῖον, συμπληρούμενον ἔκ τε εὐβουλίας καὶ εὐπραξίας καὶ εὐλογίας.
2:181Λέγωμεν οὖν τῷ θάτερον εἶδος γαστριμαργίας, πολυποσίαν, ἐπιτηδεύοντι ἀρχιοινοχόῳ· τί κακοπαθεῖς, ὦ ἀνόητε; δοκεῖς μὲν γὰρ τὰ ἀγωγὰ πρὸς εὐφροσύνην εὐτρεπίζεσθαι, τὸ δ’ ἀληθὲς ἀφροσύνης καὶ ἀκολασίας ἐξάπτεις φλόγα, πολλὴν αὐτῇ καὶ ἄφθονον ἐπιφέρων ὕλην. ἀλλ’, ἴσως ἂν εἴποι, μή με προπετῶς αἰτιῶ, πρίν με σκέψασθαι.
2:182οἰνοχοεῖν ἐτάχθην, οὐ μὴν δὴ σωφροσύνην καὶ εὐσέβειαν καὶ τὰς ἄλλας ἀρετὰς ἐνεσκευασμένῳ, ἀλλ’ ἀνδρὶ λαιμάργῳ καὶ ἀκρατεῖ καὶ ἀδίκῳ καὶ ἐπὶ ἀσεβείᾳ μέγα φρονοῦντι, ὃς ἐτόλμησέ ποτε εἰπεῖν· „οὐκ οἶδα τὸν κύριον“ (Exod. 5,2)· ὡς εἰκότως ἐγὼ τὰ ἐκείνῳ δι’ ἡδονῆς ἐπιτετήδευκα.
2:183μὴ θαυμάσῃς δέ, ὅτι τοῖς ἐναντίοις ὁ θεὸς καὶ ὁ ἀντίθεος νοῦς εὐφραίνεται, Φαραώ. τίς οὖν οἰνοχόος θεοῦ; ὁ σπονδοφόρος, ὁ μέγας ὄντως ἀρχιερεύς, ὃς τὰς τῶν ἀεννάων χαρίτων λαβὼν προπόσεις ἀντεκτίνει, πλῆρες ὅλον τὸ σπονδεῖον ἀκράτου μεθύσματος ἐπιχέων, ἑαυτόν. ὁρᾷς οἰνοχόων διαφορὰς τοῖς θεραπευομένοις ἀναλογούσας.
2:184διὰ τοῦτο ἐγὼ μὲν ὁ τοῦ Φαραὼ κατὰ τὰς ἀνέσεις ἐπιτεινομένου τὸν σκληραύχενα καὶ πάντων ἀκράτορα λογισμὸν εὐνοῦχός εἰμι (Gen. 40,1.2), τὰ γεννητικὰ τῆς ψυχῆς ἐκτετμημένος, μετανάστης μὲν τῆς ἀνδρωνίτιδος, φυγὰς δὲ καὶ τῆς γυναικωνίτιδος, οὔτ’ ἄρρεν οὔτε θῆλυ, οὔτε προέσθαι οὔθ’ ὑποδέξασθαι σπορὰν δυνάμενος, ἀμφίβολος, οὐδέτερος, ἀνθρωπείου παράκομμα νομίσματος, ἄμοιρος ἀθανασίας, ἣ τέκνων ἢ ἐγγόνων διαδοχαῖς εἰς ἀεὶ ζωπυρεῖται, συλλόγου καὶ ἐκκλησίας ἱερᾶς ἀπεσχοινισμένος· θλαδίαν γὰρ καὶ ἀποκεκομμένον ἄντικρυς διείρηται μὴ
2:185εἰσιέναι (Deut. 23, 1). ὁ δὲ ἀρχιερεὺς ἄμωμός ἐστιν, ὁλόκληρος, ἀνὴρ παρθένου (Lev. 21, 17. 13), τὸ παραδοξότατον, οὐδέποτε γυναικουμένης, ἀλλ’ ἔμπαλιν τὰ γυναικεῖα κατὰ τὴν πρὸς τὸν ἄνδρα ὁμιλίαν ἐκλιπούσης (Gen. 18,11), καὶ οὐκ ἀνὴρ μόνον οὗτος, ἀμιάντους καὶ παρθένους γνώμας σπείρειν ἱκανός, ἀλλὰ καὶ πατὴρ λόγων ἱερῶν·
2:186ὧν οἱ μὲν ἐπίσκοποι καὶ ἔφοροι τῶν τῆς φύσεως πραγμάτων, Ἐλεάζαρ καὶ Ἰθάμαρ (Exod. 28, 1), οἱ δὲ λειτουργοὶ θεοῦ, τὴν οὐράνιον φλόγα ἀνακαίειν καὶ ζωπυρεῖν ἐπειγόμενοι· τρίβοντες γὰρ ἀεὶ τοὺς περὶ ὁσιότητος λόγους καθάπερ ἐκ πυρείων τὸ θεοειδέστατον εὐσεβείας γένος ποιοῦσιν ἐκλάμπειν.
2:187ὁ δὲ τούτων ὑφηγητὴς ὁμοῦ καὶ πατὴρ οὐχ ἡ τυχοῦσα μοῖρα τῆς ἱερᾶς ἐκκλησίας ἐστίν, ἀλλ’ οὗ χωρὶς σύγκλητος οὐκ ἂν ἀθροισθείη ποτὲ τῶν τῆς ψυχῆς μερῶν βουλὴ τὸ παράπαν, ὁ πρόεδρος, ὁ πρύτανις, ὁ δημιουργός, ὁ καὶ χωρὶς ἄλλων μόνος ἐφ’ ἑαυτοῦ σκοπεῖν τε καὶ πράττειν ἕκαστα ἱκανός.
2:188οὗτος σὺν ἄλλοις μὲν ἐξεταζόμενος ὀλίγος, πολὺς δέ, ὅταν μονωθῇ, γίνεται, δικαστήριον ὅλον, ὅλον βουλευτήριον, ὅλος δῆμος, ὅλος ὄχλος, σύμπαν ἀνθρώπων γένος, μᾶλλον δέ, εἰ τἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν δεῖ, μεθόριός τις θεοῦ καὶ ἀνθρώπου φύσις, τοῦ
2:189μὲν ἐλάττων, ἀνθρώπου δὲ κρείττων. „ὅταν“ γάρ φησιν „εἰσίῃ εἰς τὰ ἅγια τῶν ἁγίων ὁ ἀρχιερεύς, ἄνθρωπος οὐκ ἔσται“ (Lev. 16, 17). τίς οὖν, εἰ μὴ ἄνθρωπος; ἆρά γε θεός; οὐκ ἂν εἴποιμι — τὸν γὰρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦδε κλῆρον ὁ ἀρχιπροφήτης ἔλαχε Μωυσῆς ἔτι ὢν ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ, προσρηθεὶς Φαραὼ θεὸς (Exod. 7, 1) — οὔτε ἄνθρωπος, ἀλλ’ ἑκατέρων τῶν ἄκρων, ὡς ἂν βάσεως καὶ κεφαλῆς, ἐφαπτόμενος.
2:190τὸ μὲν οὖν ἕτερον εἶδος ἀμπέλου, ὅπερ εὐφροσύνη κεκλήρωται, καὶ τὸ ἐξ αὐτῆς μέθυσμα, ἡ ἄκρατος εὐβουλία, καὶ ὁ ἀρυσάμενος οἰνοχόος ἐκ τοῦ θείου κρατῆρος, ὃν αὐτὸς ὁ θεὸς ἀρετῶν πεπλήρωκεν ἐπὶ χείλη, δεδήλωται.
2:191τὸ δὲ ἀνοίας καὶ λύπης καὶ παροινίας ἤδη μὲν τρόπῳ τινὶ τύπῳ δὲ ἕτερον ἐκτυποῦται διὰ τῶν ἑτέρωθι λεχθέντων ἐν ᾠδῇ τῇ μείζονι· „ἐκ γὰρ ἀμπέλου“ φησί „Σοδόμων ἡ ἄμπελος αὐτῶν, καὶ ἡ κληματὶς αὐτῶν ἐκ Γομόρρας· ἡ σταφυλὴ αὐτῶν σταφυλὴ χολῆς, βότρυς πικρίας αὐτοῖς· θυμὸς δρακόντων ὁ οἶνος αὐτῶν, καὶ θυμὸς ἀσπίδων ἀνίατος“ (Deut. 32, 32. 33).
2:192ὁρᾷς ὅσα τὸ ἀφροσύνης μέθυσμα ἐργάζεται, τὸ πικρόν, τὸ κακόηθες, τὸ ἀκρόχολον, τὸ περίθυμον, τὸ ἀτίθασον, τὸ δηκτικόν, τὸ ἐπίβουλον. ἐμφαντικώτατα δὲ ἀφροσύνης ἔρνος ἐν Σοδόμοις φησὶν εἶναι — τύφλωσις δὲ ἢ στείρωσις ἑρμηνεύεται Σόδομα —, ἐπειδὴ τυφλὸν καὶ ἄγονον καλῶν ἀφροσύνη, ὑφ’ ἧς ἀναπεισθέντες τινὲς μετρεῖν καὶ σταθμᾶσθαι καὶ ἀριθμεῖν πάντα καθ’ αὑτοὺς ἠξίωσαν· Γομόρρα γὰρ μεταληφθέν ἐστι μέτρον.
2:193Μωυσῆς δὲ στάθμην καὶ μέτρον καὶ ἀριθμὸν τῶν ὅλων ὑπέλαβεν εἶναι τὸν θεόν, ἀλλ’ οὐ τὸν ἀνθρώπινον νοῦν. δηλοῖ δὲ διὰ τούτων φάσκων· „οὐκ ἔσται ἐν μαρσίππῳ σου στάθμιον καὶ στάθμιον, μέγα ἢ μικρόν· οὐκ ἔσται ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ σου μέτρον καὶ μέτρον, μέγα ἢ μικρόν· στάθμιον ἀληθινὸν καὶ δίκαιον ἔσται σοι“ (Deut. 25, 13—15).
2:194ἀληθὲς δὲ καὶ δίκαιον μέτρον τὸ τὸν μόνον δίκαιον θεὸν ὑπολαβεῖν πάντα μετρεῖν καὶ σταθμᾶσθαι καὶ ἀριθμοῖς καὶ πέρασι καὶ ὅροις τὴν τῶν ὅλων περιγράψαι φύσιν, ἄδικον δὲ καὶ ψευδὲς τὸ νομίσαι κατὰ τὸν ἀνθρώπινον νοῦν ταῦτα συμβαίνειν.
Book 2, §§195–219
2:195Ὁ δὲ εὐνοῦχος ἅμα καὶ ἀρχιοινοχόος τοῦ Φαραὼ τὸ ἀφροσύνης γεννητικὸν φυτόν, ἄμπελον, φαντασιωθεὶς προσαναζωγραφεῖ τρεῖς πυθμένας, ἵνα τὰς ἐν τῷ διαμαρτάνειν κατὰ τοὺς τρεῖς χρόνους ἐσχατιὰς
2:196παρεμφήνῃ· πυθμὴν γὰρ τὸ ἔσχατον. ἐπειδὰν οὖν ἀφροσύνη πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἐπισκιάσῃ καὶ κατασχῇ καὶ μηδὲν αὐτῆς ἄφετον μηδὲ ἐλεύθερον μέρος ἐάσῃ, οὐ μόνον ὅσα τῶν ἁμαρτημάτων ἰάσιμα δρᾶν ἀναγκάζει, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅσα ἀνίατα.
2:197τὰ μὲν οὖν θεραπείαν ἐνδεχόμενα ῥᾷστα καὶ πρῶτα γράφεται, τὰ δὲ ἀθεράπευτα παγχάλεπα καὶ ὕστατα, πυθμέσιν ἀναλογοῦντα.
2:198καὶ καθάπερ, οἶμαι, ἡ φρόνησις ἄρχεται μὲν ἀπὸ τῶν ἐλαττόνων ὠφελεῖν, λήγει δὲ εἰς τὰς ὑπερβολὰς τῶν κατορθωμάτων, τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον καὶ ἡ ἀφροσύνη καταβιάζουσα τὴν ψυχὴν ἄνωθεν καὶ κατ’ ὀλίγον ἀφιστᾶσα παιδείας μακρὰν ὀρθοῦ λόγου διοικίζει καὶ μέχρι τῶν ἐσχατιῶν καθαιρεῖ.
2:199τὸ δ’ ὄναρ ἐδήλου μετὰ τοὺς πυθμένας ἀνθοῦσαν καὶ βλαστάνουσαν καὶ καρποφοροῦσαν τὴν ἄμπελον — „αὐτὴ“ γάρ φησι „θάλλουσα ἀνενηνοχυῖα βλαστούς· πέπειροι βότρυες σταφυλῆς“ (Gen. 40, 10) —, ἣν εἴθε ἀκαρπίᾳ χρῆσθαι καὶ μηδέποτε χλοηφορῆσαι καὶ πάντα μεμαράνθαι τὸν αἰῶνα.
2:200τί γὰρ ἂν εἴη μεῖζον κακὸν [ἢ] θαλλούσης καὶ εὐφορούσης ἀφροσύνης; ἀλλὰ καὶ „τὸ ποτήριον Φαραώ“, ἡ δεξαμενὴ τῆς ἀνοίας καὶ παροινίας καὶ τῆς παρὰ πάντα τὸν βίον ἀπαύστου μέθης, „ἐν τῇ χειρί μου“ (Gen. 40, 11), φησίν, ἐστίν, ἴσον τῷ ἐν ταῖς ἐμαῖς ἐγχειρήσεσι καὶ ἐπιβολαῖς καὶ δυνάμεσιν· οὐ γὰρ ἄνευ γε τῶν ἐμῶν ἐπινοιῶν εὐοδήσει τὰ πάθος ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ.
2:201ὥσπερ γὰρ ἐν μὲν ταῖς τοῦ ἡνιόχου χερσὶ τὰς ἡνίας εἶναι προσῆκεν, ἐν δὲ ταῖς τοῦ κυβερνήτου τοὺς οἴακας — μόνως γὰρ οὕτως κατορθοῦται δρόμος μὲν ἅρματι, σκάφει δὲ πλοῦς —, οὕτως ἐν τῇ χειρὶ καὶ δυνάμει τοῦ θάτερον εἶδος τῆς γαστριμαργίας τεχνιτεύοντος, οἰνοφλυγίαν, ἡ τοῦ ἀκρατοῦς ἐστιν ἐκπλήρωσις.
2:202ἀλλὰ τί παθὼν ὑπέμεινεν αὐχεῖν ἐπ’ ἀρνήσεως μᾶλλον ἢ ὁμολογίας ἐπαξίῳ πράγματι; ἢ οὐκ ἄμεινον ἦν μὴ οὐχ ὁμολογεῖν διδάσκαλον ἀκρασίας εἶναι, ἀλλὰ τῷ ἀκρατεῖ τὰ ὑπεκκαύματα τοῦ πάθους ἐπαναθεῖναι ὡς εὑρετῇ καὶ αὐτουργῷ τεθρυμμένου καὶ κατεαγότος αἰσχίστου βίου;
2:203τοιοῦτον δ’ ἐστίν· ἀφροσύνη σεμνύνεται ἐφ’ οἷς εἰκὸς ἐγκαλύπτεσθαι· νυνὶ μὲν οὐ μόνον ἐπὶ τῷ τὴν δεξαμενὴν τῆς ἀκράτορος ψυχῆς, τὸ ποτήριον, περιφέρειν ἐν ταῖς χερσὶ καὶ ἐπιδείκνυσθαι πᾶσιν ἀγάλλεται, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τῷ τὴν σταφυλὴν εἰς αὐτὸ ἐκθλίβειν· τὸ δ’ ἐστὶ τὸ ἐκπληρωτικὸν τοῦ πάθους δημιουργεῖν καὶ κεκρυμμένον εἰς φῶς ἄγειν.
2:204ὡς γὰρ τὰ βρέφη γλιχόμενα τροφῆς, ὁπότε μέλλοι σπᾶν τοῦ γάλακτος, ἐκθλίβει καὶ πιέζει τὸν μαστὸν τῆς τρεφούσης, οὕτω τὴν πηγήν, ἀφ’ ἧς τὸ οἰνοφλυγίας ὀμβρεῖ κακόν, ὁ δημιουργὸς τῆς ἀκρασίας πιέζει κραταιῶς, ἵνα ταῖς ἐκθλιβομέναις λιβάσιν ἡδίστῃ τροφῇ χρῷτο.
2:205Τοιοῦτος μὲν ἡμῖν ὁ βεβακχευμένος ἀκράτῳ, παροίνιον καὶ παράληρον κακὸν καὶ ἀνίατον, γραφέσθω· τὸν δὲ συγγενῆ τούτου γάστρωνα καὶ αὐτὸν ὄντα, πολυφαγίας καὶ λαιμαργίας ἑταῖρον, τὰ περὶ ἐδωδὴν ἀκρατῶς τεχνιτεύοντα, πάλιν ἐπισκεπτέον.
2:206καίτοι οὐ πολλῆς δεῖ πρὸς τὴν θήραν αὐτοῦ φροντίδος· ἔστι γὰρ ἐκμαγεῖον ἐμφερέστατον αὐτοῦ τῆς εἰκόνος ὁ φανεὶς ὄνειρος. ἀκριβώσαντες οὖν αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον ὥσπερ ἔμφασιν ἐν κατόπτρῳ θεασόμεθα.
2:207„ᾤμην“ γάρ φησι „τρία κανᾶ χονδριτῶν αἴρειν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς μου“ (Gen. 40, 16). κεφαλὴν μὲν τοίνυν ἀλληγοροῦντές φαμεν εἶναι ψυχῆς τὸν ἡγεμόνα νοῦν, ἐπικεῖσθαι δὲ τούτῳ πάντα· καὶ γὰρ ἐξεφώνησέ ποτε ἐπ’ αὐτοῦ· „ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ἐγένετο ταῦτα πάντα“ (Gen. 42, 36).
2:208στειλάμενος οὖν πομπὴν ὧν ἐτεχνίτευσε κατὰ γαστρὸς τῆς ταλαίνης ἐπιδείκνυται, καὶ κανηφορῶν ὁ ἀνόητος οὐκ αἰδεῖται τοσούτῳ βαρυνόμενος τριττῷ κανῶν ἄχθει, τοῦτο δ’ ἐστὶ τρισὶ χρόνου μέρεσι.
2:209τὴν γὰρ ἡδονὴν οἱ θιασῶταί φασιν αὐτῆς ἔκ τε μνήμης τῶν παρεληλυθότων τερπνῶν καὶ ἐξ ἀπολαύσεως τῶν ἐνεστηκότων καὶ ἐξ ἐλπίδος τῶν μελλόντων συνεστάναι·
2:210ὥστε τὰ τρία κανᾶ τοῖς τρισὶ τοῦ χρόνου μέρεσιν ἐξομοιοῦσθαι, τὰ δ’ ἐπὶ τῶν κανῶν πέμματα τοῖς ἑκάστῳ τῶν μερῶν ἐφαρμόζουσι, παρεληλυθότων μνήμαις, ἐνεστηκότων μετουσίαις, μελλόντων προσδοκίαις, τὸν δὲ βαστάζοντα ταῦτα πάντα τῷ φιληδόνῳ, ὃς οὐκ ἀφ’ ἑνὸς γένους ἀκρασίας, ἀλλ’ ἀπὸ πάντων σχεδὸν εἰδῶν καὶ γενῶν τῆς ἀκολασίας ἄσπονδον καὶ φιλίων ἁλῶν ἐπιδεᾶ τράπεζαν ἐκπεπλήρωκεν.
2:211ἧς ἀπολαύει μόνος ὥσπερ ἐν δημοθοινίᾳ ὁ βασιλεὺς Φαραώ, σπορὰν καὶ σκέδασιν καὶ φθορὰν ἐγκρατείας ἐπιτετηδευκώς· ἑρμηνεύεται γὰρ σκεδασμός. ἔστι δὲ τὸ ὑπέρογκον καὶ βασιλικὸν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἐφ’ οἷς εἰκὸς σωφροσύνης ἀγαθοῖς ἀγάλλεσθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐν οἷς ἀπεικὸς βδελυρίας ἐπιτηδεύμασι σεμνύνεσθαι, πρὸς ἀπληστίαν καὶ λαιμαργότητα καὶ τὸ ἁβροδίαιτον ἐξοκείλαντι.
2:212τοιγάρτοι τὰ πτηνά, τὸ δ’ ἐστὶν αἱ ἐπιποτώμεναι ἔξωθεν ἀτέκμαρτοι συντυχίαι, πάντα πυρὸς τρόπον ἐπιδραμοῦνται καὶ ἀναφλέξουσι καὶ τῇ παμφάγῳ δυνάμει καταναλώσουσιν (Gen. 40, 17), ὡς μηδὲ λείψανον γοῦν ὑπολείπεσθαι πρὸς ἀπόλαυσιν τῷ κανηφοροῦντι, ὃς ἤλπισε τὰς εὑρέσεις καὶ τὰς ἐπινοίας αὑτοῦ μέχρι παντὸς αἰῶνος οἴσειν ἀναφαιρέτους ἐν βεβαίῳ.
2:213χάρις δὲ τῷ νικηφόρῳ θεῷ, ὃς ἀτελεῖς τὰς εἰς ἄκρον πεποιημένας σπουδὰς τοῦ φιλοπαθοῦς ἐργάζεται, πτηνὰς φύσεις ἐπιπέμπων ἀοράτως πρὸς ἀναίρεσιν καὶ φθορὰν αὐτῶν. περισυληθεὶς οὖν ὁ νοῦς ὧν ἐδημιούργησεν, ὥσπερ τὸν αὐχένα ἀποτμηθεὶς ἀκέφαλος καὶ νεκρὸς ἀνευρεθήσεται, προσηλωμένος ὥσπερ οἱ ἀνασκολοπισθέντες τῷ ξύλῳ τῆς ἀπόρου καὶ πενιχρᾶς ἀπαιδευσίας.
2:214ἕως μὲν γὰρ μηδὲν λυμαίνεται τῶν ἐξαπιναίως εἰωθότων ἀπροοράτως ἐπιφοιτᾶν, εὐοδεῖν δοκοῦσιν αἱ πρὸς ἀπόλαυσιν ἡδονῆς τέχναι· κατασκηψάντων δ’ ἐκ τοῦ ἀφανοῦς ἀνατρέπονται, καὶ ὁ δημιουργὸς αὐταῖς συνδιαφθείρεται.
2:215Τὰ μὲν οὖν τῶν διῃρημένων τὸ γεύσεως ἐργαστήριον ἐν ἑκατέρῳ τροφῆς εἴδει, πόσεώς τε καὶ βρώσεως οὐχὶ τῆς ἀναγκαίας ἀλλὰ περιττῆς καὶ ἀκράτορος, ὀνείρατα δεδήλωται· τὰ δὲ τοῦ τούτων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων, ὅσαι ψυχῆς δυνάμεις, βασιλεύειν δοκοῦντος, ὄνομα Φαραώ, κατὰ τὸ ἀκόλουθον αὐτίκα διερευνητέον.
2:216„ἐν γὰρ τῷ ὕπνῳ μου“ φησίν „ᾤμην ἑστάναι παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τοῦ ποταμοῦ· καὶ ὥσπερ ἐκ τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἀνέβαινον βόες ἑπτά, ἐκλεκταὶ ταῖς σαρξὶ καὶ καλαὶ τῷ εἴδει, καὶ ἐνέμοντο ἐν τῷ ἄχει. καὶ ἰδοὺ ἕτεραι ἑπτὰ βόες ἀνέβαινον ὀπίσω αὐτῶν ἐκ τοῦ ποταμοῦ, πονηραὶ καὶ αἰσχραὶ τῷ εἴδει καὶ λεπταὶ ταῖς σαρξίν, ἃς οὐκ εἶδον τοιαύτας ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Αἰγύπτῳ αἰσχροτέρας.
2:217καὶ κατέφαγον αἱ βόες αἱ λεπταὶ καὶ αἰσχραὶ τὰς ἑπτὰ βόας τὰς πρώτας τὰς καλὰς καὶ ἐκλεκτάς, καὶ εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὰς κοιλίας αὐτῶν· καὶ οὐ διάδηλοι ἐγένοντο ὅτι εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὰς κοιλίας αὐτῶν, καὶ αἱ ὄψεις αὐτῶν αἰσχραί, καθὰ καὶ τὴν ἀρχήν [εἶπον].
2:218ἐξεγερθεὶς δὲ ἐκοιμήθην, καὶ εἶδον πάλιν ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ μου, καὶ ὡς ἑπτὰ στάχυες ἀνέβαινον ἐν πυθμένι ἑνί, πλήρεις καὶ καλοί· ἄλλοι δὲ ἑπτὰ στάχυες λεπτοὶ καὶ ἀνεμόφθοροι ἀνεφύοντο ἐχόμενοι· καὶ κατέπιον οἱ ἑπτὰ στάχυες τοὺς καλοὺς καὶ τοὺς πλήρεις“ (Gen. 41, 17 — 24).
2:219ὁρᾷς μὲν δὴ τὸ προοίμιον τοῦ φιλαύτου, ὃς κινητὸς καὶ στρεπτὸς καὶ μεταβλητὸς ὢν κατά τε σῶμα καὶ ψυχήν φησιν· „ᾤμην ἑστάναι,“ καὶ οὐκ ἐλογίσατο, ὅτι μόνῳ θεῷ τὸ ἀκλινὲς καὶ πάγιόν ἐστιν οἰκεῖον καὶ εἴ τις αὐτῷ φίλος.
Book 2, §§220–244
2:220τῆς μὲν ἀκλινοῦς περὶ αὐτὸν δυνάμεως σαφεστάτη πίστις ὅδε ὁ κόσμος, ἀεὶ κατὰ τὰ αὐτὰ καὶ ὡσαύτως ἔχων — ὁπότε δὲ ὁ κόσμος ἀρρεπής, ὁ δημιουργὸς πῶς οὐ βέβαιος; —, εἶτα μέντοι καὶ οἱ ἀψευδέστατοι μάρτυρες ἱεροὶ χρησμοί·
2:221λέγεται γὰρ ἐκ προσώπου τοῦ θεοῦ· „ὧδε ἐγὼ ἕστηκα ἐκεῖ πρὸ τοῦ σὲ ἐπὶ τῆς πέτρας ἐν Χωρήβ“ (Exod. 17,6), ἴσον τῷ οὗτος ἐγὼ ὁ ἐμφανὴς καὶ ἐνταῦθα ὢν ἐκεῖ τέ εἰμι καὶ πανταχοῦ, πεπληρωκὼς τὰ πάντα, ἑστὼς ἐν ὁμοίῳ καὶ μένων, ἄτρεπτος ὤν, πρὶν ἢ σὲ ἤ τι τῶν ὄντων εἰς γένεσιν ἐλθεῖν, ἐπὶ τῆς ἀκροτάτης καὶ πρεσβυτάτης ἱδρυμένος δυνάμεως ἀρχῆς, ἀφ’ ἧς ἡ τῶν ὄντων γένεσις ὤμβρησε καὶ τὸ σοφίας ἐπλήμμυρε νᾶμα.
2:222ἐγὼ γάρ εἰμι „ὁ ἐξαγαγὼν ἐκ πέτρας ἀκροτόμου πηγὴν ὕδατος“ (Deut. 8, 15) ἐν ἑτέροις εἴρηται. μαρτυρεῖ δὲ καὶ Μωυσῆς περὶ τοῦ μὴ τρέπεσθαι τὸ θεῖον φάσκων· „εἶδον τὸν τόπον οὗ εἱστήκει ὁ θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ“ (Exod. 24, 10), τὸ μὴ μεταβάλλειν διὰ τῆς στάσεως καὶ ἱδρύσεως αἰνιττόμενος.
2:223ἀλλὰ γὰρ τοσαύτη περὶ τὸ θεῖόν ἐστιν ὑπερβολὴ τοῦ βεβαίου, ὥστε καὶ ταῖς ἐπιλελεγμέναις φύσεσιν ἐχυρότητος, ὡς ἀρίστου κτήματος, μεταδίδωσιν. αὐτίκα γέ τοι τὴν πλήρη χαρίτων διαθήκην ἑαυτοῦ — νόμος δ’ ἐστὶ καὶ λόγος τῶν ὄντων ὁ πρεσβύτατος — ὡς ἂν ἐπὶ βάσεως τῆς τοῦ δικαίου ψυχῆς ἄγαλμα θεοειδὲς ἱδρύσεσθαι παγίως φησίν, ἐπειδὰν λέγῃ τῷ Νῶε· „στήσω τὴν διαθήκην μου πρὸς σέ“ (Gen. 9, 11).
2:224παρεμφαίνει δὲ καὶ δύο ἕτερα, ἓν μὲν ὅτι τὸ δίκαιον ἀδιαφορεῖ διαθήκης θεοῦ, ἕτερον δὲ ὅτι οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι χαρίζονται τὰ διαφέροντα τῶν λαμβανόντων, ὁ δὲ θεὸς οὐ μόνον ταῦτα, ἀλλὰ αὐτοὺς ἐκείνους ἑαυτοῖς· ἐμὲ γὰρ ἐμοὶ δεδώρηται καὶ ἕκαστον τῶν ὄντων ἑαυτῷ· τὸ γὰρ „στήσω τὴν διαθήκην μου πρὸς σὲ“ ἴσον ἐστὶ τῷ „σοὶ δωρήσομαι.“
2:225σπουδάζουσι δὲ καὶ πάντες οἱ θεοφιλεῖς τὸν φιλοπραγμοσύνης χειμῶνα ἀποδιδράσκοντες, ἐν ᾧ σάλος καὶ κλύδων ἀεὶ κυκᾶται, τοῖς τῆς ἀρετῆς εὐδίοις καὶ ναυλοχωτάτοις ἐνορμίζεσθαι λιμέσιν.
2:226οὐχ ὁρᾷς, οἷα περὶ Ἀβραὰμ λέγεται τοῦ σοφοῦ, ὥς ἐστιν „ἑστὼς ἐνώπιον κυρίου“ (Gen. 18, 22) ; πότε γὰρ εἰκὸς δύνασθαι στῆναι διάνοιαν μηκέθ’ ὡς ἐπὶ τρυτάνης ταλαντεύουσαν ἢ ὅτε ἀντικρύς ἐστι θεοῦ, ὁρῶσά τε καὶ ὁρωμένη;
2:227διχόθεν γὰρ αὐτῇ τὸ ἀρρεπές, ἐκ μὲν τοῦ ὁρᾶν τὸν ἀσύγκριτον, ὅτι ὑπὸ τῶν ὁμοίων πραγμάτων οὐκ ἀνθέλκεται, ἐκ δὲ τοῦ ὁρᾶσθαι, ὅτι ἣν ἀξίαν ἔκρινεν εἰς ὄψιν ὁ ἡγεμὼν τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἐλθεῖν, τῷ ἀρίστῳ μόνῳ προσεκλήρωσεν, αὑτῷ. καὶ Μωυσεῖ μέντοι θεοπρόπιον ἐχρήσθη τοιόνδε· „σὺ αὐτοῦ στῆθι μετ’ ἐμοῦ“ (Deut. 5, 31), δι’ οὗ τὰ λεχθέντα ἄμφω παρίσταται, τό τε μὴ κλίνεσθαι τὸν ἀστεῖον καὶ ἡ τοῦ ὄντος περὶ πάντα βεβαιότης.
2:228καὶ γὰρ τῷ ὄντι τὸ τῷ θεῷ συνεγγίζον οἰκειοῦται κατὰ τὸ ἄτρεπτον αὐτοστατοῦν, καὶ ἠρεμήσας ὁ νοῦς, ἡλίκον ἐστὶν ἀγαθὸν ἠρεμία, σαφῶς ἔγνω καὶ θαυμάσας αὐτῆς τὸ κάλλος ὑπέλαβεν, ὅτι ἢ θεῷ μόνῳ προσκεκλήρωται ἢ τῇ μεταξὺ φύσει θνητοῦ καὶ ἀθανάτου γένους.
2:229φησὶ γοῦν· „κἀγὼ εἱστήκειν ἀνὰ μέσον κυρίου καὶ ὑμῶν“ (Deut. 5, 5), οὐχὶ τοῦτο δηλῶν, ὅτι ἐπὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ ποδῶν ἠρήρειστο, ἀλλ’ ἐκεῖνο βουλόμενος ἐμφῆναι, ὅτι ἡ τοῦ σοφοῦ διάνοια χειμώνων μὲν καὶ πολέμων ἀπαλλαγεῖσα, νηνέμῳ δὲ γαλήνῃ καὶ βαθείᾳ εἰρήνῃ χρωμένη κρείττων μέν ἐστιν ἀνθρώπου, θεοῦ δὲ ἐλάττων.
2:230ὁ μὲν γὰρ ἀγελαῖος ἀνθρώπειος νοῦς σείεται καὶ κυκᾶται πρὸς τῶν ἐπιτυχόντων, ὁ δ’ ἅτε μακάριος καὶ εὐδαίμων ἀμέτοχος κακῶν· μεθόριος δὲ ὁ ἀστεῖος, ὡς κυρίως εἰπεῖν μήτε θεὸν αὐτὸν εἶναι μήτε ἄνθρωπον, ἀλλὰ τῶν ἄκρων ἐφαπτόμενον, ἀνθρωπότητι μὲν θνητοῦ γένους, ἀρετῇ
2:231δὲ ἀφθάρτου. τούτῳ παραπλήσιόν ἐστι καὶ τὸ χρησθὲν λόγιον ἐπὶ τοῦ μεγάλου ἱερέως· „ὅταν“ γάρ φησιν „εἰσίῃ εἰς τὰ ἅγια τῶν ἁγίων, ἄνθρωπος οὐκ ἔσται, ἕως ἂν ἐξέλθῃ“ (Lev. 16, 17) ; εἰ δὲ μὴ γίνεται τότε ἄνθρωπος, δῆλον ὅτι οὐδὲ θεός, ἀλλὰ λειτουργὸς θεοῦ, κατὰ μὲν τὸ θνητὸν γενέσει, κατὰ δὲ τὸ ἀθάνατον οἰκειούμενος τῷ ἀγενήτῳ.
2:232τὴν δὲ μέσην τάξιν εἴληχεν, ἕως ἂν ἐξέλθῃ πάλιν εἰς τὰ τοῦ σώματος καὶ τῆς σαρκὸς οἰκεῖα. καὶ πέφυκεν οὕτως ἔχειν· ὅταν μὲν ἐξ ἔρωτος θείου κατασχεθεὶς ὁ νοῦς, συντείνας ἑαυτὸν ἄχρι τῶν ἀδύτων, ὁρμῇ καὶ σπουδῇ πάσῃ χρώμενος προέρχηται, θεοφορούμενος ἐπιλέλησται μὲν τῶν ἄλλων, ἐπιλέλησται δὲ καὶ ἑαυτοῦ, μόνου δὲ μέμνηται καὶ ἐξήρτηται τοῦ δορυφορουμένου καὶ θεραπευομένου, ᾧ τὰς ἱερὰς καὶ ἀναφεῖς καθαγιάζων ἀρετὰς ἐκθυμιᾷ.
2:233ἐπειδὰν δὲ στῇ τὸ ἐνθουσιῶδες καὶ ὁ πολὺς ἵμερος χαλάσῃ, παλινδρομήσας ἀπὸ τῶν θείων ἄνθρωπος γίνεται, τοῖς ἀνθρωπίνοις ἐντυχών, ἅπερ ἐν τοῖς προπυλαίοις ἐφήδρευεν,
2:234ἵνα αὐτὸ μόνον ἐκκύψαντα ἔνδοθεν ἐξαρπάσῃ. τὸν μὲν οὖν τέλειον οὔτε θεὸν οὔτε ἄνθρωπον ἀναγράφει Μωυσῆς, ἀλλ’, ὡς ἔφην, μεθόριον τῆς ἀγενήτου καὶ φθαρτῆς φύσεως· τὸν δὲ προκόπτοντα πάλιν ἐν τῇ μεταξὺ χώρᾳ ζώντων καὶ τεθνηκότων τάττει, ζῶντας μὲν καλῶν τοὺς συμβιοῦντας φρονήσει, τεθνηκότας δὲ τοὺς ἀφροσύνῃ χαίροντας.
2:235λέγεται γὰρ ἐπὶ Ἀαρὼν ὅτι „ἔστη ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν τεθνηκότων καὶ τῶν ζώντων, καὶ ἐκόπασεν ἡ θραῦσις“ (Num. 16, 48). ὁ γὰρ προκόπτων οὔτε ἐν τοῖς τεθνηκόσι τὸν ἀρετῆς βίον ἐξετάζεται, πόθον καὶ ζῆλον ἔχων τοῦ καλοῦ, οὔτε ἐν τοῖς μετὰ τῆς ἄκρας καὶ τελείας ζῶσιν εὐδαιμονίας — ἔτι γὰρ πρὸς τὸ πέρας ἐνδεῖ —, ἀλλ’ ἑκατέρων ἐφάπτεται.
2:236διὸ καὶ κυρίως ἐπιλέγεται τὸ „ἐκόπασεν ἡ θραῦσις“, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐπαύσατο· παύεται μὲν γὰρ ἐπὶ τῶν τελείων τὰ περιθραύοντα καὶ κατακλῶντα καὶ καταγνύντα τὴν ψυχήν, μειοῦται δὲ ἐπὶ τῶν προκοπτόντων ὡς ἂν αὐτὸ μόνον ἀνακοπτόμενα καὶ στελλόμενα.
2:237Τῆς οὖν στάσεως καὶ ἱδρύσεως καὶ τῆς ἐν ταὐτῷ κατὰ τὸ ἀμετάβλητον καὶ ἄτρεπτον εἰς ἀεὶ μονῆς πρῶτον μὲν ὑπαρχούσης περὶ τὸ ὄν, ἔπειτα δὲ περὶ τὸν τοῦ ὄντος λόγον, ὃν διαθήκην ἐκάλεσε, τρίτον δὲ περὶ τὸν σοφὸν καὶ τέταρτον περὶ τὸν προκόπτοντα, τί παθὼν ὁ φαῦλος καὶ πάσαις ἀραῖς ἔνοχος νοῦς ᾠήθη μόνος ἵστασθαι δύνασθαι, φορούμενος ὥσπερ ἐν κατακλυσμῷ καὶ κατασυρόμενος ταῖς τῶν ἐπιρρεόντων διὰ τοῦ νεκροφορουμένου σώματος δίναις ἐπαλλήλοις;
2:238„ᾤμην“ γάρ φησιν „ἑστάναι ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖλος τοῦ ποταμοῦ“ (Gen. 41, 17). λόγον δὲ συμβολικῶς ποταμὸν εἶναί φαμεν, ἐπειδὴ ἑκάτερος ἔξω τε φέρεται καὶ ῥέων συντόνῳ χρῆται τῷ τάχει καὶ τοτὲ μὲν εὐφορεῖ πλημμύραις ὁὁ μὲν ὕδατος, ὁὁ δὲ ῥημάτων καὶ ὀνομάτων, τοτὲ δὲ ἀφορεῖ χαλώμενος καὶ συνίζων·
2:239καὶ ὠφελοῦσι μέντοι ὁ μὲν ἄρδων τὰς ἀρούρας, ὁ δὲ τὰς τῶν φιληκόων ψυχάς, καὶ ἔστιν ὅτε βλάπτουσι κυμήναντες, ὁ μὲν τὴν ὅμορον γῆν ἐπικλύσας, ὁ δὲ ἀνακυκήσας καὶ συγχέας τὸν τῶν οὐ προσεχόντων λογισμόν. οὗτος μὲν εἰκάζεται ποταμῷ.
2:240διττὴ δὲ λόγου φύσις, ἡ μὲν ἀμείνων, ἡ δὲ χείρων, ἀμείνων μὲν ἡ ὠφελοῦσα, χείρων δὲ κατὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον ἡ βλάπτουσα.
2:241παραδείγματα δὲ ἑκατέρας τοῖς δυναμένοις ὁρᾶν ἀνέθηκε Μωϋσῆς ἀριδηλότατα· „ποταμὸς“ γάρ φησι "πορεύεται ἐξ Ἐδὲμ ποτίζειν τὸν παράδεισον· ἐκεῖθεν ἀφορίζεται εἰς τέσσαρας ἀρχάς“ (Gen. 2, 10).
2:242καλεῖ δὲ τὴν μὲν τοῦ ὄντος σοφίαν Ἐδέμ, ἧς ἑρμηνεία τρυφή, διότι, οἶμαι, ἐντρύφημα καὶ θεοῦ σοφία καὶ σοφίας θεός, ἐπεὶ καὶ ἐν ὕμνοις ᾄδεται· „κατατρύφησον τοῦ κυρίου“ (Psalm. 36, 4). κάτεισι δὲ ὥσπερ ἀπὸ πηγῆς τῆς σοφίας ποταμοῦ τρόπον ὁ θεῖος λόγος, ἵνα ἄρδῃ καὶ ποτίζῃ τὰ ὀλύμπια καὶ οὐράνια φιλαρέτων ψυχῶν βλαστήματα καὶ φυτά, ὡσανεὶ παράδεισον.
2:243ὁ δὲ ἱερὸς οὗτος λόγος ἀφορίζεται εἰς τέσσαρας ἀρχάς, λέγω δὲ εἰς τὰς τέσσαρας ἀρετὰς σχίζεται, ὧν ἑκάστη βασιλίς ἐστι· τὸ γὰρ ἀφορίζεσθαι εἰς ἀρχὰς οὐ τοπικοῖς ὅροις, ἀλλὰ βασιλείᾳ ἔοικεν, ἵν’ ἐπιδείξας τὰς ἀρετὰς εὐθὺς ἀποφήνῃ καὶ τὸν χρώμενον αὐταῖς σοφὸν βασιλέα, κεχειροτονημένον οὐ πρὸς ἀνθρώπων, ἀλλ’ ὑπὸ τῆς ἀψευδοῦς καὶ ἀδεκάστου καὶ μόνης ἐλευθέρας φύσεως.
2:244λέγουσι γὰρ τῷ Ἀβραὰμ οἱ κατιδόντες αὐτοῦ τὸ ἀστεῖον· „βασιλεὺς παρὰ θεοῦ εἶ σὺ ἐν ἡμῖν“ (Gen. 23, 6), δόγμα τιθέμενοι τοῖς περὶ φιλοσοφίαν διατρίβουσιν, ὅτι μόνος ὁ σοφὸς ἄρχων καὶ βασιλεὺς καὶ ἡ ἀρετὴ ἀνυπεύθυνος ἀρχή τε καὶ βασιλεία.
Book 2, §§245–269
2:245τοῦτον τὸν λόγον εἰκάσας ποταμῷ τις τῶν ἑταίρων Μωυσέως ἐν ὕμνοις εἶπεν· „ὁ ποταμὸς τοῦ θεοῦ ἐπληρώθη ὑδάτων“ (Psalm. 64, 10). καίτοι τινὰ τῶν ἐπὶ γῆς ῥεόντων ἄλογον κυριολογεῖσθαι· ἀλλ’, ὡς ἔοικε, πλήρη τοῦ σοφίας νάματος τὸν θεῖον λόγον διασυνίστησι, μηδὲν ἔρημον καὶ κενὸν ἑαυτοῦ μέρος ἔχοντα, μᾶλλον δέ, ὡς εἶπέ τις, ὅλον δι’ ὅλων ἀναχεόμενον καὶ αἰρόμενον εἰς ὕψος διὰ τὴν συνεχῆ καὶ ἐπάλληλον τῆς ἀεννάου πηγῆς ἐκείνης φοράν.
2:246ἔστι δὲ καὶ ἕτερον ᾆσμα τοιοῦτον· „τὸ ὅρμημα τοῦ ποταμοῦ εὐφραίνει τὴν πόλιν τοῦ θεοῦ“ (Psalm. 45, 5). ποίαν πόλιν; ἡ γὰρ νῦν οὖσα ἱερὰ πόλις, ἐν ᾗ καὶ ἅγιος νεώς ἐστι, μακρὰν ὥσπερ θαλάττης καὶ ποταμῶν συνῴκισται· ὡς δῆλον εἶναι, ὅτι τοῦ προφανοῦς ἕτερόν τι βούλεται δι’ ὑπονοιῶν παραστῆσαι.
2:247τῷ γὰρ ὄντι τοῦ θείου λόγου ῥύμη * * * καὶ συνεχῶς μεθ’ ὁρμῆς ἐν τάξει φερομένη πάντα διὰ πάντων ἀναχεῖ τε καὶ εὐφραίνει.
2:248πόλιν γὰρ θεοῦ καθ’ ἕνα μὲν τρόπον τὸν κόσμον καλεῖ, ὃς ὅλον τὸν κρατῆρα τοῦ θείου πόματος δεξάμενος ἠκρατίσατο καὶ γανωθεὶς ἀναφαιρέτου καὶ ἀσβέστου τῆς εἰς ἅπαντα τὸν [ἐπὶ τὸν] αἰῶνα εὐφροσύνης ἐπέλαχε, καθ’ ἕτερον δὲ τὴν ψυχὴν τοῦ σοφοῦ, ᾗ λέγεται καὶ ἐμπεριπατεῖν ὁ θεὸς ὡς ἐν πόλει· „περιπατήσω” γάρ φησιν „ἐν ὑμῖν, καὶ ἔσομαι [ἐν] ὑμῶν θεός“ (Lev. 26, 12).
2:249καὶ ψυχῇ δ’ εὐδαίμονι τὸ ἱερώτατον ἔκπωμα προτεινούσῃ τὸν ἑαυτῆς λογισμὸν τίς ἐπιχεῖ τοὺς ἱεροὺς κυάθους τῆς πρὸς ἀλήθειαν εὐφροσύνης, ὅτι μὴ ὁ οἰνοχόος τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ συμποσίαρχος λόγος, οὐ διαφέρων τοῦ πόματος, ἀλλ’ αὐτὸς ἄκρατος ὤν, τὸ γάνωμα, τὸ ἥδυσμα, ἡ ἀνάχυσις, ἡ εὐθυμία, τὸ χαρᾶς, τὸ εὐφροσύνης ἀμβρόσιον, ἵνα καὶ αὐτοὶ ποιητικοῖς ὀνόμασι χρησώμεθα, φάρμακον;
2:250ἡ δὲ θεοῦ πόλις ὑπὸ Ἑβραίων Ἱερουσαλὴμ καλεῖται, ἧς μεταληφθὲν τοὔνομα ὅρασίς ἐστιν εἰρήνης. ὥστε μὴ ζήτει τὴν τοῦ ὄντος πόλιν ἐν κλίμασι γῆς — οὐ γὰρ ἐκ ξύλων ἢ λίθων δεδημιούργηται —, ἀλλ’ ἐν ψυχῇ ἀπολέμῳ καὶ ὀξυδορκούσῃ τέλος προτεθειμένῃ τὸν [δὲ] θεωρητικὸν καὶ εἰρηναῖον βίον.
2:251ἐπεὶ καὶ τίνα σεμνότερον καὶ ἁγιώτερον εὕροι τις ἂν οἶκον ἐν τοῖς οὖσι θεῷ ἢ φιλοθεάμονα διάνοιαν, πάνθ’ ὁρᾶν ἐπειγομένην καὶ μηδὲ ὄναρ στάσεως ἢ ταραχῆς ἐφιεμένην;
2:252ὑπηχεῖ δέ μοι πάλιν τὸ εἰωθὸς ἀφανῶς ἐνομιλεῖν πνεῦμα ἀόρατον καί φησιν· ὦ οὗτος, ἔοικας ἀνεπιστήμων εἶναι καὶ μεγάλου καὶ περιμαχήτου πράγματος, ὅπερ ἀφθόνως — πολλὰ γὰρ καὶ ἄλλα εὐκαίρως ὑφηγησάμην — ἀναδιδάξω.
2:253ἴσθι δή, ὦ γενναῖε, ὅτι θεὸς μόνος ἡ ἀψευδεστάτη καὶ πρὸς ἀλήθειάν ἐστιν εἰρήνη, ἡ δὲ γενητὴ καὶ φθαρτὴ οὐσία πᾶσα συνεχὴς πόλεμος. καὶ γὰρ ὁ μὲν θεὸς ἑκούσιον, ἀνάγκη δὲ ἡ οὐσία· ὃς ἂν οὖν ἰσχύσῃ πόλεμον μὲν καὶ ἀνάγκην καὶ γένεσιν καὶ φθορὰν καταλιπεῖν, αὐτομολῆσαι δὲ πρὸς τὸ ἀγένητον, πρὸς τὸ ἄφθαρτον, πρὸς τὸ ἑκούσιον, πρὸς εἰρήνην, λέγοιτ’ ἂν ἐνδίκως ἐνδιαίτημα καὶ πόλις εἶναι θεοῦ.
2:254μηδὲν οὖν διαφερέτω σοι ἢ ὅρασιν εἰρήνης ἢ ὅρασιν θεοῦ τὸ αὐτὸ ὑποκείμενον ὀνομάζειν, ὅτι δὲ τῶν πολυωνύμων τοῦ ὄντος δυνάμεων οὐ θιασώτης μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἔξαρχός ἐστιν εἰρήνης.
2:255καὶ Ἀβραὰμ μέντοι τῷ σοφῷ δώσειν φησὶ κλῆρον γῆς „ἀπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ Αἰγύπτου ἕως τοῦ ποταμοῦ τοῦ μεγάλου Εὐφράτου" (Gen. 15, 18), οὐ χώρας ἀποτομὴν μᾶλλον ἢ τὴν περὶ αὐτοὺς ἡμᾶς ἀμείνω μοῖραν. Αἰγύπτου μὲν γὰρ ἀπεικάζεται ποταμῷ τὸ ἡμέτερον σῶμα καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ δι’ αὐτοῦ ἐγγινόμενα πάθη, τῷ δὲ Εὐφράτῃ ψυχὴ καὶ τὰ φίλα ταύτῃ.
2:256δόγμα δὴ τίθεται βιωφελέστατον καὶ συνεκτικώτατον, ὅτι ὁ σπουδαῖος κλῆρον ἔλαχε ψυχὴν καὶ τὰς ψυχῆς ἀρετάς, ὥσπερ ὁ φαῦλος ἔμπαλιν σῶμα καὶ τὰς σώματος καὶ διὰ σώματος κακίας.
2:257τὸ δὲ ἀπὸ δύο δηλοῖ, ἓν μὲν τὸ σὺν ἐκείνῳ ἀφ’ οὗ λέγεται, ἕτερον δὲ τὸ χωρὶς αὐτοῦ. ὅταν μὲν γὰρ λέγωμεν ἀπὸ πρωΐας ἄχρις ἑσπέρας ὥρας εἶναι δώδεκα καὶ ἀπὸ νεομηνίας ἄχρι τριακάδος ἡμέρας τριάκοντα, συγκατατάττομεν τήν τε πρώτην ὥραν καὶ τὴν νεομηνίαν· ὅταν δέ τις ἀπὸ τῆς πόλεως φῇ τὸν ἀγρὸν ἀπέχειν σταδίους τρεῖς ἢ τέτταρας, δίχα τῆς πόλεως δήπου φησίν.
2:258ὥστε καὶ νῦν τὸ „ἀπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ Αἰγύπτου“ νομιστέον τὸ χωρὶς ἐκείνου παραλαμβάνεσθαι· βούλεται γὰρ διοικίσας ἡμᾶς τῶν σωματικῶν, ἅπερ ἐν ῥύσει καὶ φθορᾷ φθειρομένῃ καὶ φθειρούσῃ θεωρεῖται, κλῆρον ψυχῆς λαβεῖν μετὰ τῶν ἀφθάρτων καὶ ἀφθαρσίας ἀξίων ἀρετῶν.
2:259οὕτω μέντοι τὸ εἰκάσθαι ποταμῷ λόγον ἐπαινετὸν ἰχνηλατοῦντες εὑρήκαμεν. ὁ δὲ ψεκτὸς αὐτὸς ἄρα ἦν ὁ Αἰγύπτιος ποταμός, ἀνάγωγός τις καὶ ἀμαθής, ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, ἄψυχος λόγος· οὗ χάριν καὶ εἰς αἷμα μεταβάλλει (Exod. 7, 20), τρέφειν οὐ δυνάμενος — ὁ γὰρ ἀπαιδευσίας λόγος οὐ πότιμος — καὶ εὐτοκεῖ μέντοι βατράχοις (Exod. 8,6) ἀναίμοις καὶ ἀψύχοις, καινὸν καὶ τραχὺν ἦχον, ἄλγημα ἀκοῆς, ἀπηχοῦσι.
2:260λέγεται δέ, ὅτι καὶ οἱ ἐν αὐτῷ πάντες ἰχθύες ἐφθάρησαν (Exod. 7, 21), οἳ συμβολικῶς εἰσι τὰ νοήματα· ταῦτα γὰρ ἐννήχεται καὶ ἐγγίνεται ὡς ἐν ποταμῷ τῷ λόγῳ, ζῴοις ἐοικότα καὶ ψυχοῦντα αὐτόν· ἐν δὲ ἀπαιδεύτῳ λόγῳ τέθνηκε τὰ ἐνθυμήματα· συνετὸν γὰρ οὐδὲν ἔστιν εὑρεῖν, ἀλλὰ κολῳῶν τινας ἀκόσμους καὶ ἀμετροεπεῖς, ὡς εἶπέ τις, φωνάς.
2:261Περὶ μὲν δὴ τούτων ἅλις. ἐπεὶ δὲ οὐ μόνον στάσιν καὶ ποταμόν, ἀλλὰ καὶ χείλη ποταμοῦ φαντασιωθῆναι ὁμολογεῖ φάσκων· „ᾤμην ἑστάναι παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τοῦ ποταμοῦ“ (Gen. 41, 17), ἀναγκαῖον ἂν εἴη καὶ περὶ χείλους τὰ καίρια ὑπομνῆσαι.
2:262φαίνεται τοίνυν ἕνεκα δυεῖν τῶν ἀναγκαιοτάτων ἡ φύσις χείλη ζῴοις καὶ μάλιστα ἀνθρώποις ἁρμόσασθαι· ἑνὸς μὲν ἡσυχίας — ἔρυμα γὰρ ταῦτα καὶ φραγμὸς ὀχυρώτατος φωνῆς —, ἑτέρου δὲ ἑρμηνείας· διὰ γὰρ τούτων τὸ τῶν λόγων νᾶμα φέρεται· συναχθέντων μὲν γὰρ ἐπέχεται, φέρεσθαι δ’ ἀμήχανον μὴ διαστάντων.
2:263ἐκ δὲ τούτου γυμνάζει καὶ συγκροτεῖ πρὸς ἄμφω, τὸ λέγειν καὶ ἡσυχάζειν, ἑκατέρου τὸν ἁρμόττοντα καιρὸν παραφυλάττοντας. οἷον ἀκοῆς ἄξιόν τι λέγεται; πρόσεχε μηδὲν ἐναντιούμενος ἐν ἡσυχίᾳ κατὰ τὸ Μωυσέως παράγγελμα, τὸ „σιώπα καὶ ἄκουε“ (Deut. 27, 9).
2:264τῶν γὰρ εἰς τὰς ἐριστικὰς γνωσιμαχίας ἀφικνουμένων οὐδ’ ἂν εἷς κυρίως οὔτε λέγειν οὔτ’ ἀκούειν νομισθείη, τῷ δὲ μέλλοντι πρὸς ἀλήθειαν * * * ὠφέλιμον.
2:265πάλιν ὅταν ἴδῃς ἐν τοῖς τοῦ βίου πολέμοις καὶ κακοῖς τὴν ἵλεω τοῦ θεοῦ χεῖρα καὶ δύναμιν ὑπερέχουσαν καὶ προασπίζουσαν, ἠρέμησον· οὐ γὰρ δεῖται συμμαχίας ὁ βοηθὸς οὗτος. ἔστι δὲ καὶ τούτου δεῖγμα τὸ ἐν ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἀναγραφαῖς κατακείμενον, τὸ „κύριος πολεμήσει ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς σιγήσεσθε“ (Exod. 14, 14).
2:266ἐάν γε μὴν ἴδῃς τὰ γνήσια ἔγγονα καὶ πρωτότοκα Αἰγύπτου φθειρόμενα (Exod. 11, 5), τὸ ἐπιθυμεῖν, τὸ ἥδεσθαι, τὸ λυπεῖσθαι, τὸ φοβεῖσθαι, τὸ ἀδικεῖν, τὸ ἀφραίνειν, τὸ ἀκολασταίνειν καὶ ὅσα τούτων ἀδελφὰ καὶ συγγενῆ, καταπλαγεὶς ἡσύχαζε, τὸ φοβερὸν τοῦ θεοῦ κράτος ὑποπτήξας.
2:267„οὐ γὰρ γρύξει“ φησί „κύων τῇ γλώσσῃ, οὐδ’ ἀπ’ ἀνθρώπου ἕως κτήνους“ (ibid. 7), ἴσον τῷ οὔτε τὴν κυνώδη γλῶσσαν ὑλακτοῦσάν τε καὶ κράζουσαν οὔτε τὸν ἐν ἡμῖν ἄνθρωπον, ἡγεμόνα νοῦν, οὔτε τὸ κτηνῶδες θρέμμα, τὴν αἴσθησιν, προσήκει γαυριᾶν, ὅταν ἀναιρεθέντος τοῦ παρ’ ἡμᾶς ὅλον ἔξωθεν τὸ συμμαχικὸν αὐτοκέλευστον ὑπερασπιοῦν ἥκῃ.
2:268πολλοὶ δὲ συμβαίνουσι καιροὶ μὴ ἐφαρμόζοντες ἡσυχίᾳ, τὰς δὲ καταλογάδην ῥήσεις ἐπιζητοῦντες· ὧν πάλιν ἰδεῖν ἔστιν ἀνακείμενα ὑπομνήματα. πῶς; ἀγαθοῦ τις γέγονεν ἀπροσδόκητος μετουσία; καλὸν οὖν εὐχαριστῆσαι καὶ τὸν ἐπιπέμψαντα ὑμνῆσαι. τί οὖν τὸ ἀγαθόν;
2:269τέθνηκε τὸ ἐπιτιθέμενον ἡμῖν πάθος καὶ πρηνὲς ἄταφον ἔρριπται; μὴ μέλλωμεν οὖν, ἀλλὰ χορὸν στησάμενοι τὴν ἱεροπρεπεστάτην ᾄδωμεν ᾠδήν, παρακελευόμενοι λέγειν πᾶσιν· „ᾄσωμεν τῷ κυρίῳ, ἐνδόξως γὰρ δεδόξασται· ἵππον καὶ ἀναβάτην ἔρριψεν εἰς θάλασσαν“ (Exod. 15, 1).
Book 2, §§270–294
2:270ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἡ μὲν τοῦ πάθους φθορὰ καὶ μετανάστασις ἀγαθόν, ἀλλ’ οὐ τέλειον ἀγαθόν· ἡ δὲ σοφίας εὕρεσις ὑπερβάλλον καλόν· ἧς εὑρεθείσης ἅπας ὁ λεὼς οὐ καθ’ ἓν μέρος μουσικῆς, ἀλλὰ κατὰ πάσας αὐτῆς τὰς ἁρμονίας καὶ μελῳδίας ᾄσεται.
2:271„τότε“ γάρ φησιν „ᾖσεν Ἰσραὴλ τὸ ᾆσμα τοῦτο ἐπὶ τοῦ φρέατος“ (Num. 21, 17), λέγω δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς πάλαι μὲν κεκρυμμένης, ἀναζητηθείσης δὲ αὖθις καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἀνευρημένης βαθείας τὴν φύσιν ἐπιστήμης, ᾗ νόμος τὰς τῶν φιλοθεαμόνων ἄρδειν λογικὰς ἐν ψυχαῖς ἀρούρας.
2:272τί δέ; ὅταν συγκομίσωμεν τὸν γνήσιον διανοίας καρπόν, οὐ παραγγέλλει ἡμῖν ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος ὥσπερ ἐν καρτάλῳ (Deut. 26, 2. 4) τῷ λογισμῷ τὰς ἀπαρχὰς τῆς εὐφορίας ὧν ἤνθησεν, ὧν ἐβλάστησεν, ὧν ἐκαρποφόρησεν ἡ ψυχὴ καλῶν, ἐπιδεικνυμένους ἄντικρυς οὕτω ῥητορεύειν, τὰ εἰς τὸν τελεσφόρον θεὸν ἐγκώμια λέγοντας· „ἐξεκάθηρα τὰ ἅγια ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας μου“ (ibid. 13) καὶ ἐταμιευσάμην ἐν τῷ τοῦ θεοῦ οἴκῳ, ταμίας καὶ φύλακας αὐτῶν ἐπιστήσας τοὺς ἀριστίνδην ἐπιλελεγμένους πρὸς τὴν ἱερὰν νεωκορίαν.
2:273οὗτοι δέ εἰσι Λευῖται καὶ προσήλυτοι καὶ ὀρφανοὶ καὶ χῆραι (ibid.)· οἱ μὲν ἱκέται, οἱ δὲ μετανάσται καὶ πρόσφυγες, οἱ δὲ ἀπωρφανισμένοι καὶ κεχηρευκότες γενέσεως, θεὸν δὲ τὸν τῆς ψυχῆς θεραπευτρίδος ἄνδρα καὶ πατέρα γνήσιον ἐπιγεγραμμένοι.
2:274τοῦτον μὲν δὴ τὸν τρόπον καὶ λέγειν καὶ ἡσυχάζειν ἐμπρεπέστατον. τὸ δὲ ἐναντίον μεμελετήκασιν οἱ φαῦλοι· καὶ γὰρ ἡσυχίας ἐπιλήπτου καὶ ἑρμηνείας ὑπαιτίου ζηλωταὶ γεγόνασιν, ἑκάτερον ἐπ’ ὀλέθρῳ ἑαυτῶν τε καὶ ἑτέρων συγκροτοῦντες.
2:275τὸ δὲ πλέον ἐστὶν αὐτοῖς τῆς ἀσκήσεως ἐν τῷ λέγειν ἃ μὴ δεῖ· τὸ γὰρ στόμα διανοίξαντες καὶ ἐάσαντες ἀχαλίνωτον, καθάπερ ῥεῦμα ἀκατάσχετον, φέρεσθαι τὸν ἀκριτόμυθον, ᾗ φασιν οἱ ποιηταί, λόγον ἱᾶσι, μυρία τῶν ἀλυσιτελῶν προσεπισύροντα.
2:276τοιγαροῦν οἱ μὲν ἐπὶ συνηγορίαν ἡδονῆς καὶ ἐπιθυμίας καὶ πάσης πλεοναζούσης ὁρμῆς ἐτράποντο, ἄλογον πάθος ἐπιτειχίζοντες ἡγεμόνι λογισμῷ, ἔτι δὲ καὶ ταῖς ἐριστικαῖς φιλονεικίαις ἐπαποδυσάμενοι αποδυσάμενοι συνεπλάκησαν, ἐλπίσαντες τὸ ὁρατικὸν πηρῶσαι γένος καὶ κατὰ κρημνῶν καὶ βαράθρων, ἐξ ὧν οὐδ’ ἂν ἔτι γένοιτο διαναστῆναι, δυνήσεσθαι ῥῖψαι.
2:277ἔνιοι δὲ οὐ μόνον ἀντιπάλους ἑαυτοὺς τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης ἀπέφηναν ἀρετῆς, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῆς θείας· ἐπὶ τοσοῦτον ἀπονοίας ἤλασαν. τοῦ μὲν οὖν φιλοπαθοῦς ἔξαρχος ἀναγράφεται θιάσου τῆς Αἰγυπτίας χώρας ὁ βασιλεύς, Φαραώ· λέγεται γὰρ τῷ προφήτῃ· „ἰδοὺ αὐτὸς ἐκπορεύεται ἐπὶ τὸ ὕδωρ, καὶ στήσῃ συναντῶν αὐτῷ παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τοῦ ποταμοῦ“ (Exod. 7, 15).
2:278τοῦ μὲν γὰρ ἴδιον ἐπὶ τὴν φορὰν καὶ ἀνάχυσιν ἀεὶ τοῦ ἀλόγου πάθους ἐξιέναι· τοῦ δὲ σοφοῦ πολλῷ ῥέοντι τοῖς ὑπὲρ ἡδονῆς καὶ ἐπιθυμίας λόγοις ὑπαντιάσαι οὐ τοῖς ποσίν, ἀλλὰ τῇ γνώμῃ, βεβαίως καὶ ἀκλινῶς, ἐπὶ τοῦ ποταμίου χείλους, τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν ἐπὶ τοῦ στόματος καὶ τῆς γλώττης, ἅπερ ἦν ὄργανα λόγου· παγίως γὰρ ἐπιβὰς αὐτοῖς δυνήσεται τὰς συνηγορούσας τῷ πάθει πιθανότητας ἀνατρέψαι καὶ καταβαλεῖν.
2:279ὁὁ δὲ τοῦ ὁρατικοῦ γένους ἐχθρὸς ὁὁ τοῦ Φαραὼ λαός ἐστιν, ὃς ἐπιτιθέμενος καὶ διώκων καὶ δουλούμενος ἀρετὴν οὐκ ἐπαύσατο, ἕως κακὰς ὧν διέθηκε τὰς ἀμοιβὰς εὕρατο, πελάγει τῶν ἀδικημάτων καὶ τρικυμίαις, ἃς τὸ λυττῶν πάθος ἀνήγειρε, καταποντωθείς, ὡς ὑπερβάλλουσαν θέαν καὶ νίκην ἀνανταγώνιστον καὶ χαρὰν ἐλπίδος μείζονα τὸν καιρὸν ἐνεγκεῖν ἐκεῖνον.
2:280διὸ λέγεται· „εἶδεν Ἰσραὴλ τοὺς Αἰγυπτίους τεθνηκότας παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τῆς θαλάσσης“ (Exod. 14, 30). μεγάλη γε ἡ ὑπέρμαχος χείρ, ἀναγκάζουσα παρὰ στόματι καὶ χείλεσι καὶ λόγῳ πίπτειν τοὺς τὰ ὄργανα ταῦτα κατὰ τῆς ἀληθείας ἀκονησαμένους, ἵνα μὴ ὀθνείοις ἀλλὰ ἰδίοις ὅπλοις οἱ καθ’ ἑτέρων ἀναλαβόντες αὐτὰ θνῄσκωσι.
2:281τρία δ’ εὐαγγελίζεται τῇ ψυχῇ τὰ κάλλιστα, ἓν μὲν ἀπώλειαν Αἰγυπτιακῶν παθῶν, ἕτερον δὲ τὸ μὴ παρ’ ἑτέρῳ χωρίῳ, ἀλλὰ τῆς ἁλμυρᾶς καὶ πικρᾶς πηγῆς, ὡς ἂν θαλάττης, χείλεσι, δι’ ὧν ὁ πολέμιος ἀρετῆς σοφιστὴς λόγος ἐξεκέχυτο, τελευταῖον δὲ τὴν θέαν τοῦ πτώματος.
2:282μηδὲν γὰρ ἀόρατον εἴη καλόν, ἀλλὰ πρὸς * * * καὶ λαμπρὸν ἥλιον ἄγοιτο· καὶ γὰρ τοὐναντίον εἰς βαθὺ σκότος καὶ * * * ἄξιον τὸ κακόν. καὶ τοῦτο μὲν μηδ’ ἐκ τύχης ἰδεῖν ποτε γένοιτο, τὸ δὲ ἀγαθὸν μείζοσιν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἀεὶ περιαθροῖτο. τί δὲ οὕτως ἀγαθόν, ὡς ζῆσαι τὰ καλὰ καὶ ἀποθανεῖν τὰ φαῦλα;
2:283τρεῖς τοίνυν ἦσαν οἱ τὴν τῶν λόγων δεινότητα μέχρις οὐρανοῦ τείναντες. οὗτοι μελέτην κατὰ τῆς φύσεως, μᾶλλον δὲ κατὰ τῆς ἑαυτῶν ψυχῆς ἐμελέτησαν φάσκοντες, μόνον εἶναι τὸ αἰσθητὸν καὶ ὁρώμενον τοῦτο, οὔτε γενόμενόν ποτε οὔτ’ αὖθις φθαρησόμενον, ἀγένητον δὲ καὶ ἄφθαρτον, ἀνεπιτρόπευτον, ἀκυβέρνητον, ἀπροστασίαστον.
2:284εἶτ’ ἐπ’ ἄλλοις ἄλλα συνθέντες ἐπιχειρήματα, δόγμα ἀδόκιμον οἰκοδομοῦντες εἰς ὕψος οἷα πύργον ἐξῆραν. λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι „ἦν πᾶσα ἡ γῆ χεῖλος ἕν“ (Gen. 11,1), συμφωνία τῶν τῆς ψυχῆς μερῶν πάντων ἀσύμφωνος ἐπὶ τῷ κινῆσαι τὸ συνεκτικώτατον ἐν τοῖς οὖσιν, ἀρχήν.
2:285τοιγαροῦν ἐλπίσαντας αὐτοὺς εἰς οὐρανὸν ταῖς ἐπινοίαις ἀναδραμεῖσθαι ἐπὶ καθαιρέσει τῆς αἰωνίου βασιλείας ἡ μεγάλη καὶ ἀκαθαίρετος καταβάλλει χείρ, καὶ τὸ οἰκοδομηθὲν δόγμα συνανατρέψασα.
2:286κέκληται δὲ ὁ τόπος „σύγχυσις“, οἰκεῖον ὄνομα τῷ καινουργηθέντι τολμήματι. τί γὰρ ἀναρχίας συγχυτικώτερον; οὐκ οἰκίαι μὲν ἀνηγεμόνευτοι προσκρουσμάτων γέμουσι καὶ ταραχῆς; ἀβασίλευτοι δ’ ἐαθεῖσαι πόλεις ὑπὸ ὀχλοκρατίας, ἐναντίου καὶ μεγίστου, φθείρονται;
2:287καὶ χῶραι δὲ καὶ ἔθνη καὶ κλίματα γῆς, ὧν ἀρχαὶ κατελύθησαν, οὐ παλαιὰς καὶ μεγάλας εὐδαιμονίας ἀπέβαλον; καὶ τί δεῖ τὰ ἀνθρώπινα λέγεσθαι;
2:288οὐδὲ γὰρ αἱ ἄλλαι τῶν ζῴων ἀγέλαι, πτηνῶν, χερσαίων, ἐνύδρων, ἄνευ τινὸς ἀγελάρχου συνεστᾶσιν, ἀλλὰ ποθοῦσι καὶ περιέπουσιν αἰεὶ τὸν οἰκεῖον ἡγεμόνα, ὡς μόνον ἀγαθῶν αἴτιον, οὗ κατὰ τὴν ἀπουσίαν σκεδάννυνται καὶ διαφθείρονται.
2:289εἶτ’ οἰόμεθα τοῖς μὲν περιγείοις, ἃ βραχυτάτη μοῖρα τοῦ παντός ἐστιν, ἀρχὴν μὲν ἀγαθῶν, ἀναρχίαν δὲ κακῶν εἶναι αἰτίαν, τὸν δὲ κόσμον οὐ διὰ τὴν τοῦ βασιλεύοντος θεοῦ προήγησιν εὐδαιμονίας τῆς ἄκρας πεπληρῶσθαι;
2:290δίκην οὖν ἁρμόττουσαν οἷς ἐτίθεντο διδόασι· φύραντες γὰρ τὸ ἱερὸν περὶ * * * ἀναρχίας φυρόμενοι ἐπεῖδον, συγχυθέντες οὐ συγχέαντες. ἕως δὲ οὔπω τιμωρίαν δεδώκασιν, ὑπὸ φρενοβλαβείας φυσώμενοι τὴν μὲν τῶν ὅλων ἀρχὴν ἀνοσίοις λόγοις καθαιροῦσιν, αὑτοὺς δὲ ἄρχοντας καὶ βασιλέας ἀναγράφουσι, τὸ ἀκαθαίρετον τοῦ θεοῦ κράτος γενέσει τῇ ἀδιαστάτως ἀπολλυμένῃ καὶ
2:291φθειρομένῃ περιάπτοντες. ἐπιτραγῳδοῦντες γοῦν καὶ ἐπικομπάζοντες εἰώθασιν οἱ καταγέλαστοι λέγειν ταῦτα· ἡμεῖς οἱ ἡγεμόνες, ἡμεῖς οἱ δυναστεύοντες· ἐφ’ ἡμῖν ὁρμεῖ τὰ πάντα· ἀγαθῶν καὶ τῶν ἐναντίων τίνες αἴτιοι ὅτι μὴ ἡμεῖς; τὸ εὖ καὶ κακῶς ἐργάσασθαι τίσιν ὅτι μὴ ἡμῖν ἀψευδέστατα ἀνάκειται; φλυαροῦσι δὲ ἄλλως οἱ δυνάμεως ἀοράτου τὰ πάντα φάσκοντες ἐξῆφθαι, ἣν πρυτανεύειν τῶν κατὰ τὸν κόσμον ἀνθρωπείων τε καὶ θείων νομίζουσι.
2:292τοιαῦτα καταλαζονευσάμενοι, ἐὰν μὲν ὥσπερ ἐκ μέθης νήψαντες ἐν ἑαυτοῖς γένωνται καὶ τῆς παροινίας, ἣν παρῴνησαν, εἰς αἴσθησιν ἐλθόντες αἰδεσθῶσι καὶ κακίσωσιν ἑαυτοὺς ἐφ’ οἷς ὑπ’ ἀγνώμονος γνώμης ἐξαμαρτάνειν προήχθησαν, ἀκολακεύτῳ καὶ ἀδεκάστῳ χρησάμενοι συμβούλῳ μετανοίᾳ, τὴν ἵλεω τοῦ ὄντος δύναμιν ἐξευμενισάμενοι παλινῳδίαις ἀντὶ βεβήλων ἱεραῖς, ἀμνηστίαν εὑρήσονται παντελῆ.
2:293ἐὰν δὲ ἀφηνιασταὶ καὶ σκληραύχενες μέχρι τοῦ παντὸς γενόμενοι σκιρτῶσιν, ὡς αὐτόνομοι καὶ ἐλεύθεροι καὶ ἑτέρων ἡγεμόνες ὄντες, ἀπαραιτήτῳ ἀνάγκῃ καὶ ἀμειλίκτῳ τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἐν ἅπασι μικροῖς τε καὶ μεγάλοις οὐδένειαν αἰσθήσονται.
2:294ὁ γὰρ ἐπιβεβηκὼς ἡνίοχος ὡς ἅρματι πτηνῷ τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ χαλινὸν ἐμβαλὼν καὶ τὸ κεχαλασμένον τῶν ἡνιῶν ὀπίσω βίᾳ τείνας καὶ τοὺς κημοὺς ἐπισφίγξας, μάστιξι καὶ κέντροις ἀναμνήσει τῆς δεσποτικῆς ἐξουσίας, ἧς ἐπελάθοντο διὰ τὸ χρηστὸν καὶ ἥμερον τοῦ κρατοῦντος ὥσπερ οἱ κακοὶ δοῦλοι.
Book 2, §§295–302
2:295τὸ γὰρ τῶν δεσποτῶν ἐπιεικὲς εἰς ἀναρχίαν ἐκτρέποντες ἐπιμορφάζουσι τὸ ἀδέσποτον, μέχρις ἂν τὴν ῥοώδη τε καὶ πολλὴν αὐτῶν νόσον, ἀντὶ φαρμάκων τὰς τιμωρίας προσφέρων, ὁ κεκτημένος ἐπισχῇ.
2:296διὸ λέγεται· „ψυχὴ ἄνομος ἡ διαστέλλουσα τοῖς χείλεσι κακοποιῆσαι ἢ καλῶς ποιῆσαι· εἶθ’ ὕστερον ἐξαγορεύσει τὴν ἁμαρτίαν ἑαυτῆς“ (Lev. 5, 4). τί φῄς, ὦ γέμουσα ἀλαζονείας; οἶδας γάρ, τί ἐστι τὸ πρὸς ἀλήθειαν ἀγαθὸν ἢ καλὸν ἢ δίκαιον ἢ ὅσιον ἢ τίνα τίσιν ἐφαρμόττει;
2:297ἡ τούτων ἐπιστήμη τε καὶ δύναμις ἀνάκειται μόνῳ θεῷ, καὶ εἴ τις αὐτῷ φίλος. μάρτυς δὲ καὶ χρησμός, ἐν ᾧ λέγεται· „ἐγὼ ἀποκτενῶ καὶ ζῆν ποιήσω· πατάξω κἀγὼ ἰάσομαι“ (Deut. 32, 39).
2:298ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὐδὲ ἐπιπόλαιον ἔσχεν ἡ δοκησίσοφος ψυχὴ τὴν τῶν ὑπὲρ ἑαυτὴν ὀνείρωξιν, ἀλλ’ οὕτως ἡ δυστυχὴς ἐξηνεμώθη, ὡς καὶ ἐνώμοτον γενέσθαι περὶ τοῦ βεβαίως καὶ παγίως ταῦθ’ ἑστάναι, ἃ ψευδῶς ὑπέλαβεν.
2:299ἐὰν οὖν τὸ παλμῶδες καὶ παφλάζον τοῦ νοσήματος ἄρξηται χαλᾶν, τὰ τῆς ὑγείας ἐμπυρεύματα κατ’ ὀλίγον ἐκζωπυρούμενα βιάσεται τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ἐξαγορεῦσαι τὸ ἁμάρτημα, τὸ δ’ ἐστὶ κακίσαι ἑαυτήν, εἶτα πρὸς βωμοῖς ἱκέτιν γενέσθαι, ποτνιωμένην λιταῖς καὶ εὐχαῖς καὶ θυσίαις, αἷς ἀμνηστίας μόναις ἐπιλαχεῖν ἔστιν.
2:300Ἑξῆς δ’ ἄν τις εἰκότως ἐπαπορήσειε, τί δή ποτε τὸν ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ ποταμὸν μόνον ἀνέγραψεν ἔχοντα χείλη, τὸν δ’ Εὐφράτην ἤ τινα τῶν ἄλλων ἱερῶν ποταμῶν οὐκέτι. ὅπου μὲν γάρ φησι· „στήσῃ συναντῶν αὐτῷ παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τοῦ ποταμοῦ“ (Exod. 7, 15) * * *.
2:301καίτοι τινὲς ἴσως ἐπιχλευάζοντες ἐροῦσι, μὴ δεῖν τὰ τοιαῦτα εἰς τὰς ζητήσεις εἰσάγειν· γλισχρολογίαν γὰρ μᾶλλον ἢ ὠφέλειάν τινα ἐμφαίνειν. ἐγὼ δὲ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἡδυσμάτων τρόπον παρηρτύσθαι ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἀναγραφαῖς βελτιώσεως ἕνεκα τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ὑπολαμβάνω· καὶ οὐδεμίαν τῶν ζητούντων καταγνωστέον εὑρεσιλογίαν, ἀλλ’ εἰ μὴ ζητοῖεν, ἔμπαλιν ἀργίαν.
2:302οὐδὲ γὰρ περὶ ποταμῶν ἐστιν ἱστορίας ἡ παροῦσα σπουδή, περὶ δὲ βίων τῶν εἰκαζομένων ποταμίοις ῥεύμασιν, ἐναντιουμένων ἀλλήλοις. ὁ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ σπουδαίου βίος ἐν ἔργοις, ἐν λόγοις δὲ ὁ τοῦ φαύλου θεωρεῖται. λόγος δὲ γλώττῃ καὶ στόματι καὶ χείλεσι καὶ τοῖς * * *.
Book 1, §§1–25
1:1Ἡ μὲν πρὸ ταύτης γραφὴ περιεῖχε τῶν θεοπέμπτων ὀνείρων τοὺς κατὰ τὸ πρῶτον εἶδος ταττομένους, ἐφ’ οὗ τὸ θεῖον ἐλέγομεν κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν ἐπιβολὴν τὰς ἐν τοῖς ὕπνοις ἐπιπέμπειν φαντασίας. ἐν ταύτῃ δ’, ὡς ἂν οἷόν τε ᾖ, δηλώσομεν τοὺς ἐφαρμόττοντας τῷ δευτέρῳ.
1:2δεύτερον δ’ εἶδος, ἐν ᾧ ὁ ἡμέτερος νοῦς τῷ τῶν ὅλων συγκινούμενος ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ κατέχεσθαί τε καὶ θεοφορεῖσθαι δοκεῖ, ὡς ἱκανὸς εἶναι προλαμβάνειν καὶ προγινώσκειν τι τῶν μελλόντων. ὄναρ δ’ ἐστὶ πρῶτον οἰκεῖον εἴδει τῷ σημαινομένῳ τὸ φανὲν ἐπὶ τῆς οὐρανοῦ κλίμακος τόδε·
1:3„καὶ ἐνυπνιάσθη· καὶ ἰδοὺ κλῖμαξ ἐστηριγμένη ἐν τῇ γῇ, ἧς ἡ κεφαλὴ ἀφικνεῖτο εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, καὶ οἱ ἄγγελοι τοῦ θεοῦ ἀνέβαινον καὶ κατέβαινον ἐπ’ αὐτῆς· ὁ δὲ κύριος ἐπεστήρικτο ἐπ’ αὐτῆς· καὶ εἶπεν· ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ τοῦ πατρός σου καὶ ὁ θεὸς Ἰσαάκ· μὴ φοβοῦ· ἡ γῆ, ἐφ’ ἧς σὺ καθεύδεις, σοὶ δώσω αὐτὴν καὶ τῷ σπέρματί σου, καὶ ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα σου ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς γῆς, καὶ πλατυνθήσεται ἐπὶ θάλασσαν καὶ λίβα καὶ βορρᾶν καὶ ἀνατολάς· καὶ ἐνευλογηθήσονται ἐν σοὶ πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαὶ τῆς γῆς καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου. καὶ ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ μετὰ σοῦ, διαφυλάσσων σε ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ πάσῃ, ᾗ ἂν πορευθῇς· καὶ ἀποστρέψω σε εἰς τὴν γῆν ταύτην, ὅτι οὐ μή σε ἐγκαταλίπω, ἕως τοῦ ποιῆσαί με πάντα ὅσα ἐλάλησα σοι“ (Gen. 28,12—15).
1:4προκατασκευὴ δ’ ἐστὶ τῆς φαντασίας ἀναγκαία, ἣν ἀκριβώσαντες εὐμαρῶς ἴσως δυνησόμεθα καὶ τὰ δηλούμενα ὑπὸ τῆς φαντασίας καταλαβεῖν. τίς οὖν ἡ προκατασκευή; „καὶ ἐξῆλθε“ φησίν „Ἰακὼβ ἀπὸ τοῦ φρέατος τοῦ ὅρκου καὶ ἐπορεύθη εἰς Χαρράν, καὶ ἀπήντησε τόπῳ· ἔδυ γὰρ ὁ ἥλιος· καὶ ἔλαβεν ἀπὸ τῶν λίθων τοῦ τόπου καὶ ἔθηκε πρὸς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐκοιμήθη ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ἐκείνῳ“ (ibid. 10. 11)· κἄπειτ’ εὐθύς ἐστι τὸ ὄναρ.
1:5οὐκοῦν ἄξιον ἐν ἀρχῇ ταυτὶ τρία διαπορῆσαι· ἓν μὲν τί τὸ τοῦ ὅρκου φρέαρ καὶ διὰ τί οὕτως ὠνομάσθη, δεύτερον δὲ τίς ἡ Χαρρὰν καὶ διὰ τί ἀπὸ τοῦ λεχθέντος φρέατος ἐξελθὼν εἰς Χαρρὰν ἔρχεται εὐθύς, τρίτον τίς ὁ τόπος καὶ διὰ τί, ὅταν γένηται κατ’ αὐτόν, ὁ μὲν ἥλιος δύεται, αὐτὸς δὲ κοιμᾶται.
1:6Σκοπῶμεν οὖν αὐτίκα τὸ πρῶτον. ἐμοὶ τοίνυν δοκεῖ σύμβολον εἶναι τὸ φρέαρ ἐπιστήμης· οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἐπιπόλαιος αὐτῆς ἡ φύσις, ἀλλὰ πάνυ βαθεῖα· οὐδ’ ἐν φανερῷ πρόκειται, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀφανεῖ που κρύπτεσθαι φιλεῖ· οὐδὲ ῥᾳδίως, ἀλλὰ μετὰ πολλῶν πόνων καὶ μόλις ἀνευρίσκεται. καὶ ταῦτ’ οὐ μόνον ἐπὶ τῶν μεγάλα καὶ ἀμύθητα ὅσα θεωρήματα ἐχουσῶν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν εὐτελεστάτων θεωρεῖται.
1:7ἣν γοῦν ἂν ἐθέλῃς ἑλοῦ τῶν τεχνῶν, μή μοι τὴν ἀρίστην, ἀλλὰ τὴν πασῶν ἀφανεστάτην, ἣν ἐλεύθερος μὲν ἴσως οὐδεὶς ἐν πόλει τραφεὶς ἑκὼν ἐπιτηδεύσειεν ἄν, ἐν ἀγρῷ δὲ μόλις ἄκων οἰκέτης δυσκόλῳ καὶ δυστρόπῳ παλαίων δεσπότῃ βιαζομένῳ πολλὰ δρᾶν τῶν ἀβουλήτων.
1:8εὑρεθήσεται γὰρ οὐχ ἁπλοῦν, ἀλλὰ ποικίλον τὸ πρᾶγμα, οὐ θήρᾳ ληπτόν, δυσεύρετον, δυσπεριγένητον, ἐχθρὸν μὲν ὄκνῳ καὶ ἀμελείᾳ καὶ ῥᾳθυμίᾳ, σπουδῆς δὲ καὶ φιλοτιμίας ἱδρώτων τε καὶ φροντίδων μεστόν. οὗ χάριν οὐδ’ ὕδωρ ἐν τῷ φρέατι τούτῳ φασὶν οἱ ὀρύττοντες εὑρεῖν (Gen. 26,32), ἐπειδὴ τὰ τέλη τῶν ἐπιστημῶν οὐ δυσεύρετα μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀνεύρετα παντελῶς εἶναι συμβέβηκε.
1:9γραμματικώτερος δὲ διὰ τοῦτο καὶ γεωμετρικώτερος ἕτερος ἑτέρου γίνεται τῷ τὰς ἐπιτάσεις καὶ παραυξήσεις ἀμήχανον εἶναι ὅροις περιγραφῆναι· πλείω γὰρ ἀεὶ τῶν εἰς μάθησιν ἡκόντων τὰ ἀπολειπόμενα ἐκδέχεται καὶ ἐφεδρεύει, ὡς καὶ τὸν ἅπτεσθαι περάτων ἐπιστήμης ὑπολαμβανόμενον ἡμιτελῆ παρ’ ἑτέρῳ κριτῇ νομίζεσθαι, παρὰ δὲ ἀληθείᾳ δικαζούσῃ καὶ ἄρτι ἄρχεσθαι δοκεῖν.
1:10„βραχὺς μὲν γὰρ ὁ βίος,“ ἔφη τις, „ἡ δὲ τέχνη μακρά,“ ἧς ἄριστα καταλαμβάνει τὸ μέγεθος ὁ ἀψευδῶς ἐμβαθύνων αὐτῇ καὶ ὥσπερ φρέαρ αὐτὴν ὀρύττων. διὸ καὶ τελευτῶντά τινα πολιὸν ἤδη καὶ ὑπέργηρων λόγος ἔχει δακρύειν, οὐ δι’ ἀνανδρίαν φόβῳ θανάτου, ἀλλὰ διὰ παιδείας ἵμερον ὡς νῦν πρῶτον εἰς αὐτὴν εἰσιόντα, ὅτε πανύστατ’ ἔξεισιν.
1:11ἀνθεῖ γὰρ ἡ ψυχὴ πρὸς ἐπιστήμην, ὁπότε αἱ τοῦ σώματος ἀκμαὶ χρόνου μήκει μαραίνονται. πρὶν οὖν ἡβῆσαι καὶ ἐννεάσαι τῇ τῶν πραγμάτων ἀκριβεστέρᾳ καταλήψει, χαλεπὸν ὑποσκελισθῆναι. τὸ δὲ πάθος τοῦτο κοινὸν ἁπάντων ἐστὶ τῶν φιλομαθῶν, οἷς νέα ἐπὶ παλαιοῖς ἀνίσχει καὶ ἀναλάμπει θεωρήματα, πολλὰ μὲν καὶ τῆς ψυχῆς, ὁπότε μὴ στεῖρα καὶ ἄγονος εἴη, τικτούσης, πολλὰ δὲ καὶ τῆς φύσεως ἀτεκμάρτως ἐκ ταὐτομάτου προφαινούσης τοῖς διάνοιαν ὀξυδορκοῦσι. τὸ μὲν οὖν ἐπιστήμης φρέαρ ὅρον καὶ τελευτὴν οὐκ ἔχον τοιοῦτον ἀπεδείχθη.
1:12διὰ τί δὲ ὅρκος ὠνομάσθη (Gen. 26,33), λεκτέον· τὰ ἐνδοιαζόμενα τῶν πραγμάτων ὅρκῳ διακρίνεται καὶ τὰ ἀβέβαια βεβαιοῦται καὶ τὰ ἄπιστα λαμβάνει πίστιν· ἐξ ὧν ἐκεῖνο συνάγεται, ὅτι περὶ οὐδενὸς ἄν τις οὕτως βεβαιώσαιτο, ὡς περὶ τοῦ τὸ σοφίας γένος ἀπερίγραφον καὶ ἀτελεύτητον εἶναι.
1:13καλὸν μὲν οὖν καὶ ἀνωμότῳ διεξιόντι περὶ τούτων συνεπιγράφεσθαι· ὁ δὲ μὴ λίαν εἰς συναίνεσιν εὐχερὴς ἐνωμότῳ γενομένῳ συναινείτω. μηδεὶς δὲ ὀμνύναι τὸν τοιοῦτον ὅρκον ἀναδυέσθω σαφῶς εἰδώς, ὅτι ἐν εὐόρκων γραφήσεται στήλαις.
1:14ἅλις μὲν δὴ τούτων. ἑπόμενον δ’ ἂν εἴη σκέψασθαι, διὰ τί τεττάρων ὀρυττομένων φρεάτων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀμφὶ τὸν Ἀβραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαὰκ (Gen. 21, 25. 26,19—23) τὸ τέταρτον καὶ τελευταῖον „ὅρκος“ προσερρήθη.
1:15μήποτ’ οὖν δι’ ὑπονοιῶν ἐκεῖνο βούλεται παραστῆσαι, ὅτι κἀν τῷ παντὶ τεττάρων ὄντων, ἐξ ὧν συνέστηκεν ὅδε ὁ κόσμος, καὶ ἐν ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς ἰσαρίθμων, ἐξ ὧν διαπλασθέντες εἰς ἀνθρωπόμορφον εἶδος ἐτυπώθημεν, τὰ μὲν [[οὖν]ὗν] τρία πέφυκεν ἀμηγέπῃ καταλαμβάνεσθαι, τὸ δὲ τέταρτον ἀκατάληπτον πᾶσι τοῖς κριταῖς ἐστιν.
1:16ἐν μὲν οὖν τῷ κόσμῳ γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ καὶ ἀέρα καὶ οὐρανὸν τέτταρα τὰ πάντα εἶναι συμβέβηκεν· ὧν τὰ μὲν ἄλλα κἂν δυσευρέτου, ἀλλ’ οὐκ εἰσάπαν ἀνευρέτου μοίρας ἠξίωται.
1:17καὶ γὰρ γῆν, ὅτι ἐστὶ σῶμα βαρὺ καὶ ἀδιάλυτον καὶ στερέμνιον καὶ τεμνόμενον εἰς ὄρη καὶ πεδιάδας χώρας καὶ ποταμοῖς καὶ θαλάττῃ διαιρούμενον, ὡς τὰ μὲν νησιάζειν, τὰ δὲ ἠπειροῦσθαι, καὶ ὅτι τὸ μὲν αὐτῆς λεπτόγεων, τὸ δὲ βαθύγειον, καὶ τὸ μὲν τραχὺ καὶ στρυφνὸν καὶ λιθῶδες καὶ εἰσάπαν ἄγονον, τὸ δὲ λεῖον καὶ μαλακὸν καὶ γονιμώτατον, καὶ μυρία πρὸς τούτοις ἕτερα καταλαμβάνομεν·
1:18καὶ πάλιν ὕδωρ ὅτι πολλά τε τῶν εἰρημένων ἔχει κοινὰ πρὸς γῆν καὶ ἐξαίρετα ἕτερα· τὸ μὲν γὰρ αὐτοῦ γλυκύ, τὸ δ’ ἁλμυρόν, τὸ δ’ ἄλλαις διακεκριμένον ἰδέαις· καὶ τὸ μὲν πότιμον, τὸ δ’ οὐ πότιμον—καὶ ἑκάτερον οὐ πᾶσιν, ἀλλ’ οἷς θάτερον, οὐ τὸ ἕτερον, καὶ οἷς μὴ θάτερον, πάντως τὸ ἕτερον —, καὶ τὸ μὲν φύσει ψυχρόν, τὸ δὲ φύσει θερμόν —
1:19εἰσὶ γὰρ μυρίαι πολλαχόθι πηγαὶ ζέον ὕδωρ ἐκδιδοῦσαι, οὐ κατὰ γῆν μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ κατὰ θάλατταν· ἤδη γοῦν ἐφάνησαν φλέβες ἀνομβροῦσαι ζέον ὕδωρ ἐν μέσοις πελάγεσιν, ἃς ἡ τοσαύτη τῶν ἐν κύκλῳ πελαγῶν ἀνάχυσις ἐξ αἰῶνος ἐπικλύζουσα οὐκ ἴσχυσε σβέσαι, ἀλλ’ οὐδ’ ἐπὶ ποσὸν ἀνεῖναι —·
1:20καὶ πάλιν ὅτι ὁ ἀὴρ ἔχει φύσιν εἴκουσαν ἀντιπεριιστάμενος τοῖς σώμασιν, ὄργανον ὢν ζωῆς, ἀναπνοῆς, ὁράσεως, ἀκοῆς, τῶν ἄλλων αἰσθήσεων, πυκνότητας καὶ μανότητας κινήσεις τε καὶ ἠρεμίας ἐνδεχόμενος, τροπὰς καὶ μεταβολὰς παντοίας τρεπόμενός τε καὶ μεταβάλλων, χειμῶνας καὶ θέρη γεννῶν καὶ τὰς μετοπωρινὰς καὶ ἐαρινὰς ὥρας, ἐξ ὧν ὁ ἐνιαυτοῦ κύκλος πέφυκε περατοῦσθαι.
1:21τούτων μὲν δὴ πάντων αἰσθανόμεθα, ὁ δ’ οὐρανὸς ἀκατάληπτον ἔχει τὴν φύσιν, οὐδὲν ἑαυτοῦ σαφὲς γνώρισμα πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἀποστείλας. τί γὰρ ἂν εἴποιμεν; ὅτι πεπηγώς ἐστι κρύσταλλος, ὡς ἠξίωσάν τινες; ἢ ὅτι πῦρ τὸ καθαρώτατον; ἢ ὅτι πέμπτον κυκλοφορικὸν σῶμα, μηδενὸς τῶν τεττάρων στοιχείων μετέχον; τί δ’; ἡ ἀπλανὴς καὶ ἐξωτάτω σφαῖρα πρὸς τὸ ἄνω βάθος ἔχει ἢ αὐτὸ μόνον ἐστὶν ἐπιφάνεια βάθους ἐρήμη, τοῖς ἐπιπέδοις σχήμασιν ἐοικυῖα; τί δ’;
1:22οἱ ἀστέρες πότερον γῆς εἰσιν ὄγκοι πυρὸς πλήρεις — ἄγκεα γὰρ καὶ νάπας καὶ μύδρους διαπύρους εἶπον αὐτοὺς εἶναί τινες, αὐτοὶ δεσμωτηρίου καὶ μύλωνος, ἐν οἷς τὰ τοιαῦτά ἐστιν ἐπὶ τιμωρίᾳ τῶν ἀσεβῶν, ὄντες ἐπάξιοι — ἢ συνεχὴς καί, ὡς εἶπέ τις, πυκνὴ ἁρμονία, πιλήματα ἀδιάλυτα αἰθέρος; ἔμψυχοι δὲ καὶ νοεροὶ ἢ νοῦ καὶ ψυχῆς ἀμέτοχοι; προαιρετικὰς δὲ ἢ κατηναγκασμένας αὐτὸ μόνον κινήσεις ἔχοντες; τί δέ;
1:23σελήνη πότερον γνήσιον ἢ νόθον ἐπιφέρεται φέγγος ἡλιακαῖς ἐπιλαμπόμενον ἀκτῖσιν ἢ καθ’ αὑτὸ μὲν ἰδίᾳ τούτων οὐδέτερον, τὸ δ’ ἐξ ἀμφοῖν ὡς ἂν ἐξ οἰκείου καὶ ἀλλοτρίου πυρὸς κρᾶμα; πάντα γὰρ ταῦτα καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα τοῦ ἀρίστου τε καὶ τετάρτου τῶν ἐν κόσμῳ σώματος ὄντα, οὐρανοῦ, ἄδηλα καὶ ἀκατάληπτα, στοχασμοῖς καὶ εἰκασίαις, οὐ παγίῳ λόγῳ τῆς ἀληθείας, ἐφορμοῦντα·
1:24ὥστε κἂν ὀμόσαι τινὰ θαρρήσαντα, ὅτι θνητὸς οὐδεὶς πώποτε ἰσχύσει τούτων ἐναργῶς καταλαβεῖν οὐδέν. ὅρκος διὰ τοῦτ’ ὠνομάσθη τὸ τέταρτον καὶ ξηρὸν φρέαρ, ἡ τοῦ τετάρτου τῶν ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ ζήτησις
1:25ἀτελεύτητος καὶ πάντῃ δυσεύρετος, οὐρανοῦ. ἴδωμεν δέ, ὃν τρόπον καὶ τὸ ἐν ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς τέταρτον διαφερόντως καὶ κατ’ ἐξαίρετον λόγον ἀκατάληπτον εἶναι πέφυκεν. οὐκοῦν τέτταρα τὰ ἀνωτάτω τῶν περὶ ἡμᾶς ἐστι, σῶμα, αἴσθησις, λόγος, νοῦς· τούτων μὲν δὴ τὰ τρία οὐ κατὰ πάσας ἄδηλα τὰς ἰδέας ἐστίν, ἀλλ’ ἔχει τινὰ δείγματα ἐν ἑαυτοῖς τοῦ καταλαμβάνεσθαι.
Book 1, §§1–25
1:1The treatise before this one has contained our opinions on those visions sent from heaven which are classed under the first species; in reference to which subject we delivered our opinion that the Deity sent the appearances which are beheld by man in dreams in accordance with the suggestions of his own nature. But in this treatise we will, to the best of our power, describe those dreams which come under the second species.
1:2Now the second species is that in which our mind, being moved simultaneously with the mind of the universe, has appeared to be hurried away by itself and to be under the influence of divine impulses, so as to be rendered capable of comprehending beforehand, and knowing by anticipation some of the events of the future. Now the first dream which is akin to the species which I have been describing, is that which appeared on the ladder which reached up to heaven, and which was of this kind.
1:3"And Jacob dreamed, and behold a ladder was firmly planted on the earth, the head of which reached up to heaven; and the angels of God were ascending and descending on it. And behold there was a ladder firmly planted on the earth, and the Lord was standing steadily upon it; and he said, I am the God of Abraham thy father, and the God of Isaac: be not afraid. The earth on which thou art sleeping I will give unto thee and unto thy seed, and thy seed shall be as the dust of the earth, and it shall be multiplied as the sand on the seashore, and shall spread to the south, and to the north, and to the east; and in thee shall all the kindreds of the earth be blessed, and in thy seed also. And, behold, I am with thee, keeping thee in all thy ways, by whichever is goest, and I will bring thee again into this land; because I will not leave thee until I have done everything which I have said unto thee."
1:4But the previous considerations of the circumstances of this vision requires that we should examine them with accuracy, and then perhaps we shall be able to comprehend what is indicated by the vision. What, then, are the previous circumstances? The scripture tells us, "And Jacob went up from the well of the oath, and came to Charran, and went into a place and lay down there until the sun arose. And he took one of the stones of the place and placed it at his head, and went to sleep in that place." And immediately afterwards came the dream.
1:5Therefore it is well at the outset to raise a question on these three points:—One, What was the well of the oath, and why was it called by this name? Secondly, What is Charran, and why, after Jacob had departed from the well beforementioned, did he immediately go to Charran? Thirdly, What was the place, and why, when he was in it, did the sun at once set, and did he go to sleep?
1:6Let us then at once begin and consider the first of these points. To me, then, the well appears to be an emblem of knowledge; for its nature is not superficial, but very deep. Nor does it lie in an open place, but a well is fond of being hidden somewhere in secret. Nor is it found with ease, but only after great labour and with difficulty; and this too is seen to be the case with sciences, not only with such as have great and indescribable subjects of speculation, but even with respect to such as are the most insignificant.
1:7Choose, therefore, whichever art you please; not the most excellent, but even the most obscure of all, which perhaps no one who has been bred a free man in the whole city would ever study of his own accord, and which scarcely any servant in the field would attend to, who, against his will, was a slave to some morose and ill-tempered master who compelled him to do many unpleasant things.
1:8For the matter will be found to be not a simple one, but rather one of great complications and variety, not easy to be seized upon, but difficult to discover, difficult to master, hostile to delay, and indolence and indifference, full of earnestness and contention, and sweat, and care. For which reason "those who dig in this well say that they cannot find even water in it;" because the ends of science are not only hard to discover, but are even altogether undiscoverable;
1:9and it is owing to this that one man is more thoroughly skilled in grammar or in geometry than another, because of its being impossible to circumscribe, increase, and extend one within certain limits; for there is always more that is left behind than what comes to be learnt; and what is left watches for and catches the learner, so that even he who fancies that he has comprehended and mastered the very extremities of knowledge would be considered but half perfect by another person who was his judge, and if he were before the tribunal of truth would appear to be only beginning knowledge;
1:10for life is short, as some one has said, but art is long; of which that man most thoroughly comprehends the magnitude, who sincerely and honestly plunges deeply into it, and who digs it out like a well. And such a man, when he is at the point of death, being now grey-headed and exceedingly old, it is said, wept, not that he feared death as being a coward, but out of a desire for instruction, as feeling that he was now, for the first time, entering upon it when he was finally departing from life.
1:11For the soul flourishes for the pursuit of knowledge when the prime vigour of the body is withering away from the lapse of time; therefore, before one has arrived at one’s prime and vigour by reason of a more accurate comprehension of things, it is not difficult to be tripped up. But this accident is common to all people who are fond of learning, to whom new subjects of contemplation are continually rising up and striving after old ones, the soul itself producing many such subjects when it is not barren and unproductive. And nature, also, unexpectedly and spontaneously displaying a great number to those who are gifted with acute and penetrating intellects. Therefore the well of knowledge is shown to be of this kind, having no boundary and no end.
1:12We must now explain why it was called the well of the oath. Those matters which are doubted about are decided by an oath, and those which are uncertain are confirmed in the same manner, and so, too, those which want certification receive it; from which facts this inference is drawn, that there is no subject respecting which any one can make an affirmation with greater certainty than he can respecting the fact that the race of wisdom is without limitation and without end.
1:13It is well, therefore, to enrol one’s self under the banners of one who discusses these matters without an oath; but he who is not very much inclined to assent to the assertions of another will at least assent to them when he has made oath to their correctness. But let no one refuse to take an oath of this kind, well knowing that he will have his name inscribed on pillars among those who are faithful to their oaths.
1:14However, enough of this. The next thing must be to consider why it is that as four wells had been dug by the servants of Abraham and Isaac, the fourth and last was called the well of the oath.
1:15May it not be that the sacred historian here desires to represent, in a figurative manner, that as in the universe there are four elements of which this world is composed, and as there are an equal number in ourselves, of which we have been fashioned before we were moulded into our human shape, three of them are capable of being comprehended somehow or other, but the fourth is unintelligible to all who come forward as judges of it.
1:16Accordingly, we find that the four elements in the world are the earth, and the water, and the air, and the heaven, of which, even if some are difficult to find, they are still not classed in the utterly undiscoverable portion.
1:17For that the earth, because it is a heavy, and indissoluble, and solid substance, is divided into mountains and champaign districts, and intersected by rivers and seas, so that some portion of it consists of islands, and some portions are continent. And again, some of it has a shallow and some a deep soil; and some is rough, and rugged, and strong, and altogether barren; and some is smooth and delicate, and exceedingly fertile; and besides all these facts we know a great number of others relative to the earth.
1:18And again, there is the water, which we know has many of the aforesaid qualities in common with the earth, and many also peculiar to itself; for some of it is sweet, and some brackish, and some is mixed up of various characteristics; and some is good to drink, and some is not drinkable; and, moreover, neither of these last qualities is invariable with respect to every creature, but there are some to which it is the one and not the other, and vice versa. Again, some water is by nature cold, and other water naturally hot;
1:19for there is in all sorts of places an infinite number of springs pouring forth hot water, not on the land only but even in the sea: at all events, there have appeared before now veins pouring up warm water in the middle of the sea, which all the enormous efflux of salt water in all the sea that encircles the world, pouring over them from all eternity, has never been able to extinguish, nor even in the least degree to diminish.
1:20Again, we know that the air has an attractive nature, yielding to such bodies as surround it in an altitude of resistance, being the organ of life, and breath, and sight, and hearing, and all the rest of the external senses, admitting of rarification, and condensation, and motion, and tranquillity, and changes, and variations of every kind, by which it is altered and modified, and generating summers and winters, and the seasons of autumn and spring, by means of which the circle of the year is at last brought to a conclusion.
1:21All these things, then, we feel: but the heaven has a nature which is incomprehensible, and it has never conveyed to us any distinct indication by which we can understand its nature; for what can we say? that it is solid ice, as some persons have chosen to assert? or that it is the purest fire? or that it is a fifth body, moving in a circle having no participation in any of the four elements? For what can we say? Has that most remote sphere of the fixed stars any density in an upward direction? or is it merely a superficies devoid of all depth, something like a plane figure?
1:22And what are the stars? Are they masses of earth full of fire? For some persons have said that they are hills, and valleys, and thickets, men who are worthy of a prison and a treadmill, or of any place where there are instruments proper for the punishment of impious persons; or are they, as some one has defined them, a continuous and dense harmony, the closely packed, indissoluble mass of aether? Again, are they animated and intelligent? or are they destitute alike of mind and vitality? Have they their motions in consequence of any choice of their own? or merely because they are compulsory?
1:23What, again, are we to say of the moon? Does she show us a light of her own, or a borrowed and illegitimate one, only reflected from the rays of the sun? or is neither of these things true, but has she something mixed, as it were, so as to be a sort of combination of her own light and of that which belongs to some other body? For all these things, and others like them, belonging to the fourth and most excellent of the bodies in the world, namely, the heaven, are uncertain and incomprehensible, and are spoken of in accordance with conjectures and guesses, and not with the solid, certain reasoning of truth,
1:24so that a person might venture to swear that no mortal man will ever be able to comprehend any one of these matters clearly. At all events, the fourth and dry well was called the well of the oath on this account, because the search after the fourth element in the world, that is to say the heaven, is without any result, and is in every respect fruitless. But let us now see in what manner that fourth element in us is by nature in such an especial and singular manner incomprehensible.
1:25There are, then, four principal elements in us, the body, the external sense, the speech, and the mind. Now of these, three are not uncertain or unintelligible in every respect, but they contain some indication in themselves by which they are comprehended.
Book 1, §§26–50
1:26τί δ’ ἔσθ’ ὅ φημι; ὅτι τὸ σῶμα καὶ τριχῇ διαστατὸν καὶ ἑξαχῇ κινητόν, ἴσμεν, διαστάσεις μὲν τρεῖς ἔχον, μῆκος, βάθος, πλάτος, κινήσεις δὲ τὰς διπλασίας ἕξ, τὴν ἄνω, τὴν κάτω, τὴν ἐπὶ δεξιά, τὴν ἐπὶ εὐώνυμα, τὴν πρόσω, τὴν εἰς τὸ κατόπιν· ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅτι ψυχῆς ἐστιν ἀγγεῖον, οὐκ ἀγνοοῦμεν· ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅτι ἡβᾷ, φθίνει, γηράσκει, τελευτᾷ, διαλύεται,
1:27σαφῶς ἴσμεν. καὶ πρὸς αἴσθησιν μέντοι γε οὐ παντάπασιν ἀμβλεῖς καὶ πηροὶ γεγόναμεν, ἀλλ’ ἔχομεν εἰπεῖν, ὅτι καὶ πενταχῇ σχίζεται καὶ ὄργανα ἑκάστης ἐστὶν ὑπὸ φύσεως δημιουργηθέντα οἰκεῖα, ὁράσεως μὲν ὀφθαλμοί, ἀκοῆς δὲ ὦτα, ῥῖνες δὲ ὀσφρήσεως καὶ τῶν ἄλλων τὰ οἷς ἐναρμόζεται, καὶ ὅτι ἄγγελοι διανοίας εἰσὶ διαγγέλλουσαι χρώματα, σχήματα, φωνάς, ἀτμῶν καὶ χυλῶν ἰδιότητας, συνόλως σώματα καὶ ὅσαι ποιότητες ἐν τούτοις, καὶ ὅτι δορυφόροι ψυχῆς εἰσιν, ὅσα ἂν ἴδωσιν ἢ ἀκούσωσι δηλοῦσαι κἂν εἴ τι βλαβερὸν ἔξωθεν ἐπίοι προορώμεναί τε καὶ φυλαττόμεναι, ὡς μὴ λάθρᾳ παρεισρευὲν αἴτιον ζημίας ἀνηκέστου τῇ
1:28δεσποίνῃ γένηται. καὶ φωνὴ δ’ οὐκ εἰσάπαν ἀποδιδράσκει τὴν ἡμετέραν κρίσιν, ἀλλ’ ἴσμεν ὅτι ἡ μὲν ὀξεῖα, ἡ δὲ βαρεῖα, καὶ ἡ μὲν ἐμμελὴς καὶ ἐναρμόνιος, ἡ δὲ ἀπῳδὸς καὶ λίαν ἀνάρμοστος, καὶ πάλιν ἡ μὲν μείζων, ἡ δὲ ἐλάττων· διαφέρουσι καὶ ἄλλοις μυρίοις, γένεσι, χρώμασι, διαστήμασι, συνημμέναις τάσεσι καὶ διεζευγμέναις, ταῖς διὰ τεττάρων, ταῖς διὰ πέντε, ταῖς διὰ πασῶν συμφωνίαις.
1:29καὶ μὲν δὲ καὶ τῆς ἐνάρθρου φωνῆς, ἣν μόνος ἐκ πάντων ζῴων ἔλαχεν ἄνθρωπος, ἔστιν ἃ γνωρίζομεν· οἷον ὅτι ἀπὸ διανοίας ἀναπέμπεται, ὅτι ἐν τῷ στόματι ἀρθροῦται, ὅτι ἡ γλῶσσα πλήττουσα τῇ τῆς φωνῆς τάσει τὸ ἔναρθρον ἐνσφραγίζεται καὶ λόγον, ἀλλ’ οὐ ψιλὴν αὐτὸ μόνον φωνὴν ἀργὴν καὶ ἀδιατύπωτον ἦχον ἀπεργάζεται, ὅτι κήρυκος ἢ ἑρμηνέως ἔχει τάξιν πρὸς τὸν ὑποβάλλοντα νοῦν.
1:30ἆρ’ οὖν καὶ τὸ τέταρτον τῶν ἐν ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς, ὁ ἡγεμὼν νοῦς, καταληπτός ἐστιν; οὐ δήπου. τί γὰρ αὐτὸν οἰόμεθα κατὰ τὴν οὐσίαν εἶναι; πνεῦμα ἢ αἷμα ἢ σῶμα συνόλως — ἀλλ’ οὐ σῶμα, ἀσώματον δὲ λεκτέον — ἢ πέρας ἢ εἶδος ἢ ἀριθμὸν ἢ ἐνδελέχειαν ἢ ἁρμονίαν ἢ τί τῶν ὄντων;
1:31γεννώμενον δ’ εὐθὺς ἢ ἔξωθεν εἰσκρίνεται ἢ ὑπὸ τοῦ περιέχοντος ἀέρος ἡ ἔνθερμος ἐν ἡμῖν φύσις οἷα σίδηρος ἐν χαλκέως πεπυρωμένος ὕδατι ψυχρῷ πρὸς τὸ κραταιότατον στομοῦται; διότι καὶ παρὰ τὴν ψῦξιν ὠνομάσθαι ψυχὴ δοκεῖ. τί δέ; τελευτώντων σβέννυται καὶ συμφθείρεται τοῖς σώμασιν ἢ πλεῖστον ἐπιβιοῖ χρόνον ἢ κατὰ τὸ παντελὲς ἄφθαρτόν ἐστι;
1:32ποῦ δ’ ἐμπεφώλευκεν ὁ νοῦς αὐτῷ; ἆρα οἶκον κεκλήρωται; οἱ μὲν γὰρ τὴν ἀκρόπολιν ἐν ἡμῖν ἀνιέρωσαν αὐτῷ κεφαλήν, περὶ ἣν καὶ αἱ αἰσθήσεις λοχῶσιν, εἰκὸς εἶναι νομίσαντες ἐγγὺς οἷα μεγάλου βασιλέως ἐφεδρεύειν τοὺς δορυφόρους· οἱ δ’ ὑπὸ καρδίας αὐτὸν ἀγαλματοφορεῖσθαι διανοηθέντες γνωσιμαχοῦσιν. ἀεὶ δὴ τὸ τέταρτον ἀκατάληπτον,
1:33οὐρανὸς μὲν ἐν κόσμῳ παρὰ τὴν ἀέρος καὶ γῆς καὶ ὕδατος φύσιν, νοῦς δὲ ἐν ἀνθρώπῳ παρὰ σῶμα καὶ αἴσθησιν καὶ τὸν ἑρμηνέα λόγον. μήποτε μέντοι καὶ τὸ τέταρτον ἔτος „ἅγιον καὶ αἰνετὸν“ ταύτης ἕνεκα τῆς αἰτίας ἐν ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἀναγραφαῖς δηλοῦται (Lev. 19,24)·
1:34τὸ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς γεγονόσιν ἅγιον οὐρανὸς μέν ἐστιν ἐν κόσμῳ, καθ’ ὃν αἱ ἄφθαρτοι καὶ μακραίωνες φύσεις περιπολοῦσιν, ἐν ἀνθρώπῳ δὲ νοῦς, ἀπόσπασμα θεῖον ὤν, καὶ μάλιστα κατὰ Μωυσέα λέγοντα· „ἐνεφύσησεν εἰς τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ πνοὴν ζωῆς, καὶ ἐγένετο ὁ ἄνθρωπος εἰς ψυχὴν ζῶσαν“ (Gen. 2, 7).
1:35καὶ ἑκάτερον δὲ αἰνετὸν οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ μοι δοκεῖ προσειρῆσθαι· τὰ γὰρ δυνάμενα τοὺς ἐπαίνους καὶ ὕμνους καὶ εὐδαιμονισμοὺς ἐκτραγῳδεῖν τοῦ γεννήσαντος πατρὸς ταῦτ’ ἐστίν, οὐρανός τε καὶ νοῦς. ἄνθρωπος μὲν γὰρ ἐξαιρέτου παρὰ τὰ ἄλλα ζῷα γέρως ἔλαχε, θεραπεύειν τὸ ὄν, ὁ δὲ οὐρανὸς ἀεὶ μελῳδεῖ, κατὰ τὰς κινήσεις τῶν ἐν ἑαυτῷ τὴν πάμμουσον ἁρμονίαν ἀποτελῶν·
1:36ἧς εἰ συνέβαινε τὴν ἠχὴν εἰς τὰς ἡμετέρας φθάνειν ἀκοάς, ἔρωτες ἂν ἀκάθεκτοι καὶ λελυττηκότες ἵμεροι καὶ ἄπαυστοι καὶ μανιώδεις ἐγίνοντο οἶστροι, ὡς καὶ τῶν ἀναγκαίων ἀπέχεσθαι τρεφομένους μηκέθ’ ὡς θνητοὶ σιτίοις καὶ ποτοῖς διὰ φάρυγγος, ἀλλ’ ὡς οἱ μέλλοντες ἀπαθανατίζεσθαι δι’ ὤτων μουσικῆς τελείας ἐνθέοις ᾠδαῖς· ὧν ἀκροατὴν Μωυσῆν ἀσώματον γενόμενον λόγος ἔχει τεσσαράκοντα ἡμέρας καὶ τὰς ἴσας νύκτας μήτε ἄρτου μήτε ὕδατος ψαῦσαι τὸ παράπαν (Exod. 24,18).
1:37ὁ τοίνυν οὐρανός, τὸ μουσικῆς ἀρχέτυπον ὄργανον, ἄκρως ἡρμόσθαι δοκεῖ δι’ οὐδὲν ἕτερον ἢ ἵνα οἱ ἐπὶ τιμῇ τοῦ τῶν ὅλων πατρὸς ᾀδόμενοι ὕμνοι μουσικῶς ἐπιψάλλωνται. καὶ τὴν ἀρετὴν μέντοι Λείαν ἀκούομεν ἐπὶ τῆς τοῦ τετάρτου γενέσεως υἱοῦ μηκέτι τίκτειν δυναμένην, ἀλλ’ ἐπέχουσαν ἢ ἐπεχομένην τὰς γονάς· εὕρισκε γάρ, οἶμαι, πᾶσαν τὴν γένεσιν ἐξ αὐτῆς ξηράν τε καὶ στεῖραν, ἡνίκα Ἰούδαν, τὴν ἐξομολόγησιν, τὸν τέλειον καρπόν, ἤνθησε.
1:38διαφέρει δ’ οὐδὲν τὸ λέγειν "ἵστασθαι τίκτουσαν” (Gen. 29, 35) τοῦ μὴ εὑρίσκειν ἐν τῷ τετάρτῳ φρέατι τοὺς παῖδας Ἰσαὰκ ὕδωρ (Gen. 26,32), ἐπειδήπερ ἐξ ἑκατέρου τῶν συμβόλων ἐμφαίνεται τὸ πάντα διψῆν θεοῦ, παρ’ ὃν αἱ γενέσεις καὶ τροφαὶ τοῖς γεγονόσιν ἄρδονται.
1:39μικροπολῖται μὲν οὖν τινες ἴσως ὑπολήψονται περὶ φρεάτων διορυχῆς τὸν τοσοῦτον εἶναι λόγον τῷ νομοθέτῃ, οἱ δὲ δὴ μείζονι ἐγγραφέντες πατρίδι, τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ, τελειοτέρων φρονημάτων ὄντες, εἴσονται σαφῶς, ὅτι περὶ τεττάρων ἐστίν, οὐ φρεάτων, ἀλλὰ τῶν τοῦ παντὸς μερῶν ἡ ζήτησις τοῖς ὁρατικοῖς καὶ φιλοθεάμοσι, γῆς, ὕδατος, ἀέρος, οὐρανοῦ.
1:40ὧν ἕκαστον ἐπινοίαις εἰς ἄκρον πεποιημέναις διεξελθόντες ἐν μὲν τοῖς τρισὶν εὗρόν τινα καταληπτά — διὸ καὶ τρία ὀνόματα ἐπεφήμισαν τοῖς εὑρεθεῖσιν, ἀδικίαν, ἔχθραν, εὐρυχωρίαν (Gen. 26, 20. 21. 22) —, ἐν δὲ τῷ τετάρτῳ τὸ παράπαν οὐδέν, οὐρανῷ, καθάπερ ὀλίγῳ πρότερον ἐδηλώσαμεν· τὸ γὰρ τέταρτον φρέαρ ἄνυδρον καὶ ξηρὸν εὑρίσκεται καὶ ὅρκος διὰ τὴν εἰρημένην αἰτίαν προσαγορεύεται.
1:41Τὰ δὲ ἑπόμενα ζητήσωμεν ἐρευνῶντες, τίς ἡ Χαρρὰν καὶ διὰ τί ὁ ἀπὸ τοῦ φρέατος ἐξελθὼν εἰς αὐτὴν ἔρχεται (Gen. 28,10). ἔστι τοίνυν, ὡς ἔμοιγε φαίνεται, Χαρρὰν μητρόπολίς τις αἰσθήσεων. ἑρμηνεύεται γὰρ τοτὲ μὲν ὀρυκτή, τοτὲ δὲ τρῶγλαι, δι’ ἀμφοτέρων τῶν ὀνομάτων ἑνὸς δηλουμένου πράγματος.
1:42τὸ γὰρ σῶμα ἡμῶν εἰς τὰ τῶν αἰσθήσεων ὄργανα τρόπον τινὰ ἐξορώρυκται, καὶ γέγονεν ἕκαστον τῶν ὀργάνων ἑκάστης ὀπή τις αἰσθήσεως, ἐν ᾗ πέφυκε φωλεύειν. ὅταν οὖν τις ἀπὸ τοῦ φρέατος, ὃ καλεῖται ὅρκος, ὥσπερ ἀπὸ λιμένος ἐξαναχθῇ, παραγίνεται εὐθὺς εἰς Χαρρὰν ἀναγκαίως· τὸν γὰρ ἀποδημίαν στελλόμενον ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀρίστου καὶ ἀπειρομεγέθους ἐπιστήμης χωρίου κατ’ ἀναγκαῖον αἰσθήσεις ἄνευ ξεναγῶν ὑποδέχονται.
1:43κινεῖται γὰρ ἡμῶν ἡ ψυχὴ πολλάκις μὲν ἐφ’ ἑαυτῆς, ὅλον τὸν σωματικὸν ὄγκον ἐκδῦσα καὶ τὸν τῶν αἰσθήσεων ὄχλον ἀποδρᾶσα, πολλάκις δὲ καὶ ταῦτα ἐπαμπισχομένη. τὴν μὲν οὖν γυμνὴν κίνησιν αὐτῆς τὰ νοήσει μόνῃ καταληπτὰ ἔλαχε, τὴν δὲ μετὰ σώματος τὰ αἰσθητά.
1:44εἴ τις οὖν ὁμιλεῖν εἰσάπαν ἀδυνατεῖ διανοίᾳ μόνῃ, δευτέραν καταφυγὴν αἴσθησιν εὑρίσκεται, καὶ ὅστις ἂν σφαλῇ τῶν νοητῶν, αὐτίκα πρὸς τὰ αἰσθητὰ κατασύρεται· δεύτερος γὰρ ἀεὶ πλοῦς ὁ πρὸς αἴσθησιν τοῖς μὴ δυνηθεῖσι πρὸς τὸν ἡγεμόνα νοῦν εὐπλοῆσαι.
1:45καλὸν δὲ κἀν τούτῳ γενομένους μὴ καταγηράσαι καὶ διαιωνίσαι, ἀλλ’ ὡς ἐν ξένῃ διατρίβοντας παροίκων τρόπον ἀεὶ μετανάστασιν ζητεῖν καὶ ἐπάνοδον εἰς τὴν πατρῴαν γῆν. Λάβαν μὲν γὰρ οὐκ εἶδος, οὐ γένος, οὐκ ἰδέαν, οὐκ ἐννόημα, οὐκ ἄλλο τῶν νοήσει μόνῃ καταλαμβανομένων οὐδὲν ἁπλῶς εἰδώς, ἠρτημένος δὲ τῶν ἐμφανῶν, ἅπερ εἰς ὄψεις καὶ ἀκοὰς καὶ τὰς συγγενεῖς δυνάμεις ἔρχεται, πατρίδος ἠξίωται Χαρράν, ἣν ὡς ξένην ὁ φιλάρετος Ἰακὼβ πρὸς ὀλίγον οἰκεῖ χρόνον, τῆς οἴκαδε ἐπανόδου διαμεμνημένος.
1:46φησὶ γοῦν ἡ μήτηρ, ἡ ὑπομονή, Ῥεβέκκα πρὸς αὐτόν· „ἀναστὰς ἀπόδραθι πρὸς Λάβαν τὸν ἀδελφόν μου εἰς Χαρράν, καὶ οἴκησον μετ’ αὐτοῦ ἡμέρας τινάς“ (Gen. 27, 43. 44). ἆρα οὖν κατανοεῖς, ὅτι οὐχ ὑπομένει ὁ ἀσκητὴς ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ τῶν αἰσθήσεων καταβιῶναι, ἀλλ’ ἡμέρας ὀλίγας καὶ βραχύν τινα χρόνον διὰ τὰς τοῦ συνδέτου σώματος ἀνάγκας, ὁ δὲ μακρὸς αἰὼν αὐτῷ καὶ βίος ἐν τῇ νοητῇ πόλει ταμιεύεται;
1:47παρό μοι δοκεῖ καὶ ὁ πάππος αὐτοῦ τῆς ἐπιστήμης, Ἀβραὰμ ὄνομα, μὴ πολὺν χρόνον ὑπομεῖναι τῇ Χαρρὰν ἐνδιατρῖψαι. λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι „Ἀβραὰμ ἦν ἐτῶν ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε, ὅτε ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ Χαρράν“ (Gen. 12, 4), καίτοι τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ Θάρρα, ὃς ἑρμηνεύεται κατασκοπὴ ὀσμῆς, μέχρι τελευτῆς ἐν αὐτῇ
1:48βιώσαντος. ῥητῶς γοῦν ἐν ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἀναγραφαῖς δηλοῦται, ὅτι „ἀπέθανε Θάρρα ἐν Χαρράν“ (Gen. 11,32)· κατάσκοπος γὰρ ἦν ἀρετῆς, οὐ πολίτης, καὶ ὀσμαῖς ἀλλ’ οὐ τροφῶν ἀπολαύσεσιν ἐχρῆτο, μήπω ἱκανὸς ὢν ἐμπίπλασθαι φρονήσεως, ἀλλὰ μηδὲ γεύεσθαι, τοῦτο δ’ αὐτὸ μόνον ὀσφραίνεσθαι.
1:49καθάπερ γὰρ τοὺς θηρατικοὺς τῶν σκυλάκων λόγος ἔχει καὶ τὰ πορρωτάτω τῶν θηρίων πτώματα ῥινηλατοῦντας ἀνευρίσκειν ἠκονημένους ὑπὸ φύσεως διαφερόντως τὴν περὶ τὰς ὀσμὰς αἴσθησιν, τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον τὴν ἀπὸ δικαιοσύνης καὶ τῆς ἄλλης ἀρετῆς ἀναδιδομένην ἡδεῖαν αὔραν ὁ παιδείας ἐραστὴς ἰχνηλατεῖ καὶ ποθεῖ μὲν ἐκείναις ἐντυχεῖν, ἐξ ὧν ἀναδίδοται τὸ θαυμασιώτατον γάνωμα τοῦτο, μὴ δυνάμενος δ’ ἐν κύκλῳ κενὴν περιάγει τὴν κεφαλήν, ὀσφραινόμενος αὐτὸ μόνον καλοκἀγαθίας καὶ σιτίων ἱερωτάτης κνίσσης· οὐ γὰρ ἀρνεῖται λίχνος ἐπιστήμης καὶ φρονήσεως εἶναι.
1:50μακάριοι μὲν οὖν οἷς ἐξεγένετο τῶν σοφίας φίλτρων ἀπόνασθαι καὶ τῶν θεωρημάτων καὶ δογμάτων αὐτῆς ἑστιαθῆναι καὶ ἐνευφρανθεῖσιν ἔτι διψῆν, ἄπληστον καὶ ἀκόρεστον ἐπιφερομένοις ἵμερον ἐπιστήμης.
Book 1, §§26–50
1:26Now what is my meaning in this statement? We know already that the body is divisible into three parts, and that it is capable of motion in six directions, inasmuch as it has three dimensions, in length, in depth, in breadth; and twice as many motions, namely six, the upward motion, the downward motion, that to the right, that to the left, the forward, and the backward motion. But, moreover, we are not ignorant that it is the vessel of the soul; and we are also aware that it is subject to the changes of being young, of decaying, of growing old, of dying, of undergoing dissolution.
1:27And with respect to the outward senses, we are not, so far as that is concerned, utterly dull and mutilated, but we are able to say that that also is divided into five divisions, and that there are appropriate organs for the development of each sense formed by nature; for instance, the eyes for seeing, the ears for hearing, the nostrils for smelling, and the other organs for the exercise of the respective senses to which they are adapted, and also that we may call these outward senses messengers of the mind which inform it of colours, and shapes, and sounds, and the peculiar differences of vapours, and flavours, and, in short, which describe to it all bodies, and all the distinctive qualities which exist in them. They also may be looked upon as body-guards of the soul, informing it of all that they see or hear; and if anything injurious attacks it from without, they foresee it, and guard against it, so that it may not enter by chance and unawares, and so become the cause of irremediable disaster to their mistress.
1:28Again, the voice does not entirely escape our comprehension; but we know that one voice is shrill and another deep; that one is tuneful and harmonious, and another dissonant and very unmusical; and again, one voice is more powerful, and another less so. And they differ also in ten thousand other particulars, in kind, in complexion, in distance, in combined and separate tension of the tones, in the symphonies of fourths, of fifths, and of the diapason.
1:29Moreover, there are some things which we know also with respect to that articulate voice which has been allotted to man alone of all animals, as, for instance, we know that it is emitted by the mind, that it receives its articulate distinctness in the mouth, that it is by the striking of the tongue that articulate utterance is impressed upon the tones of the voice, and which renders the uttered sound not only a bare, naked, useless noise, void of all characteristic, and that it discharges the office of a herald or interpreter towards the mind which suggests it.
1:30Now then is the fourth element which exists within us, the dominant mind, comprehensible to us in the same manner as these other divisions? Certainly not; for what do we think it to be in its essence? Do we look upon it as spirit, or as blood, or, in short, as any bodily substance! But it is not a substance, but must be pronounced incorporeal. Is it then a limit, or a species, or a number, or a continued act, or a harmony, or any existing thing whatever?
1:31Is it, the very first moment that we are born, infused into us from without, or is it some warm nature in us which is cooled by the air which is diffused around us, like a piece of iron which has been heated at a forge, and then being plunged into cold water, is by that process tempered and hardened? (And perhaps it is from the cooling process (ψύξις) to which it is thus submitted that the soul (ἡ ψυχή) derives its name.) What more shall we say? When we die, is it extinguished and destroyed together with our bodies? or does it continue to live a long time? or, thirdly, is it wholly incorruptible and immortal?
1:32Again, where, in what part does this mind lie hid? Has it received any settled habitation? For some men have dedicated to it our head, as the principal citadel, around which all the outward senses have their lairs; thinking it natural that its body-guards should be stationed near it, as near the palace of a mighty king. Some again contend earnestly in favour of the position which they assign it, believing that it is enshrined like a statue in the heart.
1:33Therefore now the fourth element is incomprehensible, in the world the heaven, in comparison of the nature of the earth, of the water, and of the air; and the mind in man, in comparison of the body and the outward sense, and the speech, which is the interpreter of the mind; may it not be the case also, that for this reason the fourth year is described as holy and praiseworthy in the sacred scriptures?
1:34For among created things, the heaven is holy in the world, in accordance with which body, the imperishable and indestructible natures revolve; and in man the mind is holy, being a sort of fragment of the Deity, and especially according to the statement of Moses, who says, "God breathed into his face the breath of life, and man became a living soul."
1:35And it appears to me, that it is not without reason that both these things are called praiseworthy; for these two things, the heaven and the mind, are the things which are able to utter, with all becoming dignity, the praises, and hymns, and glory, and beatitude of the Father who created them: for man has received an especial honour beyond all other animals, namely, that of ministering to the living God. And the heaven is always singing melodies, perfecting an all-musical harmony, in accordance with the motions of all the bodies which exist therein;
1:36of which, if the sound ever reached our ears, love, which could not be restrained, and frantic desires, and furious impetuosity, which could not be put an end to or pacified, would be engendered, and would compel us to give up even what is necessary, nourishing ourselves no longer like ordinary mortals on the meat and drink, which is received by means of our throat, but on the inspired songs of music in its highest perfection, as persons about to be made immortal through the medium of their ears: and it is said that Moses was an incorporeal hearer of these melodies, when he went for forty days, and an equal number of nights, without at all touching any bread or any water.
1:37Therefore the heaven, which is the archetypal organ of music, appears to have been arranged in a most perfect manner, for no other object except that the hymns sung to the honour of the Father of the universe, might be attuned in a musical manner; and we hear that virtue, that is to say, Leah, after the birth of her fourth son, was no longer able to bring forth any more, but restrained, or perhaps I should say, was restrained, as to her generative powers; for she found, I conceive, all her generative power dry and barren, after she had brought forth Judah, that is to say, "confession," the perfect fruit:
1:38and the phrase, "Leah desisted from bearing children," differs in no respect from the statement, that the children of Isaac found no water in the fourth well." Since it appears from both these figurative expressions, that every creature thirsts for God, by whom all their births take place, and from whom nourishment is bestowed to them when they are born.
1:39Perhaps therefore some petty cavilling critics will imagine that all this statement about the digging of the wells is a superfluous piece of prolixity on the part of the lawgiver: but those who deserve a larger classification, being citizens not of some petty state but of the wide world, being men of more perfect wisdom, will know well that the real question is not about the four wells, but about the parts of the universe that the men who are gifted with sight, and are fond of contemplation exercise their powers of investigation; namely, about the earth, the water, the air, and the heaven.
1:40And examining each of these matters with the most accurately refined conception, in three of them they have found some things within the reach of their comprehension; on which account they have given these names, injustice, enmity, and latitude to what they have discovered. But in the fourth, that is to say in heaven, they have found absolutely nothing whatever, which they could comprehend; as we explained a little time ago: for the fourth is found to be a well destitute of water, and dry; and for the reason above mentioned it is called a well.
1:41We will now investigate what comes next, and inquire what Charran is, and why the man who went up from the well came to it. Charran then, as it appears to me, is a sort of metropolis of the outward senses: and it is interpreted at one time a pit dug, at another time holes; one fact being intimated by both these names;
1:42for our bodies are in a manner dug out to furnish the organs of the outward senses, and each of the organs is a sort of hole for the corresponding outward sense in which it shelters itself as in a cave: when therefore any one goes up from the well which is called the well of the oath, as if he were leaving a harbour, he immediately does of necessity come to Charran: for it is a matter of necessity that the outward senses should receive one who comes on an emigration from that most excellent country of knowledge, unbounded as it is in extent, without any guide.
1:43For our soul is very often set in motion by its own self after it has put off the whole burden of the body, and has escaped from the multitude of the outward senses; and very often too, even while it is still clothed in them. Therefore by its own simple motion it has arrived at the comprehension of those things which are appreciable only by the intellect; and by the motion of the body, it has attained to an understanding of those things which are perceptible by the outward senses;
1:44therefore, if any one is unable altogether to associate with the mind alone, he then finds for himself a second refuge, namely, the external senses; and whoever fails in attaining to a comprehension of the things which are intelligible only by the intellect is immediately drawn over to the objects of the outward senses; for the second organ is always to the outward senses, in the case of those things which are not able to make a successful one as far as the dominant mind.
1:45But it is well for man not to grow old or to spend all his time in this course either, but rather, as if they were straying in a foreign country like sojourners, to be always seeking for second migration, and for a return to their native land. Therefore Laban, knowing absolutely nothing of either species or genus, or form, or conception, or of anything else whatever which is comprehended by the intellect alone, and depending solely on what lies externally visible, and such things as come under the notice of the eyes, and the ears, and the other hundred faculties, is thought worthy of Charran for his country, which Jacob, the lover of virtue, inhabits as a foreign land for a short time, always bearing in his recollection his return homewards;
1:46therefore his mother, perseverance, that is Rebecca, says to him, "Rise up and flee to Laban, my brother, to Charran, and dwell with him certain days." Do you not perceive then that the practiser of virtue will not endure to live permanently in the country of the outward senses, but only to remain there a few days and a short time, on account of the necessities of the body to which he is bound? But a longer time and an entire life is allotted to him in the city which is appreciable only by the intellect.
1:47In reference to which fact, also, it appears to me to be that his grandfather also, by name Abraham, so called from his knowledge, would not endure to remain any great length of time in Charran, for it is said in the scriptures that "Abraham was seventy-five years old when he departed from Charran;" although his father Terah, which name being interpreted means, "the investigation of a smell," lived there till the day of his death.
1:48Therefore it is expressly stated in the sacred scriptures that "Terah died in Charran," for he was only a reconnoitrer of virtue, not a citizen. And he availed himself of smells, and not of the enjoyments of food, as he was not able as yet to fill himself with wisdom, nor indeed even to get a taste of it, but only to smell it;
1:49for as it is said that those dogs which are calculated for hunting can by exerting their faculty of smell, find out the lurking places of their game at a great distance, being by nature rendered wonderfully acute as to the outward sense of smell; so in the same manner the lover of instruction tracks out the sweet breeze which is given forth by justice, and by any other virtue, and is eager to watch those qualities from which this most admirable source of delight proceeds, and while he is unable to do so he moves his head all round in a circle, smelling out nothing else, but seeking only for that most sacred scent of excellence and food, for he does not deny that he is eager for knowledge and wisdom.
1:50Blessed therefore are they to whom it has happened to enjoy the delights of wisdom, and to feast upon its speculations and doctrines, and even of the being cheered by them still to thirst for more, feeling an insatiable and increasing desire for knowledge.
Book 1, §§51–75
1:51δεύτερα δ’ οἴσονται, οἷς ἀπολαῦσαι μὲν οὐκ ἐξεγένετο τῆς ἱερᾶς τραπέζης, κνισσοῦν δὲ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ψυχάς· αὔραις γὰρ ἀρετῆς οὗτοι ζωπυρηθήσονται, καθάπερ τῶν καμνόντων οἱ παρειμένοι διὰ τὸ μὴ δύνασθαι τροφῇ χρῆσθαι τὰς εἰς ἀνάληψιν προσφέρονται ὀσμάς, ἃς ἰατρῶν παῖδες λιποθυμίας ἄκη σωτήρια προευτρεπίζονται.
1:52καταλιπὼν μέντοι τὴν Χαλδαίαν γῆν εἰς Χαρρὰν λέγεται μετανίστασθαι Θάρρα, τόν τε υἱὸν Ἀβραὰμ καὶ τοὺς ὁμογνίους τῆς οἰκίας ἐπαγόμενος, οὐχ ἵν’ ὡς παρὰ συγγραφέως ἱστορικοῦ μάθωμεν, ὅτι μετανάσται τινὲς ἐγένοντο, τὴν μὲν πατρῴαν γῆν καταλιπόντες, τὴν δὲ ξένην ὡς πατρίδα οἰκήσαντες, ἀλλ’ ὑπὲρ τοῦ μάθημα βιωφελέστατον καὶ ἁρμόττον ἀνθρώπῳ μὴ ἀμεληθῆναι. τί δὲ τοῦτό ἐστι;
1:53Χαλδαῖοι μὲν ἀστρονομοῦσιν, οἱ δὲ τῆς Χαρρὰν πολῖται περὶ τὸν τῶν αἰσθήσεων τόπον πραγματεύονται. φησὶν οὖν ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος τῷ κατασκόπῳ τῶν τῆς φύσεως πραγμάτων· τί περὶ ἡλίου ζητεῖς, εἰ ποδιαῖός ἐστιν, εἰ τῆς γῆς μείζων ἁπάσης, εἰ πολλαπλάσιος αὐτῆς; τί δὲ περὶ φωτισμῶν σελήνης, εἰ νόθον ἔχει φέγγος, εἰ γνησίῳ μόνῳ χρῆται; τί δὲ περὶ τῆς τῶν ἄλλων ἀστέρων φύσεως ἢ περιφορᾶς ἢ συμπαθείας πρός τε ἀλλήλους καὶ τἀπίγεια;
1:54τί δὲ βαίνων ἐπὶ γῆς ὑπὲρ νεφέλας πηδᾷς; τί δ’ ἅπτεσθαι τῶν ἐν αἰθέρι φῂς δύνασθαι προσερριζωμένος χέρσῳ; τί δὲ περὶ τῶν ἀτεκμάρτων τεκμαίρεσθαι τολμᾷς; τί δὲ πολυπραγμονεῖς ἃ μή σε δεῖ, τὰ μετέωρα; τί δὲ τὴν ἐν τοῖς μαθήμασιν εὑρεσιλογίαν ἄχρις οὐρανοῦ τείνεις; τί δ’ ἀστρονομεῖς μετεωρολεσχῶν; μὴ τὰ ὑπὲρ σὲ καὶ ἄνω, ὦ οὗτος, ἀλλὰ τὰ ἐγγὺς σαυτοῦ κατανόησον, μᾶλλον δὲ σαυτὸν ἀκολακεύτως ἐρεύνησον.
1:55πῶς οὖν ἐρευνήσεις; ἴθι νοερῶς εἰς Χαρρὰν τὴν ὀρυκτήν, τὰς τρώγλας καὶ ὀπὰς τοῦ σώματος, καὶ ἐπίσκεψαι ὀφθαλμούς, ὦτα, ῥῖνας, τὰ ἄλλα ὅσα καὶ αἰσθήσεως ὄργανα, καὶ φιλοσόφησον ἀναγκαιοτάτην καὶ πρεπωδεστάτην φιλοσοφίαν ἀνθρώπῳ, ζητῶν, τί ὅρασις, τί ἀκοή, τί γεῦσις, τί ὄσφρησις, τί ἁφή, τί καὶ συνόλως αἴσθησις· κἄπειτα τί τὸ ὁρᾶν καὶ πῶς ὁρᾷς, τί τὸ ἀκούειν καὶ πῶς ἀκούεις, τί τὸ ὀσφραίνεσθαι ἢ γεύεσθαι ἢ ἅπτεσθαι καὶ πῶς ἕκαστον αὐτῶν εἴωθε γίγνεσθαι.
1:56πρὶν δὲ τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον καλῶς ἐπεσκέφθαι, τὸν τοῦ παντὸς ἐξετάζειν οὐχ ὑπερβολὴ μανίας; καὶ οὔπω σοι μεῖζον ἐπίταγμα ἐπιτάττω, τὴν σαυτοῦ ψυχὴν ἰδεῖν καὶ τὸν νοῦν, ἐφ’ ᾧ μέγα φρονεῖς· καταλαβεῖν γὰρ αὐτὸν οὔποτε δυνήσῃ.
1:57ἀνάβαινε νῦν εἰς οὐρανὸν καὶ καταλαζονεύου περὶ τῶν ἐκεῖ, μήπω δεδυνημένος γνῶναι κατὰ τὸ ποιητικὸν γράμμα ὅττί τοι ἐν μεγάροισι κακόν τ’ ἀγαθόν τε τέτυκται, καταγαγὼν δ’ ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ τὸν κατάσκοπον καὶ ἀντισπάσας ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκεῖ ζητήσεως γνῶθι σαυτόν, εἶτα καὶ τοῦτ’ ἐπιμελῶς ἐκπόνησον, ἵνα τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης εὐδαιμονίας ἐπιλάχῃς.
1:58τὸν τρόπον τοῦτον Θάρρα μὲν Ἑβραῖοι, Σωκράτην δὲ Ἕλληνες ὀνομάζουσι· καὶ γὰρ ἐκεῖνον ἐγγηράσαι φασὶν τῇ περὶ τοῦ γνῶθι σαυτὸν ἀκριβεστάτῃ σκέψει, μηδὲν ἔξω τῶν καθ’ ἑαυτὸν φιλοσοφοῦντα. ἀλλ’ ὁ μὲν ἄνθρωπος ἦν, Θάρρα δ’ αὐτὸς ὁ λόγος ὁ περὶ τοῦ γνῶναί τινα ἑαυτὸν προκείμενος οἷα δένδρον εὐερνέστατον, ἵν’ ἔχοιεν εὐμαρῶς οἱ φιλάρετοι τὸν περὶ ἠθοποιίαν δρεπόμενοι καρπὸν σωτηρίου καὶ ἡδίστης ἐμπίπλασθαι τροφῆς.
1:59τοιοῦτοι μὲν ἡμῖν οἱ φρονήσεως κατάσκοποι, τῶν δὲ ἀθλητῶν καὶ ἀγωνιστῶν αὐτῆς αἱ φύσεις τελειότεραι· δικαιοῦσι γὰρ οὗτοι τὸν περὶ τῶν αἰσθήσεων σύμπαντα λόγον ἀκριβῶς καταμαθόντες ἐπί τι μεῖζον ἕτερον χωρεῖν θεώρημα, καταλιπόντες τὰς αἰσθήσεως ὀπάς, αἳ Χαρρὰν ὀνομάζονται.
1:60τούτων ἐστὶν ὁ ἐπιδόσεις καὶ βελτιώσεις πρὸς ἐπιστήμης ἄκρας ἀνάληψιν ἐσχηκὼς Ἀβραάμ· ὅτε γὰρ μάλιστα ἔγνω, τότε μάλιστα ἀπέγνω ἑαυτόν, ἵνα τοῦ πρὸς ἀλήθειαν ὄντος εἰς ἀκριβῆ γνῶσιν ἔλθῃ. καὶ πέφυκεν οὕτως ἔχειν· ὁ λίαν καταλαβὼν ἑαυτὸν λίαν ἀπέγνωκε τὴν ἐν πᾶσι τοῦ γενητοῦ σαφῶς προλαβὼν οὐδένειαν, ὁ δ’ ἀπογνοὺς ἑαυτὸν γινώσκει τὸν ὄντα.
1:61Τίς μὲν οὖν ἐστιν ἡ Χαρρὰν καὶ διὰ τί ὁ ἀπολείπων τὸ τοῦ ὅρκου φρέαρ εἰς αὐτὴν ἔρχεται, δεδήλωται. σκεπτέον δὲ τὸ τρίτον καὶ ἀκόλουθον, τίς ὁ τόπος, ᾧ ὑπαντᾷ· λέγεται γάρ, ὅτι „ἀπήντησε τόπῳ“ (Gen. 28, 11).
1:62τριχῶς δὲ ἐπινοεῖται τόπος, ἅπαξ μὲν χώρα ὑπὸ σώματος πεπληρωμένη, κατὰ δεύτερον δὲ τρόπον ὁ θεῖος λόγος, ὃν ἐκπεπλήρωκεν ὅλον δι’ ὅλων ἀσωμάτοις δυνάμεσιν αὐτὸς ὁ θεός. „εἶδον“ γάρ φησι „τὸν τόπον οὗ εἱστήκει ὁ θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ“ (Exod. 24, 10), ἐν ᾧ μόνῳ καὶ ἱερουργεῖν ἐφῆκεν ἀλλαχόθι κωλύσας· διείρηται γὰρ ἀναβαίνειν εἰς τὸν τόπον, ὃν ἂν ἐκλέξηται κύριος ὁ θεός, κἀκεῖ θύειν τὰ ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ τὰ σωτήρια καὶ τὰς ἄλλας ἀμώμους θυσίας ἀνάγειν (Deut. 12,5 ss.).
1:63κατὰ δὲ τρίτον σημαινόμενον αὐτὸς ὁ θεὸς καλεῖται τόπος τῷ περιέχειν μὲν τὰ ὅλα, περιέχεσθαι δὲ πρὸς μηδενὸς ἁπλῶς, καὶ τῷ καταφυγὴν τῶν συμπάντων αὐτὸν εἶναι, καὶ ἐπειδήπερ αὐτός ἐστι χώρα ἑαυτοῦ, κεχωρηκὼς ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμφερόμενος μόνῳ ἑαυτῷ.
1:64ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν οὔκ εἰμι τόπος, ἀλλ’ ἐν τόπῳ, καὶ ἕκαστον τῶν ὄντων ὁμοίως· τὸ γὰρ περιεχόμενον διαφέρει τοῦ περιέχοντος, τὸ δὲ θεῖον ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς περιεχόμενον ἀναγκαίως ἐστὶν αὐτὸ τόπος ἑαυτοῦ. μαρτυρεῖ δέ μοι λόγιον τὸ χρησθὲν ἐπὶ Ἀβραὰμ τόδε· „ἦλθεν εἰς τὸν τόπον ὃν εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ θεός· καὶ ἀναβλέψας τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς εἶδε τὸν τόπον μακρόθεν“ (Gen. 22,3. 4). ὁ ἐλθὼν εἰς τὸν τόπον, εἰπέ μοι, μακρόθεν αὐτὸν εἶδεν;
1:65ἀλλὰ μήποτε δυεῖν πραγμάτων ἐστὶν ὁμωνυμία διαφερόντων, ὧν τὸ μὲν ἕτερον θεῖός ἐστι λόγος, τὸ δὲ ἕτερον ὁ πρὸ τοῦ λόγου θεός.
1:66ὁ δὴ ξεναγηθεὶς ὑπὸ σοφίας εἰς τὸν πρότερον ἀφικνεῖται τόπον, εὑράμενος τῆς ἀρεσκείας κεφαλὴν καὶ τέλος τὸν θεῖον λόγον, ἐν ᾧ γενόμενος οὐ φθάνει πρὸς τὸν κατὰ τὸ εἶναι θεὸν ἐλθεῖν, ἀλλ’ αὐτὸν ὁρᾷ μακρόθεν· μᾶλλον δὲ οὐδὲ πόρρωθεν αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον θεωρεῖν ἱκανός ἐστιν, ἀλλὰ τὸ μακρὰν τὸν θεὸν εἶναι πάσης γενέσεως αὐτὸ μόνον ὁρᾷ καὶ τὸ πορρωτάτω τὴν κατάληψιν αὐτοῦ πάσης ἀνθρωπίνης διανοίας διῳκίσθαι.
1:67μήποτε μέντοι γε οὐδὲ τόπον νῦν ἀλληγορῶν ἐπὶ τοῦ αἰτίου παρείληφεν, ἀλλ’ ἔστι τὸ δηλούμενον τοιοῦτον· „ἦλθεν εἰς τὸν τόπον, καὶ ἀναβλέψας τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς εἶδεν“ αὐτὸν τὸν τόπον, εἰς ὃν ἦλθε, μακρὰν ὄντα τοῦ ἀκατονομάστου καὶ ἀρρήτου καὶ κατὰ πάσας ἰδέας ἀκαταλήπτου θεοῦ.
1:68τούτων προδιωρισμένων, ὅταν εἰς Χαρράν, τὴν αἴσθησιν, ἔλθῃ ὁ ἀσκητής, „ὑπαντᾷ τόπῳ“ (Gen. 28,11), οὔτε τῷ ἐκπεπληρωμένῳ ὑπὸ σώματος θνητοῦ — μετέχουσι γὰρ αὐτοῦ πάντες οἱ γηγενεῖς ἐκπεπληρωκότες χώραν καὶ τόπον τινὰ κατὰ τἀναγκαῖον ἐπέχοντες — οὔτε τῷ τρίτῳ καὶ ἀρίστῳ, οὗ μόλις ἔννοιαν λαβεῖν ἦν ἂν ἐπὶ τοῦ φρέατος ποιούμενον τὰς διατριβάς, ὃ προσηγορεύετο ὅρκος, ᾧ τὸ αὐτομαθὲς γένος, Ἰσαάκ, ἐνδιαιτᾶται μηδέποτε τῆς πρὸς θεὸν πίστεως καὶ ἀφανοῦς ὑπολήψεως ἀφιστάμενον, ἀλλὰ τῷ μέσῳ λόγῳ θείῳ, τὰ ἄριστα ὑφηγουμένῳ καὶ ὅσα πρόσφορα τοῖς καιροῖς ἀναδιδάσκοντι.
1:69οὐ γὰρ ἀξιῶν ὁ θεὸς εἰς αἴσθησιν ἔρχεσθαι τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ λόγους ἐπικουρίας ἕνεκα τῶν φιλαρέτων ἀποστέλλει· οἱ δ’ ἰατρεύουσι καὶ ἐκνοσηλεύουσι τὰ ψυχῆς ἀρρωστήματα, παραινέσεις ἱερὰς ὥσπερ νόμους ἀκινήτους τιθέντες καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ τούτων γυμνάσια καλοῦντες καὶ τρόπον ἀλειπτῶν ἰσχὺν καὶ δύναμιν καὶ ῥώμην ἀνανταγώνιστον ἐμφύοντες.
1:70δεόντως οὖν εἰς αἴσθησιν ἐλθὼν οὐκέτι θεῷ, λόγῳ δ’ ὑπαντᾷ θεοῦ, καθὰ καὶ ὁ πάππος αὐτοῦ τῆς σοφίας Ἀβραάμ. λέγεται γάρ· „ἀπῆλθε κύριος, ὡς ἐπαύσατο λαλῶν τῷ Ἀβραάμ, καὶ Ἀβραὰμ ἀπέστρεψεν εἰς τὸν τόπον αὐτοῦ“ (Gen. 18,33)· δι’ οὗ συνάγεται τὸ λόγοις τοιούτοις ἐντυγχάνειν ἱεροῖς, ὧν ὁ πρὸ τῶν ὅλων θεὸς ἀπήλλακται, μηκέτι τὰς ἀφ’ αὑτοῦ τείνων φαντασίας, ἀλλὰ τὰς ἀπὸ τῶν μεθ’ αὑτὸν δυνάμεων.
1:71ὑπερφυέστατα δ’ ἔχει τὸ μὴ φάναι ἐλθεῖν εἰς τὸν τόπον, ἀλλ’ ἀπαντῆσαι τόπῳ· ἑκούσιον μὲν γὰρ τὸ ἔρχεσθαι, τὸ δ’ ἀπαντᾶν πολλάκις ἀκούσιον, ἵν’ ἐξαπιναίως ὁ θεῖος λόγος ἐπιφαινόμενος ἀπροσδόκητον χαρὰν ἐλπίδος μείζονα ἐρήμῃ ψυχῇ συνοδοιπορεῖν μέλλων προτείνῃ. καὶ γὰρ Μωυσῆς „ἐξάγει τὸν λαὸν εἰς τὴν συνάντησιν τοῦ θεοῦ“ (Exod. 19, 17), σαφῶς εἰδὼς ἐρχόμενον αὐτὸν ἀοράτως πρὸς τὰς ποθούσας ψυχὰς ἐντυχεῖν αὐτῷ.
1:72Τὴν δ’ αἰτίαν ἐπιφέρει, δι’ ἣν τόπῳ ὑπήντησεν· „ἔδυ“ γάρ φησιν „ὁ ἥλιος“ (Gen. 28, 11), οὐχ ὁ φαινόμενος οὗτος, ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἀοράτου καὶ μεγίστου θεοῦ περιφεγγέστατον καὶ περιαυγέστατον φῶς. τοῦθ’ ὅταν μὲν ἐπιλάμψῃ διανοίᾳ, τὰ δεύτερα λόγων δύεται φέγγη, πολὺ δὲ μᾶλλον οἱ αἰσθητοὶ τόποι πάντες ἐπισκιάζονται· ὅταν δ’ ἑτέρωσε χωρήσῃ, πάντ’ εὐθὺς ἀνίσχει καὶ ἀνατέλλει.
1:73μὴ θαυμάσῃς δέ, εἰ ὁ ἥλιος κατὰ τοὺς τῆς ἀλληγορίας κανόνας ἐξομοιοῦται τῷ πατρὶ καὶ ἡγεμόνι τῶν συμπάντων· θεῷ γὰρ ὅμοιον πρὸς ἀλήθειαν μὲν οὐδέν, ἃ δὲ δόξῃ νενόμισται, δύο μόνα ἐστίν, ἀόρατόν τε καὶ ὁρατόν, ψυχὴ μὲν ἀόρατον, ὁρατὸν δὲ ἥλιος.
1:74τὴν μὲν οὖν ψυχῆς ἐμφέρειαν δεδήλωκεν ἐν ἑτέροις εἰπών· „ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν ἄνθρωπον, κατ’ εἰκόνα θεοῦ ἐποίησεν αὐτόν“ (Gen. 1,27), καὶ ἐν τῷ κατὰ ἀνδροφόνων τεθέντι νόμῳ πάλιν· „ὁ ἐκχέων αἷμα ἀνθρώπου ἀντὶ τοῦ αἵματος αὐτοῦ ἐκχυθήσεται, ὅτι ἐν εἰκόνι θεοῦ ἐποίησα τὸν ἄνθρωπον“ (Gen. 9,6), τὴν δὲ ἡλίου διὰ συμβόλων μεμήνυκε.
1:75ῥᾴδιον δὲ καὶ ἄλλως ἐξ ἐπιλογισμοῦ τοῦτο κατιδεῖν, ἐπειδὴ πρῶτον μὲν ὁ θεὸς φῶς ἐστι — „κύριος γὰρ φωτισμός μου καὶ σωτήρ μου“ ἐν ὕμνοις ᾄδεται (Psalm. 26, 1) — καὶ οὐ μόνον φῶς, ἀλλὰ καὶ παντὸς ἑτέρου φωτὸς ἀρχέτυπον, μᾶλλον δὲ παντὸς ἀρχετύπου πρεσβύτερον καὶ ἀνώτερον, λόγον ἔχον παραδείγματος. τὸ μὲν γὰρ παράδειγμα ὁ πληρέστατος ἦν αὐτοῦ λόγος, φῶς — „εἶπε“ γάρ φησιν „ὁ θεός· γενέσθω φῶς“ (Gen. 1,3) —, αὐτὸς δὲ οὐδενὶ τῶν γεγονότων ὅμοιος.
Book 1, §§51–75
1:51And those will obtain the second place who are not allured indeed to enjoy the sacred table, but who nevertheless refresh their souls with its odours; for they will be excited by the fragrances of virtue like those languid invalids who, because they are not as yet able to take solid food, nevertheless feed on the smell of such viands as the sons of the physicians prepare as a sort of remedy for their impotency.
1:52Therefore, having left the land of the Chaldaeans, Terah is said to have migrated to Charran; bringing with him his son Abraham and the rest of his household who agreed with him in opinion, not in order that we might read in the account of the historical chronicles that some men had become emigrants, leaving their native country and becoming inhabitants of a foreign land as if it were their own country, but in order that a lesson of the greatest importance to life and full of wisdom, and adapted to man alone, might not be neglected.
1:53And what is the lesson? The Chaldaeans are great astronomers, and the inhabitants of Charran occupy themselves with the topics relating to the external senses. Therefore the sacred account says to the investigator of the things of nature, why are you inquiring about the sun, and asking whether he is a foot broad, whether he is greater than the whole earth put together, or whether he is even many times as large? And why are you investigating the causes of the light of the moon, and whether it has a borrowed light, or one which proceeds solely from itself? Why, again, do you seek to understand the nature of the rest of the stars, of their motion, of their sympathy with one another, and even with earthly things?
1:54And why, while walking upon the earth do you soar above the clouds? And why, while rooted in the solid land, do you affirm that you can reach the things in the sky? And why do you endeavour to form conjectures about matters which cannot be ascertained by conjecture? And why do you busy yourself about sublime subjects which you ought not to meddle with? And why do you extend your desire to make discoveries in mathematical science as far as the heaven? And why do you devote yourself to astronomy, and talk about nothing but high subjects? My good man, do not trouble your head about things beyond the ocean, but attend only to what is near you; and be content rather to examine yourself without flattery.
1:55How, then, will you find out what you want, even if you are successful? Go with full exercise of your intellect to Charran, that is, to the trench which is dug, into the holes and caverns of the body, and investigate the eyes, the ears, the nostrils, and the other organs of the external senses; and if you wish to be a philosopher, study philosophically that branch which is the most indispensable and at the same time the most becoming to a man, and inquire what the faculty of sight is, what hearing is, what taste, what smell, what touch is, in a word, what is external sense; then seek to understand what it is to see, and how you see; what it is to hear, and how you hear; what it is to smell, or to taste, or to touch, and how each of these operations is ordinarily effected.
1:56But is it not the very extravagance of insane folly to seek to comprehend the dwelling of the universe, before your own private dwelling is accurately known to you? But I do not as yet lay the more important and extensive injunction upon you to make yourself acquainted with your own soul and mind, of the knowledge of which you are so proud; for in reality you will never be able to comprehend it.
1:57Mount up then to heaven, and talk arrogantly about the things which exist there, before you are as yet able to comprehend, according to the words of the poet, "All the good and all the evil Which thy own abode contains;" and, bringing down that messenger of yours from heaven, and dragging him down from his search into matters existing there, become acquainted with yourself, and carefully and diligently labour to arrive at such happiness as is permitted to man.
1:58Now this disposition the Hebrews called Terah, and the Greeks Socrates; for they say also that the latter grew old in the most accurate study by which he could hope to know himself, never once directing his philosophical speculations to the subjects beyond himself. But he was really a man; but Terah is the principle itself which is proposed to every one, according to which each man should know himself, like a tree full of good branches, in order that these persons who are fond of virtue might without difficulty gather the fruit of pure morality, and thus become filled with the most delightful and saving food.
1:59Such, then, are those men who reconnoitre the quarters of wisdom for us; but those who are actually her athletes, and who practise her exercises, are more perfect. For these men think fit to learn with complete accuracy the whole question connected with the external senses, and after having done so, then to proceed to another and more important speculation, leaving all consideration of the holes of the body which they call Charran.
1:60Of the number of these men is Abraham, who attained to great progress and improvement in the comprehension of complete knowledge; for when he knew most, then he most completely renounced himself in order to attain to the accurate knowledge of him who was the truly living God. And, indeed, this is a very natural course of events; for he who completely understands himself does also very much, because of his thorough appreciation of it, renounce the universal nothingness of the creature; and he who renounces himself learns to comprehend the living God.
1:61We have now, then, explained what Charran is, and why he who left the well of the oath came thither. We must now consider the third point which comes next in order, namely, what the place is to which this man came; for it is said, "He met him in the place."
1:62Now place is considered in three ways: firstly, as a situation filled by a body; secondly, as the divine word which God himself has filled wholly and entirely with incorporeal powers; for says the scripture, "I have seen the place in which the God of Israel stood," in which alone he permitted his prophet to perform sacrifice to him, forbidding him to do so in other places. For he is ordered to go up into the place which the Lord God shall choose, and there to sacrifice burnt offerings and sacrifices for salvation, and to bring other victims also without spot.
1:63According to the third signification, God himself is called a place, from the fact of his surrounding the universe, and being surrounded himself by nothing whatever, and from the fact of his being the refuge of all persons, and since he himself is his own district, containing himself and resembling himself alone.
1:64I, indeed, am not a place, but I am in a place, and every existing being is so in a similar manner. So that which is surrounded differs from that which surrounds it; but the Deity, being surrounded by nothing, is necessarily itself its own place. And there is an evidence in support of my view of the matter in the following sacred oracle delivered with respect to Abraham: "He came unto the place of which the Lord God had told him: and having looked up with his eyes, he saw the place afar off."
1:65Tell me, now, did he who had come to the place see it afar off? Or perhaps it is but an identical expression for two different things, one of which is the divine world, and the other, God, who existed before the world.
1:66But he who was conducted by wisdom comes to the former place, having found that the main part and end of propitiation is the divine word, in which he who is fixed does not as yet attain to such a height as to penetrate to the essence of God, but sees him afar off; or, rather, I should say, he is not able even to behold him afar off, but he only discerns this fact, that God is at a distance from every creature, and that any comprehension of him is removed to a great distance from all human intellect.
1:67Perhaps, however, the historian, by this allegorical form of expression, does not here mean by his expression, "place," the Cause of all things; but the idea which he intends to convey may be something of this sort; —he came to the place, and looking up with his eyes he saw the very place to which he had come, which was a very long way from the God who may not be named nor spoken of, and who is in every way incomprehensible.
1:68These things, then, being defined as a necessary preliminary, when the practiser of virtue comes to Charran, the outward sense, he does not "meet" the place, nor that place either which is filled by a mortal body; for all those who are born of the dust, and who occupy any place whatever, and who do of necessity fill some position, partake of that; nor the third and most excellent kind of place, of which it was scarcely possible for that man to form an idea who made his abode at the well which was entitled the "well of the oath," where the self-taught race, Isaac, abides, who never abandons his faith in God and his invisible comprehension of him, but who keeps to the intermediate divine word, which affords him the best suggestions, and teaches him everything which is suitable to the times.
1:69For God, not condescending to come down to the external senses, sends his own words or angels for the sake of giving assistance to those who love virtue. But they attend like physicians to the diseases of the soul, and apply themselves to heal them, offering sacred recommendations like sacred laws, and inviting men to practise the duties inculcated by them, and, like the trainers of wrestlers, implanting in their pupils strength, and power, and irresistible vigour.
1:70Very properly, therefore, when he has arrived at the external sense, he is represented no longer as meeting God, but only the divine word, just as his grandfather Abraham, the model of wisdom, did; for the scripture tells us, "The Lord departed when he had finished conversing with Abraham, and Abraham returned to his place." From which expression it is inferred, that he also met with the sacred words from which God, the father of the universe, had previously departed, no longer displaying visions from himself but only those which proceed from his subordinate powers.
1:71And it is with exceeding beauty and propriety that it is said, not that he came to the place, but that he met the place: for to come is voluntary, but to meet is very often involuntary; so that the divine Word appearing on a sudden, supplies an unexpected joy, greater than could have been hoped, inasmuch as it is about to travel in company with the solitary soul; for Moses also "brings forward the people to a meeting with God," well knowing that he comes invisibly towards those souls who have a longing to meet with him.
1:72And he subsequently alleges a reason why he "met the place;" for, says he, "the sun was set." Not meaning the sun which appears to us, but the most brilliant and radiant light of the invisible and Almighty God. When this light shines upon the mind, the inferior beams of words (that is of angels) set. And much more are all the places perceptible by the external senses overshadowed; but when he departs in a different direction, then they all rise and shine.
1:73And do not wonder if, according to the rules of allegorical description, the sun is likened to the Father and Governor of the universe; for in reality nothing is like unto God; but those things which by the vain opinion of men are thought to be so, are only two things, one invisible and the other visible; the soul being the invisible thing, and the sun the visible one.
1:74Now he has shown the similitude of the soul in another passage, where he says, "God made man, in the image of God created he him." And again, in the law enacted against homicides, he says, "Whoso sheddeth man’s blood, by man shall his blood be shed in requital for that blood, because in the image of God did I make him." But the likeness of the sun he only indicates by symbols.
1:75And it is easy otherwise by means of argument to perceive this, since God is the first light, "For the Lord is my light and my Saviour," is the language of the Psalms; and not only the light, but he is also the archetypal pattern of every other light, or rather he is more ancient and more sublime than even the archetypal model, though he is spoken of as the model; for the real model was his own most perfect word, the light, and he himself is like to no created thing.
Book 1, §§76–100
1:76ἔπειθ’ ὡς ἥλιος ἡμέραν καὶ νύκτα διακρίνει, οὕτως φησὶ Μωυσῆς τὸν θεὸν φῶς καὶ σκότος διατειχίσαι· „διεχώρισε γὰρ ὁ θεὸς ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ φωτὸς καὶ ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ σκότους“ (Gen. 1,4)· ἄλλως τε ὡς ἥλιος ἀνατείλας τὰ κεκρυμμένα τῶν σωμάτων ἐπιδείκνυται, οὕτως καὶ ὁ θεὸς τὰ πάντα γεννήσας οὐ μόνον εἰς τοὐμφανὲς ἤγαγεν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἃ πρότερον οὐκ ἦν, ἐποίησεν, οὐ δημιουργὸς μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ κτίστης αὐτὸς ὤν.
1:77λέγεται δὲ πολλαχῶς κατὰ τὸν ἱερὸν λόγον ἐν ὑπονοίαις ἥλιος, ἅπαξ μὲν ὁ ἀνθρώπινος νοῦς, ὃν οἰκοδομοῦσιν ὡς πόλιν καὶ κατασκευάζουσιν οἱ γένεσιν πρὸ τοῦ ἀγενήτου θεραπεύειν ἀναγκαζόμενοι, ἐφ’ ὧν εἴρηται ὅτι „ᾠκοδόμησαν πόλεις ὀχυρὰς τῷ Φαραώ, τήν τε Πειθώ“, τὸν λόγον ᾧ τὸ πείθειν ἀνάκειται, „καὶ Ῥαμεσσή“, τὴν αἴσθησιν, ὑφ’ ἧς ὥσπερ ὑπὸ σέων ἡ ψυχὴ διεσθίεται — ἑρμηνεύεται γὰρ σεισμὸς σητός —, „καὶ τὴν Ὤν“, τὸν νοῦν, ἣν Ἡλίου πόλιν ὠνόμασεν (Exod. 1,11), ἐπειδὴ καθάπερ ἥλιος τοῦ παντὸς ἡμῶν ὄγκου τὴν ἡγεμονίαν ἀνῆπται καὶ τὰς αὑτοῦ δυνάμεις ὥσπερ ἀκτῖνας εἰς ὅλον τείνει.
1:78τὸν δὲ ἱερέα καὶ θεραπευτὴν τοῦ νοῦ πενθερὸν ἐπιγράφεται πᾶς ὁ τὴν τοῦ σώματος πολιτείαν ἀναψάμενος, ὄνομα Ἰωσήφ. „ἔδωκε“ γάρ φησιν „αὐτῷ τὴν Ἀσενὲθ θυγατέρα Πετεφρῆ ἱερέως Ἡλίου πόλεως“ (Gen. 41,45).
1:79δεύτερον δὲ ἥλιον καλεῖ συμβολικῶς τὴν αἴσθησιν, ἐπειδὴ τὰ αἰσθητὰ πάντα δείκνυται διανοίᾳ. περὶ ἧς λελάληκεν ὧδε· „ἀνέτειλεν ὁ ἥλιος αὐτῷ, ἡνίκα παρῆλθε τὸ εἶδος τοῦ θεοῦ“ (Gen. 32, 31)· τῷ γὰρ ὄντι ταῖς ἱερωτάταις ἰδέαις καὶ ὡς ἂν εἰκόσιν ἀσωμάτοις ὅταν μηκέτι δυνώμεθα συνδιατρίβειν, ἀλλ’ ἑτέρωσε τρεπόμενοι μεταχωρήσωμεν, ἄλλῳ φωτὶ τῷ κατὰ αἴσθησιν χρώμεθα σκότους πρὸς τὸν ὑγιῆ λόγον οὐδὲν ἁπλῶς διαφέροντι·
1:80ὅπερ ἀνατεῖλαν ὅρασιν μὲν καὶ ἀκοήν, ἔτι δὲ γεῦσιν καὶ ὄσφρησιν καὶ ἁφὴν ὥσπερ κοιμωμένας ἀνήγειρε, φρόνησιν δὲ καὶ δικαιοσύνην ἐπιστήμην τε καὶ σοφίαν ἐγρηγορυίας εἰς ὕπνον ἔτρεψεν.
1:81οὗ χάριν ἁγνεύειν οὐδένα πρὸ ἑσπέρας φησὶν ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος (Lev. 11,24 al.) δύνασθαι, τῆς διανοίας ὑπὸ τῶν κατ’ αἴσθησιν κινήσεων ἔτι παρευημερουμένης. ἄφυκτον δὲ καὶ τοῖς ἱερεῦσι νόμον ἐν ταὐτῷ καὶ γνώμην ἀποφαινόμενος τίθησιν, ἐπειδὰν λέγῃ· „Οὐκ ἔδεται ἀπὸ τῶν ἁγίων, ἐὰν μὴ λούσηται τὸ σῶμα ὕδατι καὶ δύῃ ὁ ἥλιος καὶ γένηται καθαρός“ (Lev. 22, 6. 7).
1:82δηλοῖ γὰρ σαφέστατα διὰ τούτων, ὅτι εὐαγὴς εἰσάπαν οὐδείς ἐστιν, ὡς ταῖς ἁγίαις καὶ ἱεροπρεπέσι χρῆσθαι τελεταῖς, ᾧ τὰς αἰσθητὰς τοῦ θνητοῦ βίου λαμπρότητας ἔτι τετιμῆσθαι συμβέβηκεν. εἰ δέ τις αὐτὰς οὐκ ἀποδέχεται, κατὰ τὸ ἀκόλουθον τῷ φρονήσεως ἐπιλάμπεται φέγγει, δι’ οὗ δυνήσεται τὰς τῶν κενῶν δοξῶν ἐκνίπτεσθαι καὶ ἀπολούεσθαι κηλῖδας.
1:83ἢ τὸν ἥλιον αὐτὸν οὐχ ὁρᾷς, ὅτι τἀναντία καὶ ἀνατέλλων καὶ δυόμενος ἐργάζεται; ἐπειδὰν γὰρ ἀνίσχῃ, τὰ μὲν κατὰ γῆν ἅπαντα περιλάμπεται, τὰ δὲ κατ’ οὐρανὸν ἀποκρύπτεται· δύντος δ’ ἔμπαλιν οἱ μὲν ἀστέρες προφαίνονται, τὰ δὲ περίγεια συσκιάζεται.
1:84τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον καὶ ἐν ἡμῖν, ὅταν μὲν τὸ τῶν αἰσθήσεων φέγγος ὡς ἥλιος ἀνατείλῃ, τὰς ὀλυμπίους καὶ οὐρανίους ὡς ἀληθῶς ἐπιστήμας κρύπτεσθαι συμβέβηκεν· ὅταν δὲ πρὸς δυσμὰς γένηται, τὰς ἀστεροειδεστάτας καὶ θειοτάτας ἀναφαίνεσθαι ἀρετῶν αὐγάς, ὅτε καὶ καθαρὸς ὁ νοῦς ὑπὸ μηδενὸς κρυπτόμενος αἰσθητοῦ γίνεται.
1:85κατὰ δὲ τὸ τρίτον σημαινόμενον ἥλιον καλεῖ τὸν θεῖον λόγον, τὸ τοῦ κατ’ οὐρανὸν περιπολοῦντος, ὡς πρότερον ἐλέχθη, παράδειγμα, ἐφ’ οὗ λέγεται· „ὁ ἥλιος ἐξῆλθεν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ Λὼτ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς Σηγώρ, καὶ κύριος ἔβρεξεν ἐπὶ Σόδομα καὶ Γόμορρα θεῖον καὶ πῦρ“ (Gen. 19, 23. 24).
1:86ὁ γὰρ τοῦ θεοῦ λόγος, ὅταν ἐπὶ τὸ γεῶδες ἡμῶν σύστημα ἀφίκηται, τοῖς μὲν ἀρετῆς συγγενέσι καὶ πρὸς αὐτὴν ἀποκλίνουσιν ἀρήγει καὶ βοηθεῖ, ὡς καταφυγὴν καὶ σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς πορίζειν παντελῆ, τοῖς δὲ ἀντιπάλοις ὄλεθρον καὶ φθορὰν ἀνίατον ἐπιπέμπει.
1:87λέγεται δὲ κατὰ τέταρτον σημαινόμενον ἥλιος μὲν αὐτὸς ὁ τῶν ὅλων ἡγεμών, ὡς εἶπον ἤδη, δι’ οὗ τὰ ἀνίατα τῶν ἁμαρτημάτων ἀνακαλύπτεται συσκιάζεσθαι δοκοῦντα·
1:88πάντα γὰρ ὡς δυνατά, οὕτως καὶ γνώριμα θεῷ. παρὸ καὶ τοὺς καταλυθέντας τῶν τόνων τῶν ψυχικῶν, ἀκολάστως καὶ λαγνίστερον ὁμιλοῦντας ταῖς νοῦ θυγατράσιν, αἰσθήσεσιν, ὡς χαμαιτύπαις καὶ πόρναις, ἐνδειχθησομένους πρὸς ἥλιον ἄγει.
1:89φησὶ γάρ· „καὶ κατέλυσεν ὁ λαὸς ἐν Σαττὶν“ — ἄκανθαι δ’ ἑρμηνεύεται, παθῶν κεντούντων καὶ τιτρωσκόντων ψυχὴν σύμβολον —, „καὶ ἐβεβηλώθη“ φησίν „ἐκπορνεῦσαι εἰς τὰς θυγατέρας Μωάβ“ — αἱ δέ εἰσιν αἱ αἰσθήσεις, κεκλημέναι νοῦ θυγατέρες· Μωὰβ γὰρ ἐκ πατρὸς ἑρμηνεύεται—, καὶ προστίθησι· „λάβε πάντας τοὺς ἀρχηγοὺς τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ παραδειγμάτισον τῷ κυρίῳ ἀπέναντι τοῦ ἡλίου, καὶ ἀποστραφήσεται ὀργὴ κυρίου ἀπὸ Ἰσραήλ“ (Num. 25, 1. 4).
1:90οὐ γὰρ μόνον τὰ κεκρυμμένα τῶν ἀδικημάτων ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι βουλόμενος ταῖς ἡλιακαῖς περιέλαμψεν ἀκτῖσιν, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ συμβόλων ἥλιον τὸν πατέρα τῶν ὅλων ἐκάλεσεν, ᾧ πάντα προὖπτα καὶ ὅσα ἐν μυχοῖς τῆς διανοίας ἀοράτως ἐπιτελεῖται· γενομένων δ’ ἐμφανῶν ἵλεώ φησιν ἔσεσθαι τὸν μόνον ἵλεω. διὰ τί;
1:91ὅτι, ἐὰν ὑπολαβοῦσα διάνοια λήσεσθαι τὸ θεῖον ἀδικοῦσα, ὡς μὴ πάντα καθορᾶν δυνάμενον, κρύφα καὶ ἐν μυχοῖς διαμαρτάνῃ καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα εἴτ’ ἐξ αὑτῆς εἴτε καὶ ὑφηγησαμένου τινὸς ἐννοήσῃ, ὅτι ἀμήχανον ἄδηλον εἶναί τι τῷ θεῷ, καὶ ἑαυτὴν καὶ τὰς ἑαυτῆς πράξεις ἁπάσας ἀναπτύξῃ καὶ εἰς μέσον προενεγκοῦσα καθάπερ εἰς ἡλιακὸν φῶς ἐπιδείξηται τῷ τῶν ὅλων ἐπισκόπῳ φήσασα μετανοεῖν ἐφ’ οἷς πρότερον ἀγνώμονι γνώμῃ χρωμένη κακῶς ἐδόξαζε — μηδὲν γὰρ ἄδηλον, γνώριμα δὲ καὶ δῆλα πάντα, οὐ τὰ πραχθέντα μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰ ἐλπιζόμενα κατὰ πολλὴν περιουσίαν ὑπάρχειν αὐτῷ —, κεκάθαρται καὶ ὠφέληται καὶ τὸν ἐφεστῶτα κολαστὴν ἔλεγχον ἡμέρωκεν ὀργῇ δικαίᾳ χρώμενον, εἰ τὸ μετανοεῖν ἀδελφὸν νεώτερον ὂν
1:92τοῦ μηδ’ ὅλως ἁμαρτεῖν ἀποδέχεται. φαίνεται μέντοι καὶ ἑτέρωθι κατὰ σύμβολον ἐπὶ τοῦ αἰτίου τὸν ἥλιον παραλαμβάνων, ὡς ἐν τῷ γραφέντι νόμῳ περὶ τῶν ἐπ’ ἐνεχύροις δανειζόντων· λέγε τὸν νόμον· „ἐὰν ἐνεχύρασμα ἐνεχυράσῃς τὸ ἱμάτιον τοῦ πλησίον, πρὸ δυσμῶν ἡλίου ἀποδώσεις αὐτῷ· ἔστι γὰρ τοῦτο περιβόλαιον αὐτῷ μόνον, τοῦτο τὸ ἱμάτιον ἀσχημοσύνης αὐτοῦ. ἐν τίνι κοιμηθήσεται; ἐὰν οὖν καταβοήσῃ πρὸς μέ, εἰσακούσομαι αὐτοῦ· ἐλεήμων γάρ εἰμι“ (Exod. 22, 26. 27).
1:93ἆρ’ οὐκ ἄξιον τοὺς οἰομένους τὴν τοσαύτην σπουδὴν εἶναι τῷ νομοθέτῃ περὶ ἀμπεχόνης, εἰ καὶ μὴ ὀνειδίζειν, ἀλλά τοί γε ὑπομιμνῄσκειν φάσκοντας· τί λέγετε, ὦ γενναῖοι; ὁ τῶν ὅλων κτίστης καὶ ἡγεμὼν ἐλεήμονα ἑαυτὸν ἐφ’ οὕτως εὐτελοῦς πράγματος, ἱματίου μὴ ἀποδοθέντος χρεώστῃ πρὸς δανειστοῦ, καλεῖ;
1:94τὸ μέγεθος καθάπαξ τῆς ἀρετῆς τοῦ πάντα μεγάλου θεοῦ μὴ συνεωρακότων τοιαῦτ’ ἐστὶν ὑπολαμβάνειν καὶ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην μικρολογίαν τῇ ἀγενήτῳ καὶ ἀφθάρτῳ καὶ πλήρει μακαριότητος καὶ εὐδαιμονίας φύσει παρὰ θέμιν καὶ δίκην προσνεμόντων.
1:95τί γὰρ ἄτοπον ποιοῦσιν οἱ τὰ ῥύσια κατέχοντες δανεισταὶ παρ’ αὑτοῖς, ἄχρις ἂν τὰ ἴδια ἀναπράξωνται; πένητες οἱ χρεῶσται, φήσει τις ἴσως, καὶ ἄξιον ἐλεεῖν αὐτούς. εἶτ’ οὐκ ἄμεινον ἦν γράψαι νόμον, δι’ οὗ τούτους ἐρανιοῦσι μᾶλλον ἢ χρεώστας ἀποφανοῦσιν ἢ ἐπ’ ἐνεχύροις τοῦ δανείζειν κωλύσουσιν; ὁ δὲ ἐφεὶς οὐκ ἂν εἰκότως ἐπὶ τοῖς ἃ ἔλαβον πρὸ καιροῦ μὴ προιεμένοις δυσχεραίνοι ὡς ἀσεβοῦσι.
1:96πενίας δ’ εἰς αὐτά τις ἐλθών, ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, τὰ πέρατα καὶ ῥάκιον ἓν ἀμπεχόμενος δανειστὰς καινοὺς ἐπάγεται τὸν ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρώντων παρεὶς ἔλεον, ὃς τοῖς κεχρημένοις ταῖς τοιαύταις κακοπραγίαις κατ’ οἰκίαν καὶ παρ’ ἱεροῖς καὶ ἐν ἀγορᾷ καὶ πανταχοῦ προκέχυται;
1:97νυνὶ δὲ καὶ ὃ μόνον εἶχε προκάλυμμα αἰδοῦς, ᾧ τὰ τῆς φύσεως ἀπόρρητα συνεσκίαζε, τοῦτο φέρων προὔτεινε· ῥύσιον ὑπὲρ τίνος, εἰπέ μοι; ἢ ὑπὲρ ἑτέρας ἀμείνονος ἐσθῆτος; τροφῆς μὲν γὰρ ἀναγκαίας ἄπορος οὐδείς, ἄχρις ἂν πηγαὶ μὲν ἀναβλύζωσι, ποταμοὶ δὲ χείμαρροι πλημμυρῶσι, γῆ δὲ τοὺς ἐτησίους ἀναδιδῷ καρπούς.
1:98οὕτω δὲ ἢ βαθύπλουτός τις ἢ λίαν ὠμὸς ὁ δανειστής, ὡς ἢ τετράδραχμον, τάχα δὲ καὶ ἔλαττον ἐθέλειν τῳ συμβαλεῖν ἢ οὕτω πενιχρῷ δανείζειν ἀλλὰ μὴ χαρίζεσθαι ἢ ὃ μόνον ἦν ἱμάτιον ἐκείνῳ λαμβάνειν ἐνέχυρον, ὅπερ ἑτέρῳ ὀνόματι λωποδυτεῖν εἰκότως ἂν λέγοιτο; καὶ γὰρ λωποδύταις ἔθος ἀπαμπίσχουσι τὰς μὲν ἐσθῆτας ἀφαιρεῖσθαι, γυμνοὺς δὲ τοὺς ἔχοντας ἀποφαίνειν.
1:99διὰ τί δὲ νυκτὸς μὲν καὶ τοῦ μὴ ἀνείμονά τινα κοιμηθῆναι προὐνόησεν, ἡμέρας δὲ καὶ τοῦ μὴ ἐγρηγορότα γυμνὸν ἀσχημονεῖν οὐκέθ’ ὁμοίως ἐφρόντισεν; ἢ οὐ νυκτὶ μὲν καὶ σκότῳ κρύπτεται πάντα, ὡς ἧττον ἢ μηδ’ ὅλως αἰδεῖσθαι, ἡμέρᾳ δὲ καὶ φωτὶ ἀνακαλύπτεται, ὡς τότε μᾶλλον ἐρυθριᾶν ἀναγκάζεσθαι;
1:100διὰ τί δ’ οὐ διδόναι τὸ ἱμάτιον, ἀλλ’ ἀποδιδόναι προσέταξεν; ἀπόδοσις γὰρ ἐπ’ ἀλλοτρίοις γίνεται, τὰ δ’ ἐνέχυρα τῶν δεδανεικότων μᾶλλον ἢ τῶν δεδανεισμένων ἐστίν. ἐκεῖνο δὲ οὐκ ἐννοεῖς, ὅτι λαβόντι τῷ χρεώστῃ πρόσκοιτον τὸ ἱμάτιον οὐ προσέταξε μεθ’ ἡμέραν περιελεῖν ἀναστάντι καὶ κομίσαι τῷ δανειστῇ;
Book 1, §§76–100
1:76Since, as the sun divides day and night, so also does Moses say that God divided the light from the darkness; for "God made a division between the light and between the darkness." And besides all this, as the sun, when he arises, discovers hidden things, so also does God, who created all things, not only bring them all to light, but he has even created what before had no existence, not being only their maker, but also their founder.
1:77And the sun is also spoken of in many passages of holy writ in a figurative manner. Once as the human mind, which men build up as a city and furnish, who are compelled to serve the creature in preference to the uncreated God, of whom it is said that, "They built strong cities for Pharaoh and Peitho," that is, for discourse; to which persuasion (τὸ πείθειν) is attributed, and Rameses, or the outward sense, by which the soul is devoured as if by moths; for the name Rameses, being interpreted, means, "the shaking of a moth;" and On, the mind, which they called Heliopolis, since the mind, like the sun, has the predominance over the whole mass of our body, and extends its powers like the beams of the sun, over everything.
1:78But he who appropriates to himself the regulation of corporeal things, by name Joseph, takes the priest and minister of the mind to be his father-in-law; for says the scripture, "he gave him Aseneth, the daughter of Peutephres, the priest of Heliopolis, for his wife."
1:79And, using symbolical language, he calls the outward sense a second sun, inasmuch as it shows all the objects of which it is able to form a judgment to the intellect, concerning which he speaks thus, "The sun rose upon him when he passed by the appearance of God." For in real truth, when we are no longer able to endure to pass all our time with the most sacred appearances, and as it were with incorporeal images, but when we turn aside in another direction, and forsake them, we use another light, that, namely, in accordance with the external sense, which in real truth, is in no respect different from darkness,
1:80which, after it has arisen, arouses as if from sleep the senses of seeing, and of hearing, and also of taste, and of touch, and of smell, and sends to sleep the intellectual qualities of prudence, and justice, and knowledge, and wisdom, which were all awake.
1:81And it is for this reason that the sacred scripture says, that no one can be pure before the evening, as the disorderly motions of the outward senses agitate and confuse the intellect. Moreover, he establishes a law for the priests also which may not be avoided, combining with it an expression of a grave opinion when it says, "He shall not eat of the holy things unless he have washed his body in water, and unless the sun has set, and he has become pure."
1:82For by these words it is very clearly shown that there is no one whatever completely pure, so as to be fit to be initiated into the holy and sacred mysteries, to whose lot it has fallen to be honoured with these glories of life which are appreciable by the external senses. But if any one rejects these glories, he is deservedly made conspicuous by the light of wisdom, by means of which he will be able to wash off the stains of vain opinion and to become pure.
1:83Do you not see that even the sun itself produces opposite effects when he is setting from those which he causes when rising? For when he rises everything upon the earth shines, and the things in heaven are hidden from our view; but, on the other hand, when he sets then the stars appear and the things on earth are overshadowed.
1:84In the same manner, also, in us, when the light of the outward senses rises like the sun, the celestial and heavenly sciences are really and truly hidden from view; but when this light is near setting, then the starlike radiance of the virtues appears, when the mind is pure, and concealed by no object of the outward senses.
1:85But according to the third signification, when he speaks of the sun, he means the divine word, the model of that sun which moves about through the heaven, as has been said before, and with respect to which it is said, "The sun went forth upon the earth, and Lot entered into Segor, and the Lord rained upon Sodom and Gomorrah brimstone and fire."
1:86For the word of God, when it reaches to our earthly constitution, assists and protects those who are akin to virtue, or whose inclinations lead them to virtue; so that it provides them with a complete refuge and salvation, but upon their enemies it sends irremediable overthrow and destruction.
1:87And in the fourth signification, what is meant by the sun is the God and ruler of the universe himself, as I have said already, by means of whom such offences as are irremediable, and which appear to be overshadowed and concealed, are revealed; for as all things are possible, so, likewise, all things are known to God.
1:88In reference to which faculty of his it is that he drags those persons who are living dissolutely as regards their souls, and who are in a debauched and intemperate manner, cohabiting with the daughters of the mind the outward senses, as prostitutes and harlots, to the light of the sun, in order to display their true characters;
1:89for the scripture says, "And the people abode in Shittim;" now the meaning of the name Shittim is, "the thorns of the passions" which sting and wound the soul. "And the people was polluted, and began to commit whoredom with the daughters of Moab," and these who are called daughters are the outward senses, for the name Moab is interpreted, "of a father;" and the scripture adds, "Take all the chiefs of the people, and make an example of them unto the Lord in the face of the sun, and the anger of the Lord shall be turned from Israel."
1:90For he not only desires that the wicked deeds which are hidden shall be made manifest, and therefore turns upon them the beams of the sun, but he also by this symbolical language calls the father of the universe the sun, that being by whom all things are seen beforehand, and even all those things which are invisibly concealed in the recesses of the mind; and when they are made manifest, then he promises that he who is the only merciful being, will become merciful to the people.
1:91Why so? Because, even if the mind, fancying that though it does wrong it can escape the notice of the Deity as not being able to see everything, should sin secretly and in dark places, and should after that, either by reason of its own notions or through the suggestions of some one else, conceive that it is impossible that anything should be otherwise than clear to God, and should disclose itself and all its actions, and should bring them forward, as it were, out of the light of the sun, and display them to the governor of the universe, saying, that it repents of the perverse conduct which it formerly exhibited when under the influence of foolish opinion (for that nothing is indistinct before God, but all things are known and clear to him, not merely such as have been done, but even such are merely hoped or designed, by reason of the boundless character of his wisdom), it then is purified and benefited, and it propitiates the chastiser who was ready to punish it, namely, conscience, who was previously filled with just anger towards it, and who now admits repentance as the younger brother of perfect innocence and freedom from sin.
1:92Moreover, it appears that Moses has in other passages also taken the sun as a symbol of the great Cause of all things, of which I see an instance in the law which is enacted with respect to those who borrow on pledges: let us recite the law, "If thou takest as a pledge the garment of thy neighbour, thou shalt give it back before the setting of the sun: for it is his covering, it is the only covering of his nakedness, in which he lies down. If he cries unto me I will hearken unto him, for I am merciful."
1:93Is it not natural that those who fancy that the lawgiver displays such earnestness about a garment should, if they do not reproach him, at least make a suggestion, saying, "What are ye saying, my good men? Do ye affirm that the Creator and ruler of the world calls himself merciful with respect to so trivial a matter, as that of a garment not being restored to the borrower by the lender?"
1:94These are the opinions and notions of men who have never had the least conception or comprehension of the virtue of the almighty God, and who, contrary to all human and divine law, impart the triviality of human affairs to the uncreate and immortal nature, which is full of happiness, and blessedness, and perfection;
1:95for in what respect do those lenders act unreasonably, who retain in their own hands the pledges which are deposited with them as security, until they receive back their own which they have lent? The debtors are poor, some one will perhaps say, and it is right to pity them: would it not then have been reasonable and better to enact a law in accordance with which a contribution should be made to assist their necessities, rather than allow them to appear as debtors, or else one which should forbid the lending on pledges at all? But the law which has permitted the lending on pledges, cannot fairly be indignant against those who will not give up the pledges which they have received before the proper time, as if they were acting unjustly.
1:96But if any one having come, so to say, to the very farthest limits of poverty, and, being clothed in rags, loads himself with new debts, neglecting the pity which he receives from the bystanders, which is freely bestowed, upon those who fall into such misfortunes, in their own houses, and in the temples, and in the market-place, and everywhere;
1:97such a one brings and offers to his creditor, the only covering which he had for his shame, with which he has been wont to cover the secret parts of his nature, as a pledge for something. For what, I pray? Is it for some other and better garment? For no one is unprovided with necessary food as long as the springs of the rivers bubble up, and the torrents flow abundantly, and the earth gives forth its annual fruits.
1:98Again, is any creditor so covetous of riches, or so very cruel, or so perverse, as not to be willing to contribute a tetradrachm, or even less, to one in distress? Or is any one so stingy as to be willing to lend it, but to refuse to give it? or as to take the only garment that the poor man has as a pledge? which indeed under another name may fairly be called running away with a man’s clothes; for men who do this are accustomed to put on other peoples’ clothes, and steal them, and to leave the proper owners naked.
1:99And why has the law provided so carefully that the debtor may not be without his clothes by night, and that he may not lie down to sleep without them, but has not paid the same attention to the fact of his being indecorously naked by day? Are not all things concealed by night and darkness, so as to cause less shame, or rather none at all at that time, but are they not disclosed by day and by light, so as then to compel persons to blush more freely?
1:100And why does the law not use the expression "to give," but "to restore?" For restoration takes place with respect to the property of other persons, but pledges belong rather to those who have lent on them than to those who have borrowed on them. Moreover, do you not perceive that the law has not enjoined the debtor, who has received back his garment that it may serve as bed-clothes, to bring it back again to his creditor at the return of daylight?
Book 1, §§101–125
1:101καὶ μὴν τῷ γε τῆς ἑρμηνείας ἰδιοτρόπῳ καὶ ὁ βραδύτατος ἕτερόν τι τοῦ ῥητοῦ κατανοεῖν ἂν προαχθείη· μᾶλλον γὰρ ἀφορισμῷ ἢ παραινέσει ἔοικε τὸ διάταγμα. παραινῶν μὲν γὰρ εἶπεν ἄν τις· τὸ ἐνεχυρασθὲν ἱμάτιον, ἐὰν τοῦτ’ ᾖ μόνον τῷ χρεώστῃ, πρὸ ἑσπέρας ἀπόδος, ἵν’ ἔχῃ νύκτωρ ἀμπέχεσθαι, ἀφοριζόμενος δὲ οὕτως, ὡς νῦν ἔχει· „ἔστι γὰρ τοῦτο περιβόλαιον αὐτῷ μόνον, τοῦτο τὸ ἱμάτιον ἀσχημοσύνης αὐτοῦ· ἐν τίνι κοιμηθήσεται“ (Exod. 22,27) ;
1:102ταῦτα μὲν δὴ καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα πρὸς τοὺς τῆς ῥητῆς πραγματείας σοφιστὰς καὶ λίαν τὰς ὀφρῦς ἀνεσπακότας εἰρήσθω, λέγωμεν δὲ ἡμεῖς ἑπόμενοι τοῖς ἀλληγορίας νόμοις τὰ πρέποντα περὶ τούτων. φαμὲν τοίνυν λόγου σύμβολον ἱμάτιον εἶναι. τάς τε γὰρ ἀπὸ κρυμοῦ καὶ θάλπους εἰωθυίας τῷ σώματι κατασκήπτειν βλάβας ἐσθὴς ἀπωθεῖται καὶ ἐπισκιάζει τὰ τῆς φύσεως ἀπόρρητα καὶ ἔστιν ἁρμόττων σώματι κόσμος ἡ ἀμπεχόνη.
1:103κατὰ τὸ παραπλήσιον μέντοι καὶ ἀνθρώπῳ λόγος δώρημα κάλλιστον ἐδόθη παρὰ θεοῦ, πρῶτον μὲν κατὰ τῶν νεωτεριζόντων εἰς αὐτὸν ὅπλον ἀμυντήριον — ὡς γὰρ τῶν ἄλλων ἕκαστον ζῴων ἡ φύσις οἰκείοις ἕρκεσιν ὠχύρωσε, δι’ ὧν τοὺς ἐπιχειροῦντας ἀδικεῖν ἀποκρούσεται, καὶ ἀνθρώπῳ μέγιστον ἔρυμα καὶ φρουρὰν ἀκαθαίρετον λόγον δέδωκεν, οὗ κραταιῶς οἷα πανοπλίας ἐνειλημμένος οἰκεῖον καὶ προσφυέστατον ἕξει δορυφόρον· τούτῳ δὲ προαγωνιστῇ χρώμενος δυνήσεται τὰς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐχθρῶν ἐπιφερομένας ἀπωθεῖσθαι ζημίας —,
1:104δεύτερον δὲ καὶ αἰσχύνης καὶ ὀνειδῶν ἀναγκαιότατον περίβλημα — δεινὸς γὰρ συγκρύψαι καὶ συσκιάσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων λόγος —, τρίτον δὲ πρὸς ὅλου τοῦ βίου κόσμον· ὁ γὰρ βελτιῶν ἕκαστον καὶ πάντα ἄγων ἐπὶ τὸ κρεῖττον οὗτός ἐστιν.
1:105ἀλλὰ γάρ εἰσι λῶβαί τινες καὶ κῆρες ἀνθρώπων, οἳ καὶ τὸν λόγον ἐνεχυράζουσιν ἀφαιρούμενοι τοὺς ἔχοντας καί, συναυξῆσαι δέον, ὅλον ὑποτέμνονται, καθάπερ οἱ τὰ τῶν πολεμίων δῃοῦντες χωρία καὶ τόν τε σῖτον καὶ τὸν ἄλλον καρπὸν φθείρειν ἐπιχειροῦντες, ὃς ἀφεθεὶς μεγάλη τοῖς χρησαμένοις ἂν ὄνησις ἦν.
1:106πόλεμος οὖν ἐστιν ἐνίοις ἄσπονδος καὶ ἀκήρυκτος πρὸς τὴν λογικὴν φύσιν, οἵτινες τὰς βλάστας αὐτῆς ἀποκείρουσιν ἐν χρῷ καὶ τὰς πρώτας ἐπιφύσεις ἐκθλίβουσιν, ἄγονον καὶ στεῖραν, ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, καλῶν ἐπιτηδευμάτων ἀπεργαζόμενοι.
1:107ὁρμῶσαν γὰρ ἔστιν ὅτε πρὸς παιδείαν ἀκατασχέτῳ ῥύμῃ καὶ πληχθεῖσαν ἔρωτι τῶν φιλοσοφίας θεωρημάτων ὑπὸ βασκανίας καὶ φθόνου δείσαντες, μὴ μεγάλα πνεύσασα καὶ ἐπὶ μήκιστον ἀρθεῖσα τὰς γλισχρολογίας αὐτῶν καὶ πιθανὰς κατὰ τῆς ἀληθείας εὑρέσεις ἐπικλύσῃ χειμάρρου τρόπον, ἑτέρωσε ταῖς ἑαυτῶν κακοτεχνίαις τὴν φορὰν ἔτρεψαν, εἰς βαναύσους καὶ ἀνελευθέρους τέχνας μετοχετευσάμενοι· πολλάκις δὲ καὶ ἀμβλώσαντες καὶ ἐπιφράξαντες ἀργὸν τὸ μεγαλοφυὲς κατέλιπον, ὥσπερ βαθύγειον καὶ εὐδαίμονα γῆν ὀρφανῶν παίδων ἐπίτροποι κακοὶ χέρσον, καὶ οὐκ ᾐδέσθησαν οἱ πάντων ἀνηλεέστατοι τὸ μόνον ἱμάτιον ἀνθρώπου περισυλῶντες, λόγον· „ἔστι“ γάρ φησι „τοῦτο περιβόλαιον αὐτῷ μόνον“ (Exod. 22,27). τί πλὴν ὁ λόγος;
1:108ὥσπερ γὰρ ἵππου τὸ χρεμετίζειν ἴδιον καὶ τὸ ὑλακτεῖν κυνὸς καὶ βοὸς τὸ μυκᾶσθαι καὶ τὸ ὠρύεσθαι λέοντος, οὕτω καὶ ἀνθρώπου τὸ λέγειν καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ λόγος. τοῦτον γὰρ ἔρυμα, περίβλημα, πανοπλίαν, τεῖχος τὸ ζῷον τὸ θεοφιλέστατον,
1:109ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐκ πάντων ἴδιον κεκάρπωται. διὸ καὶ ἐπιφέρει· „τοῦτο τὸ ἱμάτιον αὐτὸ μόνον ἀσχημοσύνης αὐτοῦ“ (Exod. 22,27). τίς ἄλλος γὰρ οὕτως τὰ ὀνείδη καὶ τὰ αἴσχη τοῦ βίου συσκιάζει καὶ συγκρύπτει, ὡς λόγος; ἀμαθία μὲν γὰρ ἀλόγου φύσεως συγγενὲς αἶσχος, παιδεία δὲ ἀδελφὸν λόγου, κόσμος οἰκεῖος.
1:110„ἐν τίνι οὖν κοιμηθήσεται“, τουτέστιν ἠρεμήσει καὶ διαναπαύσεται ἄνθρωπος, πλὴν ἐν λόγῳ; λόγος γὰρ τὸ βαρυποτμότατον ἡμῶν γένος ἐπικουφίζει. ὥσπερ οὖν τοὺς λύπαις ἢ φόβοις ἤ τισιν ἄλλοις κακοῖς πιεσθέντας εὐμένεια καὶ συνήθεια καὶ δεξιότης φίλων πολλάκις ἐθεράπευσεν, οὕτως οὐ πολλάκις ἀλλ’ ἀεὶ τὸ βαρύτατον ἄχθος, ὅπερ ἐπιτιθέασιν ἡμῖν αἵ τε τοῦ συνδέτου σώματος ἀνάγκαι καὶ αἱ τῶν ἔξωθεν κατασκηπτόντων ἀπροόρατοι συντυχίαι, μόνος ὁ ἀλεξίκακος λόγος ἀπωθεῖται.
1:111φίλος γὰρ καὶ γνώριμος καὶ συνήθης καὶ ἑταῖρος ἡμῖν ἐστιν, ἐνδεδεμένος, μᾶλλον δὲ ἡρμοσμένος καὶ ἡνωμένος κόλλῃ τινὶ φύσεως ἀλύτῳ καὶ ἀοράτῳ. διὰ τοῦτο καὶ προλέγει τὰ συνοίσοντα καὶ συμβάντος τινὸς ἀβουλήτου πάρεστιν αὐτοκέλευστος βοηθήσων, οὐ τὴν ἑτέραν φέρων μόνον ὠφέλειαν, ἣν ὁ μὴ δρῶν σύμβουλος ἢ ὁ συναγωνιστὴς ἥσυχος, ἀλλ’ ἀμφοτέρας.
1:112οὐ γὰρ ἡμίεργον ἐπιτετήδευκε δύναμιν, ἀλλὰ πᾶσι τοῖς μέρεσιν ὁλόκληρον· ὅς γε, κἂν σφαλῇ πείρας ἐν οἷς διανοεῖται ἢ ἔργῳ ἐπεξέρχεται, [ἢ] ἐπὶ τὸ τρίτον ἀφικνεῖται βοήθημα, παρηγορίαν. φάρμακον γὰρ ὡς τραυμάτων, καὶ ψυχῆς παθῶν ὁ λόγος ἐστὶ σωτήριον, ὃν "πρὸ δυσμῶν ἡλίου“ φησὶ δεῖν ὁ νομοθέτης ἀποδοῦναι (Exod. 22, 26), τουτέστι πρὶν τὰς τοῦ μεγίστου καὶ ἐπιφανεστάτου θεοῦ καταδῦναι περιλαμπεστάτας αὐγάς, ἃς δι’ ἔλεον τοῦ γένους ἡμῶν εἰς νοῦν τὸν ἀνθρώπινον οὐρανόθεν ἀποστέλλει.
1:113παραμένοντος γὰρ ἐν ψυχῇ τοῦ θεοειδεστάτου καὶ ἀσωμάτου φωτὸς ἀποδώσομεν τὸν ἐνεχυρασθέντα λόγον, ὡς ἱμάτιον, ἵν’ ἐγγένηται τῷ λαβόντι τὸ ἴδιον ἀνθρώπου κτῆμα τήν τε αἰσχύνην τοῦ βίου περιστεῖλαι καὶ τῆς θείας ἀπόνασθαι δωρεᾶς καὶ μετ’ ἠρεμίας ἀναπαύσασθαι παρουσίᾳ τοιούτου συμβούλου καὶ προασπιστοῦ τάξιν ἣν ἐτάχθη μηδέποτε λείψοντος.
1:114ἕως οὖν ἔτι σοι τὸ ἱερὸν φέγγος ὁ θεὸς ἀκτινοβολεῖ, σπούδασον ἐν ἡμέρᾳ τὸ ῥύσιον ἀποδοῦναι τῷ κυρίῳ· δύντος γάρ, ὡς πᾶσα Αἴγυπτος (Exod. 10, 21), ψηλαφητὸν ἕξεις σκότος τὸν αἰῶνα καὶ πληχθεὶς ἀορασίᾳ καὶ ἀγνοίᾳ, ὧν ἐδόκεις ἐπικρατεῖν πάντων ἀφαιρεθήσῃ, πρὸς τοῦ βλέποντος Ἰσραήλ, ὃν ἐρρυσίαζες ἀδούλωτον ὄντα φύσει, δουλούμενος ἀνάγκῃ.
1:115τοῦτον δὴ τὸν δόλιχον ἀπεμηκύναμεν οὐκ ἄλλου του χάριν ἢ τοῦ διδάξαι, ὅτι ἡ ἀσκητικὴ διάνοια κινήσεσιν ἀνωμάλοις πρός τε εὐφορίαν καὶ τοὐναντίον χρωμένη καὶ τρόπον τινὰ ἀνιοῦσα καὶ κατιοῦσα συνεχῶς, ὅταν μὲν εὐφορῇ καὶ πρὸς τὸ ὕψος αἴρηται, ταῖς ἀρχετύποις καὶ ἀσωμάτοις ἀκτῖσι τῆς λογικῆς πηγῆς τοῦ τελεσφόρου θεοῦ περιλάμπεται, ὅταν δὲ καταβαίνῃ καὶ ἀφορῇ, ταῖς ἐκείνων εἰκόσιν, ἀθανάτοις λόγοις, οὓς καλεῖν ἔθος ἀγγέλους.
1:116διὸ καὶ νῦν φησιν· „ἀπήντησε τόπῳ· ἔδυ γὰρ ὁ ἥλιος“ (Gen. 28, 11). ὅταν γὰρ τὴν ψυχὴν ἀπολίπωσιν αἱ τοῦ θεοῦ αὐγαί, δι’ ὧν σαφέσταται αἱ τῶν πραγμάτων γίνονται καταλήψεις, ἀνατέλλει τὸ δεύτερον καὶ ἀσθενέστερον λόγων, οὐκέτι πραγμάτων, φέγγος, καθάπερ καὶ ἐν τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ· σελήνη γὰρ τὰ δευτερεῖα ἡλίου φερομένη καταδύντος ἐκείνου φῶς ἀμυδρότερον ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν ἀποστέλλει.
1:117καὶ τὸ ὑπαντᾶν μέντοι τόπῳ ἢ λόγῳ τοῖς μὴ δυναμένοις τὸν πρὸ τόπου καὶ λόγου θεὸν ἰδεῖν αὐταρκεστάτη δωρεά, διότι τὴν ψυχὴν ἀφώτιστον εἰσάπαν οὐκ ἔσχον, ἀλλ’ ἐπειδὴ τὸ ἄκρατον ἐκεῖνο φέγγος ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ἔδυ, τὸ κεκραμένον ἐκαρπώσαντο. „τοῖς γὰρ υἱοῖς Ἰσραὴλ φῶς ἦν ἐν πᾶσιν οἷς κατεγίνοντο“, φησὶν ἐν Ἐξαγωγῇ (10, 23), ὡς νύκτα καὶ σκότος ἀεὶ πεφυγαδεῦσθαι, μεθ’ ὧν οἱ τὰ ψυχῆς ὄμματα πρὸ τῶν σώματος πεπηρωμένοι ζῶσιν, ἀρετῆς αὐγὰς οὐκ εἰδότες.
1:118ἔνιοι δὲ ἥλιον μὲν ὑποτοπήσαντες εἰρῆσθαι νυνὶ συμβολικῶς αἴσθησίν τε καὶ νοῦν, τὰ νενομισμένα καθ’ ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς εἶναι κριτήρια, τόπον δὲ τὸν θεῖον λόγον, οὕτως ἐξεδέξαντο· ἀπήντησεν ὁ ἀσκητὴς λόγῳ θείῳ δύντος τοῦ θνητοῦ καὶ ἀνθρωπίνου φέγγους.
1:119ἄχρι μὲν γὰρ ὁ νοῦς τὰ νοητὰ καὶ τὰ αἰσθητὰ αἴσθησις οἴεται παγίως καταλαμβάνειν καὶ ἄνω περιπολεῖν, μακρὰν ὁ θεῖος λόγος ἀφέστηκεν· ἐπειδὰν δ’ ἑκάτερον ἀσθένειαν ὁμολογήσῃ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ καὶ τρόπον τινὰ καταδύσει χρησάμενον ἀποκρυφθῇ, προϋπαντᾷ δεξιούμενος εὐθὺς ὁ ἔφεδρος ἀσκητικῆς ψυχῆς ὀρθὸς λόγος ἑαυτὴν μὲν ἀπογινωσκούσης, τὸν δὲ ἐπιφοιτῶντα ἔξωθεν ἀφανῶς ἀναμενούσης.
1:120Φησὶ τοίνυν ἑξῆς ὅτι „ἔλαβεν ἀπὸ τῶν λίθων τοῦ τόπου καὶ ἔθηκε πρὸς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐκοιμήθη ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ἐκείνῳ“ (Gen. 28, 11). θαυμάσαι ἄν τις οὐ μόνον τὴν ἐν ὑπονοίαις πραγματείαν καὶ φυσιολογίαν αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὴν ῥητὴν πρὸς πόνου καὶ καρτερίας μελέτην ὑφήγησιν.
1:121οὐ γὰρ ἀξιοῖ τὸν ἀρετῆς ἐπιμελούμενον ἁβροδιαίτῳ βίῳ χρῆσθαι καὶ τρυφᾶν ζηλοῦντα τὰς τῶν λεγομένων μὲν εὐδαιμόνων πρὸς ἀλήθειαν δὲ κακοδαιμονίας γεμόντων σπουδάς τε καὶ φιλοτιμίας, οἷς πᾶς ὁ βίος ὕπνος καὶ ἐνύπνιόν ἐστι κατὰ τὸν ἱερώτατον νομοθέτην.
1:122οὗτοι μεθ’ ἡμέραν, ὅταν τὰ ἐν δικαστηρίοις καὶ βουλευτηρίοις καὶ θεάτροις καὶ πανταχοῦ πρὸς τοὺς ἄλλους ἀδικήματα διεξέλθωσιν, οἴκαδε ἀφικνοῦνται τὸν ἑαυτῶν οἶκον, οἱ δυστυχεῖς, καταστρέψοντες, οὐ τὸν τῶν οἰκοδομημάτων, ἀλλὰ τὸν συμφυᾶ τῆς ψυχῆς οἶκον, τὸ σῶμα, τροφὰς ἀμέτρους καὶ ἐπαλλήλους εἰσφέροντες καὶ πολὺν ἄκρατον ἄρδοντες, ἕως ἂν βύθιος μὲν ὁ λογισμὸς οἴχηται, τὰ δ’ ὑπὸ γαστέρα πλησμονῆς ἔκγονα πάθη διαναστάντα, λύττῃ χρώμενα ἀκαθέκτῳ, προσπεσόντα καὶ ἐμπλακέντα τοῖς ἐπιτυχοῦσι, τὸν πολὺν οἶστρον ἀπερυγόντα λωφήσῃ.
1:123νύκτωρ δέ, ὁπότε καιρὸς εἴη πρὸς κοῖτον τραπέσθαι, πολυτελεῖς κλίνας καὶ εὐανθεστάτας στρωμνὰς εὐτρεπισάμενοι μαλακῶς σφόδρα κατακλίνονται, τὴν γυναικῶν ἐκμιμούμενοι τρυφήν, αἷς ἡ φύσις ἐπέτρεψεν ἀνειμένῃ χρῆσθαι διαίτῃ, παρὸ καὶ τὸ σῶμα τοῦ μαλθακωτέρου κόμματος ὁ τεχνίτης καὶ ποιητὴς αὐταῖς εἰργάζετο.
1:124τοιοῦτος οὐδεὶς γνώριμος τοῦ ἱεροῦ λόγου, ἀλλ’ οἱ πρὸς ἀλήθειαν ἄνδρες, σωφροσύνης καὶ κοσμιότητος καὶ αἰδοῦς ἐρασταί, ἐγκράτειαν, ὀλιγοδεΐαν, καρτερίαν ὥσπερ κρηπῖδάς τινας ὅλου τοῦ βίου καταβεβλημένοι, ψυχῆς ἀσφαλεῖς ὑποδρόμους, οἷς ἀκινδύνως καὶ βεβαίως ἐνορμιεῖται, χρημάτων καὶ ἡδονῆς καὶ δόξης κρείττους, σιτίων καὶ ποτῶν καὶ αὐτὸ μόνον τῶν ἀναγκαίων, ἐφ’ ὅσον μὴ νεωτερίζειν ἄρχεται λιμός, ὑπερόπται, πεῖναν δέχεσθαι καὶ δίψαν θάλπος τε καὶ κρύος καὶ ὅσα ἄλλα δυσκαρτέρητα ὑπὲρ ἀρετῆς κτήσεως ἑτοιμότατοι, ζηλωταὶ τῶν εὐποριστοτάτων, ὡς μηδ’ ἐπ’ εὐτελεῖ χλαίνῃ ποτὲ δυσωπηθῆναι, τοὐναντίον δὲ τὰς πολυτελεῖς ὄνειδος καὶ μεγάλην τοῦ βίου ζημίαν νομίσαι.
1:125τούτοις πολυτελὴς μέν ἐστι κλίνη μαλακὸν ἔδαφος, στρωμνὴ δὲ θάμνοι, πόαι, βοτάναι, φύλλων πολλὴ χύσις, τὰ δὲ πρὸς κεφαλῆς λίθοι τινὲς ἢ βραχεῖς γεώλοφοι τοῦ ἰσοπέδου μικρὸν ἀνέχοντες. τὸν βίον τοῦτον οἱ μὲν τρυφῶντες σκληροδίαιτον καλοῦσιν, οἱ δὲ πρὸς καλοκἀγαθίαν ζῶντες ἥδιστον ὀνομάζουσιν· ἀνδράσι γὰρ οὐ λεγομένοις ἀλλ’ οὖσιν ὄντως ἐφαρμόζει.
Book 1, §§101–125
1:101And, indeed, if the exact propriety of the language be considered, even the most stupid person may see that there is something additional meant beyond what is formally expressed. For the injunction rather resembles a maxim than a recommendation. For, if a person had been giving a recommendation, he would have said: "Give back to your debtor, at the approach of evening, the garment which has been pledged to you, if it be the only garment that he is possessed of, that he may have something with which to cover himself at night." But one who was laying down a maxim would speak thus; as indeed the law does here, "For it is his garment, the only covering of his nakedness, in which he will lie down to sleep."
1:102These things then, and other things of the same kind, may be urged in reply to those assertors of the literal sense of a passage; and who superciliously reject all other explanations. We will now, in accordance with the usual laws of allegorical speaking, say what is becoming with respect to these subjects. We say, therefore, that a garment is here spoken of symbolically, to signify speech; for clothes keep off the injuries which are wont to visit the body, from cold and heat, and they also conceal the unmentionable parts of nature, and moreover, a cloak is a fitting garment for the body.
1:103In much the same manner, speech has been given to man by God, as the most excellent of gifts; for in the first place, it is a defensive weapon against those who would attack him with innovations. For as nature has fortified all other animals with their own appropriate and peculiar means of defence, by which they are able to repel those who attempt to injure them, so also has it bestowed upon man that greatest defence and most impregnable protection of speech, with which, as with a panoply, every one who is completely clothed, will have a domestic and most appropriate bodyguard; and employing it as a champion, will be able to ward off all the injuries which can be brought against him by his enemies.
1:104In the second place, it is a most necessary defence against shame and reproach; for speech is very well calculated to conceal and obscure the faults of men. In the third place, it conduces to the whole ornament of life: for this is the thing which improves every one, and which conducts every one to what is best;
1:105for there are many disgraceful and mischievous men, who take conversation as a pledge, and deprive its proper owners of it, and utterly cut off what they ought to seek to increase; like men who ravage the lands of their enemies, and who attempt to destroy their corn and all the rest of their crops, which, if it were left unhurt, would be a great advantage to those who would use it.
1:106For some men carry on an irreconcilable and never-ending war against rational nature, and utterly extirpate its every shoot and beginning, and destroy all its first appearances of propagation, and render it, as one may say, utterly unproductive and barren of all good practises.
1:107For sometimes, when it is borne onwards towards sacred instruction with irresistible impetuosity, and when it is smitten with a love of the speculations of true philosophy, they—out of jealousy and envy, fearing lest, when it has derived strength from its noble aspirations and has been elevated to a splendid height, it may overwhelm all their petty cavils and plausible devices against the truth, like an irresistible torrent—turn its energy in another direction by their own evil artifices, guiding it in another channel to vulgar and illiberal acts: and very often they seek to blunt it or to hedge it in, and in this way leave the nobility of its nature uncultivated, just as at times wicked guardians of orphan children have rendered a deep-soiled and fertile land barren. And these most pitiless of all men have not been restrained by shame from stripping the man of his only garment, namely, speech; "For," says the scripture, "it is his only covering."—What is a man’s only covering, except speech?
1:108For, as neighing is the peculiar attribute of a horse, and barking of a dog, and lowing of an ox, and roaring of a lion, so also is speaking, and speech itself, the peculiar property of man: for this is what man has received above all other animals as his peculiar gift, as a protection, and bulwark, and panoply, and wall of defence; he being, of all living creatures, the most beloved by God.
1:109On which account the scripture adds, "This is the only covering of his nakedness;" for what can so becomingly overshadow and conceal the reproaches and disgraces of life, as speech? For ignorance is a disgrace akin to irrational nature, but education is the brother of speech, and an ornament properly belonging to man.
1:110In what then will a man lie down to rest? That is to say, in what will a man find tranquillity and a respite from his labours, except in speech? For speech is a relief to our most miserable and afflicted race? As therefore, when men have been overwhelmed by grief, or by fear, or by any other evil, tranquillity, and constancy, and the kindness of friends have often restored them; so it happens, not often, but invariably, that speech, the only real averter of evil, wards off that most heavy burden which the necessities of that body in the which we are bound up, and the unforeseen accidents of external circumstances which attack us, impose upon us;
1:111for speech is a friend, and an acquaintance, and a kinsman, and a companion bound up within us; I should rather say, fitted close and united to us by some indissoluble and invisible cement of nature. On this account it is, that it forewarns us of what will be expedient for us, and when any unexpected event befalls us it comes forward of its own accord to assist us; not only bringing advantage of one kind only, such as that which he who is an adviser without acting, or an agent who can give no advice, may supply, but of both kinds:
1:112for he does not display a half-complete power, but one which is perfect in every part. Inasmuch, as even if it were to fail in his endeavour, and in any conceptions which may have been formed, or efforts which may have been made, it still can have recourse to the third species of assistance, namely, consolation. For speech is, as it were, a medicine for the wounds of the soul, and a saving remedy for its passions, which, "even before the setting of the sun," the lawgiver says one must restore: that is to say, before the all-brilliant beams of the almighty and all-glorious God are obscured, which he, out of pity for our race, sends down from heaven upon the human mind.
1:113For while that most God-like light abides in the soul, we shall be able to give back the speech, which was deposited as a pledge, as if it were a garment, in order that he who has received this peculiar possession of man, may by its means conceal the discreditable circumstances of life, and reap the benefit of the divine gift, and indulge in a respite combined with tranquillity, in consequence of the presence of so useful an adviser and defender, who will never leave the ranks in which he has been stationed.
1:114Moreover, while God pours upon you the light of his beams, do you hasten in the light of day to restore his pledge to the Lord; for when the sun has set, then you, like the whole land of Egypt, will have an everlasting darkness which may be felt, and being stricken with blindness and ignorance, you will be deprived of all those things of which you thought that you had certain possession, by that sharp-sighted Israel, whose pledges you hold, having made one who was by nature exempt from slavery a slave to necessity.
1:115We have discussed this subject at this length with no other object except that of teaching that the mind, which is inclined to practise virtue, having irregular motions towards prolificness and sterility, and as one may say, being in a manner always ascending and descending, when it becomes prolific and is elevated to a height is illuminated with the archetypal and incorporeal beams of the rational spring of the all-perfecting sun; but when it descends and becomes unproductive, then it is again illuminated by those images of those beams, the immortal words which it is customary to call angels.
1:116On which account we now read in the scripture, "He met the place; for the sun was set." For when those beams of God desert the soul by means of which the clearest comprehensions of affairs are engendered in it, then arises that second and weaker light of words, and the light of things is no longer seen, just as is the case in this lower world. For the moon, which occupies the second rank next to the sun, when that body has set, pours forth a somewhat weaker light than his upon the earth;
1:117and to meet a place or a word is a most sufficient gift for those who cannot discern that God is superior to every place or word; because they have not a soul wholly destitute of light, but because, since that most unmixed and brilliant light has set, they have been favoured with one which is alloyed. "For the children of Israel had light in all their dwellings," says the sacred historian in the book of the Exodus, so that night and darkness were continually banished from them, though it is in night and darkness that those men live who have lost the eyes of the soul rather than those of the body, having no experience of the beams of virtue.
1:118But some persons—supposing that what is meant here by the figurative expression of the sun is the external sense and the mind, which are looked upon as the things which have the power of judging; and that what is meant by place is the divine word—understand the allegory in this manner: the practiser of virtue met with the divine word, after the mortal and human light had set;
1:119for as long as the mind thinks that it attains to a firm comprehension of the objects of intellect, and the outward sense conceives that it has a similar understanding of its appropriate objects, and that it dwells amid sublime objects, the divine word stands aloof at a distance; but when each of these comes to confess its own weakness, and sets in a manner while availing itself of concealment, then immediately the right reason of a soul well-practised in virtue comes in a welcome manner to their assistance, when they have begun to despair of their own strength, and await the aid which is invisibly coming to them from without.
1:120Therefore, the scripture says in the next verses, "That he took one of the stones of the place and placed it at his head, and slept in that place." Any one may wonder not only at the interior and mystical doctrine contained in these words, but also at the distinct assertion, which gives us a lesson in labour and endurance:
1:121for the historian does not think it becoming, that the man who is devoted to the study of virtue should adopt a luxurious life, and live softly, imitating the pursuits and rivalries of those who are called indeed happy, but who are in reality full of all unhappiness; whose entire life is a sleep and a dream, according to the holy lawgiver.
1:122These men, after they have during the whole day been doing all sorts of injustice to others, in courts of justice, and council halls, and theatres, and everywhere, then return home, like miserable men as they are, to overturn their own house. I mean not that house which comes under the class of buildings, but that which is akin to the soul, I mean the body. Introducing immoderate and incessant food, and irrigating it with an abundance of pure wine, until the reason is overwhelmed, and disappears; and the passions which have their seat beneath the belly, the offspring of satiety, rise up, being carried away by unrestrained frenzy, and falling upon, and vehemently attacking all that they meet with, are only at last appeased after they have worked off their excessive violence of excitement.
1:123But by night, when it is time to turn towards rest, having prepared costly couches and the most exquisite of beds, they lie down in the most exceeding softness, imitating the luxury of women, whom nature has permitted to indulge in a more relaxed system of life, inasmuch as their maker, the Creator of the universe, has made their bodies of a more delicate stamp.
1:124Now no such person as this is a pupil of the sacred word, but those only are the disciples of that who are real genuine men, lovers of temperance, and orderliness, and modesty, men who have laid down continence, and frugality, and fortitude, as a kind of base and foundation for the whole of life; and safe stations for the soul, in which it may anchor without danger and without changeableness: for being superior to money, and pleasure, and glory, they look down upon meats and drinks, and everything of that sort, beyond what is necessary to ward off hunger: being thoroughly ready to undergo hunger, and thirst, and heat, and cold, and all other things, however hard they may be to be borne, for the sake of the acquisition of virtue. And being admirers of whatever is most easily provided, so as not to be ashamed of ever such cheap or shabby clothes, thinking rather, on the other hand, that sumptuous apparel is a reproach and great scandal to life.
1:125To these men, the soft earth is their most costly couch; their bed is bushes, and grass, and herbage, and a thick layer of leaves; and the pillows for their head are a few stones, or any little mounds which happen to rise a little above the surface of the plain. Such a life as this, is, by luxurious men, denominated a life of hardship, but by those who live for virtue, it is called most delightful; for it is well adapted, not for those who are called men, but for those who really are such.
Book 1, §§126–150
1:126οὐχ ὁρᾷς, ὅτι καὶ νῦν βασιλικαῖς ὕλαις καὶ παρασκευαῖς περιουσιάζοντα τὸν ἀθλητὴν τῶν καλῶν ἐπιτηδευμάτων εἰσάγει χαμευνοῦντα καὶ λίθῳ προσκεφαλαίῳ χρώμενον καὶ μικρὸν ὕστερον ἐν ταῖς εὐχαῖς ἄρτον καὶ ἱμάτιον, τὸν φύσεως πλοῦτον, αἰτούμενον (Gen. 28, 20), ἐπειδὴ τὸν ἐν ταῖς κεναῖς δόξαις ἐχλεύαζεν ἀεὶ καὶ τοὺς θαυμαστικῶς ἔχοντας αὐτοῦ κατεκερτόμει; οὗτός ἐστι παράδειγμα ἀρχέτυπον ἀσκητικῆς
1:127ψυχῆς, ἐκτεθηλυσμένῳ καὶ ἀνδρογύνῳ παντὶ πολέμιος. ὁ μὲν οὖν τοῦ φιλοπόνου καὶ φιλαρέτου πρόχειρος ἔπαινος εἴρηται, τὸ δὲ κατὰ σύμβολον μηνυόμενον ἐρευνητέον. εἰδέναι δὲ νῦν προσήκει, ὅτι ὁ θεῖος τόπος καὶ ἡ ἱερὰ χώρα πλήρης ἀσωμάτων ἐστὶ λόγων·
1:128ψυχαὶ δ’ εἰσὶν ἀθάνατοι οἱ λόγοι οὗτοι. τούτων δὴ τῶν λόγων ἕνα λαβών, ἀριστίνδην ἐπιλεγόμενος τὸν ἀνωτάτω καὶ ὡσανεὶ σώματος ἡνωμένου κεφαλὴν πλησίον ἱδρύεται διανοίας τῆς ἑαυτοῦ (Gen. 28, 11)· καὶ γὰρ αὕτη τρόπον τινὰ τῆς ψυχῆς ἐστι κεφαλή. ποιεῖ δὲ τοῦτο πρόφασιν μὲν ὡς κοιμησόμενος, τὸ δ’ ἀληθὲς ὡς ἀναπαυσόμενος ἐπὶ λόγῳ θείῳ καὶ σύμπαντα ἑαυτοῦ τὸν βίον κουφότατον ἄχθος ἐπαναθήσων ἐκείνῳ.
1:129ὁ δὲ ἄσμενος ἐπακούει καὶ δέχεται τὸν ἀθλητὴν ὡς φοιτητὴν ἐσόμενον τὸ πρῶτον, εἶθ’ ὅταν αὐτοῦ τὴν ἐπιτηδειότητα τῆς φύσεως ἀποδέξηται, χειροδοτεῖ τρόπον ἀλείπτου καὶ πρὸς τὰ γυμνάσια καλεῖ, καὶ διερειδόμενος παλαίειν ἀναγκάζει, μέχρις ἂν ἀνανταγώνιστον αὐτῷ ῥώμην ἐγκατασκευάσῃ, τὰ ὦτα θείαις ἐπιπνοίαις μεταβαλὼν εἰς ὄμματα καὶ καλέσας αὐτὸν μεταχαραχθέντα καινὸν τύπον Ἰσραήλ, ὁρῶντα. τότε καὶ τὸν νικητήριον ἐπιτίθησιν αὐτῷ στέφανον.
1:130ὁ δὲ στέφανος ἔκτοπον ἔχει καὶ ξένον καὶ ἴσως οὐκ εὔφημον ὄνομα· καλεῖται γὰρ ὑπὸ τοῦ ἀγωνοθέτου νάρκα. λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι "ἐνάρκησε τὸ πλάτος“ (Gen. 32,25), βραβείων καὶ κηρυγμάτων καὶ τῶν ἐν τιμαῖς ἁπάντων θαυμασιώτατον ἀριστεῖον·
1:131εἰ γὰρ ἡ δυνάμεως ἀκαθαιρέτου ψυχὴ μεταλαβοῦσα καὶ τελειωθεῖσα ἐν ἄθλοις ἀρετῶν καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν ὅρον αὐτὸν ἀφικομένη τοῦ καλοῦ μὴ πρὸς ὕψος ὑπὸ μεγαλαυχίας ἀρθείη μηδ’ ἀκροβατοῦσα ἐπικομπάζοι, ὡς ἀρτίοις ποσὶ μακρὰ βαίνειν δυναμένη, ναρκήσειε δὲ καὶ σταλείη τὸ εὐρυνθὲν οἰήσει πλάτος, εἶθ’ ἑκουσίως ὑποσκελίσασα ἑαυτὴν χωλεύοι, τῶν ἀσωμάτων ὅπως ὑστερίζοι φύσεων, ἡττᾶσθαι δοκοῦσα νικηφορήσει.
1:132τὸ γὰρ πρεσβείων ἐξίστασθαι γνώμῃ μᾶλλον ἢ ἀνάγκῃ τοῖς ἀμείνοσιν λυσιτελέστατον νενόμισται, ἐπεὶ καὶ τὰ δευτερεῖα τῶν ἐν τῷδε τῷ ἀγῶνι τιθεμένων ἄθλων τὰ πρῶτα τῶν ἐν ἑτέροις ἀξιώματος μεγέθει πλεῖστον ὅσον ὑπερβάλλει.
1:133Τὸ μὲν δὴ προοίμιον τῆς θεοπέμπτου φαντασίας ὧδ’ ἔχει, τρέπεσθαι δ’ ἐπ’ αὐτὴν καιρὸς ἤδη καὶ τῶν ἐμφερομένων ἀκριβοῦν ἕκαστον. „ἐνυπνιάσθη“ φησί „καὶ ἰδοὺ κλῖμαξ ἐστηριγμένη ἐν τῇ γῇ, ἧς ἡ κεφαλὴ ἀφικνεῖτο εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, καὶ οἱ ἄγγελοι τοῦ θεοῦ ἀνέβαινον καὶ κατέβαινον ἐπ’ αὐτῆς· ὁ δὲ κύριος ἐπεστήρικτο ἐπ’ αὐτῆς“ (Gen. 28, 12. 13).
1:134κλῖμαξ τοίνυν ἐν μὲν τῷ κόσμῳ συμβολικῶς λέγεται ὁ ἀήρ, οὗ βάσις μέν ἐστι γῆ, κορυφὴ δ’ οὐρανός· ἀπὸ γὰρ τῆς σεληνιακῆς σφαίρας, ἣν ἐσχάτην μὲν τῶν κατ’ οὐρανὸν κύκλων, πρώτην δὲ τῶν πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἀναγράφουσιν οἱ φροντισταὶ τῶν μετεώρων, ἄχρι γῆς ἐσχάτης ὁ ἀὴρ πάντῃ ταθεὶς ἔφθακεν.
1:135οὗτος δ’ ἐστὶ ψυχῶν ἀσωμάτων οἶκος, ἐπειδὴ πάντα τῷ ποιητῇ τὰ τοῦ κόσμου μέρη καλὸν ἔδοξεν εἶναι ζῴων ἀναπληρῶσαι. διὰ τοῦτο γῇ μὲν τὰ χερσαῖα ἐγκατεσκεύαζε, θαλάτταις δὲ καὶ ποταμοῖς τὰ ἔνυδρα, οὐρανῷ δὲ τοὺς ἀστέρας — καὶ γὰρ ἕκαστος τούτων οὐ μόνον ζῷον, ἀλλὰ καὶ νοῦς ὅλος δι’ ὅλων ὁ καθαρώτατος εἶναι λέγεται —· ὥστε καὶ ἐν τῷ λοιπῷ τμήματι τοῦ παντός, ἀέρι, ζῷα γέγονεν. εἰ δὲ μὴ αἰσθήσει καταληπτά, τί τοῦτο; καὶ ψυχὴ γὰρ ἀόρατον.
1:136καὶ μὴν εἰκός γε ἀέρα γῆς μᾶλλον καὶ ὕδατος ζῳοτροφεῖν, διότι καὶ τὰ ἐν ἐκείνοις οὗτος ἐψύχωσεν· ἐποίει γὰρ αὐτὸν ὁ τεχνίτης ἀκινήτων μὲν σωμάτων ἕξιν, κινουμένων δὲ ἀφαντάστως φύσιν, ἤδη δὲ ὁρμῇ καὶ φαντασίᾳ χρῆσθαι δυναμένων ψυχήν.
1:137οὐκ ἄτοπον οὖν, δι’ οὗ τὰ ἄλλα ἐψυχώθη, ψυχῶν ἀμοιρεῖν; διὸ μηδεὶς τὴν ἀρίστην φύσιν ζῴων τοῦ ἀρίστου τῶν περιγείων, ἀέρος, ἀφαιρείσθω· οὐ γὰρ μόνος ἐκ πάντων ἔρημος οὗτος, ἀλλ’ οἷα πόλις εὐανδρεῖ πολίτας ἀφθάρτους καὶ ἀθανάτους ψυχὰς ἔχων ἰσαρίθμους ἄστροις.
1:138τούτων τῶν ψυχῶν αἱ μὲν κατίασιν ἐνδεθησόμεναι σώμασι θνητοῖς, ὅσαι προσγειότατοι καὶ φιλοσώματοι, αἱ δ’ ἀνέρχονται, διακριθεῖσαι πάλιν κατὰ τοὺς ὑπὸ φύσεως ὁρισθέντας ἀριθμοὺς καὶ χρόνους.
1:139τούτων αἱ μὲν τὰ σύντροφα καὶ συνήθη τοῦ θνητοῦ βίου ποθοῦσαι παλινδρομοῦσιν αὖθις, αἱ δὲ πολλὴν φλυαρίαν αὐτοῦ καταγνοῦσαι δεσμωτήριον μὲν καὶ τύμβον ἐκάλεσαν τὸ σῶμα, φυγοῦσαι δ’ ὥσπερ ἐξ εἱρκτῆς ἢ μνήματος ἄνω κούφοις πτεροῖς πρὸς αἰθέρα ἐξαρθεῖσαι μετεωροπολοῦσι τὸν αἰῶνα.
1:140ἄλλαι δ’ εἰσὶ καθαρώταται καὶ ἄρισται, μειζόνων φρονημάτων καὶ θειοτέρων ἐπιλαχοῦσαι, μηδενὸς μὲν τῶν περιγείων ποτὲ ὀρεχθεῖσαι τὸ παράπαν, ὕπαρχοι δὲ τοῦ πανηγεμόνος, ὥσπερ μεγάλου βασιλέως ἀκοαὶ καὶ ὄψεις, ἐφορῶσαι πάντα καὶ ἀκούουσαι.
1:141ταύτας δαίμονας μὲν οἱ ἄλλοι φιλόσοφοι, ὁ δὲ ἱερὸς λόγος ἀγγέλους εἴωθε καλεῖν προσφυεστέρῳ χρώμενος ὀνόματι· καὶ γὰρ τὰς τοῦ πατρὸς ἐπικελεύσεις τοῖς ἐγγόνοις καὶ τὰς τῶν ἐγγόνων χρείας τῷ πατρὶ διαγγέλλουσι.
1:142παρὸ καὶ ἀνερχομένους αὐτοὺς καὶ κατιόντας εἰσήγαγεν, οὐκ ἐπειδὴ τῶν μηνυσόντων ὁ πάντῃ ἐφθακὼς θεὸς δεῖται, ἀλλ’ ὅτι τοῖς ἐπικήροις ἡμῖν συνέφερε μεσίταις καὶ διαιτηταῖς λόγοις χρῆσθαι διὰ τὸ τεθηπέναι καὶ πεφρικέναι τὸν παμπρύτανιν καὶ τὸ μέγιστον ἀρχῆς αὐτοῦ κράτος.
1:143οὗ λαβόντες ἔννοιαν ἐδεήθημέν ποτέ τινος τῶν μεσιτῶν λέγοντες· „λάλησον σὺ ἡμῖν, καὶ μὴ λαλείτω πρὸς ἡμᾶς ὁ θεός, μή ποτε ἀποθάνωμεν“ (Exod. 20, 19). οὐ γὰρ ὅτι κολάσεις, ἀλλ’ οὐδ’ ὑπερβαλλούσας καὶ ἀκράτους εὐεργεσίας χωρῆσαι δυνάμεθα, ἃς ἂν αὐτὸς προτείνῃ δι’ ἑαυτοῦ μὴ χρώμενος ὑπηρέταις ἄλλοις.
1:144παγκάλως δὲ ἐστηριγμένον ἐν τῇ γῇ διὰ συμβόλου κλίμακος φαντασιοῦται τὸν ἀέρα· τὰς γὰρ ἀναδιδομένας ἐκ γῆς ἀναθυμιάσεις λεπτυνομένας ἐξαεροῦσθαι συμβέβηκεν, ὥστε βάσιν μὲν καὶ ῥίζαν ἀέρος εἶναι γῆν, κεφαλὴν δὲ οὐρανόν.
1:145λέγεται γοῦν, ὅτι σελήνη πίλημα μὲν ἄκρατον αἰθέρος οὔκ ἐστιν, ὡς ἕκαστος τῶν ἄλλων ἀστέρων, κρᾶμα δὲ ἔκ τε αἰθερώδους οὐσίας καὶ ἀερώδους· καὶ τό γε ἐμφαινόμενον αὐτῇ μέλαν, ὃ καλοῦσί τινες πρόσωπον, οὐδὲν ἄλλο εἶναι ἢ τὸν ἀναμεμιγμένον ἀέρα, ὃς κατὰ φύσιν μέλας ὢν ἄχρις οὐρανοῦ τείνεται.
1:146ἡ μὲν οὖν ἐν κόσμῳ λεγομένη συμβολικῶς κλῖμαξ τοιαύτη ἐστί, τὴν δ’ ἐν ἀνθρώποις σκοποῦντες εὑρήσομεν τὴν ψυχήν, ἧς βάσις μὲν τὸ ὡσανεὶ γεῶδές ἐστιν, αἴσθησις, κεφαλὴ δ’ ὡς ἂν τὸ οὐράνιον, ὁ καθαρώτατος νοῦς.
1:147ἄνω δὲ καὶ κάτω διὰ πάσης αὐτῆς οἱ τοῦ θεοῦ λόγοι χωροῦσιν ἀδιαστάτως, ὁπότε μὲν ἀνέρχοιντο, συνανασπῶντες αὐτὴν καὶ τοῦ θνητοῦ διαζευγνύντες καὶ τὴν θέαν ὧν ἄξιον ὁρᾶν μόνων ἐπιδεικνύμενοι, ὁπότε δὲ κατέρχοιντο, οὐ καταβάλλοντες — οὔτε γὰρ θεὸς οὔτε λόγος θεῖος ζημίας αἴτιος —, ἀλλὰ συγκαταβαίνοντες διὰ φιλανθρωπίαν καὶ ἔλεον τοῦ γένους ἡμῶν, ἐπικουρίας ἕνεκα καὶ συμμαχίας, ἵνα καὶ τὴν ἔτι ὥσπερ ἐν ποταμῷ, τῷ σώματι, φορουμένην ψυχὴν σωτήριον πνέοντες ἀναζωῶσι.
1:148ταῖς μὲν δὴ τῶν ἄκρως κεκαθαρμένων διανοίαις ἀψοφητὶ μόνος ἀοράτως ὁ τῶν ὅλων ἡγεμὼν ἐμπεριπατεῖ — καὶ γάρ ἐστι χρησθὲν τῷ σοφῷ θεοπρόπιον, ἐν ᾧ λέγεται· "περιπατήσω ἐν ὑμῖν, καὶ ἔσομαι ὑμῶν θεός“ (Lev. 26, 12) —, ταῖς δὲ τῶν ἔτι ἀπολουομένων, μήπω δὲ κατὰ τὸ παντελὲς ἐκνιψαμένων τὴν ῥυπῶσαν καὶ κεκηλιδωμένην ἐν σώμασι βαρέσι ζωὴν ἄγγελοι, λόγοι θεῖοι, φαιδρύνοντες αὐτὰς τοῖς καλοκἀγαθίας δόγμασιν.
1:149ὅσα δὲ ἐξοικίζεται κακῶν οἰκητόρων στίφη, ἵνα εἷς ὁ ἀγαθὸς εἰσοικίσηται, δῆλόν ἐστι. σπούδαζε οὖν, ὦ ψυχή, θεοῦ οἶκος γενέσθαι, ἱερὸν ἅγιον, ἐνδιαίτημα κάλλιστον· ἴσως γάρ, ἴσως ὃν ὁ κόσμος ἅπας, καὶ σὺ οἰκοδεσπότην σχήσεις ἐπιμελούμενον τῆς ἰδίας οἰκίας, ὡς εὐερκεστάτη καὶ ἀπήμων εἰσαεὶ διαφυλάττοιτο.
1:150ἴσως δὲ καὶ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ βίον ὁ ἀσκητὴς φαντασιοῦται κλίμακι ἐοικότα· φύσει γὰρ ἀνώμαλον πρᾶγμα ἄσκησις, τοτὲ μὲν προϊοῦσα εἰς ὕψος, τοτὲ δ’ ὑποστρέφουσα πρὸς τοὐναντίον, καὶ τοτὲ μὲν καθάπερ ναῦς εὐπλοίᾳ τῇ τοῦ βίου, τοτὲ δὲ δυσπλοίᾳ χρωμένη. ἑτερήμερος γάρ, ὡς ἔφη τις, τῶν ἀσκητῶν ὁ βίος, ἄλλοτε μὲν ζῶν καὶ ἐγρηγορώς, ἄλλοτε δὲ τεθνεὼς ἢ κοιμώμενος.
Book 1, §§126–150
1:126Do you not see, that even now, also, the sacred historian represents the practiser of honourable pursuits, who abounds in all royal materials and appointments, as sleeping on the ground, and using a stone for his pillow; and a little further on, he speaks of him as asking in his prayers for bread and a cloak, the necessary wealth of nature? like one who has at all times held in contempt, the man who dwells among vain opinions, and who is inclined to revile all those who are disposed to admire him; this man is the archetypal pattern of the soul which is devoted to the practise of virtue, and an enemy of every effeminate person.
1:127Hitherto I have been uttering the praises of the man devoted to labour and to virtue, as it occurred to me naturally; but now we must examine what is symbolically signified under the expressions made use of. Now it is well that we should know, that the divine place and the sacred region are full of incorporeal intelligences; and these intelligences are immortal souls.
1:128Taking then one of these intelligences, and selecting one of them according as it appears to be the most excellent, this lover of virtue, of whom we are speaking, applies it to our own mind, to it as to the head of a united body; for, indeed, the mind is in a manner the head of the soul; and he does this, using the pretext indeed as if he were going to sleep, but, in reality, as being about to rest upon the word of God, and to place the whole of his life as the lightest possible burden upon it;
1:129and it listens to him gladly, and receives the labourer in the paths of virtue at first, as if he were going to become a disciple; then when he has shown his approbation of the dexterity of his nature, he gives him his hand, like a gymnastic trainer, and invites him to the gymnasia, and standing firmly, compels him to wrestle with him, until he has rendered his strength so great as to be irresistible, changing his ears by the divine influences into eyes, and calling this newly-modelled disposition Israel, that is, the man who sees.
1:130Then also he crowns him with the garland of victory. But this garland has a singular and foreign, and, perhaps, not altogether a well-omened name, for it is called by the president of the games torpor, for it is said, that the breadth became torpid of all the rewards and of the proclamations of the heralds, and of all those most wonderful prizes for preeminent excellence which are had in honour;
1:131for the soul which has received a share of irresistible power, and which has been made perfect in the contests of virtue, and which has arrived at the very furthest limit of what is honourable, will never be unduly elated or puffed up by arrogance, nor stand upon tiptoes, and boast as if it were well to make vast strides with bare feet; but the breadth which was extended wide by opinion, will become torpid and contracted, and then will voluntarily succumb and yield to tameness, so as being classed in an inferior order to that of the incorporeal natures, it may carry off the victory while appearing to be defeated;
1:132for it is accounted a most honourable thing to yield the palm to those who are superior to one’s self, voluntarily rather than through compulsion; for it is incredible how greatly the second prize in this contest is superior in real dignity and importance to the first prize in the others.
1:133Such then may be said, by way of preface, to the discussion of that description of visions which are sent from God. But it is time now to turn to the subject itself, and to investigate, with accuracy, every portion of it. The scripture therefore says, "And he dreamed a dream. And behold a ladder was planted firmly on the ground, the head of which reached to heaven, and the angels of God were ascending and descending along it."
1:134By the ladder in this thing, which is called the world, is figuratively understood the air, the foundation of which is the earth, and the head is the heaven; for the large interior space, which being extended in every direction, reaches from the orb of the moon, which is described as the most remote of the order in heaven, but the nearest to us by those who contemplate sublime objects, down to the earth, which is the lowest of such bodies, is the air.
1:135This air is the abode of incorporeal souls, since it seemed good to the Creator of the universe to fill all the parts of the world with living creatures. On this account he prepared the terrestrial animals for the earth, the aquatic animals for the sea and for the rivers, and the stars for the heaven; for every one of these bodies is not merely a living animal, but is also properly described as the very purest and most universal mind extending through the universe; so that there are living creatures in that other section of the universe, the air. And if these things are not comprehensible by the outward senses, what of that? For the soul also is invisible.
1:136And yet it is probable that the air should nourish living animals even more than the land or the water. Why so? Because it is the air which has given vitality to those animals which live on the earth and in the water. For the Creator of the universe formed the air so that it should be the habit of those bodies which are immoveable, and the nature of those which are moved in an invisible manner, and the soul of such as are able to exert an impetus and visible sense of their own.
1:137Is it not then absurd that that element, by means of which the other elements have been filled with vitality, should itself be destitute of living things? Therefore let no one deprive the most excellent nature of living creatures of the most excellent of those elements which surround the earth; that is to say, of the air. For not only is it not alone deserted by all things besides, but rather, like a populous city, it is full of imperishable and immortal citizens, souls equal in number to the stars.
1:138Now of these souls some descend upon the earth with a view to being bound up in mortal bodies, those namely which are most nearly connected with the earth, and which are lovers of the body. But some soar upwards, being again distinguished according to the definitions and times which have been appointed by nature.
1:139Of these, those which are influenced by a desire for mortal life, and which have been familiarised to it, again return to it. But others, condemning the body of great folly and trifling, have pronounced it a prison and a grave, and, flying from it as from a house of correction or a tomb, have raised themselves aloft on light wings towards the aether, and have devoted their whole lives to sublime speculations.
1:140There are others, again, the purest and most excellent of all, which have received greater and more divine intellects, never by any chance desiring any earthly thing whatever, but being as it were lieutenants of the Ruler of the universe, as though they were the eyes and ears of the great king, beholding and listening to everything.
1:141Now philosophers in general are wont to call these demons, but the sacred scripture calls them angels, using a name more in accordance with nature. For indeed they do report (διαγγέλλουσι) the injunctions of the father to his children, and the necessities of the children to the father.
1:142And it is in reference to this employment of theirs that the holy scripture has represented them as ascending and descending, not because God, who knows everything before any other being, has any need of interpreters; but because it is the lot of us miserable mortals to use speech as a mediator and intercessor; because of our standing in awe of and fearing the Ruler of the universe, and the all-powerful might of his authority;
1:143having received a notion of which he once entreated one of those mediators, saying: "Do thou speak for us, and let not God speak to us, lest we die." For not only are we unable to endure his chastisements, but we cannot bear even his excessive and unmodified benefits, which he himself proffers us of his own accord, without employing the ministrations of any other beings.
1:144Very admirably therefore does Moses represent the air under the figurative symbol of a ladder, as planted solidly in the earth and reaching up to heaven. For it comes to pass that the evaporations which are given forth by the earth becoming rarefied, are dissolved into air, so that the earth is the foundation and root of the air, and that the heaven is its head.
1:145Accordingly it is said that the moon is not an unadulterated consolidation of pure aether, as each of the other stars is, but is rather a combination of the aether-like and air-like essence. For that black spot which appears in it, which some call a face, is nothing else but the air mingled with it, which is by nature black, and which extends as far as heaven.
1:146The ladder therefore in the world which is here spoken of in this symbolical manner, was something of this sort. But if we carefully investigate the soul which exists in men, the foundation of which is something corporeal, and as it were earth-like, we shall find that foundation to be the outward sense; and the head to be something heavenly, as it were the most pure mind.
1:147But all the words of God move incessantly upwards and downwards through the whole of it, dragging it upwards along with them whenever they soar aloft, and separating it from whatever is mortal, and exhibiting to it a sight of those things which alone are worthy of being beheld; but yet not casting it down when they descend. For neither is God himself, nor the word of God, worthy of blame. But they join with them in their descent, by reason of their love for mankind and compassion for our race, for the sake of being their allies and rendering them assistance, in order that by breathing in a saving inspiration they may recall to life the soul which was still being tossed about in the body as in the river.
1:148Now the God and governor of the universe does by himself and alone walk about invisibly and noiselessly in the minds of those who are purified in the highest degree. For there is extant a prophecy which was delivered to the wise man, in which it is said: "I will walk among you, and I will be your God." But the angels—the words of God—move about in the minds of those persons who are still in a process of being washed, but who have not yet completely washed off the life which defiles them, and which is polluted by the contact of their heavy bodies, making them look pure and brilliant to the eyes of virtue.
1:149But it is plain enough what vast numbers of evils are driven out, and what a multitude of wicked inhabitants is expelled in order that one good man may be introduced to dwell there. Do thou, therefore, O my soul, hasten to become the abode of God, his holy temple, to become strong from having been most weak, powerful from having been powerless, wise from having been foolish, and very reasonable from having been doting and childless.
1:150And perhaps too the practiser of virtue represents his own life as like to a ladder; for the practise of anything is naturally an anomalous thing, since at one time it soars up to a height, and at another it turns downwards in a contrary direction; and at one time has a fair voyage like a ship, and at another has but an unfavourable passage; for, as some one says, the life of those who practise virtue is full of vicissitudes: being at one time alive and waking, and at another dead or sleeping.
Book 1, §§151–175
1:151καὶ τάχα οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ τοῦτο λέγεται· σοφοὶ μὲν γὰρ τὸν ὀλύμπιον καὶ οὐράνιον χῶρον ἔλαχον οἰκεῖν, ἄνω φοιτᾶν ἀεὶ μεμαθηκότες, κακοὶ δὲ τοὺς ἐν Ἅιδου μυχούς, ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἄχρι τέλους ἀποθνῄσκειν ἐπιτετηδευκότες καὶ εἰς γῆρας ἐκ σπαργάνων φθορᾶς ἐθάδες ὄντες.
1:152οἱ δ’ ἀσκηταὶ — μεθόριοι γὰρ τῶν ἄκρων εἰσὶν — ἄνω καὶ κάτω πολλάκις ὡς ἐπὶ κλίμακος βαδίζουσιν, ἢ ὑπὸ τῆς κρείττονος μοίρας ἀνελκόμενοι ἢ ὑπὸ τῆς χείρονος ἀντισπώμενοι, μέχρις ἂν ὁ τῆς ἁμίλλης καὶ διαμάχης ταύτης βραβευτὴς θεὸς ἀναδῷ τὰ βραβεῖα τάξει τῇ βελτίονι, τὴν ἐναντίαν εἰσάπαν καθελών.
1:153ἐμφαίνεται δ’ ἔτι καὶ τοιοῦτον εἴδωλον, ὅπερ οὐκ ἄξιον ἡσυχασθῆναι. τὰ ἀνθρώπων πράγματα κλίμακι πέφυκεν ἐξομοιοῦσθαι διὰ τὴν ἀνώμαλον αὐτῶν φοράν.
1:154ἡ μία γάρ, ὡς ἔφη τις, ἡμέρα τὸν μὲν καθεῖλεν ὑψόθεν, τὸν δὲ ἦρεν ἄνω, μηδενὸς ἐν ὁμοίῳ πεφυκότος μένειν τῶν παρ’ ἡμῖν, ἀλλὰ παντοίας μεταβαλλόντων τροπάς.
1:155ἢ οὐκ ἄρχοντες μὲν ἐξ ἰδιωτῶν, ἰδιῶται δ’ ἐξ ἀρχόντων, πένητες δ’ ἐκ πλουσίων καὶ ἐκ πενήτων πολυχρήματοι καὶ ἔνδοξοι μὲν ἐξ ἠμελημένων, ἐπιφανέστατοι δὲ ἐξ ἀδόξων ἀεὶ γίνονται καὶ ἰσχυροὶ μὲν ἐξ ἀσθενῶν, ἐκ δὲ ἀδυνάτων δυνατοὶ καὶ συνετοὶ μὲν ἐξ ἀφραινόντων, εὐλογιστότατοι δὲ ἐκ παραπαιόντων·
1:156καὶ ὁδός τις ἥδ’ ἐστὶν ἄνω καὶ κάτω τῶν ἀνθρωπείων πραγμάτων, ἀστάτοις καὶ ἀνιδρύτοις χρωμένη συντυχίαις, ὧν τὸ ἀνώμαλον οὐκ ἀδήλοις ἀλλὰ σαφέσι τεκμηρίοις ὁ ἀψευδέστατος ἐλέγχει χρόνος.
1:157Ἐμήνυε δὲ τὸ ὄναρ ἐστηριγμένον ἐπὶ τῆς κλίμακος τὸν ἀρχάγγελον, κύριον· ὑπεράνω γὰρ ὡς ἅρματος ἡνίοχον ἢ ὡς νεὼς κυβερνήτην ὑποληπτέον ἵστασθαι τὸ ὂν ἐπὶ σωμάτων, ἐπὶ ψυχῶν, ἐπὶ πραγμάτων, ἐπὶ λόγων, ἐπὶ ἀγγέλων, ἐπὶ γῆς, ἐπ’ ἀέρος, ἐπ’ οὐρανοῦ, ἐπ’ αἰσθητῶν δυνάμεων, ἐπ’ ἀοράτων φύσεων, ὅσαπερ θεατὰ καὶ ἀθέατα· τὸν γὰρ κόσμον ἅπαντα ἐξάψας ἑαυτοῦ καὶ ἀναρτήσας τὴν τοσαύτην ἡνιοχεῖ φύσιν.
1:158μηδεὶς δ’ ἀκούων, ὅτι ἐπεστήρικτο, νομισάτω τι συνεργεῖν θεῷ πρὸς τὸ παγίως στῆναι, ἀλλ’ ἐκεῖνο λογισάσθω, ὅτι τὸ δηλούμενον ἴσον ἐστὶ τῷ στήριγμα καὶ ἔρεισμα καὶ ὀχυρότης καὶ βεβαιότης ἁπάντων ἐστὶν ὁ ἀσφαλὴς θεός, ἐνσφραγιζόμενος οἷς ἂν ἐθέλῃ τὸ ἀσάλευτον· ἐπερείδοντος γὰρ καὶ συστηρίζοντος αὐτοῦ μένει τὰ συσταθέντα ἀνώλεθρα κραταιῶς.
1:159ὁ τοίνυν ἐπιβεβηκὼς τῇ οὐρανοῦ κλίμακι λέγει τῷ φαντασιουμένῳ τὸ ὄναρ· „ἐγὼ κύριος ὁ θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ τοῦ πατρός σου καὶ ὁ θεὸς Ἰσαάκ· μὴ φοβοῦ“ (Gen. 28, 13). ὁ χρησμὸς οὗτος τὸ τέρμα τῆς ἀσκητικῆς ψυχῆς καὶ βεβαιότατον ἔρεισμα ἦν, ὃς αὐτὴν ἀνεδίδασκεν, ὅτι ὁ τῶν ὅλων κύριος καὶ θεὸς ἀμφότερα ταῦτα τοῦ γένους ἐστὶν αὐτῷ, πατέρων καὶ πάππων ἐπιγραφεὶς καὶ ἐπικληθεὶς ἑκάτερον, ἵνα τὸν αὐτὸν ὅ τε κόσμος ἅπας καὶ ὁ φιλάρετος ἔχῃ κλῆρον· ἐπεὶ καὶ λέλεκται· „κύριος αὐτὸς κλῆρος αὐτῷ“ (Deut. 10, 9).
1:160Μὴ νομίσῃς δὲ παρέργως τοῦ μὲν Ἀβραὰμ νυνὶ λέγεσθαι κύριον καὶ θεόν, τοῦ δὲ Ἰσαὰκ θεὸν αὐτὸ μόνον. ὁ μὲν γὰρ αὐτηκόου καὶ αὐτοδιδάκτου καὶ αὐτομαθοῦς φύσει περιγινομένης σύμβολον ἐπιστήμης ἐστίν, ὁ δὲ Ἀβραὰμ διδασκομένης· καὶ τῷ μὲν αὐτόχθονι καὶ αὐθιγενεῖ συμβέβηκεν εἶναι, τῷ δὲ μετανάστῃ καὶ ἐπηλύτῳ.
1:161τὴν γὰρ χαλδαΐζουσαν ἀλλογενῆ καὶ ἀλλόφυλον γλῶτταν τῶν περὶ ἀστρονομίαν μετεωρολεσχῶν ἀπολιπὼν ἐπὶ τὴν ἁρμόττουσαν λογικῷ ζῴῳ παρεγένετο, τὴν τοῦ πάντων αἰτίου θεραπείαν.
1:162οὗτος μὲν δὴ ὁ τρόπος δυεῖν δυνάμεων τῶν ἐπιμελησομένων ἐστὶ χρεῖος, ἡγεμονίας καὶ εὐεργεσίας, ἵνα τῷ μὲν κράτει τοῦ ἡγεμόνος ὑπακούῃ τῶν νομοθετουμένων, τῷ δὲ χαριστικῷ μεγάλα ὠφελῆται, ὁ δ’ ἕτερος τῆς κατὰ τὸ χαρίζεσθαι μόνης· οὐ γὰρ ὑπὸ νουθετούσης ἀρχῆς ἐβελτιώθη, φύσει περιπεποιημένος τὸ καλόν, ἀλλὰ διὰ τὰς ὀμβρηθείσας ἄνωθεν δωρεὰς ἀγαθὸς καὶ τέλειος ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἐγένετο.
1:163χαριστικῆς μὲν οὖν δυνάμεως θεός, βασιλικῆς δὲ κύριος ὄνομα. τί οὖν ἄν τις εἴποι πρεσβύτερον ἀγαθὸν ἢ τὸ τυχεῖν ἀκράτου καὶ ἀμιγοῦς εὐεργεσίας, τί δὲ νεώτερον ἢ τὸ κεκραμένης ἔκ τε ἡγεμονίας καὶ δωρεᾶς; ὅ μοι δοκεῖ συνιδὼν ὁ ἀσκητὴς εὔξασθαι θαυμασιωτάτην εὐχήν, ἵνα αὐτῷ γένηται κύριος εἰς θεόν (Gen. 28, 21)· ἐβούλετο γὰρ μηκέτι ὡς ἄρχοντα εὐλαβεῖσθαι, ἀλλ’ ὡς εὐεργέτην ἀγαπητικῶς τιμᾶν.
1:164ἆρ’ οὐχὶ τούτοις καὶ τοῖς παραπλησίοις εἰκὸς ἦν καὶ τοὺς τυφλοὺς διάνοιαν ὀξυδορκήσειν, πρὸς τῶν ἱερωτάτων ἐνομματουμένους λογίων, ὡς φυσιογνωμονεῖν καὶ μὴ μόνον τοῖς ῥητοῖς ἐφορμεῖν; ἀλλὰ κἂν ἡμεῖς καμμύσαντες τὸ τῆς ψυχῆς ὄμμα μὴ σπουδάζωμεν ἢ μὴ δυνώμεθα ἀναβλέπειν, αὐτός, ὦ ἱεροφάντα, ὑπήχει καὶ ἐπιστάτει καὶ ἐγχρίων μή ποτε ἀπείπῃς, ἕως ἐπὶ τὸ κεκρυμμένον ἱερῶν λόγων φέγγος ἡμᾶς μυσταγωγῶν ἐπιδείξῃς τὰ κατάκλειστα καὶ ἀτελέστοις ἀόρατα κάλλη.
1:165σοὶ μὲν δὴ ταῦτα ποιεῖν ἐμπρεπές· ψυχαὶ δ’ ὅσαι θείων ἐρώτων ἐγεύσασθε, καθάπερ ἐκ βαθέος ὕπνου διαναστᾶσαι καὶ τὴν ἀχλὺν ἀποσκεδάσασαι πρὸς τὴν περίβλεπτον θέαν ἐπείχθητε μεθέμεναι τὸν βραδὺν καὶ μελλητὴν ὄκνον, ἵν’ ὅσα θεάματα καὶ ἀκούσματα τῆς ὑμετέρας ἕνεκα ὠφελείας ὁ ἀγωνοθέτης εὐτρέπισε κατανοήσητε.
1:166Μυρία μὲν οὖν ἐστιν ἀοίδιμα τῶν πρὸς ἐπίδειξιν, ἓν δ’ οὖν καὶ τὸ λεχθὲν πρὸ μικροῦ· τὸν μὲν γὰρ γένει πάππον τοῦ ἀσκητοῦ πατέρα εἶπε τὸ λόγιον, τῷ δ’ ὡς ἀληθῶς πατρὶ τὸ τοῦ γεννήσαντος οὐκ ἐπεφήμισεν ὄνομα. λέγει γάρ· „ἐγὼ κύριος ὁ θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ τοῦ πατρός σου„ — καίτοι πάππος οὗτος ἦν — καὶ πάλιν „ὁ θεὸς Ἰσαάκ„ (Gen. 28, 13), εἶτ’ οὐ προστίθησι „τοῦ πατρός σου„.
1:167οὔκουν ἄξιον τὴν τούτων αἰτίαν ἐρευνῆσαι; πάνυ γε. τίς οὖν ἐστι, μὴ παρέργως σκοπήσωμεν. τὴν ἀρετὴν ἢ φύσει ἢ ἀσκήσει ἢ μαθήσει περιγίνεσθαί φησι, διὸ καὶ τρεῖς τοὺς γενάρχας τοῦ ἔθνους σοφοὺς πάντας ἀνέγραφεν, ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς αὐτῆς οὐχ ὁρμηθέντας ἰδέας, πρὸς δὲ τὸ αὐτὸ τέλος ἐπειχθέντας.
1:168ὁ μὲν γὰρ πρεσβύτατος αὐτῶν Ἀβραὰμ ἡγεμόνι ὁδοῦ τῆς πρὸς τὸ καλὸν ἀγούσης ἐχρήσατο διδασκαλίᾳ, ὡς ἐν ἑτέροις, ὡς ἂν οἷόν τε ᾖ, δείξομεν, ὁ δὲ μέσος Ἰσαὰκ αὐτηκόῳ καὶ αὐτομαθεῖ τῇ φύσει, ὁ δὲ τρίτος Ἰακὼβ ἀσκητικαῖς μελέταις, καθ’ ἃς οἱ ἔναθλοι καὶ ἐναγώνιοι πόνοι.
1:169τριῶν οὖν τρόπων ὑπαρχόντων, ἐξ ὧν σοφία περιγίνεται, τοὺς ἄκρους μάλιστα συμβέβηκεν ἡνῶσθαι· τὸ γὰρ ἀσκήσει ἔγγονον τοῦ μαθήσει, τὸ δὲ φύσει συγγενὲς μὲν — ὑποβέβληται γὰρ ὡς ῥίζα πᾶσιν —, ἀνανταγωνίστου δὲ καὶ ἑτοίμου γέρως ἔλαχεν.
1:170ὥστε εἰκότως Ἀβραὰμ ὁ βελτιωθεὶς διδασκαλίᾳ πατὴρ Ἰακὼβ λέγεται, τοῦ μελέτῃ συγκροτηθέντος, οὐκ ἄνθρωπος ἀνθρώπου μᾶλλον ἢ δύναμις ἀκουστικὴ πρὸς μάθησιν ἑτοιμοτάτη δυνάμεως ἀσκητικῆς καὶ ἐπιτηδείου πρὸς ἄθλησιν.
1:171ἐὰν μέντοι ὁ ἀσκητὴς οὗτος εὐτόνως δράμῃ πρὸς τὸ τέλος καὶ τηλαυγῶς ἴδῃ ἃ πρότερον ἀμυδρῶς ὠνειροπόλει, μετατυπωθεὶς τῷ κρείττονι χαρακτῆρι καὶ προσαγορευθεὶς Ἰσραήλ, ὁ θεὸν ὁρῶν, ἀντὶ τοῦ πτερνίζοντος Ἰακὼβ πατέρα οὐκέτι τὸν μαθόντα Ἀβραάμ, ἀλλὰ τὸν φύσει γεννηθέντα ἀστεῖον Ἰσαὰκ ἐπιγράφεται.
1:172ταῦτα δὲ οὐκ ἐμός ἐστι μῦθος, ἀλλὰ χρησμὸς ἐν ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἀναγεγραμμένος στήλαις. „ἀπάρας“ γάρ φησιν „Ἰσραὴλ αὐτὸς καὶ πάντα τὰ αὐτοῦ ἦλθεν ἐπὶ τὸ φρέαρ τοῦ ὅρκου, καὶ ἔθυσε θυσίαν τῷ θεῷ τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἰσαάκ“ (Gen. 46, 1). ἆρ’ ἤδη κατανοεῖς, ὅτι οὐ περὶ φθαρτῶν ἀνθρώπων, ἀλλ’, ὡς ἐλέχθη, περὶ φύσεως πραγμάτων ἐστὶν ὁ παρὼν λόγος; ἰδοὺ γὰρ τὸ αὐτὸ ὑποκείμενον τοτὲ μὲν Ἰακὼβ ὀνομάζεται πατρὸς Ἀβραάμ, τοτὲ δὲ Ἰσραὴλ πατρὸς Ἰσαὰκ καλεῖται διὰ τὴν ἠκριβωμένην αἰτίαν.
1:173Εἰπὼν τοίνυν „ἐγὼ κύριος ὁ θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ τοῦ πατρός σου καὶ ὁ θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ“ ἐπιφέρει· „μὴ φοβοῦ“ (Gen. 28,13), κατὰ τὸ ἀκόλουθον· πῶς γὰρ ἔτι φοβηθησόμεθα, τὸ φόβου καὶ παντὸς πάθους λυτήριον σὲ τὸν ὑπερασπιστὴν ὅπλον ἔχοντες; ὃς καὶ τοὺς ἀρχετύπους τῆς παιδείας ἡμῶν τύπους ἀδηλουμένους ἐμόρφωσας, ἵν’ ἐμφανεῖς ὦσιν, Ἀβραὰμ μὲν διδάξας, Ἰσαὰκ δὲ γεννήσας· τοῦ μὲν γὰρ ὑφηγητής, τοῦ δὲ πατὴρ ὑπέμεινας ὀνομασθῆναι, τῷ μὲν τὴν γνωρίμου τάξιν, τῷ δὲ τὴν υἱοῦ παρασχών.
1:174διὰ τοῦτο καὶ τὴν γῆν, λέγω δὲ τὴν παμφορωτάτην καὶ εὐκαρποτάτην ἀρετήν, ἐφ’ ἧς καθεύδει ὁ ἀσκητὴς ἀναπαυόμενος τῷ τὸν μὲν αἰσθήσεως κοιμᾶσθαι βίον, τὸν δὲ ψυχῆς ἐγρηγορέναι, δώσειν ὁμολογεῖς (Gen. 28, 13), ἀποδεξάμενος αὐτοῦ τὴν εἰρηνικὴν ἀνάπαυσιν, ἣν οὐκ ἄνευ πολέμου καὶ τῶν ἐν πολέμῳ ταλαιπωριῶν εἵλετο, οὐχ ὅπλα βαστάζων καὶ ἀνθρώπους ἀναιρῶν, ἄπαγε, ἀλλὰ τὸ ἀντίπαλον ἀρετῆς παθῶν καὶ κακιῶν στῖφος καθαιρῶν.
1:175τὸ δὲ σοφίας γένος ἄμμῳ γῆς (ibid. 14) ἐξομοιοῦται διά τε πληθὺν ἀπερίγραφον, καὶ διότι τὰς μὲν τῆς θαλάττης ἐπιδρομὰς ἡ ὑποταίνιος ἄμμος ἀνακρούεται, τὰς δὲ τῶν ἁμαρτημάτων καὶ ἀδικημάτων ὁ παιδείας λόγος. οὗτος δὲ κατὰ τὰς θείας ὑποσχέσεις ἄχρι τῶν περάτων τοῦ παντὸς εὐρύνεται καὶ τὸν ἔχοντα ἀποφαίνει τῶν τοῦ κόσμου κληρονόμον μερῶν, φθάνοντα πάντῃ, πρὸς τὰ ἑῷα, πρὸς τὰ ἑσπέρια, τὰ κατὰ μεσημβρίαν, τὰ προσάρκτια· λέγεται γάρ, ὅτι „πλατυνθήσεται ἐπὶ θάλασσαν καὶ λίβα καὶ βορρᾶν καὶ ἀνατολάς“ (ibid. 14).
Book 1, §§151–175
1:151And perhaps this is no incorrect statement; for the wise have obtained the heavenly and celestial country as their habitation; having learnt to be continually mounting upwards, but the wicked have received as their share the dark recesses of hell, having from the beginning to the end of their existence practised dying, and having been from their infancy to their old age familiarised with destruction.
1:152But the practisers of virtue, for they are on the boundary between two extremities, are frequently going upwards and downwards as if on a ladder, being either drawn upwards by a more powerful fate, or else being dragged down by that which is worse; until the umpire of this contention and conflict, namely God, adjudges the victory to the more excellent class and utterly destroys the other.
1:153There is also in this dream another sort of similitude or comparison apparent, which must not be passed over in silence; the affairs of mankind are naturally compared to a ladder, on account of their irregular motion and progress:
1:154for as some one or other has said; "One day has cast one man down from on high and destroyed him, and another it has raised up, nothing that belongs to our human race being formed by nature so as to remain long in the same condition, but all such things changing with all kinds of alteration.
1:155Do not men become rulers from having been private individuals, and private individuals from having been rulers, poor from having been rich, and very rich from having been poor; glorious from being despised, and most illustrious from having been infamous?" [...] A very beautiful way of life: for it is very possible that the being whose habitation is the whole world, may dwell with you also, and take care of your house, so that it may be completely protected and free from injury for ever;
1:156and there is such a way as this in which human affairs move upwards and downwards, meeting with an unstable and variable fortune, the anomalous character of which, unerring time proves by evidence which is not indistinct but manifest and legible.
1:157But the dream also represented the archangel, namely the Lord himself, firmly planted on the ladder; for we must imagine that the living God stands above all things, like the charioteer of a chariot, or the pilot of a ship; that is, above bodies, and above souls, and above all creatures, and above the earth, and above the air, and above the heaven, and above all the powers of the outward senses, and above the invisible natures, in short, above all things whether visible or invisible; for having made the whole to depend upon himself, he governs it and all the vastness of nature.
1:158But let no one who hears that he was firmly planted thus suppose that any thing at all assists God, so as to enable him to stand firmly, but let him rather consider this fact that what is here indicated is equivalent to the assertion that the firmest position, and the bulwark, and the strength, and the steadiness of everything is the immoveable God, who stamps the character of immobility on whatever he pleases; for, in consequence of his supporting and consolidating things, those which he does combine remain firm and indestructible.
1:159Therefore he who stands upon the ladder of heaven says to him who is beholding the dream, "I am the Lord God of Abraham thy father, and the God of Isaac; be not afraid." This oracle and this vision were also the firmest support of the soul devoted to the practise of virtue, inasmuch as it taught it that the Lord and God of the universe is both these things also to his own race, being entitled both the Lord and God of all men, and of his grandfathers and ancestors, and being called by both names in order that the whole world and the man devoted to virtue might have the same inheritance; since it is also said, "The Lord himself is his inheritance."
1:160But do not fancy that it is an accidental thing here for him to be called in this place the God and Lord of Abraham, but only the God of Isaac; for this latter is the symbol of the knowledge which exists by nature, which hears itself, and teaches itself, and learns of itself; but Abraham is the symbol of that which is derived from the teaching of others; and the one again is an indigenous and native inhabitant of his country, but the other is only a settler and a foreigner;
1:161for having forsaken the language of those who indulge in sublime conversations about astronomy, a language imitating that of the Chaldaeans, foreign and barbarous, he was brought over to that which was suited to a rational being, namely, to the service of the great Cause of all things.
1:162Now this disposition stands in need of two powers to take care of it, the power that is of authority, and that of conferring benefits, in order that in accordance with the authority of the governor, it may obey the admonitions which it receives, and also that it may be greatly benefited by his beneficence. But the other disposition stands in need of the power of beneficence only; for it has not derived any improvement from the authority which admonishes it, inasmuch as it naturally claims virtue as its own, but by reason of the bounty which is showered upon it from above, it was good and perfect from the beginning;
1:163therefore God is the name of the beneficent power, and Lord is the title of the royal power. What then can any one call a more ancient and important good, than to be thought worthy to meet with unmixed and unalloyed beneficence? And what can be less valuable than to receive a mixture of authority and liberality? And it appears to me that it was because the practiser of virtue saw that he uttered that most admirable prayer that, "the Lord might be to him as God;" for he desired no longer to stand in awe of him as a governor, but to honour and love him as a benefactor.
1:164Now is it not fitting that even blind men should become sharp-sighted in their minds to these and similar things, being endowed with the power of sight by the most sacred oracles, so as to be able to contemplate the glories of nature, and not to be limited to the mere understanding of the words? But even if we voluntarily close the eye of our soul and take no care to understand such mysteries, or if we are unable to look up to them, the hierophant himself stands by and prompts us. And do not thou ever cease through weariness to anoint thy eyes until you have introduced those who are duly initiated to the secret light of the sacred scriptures, and have displayed to them the hidden things therein contained, and their reality, which is invisible to those who are uninitiated.
1:165It is becoming then for you to act thus; but as for ye, O souls, who have once tasted of divine love, as if you had even awakened from deep sleep, dissipate the mist that is before you; and hasten forward to that beautiful spectacle, putting aside slow and hesitating fear, in order to comprehend all the beautiful sounds and sights which the president of the games has prepared for your advantage.
1:166There are then a countless number of things well worthy of being displayed and demonstrated; and among them one which was mentioned a little while ago; for the oracle calls the person who was really his grandfather, the father of the practiser of virtue, and to him who was really his father, it has not given any such title; for the scripture says, "I am the Lord God of Abraham thy father," but in reality Abraham was his grandfather; and then proceeds, "And the God of Isaac," and in this case he does not add, "thy father:"
1:167is it not then worth while to examine into the cause of this difference? Undoubtedly it is; let us then in a careful manner apply ourselves to the consideration of the cause. Philosophers say that virtue exists among men, either by nature, or by practise, or by learning. On which account the sacred scriptures represent the three founders of the nation of the Israelites as wise men; not indeed originally endowed with the same kind of wisdom, but arriving rapidly at the same end.
1:168For the eldest of them, Abraham, had instruction for his guide in the road which conducted him to virtue; as we shall show in another treatise to the best of our power. And Isaac, who is the middle one of the three, had a self-taught and self-instructed nature. And Jacob, the third, arrived at this point by industry and practise, in accordance with which were his labours of wrestling and contention.
1:169Since then there are thus three different manners by which wisdom exists among men, it happens that the two extremes are the most nearly and frequently united. For the virtue which is acquired by practise, is the offspring of that which is derived from learning. But that which is implanted by nature is indeed akin to the others, for it is set below them, as the root for them all. But it has obtained its prize without any rivalry or difficulty.
1:170So that it is thus very natural for Abraham, as one who had been improved by instruction, to be called the father of Jacob, who arrived at his height of virtue by practise. By which expression is indicated not so much the relationship of one man to the other, but that the power which is fond of hearing is very ready for learning; the power which is devoted to practise being also well suited for wrestling.
1:171If, however, this practiser of virtue runs on vigorously towards the end and learns to see clearly what he previously only dreamed of in an indistinct way, being altered and re-stamped with a better character, and being called Israel, that is, "the man who sees God," instead of Jacob, that is, "the supplanter," he then is no longer set down as the son of Abraham, as his father, of him who derived wisdom from instruction, but as the son of Israel, who was born excellent by nature.
1:172These statements are not fables of my own invention, but are the oracle written on the sacred pillars. For, says the scripture: "Israel having departed, he and all that he had came to the well of the oath, and there he sacrificed a sacrifice to the God of his father Isaac." Do you not now perceive that this present assertion has reference not to the relationship between mortal men, but, as was said before, to the nature of things? For look at what is before us. At one time, Jacob is spoken of as the son of his father Abraham, and at another time he is called Israel, the son of Isaac, on account of the reason which we have thus accurately investigated.
1:173Having then said: "I am the Lord God of Abraham, the father and the God of Isaac," he adds: "Be not afraid," very consistently. For how can we any longer be afraid when we have thee, O God, as our armour and defender? Thee, the deliverer from fear and from every painful feeling? Thee, who hast also fashioned the archetypal forms of our instruction while they were still indistinct, so as to make them visible, teaching Abraham wisdom, and begetting Isaac, who was wise from his birth. For you condescended to be called the guide of the one and the father of the other, assigning to the one the rank of a pupil, and to the other that of a son.
1:174For this reason, too, God promised that he would give him the land. I mean by the land here, all-prolific virtue, on which the practiser rests from his contests and sleeps, from the fact of the life according to the outward sense being lulled asleep, and that of the soul being awakened. Receiving gladly peaceful repose there, which he did not obtain without war, and the afflictions which arise from war, not by means of bearing arms and slaying men; away with any such notion! but by overthrowing the array of vices and passions which are the adversaries of virtue.
1:175But the race of wisdom is likened to the sand of the sea, by reason of its boundless numbers, and because also the sand, like a fringe, checks the incursions of the sea; as the reasonings of instruction beat back the violence of wickedness and iniquity. And these reasonings, in accordance with the divine promises, are extended to the very extremities of the universe. And they show that he who is possessed of them is the inheritor of all the parts of the world, penetrating everywhere, to the east, and to the west, to the south, and to the north. For it is said in the scripture: "He shall be extended towards the sea, and towards the south, and towards the north, and towards the east."
Book 1, §§176–200
1:176ἔστι δ’ ὁ ἀστεῖος οὐκ ἴδιον μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ κοινὸν ἀγαθὸν ἅπασιν, ἐξ ἑτοίμου τὴν ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ προτείνων ὠφέλειαν. ὡς γὰρ ἥλιος ἁπάντων ἐστὶ φῶς τῶν ὄψεις ἐχόντων, οὕτω καὶ ὁ σοφὸς τῶν ὅσοι λογικῆς κεκοινωνήκασι φύσεως· „ἐνευλογηθήσονται γὰρ ἐν σοὶ“ φησί „πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαί“ (ibid. 14).
1:177ὁ δὲ χρησμὸς οὗτος ἐφαρμόττει καὶ αὐτῷ τινι πρὸς ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἑτέρῳ πρὸς ἕτερον. ἐάν τε γὰρ ὁ ἐν ἐμοὶ νοῦς ἀρετῇ τελείᾳ καθαρθῇ, καὶ αἱ τοῦ περὶ ἐμὲ γεώδους φυλαὶ συγκαθαίρονται, ἃς ἔλαχον αἱ αἰσθήσεις καὶ ἡ μεγίστη δεξαμενή, τὸ σῶμα· ἐάν τέ τις κατ’ οἰκίαν ἢ πόλιν ἢ χώραν ἢ ἔθνος γένηται φρονήσεως ἐραστής, ἀνάγκη τὴν οἰκίαν ἐκείνην καὶ τὴν πόλιν καὶ τὴν χώραν καὶ τὸ ἔθνος ἀμείνονι βίῳ χρῆσθαι.
1:178καθάπερ γὰρ τὰ ἐκθυμιώμενα τῶν ἀρωμάτων εὐωδίας τοὺς πλησιάζοντας ἀναπίμπλησι, τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον ὅσοι γείτονες καὶ ὅμοροι σοφοῦ, τῆς ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ σπῶντες αὔρας ἐπὶ μήκιστον χεομένης βελτιοῦνται τὰ ἤθη.
1:179Μεγίστη δέ ἐστιν εὐεργεσία ψυχῇ πονούσῃ καὶ διαθλούσῃ συνοδοιπόρον ἔχειν τὸν ἐφθακότα πάντῃ θεόν· „ἰδοὺ“ γάρ φησιν "ἐγὼ μετὰ σοῦ“ (ibid. 15). τίνος οὖν ἂν ἔτι χρεῖοι γενοίμεθα πλούτου, σὲ τὸν ἀληθείᾳ πλοῦτον ἔχοντες μόνον „διαφυλάσσοντα ἐν ὁδῷ“ (ibid.) τῇ πρὸς ἀρετὴν ἀγούσῃ κατὰ πάσας αὐτῆς τὰς τομάς; οὐ γὰρ ἓν μέρος ἐστὶ τοῦ λογικοῦ βίου τὸ πρὸς δικαιοσύνην καὶ τὴν ἄλλην τεῖνον ἀρετήν, ἀλλὰ μυρία ὅσα, ἐξ ὧν ἔστιν ὁρμωμένους φρονήσεως ἐφικνεῖσθαι.
1:180παγκάλως δὲ εἴρηται καὶ τὸ "ἀποστρέψω σε εἰς τὴν γῆν ταύτην“ (ibid.). καλὸν μὲν γὰρ ἦν, τὸν λογισμὸν ἐφ’ ἑαυτοῦ μείναντα μὴ ἀποδημῆσαι πρὸς αἴσθησιν· δεύτερος δὲ πλοῦς, ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν ὑποστρέψαι πάλιν.
1:181ἴσως δὲ καὶ τὸ περὶ ἀφθαρσίας ψυχῆς ὑπαινίττεται δόγμα διὰ τούτου· ἀπολιποῦσα μὲν γὰρ τὸν οὐράνιον τόπον, ὡς καὶ μικρῷ πρότερον ἐλέχθη, καθάπερ εἰς ξένην χώραν ἦλθε τὸ σῶμα. φησὶ δ’ οὐ μέχρι τοῦ παντὸς καθειργμένην αὐτὴν ὁ γεννήσας περιόψεσθαι πατήρ, ἀλλ’ οἶκτον λαβὼν λύσειν τὰ δεσμὰ καὶ ἐλευθέραν ἄχρι τῆς μητροπόλεως ἀσφαλῶς παραπέμψειν καὶ μὴ πρότερον ἀνήσειν ἢ τὰς διὰ λόγων ὑποσχέσεις ἀληθείας ἔργοις βεβαιωθῆναι· θεοῦ γὰρ ἴδιον λέγειν πάντως τὰ γενησόμενα. καίτοι τί τοῦτό φαμεν;
1:182ἔργων γὰρ ἀδιαφοροῦσιν αὐτοῦ οἱ λόγοι. διακινηθεῖσα οὖν καὶ διαναστᾶσα πρὸς τὰς περὶ τοῦ ὄντος ζητήσεις ἡ ἀσκητικὴ ψυχὴ τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ὑπετόπησεν εἶναι τὸ ὂν ἐν τόπῳ, μικρὸν δὲ ἐπισχοῦσα τῷ δυστοπάστῳ τῆς σκέψεως περιδεὴς γίνεται καὶ μετανοεῖν ἄρχεται.
1:183„ἐξηγέρθη“ γάρ φησιν „Ἰακὼβ καὶ εἶπεν, ὅτι ἔστι κύριος ἐν τῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ, ἐγὼ δὲ οὐκ ᾔδειν“ (ibid. 16). καὶ ἄμεινον ἦν, εἴποιμ’ ἂν, ἀγνοεῖν ἢ ἔν τινι θεὸν ὑπολαμβάνειν εἶναι, τὸν περιέχοντα αὐτὸν ἐν κύκλῳ τὰ πάντα.
1:184Δικαίως οὖν ἐφοβήθη καὶ εἶπε θαυμαστικῶς· „ὡς φοβερὸς ὁ τόπος οὗτος“ (ibid. 17). ὄντως γὰρ τῶν ἐν φυσιολογίᾳ τόπος ἀργαλεώτατος, ἐν ᾧ ζητεῖται, ποῦ καὶ εἰ συνόλως ἔν τινι τὸ ὄν, τῶν μὲν λεγόντων, ὅτι πᾶν τὸ ὑφεστὼς χώραν τινὰ κατείληφε, καὶ ἄλλων ἄλλην ἀπονεμόντων, ἢ ἐντὸς τοῦ κόσμου ἢ ἐκτὸς αὐτοῦ μετακόσμιόν τινα, τῶν δὲ φασκόντων, ὅτι οὐδενὶ τῶν ἐν γενέσει τὸ ἀγένητον ὅμοιον, ἀλλὰ τοῖς ὅλοις ὑπερβάλλον, ὡς καὶ τὴν ὠκυδρομωτάτην διάνοιαν ὑστερίζουσαν μακρῷ τῆς καταλήψεως ὁμολογεῖν ἡττᾶσθαι.
1:185διόπερ εὐθὺς ἀνέκραγεν· „οὐκ ἔστι τοῦτο“ (ibid.), ὃ ἐδόξασα, „ὅτι ἔστι κύριος ἔν τῳ τόπῳ“ (ibid. 16)· περιέχει γάρ, ἀλλ’ οὐ περιέχεται κατὰ τὸν ἀληθῆ λόγον. τοῦτο δὲ τὸ δεικνύμενον καὶ ὁρατόν, ὁ αἰσθητὸς οὑτοσὶ κόσμος, οὐδὲν ἄρα ἄλλο ἐστὶν ἢ οἶκος θεοῦ (ibid.), μιᾶς τῶν τοῦ ὄντος δυνάμεων, καθ’ ἣν ἀγαθὸς ἦν.
1:186τὸν δὲ κόσμον οἶκον ὠνόμασε καὶ πύλην τοῦ πρὸς ἀλήθειαν οὐρανοῦ (ibid. 17) προσεῖπε. τί δὲ τοῦτ’ ἐστί; τὸν ἐκ τῶν ἰδεῶν συσταθέντα, ἐν τῷ χειροτονηθέντι κατὰ τὰς θείας χορηγίας, κόσμον νοητὸν οὐκ ἔνεστιν ἄλλως καταλαβεῖν ὅτι μὴ κατὰ τὴν τοῦ αἰσθητοῦ καὶ ὁρωμένου τούτου μετάβασιν.
1:187οὐδὲ γὰρ ἄλλο τῶν ὄντων οὐδὲν ἀσώματον ἐννοῆσαι δυνατὸν ὅτι μὴ τὴν ἀρχὴν λαβόντας ἀπὸ σωμάτων· ἠρεμούντων μὲν γὰρ ἐνοήθη τόπος, χρόνος δὲ κινουμένων, σημεῖα δὲ καὶ γραμμαὶ καὶ ἐπιφάνειαι καὶ συνόλως πέρατα ἀπὸ τῆς ἐξωτάτω περικειμένης οἷον ἀμπεχόνης.
1:188κατὰ τὸ ἀνάλογον οὖν καὶ ὁ νοητὸς ἀπὸ τοῦ αἰσθητοῦ κόσμος ἐνοήθη, πύλη τις ὢν ἐκείνου. ὡς γὰρ οἱ βουλόμενοι τὰς πόλεις θεάσασθαι διὰ πυλῶν εἰσίασιν, οὕτως ὅσοι τὸν ἀειδῆ κόσμον καταλαβεῖν ἐθέλουσιν, ὑπὸ τῆς τοῦ ὁρατοῦ φαντασίας ξεναγοῦνται. [ὁ δὲ νοητῆς ὑποστάσεως κόσμος ἄνευ ἡστινοσοῦν σχημάτων ὄψεως, μόνης δὲ διὰ τῆς ἀρχετύπου ἰδέας τῆς ἐν τῷ διαχαραχθέντι πρὸς τὸ θεαθὲν αὐτῷ εἶδος ἄνευ σκιᾶς μετακληθήσεται, πάντων αὐτῷ τειχῶν καὶ πάσης πύλης ἀπαρθέντων εἰς τὸ μὴ ἀπό τινος ἀθρῆσαι, ἀλλ’ αὐτὸ καθ’ αὑτὸ ἀλέκτῳ τινὶ καὶ δυσερμηνεύτῳ θέᾳ διιδεῖν κάλλος ἀναλλοίωτον.]
1:189Περὶ μὲν δὴ τούτων ἅλις. ἐφαρμόζει δὲ τῷ αὐτῷ εἴδει καὶ ἕτερος ὄνειρος, ὁ περὶ τῆς ποικίλης ἀγέλης, ὃν περιαναστὰς ὁ φαντασιωθεὶς διηγεῖται φάσκων· "εἶπέ μοι ὁ ἄγγελος τοῦ θεοῦ καθ’ ὕπνον· Ἰακώβ. ἐγὼ δὲ εἶπα· τί ἐστι; καὶ εἶπεν· ἀνάβλεψον τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς σου καὶ ἴδε τοὺς τράγους καὶ τοὺς κριοὺς ἀναβαίνοντας ἐπὶ τὰ πρόβατα καὶ τὰς αἶγας διαλεύκους καὶ ποικίλους καὶ σποδοειδεῖς ῥαντούς. ἑώρακα γὰρ ὅσα σοι Λάβαν ποιεῖ. ἐγώ εἰμι ὁὁ θεὸς ὁὁ ὀφθείς σοι ἐν τόπῳ θεοῦ, οὗ ἤλειψάς μοι στήλην καὶ ηὔξω μοι εὐχήν. νῦν οὖν ἀνάστηθι καὶ ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς ταύτης καὶ ἄπελθε εἰς τὴν γῆν τῆς γενέσεώς σου, καὶ ἔσομαι μετὰ σοῦ“ (Gen. 31,11 — 13).
1:190ὁρᾷς ὅτι θεοπέμπτους ὀνείρους ἀναγράφει ὁ θεῖος λόγος οὐ μόνον τοὺς κατὰ τὸ πρεσβύτατον τῶν αἰτίων προφαινομένους, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοὺς διὰ τῶν ὑποφητῶν αὐτοῦ καὶ ὀπαδῶν ἀγγέλων, οἳ θείας καὶ εὐδαίμονος μοίρας πρὸς τοῦ γεννήσαντος ἠξίωνται πατρός. σκόπει μέντοι καὶ τὸ ἀκόλουθον.
1:191ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος τοῖς μὲν ὡς βασιλεὺς ἃ χρὴ πράττειν ἐξ ἐπιτάγματος παραγγέλλει, τοῖς δὲ ὡς γνωρίμοις διδάσκαλος τὰ πρὸς ὠφέλειαν ὑφηγεῖται, τοῖς δὲ ὡς σύμβουλος γνώμας εἰσηγούμενος τὰς ἀρίστας τὸ συμφέρον ἐξ ἑαυτῶν οὐκ εἰδότας μεγάλα ὠφελεῖ, τοῖς δὲ ὡς φίλος ἐπιεικῶς καὶ μετὰ πειθοῦς πολλὰ καὶ τῶν ἀρρήτων ἀναφέρει, ὧν οὐδένα τῶν ἀτελέστων ἐπακοῦσαι θέμις.
1:192ἔστι δ’ ὅτε καὶ πυνθάνεταί τινων, ὥσπερ τοῦ Ἀδάμ· „ποῦ εἶ“ (Gen. 3, 9), πρὸς ὃ ἀποκρίναιτ’ ἄν τις οἰκείως „οὐδαμοῦ“, τῷ τἀνθρώπεια πάντα ἐν ὁμοίῳ μὴ μένειν, ἀλλὰ κινεῖσθαι καὶ ψυχῇ καὶ σώματι καὶ τοῖς ἐκτός. ἀνίδρυτοι μὲν γὰρ οἱ λογισμοί, φαντασίας ἀπὸ τῶν αὐτῶν πραγμάτων οὐχὶ τὰς αὐτὰς ἀλλ’ ἐναντίας ἔχοντες, ἀνίδρυτον δὲ καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ὡς μηνύουσιν αἱ ἐκ βρέφους ἄχρι γήρως τῶν ἡλικιῶν ἁπασῶν τροπαί, ἀνίδρυτα δὲ καὶ τὰ
1:193ἐκτὸς ἐπῃωρημένα φορᾷ τύχης ἀεὶ σαλευούσης. ἐπειδὰν μέντοι πρὸς τὸ τῶν φίλων ἔλθῃ συνέδριον, οὐ πρότερον ἄρχεται λέγειν ἢ ἕκαστον αὐτῶν ἀνακαλέσαι καὶ ὀνομαστὶ προσειπεῖν, ἵνα τὰ ὦτα ἀνορθιάσαντες, ἡσυχίᾳ καὶ προσοχῇ χρώμενοι, τῶν θεσμῳδουμένων εἰς ἄληστον μνήμην ἀκούωσιν· ἐπεὶ καὶ ἑτέρωθι λέγεται· „σιώπα καὶ ἄκουε“ (Deut. 27, 9).
1:194τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον ἐπὶ μὲν τοῦ βάτου Μωϋσῆς ἀνακαλεῖται — „ὡς γὰρ εἶδε“ φησίν „ὅτι προσάγει ἰδεῖν, ἐκάλεσεν αὐτὸν κύριος ἐκ τοῦ βάτου λέγων· Μωυσῆ, Μωυσῆ. ὁ δὲ εἶπε· τί ἐστιν;„ (Exod. 3,4) —, Ἀβραὰμ δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς τοῦ ἀγαπητοῦ καὶ μόνου παιδὸς ὁλοκαυτώσεως, ἡνίκα τε ἱερουργεῖν ἤρχετο καὶ ὁπότε δοὺς ἀπόπειραν εὐσεβείας ἐξ ἀνθρώπων ἀφανίσαι τὸ αὐτομαθὲς γένος, ἐπίκλησιν Ἰσαάκ, ἐκωλύθη·
1:195ἀρχομένου μὲν γάρ φησιν, ὅτι „ὁ θεὸς ἐπείραζε τὸν Ἀβραὰμ καὶ εἶπε πρὸς αὐτόν· Ἀβραάμ, Ἀβραάμ. ὁ δὲ εἶπεν· ἰδοὺ ἐγώ. καὶ εἶπε· λάβε τὸν υἱόν σου τὸν ἀγαπητόν, ὃν ἠγάπησας, τὸν Ἰσαάκ, καὶ ἀνένεγκε„, ἤδη δὲ τὸ ἱερεῖον ἐπὶ τὸν βωμὸν ἀνενηνοχότος, τότε „ἐκάλεσεν αὐτὸν ἄγγελος κυρίου ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ λέγων· Ἀβραάμ, Ἀβραάμ. ὁ δὲ εἶπεν· ἰδοὺ ἐγώ. καὶ εἶπε· μὴ ἐπιβάλῃς τὴν χεῖρά σου ἐπὶ τὸ παιδάριον, μηδὲ ποιήσῃς αὐτῷ μηδέν„ (Gen. 22,1. 2. 9 — 12).
1:196εἷς δὲ δὴ τοῦ φιλικοῦ θιάσου καὶ ὁ ἀσκητὴς ὢν εἰκότως προνομίας τῆς αὐτῆς ἀξιωθεὶς ἀνακαλεῖται· „εἶπε γάρ μοι„ φησίν „ὁ ἄγγελος τοῦ θεοῦ καθ’ ὕπνον· Ἰακώβ. ἐγὼ δὲ εἶπα· τί ἐστιν„ (Gen. 31, 11) ;
1:197ἀνακληθεὶς δὲ προσοχῇ χρῆται, τὰ φανέντα σημεῖα πειρώμενος ἀκριβοῦν, ἔστι δὲ τὰ σημεῖα τῶν λόγων οἷα θρεμμάτων ὀχεῖαί τε καὶ γενέσεις· „ἀναβλέψας„ γάρ φησι „τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς εἶδε τοὺς τράγους καὶ τοὺς κριοὺς ἀναβαίνοντας ἐπὶ τὰ πρόβατα καὶ τὰς αἶγας„ (Gen. 31, 12).
1:198αἰπολίου μὲν δὴ τράγος, ποίμνης δὲ κριὸς ἡγεμών ἐστι· τὰ δὲ ζῷα ταῦτα δυεῖν λόγων σύμβολα τελείων, ὧν ὁ μὲν ἕτερος καθαίρει καὶ κενοῖ ψυχὴν ἁμαρτημάτων, ὁ δὲ ἕτερος τρέφει καὶ πλήρη κατορθωμάτων ἐργάζεται. τοιοῦτοι μὲν οἱ ἡγεμόνες ἐν ἡμῖν ἀγελάρχαι λόγοι· αἱ δὲ ἀγέλαι προβάτοις καὶ αἰξὶ φερωνύμως διατεθεῖσαι ᾄττουσι καὶ προβαίνουσι μετὰ σπουδῆς πρὸς δικαιοσύνην.
1:199ἀναβλέψας οὖν τὸ τέως μεμυκὸς ὄμμα τῆς διανοίας εἶδε τοὺς ἀναλογοῦντας τράγοις καὶ κριοῖς τελείους λόγους ἠκονημένους πρός τε μείωσιν ἀδικημάτων καὶ ὧν χρὴ πράττειν συναύξησιν, πῶς ἐπὶ τὰ πρόβατα καὶ τὰς αἶγας, τὰς ἔτι νέας καὶ ἁπαλὰς ψυχὰς ἄρτι ἡβώσας καὶ ἄνθει τῷ τῆς ἀκμῆς ὡραϊζομένας, ἀναβαίνουσιν οὐκ ἄλογον ἡδονὴν διώκοντες, ἀλλ’ ἀοράτῳ σπορᾷ φρονήσεως χρώμενοι δογμάτων.
1:200εὔπαις γὰρ ὁ γάμος οὗτος οὐ σώματα συμπλέκων, ἀλλ’ εὐφυέσι ψυχαῖς τελείας ἀρετὰς ἁρμοζόμενος. ἐπιβαίνετε οὖν οἱ σοφίας ὀρθοὶ λόγοι πάντες, ὀχεύετε, σπείρετε, καὶ ἣν ἂν ἴδητε ψυχὴν βαθεῖαν, εὔγειον, παρθένον, μὴ παρέλθητε, καλέσαντες δ’ εἰς τὴν ὁμιλίαν καὶ συνουσίαν ἑαυτῶν τελειώσατε καὶ ἐγκύμονα ἀπεργάσασθε· τέξεται γὰρ πάντα ἀστεῖα, γενεὰν ἄρρενα „διαλεύκων, ποικίλων, σποδοειδῶν ῥαντῶν“ (Gen. 31, 10).
Book 1, §§176–200
1:176But the wise and virtuous man is not only a blessing to himself, but he is also a common good to all men, diffusing advantages over all from his own ready store. For as the sun is the light of all those beings who have eyes, so also is the wise man light to all those who partake of a rational nature.
1:177"For in thee shall all the nations of the earth be blessed." And this oracle applies to the wise man in respect of himself, and also in respect of others. For if the mind which is in me is purified by perfect virtue, and if the tribes of that earthly part which is about me are purified at the same time, which tribes have fallen to the lot of the external senses, and of the greatest channel of all, namely the body; and if any one, either in his house, or in his city, or in his country, or in his nation, becomes a lover of wisdom, it is inevitable that that house, and that city, and that country, and that nation, must attain to a better life.
1:178For, as those spices which are set on fire fill all persons near them with their fragrance, so in the same manner do all those persons who are neighbours of and contiguous to the wise man catch some of the exhalations which reach to a distance from him, and so become improved in their characters.
1:179And it is the greatest of all advantages to a soul engaged in labours and contests, to have for its fellow traveller, God, who penetrates everywhere. "For behold," says God, "I am with thee." Of what then can we be in need while we have for our wealth Thee, who art the only true and real riches, who keepest us in the road which leads to virtue in all its different divisions? For it is not one portion only of the rational life which conducts to justice and to all other virtue, but the parts are infinite in number, from which those who desire to arrive at virtue can set out.
1:180Very admirably therefore is it said in the scripture: "I will lead thee back to this land." For it was fitting that the reason should remain with itself, and should not depart to the outward sense. And if it has departed, then the next best thing is for it to return back again.
1:181And perhaps also a doctrine bearing on the immortality of the soul is figuratively intimated by this expression. For the soul, having left the region of heaven, as was mentioned a little while before, came to the body as to a foreign country. Therefore the father who begot it promises that he will not permit it to be for ever held in bondage, but that he will have compassion on it, and will unloose its chains, and will conduct it in safety and freedom as far as the metropolis, and will not cease to assist it till the promises which he has made in words are confirmed by the truth of actions. For it is by all means the peculiar attribute of God to foretell what is to happen.
1:182And why do we say this? for his words do not differ from his actions; therefore the soul which is devoted to the practise of virtue, being set in motion, and roused up to the investigations relating to the living God, at first suspected that the living God existed in place; but after a short space it became perplexed by the difficulty of the question, and began to change its opinion.
1:183"For," says the scripture, "Jacob awoke and said, Surely the Lord is in this place, and I knew it not;" and it would have been better, I should have said; not to know it, than to fancy that God existed in any place, he who himself contains all things in a circle.
1:184Very naturally, therefore, was Jacob afraid, and said in a spirit of admiration, "how dreadful is this place." For, in truth, of all the topics or places in natural philosophy, the most formidable is that in which it is inquired where the living God is, and whether in short he is in any place at all. Since some persons affirm that everything which exists occupies some place or other, and others assign each thing a different place, either in the world or out of the world, in some space between the different bodies of the universe. Others again affirm that the uncreated God resembles no created being whatever, but that he is superior to everything, so that the very swiftest conception is outstripped by him, and confesses that it is very far inferior to the comprehension of him;
1:185wherefore it speedily cries out, This is not what I expected, because the Lord is in the place; for he surrounds everything, but in truth and reason he is not surrounded by anything. And this thing which is demonstrated and visible, this world perceptible by the outward senses, is nothing else but the house of God, the abode of one of the powers of the true God, in accordance with which he is good;
1:186and he calls this world an abode, and he has also pronounced it with great truth to be the gate of heaven. Now, what does this mean? We cannot comprehend the world which consists of various species, in that which is fashioned in accordance with the divine regulations, appreciable only by the intellect, in any other manner than by making a migration upwards from this other world perceptible by the outward senses and visible;
1:187for it is not possible either to perceive any other existing being which is incorporeal, without deriving our principles of judgment from bodies. For while they are quiet, their place is perceived, and when they are in motion we judge of their time; but the points, and the lines, and the superficies, and in short the boundaries. [...] as of a garment wrapped externally around it.
1:188According to analogy, therefore, the knowledge of the world appreciable by the intellect is attained to by means of our knowledge of that which is perceptible by the outward senses, which is as it were a gate to the other. For as men who wish to see cities enter in through the gates, so also they who wish to comprehend the invisible world are conducted in their search by the appearance of the visible one. And the world of that essence which is only open to the intellect without any visible appearance or figure whatever, and which exists only in the archetypal idea which exists in the mind, which is fashioned according to its appearance, will be brought on without any shade; all the walls, and all the gates which could impede its progress being removed, so that it is not looked at through any other medium, but by itself, putting forth a beauty which is susceptible of no change, presenting an indescribable and exquisite spectacle.
1:189But enough of this. There is another dream also which belongs to the same class, that one I mean about the spotted flock, which the person who beheld it relates after he had awoke, saying, "The angel of God spake unto me in a dream, and said, Jacob; and I said, What is it? And he said unto me, Look up with thine eyes, and see the goats and the rams mounting on the flocks, and the she-goats, some white, and spotted, and ring-straked, and speckled: for I have beheld all that Laban does unto thee. I am that God who was seen by thee in the place of God, where thou anointedst the pillar, and vowedst a vow unto me. Now therefore, rise up and depart out of this land, and go into the land of thy birth, and I will be with thee."
1:190You see here, that the divine word speaks of dreams as sent from God; including in this statement not those only which appear through the agency of the chief cause itself, but those also which are seen through the operation of his interpreters and attendant angels, who are thought by the father who created them to be worthy of a divine and blessed lot:
1:191consider, however, what comes afterwards. The sacred word enjoins some persons what they ought to do by positive command, like a king; to others it suggests what will be for their advantage, as a preceptor does to his pupils; to others again, it is like a counsellor suggesting the wisest plans; and in this way too, it is of great advantage to those who do not of themselves know what is expedient; to others it is like a friend, in a mild and persuasive manner, bringing forward many secret things which no uninitiated person may lawfully hear.
1:192For at times it asks some persons, as for instance, Adam, "Where art thou?" And any one may properly answer to such a question, "No where?" Because all human affairs never remain long in the same condition, but are moved about and changed, whether we speak of their soul or their body, or of their external circumstances; for their minds are unstable, not always having the same impressions from the same things, but such as are diametrically contrary to their former ones. The body also is unstable, as all the changes of the different ages from infancy to old age show; their external circumstances also are variable, being tossed up and down by the impetus of everagitated fortune.
1:193When, however, he comes into an assembly of friends, he does not begin to speak before he has first accosted each individual among them, and addressed him by name, so that they prick up their ears, and are quiet and attentive, listening to the oracles thus delivered, so as never to forget them or let them escape their memory: since in another passage of scripture we read, "Be silent and listen."
1:194In this manner, too, Moses is called up to the bush. For, the scripture says, "When he saw that he was turning aside to see, God called him out of the bush, and said, Moses, Moses: and he said, What is it, Lord?" And Abraham also, on the occasion of offering up his beloved and only son as a burnt-offering, when he was beginning to sacrifice him, and when he had given proof of his piety, was forbidden to destroy the self-taught race, Isaac by name, from among men;
1:195for at the beginning of his account of this transaction, Moses says that "God did tempt Abraham, and said unto him, Abraham, Abraham; and he said, Behold, here am I. And he said unto him, Take now thy beloved son Isaac, whom thou lovest, and offer him up." And when he had brought the victim to the altar, then the angel of the Lord called him out of heaven, saying, "Abraham, Abraham," and he answered, "Behold, here am I. And he said, Lay not thy hand upon the child, and do nothing to him."
1:196Also the practiser of virtue is also called one of this company dear to God, being deservedly accounted worthy of the same honour; for, says the scripture, "The angel of God said to me in my sleep, Jacob: and I answered, and said, What is it?"
1:197But after he has been called he exerts his attention, endeavouring to arrive at an accurate knowledge of the symbols which are displayed to him; and these symbols are the connection and generation of reasonings, as flocks and herds. For, says the scripture, "Jacob, looking up with his eyes, saw the goats and the rams leaping upon the she-goats and upon the sheep."
1:198Now the he-goat is the leader of the flock of goats, and the ram is the leader of the flock of sheep, and these two animals are symbols of perfect reasonings, one of which purifies and cleanses the soul of sins, and the other nourishes it and renders it full of good actions. Such then are the leaders of the flocks in us, namely, reasons; and the flocks themselves, resembling the sheep and goats whose names they bear, rush forwards and hasten with zeal and earnestness towards justice.
1:199Therefore, looking up with the eye of his mind, which up to that time had been closed, he saw the perfect and thoroughly sharpened reasons analogically resembling the goats and rams, prepared for the diminution of offences and the increase of good actions. And he beheld how they leap upon the sheep and the goats, that is on those souls which are still young and tender, and in the vigour of youth, and beautiful in the flower of their age; not pursuing irrational pleasure, but indulging in the invisible sowing of the doctrines of prudence.
1:200For this is a marriage which is blessed in its children; not uniting bodies, but adapting perfect virtues to well-disposed souls. Therefore do all ye right reasons of wisdom leap up, form connections, sow seed, and pass by no soul which you see rich and fertile, and well-disposed, and virgin; but inviting it to association and connection with you, render it perfect and pregnant; for so you will become the parents of all kinds of good things, of a male offspring, white, variegated, ring-straked, and speckled.
Book 1, §§201–225
1:201Ἣν δ’ ἔχει τῶν γεννημάτων τούτων ἕκαστον δύναμιν, ἐρευνητέον. διάλευκοι μὲν τοίνυν εἰσὶν οἱ τηλαυγέστατοι καὶ ἀριδηλότατοι, τοῦ „διὰ“ πολλάκις ἐπὶ τοῦ μεγάλου τιθεμένου, ἀφ’ οὗ διάδηλον καὶ διάσημον τὸ μεγάλως δῆλον καὶ μεγάλως ἐπίσημον ἔθος ὀνομάζειν ἐστί.
1:202βούλεται οὖν τῆς τὸν ἱερὸν σπόρον παραδεξαμένης ψυχῆς τὰ πρωτότοκα γεννήματα διάλευκα εἶναι, φωτὶ ἐοικότα οὐκ ἀμυδρῷ, φέγγει δὲ τηλαυγεστάτῳ, οἵα γένοιτ’ ἂν ἀφ’ ἡλιακῶν ἀκτίνων ἄσκιος ἐν αἰθρίᾳ κατὰ μεσημβρίαν αὐγή· βούλεται δὲ καὶ ποικίλα οὐ πολυμόρφου καὶ πολυτρόπου λέπρας ἀκαθάρτου τρόπον, διὰ γνώμης ἀβεβαιότητα χρησόμενα ἀστάτῳ καὶ φορουμένῳ βίῳ, ἀλλὰ γράμμασιν ἐγκεκολαμμένα καὶ σφραγῖσι διαφόροις, δοκίμοις δὲ πάσαις τετυπωμένα, ὧν αἱ ἰδιότητες ἀναμιχθεῖσαι καὶ ἀνακραθεῖσαι μουσικὴν συμφωνίαν ἐργάσονται.
1:203τὴν γὰρ ποικιλτικὴν τέχνην ἐνόμισαν μέν τινες οὕτως ἠμελημένον καὶ ἀφανὲς εἶναι πρᾶγμα, ὥστε ὑφάνταις αὐτὴν ἀνέθεσαν. ἐγὼ δ’ οὐ μόνον αὐτήν, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοὔνομα τέθηπα, καὶ μάλισθ’ ὅταν εἰς τὰ γῆς τμήματα καὶ τὰς ἐν οὐρανῷ σφαίρας καὶ ζῴων καὶ φυτῶν διαφορὰς καὶ τὸ παμποίκιλον ὕφασμα, τουτονὶ τὸν κόσμον, ἀπίδω.
1:204τὸν γὰρ τοῦ πλέγματος παντὸς τούτου δημιουργὸν εὑρετὴν τῆς ποικιλτικῆς ἐπινοεῖν εὐθὺς ἐπιστήμης ἀναγκάζομαι, καὶ σέβομαι μὲν τὸν εὑρόντα, τιμῶ δὲ τὴν εὑρεθεῖσαν, τὸ δ’ ἔργον καταπέπληγμαι, καίτοι μηδὲ πολλοστὸν μέρος αὐτοῦ δυνηθεὶς ἰδεῖν, ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ φανέντος μοι μέρους, εἰ δὴ καὶ πέφηνεν, ἀκριβῶς τὸ ὅλον εἰκάζων ἀναλογίας ἐλπίδι.
1:205θαυμάζω μέντοι καὶ τὸν σοφίας ἐραστήν, ὅτι τὴν αὐτὴν τέχνην ἐπιτετήδευκε, πολλὰ καὶ διαφέροντα ἐκ διαφερόντων εἰς ταὐτὸ συνάγειν καὶ συνυφαίνειν ἀξιῶν. λαβὼν γὰρ ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς παιδικῆς γραμματικῆς δύο τὰ πρῶτα, τό τε γράφειν καὶ τὸ ἀναγινώσκειν, ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς τελειοτέρας τήν τε παρὰ ποιηταῖς ἐμπειρίαν καὶ τὴν ἀρχαίας ἱστορίας ἀνάληψιν, παρὰ δὲ ἀριθμητικῆς καὶ γεωμετρίας τὸ ἀνεξαπάτητον ἐν οἷς ἀναλογίας καὶ λογισμῶν ἐστι χρεία, παρὰ δὲ μουσικῆς ῥυθμοὺς καὶ μέτρα τά τε ἐναρμόνια καὶ χρωματικὰ καὶ διατονικά, συνημμένα τε αὖ καὶ διεζευγμένα μέλη, παρὰ δὲ ῥητορικῆς εὕρεσιν, φράσιν, τάξιν, οἰκονομίαν, μνήμην, ὑπόκρισιν, παρὰ δὲ φιλοσοφίας ὅσα τε ἐν ταύταις παραλέλειπται καὶ ἄλλα ἐξ ὧν ἅπας ὁ ἀνθρώπων βίος συνέστηκεν, ἓν ἔργον εὐανθέστατον ἡρμόσατο, εὐμάθειαν πολυμαθείᾳ μίξας.
1:206καὶ τὸν τούτου τοῦ πλέγματος δημιουργὸν ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος Βεσελεὴλ ἐκάλεσεν (Exod. 31, 2 ss.), ὃς ἑρμηνευθείς ἐστιν ἐν σκιᾷ θεοῦ. τὰ γὰρ μιμήματα οὗτος, τὰ δὲ παραδείγματα ἀρχιτεκτονεῖ Μωυσῆς· διὰ τοῦθ’ ὁὁ μὲν οἷα σκιὰς ὑπεγράφετο, ὁὁ δ’ οὐ σκιάς, αὐτὰς δὲ τὰς ἀρχετύπους ἐδημιούργει φύσεις.
1:207εἰ δὴ καὶ τὰ ἅγια ποικιλτικῇ τέχνῃ κατεσκεύασται καὶ ὁ σοφὸς ποικιλτὴς μόνος ἐν τοῖς ἱεροφαντηθεῖσι χρησμοῖς ἀνείρηται καὶ τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ καλὸν ποίκιλμα, ὅδε ὁ κόσμος, ἐπιστήμῃ πανσόφῳ τετελεσιούργηται, πῶς οὐκ ἄξιον ὡς ἐργαλεῖον τῆς ἐπιστήμης ἀποδέχεσθαι ποικιλτικήν;
1:208ἧς ἀφίδρυμα ἱερώτατον πᾶς ὁ σοφίας οἶκος ἀγαλματοφορήσει καὶ κατ’ οὐρανὸν καὶ ἐπὶ γῆς, ἀφ’ ἧς ποικίλων λόγων ἰδέας ὁ ἀσκητὴς ἐκπονεῖ· μετὰ γὰρ τοὺς διαλεύκους εὐθὺς τοὺς ποικίλους εἶδε, παιδείας κόμματι χαραχθέντας. τρίτοι δ’ εἰσὶν οἱ σποδοειδεῖς ῥαντοί.
1:209καίτοι τίς οὐκ ἂν εὖ φρονῶν εἴποι τῷ γένει καὶ τούτους εἶναι ποικίλους; ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὐκ ἔστιν αὐτῷ περὶ θρεμμάτων διαφορᾶς ἡ τοσαύτη σπουδή, περὶ μέντοι τῆς πρὸς καλοκἀγαθίαν ἀγούσης ὁδοῦ.
1:210βούλεται γὰρ τὸν ἐπὶ ταύτην ἰόντα σποδῷ καὶ ὕδατι περιρραίνεσθαι, διότι γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ λόγος ἔχει φυραθέντα καὶ μορφωθέντα πρὸς τοῦ ἀνθρωποπλάστου εἰς τὸ ἡμέτερον ἀποκριθῆναι σῶμα, οὐ χειρόκμητον, ἀλλὰ φύσεως ἔργον ἀοράτου.
1:211σοφίας οὖν ἐστιν ἀρχὴ μὴ ἐπιλανθάνεσθαι ἑαυτοῦ, τὰ δ’ ἐξ ὧν συνεκρίθη πρὸ ὀφθαλμῶν ἀεὶ λαμβάνειν· οὕτως γὰρ μεγαλαυχίαν, τὸ κακῶν θεομισέστατον, ἐκνίψαιτ’ ἄν. τίς γὰρ εἰς νοῦν βαλλόμενος, ὅτι τέφρα καὶ ὕδωρ εἰσὶν αὐτῷ τῆς γενέσεως αἱ ἀρχαί, φυσηθεὶς ὑπ’ οἰήσεως μετέωρος ἀρθήσεται;
1:212διὰ τοῦτο καὶ τοὺς μέλλοντας ἱερουργεῖν περιρραίνεσθαι τοῖς λεχθεῖσιν ἐδικαίωσεν, οὐδένα θυσιῶν ἄξιον νομίσας, ὃς μὴ πρότερον ἑαυτὸν ἔγνωκε καὶ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην οὐδένειαν κατείληφεν, ἐξ ὧν συνεκρίθη στοιχείων τὸ μηδενὸς ἄξιος εἶναι τεκμηράμενος.
1:213τὰ τρία ταῦτα σημεῖα, τὸ διάλευκον, τὸ ποικίλον, τὸ σποδοειδὲς ῥαντόν, περὶ μὲν τὸν ἀσκητὴν ἅτε μήπω τέλειον ἀτελῆ, περὶ δὲ τὸν τέλειον φαίνεται καὶ αὐτὰ τέλεια.
1:214ὃν δὲ τρόπον, θεασώμεθα· τὸν μέγαν ἀρχιερέα, ὁπότε μέλλοι τὰς νόμῳ προστεταγμένας ἐπιτελεῖν λειτουργίας, ὁ ἱερὸς ἐδικαίωσε λόγος ὕδατι καὶ τέφρᾳ περιρραίνεσθαι τὸ πρῶτον (Exod. 29, 4) εἰς ὑπόμνησιν ἑαυτοῦ — καὶ γὰρ ὁ σοφὸς Ἀβραάμ, ὅτε ἐντευξόμενος ᾔει τῷ θεῷ, γῆν καὶ σποδὸν εἶπεν ἑαυτόν (Gen. 18, 27) —, ἔπειτ’ ἐνδύεσθαι τὸν ποδήρη χιτῶνα καὶ τὸ ποικίλον ὃ κέκληκεν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ περιστήθιον (Exod. 29, 5), τῶν κατ’ οὐρανὸν φωσφόρων ἄστρων ἀπεικόνισμα καὶ μίμημα.
1:215δύο γάρ, ὡς ἔοικεν, ἱερὰ θεοῦ, ἓν μὲν ὅδε ὁὁ κόσμος, ἐν ᾧ καὶ ἀρχιερεὺς ὁὁ πρωτόγονος αὐτοῦ θεῖος λόγος, ἕτερον δὲ λογικὴ ψυχή, ἧς ἱερεὺς ὁ πρὸς ἀλήθειαν ἄνθρωπος, οὗ μίμημα αἰσθητὸν ὁ τὰς πατρίους εὐχὰς καὶ θυσίας ἐπιτελῶν ἐστιν, ᾧ τὸν εἰρημένον ἐπιτέτραπται χιτῶνα ἐνδύεσθαι, τοῦ παντὸς ἀντίμιμον ὄντα οὐρανοῦ, ἵνα συνιερουργῇ καὶ ὁ κόσμος ἀνθρώπῳ καὶ τῷ παντὶ ἄνθρωπος.
1:216δύο μὲν οὖν ἤδη, τόν τε ῥαντὸν καὶ τὸν ποικίλον τύπον, ἔχων ἐπιδέδεικται· τὸν δὲ τρίτον καὶ τελειότατον, ὃς ὀνομάζεται διάλευκος, αὐτίκα σημανοῦμεν. ὅταν εἰς τὰ ἐσωτάτω τῶν ἁγίων ὁ αὐτὸς οὗτος ἀρχιερεὺς εἰσίῃ, τὴν μὲν ποικίλην ἐσθῆτα ἀπαμπίσχεται, λινῆν δὲ ἑτέραν, βύσσου τῆς καθαρωτάτης πεποιημένην, ἀναλαμβάνει (Lev. 16, 4).
1:217ἡ δ’ ἐστὶ σύμβολον εὐτονίας, ἀφθαρσίας, αὐγοειδεστάτου φέγγους· ἀρραγής τε γὰρ ἡ ὀθόνη καὶ ἐξ οὐδενὸς τῶν ἀποθνῃσκόντων γίνεται καὶ ἔτι λαμπρότατον καὶ φωτοειδέστατον ἔχει μὴ ἀμελῶς καθαρθεῖσα χρῶμα.
1:218διὰ δὲ τούτων ἐκεῖνο αἰνίττεται, ὅτι τῶν ἀδόλως καὶ καθαρῶς θεραπευόντων τὸ ὂν οὐδείς ἐστιν ὃς μὴ πρῶτον μὲν ἰσχυρογνωμοσύνῃ κέχρηται καταφρονήσας τῶν ἀνθρωπείων πραγμάτων, ἃ δελεάζοντα κηραίνει καὶ ἀσθένειαν ἐργάζεται, ἔπειτα ἀφθαρσίας ἐφίεται γελάσας ὅσα οἱ θνητοὶ τυφοπλαστοῦσι, τελευταῖον δὲ ἀληθείας ἀσκίῳ φέγγει καὶ περιαυγεῖ καταλάμπεται, μηδὲν ἔτι τῶν τῆς ψευδοῦς δόξης, ἃ σκότῳ φίλα εἶναι συμβέβηκε, προσιέμενος.
1:219ὁ μὲν δὴ μέγας ἀρχιερεὺς τρισὶ ταῖς εἰρημέναις τυπωθεὶς σφραγῖσι, τῇ διαλεύκῳ, τῇ ποικίλῃ, τῇ σποδοειδεῖ ῥαντῇ, τοιοῦτος ἡμῖν ἀναγεγράφθω· τὸν δὲ τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης πολιτείας ἐφιέμενον, Ἰωσὴφ ὄνομα, τῶν μὲν ἄκρων ἰδεῖν ἔστι μὴ μεταποιούμενον χαρακτήρων, μόνου δὲ τοῦ μέσου καὶ ποικίλου.
1:220λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι χιτῶνα ποικίλον ἔσχεν (Gen. 37,3), οὔτε καθαρσίοις περιρρανάμενος ἱεροῖς, ἀφ’ ὧν ἑαυτὸν ἂν ἔγνω τέφρας καὶ ὕδατος συμφόρημα, οὔτε τῆς πανλεύκου καὶ φωτοειδεστάτης ἐσθῆτος, ἀρετῆς, ψαῦσαι δυνηθείς, ἀλλὰ τὸ τῆς πολιτείας ἐπαμπισχόμενος ὕφασμα παμποίκιλον, ᾧ βραχύτατον μέρος ἀληθείας ἐγκαταμέμικται, πολλαὶ δὲ καὶ μεγάλαι μοῖραι ψευδῶν εὐλόγων πιθανῶν εἰκότων, ἐξ ὧν οἱ Αἰγύπτου πάντες ἀνέβλαστον σοφισταί, οἰωνομάντεις, ἐγγαστρίμυθοι, τερατοσκόποι, δεινοὶ παλεῦσαι καὶ κατεπᾷσαι καὶ γοητεῦσαι, ὧν τὰς ἐπιβούλους τέχνας μέγα ἔργον διεκδῦναι.
1:221διὸ καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα τοῦτον εἰσάγει Μωυσῆς φυσικῶς αἵματι πεφυρμένον (Gen. 38, 31), ἐπειδὴ πᾶς ὁ τοῦ πολιτευομένου βίος πέφυρται, πολεμῶν τε καὶ πολεμούμενος καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν προσπιπτουσῶν ἀβουλήτων συντυχιῶν βαλλόμενος καὶ τοξευόμενος.
1:222ἐρεύνησον οὖν τὸν λίαν δημοτικόν, ᾧ τὰ πόλεως πράγματα ἐφορμεῖ, μὴ καταπλαγεὶς τοὺς θαυμαστικῶς ἔχοντας αὐτοῦ, καὶ πολλὰς μὲν ἐμφωλευούσας νόσους εὑρήσεις, πολλὰς δ’ ἐξημμένον κῆρας καὶ βιαίως ἑκάστην τὴν ψυχὴν αὐχενίζουσαν καὶ ἀφανῶς αὐτῇ προσπαλαίουσαν καὶ ζητοῦσαν ἀνατρέψαι καὶ καταβαλεῖν, ἢ τοῦ πλήθους τῇ προστασίᾳ δυσχεράναντος ἢ κατὰ ἀντεπίθεσιν δυνατωτέρου ἀνδρός.
1:223ἔστι δὲ καὶ ὁ φθόνος βαρὺς καὶ δυσαπότριπτος ἐχθρός, ἐπιφυόμενος ἀεὶ ταῖς λεγομέναις εὐπραγίαις, ὃν οὐ ῥᾴδιον ἐκφυγεῖν.
1:224τί οὖν ὡς ἐσθῆτα πολυτελῆ τὴν ἐπηνθισμένην πολιτείαν ἀναψάμενοι γαυριῶμεν, τῷ εὐπρεπεῖ τῆς φανερᾶς ὄψεως ἀπατώμενοι, τὸ δ’ ἀφανὲς καὶ κεκρυμμένον ἐπίβουλον καὶ σφαλερὸν αἶσχος αὐτῆς οὐ κατανοοῦντες;
1:225ἀποδυσάμενοι δὴ τὸν ἀνθηρὸν τοῦτον χιτῶνα τὸν ἱερὸν ἐνδυώμεθα ἀρετῶν ποικίλμασιν ἐνυφασμένον· οὕτως γὰρ καὶ τὰς ἐνέδρας ἀποδρασόμεθα, ἃς ἀτεχνία καὶ ἀνεπιστημοσύνη καὶ ἀπαιδευσία καθ’ ἡμῶν τιθέασιν, ὧν ὁ Λάβαν ἐστὶ θιασώτης.
Book 1, §§201–225
1:201But we must now examine what power each of these offspring has. Now those which are purely white (διάλευκοι) are the most beautiful and the most conspicuous: the word διά being often prefixed in composition by way of adding force to the word, so that the words διάδηλος and διάσημον are commonly used to signify what is very conspicuous (δη̃λον) and very remarkable (ἐπίσημον);
1:202therefore the meaning here is that the first-born offspring of the soul which has received the sacred seed, is purely white; being like light in which there is no obscurity, and like the most brilliant radiance: like the unclouded beam which might proceed from the rays of the sun in fine weather at mid-day. Again, by the statement that some are variegated, what is meant is, not that the flocks are marked by such a multiform and various spottedness as to resemble the unclean leprosy, and which is an emblem of a life unsteady and tossed about in any direction by reason of the fickleness of the mind, but only that they have marks drawn in regular lines and different characters, shaped and impressed with all kinds of well approved forms, the peculiarities of which, being mingled together and combined properly, will produce a musical harmony.
1:203For some persons have looked upon the art of variegating as so random and obscure a matter, that they have referred it to weavers. But I admire not only the art itself, but the name likewise, and most especially so when I look upon the divisions of the earth and the spheres in heaven, and the differences between various plants and various animals, and that most variegated texture, I mean the world;
1:204for I am compelled to suppose, that the maker of this universal textile fabric was also the inventor of all varied and variegating science; and I look with reverence upon the inventor, and I honour the art which he invented, and I am amazed at the work which is the result, and this too, though it is but a very small portion of it which I have been able to see, but still, from the portion which has been unfolded to me, if indeed I may say that it has been unfolded, I hope to form a tolerably accurate judgment of the whole, guiding my conjectures by the light of analogy.
1:205Nevertheless I admire the lover of wisdom for having studied the same art, collecting and thinking fit to weave together many things, though different, and proceeding from different sources, into the same web; for taking the two first elements from the grammatical knowledge imparted to children, that is to say, reading and writing, and taking from the more perfect growth of knowledge the skill which is found among poets, and the comprehension of ancient history, and deriving certainty and freedom from deception from arithmetic and geometry, in which sciences there is need of proportions and calculations; and borrowing from music rhyme, and metre, and harmonies, and chromatics, and diatonics, and combined and disjoined melodies; and having derived from rhetoric invention, and language, and arrangement, and memory, and action; and from philosophy, whatever has been omitted in any of these separate branches, and all the other things of which human life consists, he has put together in one most admirably arranged work, combining great learning of one kind with great learning of another kind.
1:206Now the sacred scripture calls the maker of this compound work Besaleel, which name, being interpreted, signifies "in the shadow of God;" for he makes all the copies, and the man by name Moses makes all the models, as the principal architect; and for this reason it is, that the one only draws outlines as it were, but the other is not content with such sketches,
1:207but makes the archetypal natures themselves, and has already adorned the holy places with his variegating art; but the wise man is called the only adorner of the place of wisdom in the oracles delivered in the sacred scriptures. And the most beautiful and varied work of God, this world, has been created in this its present state of perfection by all-wise knowledge; and how can it be anything but right to receive the art of variegating as a noble effort of knowledge?
1:208the most sacred copy of which is the whole word of wisdom, which will bear about in its bosom the things of heaven and of earth, from which the practiser of virtue elaborates his notions of various things. For after the white sheep he immediately beheld the variegated animals, stamped with the impression of instruction.
1:209The third kind are the ring-straked and speckled; and what man in his senses would deny that these also are, as to their genus, variegated? but still he is not so very eager about the varieties of the members of the flocks, as about the road which leads to virtue and excellence;
1:210for the prophet intends that he who proceeds along this road shall be besprinkled with dust and water; because it is related that the earth and water being kneaded together and fashioned into shape by the Creator of man, was formed into one body, not being made by hand, but being the work of invisible nature.
1:211Therefore it is the first principle of wisdom not to forget one’s self, and always to keep before one’s eyes the materials of which one has been compounded; for in this way a man will get rid of boasting and arrogance, which of all evils is the one most hated by God; for who that ever admits into his mind the recollection that the first principles of his formation are dust and water, would ever be so puffed by vanity as to be unduly elated?
1:212On this account the prophet has thought it fit that those who are about to offer sacrifice shall be be sprinkled with the aforesaid things; thinking no one worthy to appear at a sacrifice who has not first of all learnt to know himself, and to comprehend the nothingness of mankind, and the elements of which he is composed, conjecturing from them that he himself is utterly insignificant.
1:213These three signs, the white, the variegated, and the ring-straked and speckled, are as yet imperfect in the practiser of virtue, who has not himself as yet attained to perfection. But, in the case of him who is perfect, they also appear to be perfect. And in what manner they appear so we will examine.
1:214The sacred scripture has appointed that the great High Priest, when he was about to perform the ministrations appointed by the law, should be besprinkled with water and ashes in the first place, that he might come to a remembrance of himself. For the wise Abraham also, when he went forth to converse with God, pronounced himself to be dust and ashes. In the second place, it enjoins him to put on a tunic reaching down to his feet, and the variously-embroidered thing which was called his breast-plate, an image and representation of the light-giving stars which appear in heaven.
1:215For there are, as it seems, two temples belonging to God; one being this world, in which the high priest is the divine word, his own first-born son. The other is the rational soul, the priest of which is the real true man, the copy of whom, perceptible to the senses, is he who performs his paternal vows and sacrifices, to whom it is enjoined to put on the aforesaid tunic, the representation of the universal heaven, in order that the world may join with the man in offering sacrifice, and that the man may likewise co-operate with the universe.
1:216He is now therefore shown to have these two things, the speckled and the variegated character. We will now proceed to explain the third and most perfect kind, which is denominated thoroughly white. When this same high priest enters into the innermost parts of the holy temple, he is clothed in the variegated garment, and he also assumes another linen robe, made of the very finest flax.
1:217And this is an emblem of vigour, and incorruptibility, and the most brilliant light. For such a veil is a thing very difficult to be broken, and it is made of nothing mortal, and when it is properly and carefully purified it has a most clear and brilliant appearance.
1:218And these injunctions contain this figurative meaning, that of those who in a pure and guileless spirit serve the living God, there is no one who does not at first depend upon the firmness and obstinacy of his mind, despising all human affairs, which allure men with their specious bait, and injure them, and produce weakness in them. In the next place, he aims at immortality, laughing at the blind inventions with which mortals delude themselves. And last of all, he shines with the unclouded and most brilliant light of truth, no longer desiring any of the things which belong to false opinion, which prefer darkness rather than light.
1:219The great high priest of the confession, then, may have now been sufficiently described by us, being stamped with the impressions above-mentioned, the white, the variegated, and the ring-straked and speckled. But he who is desirous of the administration of human affairs, by name Joseph, does not, as it appears, claim for himself any of the extreme characteristics, but only that variegated one which is in the middle between the others.
1:220For we read that Joseph had a "coat of many colours," not being sprinkled with the sacred purifications, by means of which he might have known that he himself was only a compound of dust and water, and not being able to touch that thoroughly white and most shining raiment, virtue. But being clothed in the much-variegated web of political affairs, with which the smallest possible portion of truth is mixed up; and also many and large portions of plausible, probable, and likely falsehoods, from which all the sophists of Egypt, and all the augurs, and ventriloquists, and sorcerers spring; men skilful in juggling, and in incantations, and in tricks of all kinds, from whose treacherous arts it is very difficult to escape.
1:221And it is on this account that Moses very naturally represents this robe as stained with blood; since the whole life of the man who is mixed up in political affairs is tainted, warring on others and being warred against, and being aimed at, and attacked, and shot at by all the unexpected chances which befall him.
1:222Examine now the man who has great influence with the people, on whom the affairs of the city depend. Do not be alarmed at those who look with admiration upon him; and you will find many diseases lurking within him, and you will see that he is entangled in many disasters, and that fortune is dragging him violently in different directions, though he bends his neck the other way, and resists, although invisibly, and in fact that fortune is seeking to overthrow and destroy him; or else the people themselves are impatient at his supremacy, or he is exposed to the attacks of some more powerful rival.
1:223And envy is a formidable enemy, and one hard to be shaken off, clinging also to everything that is called good fortune, and it is not easy to escape from it.
1:224What reason is there then for our congratulating ourselves on the administration of political affairs as if we were clothed in a garment of many colours, deceived by its external splendour, and not perceiving its ugliness, which is kept out of sight, and hidden, and full of treachery and guile?
1:225Let us then put off this flowery robe, and put on that sacred one woven with the embroideries of virtue; for thus we shall escape the snares which want of skill, and ignorance, and want of knowledge, and education lay for us, of which Laban is the companion.
Book 1, §§226–250
1:226ἐπειδὴ γὰρ ἐκάθηρεν ἡμᾶς ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος τοῖς εἰς ἁγιστείαν εὐτρεπισθεῖσι περιρραντηρίοις καὶ τοῖς ἀπορρήτοις φιλοσοφίας ἀληθοῦς κατεποίκιλε λόγοις ἀγαγὼν εἰς τὸ δοκίμιον καὶ διασήμους καὶ ἐπιφανεῖς καὶ λαμπροὺς ἐποίησεν, αἰτιᾶται τὸ ἐπίβουλον ἦθος, πρὸς τὴν τῶν λεχθέντων ἀνηρεθισμένον λώβην.
1:227φησὶ γάρ· „ἑώρακα ὅσα σοι Λάβαν ποιεῖ“ (Gen. 31, 12), τἀναντία δήπουθεν οἷς ἐδωρησάμην ἐγώ, τὸ δυσκάθαρτον καὶ τὸ ἀδόκιμον, τὸ πάντῃ σκοταῖον. ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὐ χρὴ κατεπτηχέναι τὸν ἐλπίδι θείας συμμαχίας ἐφορμοῦντα, ᾧ καὶ λέγεται· „ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ θεὸς ὁ ὀφθείς σοι ἐν τόπῳ θεοῦ“ (Gen. 31, 13).
1:228πάγκαλόν γε αὔχημα ψυχῇ, τὸ ἀξιοῦν θεὸν ἐπιφαίνεσθαι καὶ ἐνομιλεῖν αὐτῇ. μὴ παρέλθῃς δὲ τὸ εἰρημένον, ἀλλὰ ἀκριβῶς ἐξέτασον, εἰ τῷ ὄντι δύο εἰσὶ θεοί· λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι „ἐγώ εἰμι ὁὁ θεὸς ὁὁ ὀφθείς σοι“, οὐκ ἐν τόπῳ ἐμῷ, ἀλλ’ „ἐν τόπῳ θεοῦ,“ ὡς ἂν ἑτέρου. τί οὖν χρὴ λέγειν;
1:229ὁ μὲν ἀληθείᾳ θεὸς εἷς ἐστιν, οἱ δ’ ἐν καταχρήσει λεγόμενοι πλείους. διὸ καὶ ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος ἐν τῷ παρόντι τὸν μὲν ἀληθείᾳ διὰ τοῦ ἄρθρου μεμήνυκεν εἰπών· „ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ θεός“, τὸν δ’ ἐν καταχρήσει χωρὶς ἄρθρου φάσκων· „ὁ ὀφθείς σοι ἐν τόπῳ“, οὐ τοῦ θεοῦ, ἀλλ’ αὐτὸ μόνον „θεοῦ“.
1:230καλεῖ δὲ θεὸν τὸν πρεσβύτατον αὐτοῦ νυνὶ λόγον, οὐ δεισιδαιμονῶν περὶ τὴν θέσιν τῶν ὀνομάτων, ἀλλ’ ἓν τέλος προτεθειμένος, πραγματολογῆσαι. καὶ γὰρ ἐν ἑτέροις σκεψάμενος, εἰ ἔστι τι τοῦ ὄντος ὄνομα, σαφῶς ἔγνω ὅτι κύριον μὲν οὐδέν (Exod. 6, 3), ὃ δ’ ἂν εἴπῃ τις, καταχρώμενος ἐρεῖ· λέγεσθαι γὰρ οὐ πέφυκεν, ἀλλὰ μόνον εἶναι τὸ ὄν.
1:231μαρτυρεῖ δὲ καὶ τὸ θεσπισθὲν λόγιον τῷ πυνθανομένῳ, εἰ ἔστιν ὄνομα αὐτῷ, ὅτι „ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ὤν“ (Exod. 3, 14), ἵν’ ὧν δυνατὸν ἀνθρώπῳ καταλαβεῖν μὴ ὄντων περὶ θεόν, ἐπιγνῷ τὴν ὕπαρξιν.
1:232ταῖς μὲν οὖν ἀσωμάτοις καὶ θεραπευτρίσιν αὐτοῦ ψυχαῖς εἰκὸς αὐτὸν οἷός ἐστιν ἐπιφαίνεσθαι διαλεγόμενον ὡς φίλον φίλαις, ταῖς δὲ ἔτι ἐν σώματι ἀγγέλοις εἰκαζόμενον, οὐ μεταβάλλοντα τὴν ἑαυτοῦ φύσιν — ἄτρεπτος γάρ —, ἀλλὰ δόξαν ἐντιθέντα ταῖς φαντασιουμέναις ἑτερόμορφον, ὡς τὴν εἰκόνα οὐ μίμημα, ἀλλ’ αὐτὸ τὸ ἀρχέτυπον ἐκεῖνο εἶδος ὑπολαμβάνειν εἶναι.
1:233παλαιὸς μὲν οὖν ᾄδεται λόγος, ὅτι τὸ θεῖον ἀνθρώποις εἰκαζόμενον ἄλλοτε ἄλλοις περινοστεῖ τὰς πόλεις ἐν κύκλῳ, τάς τε ἀδικίας καὶ παρανομίας ἐξετάζον· καὶ τάχα μὲν οὐκ ἀληθῶς, πάντως δὲ λυσιτελῶς καὶ συμφερόντως ᾄδεται.
1:234ὁ δὲ λόγος σεμνότερον καὶ ἁγιώτερον ταῖς περὶ τοῦ ὄντος ἐννοίαις ἀεὶ χρώμενος, ἅμα δὲ καὶ τὸν τῶν ἀφρόνων βίον παιδεῦσαι γλιχόμενος ἀνθρώπῳ μὲν εἴκασεν, οὐ μέντοι τῶν ἐπὶ μέρους οὐδενί·
1:235πρόσωπον διὰ τοῦτο καὶ χεῖρας καὶ βάσεις καὶ στόμα καὶ φωνὴν ὀργάς τε καὶ θυμούς, ἔτι δὲ ἀμυντήρια ὅπλα καὶ εἰσόδους μέντοι καὶ ἐξόδους καὶ τὰς ἄνω καὶ κάτω καὶ πανταχῇ κινήσεις περιέθηκεν, οὐ πρὸς ἀλήθειαν τὸ κεφάλαιον τοῦτο τῶν λόγων ἀναφέρων, ἀλλὰ πρὸς τὸ λυσιτελὲς τῶν μανθανόντων.
1:236εἰσὶ γάρ τινες ἀμβλεῖς πάνυ τὰς φύσεις, ὡς μὴ δύνασθαι θεὸν ἄνευ σώματος ἐπινοῆσαι τὸ παράπαν· οὓς ἀμήχανον ἑτέρως ἢ τρόπον τοῦτον νουθετεῖν λέγοντας, ὅτι ὡς ἄνθρωπος ὁ θεὸς ἀφικνεῖται καὶ ἐξαναχωρεῖ καὶ κάτεισι καὶ ἀνέρχεται καὶ φωνῇ χρῆται καὶ τοῖς ἁμαρτανομένοις δυσχεραίνει καὶ ἀπαραιτήτως πρὸς τὰς ὀργὰς ἔχει καὶ βέλη μέντοι καὶ ξίφη καὶ τὰ ἄλλα ὅσα πρὸς τιμωρίας ὄργανα ἐπιτήδεια κατὰ τῶν ἀδίκων προευτρέπισται.
1:237ἀγαπητὸν γάρ, ἐὰν τῷ διὰ τούτων ἐπικρεμασθέντι φόβῳ σωφρονισθῆναι δυνηθῶσι. καὶ σχεδὸν δύο εἰσὶν αὗται μόναι αἱ τῆς νομοθεσίας πάσης ὁδοί, μία μὲν ἡ πρὸς τὸ ἀληθὲς ἀπονεύουσα, δι’ ἧς κατασκευάζεται „οὐχ ὡς ἄνθρωπος ὁ θεός“ (Num. 23, 19), ἑτέρα δὲ ἡ πρὸς τὰς τῶν νωθεστέρων δόξας, ἐφ’ ὧν λέγεται· „παιδεύσει σε κύριος ὁ θεὸς, ὡς εἴ τις παιδεύσειεν ἄνθρωπος τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ“ (Deut. 8,5).
1:238τί οὖν ἔτι θαυμάζομεν, εἰ ἀγγέλοις, ὁπότε καὶ ἀνθρώποις ἕνεκα τῆς τῶν δεομένων ἐπικουρίας ἀπεικάζεται; ὥσθ’ ὅταν φῇ· „ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ θεὸς ὁ ὀφθείς σοι ἐν τόπῳ θεοῦ" (Gen. 31,13), τότε νόησον, ὅτι τὸν ἀγγέλου τόπον ἐπέσχεν ὅσα τῷ δοκεῖν, οὐ μεταβάλλων, πρὸς τὴν τοῦ μήπω δυναμένου τὸν ἀληθῆ θεὸν ἰδεῖν ὠφέλειαν.
1:239καθάπερ γὰρ τὴν ἀνθήλιον αὐγὴν ὡς ἥλιον οἱ μὴ δυνάμενοι τὸν ἥλιον αὐτὸν ἰδεῖν ὁρῶσι καὶ τὰς περὶ σελήνην ἅλως ὡς αὐτὴν ἐκείνην, οὕτως καὶ τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ εἰκόνα, τὸν ἄγγελον αὐτοῦ λόγον, ὡς αὐτὸν κατανοοῦσιν.
1:240οὐχ ὁρᾷς τὴν ἐγκύκλιον παιδείαν Ἄγαρ, ὅτι τῷ ἀγγέλῳ φησί· „σὺ ὁ θεὸς ὁ ἐπιδών με“ (Gen. 16, 13) ; οὐ γὰρ ἦν ἱκανὴ τὸ πρεσβύτατον ἰδεῖν αἴτιον, γένος οὖσα τῶν ἀπ’ Αἰγύπτου. νυνὶ δὲ ὁ νοῦς ἄρχεται βελτιούμενος τὸν ἡγεμόνα πασῶν τῶν τοιούτων δυνάμεων φαντασιοῦσθαι.
1:241διὸ καὶ αὐτός φησιν· „ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ θεός“, οὗ τὴν εἰκόνα ὡς ἐμὲ πρότερον ἐθεάσω καὶ στήλην ἐπίγραμμα ἐγκολάψας ἱερώτατον ἀνέθηκας (Gen. 31, 13)· τὸ δὲ ἐπίγραμμα ἐμήνυεν, ὅτι μόνος ἕστηκα ἐγὼ (Exod. 17,6) καὶ τὴν τῶν πάντων φύσιν ἱδρυσάμην, τὴν ἀταξίαν καὶ ἀκοσμίαν εἰς κόσμον καὶ τάξιν ἀγαγὼν καὶ τὸ πᾶν ἐπερείσας, ἵνα στηριχθῇ
1:242βεβαίως τῷ κραταιῷ καὶ ὑπάρχῳ μου λόγῳ. στήλη γὰρ τριῶν πραγμάτων σύμβολον, στάσεως ἀναθέσεως ἐπιγράμματος. ἡ μὲν οὖν στάσις καὶ τὸ ἐπίγραμμα δεδήλωται, ἡ δὲ ἀνάθεσις ἀναγκαία μηνυθῆναι·
1:243πᾶς ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ὁ κόσμος ἀνάθημα θεοῦ τοῦ πεποιηκότος τὸ ἀνάθημα· καὶ ὅσαι μέντοι κοσμοπολίτιδες ψυχαὶ καὶ θεοφιλεῖς, ἑαυτὰς ἀνιεροῦσιν ὑπὸ μηδενὸς ἀντισπώμεναι θνητοῦ, καθαγιάζουσαι δὲ καὶ καλλιεροῦσαι τὸν ἑαυτῶν ἄφθαρτον βίον οὐδέποτε κάμνουσι.
1:244μάταιος δ’ ὅστις μὴ θεῷ στήλην ἀνατίθησιν, ἀλλ’ ἑαυτῷ, τὰ γενέσεως ἱστὰς τῆς πάντῃ σαλευομένης καὶ ἐπιγραμμάτων καὶ ἐπαίνων ἀξιῶν, ἃ ψόγου καὶ κατηγορίας μεστὰ ὄντα καλὸν ἦν ἢ μὴ γραφῆναι τὸ παράπαν ἢ γραφέντα εὐθὺς ἀπαλειφθῆναι.
1:245διὸ καί φησιν ἄντικρυς ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος· „οὐ στήσεις σεαυτῷ στήλην“ (Deut. 16, 22)· ἕστηκε γὰρ τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων πρὸς ἀλήθειαν οὐδέν, κἂν διαρραγῶσί τινες ψευδόμενοι.
1:246ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὐκ οἴονται μόνον παγίως ἐρηρεῖσθαι, ἀλλὰ καὶ τιμῶν ἄξιοι καὶ ἐπιγραμμάτων εἶναι, τοῦ μόνου τιμῆς ἀξίου καὶ ἑστῶτος ὄντως ἐπιλελησμένοι. ἀποκλίναντας γὰρ αὐτοὺς καὶ ἐκτραπομένους τὴν ἐπ’ ἀρετὴν ἄγουσαν ὁδὸν ἔτι μᾶλλον ἐξέτρεψεν αἴσθησις, ἡ σύμφυτος αὐτῶν γυνή, καὶ ἠνάγκασεν ἐξοκεῖλαι.
1:247τοιγάρτοι περικαταχθεῖσα ὡς ναῦς ἡ ὅλη ψυχὴ τρόπον στήλης ἀνετέθη. τὴν γὰρ Λὼτ γυναῖκα ἐπιστραφεῖσαν εἰς τοὐπίσω φασὶν οἱ χρησμοὶ γενέσθαι στήλην ἁλός (Gen. 19, 26), εἰκότως γε καὶ προσηκόντως·
1:248εἰ γάρ τις μὴ τὰ πρόσω, τὰ θέας καὶ ἀκοῆς ἄξια, διορᾷ — ταῦτα δ’ εἰσὶν ἀρεταὶ καὶ τὰ κατὰ ἀρετὰς ἔργα —, περιβλέπεται δὲ τὰ ὀπίσω καὶ τὰ νώτια, κωφὴν δόξαν καὶ τυφλὸν πλοῦτον καὶ ἀναίσθητον εὐσαρκίαν καὶ νοῦ κενὴν εὐμορφίαν καὶ ὅσα συγγενῆ τούτοις μεταδιώκων, ἄψυχος ἀνακείσεται στήλη περὶ ἑαυτὴν καταρρυεῖσα· οἱ γὰρ ἅλες οὐ βέβαιον.
1:249Παγκάλως οὖν ὁ ἀσκητὴς μελέτῃ συνεχεῖ μαθών, ὅτι γένεσις κινητὸν ἐξ ἑαυτῆς, τὸ δὲ ἀγένητον ἄτρεπτόν τε καὶ ἀκίνητον, ἀνίστησι τῷ θεῷ στήλην καὶ ἀναστήσας ἀλείφει· λέγεται γάρ· „ἤλειψάς μοι στήλην„ (Gen. 31, 13).
1:250ἀλλὰ μὴ νομίσῃς ἐλαίῳ λίθον ἀλείφεσθαι, ἀλλὰ τὸ περὶ τοῦ μόνον ἑστάναι τὸν θεὸν ἐν ψυχῇ δόγμα γυμνάζεσθαι καὶ συνασκεῖσθαι πρὸς ἀλειπτικῆς ἐπιστήμης, οὐχ ᾗ τὰ σώματα πιαίνεται, ἀλλ’ ὑφ’ ἧς διάνοια ἰσχὺν κτᾶται καὶ ῥώμην ἀνανταγώνιστον.
Book 1, §§226–250
1:226For when the sacred word has purified us with the sprinklings prepared beforehand for purification, and when it has adorned us with the select reasonings of true philosophy, and, having led us to that man who has stood the test, has made us genuine, and conspicuous, and shining, it blames the treacherous disposition which seeks to raise itself up to invalidate what is said.
1:227For the scripture says: "I have seen what Laban does unto thee," namely, things contrary to the benefits which I conferred on you, things impure, wicked, and altogether suited to darkness. But it is not right for the man who anchors on the hope of the alliance of God to crouch and tremble, to whom God says, "I am the God who was seen by thee in the place of God."
1:228A very glorious boast for the soul, that God should think fit to appear to and to converse with it. And do not pass by what is here said, but examine it accurately, and see whether there are really two Gods. For it is said: "I am the God who was seen by thee;" not in my place, but in the place of God, as if he meant of some other God.
1:229What then ought we to say? There is one true God only: but they who are called Gods, by an abuse of language, are numerous; on which account the holy scripture on the present occasion indicates that it is the true God that is meant by the use of the article, the expression being, "I am the God (ὁ Θεός);" but when the word is used incorrectly, it is put without the article, the expression being, "He who was seen by thee in the place," not of the God (του̃ Θεου̃), but simply "of God" (Θεου̃);
1:230and what he here calls God is his most ancient word, not having any superstitious regard to the position of the names, but only proposing one end to himself, namely, to give a true account of the matter; for in other passages the sacred historian, when he considered whether there really was any name belonging to the living God, showed that he knew that there was none properly belonging to him; but that whatever appellation any one may give him, will be an abuse of terms; for the living God is not of a nature to be described, but only to be.
1:231And a proof of this may be found in the oracular answer given by God to the person who asked what name he had, "I am that I am," that the questioner might know the existence of those things which it was not possible for man to conceive not being connected with God.
1:232Accordingly, to the incorporeal souls which are occupied in his service, it is natural for him to appear as he is, conversing with them as a friend with his friends; but to those souls which are still in the body he must appear in the resemblance of the angels, though without changing his nature (for he is unchangeable), but merely implanting in those who behold him an idea of his having another form, so that they fancy that it is his image, not an imitation of him, but the very archetypal appearance itself.
1:233There is then an old story much celebrated, that the Divinity, assuming the resemblance of men of different countries, goes round the different cities of men, searching out the deeds of iniquity and lawlessness; and perhaps, though the fable is not true, it is a suitable and profitable one.
1:234But the scripture, which at all times advances its conceptions with respect to the Deity, in a more reverential and holy tone, and which likewise desires to instruct the life of the foolish, has spoken of God under the likeness of a man, though not of any particular man;
1:235attributing to him, with this view, the possession of a face, and hands, and feet, and of a mouth and voice, and also anger and passion, and moreover, defensive weapons, and goings in and goings out, and motions upwards and downwards, and in every direction, not indeed using all these expressions with strict truth, but having regard to the advantage of those who are to learn from it;
1:236for the writers knew that some men are very dull in their natures, so as to be utterly unable to form any conception whatever of God apart from a body, whom it would be impossible to admonish if they were to speak in any other style than the existing one, of representing God as coming and departing like a man; and as descending and ascending, and as using his voice, and as being angry with sinners, and being implacable in his anger; and speaking too of his darts and swords, and whatever other instruments are suitable to be employed against the wicked, as being all previously ready.
1:237For we must be content if such men can be brought to a proper state, by the fear which is suspended over them by such descriptions; and one may almost say that these are the only two paths taken, in the whole history of the law; one leading to the plain truth, owing to which we have such assertions as, "God is not as a man;" the other, that which has regard to the opinions of foolish men, in reference to whom it is said, "The Lord God shall instruct you, like as if a man instructs his son."
1:238Why then do we any longer wonder, if God at times assumes the likeness of the angels, as he sometimes assumes even that of men, for the sake of assisting those who address their entreaties to him? so that when he says, "I am the God who was seen by thee in the place of God;" we must understand this, that he on that occasion took the place of an angel, as far as appearance went, without changing his own real nature, for the advantage of him who was not, as yet, able to bear the sight of the true God;
1:239for as those who are not able to look upon the sun itself, look upon the reflected rays of the sun as the sun itself, and upon the halo around the moon as if it were the moon itself; so also do those who are unable to bear the sight of God, look upon his image, his angel word, as himself.
1:240Do you not see that encyclical instruction, that is, Hagar, says to the angel, "Art thou God who seest me?" for she was not capable of beholding the most ancient cause, inasmuch as she was by birth a native of Egypt. But now the mind begins to be improved, so as to be able to contemplate the governor of all the powers;
1:241on which account he says himself, "I am the Lord God," I whose image you formerly beheld instead of me, and whose pillar you set up, engraving on it a most sacred inscription; and the inscription indicated that I stood alone, and that I established the nature of all things, bringing disorder and irregularity into order and regularity, and supporting the universe firmly, so that it might rest on a firm and solid foundation, my own ministering word.
1:242For the pillar is the symbol of three things; of standing, of dedication, and of an inscription: now the standing and the inscription have been described, but the dedication it is necessary should be explained to all men.
1:243For heaven and the world are an offering dedicated to God who made them; and all the cosmopolitan and God-loving souls, which dedicate and consecrate themselves to him, not allowing any mortal thing to drag them in an opposite direction, are never weary of hallowing their own life, and adorning it with every kind of beauty as a meet offering for him.
1:244And he is a foolish man who does not set up a pillar to God, but who erects one to himself instead, attributing stability to the things of creation, which is tossed about in every direction, and thinking those things worthy of inscriptions and panegyrics, which are in reality full of matter for blame and accusation, and which as such had better never have been mentioned in an inscription at all, or if they had, had better have been speedily erased again.
1:245On which account the holy scripture says distinctly, "Thou shalt not set up a pillar to thyself;" for in truth there is nothing belonging to man that is stable, no, not though some persons persist even so obstinately in affirming it.
1:246But they not only think that they stand firmly, but also that they are worthy of honours and inscriptions, forgetting him who is alone worthy of honour, and who is alone firmly fixed; for while they are turning aside and wandering away from the path which leads to virtue, the outward sense leads them still more astray, that is to say, the woman who is akin to them, she also compels them to run ashore;
1:247therefore, the whole soul, like a ship, being shut in all around, is offered up as a pillar; for the sacred scriptures tell us that Lot’s wife having turned back to look behind her, became a pillar of salt,
1:248and this is said very naturally and fitly; for if any one does not look forwards at those things which are worthy of being seen and heard (and these things are the virtues and the actions done in accordance with virtue), but looks backwards at the things which are behind him, at deaf glory, and blind riches, and senseless vigour of body, and an empty elegance of mind, pursuing these objects only, and such as are akin to them, he will lie as a lifeless pillar melting away by itself; for salt is not a thing to preserve his firmness.
1:249Very admirably therefore does the practiser of virtue, having learnt by continued study that creation is a thing in its own nature moveable, but that the uncreated God is unchangeable and immoveable, erect a pillar to God, and anoint it after he has erected it; for God says, "Thou hast anointed my pillar."
1:250But do not fancy that that stone was anointed with oil, but understand rather that that opinion, that God is the only being who stands firmly, was thoroughly hardened by exercise, and established in the soul by the science of wrestling, not that science by which bodies are made fat, but that by which the mind acquires strength and irresistible vigour;
Book 1, §§251–256; Book 2, §§1–19
1:251φίλαθλος γὰρ καὶ φιλογυμναστὴς ὁ πρὸς τὴν τῶν καλῶν ἐπιτηδευμάτων ὡρμημένος θήραν· ὥστ’ εἰκότως τὴν ἀδελφὴν ἰατρικῆς τέχνης ἀλειπτικὴν ἐκπονήσας, πάντας τοὺς περὶ ἀρετῆς καὶ εὐσεβείας ἀλείψας καὶ συγκροτήσας λόγους, ἀνάθημα κάλλιστον καὶ ἐχυρώτατον ἀναθήσει θεῷ.
1:252διὸ καὶ μετὰ τὴν τῆς στήλης ἀνάθεσίν φησιν, ὅτι „ηὔξω μοι εὐχήν“ (ibid.). εὐχὴ δέ ἐστι κυρίως εἰπεῖν ἀνάθεσις, ὁπότε μὴ μόνον τὰ ἑαυτοῦ κτήματα, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸν κεκτημένον ἑαυτὸν ἀποδιδοὺς διδόναι λέγεται θεῷ δῶρον.
1:253„ἅγιος“ γάρ φησιν „ἐστὶν ὁ τρέφων κόμην τρίχα κεφαλῆς“ (Num. 6, 5) εὐξάμενος· εἰ δὲ ἅγιος, ἀνάθημα πάντως, μηδενὸς ἔτ’ ἀνιέρου καὶ βεβήλου προσαπτόμενος.
1:254ἐγγυᾶται δέ μου τὸν λόγον ἡ προφῆτις καὶ προφητοτόκος Ἄννα, ἧς μεταληφθὲν τοὔνομα καλεῖται χάρις. τὸν γὰρ υἱὸν διδόναι φησὶ τῷ ἁγίῳ δῶρον Σαμουήλ (I Reg. 1,28), οὐκ ἄνθρωπον μᾶλλον, ἀλλὰ τρόπον ἐνθουσιῶντα καὶ κατεχόμενον ἐκ μανίας θεοφορήτου. Σαμουὴλ δὲ ἑρμηνεύεται τεταγμένος θεῷ.
1:255τί οὖν ἔτι, ψυχή, ματαιάζεις καὶ κενὰ πονεῖς, ἀλλ’ οὐ φοιτᾷς πρὸς τὸν ἀσκητήν, τὰ κατὰ τοῦ πάθους καὶ τῆς κενῆς δόξης ἀναλαβεῖν ὅπλα καὶ παλαίσματα μαθησομένη; τάχα γὰρ μαθοῦσα ἀγελαρχήσεις, οὐκ ἀσήμου καὶ ἀλόγου καὶ ἀναγώγου, δοκίμου δὲ καὶ λογικῆς καὶ ποικίλης ἀγέλης·
1:256ἧς εἰ γένοιο ἡγεμών, τὸ μὲν οἰκτρὸν ἀνθρώπων γένος ὀλοφυρῇ, τὸ δὲ θεῖον οὐ παύσῃ προστρεπομένη, τὸν δὲ θεὸν οὐκ ἐπιλείψεις εὐδαιμονίζουσα, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὕμνους ἱεροπρεπεῖς στήλαις ἐγχαράξεις, ἵνα μὴ μόνον λέγῃς εὐτρόχως, ἀλλὰ καὶ ᾄδῃς μουσικῶς τὰς τοῦ ὄντος ἀρετάς. οὕτως γὰρ δυνήσῃ καὶ εἰς τὸν πατρῷον οἶκον ἐπανελθεῖν, τὴν ἐπὶ τῆς ξένης μακρὰν καὶ ἀνήνυτον ζάλην ἐκφυγοῦσα.
2:1Τὸ τρίτον εἶδος τῶν θεοπέμπτων ὀνείρων ἀναγράφοντες εἰκότως ἂν ἐπίμαχον Μωυσῆν καλοῖμεν, ἵν’, ὡς ἔμαθεν οὐκ εἰδώς, ἀγνοοῦντας καὶ ἡμᾶς ἀναδιδάξῃ περὶ τῶν σημείων, ἕκαστον αὐγάζων. συνίσταται δὲ τὸ τρίτον εἶδος, ὁπόταν ἐν τοῖς ὕπνοις ἐξ ἑαυτῆς ἡ ψυχὴ κινουμένη καὶ ἀναδονοῦσα ἑαυτὴν κορυβαντιᾷ καὶ ἐνθουσιῶσα δυνάμει προγνωστικῇ τὰ μέλλοντα θεσπίζῃ.
2:2τὸ μὲν γὰρ πρῶτον ἦν ἄρχοντος τῆς κινήσεως θεοῦ καὶ ὑπηχοῦντος ἀοράτως τὰ ἡμῖν μὲν ἄδηλα, γνώριμα δὲ ἑαυτῷ· τὸ δὲ δεύτερον τῆς ἡμετέρας διανοίας τῇ τῶν ὅλων συγκινουμένης ψυχῇ καὶ θεοφορήτου μανίας ἀναπιμπλαμένης, ᾗ θέμις πολλὰ τῶν ἀποβησομένων προαγορεύειν.
2:3διὸ ὁ ἱεροφάντης τὰς μὲν κατὰ τὸ πρῶτον σημαινόμενον φαντασίας τρανῶς πάνυ καὶ ἀριδήλως ἐμήνυσεν, ἅτε τοῦ θεοῦ χρησμοῖς σαφέσιν ἐοικότα διὰ τῶν ὀνείρων ὑποβάλλοντος, τὰς δὲ κατὰ τὸ δεύτερον οὔτε σφόδρα τηλαυγῶς οὔτε σκοτίως ἄγαν· ὧν ὑπόδειγμα ἡ ἐπὶ τῆς οὐρανοῦ κλίμακος φανεῖσα ὄψις. αὕτη γὰρ αἰνιγματώδης μὲν ἦν, τὸ δὲ αἴνιγμα οὐ λίαν τοῖς ὀξὺ καθορᾶν δυναμένοις ἀπεκρύπτετο.
2:4αἱ δὲ κατὰ τὸ τρίτον εἶδος φαντασίαι μᾶλλον τῶν προτέρων ἀδηλούμεναι διὰ τὸ βαθὺ καὶ κατακορὲς ἔχειν τὸ αἴνιγμα ἐδεήθησαν καὶ τῆς ὀνειροκριτικῆς ἐπιστήμης. πάντες γοῦν οἱ κατ’ αὐτὸ ἀναγραφέντες ὄνειροι τῷ νομοθέτῃ διακρίνονται πρὸς σοφῶν τὴν λεχθεῖσαν τέχνην ἀνδρῶν. τίνος οὖν εἰσιν οἱ ὄνειροι;
2:5ἢ παντί τῳ δῆλον, ὅτι οἱ τοῦ Ἰωσήφ, οἱ τοῦ βασιλέως Αἰγύπτου Φαραὼ καὶ οὓς ὅ τε ἀρχισιτοποιὸς καὶ ἀρχιοινοχόος εἶδον αὐτοί;
2:6πρέποι δ’ ἂν ἀπὸ τῶν πρώτων ἀεὶ τῆς διδασκαλίας ἀπάρχεσθαι· πρῶτοι δ’ εἰσὶν οὓς ἐθεάσατο Ἰωσήφ, ἀπὸ δυεῖν τῶν τοῦ κόσμου μερῶν, οὐρανοῦ τε καὶ γῆς, διττὰς φαντασίας λαβών· ἀπὸ μὲν γῆς τὸ περὶ τὸν ἀμητὸν ὄναρ — τοιοῦτον δ’ ἐστίν· „ᾤμην ἡμᾶς δεσμεύειν δράγματα ἐν μέσῳ τῷ πεδίῳ, ἀνέστη δὲ τὸ ἐμὸν δράγμα“ (Gen. 37, 7), — τὸ δὲ περὶ τὸν ζῳδιακὸν κύκλον * * * „ὥσπερ ὁ ἥλιος καὶ ἡ σελήνη καὶ ἕνδεκα ἀστέρες προσεκύνουν με“ (ibid. 9).
2:7διάκρισις δὲ τοῦ μὲν προτέρου μετὰ σφοδρᾶς ἐπανατάσεως τοιαύτη· „μὴ βασιλεύων βασιλεύσεις ἐφ’ ἡμῖν; ἢ κυριεύων κυριεύσεις ἡμῶν“ (ibid. 8) ; τοῦ δὲ ὑστέρου ὀργὴ πάλιν δικαία· „ἆρά γε ἐλευσόμεθα ἐγὼ καὶ ἡ μήτηρ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου προσκυνῆσαί σοι ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν“ (ibid. 10) ;
2:8Ταῦτα μὲν δὴ θεμελίων τρόπον προκαταβεβλήσθω, τὰ δὲ ἄλλα τοῖς σοφῆς ἀρχιτέκτονος, ἀλληγορίας, ἑπόμενοι παραγγέλμασιν ἐποικοδομῶμεν, ἑκάτερον δὴ τῶν ὀνειράτων ἀκριβοῦντες. ἃ δὲ χρὴ πρὸ ἀμφοτέρων ἀκοῦσαι, λεκτέον· τὴν τἀγαθοῦ φύσιν οἱ μὲν ἔτειναν ἐπὶ πολλά, οἱ δὲ τῷ ἀρίστῳ προσεκλήρωσαν μόνῳ· καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐκέρασαν, οἱ δὲ καὶ ἄκρατον εἴασαν.
2:9οἱ μὲν οὖν μόνον τὸ καλὸν ἀγαθὸν εἰπόντες, ἀμιγῆ διαφυλάξαντες αὐτήν, ἀπένειμαν τῷ κρατίστῳ τῶν ἐν ἡμῖν, λογισμῷ, οἱ δὲ μίξαντες τρισὶν ἐφήρμοσαν, ψυχῇ, σώματι, τοῖς ἐκτός. εἰσὶ δὲ οὗτοι μὲν τῆς μαλακωτέρας καὶ τρυφερᾶς διαίτης, τὸν πλείω χρόνον ἐν γυναικωνίτιδι καὶ τοῖς γυναικωνίτιδος ἐκτεθηλυμμένοις ἔθεσιν ἀπ’ αὐτῶν σπαργάνων ἀνατραφέντες· οἱ δ’ ἕτεροι σκληροδίαιτοι, πρὸς μὲν ἀνδρῶν κουροτροφηθέντες, ἄνδρες δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ τὰ φρονήματα, τὸ συμφέρον πρὸ τοῦ ἡδέος ἀσπαζόμενοι καὶ τροφαῖς ἀθλητικαῖς πρὸς ἰσχὺν καὶ ῥώμην, οὐ πρὸς ἡδονήν, χρώμενοι.
2:10δυεῖν δὴ θιάσων ἡγεμόνας εἰσάγει Μωυσῆς, τοῦ μὲν γενναίου τὸν αὐτομαθῆ καὶ αὐτοδίδακτον Ἰσαάκ — ἀναγράφει γὰρ αὐτὸν ἀπογαλακτιζόμενον (Gen. 21,8), ἁπαλαῖς καὶ γαλακτώδεσι νηπίαις τε καὶ παιδικαῖς τροφαῖς οὐ δικαιοῦντα χρῆσθαι τὸ παράπαν, ἀλλ’ εὐτόνοις καὶ τελείαις, ἅτε ἐκ βρέφους εὖ πρὸς ἀλκὴν πεφυκότα καὶ ἐπακμάζοντα καὶ ἀνηβῶντα ἀεί —, τοῦ δὲ εἴκοντος καὶ εὐενδότου τὸν Ἰωσήφ.
2:11οὗτος γὰρ οὐκ ἀλογεῖ μὲν τῶν κατὰ ψυχὴν ἀρετῶν, προμηθεῖται δὲ καὶ τῆς τοῦ σώματος εὐσταθείας, ἐφίεται δὲ καὶ τῆς τῶν ἐκτὸς εὐπορίας· ἀνθέλκεται δὲ εἰκότως πολλὰ τέλη τοῦ βίου προτεθειμένος, καὶ ἀντισπώμενος ὑφ’ ἑκάστου σείεται καὶ κλονεῖται μὴ δυνάμενος στηριχθῆναι.
2:12καὶ γὰρ οὐδ’ ὥσπερ αἱ ἔνσπονδοι πόλεις εἰρήνην ἄγουσι * * * καὶ ἀντεπιτίθενται, ὡς ἐν μέρει κρατεῖν τε καὶ ἡττᾶσθαι· πολλὴ γὰρ ἔστιν ὅτε ῥυεῖσα πρὸς πλοῦτον καὶ δόξαν ὁρμὴ τὰς περὶ σῶμα καὶ ψυχὴν φροντίδας ἐξενίκησεν, εἶτα ἀντιβιασθεῖσα πάλιν ὑπὸ ἀμφοῖν ὑπὸ τῆς ἑτέρας ἐνικήθη. τὸν αὐτὸν δὲ τρόπον
2:13ἀθρόαι καὶ αἱ σώματος ἡδοναὶ καταρραγεῖσαι πάντα ἑξῆς τὰ νοητὰ ἐπέκλυσάν τε καὶ ἠφάνισαν· εἶτ’ οὐκ εἰς μακρὰν ἀντιπνεύσασα σοφία λάβρῳ καὶ σφοδρῷ πνεύματι τό τε ῥεῦμα τῶν ἡδονῶν ἐχάλασε καὶ συνόλως τὰς διὰ τῶν αἰσθήσεων ἁπάσας σπουδάς τε καὶ φιλοτιμίας ἐπράυνε.
2:14τοιοῦτος μὲν δὴ κύκλος εἱλεῖται περὶ τὴν πολύτροπον ψυχὴν ἀιδίου πολέμου· καθαιρεθέντος γὰρ ἑνὸς ἐχθροῦ φύεται πάντως δυνατώτερος ἕτερος, ὕδρας τῆς πολυκεφάλου τὸν τρόπον· καὶ γὰρ ἐπ’ ἐκείνης φασὶν ἀντὶ τῆς ἐκτμηθείσης κεφαλῆς ἀναβλαστάνειν ἄλλην, αἰνιττόμενοι τὸ πολύμορφον καὶ πολύγονον τῆς ἀθανάτου κακίας δυσάλωτον γένος.
2:15μηδὲν οὖν ἓν ἀποκρίνας ποτὲ πρὸς * * * τῷ Ἰωσήφ, ἀλλ’ ἴσθι ὅτι πολυμιγοῦς καὶ κεκραμένης δόξης ἐστὶν εἰκών. ἐμφαίνεται γὰρ καὶ τὸ λογικὸν ἐγκρατείας εἶδος, ὃ τῆς ἄρρενος γενεᾶς ἐστι, κατὰ τὸν πατέρα Ἰακὼβ τυπωθέν·
2:16ἐμφαίνεται καὶ τὸ ἄλογον αἰσθήσεως, μητρῴῳ γένει τῷ κατὰ Ῥαχὴλ ἐξεικονισθέν· ἐμφαίνεται καὶ τὸ τῆς σωματικῆς ἡδονῆς σπέρμα, ὃ ἀρχιοινοχόων καὶ ἀρχισιτοποιῶν καὶ ἀρχιμαγείρων συνδιαιτήσεις ἐνεσφράγισαν· ἐμφαίνεται καὶ τὸ τῆς κενῆς δόξης, ἐφ’ ἣν ὡς ἐφ’ ἅρμα διὰ τὸ κοῦφον ἀναβαίνει (Gen. 41, 43), φυσώμενος καὶ μετέωρον αἰωρῶν ἑαυτὸν ἐπὶ καθαιρέσει ἰσότητος.
2:17Ὁ μὲν δὴ τοῦ Ἰωσὴφ χαρακτὴρ διὰ τῶν εἰρημένων ὑποτυποῦται· τῶν δ’ ὀνειράτων ἑκάτερον μὲν ἀκριβωτέον, πρότερον δὲ τὸ περὶ τῶν δραγμάτων ἐρευνητέον. „ᾤμην“ φησίν „ἡμᾶς δεσμεύειν δράγματα“ (Gen. 37, 7). τὸ μὲν „ᾤμην“ εὐθέως ἀδηλοῦντος καὶ ἐνδοιάζοντος καὶ ἀμυδρῶς ὑπολαμβάνοντος, οὐ παγίως καὶ τηλαυγῶς ὁρῶντος, ἀνάφθεγμά ἐστι.
2:18τοῖς γὰρ ἐκ βαθέος ὕπνου διανισταμένοις καὶ ἔτι ὀνειρώττουσιν ἁρμόττον λέγειν „ᾤμην“, οὐχὶ τοῖς ἐγρηγορόσι παντελῶς καὶ τρανῶς ἐμβλέπουσιν.
2:19ἀλλ’ οὐχ ὁ ἀσκητὴς Ἰακὼβ „ᾤμην“ ἐρεῖ, ἀλλ’ „ἰδοὺ κλῖμαξ ἐστηριγμένη, ἧς ἡ κεφαλὴ ἀφικνεῖτο εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν“ (Gen. 28, 12), καὶ πάλιν· „ἡνίκα ἐνεκίσσων τὰ πρόβατα, εἶδον τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς αὐτὰ ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ, καὶ ἰδοὺ οἱ τράγοι καὶ οἱ κριοὶ ἀνέβαινον ἐπὶ τὰ πρόβατα καὶ τὰς αἶγας, διάλευκοι καὶ ποικίλοι καὶ σποδοειδεῖς ῥαντοί“ (Gen. 31, 10. 11).
Book 1, §§251–256; Book 2, §§1–19
1:251for the man who is eager in the pursuit of good studies and virtuous objects is fond of labours, and fond of exercises; so that very naturally, having worked out the science of training which is the sister of the art of medicine, he anoints and brings to perfection all the reasonings of virtue and piety, and dedicates them, as a most beautiful and lasting offering to God.
1:252For this reason, after mentioning the dedication of the pillar, God adds that, "Thou vowedst a vow to me." Now a vow also is, to speak properly, a dedication, since he who makes a vow is said to offer up, as a gift to God, not only his own possessions, but himself likewise, who is the owner of them;
1:253for says the scripture, "the man is holy who nourishes the locks of the hair of his head; who has vowed a vow." But if he is holy he is undoubtedly an offering to God, no longer meddling with anything unholy or profane;
1:254and there is an evidence in favour of my argument, in the conduct of the prophetess, and mother of a prophet, Hannah, whose name being translated, signifies grace; for she says that she gives her son, "Samuel, as a gift to the Holy One," not dedicating him more as a human being, than as a disposition full of inspiration, and possessed by a divinely sent impulse; and the name Samuel being interpreted means, "appointed to God."
1:255Why then, O my soul, do you any longer waste yourself in vain speculations and labours? and why do you not go as a pupil to the practiser of virtue, taking up arms against the passions, and against vain opinion, to learn from him the way to wrestle with them? For as soon as you have learnt this art, you will become the leader of a flock, not of one which is destitute of marks, and of reason, and of docility, but of one which is well approved, and rational, and beautiful,
1:256of which, if you become the leader, you will pity the miserable race of mankind, and will not cease to reverence the Deity; and you will never be weary of blessing God, and moreover you will engrave hymns suited to your sacred subject upon pillars, that you may not only speak fluently, but may also sing musically the virtues of the living God; for by these means you will be able to return to your father’s house, being delivered from a long and profitless wandering in a foreign land.
2:1In describing the third species of dreams which are sent from God, we very naturally call on Moses as an ally, in order that as he learnt, having previously been ignorant, so he may instruct us who are also ignorant, concerning these signs, illustrating each separate one of them. Now this third species of dreams exists, whenever in sleep the mind being set in motion by itself, and agitating itself, is filled with frenzy and inspiration, so as to predict future events by a certain prophetic power.
2:2For the first kind of dreams which we mentioned, was that which proceeded from God as the author of its motion, and, as some invisible manner prompted us what was indistinct to us, but well known to himself. The second kind was when our own intellect was set in motion simultaneously with the soul of the universe, and became filled with divine madness, by means of which it is allowed to prognosticate events which are about to happen;
2:3and for this reason the interpreter of the sacred will very plainly and clearly speaks of dreams, indicating by this expression the visions which appear according to the first species, as if God, by means of dreams, gave suggestions which were equivalent to distinct and precise oracles. Of the visions according to the second species he speaks neither very clearly nor very obscurely; an instance of which is afforded by the vision which was exhibited of the ladder reaching up to heaven; for this vision was an enigmatical one; nevertheless, the meaning was not hidden from those who were able to see with any great acuteness.
2:4But these visions which are afforded according to the third species of dreams, being less clear than the two former kinds by reason of their having an enigmatical meaning deeply seated and fully coloured, require the science of an interpreter of dreams. At all events all the dreams of this class, which are recorded by the lawgiver, are interpreted by men who are skilled in the aforesaid art.
2:5Whose dreams then am I here alluding to? Surely every one must see to those of Joseph, and of Pharaoh king of Egypt, and to those which the chief baker and the chief butler saw themselves;
2:6and it may be well at all times to begin our instruction with the first instances. Now the first dreams are those which Joseph beheld, receiving two visions from the two parts of the world, heaven and earth. From the earth the dream about the harvest; and that is as follows, "I thought that we were all binding sheaves in the middle of the field; and my sheaf stood up."
2:7And the other relates to the circle of the zodiac, and is, "They worshipped me as the sun and the moon and the eleven stars." And the interpretation of the former one, which was delivered with great violence of reproof, is as follows, "Shall you be a king and reign over us? or shall you be a lord and lord it over us?" The interpretation of the second is again full of just indignation, "Shall I, and thy mother, and thy brethren come and fall down upon the ground and worship thee?"
2:8Let these things be laid down first by way of foundation; and on this foundation let us raise up the rest of the building, following the rules of that wise architect, allegory, and accurately investigating each particular of the dreams; but first we must mention what it is requisite should be attended to before the dreams. Some persons have extended the nature of good over many things, and others have attributed it to the most excellent Being alone; some again have mixed it with other things, while others have spoken of it as unalloyed.
2:9Those then who have called only what is honourable good, have preserved this nature free from alloy, and have attributed it only to what is most excellent, namely to the reason that is in us; but those who have mixed it have combined it with three things, the soul, the body, and external circumstances. And they who act thus are persons of a somewhat effeminate and luxurious way of life, being bred up the greater part of their time, from their earliest infancy, in the women’s apartments and among the effeminate race which is found in the women’s apartments. But those who argue differently are men inclined to a harder regimen, being bred up from their boyhood among men, and being themselves men in their minds, embracing what is right in preference to what is pleasant, and devoting themselves to nourishment fit for athletes for the sake of strength and vigour, not of pleasure.
2:10Moses moreover represents two persons as leaders of these two companies. The leader of the noble and good company is the self-taught and self-instructed Isaac; for he records that he was weaned, not choosing to avail himself at all of tender, and milk-like, and childish, and infantine food, but only of such as was vigorous and perfect, inasmuch as he was formed by nature, from his very infancy, for acts of virtue, and was always in the prime and vigour of youth and energy. But the leader of the company, which yields and which is inclined to softer measures, is Joseph;
2:11for he does not indeed neglect the virtues of the soul, but he likewise shows anxiety about the stability and permanence of the body, and also desires an abundance of worldly treasures; and it is in strict accordance with natural truth, that he is represented as drawn in different directions, since he proposes to himself many different objects in life; and being attracted by each of them, he is kept in a state of commotion and agitation, without being able to stand firm.
2:12And his case is not like that of cities, which having made a truce enjoy peace, and yet after a time are again attacked, so as to gain the victory and to be defeated alternately; for at times a great influx of riches and glory coming upon them, subdues all their cares for the body and the soul, but afterwards, being repelled by both these things, they are conquered by the adversary;
2:13and in the same manner all the pleasures of the body coming upon the soul in a compact array overwhelm and efface all the objects of the intellect one after the other; and then, after a short time, wisdom, changing its course and blowing in the opposite direction with a fresh and violent breeze, causes the stream of the pleasures to slacken, and altogether moderates all the eagerness, and impetuosity, and rivalry of the external senses.
2:14Such a circle then of never-ending war revolves around the soul, subject as it is to so many changes; for when one enemy has been destroyed, then immediately there springs up another more powerful, after the fashion of the many-headed hydra; for they say, that in the case of this monster, instead of the head which was cut off another sprung up, by which statement they mean to intimate the multiform, and prolific, and almost invincible character of undying wickedness.
2:15Do not, therefore, answer [...] Joseph [...] but know that he is the image of multiform and mixed knowledge. For there appears in him a rational species of continence, which is of the masculine kind, being fashioned in accordance with his father Jacob;
2:16and also that kind which is devoid of reason is likewise visible, that of the outward sense I mean, being made in the likeness of his maternal race, according to Rachel. There appears in him also the seed of bodily pleasure, , which his association with the chief butlers, and chief bakers, and chief cooks has stamped upon him. There is, also visible the seed of vain opinion, on which he mounts as on a chariot by reason of his levity, being puffed up, and elated, and raising himself to a height to the destruction of equality.
2:17Now the character of Joseph is sketched out by the foregoing outlines. But each of his dreams must be investigated with accuracy; and first of all we must examine the one about the sheaves. "I thought," says he, "that we were all binding sheaves." The expression, "I thought," is clearly that of a person who is not certain, but who is hesitating and supposing with some amount of indistinctness, not of one who sees positively and clearly;
2:18for it is very natural for persons just awakening out of a deep sleep, and still dozing as it were, to say, "I thought;" but not so for people who are thoroughly awake, and who can see distinctly.
2:19And the practiser of virtue, Jacob, does not say, "I thought," but his language is, "Behold, a ladder firmly set, the head of which reached up to heaven." And again he says, when "the sheep conceived I saw them with my eyes in my sleep, and behold the he-goats and the rams leapt upon the ewes and upon the she-goats, white, and variegated, and ring-straked, and speckled."
Book 2, §§20–44
2:20τῶν γὰρ τὸ καλὸν δι’ ἑαυτὸ αἱρετὸν νομιζόντων καὶ τὰς ἐν τοῖς ὕπνοις φαντασίας εἱλικρινεστέρας καὶ καθαρωτέρας ἐξ ἀνάγκης εἶναι συμβέβηκεν, ὥσπερ καὶ τὰς μεθ’ ἡμέραν δοκιμωτέρας πράξεις.
2:21Ἄγαμαι δ’, ὅταν ἀκούω τοῦ διηγουμένου τὸ ὄναρ, ὅτι ὑπέλαβε δράγματα καταδεῖν, οὐ θερίζειν. ἐκεῖνο μὲν ἰδιωτῶν καὶ ὑπηρετῶν ἔργον, τοῦτο δ’ ἡγεμόνων καὶ γεωργίας ἐμπειροτάτων τὸ ἐπιτήδευμα.
2:22τὸ γὰρ δύνασθαι διακρίνειν σκυβάλων ἀναγκαῖα καὶ τρόφιμα μὴ τροφίμων καὶ νόθων γνήσια καὶ ἀνωφελοῦς ῥίζης καρπὸν ὠφελιμώτατον, μὴ ἐν οἷς ἡ γῆ βλαστάνει μᾶλλον ἢ διάνοια φύει, τελειοτάτης ἀρετῆς ἐστιν.
2:23ὁ γοῦν ἱερὸς λόγος τοὺς ὁρῶντας εἰσάγει θερίζοντας καί, τὸ παραδοξότατον, οὐ κριθὰς ἢ πυρούς, ἀλλὰ τὸν θερισμὸν αὐτὸν ἐκθερίζοντας· λέγεται οὖν· „ὅταν θερίζητε τὸν θερισμὸν ὑμῶν, οὐ συντελέσετε τὸ λοιπὸν τοῦ θερισμοῦ“ (Lev. 19, 9).
2:24βούλεται γὰρ τὸν ἀστεῖον οὐ μόνον κριτὴν εἶναι τῶν διαφερόντων, διακρίνοντα καὶ διαστέλλοντα ἐξ ὧν γίνεταί τινα καὶ τὰ γεννώμενα, ἀλλὰ καὶ αὐτὸ τὸ δύνασθαι διακρίνειν δοκεῖν ἀναιρεῖν, ἀμῶντα τὸν ἀμητὸν καὶ τὴν ἰδίαν ἐπιβουλὴν ἀποτέμνοντα διὰ τὸ καὶ πεποιθέναι καὶ Μωυσεῖ λέγοντι πιστεύειν, ὅτι „μόνου τοῦ θεοῦ ἡ κρίσις ἐστί“ (Deut. 1, 17), παρ’ ὃν αἱ συγκρίσεις καὶ αἱ διακρίσεις τῶν ἁπάντων· ὑφ’ οὗ καλὸν ὁμολογεῖν ἡττᾶσθαι καὶ τῆς ἀοιδίμου νίκης εὐκλεέστερον.
2:25ὅμοιόν ἐστι τῷ τὸν θερισμὸν θερίζειν τὸ δὶς περιτέμνειν, ὅπερ ὡς ὅτε ἐκαινούργησεν ἐξευρὼν περιτομῆς περιτομήν (Gen. 17, 13), τὴν „ἁγνείαν ἀφαγνίζεσθαι“ (Num. 6,2), τὴν κάθαρσιν τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτὴν καθαίρεσθαι, παραχωροῦντας τῷ θεῷ τὸ φαιδρύνειν καὶ μηδέποτε νομίσαντας ἱκανοὺς εἶναι ἑαυτοὺς ἄνευ θείας ἐπιφροσύνης τὸν κηλίδων ἀνάμεστον ἐκνίψασθαι καὶ ἀπολούσασθαι βίον.
2:26ταύτης ἐστὶ τῆς συγγενείας καὶ τὸ διπλοῦν σπήλαιον (Gen. 23, 9), αἱ διπλαῖ καὶ περιμάχητοι γνῶμαι, ἥ τε περὶ τοῦ γεγονότος καὶ ἡ περὶ τοῦ πεποιηκότος, αἷς ἐντρέφεται ὁ ἀστεῖος, θεωρῶν μὲν τὰ ἐν κόσμῳ, φιλοπευστῶν δὲ καὶ περὶ τοῦ γεννήσαντος πατρός.
2:27ἀφ’ ὧν οἶμαι καὶ τὴν ἐν μουσικῇ δὶς διὰ πασῶν εὑρεθῆναι συμφωνίαν· ἔδει γὰρ καὶ τὸ ἔργον καὶ τὸν δημιουργὸν τελειοτάταις μελῳδίαις εὐδαιμονίζεσθαι δυσίν, οὐχὶ ταῖς αὐταῖς.
2:28ἐπειδὴ γὰρ τὰ ὑμνούμενα διέφερεν, ἀναγκαῖον καὶ τὰς μελῳδίας καὶ συμφωνίας διακεκρίσθαι, τὴν μὲν συνημμένην ἀπονέμοντας τῷ συνημμένῳ καὶ ἐκ διαφερόντων ἁρμοσθέντι κόσμῳ, τὴν δὲ διεζευγμένην τῷ πάσης γενέσεως διεζευγμένῳ κατὰ τὴν οὐσίαν θεῷ.
2:29γνώμην δὲ ἀποφαίνεται πάλιν ὁ ἱεροφάντης φιλάρετον λέγων· „οὐ συντελέσετε τὸ λοιπὸν τοῦ θερισμοῦ“ (Lev. 19, 9), μεμνημένος τῆς ἐξ ἀρχῆς ὑποθέσεως, καθ’ ἣν ὡμολόγει „τὸ τέλος εἶναι κυρίου“ (Num. 31, 28 ss.), παρ’ ὃν τὸ κῦρος καὶ ἡ τούτων βεβαίωσίς ἐστιν.
2:30ἀλλὰ γὰρ ὁ τοῦ θερίζειν ἀμύητος αὐχεῖ λέγων· „ᾤμην ἃ μὴ ἐθέρισα καταδεῖν σὺν ἑτέροις δράγματα“ (Gen. 37, 7), καὶ οὐκ ἐλογίσατο παρ’ ἑαυτῷ, ὅτι δούλων καὶ ἀνεπιστημόνων ἥδε ἐστὶν ὑπηρεσία, καθὰ καὶ μικρῷ πρότερον εἶπον.
2:31Δράγματα δ’ ἀλληγοροῦντές φαμεν εἶναι πράγματα, ὧν ἕκαστος ὡς οἰκείας τροφῆς ἐπιδράττεται, ἐν ᾗ ζήσεσθαι καὶ βιώσεσθαι τὸν αἰῶνα
2:32ἐλπίζει. μυρίαι μὲν οὖν τῶν δραγμάτων, λέγω δὴ τῶν ὡσανεὶ τρεφόντων πραγμάτων, διαφοραί, μυρίαι δὲ καὶ τῶν ἐπιδραττομένων καὶ αἱρουμένων τὰ δράγματα, ὡς ἁπάσας οὔτ’ εἰπεῖν οὔτ’ ἐπινοῆσαι δυνατόν· τινὰς δ’ οὐκ ἄτοπον δείγματος ἕνεκα ἑρμηνεῦσαι, ὧν καὶ τὸ ὄναρ διηγούμενος ἐπεμνήσθη.
2:33φησὶ γὰρ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς· „ᾤμην ἡμᾶς δεσμεύειν δράγματα“ (l. c.). ἀδελφοὶ δ’ εἰσὶν ὁμοπάτριοι μὲν δέκα, ὁμογάστριος δὲ εἷς· ἑκάστου δὲ αὐτῶν τοὔνομα σύμβολον ἀναγκαιοτάτου πράγματός ἐστι, Ῥουβὴν μὲν εὐφυΐας — υἱὸς γὰρ ὁρῶν καλεῖται, ᾗ μὲν υἱός, οὐ τέλειος, ᾗ δὲ ὁρατικὸς καὶ ὀξὺ καθορῶν, εὐφυής —, μαθήσεως δὲ Συμεών — εἰσακοὴ γὰρ ἑρμηνεύεται —,
2:34ἐνεργειῶν δὲ καὶ πράξεων σπουδαίων καὶ λειτουργιῶν ἁγίων Λευί, τῶν δὲ εἰς θεὸν ᾠδῶν τε καὶ ὕμνων Ἰούδας, Ἰσσάχαρ δὲ μισθῶν, οἳ ἐπ’ ἔργοις καλοῖς ἀποδίδονται — τάχα δ’ αὐτὰ τὰ ἔργα ὁ τέλειος μισθὸς ἦν —, Ζαβουλὼν δὲ φωτός, ἐπειδὴ ῥύσις νυκτερίας ὀνομάζεται — ῥεούσης δὲ καὶ ἀπολιπούσης νυκτὸς ἐξ ἀνάγκης φῶς ἀνίσχει —,
2:35διακρίσεως δὲ καὶ τομῆς πραγμάτων Δάν, ἐπιθέσεως δὲ καὶ ἀντεπιθέσεως πειρατικῆς Γάδ, Ἀσὴρ δὲ τοῦ φυσικοῦ πλούτου — μακαρισμὸς γὰρ ἑρμηνεύεται, ἐπειδὴ μακάριον κτῆμα νενόμισται πλοῦτος —, εἰρήνης δὲ Νεφθαλείμ — διανοίγεται γὰρ καὶ εὐρύνεται πάντα εἰρήνῃ, ὡς συγκλείεται πολέμῳ·
2:36τὸ δὲ ὄνομα μεταληφθὲν πλατυσμὸς ἢ διανεῳγμένον ἐστί —, Βενιαμὶν δὲ τοῦ νέου καὶ γέροντος χρόνου· λέγεται γὰρ ἑρμηνευθεὶς υἱὸς ἡμερῶν εἶναι, ἡμέραις δὲ καὶ νυξὶν ὁ νέος ὁμοῦ καὶ γέρων αἰὼν ἀναμετρεῖται.
2:37ἐπιδράττεται γοῦν ἕκαστος τῶν οἰκείων καὶ ἐπιδραξάμενος τὰ μέρη πάντα συνδεῖ· ὁ μὲν εὐφυὴς εὐθιξίας, ἐπιμονῆς, μνήμης, ἐν οἷς ἡ εὐφυΐα· ὁ δὲ εὐμαθὴς ἀκροάσεως, ἡσυχίας, προσοχῆς· ὁ δὲ ἐγχειρητὴς [τῆς] θαρραλεότητος, παρακεκινδυνευμένης εὐτολμίας·
2:38ὁ δὲ εὐχάριστος ἐπαίνων, ἐγκωμίων, ὕμνων, εὐδαιμονισμῶν κατά τε τὸ λέγειν καὶ τὸ ᾄδειν· ὁ δὲ μισθῶν ἐφιέμενος ἀόκνου συνεχείας τλητικωτάτης καρτερίας καὶ ἐπιμελείας σὺν ἀνανταγωνίστῳ ταχυτῆτι·
2:39ὁ δὲ φῶς ἀντὶ σκότους μεταδιώκων ἐγρηγόρσεως, ὀξυωπίας· ὁ δὲ τομῆς καὶ διακρίσεως πραγμάτων ζηλωτὴς λόγων ἠκονημένων, τοῦ μὴ ὑφ’ ὁμοίων ὡς τῶν αὐτῶν ἀπατᾶσθαι, τοῦ μὴ πρὸς χάριν, τοῦ ἀδεκάστου·
2:40ὁ δὲ πειρατικώτερον ἐνεδρεύων τοὺς ἀντιλοχῶντας ἀπάτης, φενακισμοῦ, γοητείας, σοφισμάτων, προσποιήσεως, ὑποκρίσεως, ἅπερ ἐξ ἑαυτῶν ψεκτὰ ὄντα κατ’ ἐχθρῶν γινόμενα ἐπαινεῖται· ὁ δὲ πλουτεῖν τὸν φύσεως πλοῦτον ἐπιτηδεύων ἐγκρατείας, ὀλιγοδεΐας· ὁ δὲ εἰρήνης ἐρῶν εὐνομίας, εὐδικίας, ἀτυφίας, ἰσότητος.
2:41ἐκ τούτων τὰ τῶν ὁμοπατρίων ἀδελφῶν δράγματα καταδεῖται, τὰ δὲ τοῦ ὁμογαστρίου ἐξ ἡμερῶν καὶ χρόνου, τῶν οὐδενὸς αἰτίων ὡς ἁπάντων αἰτίων.
2:42αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ ἐνυπνιαστὴς καὶ ὀνειροπόλος — ἦν γὰρ ἀμφότερα — τῆς κενῆς δόξης ὡς μεγίστου καὶ λαμπροτάτου καὶ βιωφελεστάτου κτήματος ἐπιδράττεται. διὸ πρῶτον μὲν ἀπ’ ὀνειράτων, ἃ νυκτὶ φίλα, τῷ βασιλεῖ τῆς σωματικῆς χώρας γνωρίζεται, οὐκ ἀπὸ πραγμάτων τηλαυγῶν ἐναργείας, ἃ πρὸς ἐπίδειξιν ἡμέρας δεῖται.
2:43εἶτ’ ἐπίτροπος ἢ κηδεμὼν Αἰγύπτου πάσης ἀνακηρύττεται, ταῖς τιμαῖς τοῦ βασιλέως οἰσόμενος δευτερεῖα, ἅπερ ἥττης καὶ ἀτιμίας ἀφανέστερα καὶ καταγελαστότερα παρὰ φρονήσει γράφεται δικαζούσῃ.
2:44εἶτα „κλοιὸν χρυσοῦν“ (Gen. 41,41.42), ἀγχόνην ἐπιφανῆ, κύκλον καὶ τροχὸν ἀνάγκης ἀτελευτήτου, περιτίθεται — οὐκ ἀκολουθίαν καὶ τὸ ἑξῆς ἐν βίῳ καὶ τὸν εἱρμὸν τῶν τῆς φύσεως πραγμάτων, ὡς ἡ Θάμαρ· οὐ γὰρ κλοιός, ἀλλὰ ὁρμίσκος αὐτῆς ὁ κόσμος (Gen. 38, 18) — καὶ δακτύλιον μέντοι βασιλικόν (Gen. 41, 42), δῶρον ἄδωρον, πίστιν ἄπιστον, ἐναντιούμενον τῷ δοθέντι πάλιν τῇ Θάμαρ ὑπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως τοῦ ὁρῶντος, Ἰσραήλ, Ἰούδα.
Book 2, §§20–44
2:20For it happens of necessity that the sleeping conceptions also of those who think what is honourable eligible for its own sake are more distinct and more pure, just as their waking actions are also more deserving of approbation.
2:21But when I hear Jacob relating his dream I marvel at his having fancied that he was binding up the sheaves, and not reaping the corn; for the one is the task of the lower classes and of servants, but the other is the occupation of the employers, and of men more skilled in agriculture.
2:22For to be able to distinguish what is necessary from what is mischievous, and what is nutritious from what is not so, and what is genuine from what is spurious, and useful fruit from a worthless root, not only in reference to those things which the land bears, but also in those which the intellect bears, is the work of most perfect virtue.
2:23Accordingly the holy scripture represents those who see, that is the sons of Israel, as reaping, and what is a most extraordinary thing, as reaping not barley or wheat, but the harvest itself; accordingly the language of Moses is, "When you reap your harvest, you shall not wholly reap the corners of your harvest."
2:24For he means here that the virtuous man is not merely the judge of things which differ from one another, and that he does not only distinguish the things from which some produce is derived from the produce itself; but that he is able also to distinguish while reaping the harvest, to remove this opinion of his ability to distinguish, and to eradicate a man’s own opinion of himself; because he is firmly persuaded, and believes Moses when he affirms that "judgment belongs to God alone," with whom are the comparisons and distinctions between all things; to whom it is well for a man to confess that he is inferior, a confession more glorious than the most renowned victory.
2:25Now the reaping a harvest is like cutting a second time what has been cut already; which when some persons fond of novelty applied themselves to they found a circumcision of circumcision, and a purification of purification; that is to say, they found that the purification of the soul was itself purified, attributing the power of making bright to God, and never fancying that they themselves were competent, without the assistance of the divine wisdom, to wash and cleanse a life which is full of stains.
2:26Akin to this is the double cave, which is a symbol of the twofold and excellent recollections (the one existing in reference to the creature, and the other to the Creator), in which the virtuous man is bred up, contemplating the things which are in the world, and being also fond of inquiring about the father who made them;
2:27and it is owing to these twofold recollections, in my opinion, that the double symphony in music, that of the double diapason, was invented.
2:28For it was necessary that the work and the creator should be made happy in two most perfect melodies, and not both in the same one. For since the excellencies which were to be celebrated by them differed from one another, it followed of necessity that the melodies and symphonies should likewise differ from one another. The combined symphony being assigned to the world, which is a compound creation, composed of many different parts; and the disjoined melody being appropriated to him who, as to his essence, is separated from every creature, namely, to God.
2:29Moreover, the interpreter of the sacred will again enunciates an opinion friendly to virtue, saying that it is not proper "to thoroughly reap every corner of the harvest field;" remembering the original proposition, according to which he agreed that "the tribute belonged to the Lord," to whom the authority and the conformation of these things also belong;
2:30but he who is uninitiated in reaping boasts, so far as to say, "I thought that I was with the others binding up the sheaves which I had reaped." And he does not consider that this is the occupation of servants and of unskilful hands, as I have said a little while ago.
2:31But this word sheaves is an allegorical expression by which affairs are really meant, such as each man takes in hand for the support of his house, in which he hopes to live and dwell for ever.
2:32There are, therefore, an infinite number of differences between sheaves, that is to say, between such affairs as support a house. There are also a countless host of differences between those who gather and take up the sheaves in their hand, so that it is impossible to mention or even to imagine them all. Still it is not out of place to describe a few of them by way of example, which he too mentioned, when he was recounting his dream.
2:33For he says to his brethren, "I thought that we were binding up sheaves." Now, of brethren he has ten, who are sons of the same father as himself, and one who is by the same mother; and the name of each individual among them is an emblem of some most necessary thing. Reuben is an emblem of natural acuteness, for he is called "the son who sees," being in so far as he is a son not perfect, but in so far as he is endowed with the faculty of sight and sees acutely, he is naturally well qualified.
2:34Simeon is an emblem of learning, for his name being interpreted means, "listening." Levi is a symbol of virtuous energies and actions, and of holy ministrations. Judas is an emblem of songs and hymns addressed to God. Issachar, of wages which are given for good works; but perhaps the works themselves are their own perfect reward. Zabulon is a symbol of light, since his name means the departure of night; and when the night departs and leaves us, then of necessity light arises.
2:35Dan is a symbol of the distinction between, and division of, different things. Gad is an emblem of the invasion of pirates, and of a counter attack made upon them. Asser is a symbol of natural wealth, for his name being interpreted, signifies "a calling blessed," since wealth is accounted a blessed possession.
2:36Napthali is a symbol of peace, for all things are opened and extended by peace, as on the other hand they are closed by war; and his name being interpreted means, "widening," or "that which is opened." Benjamin is an emblem of young and old times; for being interpreted his name means "the son of days," and both young time and old time are measured by days and nights.
2:37Accordingly, every one of them takes up in his hand what belongs to himself; and having taken it up, binds all the parts together; the man well endowed by nature taking up the parts of dexterity, and perseverance, and memory, of which good natural endowments consist; the man who has learnt well takes up the parts of listening, tranquillity, and attention; the man willing to endeavour takes up courage and a happy confidence which does not shrink from danger;
2:38the man inclined to gratitude takes up praises, panegyrics, hymns, and blessings, both in speaking and in singing; the - man who is eager for wages takes up unhesitating industry, most enduring gratitude, and care, armed with a promptitude which is not to be despised;
2:39he who pursues light rather than darkness takes up wakefulness and acuteness of sight; the man who is an admirer of the division of and distinction between things takes up well-sharpened reasons so as not to be deceived by things similar to one another as if they were identical, impartiality so as not to be led away by favour, and incorruptibility;
2:40he who, in something of a piratical fashion, lays ambuscades against those who counterplot against him, takes up deceit, cajolery, trickery, sophistry, pretence, and hypocrisy, which being in their own nature blamable, are nevertheless praised when employed against an enemy; he who studies to be rich in the riches of nature takes up temperance and frugality; he who loves peace takes up obedience to law, a good reputation, freedom from pride, and equality.
2:41It is of these things, then, that the sheaves of his brethren by the same father are composed and bound up; but the sheaf of his uterine brother is composed of days and of time, which are the causes of nothing, as if they were the causes of all things.
2:42But the dreamer and interpreter of dreams himself, for he united both characters, makes a sheaf of empty opinion as of the greatest and most brilliant of possessions and the most useful to life. For which reason it is originally by his dreams, which are things dear to night, that he is made known to the king of the bodily country, and not by any performance of conspicuous actions, which require day for their exhibition.
2:43After that, he is appointed overseer or governor of all Egypt, and is honoured with the second rank in the kingdom, and made inferior in honour only to the king. All which things are in the eye of wisdom, if that were the judge, more inglorious and more ridiculous than even defeat and dishonour.
2:44After that he puts on a golden necklace, a most illustrious halter, the circlet and wheel of interminable necessity, not the consequence and regular order of things in life, nor the connection of the affairs of nature as Thamar was; for her ornament was not a necklace, but an armlet. Moreover, he assumes a ring, a royal gift which is no gift, a pledge devoid of good faith, the very contrary gift to that which was given to the same Thamar by Judah the son of the seeing king, Israel;
Book 2, §§45–69
2:45δίδωσι γὰρ οὗτος τῇ ψυχῇ σφραγῖδα (Gen. 38, 18), πάγκαλον δῶρον, διδάσκων ὅτι ὁ θεὸς ἀσχημάτιστον οὖσαν τὴν τῶν πάντων οὐσίαν ἐσχημάτισε καὶ ἀτύπωτον ἐτύπωσε καὶ ἄποιον ἐμόρφωσε καὶ τελειώσας τὸν ὅλον ἐσφράγισε κόσμον εἰκόνι καὶ ἰδέᾳ, τῷ ἑαυτοῦ λόγῳ.
2:46ἀλλ’ ἐκεῖνός γε καὶ ἐπὶ τὸ δευτερεῖον ἄνεισιν ἅρμα (Gen. 41,43) [ἢ] ὑποτυφούμενος ὑπ’ αἰώρας φρενῶν καὶ κενοῦ φυσήματος καὶ σιταρχεῖ (ibid. 48), τῷ σώματι θησαυροφυλακῶν καὶ πανταχόθεν αὐτῷ πορίζων τὰς τροφάς· ἐπιτειχισμὸς δὲ κατὰ τῆς ψυχῆς βαρὺς οὗτός ἐστι.
2:47τῇ δὲ προαιρέσει καὶ ζηλώσει τοῦ βίου μαρτυρεῖ καὶ τοὔνομα οὐχ ἥκιστα· πρόσθεσις γὰρ Ἰωσὴφ ἑρμηνεύεται. κενὴ δὲ δόξα προστίθησιν ἀεὶ γνησίῳ μὲν τὸ νόθον, οἰκείῳ δὲ τὸ ἀλλότριον, ἀληθεῖ δὲ τὸ ψεῦδος, αὐτάρκει δὲ τὸ πλεονάζον, ζωῇ δὲ θρύψιν, βίῳ δὲ τῦφον.
2:48Τί δ’ ἐστὶν ὃ βούλομαι δηλοῦν, σκόπει. σιτίοις καὶ ποτοῖς τρεφόμεθα, κἂν ᾖ εὐτελεστάτη μᾶζα καὶ ὕδωρ ναματιαῖον. τί οὖν ἡ κενὴ δόξα προσεπέθηκεν ἀμήτων καὶ μελιπήκτων πεμμάτων γένη μυρία καὶ οἴνων ἀμυθήτων πολυέργους καὶ παμποικίλους κράσεις πρὸς ἀπόλαυσιν ἡδονῆς μᾶλλον ἢ πρὸς μετουσίαν τροφῆς παρηρτυμένας;
2:49πάλιν ἡδύσματα πρὸς ἐδωδὴν ἀναγκαῖα γήτεια καὶ λάχανα καὶ πολλὰ τῶν ἀκροδρύων καὶ ἔτι τυρὸς καὶ εἴ τι ἄλλο ὁμοιότροπον· εἰ δὲ θέλεις, ἐπὶ σαρκοβόρων ἀνθρώπων ἰχθῦς ἔτι καὶ κρέας πρὸς τούτοις γράφομεν.
2:50ἆρ’ οὖν οὐκ αὔταρκες ἦν ἀπανθρακίσαντας καὶ αὐτοσχεδίως ὀπτήσαντας πυρὶ τρόπον ἡρωικῶν ὄντως ἀνδρῶν προσφέρεσθαι; ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐπὶ ταῦτα ὁ γαστρίμαργος μόνον ὁρμᾷ, σύμμαχον δὲ τὴν κενὴν δόξαν λαβὼν καὶ τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ λίχνον πάθος ἐγείρας ὀψαρτύτας καὶ τραπεζοποιοὺς εὐδοκίμους τὴν τέχνην ἀναζητεῖ καὶ περιβλέπεται.
2:51οἱ δὲ τὰ κατὰ τῆς ταλαίνης γαστρὸς ἐκ πολλῶν χρόνων ἀνευρημένα δελέατα ἀνακινήσαντες καὶ χυλῶν ἰδιότητας σκευάσαντές τε καὶ διαθέντες ἐν κόσμῳ προσσαίνουσι καὶ τιθασεύουσι γλῶτταν· εἶτ’ εὐθὺς ἀγκιστρεύονται τῶν αἰσθήσεων τὴν ἐπιβάθραν, γεῦσιν, δι’ ἧς ἀντ’ ἐλευθέρου δοῦλος ὁ δειπνοθήρας οὐκ εἰς μακρὰν ἀνεφάνη.
2:52τίς γε μὴν οὐκ οἶδεν, ὅτι ἀμπεχόνη πρὸς τὰς ἀπὸ κρυμοῦ | καὶ θάλπους ἐγγινομένας βλάβας τῷ σώματι κατεσκευάσθη τὸ πρῶτον;
2:53ἀλεξάνεμος μέν, ὡς οἱ ποιηταί πού φασι, χειμῶνι * * *. τίς οὖν τὰς πολυτελεῖς ἁλουργίδας, τίς τὰ διαφανῆ καὶ λεπτὰ θέριστρα, τίς τὰς ἀραχνοϋφεῖς ἀμπεχόνας, τίς τὰ ἐπηνθισμένα ἢ βαφαῖς ἢ πλοκαῖς διὰ τῶν βάπτειν ἢ ὑφαίνειν ποικίλα ἐπισταμένων καὶ τὴν ἐν ζῳγραφίᾳ μίμησιν παρευημερούντων δαιδαλεύεται; τίς; οὐχ ἡ κενὴ δόξα;
2:54ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ οἰκίας διὰ τὰς αὐτὰς ἐδέησεν ἡμῖν αἰτίας, καὶ ὅπως μὴ πρὸς θηρίων ἢ θηριωδεστάτων τὰς φύσεις ἀνθρώπων ἐπιτρεχόντων βλαπτώμεθα. τί οὖν τὰ μὲν ἐδάφη καὶ τοὺς τοίχους πολυτελέσι λίθοις διακοσμοῦμεν; τί δὲ Ἀσίαν καὶ Λιβύην καὶ πᾶσαν Εὐρώπην καὶ τὰς νήσους ἐπερχόμεθα, κίονας ἀριστίνδην ἐπιλελεγμένους καὶ ἐπιστυλίδας ἐρευνῶντες;
2:55τί δὲ περὶ Δωρίους καὶ Ἰωνικὰς καὶ Κορινθιακὰς γλυφὰς καὶ ὅσα οἱ ἐντρυφῶντες τοῖς καθεστῶσι νόμοις προσεξεῦρον σπουδάζομέν τε καὶ φιλοτιμούμεθα, κιονόκρανα κοσμοῦντες; τί δὲ χρυσορόφους ἀνδρῶνας καὶ γυναικωνίτιδας κατασκευάζομεν;
2:56ἆρ’ οὐ διὰ τὴν κενὴν δόξαν; καὶ μὴν πρός γε ὕπνον μαλακὸν μὲν ἔδαφος αὔταρκες ἦν — ἐπεὶ καὶ μέχρι νῦν τοὺς Γυμνοσοφιστὰς παρ’ Ἰνδοῖς χαμευνεῖν ἐκ παλαιῶν ἐθῶν κατέχει λόγος —, εἰ δὲ μή, στιβὰς γοῦν ἐκ λίθων λογάδων ἢ ξύλων εὐτελῶν πεποιημένη κλίνη.
2:57ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἐλεφαντόποδες τὰ ἐνήλατα καὶ κλιντῆρες ὀστράκοις πολυτελέσι καὶ ποικίλαις χελώναις ἐνδεδεμέναις μετὰ πολλῶν πόνων καὶ δαπανημάτων ἐν πολλῷ χρόνῳ κατασκευάζονται, τινὲς δὲ ὁλοάργυροι καὶ ὁλόχρυσοι καὶ λιθοκόλλητοι στρωμναί, ἀνθηροποικίλοις καὶ χρυσοπάστοις ὡς πρὸς ἐπίδειξιν καὶ πομπήν, οὐ τὴν καθ’ ἡμέραν χρῆσιν, διακεκοσμημέναι, ὧν δημιουργὸς ἡ κενὴ δόξα.
2:58τί δὲ τοῦ ἀπὸ τῆς ἐλαίας ἐκθλιβομένου καρποῦ πλέον ἔδει ζητεῖν πρὸς ἀλείμματα; καὶ γὰρ λεαίνει καὶ κάματον σώματος λύει καὶ εὐσαρκίαν ἐμποιεῖ, κἂν εἴ τι κεχαλασμένον εἴη, σφίγγει πυκνότητι καὶ οὐδενὸς ἧττον ἑτέρου ῥώμην καὶ εὐτονίαν ἐντίθησιν.
2:59ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἐπετειχίσθη τοῖς ὠφελοῦσι τὰ ἡδέα τῆς κενῆς δόξης ἀλείμματα, εἰς ἃ καὶ μυρεψοὶ πονοῦσι καὶ χῶραι μεγάλαι συντελοῦσι, Συρία, Βαβυλών,
2:60Ἰνδοί, Σκύθαι, παρ’ οἷς αἱ τῶν ἀρωμάτων γενέσεις εἰσί. πρός γε μὴν τὸ πίνειν τίνος ἔδει μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ φύσεως ἐκπώματος ἀκρότησι τέχνης εἰργασμένου; τὸ δὲ ἔκπωμα αἱ ἡμέτεραι χεῖρές εἰσιν, ἃς εἰς ταὐτό τις συναγαγὼν καὶ κοιλάνας, εὖ μάλα τῷ στόματι προσθείς, ἐπιχέοντος ἑτέρου τὸ ποτὸν οὐ μόνον ἄκος τῆς δίψης, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἄλεκτον ἡδονὴν κτᾶται.
2:61εἰ δὲ ἔδει πάντως ἑτέρου, τὸ γεωργικὸν κισσύβιον οὐχ ἱκανὸν ἦν, ἀλλὰ ἄλλων ἐπιφανῶν τέχνας ἀναζητεῖν ἔδει; τί δὲ ἀργυρῶν καὶ χρυσῶν κυλίκων ἄφθονον πλῆθος κατασκευάζεσθαι, εἰ μὴ διὰ τὸν φρυαττόμενον μεγάλα τῦφον καὶ τὴν ἐπ’ αἰώρας φορουμένην κενὴν δόξαν;
2:62ὅταν καὶ στεφανοῦσθαί τινες ἀξιῶσι μὴ δάφνης μηδὲ κιττοῦ, μὴ ἴων ἢ κρίνων ἢ ῥόδου ἢ θαλλοῦ συνόλως ἤ τινος ἄνθους εὐώδει στεφάνῳ παρελθόντες τὰ θεοῦ δῶρα, ἃ διὰ τῶν ἐτησίων ὡρῶν ἀναδίδωσι, χρυσοῦς δ’ ὑπὲρ κεφαλῆς, βαρύτατον ἄχθος, αἰωρῶσιν ἐν ἀγορᾷ μέσῃ καὶ πληθούσῃ χωρὶς αἰδοῦς, ἄλλο τι νομιστέον ἢ ὅτι κενῆς δόξης εἰσὶ δοῦλοι, φάσκοντες οὐκ ἐλεύθεροι μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ πολλῶν ἄλλων ἡγεμόνες εἶναι;
2:63ἐπιλείψει με ἡ ἡμέρα τὰς διαφθορὰς τοῦ ἀνθρωπείου βίου διεξιόντα. καίτοι τί δεῖ μακρηγορεῖν; τίς γὰρ αὐτῶν ἀνήκοός ἐστι, τίς δὲ οὐ θεατής; τίς μὲν οὖν οὐ τρίβων καὶ ἐθάς; ὥστε παγκάλως προσθήκην τὸν ἀτυφίας μὲν ἐχθρόν, τύφου δ’ ἑταῖρον ὠνόμασεν ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος.
2:64καθάπερ γὰρ τοῖς δένδρεσιν ἐπιφύονται βλάσται περισσαί, μεγάλαι τῶν γνησίων λῶβαι, ἃς καθαίρουσι καὶ ἀποτέμνουσι προνοίᾳ τῶν ἀναγκαίων οἱ γεωργοῦντες, οὕτω τῷ ἀληθεῖ καὶ ἀτύφῳ βίῳ παρανέβλαστεν ὁ κατεψευσμένος καὶ τετυφωμένος, οὗ μέχρι ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας οὐδεὶς εὕρηται γεωργὸς ὃς τὴν βλαβερὰν ἐπίφυσιν αὐταῖς ῥίζαις ἀπέκοψε.
2:65τοιγαροῦν εἰδότες οἱ φρονήσεως ἀσκηταὶ τὸ κατάπλαστον τοῦτ’ αἰσθήσει πρῶτον, εἶτα διανοίᾳ μεταδιώκοντα ἄντικρυς ἐκβοῶσι· „θηρίον πονηρὸν ἥρπασε καὶ κατέφαγεν Ἰωσήφ“ (Gen. 37, 33).
2:66ἀλλ’ οὐ θηρίον ἐξηγριωμένον ὢν ὁ πολυπλοκώτατος τῶν πεφυρμένων ἀνθρώπων τυφοπλαστηθεὶς βίος, οὗ πλεονεξία καὶ πανουργία σοφαὶ δημιουργοί, τοὺς προσιόντας ἅπαντας εὐωχεῖται; τοιγάρτοι καὶ ἔτι ζῶσιν αὐτοῖς ὡς νεκροῖς προτεθήσεται πένθος, ἀξίαν ὀλοφύρσεως καὶ θρήνων καρπουμένοις ζωήν· ἐπεὶ καὶ Ἰακὼβ τὸν Ἰωσὴφ ἔτι ζῶντα πενθεῖ.
2:67ἀλλ’ οὐ Μωυσῆς ἐάσει τοὺς περὶ Ναδὰβ ἱεροὺς λόγους πενθεῖσθαι (Lev. 10, 6)· οὐ γὰρ ὑπ’ ἀγρίου πονηροῦ θηρὸς ἁρπασθέντες, ἀλλ’ ὑπὸ ῥιπῆς ἀσβέστου καὶ ἀθανάτου φέγγους ἀνελήφθησαν, ὅτι τὴν ἔνθερμον καὶ διάπυρον καὶ σαρκῶν ἀναλωτικὴν καὶ ὀξυκίνητον πρὸς τὴν εὐσέβειαν σπουδήν, ἣ γενέσεως μέν ἐστιν ἀλλοτρία, θεοῦ δὲ οἰκεία, τὸν μελλητὴν ὄκνον ἐκποδὼν ἀνελόντες, εὐαγῶς καθιέρωσαν, οὐ δι’ ἀναβαθμῶν ἐπὶ τὸν βωμὸν ἐλθόντες — ἀπείρηται γὰρ νόμῳ —, ἀλλὰ δεξιῷ πνεύματι ἐπουρίσαντες καὶ ἄχρι τῶν οὐρανοῦ περιόδων παραπεμφθέντες, θυσίας ὁλοκαύτου καὶ ὁλοκάρπου
2:68τρόπον εἰς αἰθερίους αὐγὰς ἀναλυθέντες. ἀποκοπτέον οὖν, ὦ ψυχὴ πειθαρχοῦσα τῷ διδάσκοντι, τὴν σεαυτῆς χεῖρα καὶ δύναμιν, ἐπειδὰν ἄρξηται τῶν γεννητικῶν ἢ γενέσεως ἢ ἀνθρωπείων σπουδασμάτων ἐπιλαμβάνεσθαι.
2:69πολλάκις γὰρ ὑφ’ * * * προσαψαμένην τῶν διδύμων χεῖρα ἀποκόπτειν (Deut. 25, 11. 12), πρῶτον μὲν ὅτι ἐδεξιώσατο ἣν ἐχθαίρειν ἐχρῆν ἡδονήν, δεύτερον δὲ ὅτι παρ’ ἡμᾶς τὸ σπείρειν ἐνόμισεν, εἶθ’ ὅτι τῷ γενομένῳ τὴν τοῦ ποιοῦντος ἀνέθηκε δύναμιν.
Book 2, §§45–69
2:45for God gives to the soul a seal, a very beautiful gift, to show that he has invested with shape the essence of all things which was previously devoid of shape, and has stamped with a particular character that which previously had no character, and has endowed with form that which had previously no distinctive form, and having perfected the entire world, he has impressed upon it an image and appearance, namely, his own word.
2:46But Joseph also mounts the second chariot, being puffed up with elation of mind and vain arrogance. And he is regulator of the provisions, laying up and preserving the treasures for the body, and providing it with food from all quarters: and this is a very formidable fortification against the soul.
2:47Moreover, his deliberate choice of life, and the life which he admires, is testified to in no slight degree by his name; for Joseph, being interpreted, means "addition;" and vain opinion is always adding what is spurious to what is genuine, and what is the property of others to what is one’s own, and what is false to what is true, and what is superfluous to what is adequate, and luxury to what is sufficient to support existence, and pride to life.
2:48Consider now what it is which I am here desirous to prove. We are nourished by meat and drink, even though the meat be the most ordinary corn, and the drink plain water from the stream. Moreover, besides this, vain opinion has added to it an infinite number of varieties of cakes, and cheese-cakes, and sweetmeats, and costly and various mixtures of an indescribable multitude of wines, for the enjoyment of pleasure rather than for a participation in necessary food properly prepared.
2:49Again, the necessary seasonings for eating, are leeks, and vegetables, and many fruits of trees, and cheese, and other things of that sort; and if you wish to include carnivorous men, we must, besides, add fish and meat to these items.
2:50Would it not, then, have been sufficient to broil these things upon the coals, or to roast them at the fire, and then eat them at once, after the fashion of those true heroes of old times? But the epicure is eager not only for such things as these, but he takes vain opinion for his ally, and excites the gluttonous passions which are within him, and seeks out and hunts all about for confectioners and pastrycooks of high reputation in their art.
2:51And they, bringing forward the different baits for his miserable stomach, which have been invented after long consideration, and preparing all kinds of peculiar flavours, and arranging them in due order, tickle, and allure, and subdue the tongue. Then, immediately they circumvent that foundation of the outward senses, the taste, by means of which the banquet-hunter in a very short time is rendered a slave instead of a free man.
2:52For who is there who does not know that clothes were originally made as a defence against the injuries which might arise to the body from cold and heat? as the poets say somewhere:— "Taming the wind in the winter."
2:53Who, therefore, thinks of costly purple garments? Who cares about transparent and thin summer robes? Who wishes for a garment delicate as a spider’s web? Who is eager to have embroidered for him apparel flowered over with dyes and brocaded figures, by those who are skilful in sewing and weaving cunning embroidery, and are superior in their handiwork to the imitative skill of the painter? Who, I say? Who, but vain opinion?
2:54And, indeed, it is for these same reasons that we had need of houses, requiring them also for protection against the attacks of wild beasts, or of men more savage in their nature than even wild beasts. Why is it, then, that we adorn the pavements and floors with costly stones? And why do we travel over Asia, and Africa, and all Europe, and the islands, searching for pillars and capitals, and architraves, and selecting them with reference to their superior beauty?
2:55And why are we anxious for, and why do we vie with one another in specimens of Doric, and Ionic, and Corinthian sculpture, and in all the refinements which luxurious men have devised in addition to the existing customs, adorning the capitals of their pillars? And why do we furnish our chambers for men and for women with golden ornaments? Is it not all from our being influenced by vain opinion?
2:56And yet, for sound sleep, the mere ground was sufficient (since, even to the present day, the accounts tell us that the gymnosophists, among the Indians, sleep on the ground in accordance with their ancient customs); and if it were not, at all events a couch made of carefully chosen stones or plain pieces of wood, would be a sufficient bed;
2:57but now the poles of our ladders are ornamented with ivory feet, and workmen inlay our beds with costly mother-of-pearl and variegated tortoise-shell, at great expense of labour, and money, and time: and some beds are even made of solid silver or solid gold, and inlaid with precious stones, with all kinds of flowery work, and embossed golden ornaments strewed about them, as if for mere display and magnificence, and not for daily use. The contriver of all which is again the same vain opinion.
2:58Again: why need we seek for more in the way of ointment than the juice pressed out of the fruit of the olive? For that softens the limbs, and relieves the labour of the body, and produces a good condition of the flesh; and if anything has got relaxed or flabby, it binds it again, and makes it firm and solid, and it fills us with vigour and strength of muscle, no less than any other unguent.
2:59But the pleasant unguents of vain opinion, are set up in opposition to those that are merely useful, on which the perfumers work, and to which vast regions contribute, such as Syria, Babylon, the Indians, and the Scythians; in which nations the origins of all perfumes are found.
2:60Again, with respect to drinking; what more could man really have need of than the cup of nature wrought with the perfection of art? Now such a cup our own hands supply, which, if any one brings together and forms into a hollow, applying them closely to his mouth, while another pours in the liquid to be drank, he gets not only a remedy for his thirst, but also a most indescribable pleasure.
2:61Still, if one were absolutely in need of something else, would not the ivy cup of the agricultural labourer be sufficient? and why should it be requisite to have recourse to the arts of other eminent artists? And what can be the use of providing a countless multitude of gold and silver goblets, if it be not for the gratification of boastful and vain-glorious arrogance, and of vain opinion raising itself to an undue height?
2:62Again, when men wear crowns, they are not content with fragrant garlands of laurel, or ivy, or violets, or lilies, or roses, or of any tree whatever, or of any flower, neglecting all the gifts of God, which he bestows upon us at the various seasons of the year, but they put golden crowns on their heads, which are a very grievous weight, wearing them in the middle of the crowded market-place without any shame. And what can we think of such men, but that they are slaves of vain opinion, in spite of their asserting themselves not only to be free, but even to be rulers over many other persons?
2:63The day would fail me if I were to go through all the varieties of human life; and yet, why need I dwell on the subject with prolixity? For who is there who has not heard, or who has not seen, such men as these? Who is there who does not associate with, and who is not familiar with them? So that the sacred scripture has very appropriately named "addition" the enemy of simplicity and the companion of pride;
2:64for as superfluous shoots do grow on trees, which are a great injury to the genuine useful branches, and which the cultivators destroy and cut out from a prudent foreknowledge of what is necessary: so likewise the life of falsehood and arrogance often grows up by the side of the true life devoid of pride, of which, to this day, no cultivator has been found who has been able to cut away the injurious superfluous growth by the roots.
2:65Therefore the practisers of wisdom, knowing this in the first instance by the outward sense, and secondly, pursuing it by the mind, cry out loudly and say, "A wicked beast has seized and devoured Joseph."
2:66But does not that most ferocious beast, the various pride which springs up in the life of men living in irregularity and confusion, whose chief workmen are covetousness and unscrupulous cunning, devour every one who comes within his reach? Therefore grief will be added to them, even while they are alive, as though they were dead, since they have a life worthy of lamentation and mourning, since Jacob mourns for Joseph, even while he is alive.
2:67But Moses will not allow the sacred reasonings about Nadab to be bewailed; for they have not been carried off by a savage beast, but have been taken up by unextinguishable violence and imperishable light; because, having discarded all fear and hesitation, they had duly consecrated the fervent and fiery zeal, consuming the flesh, and very easily and vehemently excited towards piety, which is unconnected with creation, but is akin to God, not going up to the altar by the regular steps, for that was forbidden by law, but proceeding rapidly onwards with a favourable gale, and being conducted up even to the threshold of heaven, becoming dissolved into ethereal beams like a whole burnt-offering.
2:68Therefore, O thou soul, that art obedient to thy teacher! thou must cut off thine hand and thy power when it begins to take hold of the parts of generation; that is to say, of things created, or of human pursuits;
2:69for very often ... to cut off the hand which has laid hold of the privy parts," in the first place, because it has gladly received the pleasure which it ought rather to hate; and, secondly, because it has thought that the faculty of propagating seed was in our own power, and also, because it has attributed to the creature the power which belongs to the Creator.
Book 2, §§70–94
2:70οὐχ ὁρᾷς, ὅτι ὁ γήινος ὄγκος, Ἀδάμ, ὅταν ἅψηται τοῦ διδύμου ξύλου (Gen. 2, 9), θνῄσκει, δυάδα τιμήσας πρὸ μονάδος καὶ τὸ γενόμενον πρὸ τοῦ πεποιηκότος ἐκθαυμάσας; ἀλλὰ σύ γε τοῦ μὲν καπνοῦ καὶ κύματος ἐκτὸς βαῖνε καὶ τὰς καταγελάστους τοῦ θνητοῦ βίου σπουδὰς ὡς τὴν φοβερὰν ἐκείνην χάρυβδιν ἀποδίδρασκε καὶ μηδὲ ἄκρῳ, τὸ τοῦ λόγου δὴ τοῦτο, δακτύλῳ ψαύσῃς.
2:71ἐπειδὰν δὲ ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἐπαποδύσῃ λειτουργίαις, ὅλην τὴν χεῖρα καὶ δύναμιν εὐρύνασα εὖ μάλα τῶν παιδείας καὶ σοφίας θεωρημάτων ἐπίδραξαι. καὶ γὰρ πρόσταξίς ἐστι τοιαύτη· „ἐὰν ψυχὴ προσφέρῃ δῶρον ἢ θυσίαν, σεμίδαλις ἔσται τὸ δῶρον,“ εἶτ’ ἐπιφέρει· „καὶ δραξάμενος πλήρη τὴν δράκα ἀπὸ τῆς σεμιδάλεως σὺν τῷ ἐλαίῳ καὶ παντὶ τῷ λιβάνῳ ἐπιθήσει τὸ μνημόσυνον ἐπὶ τὸ θυσιαστήριον“ (Lev. 2, 1. 2).
2:72ἆρ’ οὐ παγκάλως ψυχὴν εἶπεν ἀσώματον τὴν μέλλουσαν ἱερουργεῖν, ἀλλ’ οὐ τὸν δίδυμον ἐκ θνητοῦ καὶ ἀθανάτου συνεστῶτα ὄγκον; τὸ γὰρ εὐχόμενον, τὸ εὐχάριστον, τὸ θυσίας ἀμώμους ἀληθῶς ἀνάγον ἓν μόνον ἦν ἄρα, ἡ ψυχή.
2:73τίς οὖν ἡ ψυχῆς ἀσωμάτου θυσία; τίς ἢ σεμίδαλις, ἐκκεκαθαρμένης ταῖς παιδείας ὑποθήκαις γνώμης σύμβολον, τροφὴν ἄνοσον καὶ ζωὴν ἀνυπαίτιον ποιεῖν ἱκανῆς;
2:74ἀφ’ ἧς δραξάμενον τὸν ἱερέα ὅλῃ τῇ δρακί, τὸ δ’ ἐστὶ πάσαις ταῖς διανοίας λαβαῖς, πλήρη τὴν ὅλην ψυχὴν εἱλικρινεστάτων καὶ καθαρωτάτων δογμάτων γενομένην αὐτὴν ὡς ἱερεῖον τὸ κάλλιστον ἀνάγειν προστέτακται, πίονα καὶ λιπῶσαν, θείῳ φωτὶ χαίρουσαν καὶ ταῖς ἀπὸ δικαιοσύνης καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἀρετῶν ἀναδιδομέναις καταπνεομένην αὔραις, ὡς εὐωδέστατον καὶ προσηνέστατον ἀεὶ καρποῦσθαι βίον· τὸ γὰρ ἔλαιον καὶ ὁ λιβανωτός, ὧν ἐπιδράττεται σὺν τοῖς λευκοπύροις ὁ ἱερεύς, ταῦτα αἰνίττεται.
2:75διὰ τοῦτο καὶ Μωυσῆς ἐξαίρετον ἑορτὴν ἀνέθηκε τῷ δράγματι, πλὴν οὐ παντί, ἀλλὰ τῷ ἀπὸ τῆς ἱερᾶς γῆς. „ὅταν“ γάρ φησιν „εἰσέλθητε εἰς τὴν γῆν, ἣν ἐγὼ δίδωμι ὑμῖν, καὶ θερίζητε τὸν θερισμὸν αὐτῆς, οἴσετε δράγματα ἀπαρχὴν τοῦ θερισμοῦ ὑμῶν πρὸς τὸν ἱερέα“ (Lev. 23, 10), τὸ δέ ἐστιν·
2:76ὅταν εἰσέλθῃς, ὦ διάνοια, εἰς τὴν ἀρετῆς χώραν, ἣν ἐμπρεπὲς μόνῳ δωρεῖσθαι θεῷ, τὴν εὔβοτον, τὴν εὔγειον, τὴν καρποφόρον, εἶτα οἰκεῖα [εἴ γε] σπείρας’ ἀγαθὰ θερίζῃς αὐξηθέντα ὑπὸ τοῦ τελεσφόρου, μὴ πρότερον οἴκαδε συγκομίσῃς, τουτέστι μὴ ἀναθῇς μηδ’ ἐπιγράψῃς σεαυτῇ τὴν τῶν περιγινομένων αἰτίαν, ἢ ἀπάρξασθαι τῷ πλουτάρχῳ καὶ τὰ πλουτιστήρια ἔργα ἐπιτηδεύειν ἀναπείθοντι.
2:77καὶ λέγεται „τὴν ἀπαρχὴν τοῦ θερισμοῦ ὑμῶν“ αὐτῶν, ἀλλ’ οὐχὶ τῆς γῆς, προσφέρειν, ἵνα ἀμῶμεν καὶ θερίζωμεν ἑαυτοῖς, πάνθ’ ὅσα καλὰ καὶ τρόφιμα καὶ σπουδαῖα βλαστήματα καθιεροῦντες.
2:78Ἀλλ’ ὅ γε τῶν ἐνυπνίων μύστης ὁμοῦ καὶ μυσταγωγὸς θαρρεῖ λέγειν, ὅτι ἀνέστη τὸ αὐτοῦ δράγμα καὶ ὠρθώθη (Gen. 37, 7). τῷ γὰρ ὄντι καθάπερ οἱ γαῦροι τῶν ἵππων τὸν αὐχένα μετέωρον ἐξάραντες, ὅσοι θιασῶται τῆς κενῆς δόξης εἰσίν, ἐπάνω πάντων ἑαυτοὺς ἱδρύουσι, πόλεων, νόμων, ἐθῶν πατρίων, τῶν παρ’ ἑκάστοις πραγμάτων·
2:79εἶτα ἀπὸ δημαγωγίας ἐπὶ δημαρχίαν βαδίζοντες καὶ τὰ μὲν τῶν πλησίον καταβάλλοντες, τὰ δὲ οἰκεῖα διανιστάντες καὶ παγίως ὀρθοῦντες, ὅσα ἐλεύθερα καὶ ἀδούλωτα φύσει φρονήματα, καὶ ταῦθ’ ὑπάγεσθαι μηχανῶνται.
2:80διὸ προστίθησι· „περιστραφέντα δὲ τὰ δράγματα ὑμῶν προσεκύνησαν τὸ ἐμὸν δράγμα“ (ibid.). τέθηπε γὰρ ὁ μὲν αἰδοῦς ἐραστὴς τὸν σκληραύχενα, ὁ δὲ εὐλαβὴς τὸν αὐθάδη, ὁ δὲ ἰσότητα τιμῶν τὸν ἑαυτῷ τε καὶ ἄλλοις ἄνισον, καὶ μήποτ’ εἰκότως·
2:81ἅτε γὰρ θεωρὸς ὢν οὐ μόνον τοῦ ἀνθρωπείου βίου ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ἐν κόσμῳ συμπάντων ὁ ἀστεῖος οἶδεν ὅσον εἴωθε πνεῖν ἀνάγκη, τύχη, καιρός, βία, δυναστεία, καὶ ὅσας ὑποθέσεις καὶ ἡλίκας εὐπραγίας ἀπνευστὶ δραμούσας ἄχρις οὐρανοῦ κατέσεισαν καὶ κατέρραξαν.
2:82ὥστε ἀναγκαίως εὐλάβειαν ἐπασπιδήσεται, τοῦ μηδὲν ἐξ ἐπιδρομῆς δεινὸν παθεῖν συγγενὲς φυλακτήριον· ὃ γάρ, οἶμαι, πρὸς πόλιν τεῖχος, τοῦτ’ εὐλάβεια πρὸς ἕκαστον.
2:83ἆρ’ οὖν οὐ παραπαίουσι καὶ μεμήνασιν ὅσοι παρρησίαν ἄκαιρον σπουδάζουσιν ἐπιδείκνυσθαι, βασιλεῦσι καὶ τυράννοις ἔστιν ὅτε λέγειν τε καὶ ποιεῖν ἐναντία τολμῶντες, οὐκ αἰσθανόμενοι, ὅτι οὐ τοὺς αὐχένας μόνον ὥσπερ τὰ θρέμματα ὑπεζεύχθησαν, ἀλλ’ ὅλα τὰ σώματα καὶ τὰς ψυχὰς γύναιά τε καὶ τέκνα καὶ γονεῖς καὶ τὴν ἄλλων ἑταίρων καὶ συγγενῶν πολυάνθρωπον οἰκειότητα καὶ κοινωνίαν ἐκδέδενται, καὶ ἔξεστι τῷ ἡνιόχῳ καὶ ἐπόχῳ μετὰ πάσης εὐμαρείας κεντεῖν, ἐλαύνειν, ἐπέχειν, ἀναχαιτίζειν, ἅττ’ ἂν ἐθελήσῃ μικρὰ καὶ μείζω διατιθέναι;
2:84τοιγαροῦν στιζόμενοι καὶ μαστιγούμενοι καὶ ἀκρωτηριαζόμενοι καὶ ὅσα πρὸ τοῦ θανάτου χαλεπὰ πάντα ὠμῶς καὶ ἀνηλεῶς ἀθρόα ὑπομένοντες, ἀπαχθέντες
2:85ἐπὶ πᾶσι θνῄσκουσι. ταῦτ’ ἐστὶ τῆς ἀκαίρου παρρησίας τὰ ἐπίχειρα, οὐ παρρησίας παρά γε εὖ φρονοῦσι κριταῖς, ἀλλ’ εὐηθείας καὶ φρενοβλαβείας καὶ μελαγχολίας ἀνιάτου γέμοντα. τί λέγεις; χειμῶνά τις ὁρῶν ἀκμάζοντα καὶ βαρὺ πνεῦμα ἐναντίον καὶ λαίλαπα καταιγίζουσαν καὶ κυματούμενον πέλαγος, ἐνορμίζεσθαι δέον, ἐξορμίζεται καὶ ἐξανάγεται;
2:86τίς ἢ κυβερνήτης ἢ ναύκληρος οὕτω ποτὲ ἐμεθύσθη καὶ παρῴνησεν, ὡς ὅσων εἶπον κατασκηψάντων ἐθελῆσαι πλεῖν, ἵνα ὑπέραντλος ἄνωθεν ἐπιχυθείσης τῆς θαλάσσης ἡ ναῦς γενομένη πλωτῆρσιν αὐτοῖς ἐγκαταποθῇ; τῷ γὰρ βουλομένῳ πλεῖν ἀκινδύνως εὔδιον πνεῦμα οὔριόν τε καὶ λεῖον ἀναμένειν ἐξῆν. τί δέ;
2:87ἄρκτον τις ἢ σῦν ἄγριον ἢ λέοντα μετὰ συρμοῦ θεασάμενος ἐπιόντα, πραῧναι καὶ τιθασεῦσαι δέον, ἐξαγριαίνει καὶ ἀνερεθίζει, ὅπως θοίναν καὶ εὐωχίαν ὠμοβόροις ἀνηλεεστάτοις εὐτρεπίσῃ ἑαυτόν;
2:88εἰ μὴ καὶ φαλαγγίοις καὶ ἀσπίσι ταῖς Αἰγυπτίαις καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ὅσα τὸν φθοροποιὸν ἰὸν ἐπιφέρεται οὐδενὶ λυσιτελὲς ἀνθίστασθαι, θάνατον ἀπαραίτητον τοῖς ἅπαξ δηχθεῖσιν ἐπάγουσιν· ἀγαπητὸν γὰρ κατεπᾴδοντας καὶ χειροήθη ποιοῦντας μηδὲν ἀπ’ αὐτῶν δεινὸν παθεῖν.
2:89εἶτ’ οὔκ εἰσιν ἄνθρωποί τινες συῶν, φαλαγγίων, ἀσπίδων ἀγριώτεροι καὶ ἐπιβουλότεροι; ὧν τὸ ἐπίβουλον καὶ δυσμενὲς ἀμήχανον ἑτέρως ἢ τιθασείαις καὶ μειλίγμασι χρωμένους διεκδῦναι. τοιγάρτοι ὁ σοφὸς Ἀβραὰμ τοὺς υἱοὺς τοῦ Χὲτ — ἑρμηνεύονται δὲ ἐξιστάντες — προσκυνήσει (Gen. 23, 7), τῶν καιρῶν τοῦτο δρᾶν ἀναπειθόντων.
2:90οὐ γὰρ τιμῶν γε τοὺς ἐκ φύσεως καὶ γένους καὶ ἐθῶν ἐχθροὺς λογισμοῦ, οἳ τὸ τῆς ψυχῆς νόμισμα, παιδείαν, ἐξιστάντες καὶ κατακερματίζοντες οἰκτρῶς ἀναλίσκουσιν, ἐπὶ τὸ προσκυνεῖν ἦλθεν, ἀλλὰ τὸ παρὸν κράτος αὐτῶν καὶ τὴν δυσάλωτον ἰσχὺν δεδιὼς καὶ φυλαττόμενος ἐρεθίζειν, μέγα καὶ ἐχυρὸν κτῆμα καὶ ἀγώνισμα ἀρετῆς, σοφῶν ψυχῶν ἄριστον ἐνδιαίτημα, τὸ διπλοῦν σπήλαιον, ὃ μαχόμενον μὲν καὶ πολεμοῦντα οὐκ ἐνῆν, ὑπερχόμενον δὲ καὶ θεραπεύοντα τῷ λόγῳ, κομιεῖται. τί δέ;
2:91οὐχὶ καὶ ἡμεῖς, ὅταν ἐν ἀγορᾷ διατρίβωμεν, εἰώθαμεν ἐξίστασθαι μὲν τοῖς ἄρχουσιν, ἐξίστασθαι δὲ καὶ τοῖς ὑποζυγίοις; ἀλλ’ ἀπ’ ἐναντίας γνώμης καὶ οὐχὶ τῆς αὐτῆς· τοῖς μὲν γὰρ ἄρχουσιν ἐν τιμῇ, τοῖς δὲ ὑποζυγίοις διὰ φόβον τοῦ μηδὲν ἀπ’ αὐτῶν εἰς ἡμᾶς νεωτερισθῆναι.
2:92καὶ διδόντων μὲν τῶν καιρῶν ἐπιτιθεμένους τὴν τῶν ἐχθρῶν βίαν καλὸν καταλῦσαι, μὴ ἐπιτρεπόντων δὲ ἀσφαλὲς ἡσυχάσαι, βουλομένοις δέ τιν’ ὠφέλειαν εὑρίσκεσθαι παρ’ αὐτῶν ἁρμόττον τιθασεῦσαι.
2:93Διὸ καὶ νῦν ἄξιον ἐπαινεῖν τοὺς μὴ ὑποχωροῦντας τῷ τῆς κενῆς προστάτῃ δόξης, ἀλλὰ ἀνθισταμένους καὶ λέγοντας· „μὴ βασιλεύων βασιλεύσεις ἐφ’ ἡμῖν“ (Gen. 37,8) ; οὔπω γὰρ ἰσχυκότα ὁρῶσιν αὐτόν, οὐχ ὡς φλόγα ἡμμένον τε καὶ λάμποντα ἐν ἀφθόνῳ ὕλῃ νεμόμενον, ἀλλ’ ἔθ’ ὡς σπινθῆρα ἐντυφόμενον, ὀνειρώττοντα δόξαν, οὐκ ἐναργῶς ἤδη μετιόντα.
2:94χρηστὰς γὰρ ἐλπίδας ὑποβάλλουσιν ἑαυτοῖς, ὡσεὶ καὶ μὴ ἁλῶναι δυνησόμενοι. παρὸ λέγουσι· „μὴ ἐφ’ ἡμῖν βασιλεύσεις“; ἴσον τῷ ζώντων, ὄντων, ἰσχυόντων, ἐμπνεόντων ἡμῶν οἴει δυναστεύσειν; ἀσθενησάντων μὲν γὰρ ἴσως ἐπικρατήσεις, ἐρρωμένων δὲ ἐν ὑπηκόου μοίρᾳ τετάξῃ.
Book 2, §§70–94
2:70Dost thou not see that the earthly mass, Adam, when it lays its hand upon the two trees, dies, because it has preferred the number two to the unit, and because it has admired the creature in preference to the Creator? But do thou go forth beyond the reach of the smoke and the tempest, and flee from the ridiculous pursuits of mortal life as a fearful whirlpool, and do not, as the proverb has it, touch them even with the tip of thy finger.
2:71And when thou hast girded thyself up for the sacred ministrations, having made broad thy whole hand and thy whole power, then take a firm hold of the speculations of instruction and wisdom; for the command is of this kind, "If a soul brings a gift or a sacrifice, the gift shall be of fine wheaten flour." After that the lawgiver adds: "And when he has taken a full handful of the fine wheaten flour, with the oil, and with all the frankincense, he places the memorial on the altar of sacrifice."
2:72Is not this a very beautiful and appropriate expression of Moses, to call that soul incorporeal which is about to offer sacrifice, but not to call the double mass which consists of mortality and immortality by any such name? For that which vows the vow—that which is full of gratitude—that which offers such sacrifices as are truly without spot, is one thing only, namely, the soul.
2:73What then is the offering of the incorporeal soul? What is the fine wheaten flour, a symbol of the mind purified by the suggestions of instruction, which is able to render the friend of education free from all disease, and life free from all reproach?
2:74From which the priest taking a handful with his whole hand, that is to say, with the whole grasp of his mind, is commanded to offer up the whole soul itself, full of the most unalloyed and pure doctrines, as the most excellent of sacrifices, fat and in good condition, rejoicing in divine light, and redolent of the exhalations which are given forth by justice, and by the other virtues, so as always to enjoy a most fragrant, and delicious, and happy life; for the oil and the frankincense, of which the priest takes a handful with the white wheat, contain a figurative assertion of this.
2:75It is on this account that Moses set apart an especial festival for the sheaf; however, not for every sheaf, but for that which came from the sacred land. "For when," says he, "you come into the land which I give unto you, and when you reap its harvest, you shall bring sheaves as a first fruit of your harvest to the priest."
2:76And the meaning of this injunction is, when, O mind, you come into the country of virtue, which it is fitting should be offered up to God alone, being a land good for pasture, a land of rich soil, a land which beareth fruit, and when you reap the fruit (either that afforded by the land spontaneously or that which thou hast sown), which has been brought to perfection by the God who gives perfection; carry it not home to thy house; that is to say, do not store it up, and do not attribute to thyself the cause of the crop which has arisen to thee, before thou hast offered the first fruits to the Cause of all wealth, and to him who persuaded thee to study the operations which confer riches.
2:77And it is enjoined that you shall offer the "first fruits of your own harvest;" not of the harvest of the land, in order that we may reap and gather in the harvest for ourselves; dedicating to God all good and nutritious, and beneficial fruits.
2:78But the man who is at the same time initiated in dreams and also an interpreter of dreams, is bold to say that his sheaf rose and stood upright; for in real truth, as spirited horses lift their necks high, so all who are companions of vain opinion place themselves above all things, above all cities, and laws, and national customs, and above all the circumstances which affect each individual of them.
2:79Then proceeding onwards from being demagogues to being leaders of the people, and overthrowing the things which belong to their neighbours, and setting up and establishing on a solid footing what belongs to themselves, that is to say, all such dispositions as are free and by nature impatient of slavery, they attempt to reduce these also under their power;
2:80on which account the dreamer adds, "And your sheaves turning towards my sheaf made obeisance unto it." For the lover of modesty marvels at and fears the stiffnecked, and the cautious person fears the self-willed man, and he who reverences holiness fears that which is impious both for himself and for others.
2:81And is not this reasonable? For inasmuch as the good man is a spectator, not only of human life but also of all the things which exist in the world, he knows how many things are accustomed to be caused by necessity, and chance, and opportunity, and violence, and authority; and what numbers of propositions, and what great instances of prosperity proceeding onwards with rapidity towards heaven, the same causes have shaken and overthrown;
2:82so that he will of necessity take up caution as a shield, as a protection to prevent his suffering any sudden and unexpected evil; for as I imagine what a wall is to a city, that caution is to an individual.
2:83Do not these men then talk foolishly, are they not mad, who desire to display their inexperience and freedom of speech to kings and tyrants, at times daring to speak and to do things in opposition to their will? Do they not perceive that they have not only put their necks under the yoke like brute beasts, but that they have also surrendered and betrayed their whole bodies and souls likewise, and their wives and their children, and their parents, and all the rest of the numerous kindred and community of their other relations? And it is lawful for the charioteer, and also for the passenger, with all freedom to spur, and to urge forward, and to check, and to hold back, according as he desires to arrange things, so as to make them greater or smaller.
2:84Therefore, being pricked with goads, and flogged, and mutilated, and suffering all the cruelties which can be inflicted in an inhuman and pitiless manner before death, all together, they are led away to execution and put to death.
2:85These are the rewards of unseemly freedom of speech, not of that which is accounted such by right-thinking judges, but of that license which is full of folly, and insanity of mind, and of incurable distemper. What do you mean? Does anyone, when he sees a storm at its height, and a violent gale opposing him, and a hurricane raging tempestuously, and the sea full of vast waves, when he ought to anchor his ship, does anyone, I say, at such a moment weigh anchor and put to sea?
2:86What pilot, or what captain of a ship, was ever so drunk and intoxicated, as, while all the dangers which I have just enumerated were threatening him, to be willing to set sail, lest, if his vessel became water-logged by the sea breaking over it from above, it might be swallowed up with all its crew? For, if he had been inclined to meet with a voyage free from danger, it was in his power to wait for calm weather and a smooth and favourable breeze.
2:87What would one say, suppose anyone were to see a bear or a lion coming on with violence, and, while he might pacify and tame him, were to provoke him and make him savage, in order to give up himself as an unpitied meal and feast to those ravenous monsters?
2:88Unless indeed anyone will assert that it is of no use to anyone to oppose the asps and serpents of Egypt, and all the other things which ... destructive poison ... inflict inevitable death on those who are once bitten by them; for that men must be content to use incantations, and so to tame those beasts, and by such means to avoid suffering any evil from them.
2:89Moreover, are there not certain men who are more savage and more treacherous than boars, or serpents, or asps? whose treacherous and malignant disposition it is impossible to escape otherwise than by gentleness and caresses? Therefore the wise Abraham will offer adoration to the sons of Cheth, and their name being interpreted, means "admiring," because the occasion persuades him to do so.
2:90For he has not come to this action of adoration because he honours persons who, by nature, and by hereditary qualities, and by their own habits, are enemies to reason, and who miserably waste that coinage of the soul, namely instruction, corrupting, and adulterating, and clipping it, but because he fears their present power and their scarcely conquerable strength, and is on his guard not to provoke them, he takes refuge in that great and powerful possession and weapon of virtue, that most excellent place of abode for wise souls, the double cave, which he could not occupy while warring and fighting, but only by acting as a champion and servant of reason.
2:91What? Do not we also, when we are spending our time in the market-place, frequently wonder at the masters, and also at the beasts of burden? But we wonder at these two classes, with different and not the same feelings. For we look upon the masters with honour, and upon the beasts of burden with fear, lest some injury should be done to us by them.
2:92And when an opportunity offers, it is a good thing to attack our enemies and put down their power; but when we have no such opportunity, it is better to be quiet; but if we wish to find perfect safety as far as they are concerned, it is advantageous to caress them.
2:93On which account it is even now proper to praise those persons who do not yield to the president of vain opinion but who withstand him and say, "Shall you be a king and rule over us?" For they do not as yet see him actually in possession of kingly power, they do not see him as yet kindled like a flame, and shining and blazing in the unlimited fuel, but only smouldering like a spark, dreaming of glory, and not visibly having attained to it;
2:94for they also suggest favourable hopes to themselves as if they will not be able to be overcome by him; for which reason they say, "Shall you reign over us?" Which is equivalent to saying, Do you expect to be a king over us while we are living, existing, strong, and breathing? Perhaps, indeed, you may make yourself master of such as are weak people, but with respect to us who are strong you will be looked upon by us as a subject.
Book 2, §§95–119
2:95καὶ πέφυκεν οὕτως ἔχειν· ἐπειδὰν μὲν γὰρ ἐν διανοίᾳ ὁ ὀρθὸς ἰσχύῃ λόγος, ἡ κενὴ καταλύεται δόξα, ῥώννυται δὲ ἀσθενήσαντος. ἕως οὖν ἔτι σῴαν ἔχει τὴν ἑαυτῆς δύναμιν ἡ ψυχὴ καὶ μηδὲν αὐτῆς μέρος ἠκρωτηρίασται, θαρρείτω βάλλειν καὶ τοξεύειν τὸν ἐναντιούμενον τῦφον καὶ ἐλευθεροστομείτω φάσκουσα· οὔτε βασιλεύσεις οὔτε κυριεύσεις (ibid.) οὔτε ἡμῶν οὔτε ἐφ’ ἡμῶν ἑτέρων·
2:96ἀλλά σου τὰς ἐπανατάσεις καὶ τὰς ἀπειλὰς ἐφόδῳ μιᾷ καταδραμούμεθα σὺν τοῖς δορυφόροις καὶ ὑπασπισταῖς, φρονήσεως ἐγγόνοις· ἐφ’ ὧν λέγεται ὅτι „προσέθεντο μισεῖν αὐτὸν ἕνεκα τῶν ἐνυπνίων αὐτοῦ καὶ ἕνεκα τῶν ῥημάτων αὐτοῦ“ (ibid.).
2:97ἀλλ’ οὐ ῥήματα μὲν καὶ ἐνύπνια πάνθ’ ὅσα ὁ τῦφος ἂν εἰδωλοποιῇ, πράγματα δὲ καὶ σαφεῖς ἐνάργειαι τὰ ὅσα ἐπ’ ὀρθὸν βίον καὶ λόγον ἀναφέρεται; καὶ τὰ μὲν μίσους ἅτε κατεψευσμένα, τὰ δὲ φιλίας ἅτε ἀληθείας τῆς ἐπεράστου γέμοντα ἐπάξια.
2:98μηδεὶς οὖν ἔτι κατηγορεῖν ἐπιτολμάτω τῶν τοσούτων τὰς ἀρετὰς ἀνδρῶν ὡς μισανθρώπου καὶ μισαδέλφου δεῖγμα ἤθους ἐκφερόντων, ἀλλὰ μαθών, ὅτι οὐκ ἄνθρωπος ὁ νῦν ἐπικρινόμενός ἐστιν, ἀλλὰ τῶν ἐν ἑκάστου τῇ ψυχῇ τρόπων ὁ δοξομανὴς καὶ φιλότυφος, ἀποδεχέσθω τοὺς ἄσπονδον ἔχθραν καὶ μῖσος ἀκατάλλακτον πρὸς αὐτὸν αἰρομένους καὶ μηδέποτε τὸν στυγηθέντα πρὸς ἐκείνων στερξάτω, γνοὺς ἀκριβῶς,
2:99ὅτι οἱ τοιοῦτοι δικασταὶ γνώμης οὐκ ἄν ποτε ἐσφάλησαν ὑγιοῦς, ἀλλὰ μαθόντες καὶ παιδευθέντες ἐξ ἀρχῆς τὸν ὄντως βασιλέα, τὸν κύριον, προσκυνεῖν τε καὶ τιμᾶν ἀγανακτοῦσιν, εἴ τις τὴν θεοῦ τιμὴν νοσφίζεται καὶ τοὺς ἱκέτας αὐτοῦ μετακαλεῖ πρὸς τὴν ἰδίαν θεραπείαν.
2:100διὸ θαρροῦντες ἐροῦσιν· „μὴ βασιλεύων βασιλεύσεις ἐφ’ ἡμῖν“; ἢ ἀγνοεῖς, ὅτι οὔκ ἐσμεν αὐτόνομοι, ἀλλ’ ὑπὸ ἀθανάτου βασιλέως, τοῦ μόνου θεοῦ, βασιλευόμεθα; τί δέ; „κυριεύων κυριεύσεις ἡμῶν“ (Gen. 37,8) ; μὴ γὰρ οὐ δεσποζόμεθα καὶ ἔχομέν τε καὶ ἕξομεν εἰς τὸν ἀεὶ χρόνον τὸν αὐτὸν κύριον; ᾧ δουλεύοντες οὕτω γεγήθαμεν, ὡς οὐδεὶς ἕτερος ἐπ’ ἐλευθερίᾳ· καὶ γάρ ἐστι τὸ δουλεύειν θεῷ πάντων ἄριστον, ὅσα ἐν γενέσει τετίμηται.
2:101εὐξαίμην ἂν οὖν καὶ αὐτὸς δυνηθῆναι τοῖς γνωσθεῖσιν ὑπὸ τούτων ἐμμεῖναι βεβαίως· ὀπτῆρες γὰρ καὶ κατάσκοποι καὶ ἔφοροι πραγμάτων, οὐ σωμάτων, εἰσὶν ἀκριβοδίκαιοι, πάντα νήφοντες τὸν αἰῶνα, ὡς ὑπὸ μηδενὸς ἔτι τῶν εἰωθότων δελεάζειν ἀπατᾶσθαι.
2:102μεθύω δὲ ἄχρι νῦν ἐγὼ καὶ ἀσαφείᾳ πολλῇ κέχρημαι καὶ βάκτρων καὶ τῶν ποδηγετησόντων ὥσπερ οἱ τυφλοὶ δέομαι· σκηριπτομένῳ γὰρ ἐγγένοιτ’ ἂν ἴσως μήτε προσπταίειν μήτε ὀλισθαίνειν.
2:103εἰ δέ τινες ἀνεξετάστους καὶ ἀπερισκέπτους εἰδότες ἑαυτοὺς οὐ σπουδάζουσι τοῖς ἐξητακόσιν ἃ χρὴ πάντα ἀκριβῶς καὶ περιεσκεμμένως ἀκολουθεῖν, ἀγνοοῦντες τὴν ὁδὸν ἐπισταμένοις, ἴστωσαν ὅτι δυσαναπορεύτοις βαράθροις περιπαρέντες οὐδ’ ἐπειγόμενοι προελθεῖν ἔτι δυνήσονται.
2:104ἐγὼ δὲ ἐκείνοις, ὅταν μικρὸν ἀνεθῶ τῆς μέθης, οὕτως εἰμὶ ἔνσπονδος, ὡς τὸν αὐτὸν ἐχθρὸν καὶ φίλον εἶναι νομίζειν. καὶ νῦν οὐδὲν ἧττον τὸν ἐνυπνιαστήν, ὅτι γε καὶ ἐκεῖνοι, προβαλοῦμαι καὶ στυγήσω· καὶ οὐδεὶς εὖ φρονῶν ἐπὶ τούτῳ μέμψαιτ’ ἄν με τῷ τὰς πλειόνων γνώμας τε καὶ ψήφους ἀεὶ νικᾶν.
2:105ἐπειδὰν δὲ πρὸς ἀμείνω βίον μεταβάλῃ καὶ μηκέτ’ ἐνυπνιάζηται μηδὲ ταῖς κεναῖς τῶν κενοδόξων φαντασίαις ἰλυσπώμενος κακοπαθῇ μηδὲ νύκτα καὶ σκότος καὶ πραγμάτων ἀδήλων καὶ ἀτεκμάρτων συντυχίας ὀνειροπολῇ,
2:106περιαναστὰς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ βαθέος ὕπνου διατελῇ μὲν ἐγρηγορώς, ἐνάργειαν δὲ πρὸ ἀσαφείας καὶ πρὸ ψευδοῦς ὑπολήψεως ἀλήθειαν καὶ πρὸ νυκτὸς ἡμέραν καὶ φῶς πρὸ σκότους ἀποδέχηται καὶ τὴν μὲν γυναῖκα τοῦ Αἰγυπτίου, σώματος ἡδονήν, εἰς αὐτὴν εἰσελθεῖν καὶ τῆς ὁμιλίας αὐτῆς ἀπολαῦσαι παρακαλοῦσαν ἀποστρέφηται (Gen. 39,7) διὰ πόθον ἐγκρατείας καὶ ζῆλον εὐσεβείας ἄλεκτον,
2:107ὧν δὲ ἔδοξεν ἀλλοτριωθῆναι συγγενικῶν καὶ πατρῴων ἀγαθῶν μεταποιῆται πάλιν τὸ ἐπιβάλλον ἀρετῆς ἑαυτῷ μέρος δικαιῶν ἀνακτᾶσθαι καὶ ταῖς κατὰ μικρὸν ἐπανιὼν βελτιώσεσιν ὡς ἐπὶ κορυφῆς τοῦ ἑαυτοῦ βίου καὶ τέλους ἱδρυθεὶς ἀναφθέγξηται, ὃ παθὼν ἀκριβῶς ἔμαθεν, ὅτι „τοῦ θεοῦ“ (Gen. 50, 19) ἐστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐδενὸς ἔτι τῶν εἰς γένεσιν ἡκόντων αἰσθητοῦ τὸ παράπαν,
2:108οἱ μὲν ἀδελφοὶ καταλλακτηρίους ποιήσονται συμβάσεις, τὸ μῖσος εἰς φιλίαν καὶ τὸ κακόνουν εἰς εὔνοιαν μεταβαλόντες, ἐγὼ δ’ ὁ τούτων ὀπαδὸς — πείθεσθαι γὰρ ὡς δεσπόταις οἰκέτης ἔμαθον — ἐπαινῶν οὐκ ἐπιλείψω τῆς μετανοίας ἐκεῖνον·
2:109εἴ γε καὶ Μωυσῆς ὁ ἱεροφάντης ἀξιέραστον καὶ ἀξιομνημόνευτον οὖσαν αὐτοῦ τὴν μετάνοιαν ἐκ φθορᾶς ἀνασῴζει διὰ συμβόλου τῶν ὀστέων, ἃ κατορωρύχθαι μέχρι τοῦ παντὸς οὐκ ᾤετο δεῖν ἐᾶν ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ (Exod. 13, 19), παγχάλεπον ἡγούμενος, εἴ τι ἤνθησεν ἡ ψυχὴ καλόν, τοῦτ’ ἐᾶσαι μαρανθῆναι καὶ κατακλυσθὲν ἀφανισθῆναι πλημμύραις, ἃς ὁ τῶν παθῶν Αἰγύπτιος ποταμός, τὸ σῶμα, διὰ πασῶν τῶν αἰσθήσεων ῥέων ἐνδελεχῶς ἐκδίδωσιν.
2:110Ἡ μὲν οὖν ἐπὶ τῶν δραγμάτων φανεῖσα ὄψις ἀπὸ γῆς καὶ διάκρισις εἴρηται· τὴν δὲ ἑτέραν καιρὸς ἤδη σκοπεῖν, καὶ ὡς ὀνειροκριτικῇ
2:111τέχνῃ διαστέλλεται. „εἶδεν“ οὖν φησιν „ἐνύπνιον ἕτερον καὶ διηγήσατο τῷ πατρὶ καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ εἶπεν· ὥσπερ ὁ ἥλιος καὶ ἡ σελήνη καὶ ἕνδεκα ἀστέρες προσεκύνουν με. καὶ ἐπετίμησεν αὐτῷ ὁ πατὴρ καὶ εἶπε· τί τὸ ἐνύπνιον ὃ ἐνυπνιάσθης; ἆρά γε ἐλθόντες ἐλευσόμεθα ἐγὼ καὶ ἡ μήτηρ σου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου προσκυνῆσαί σοι ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν; ἐζήλωσαν δὲ αὐτὸν οἱ ἀδελφοί, ὁ δὲ πατὴρ διετήρησε τὸ ῥῆμα“ (Gen. 37,9—11).
2:112φασὶ τοίνυν οἱ μετεωρολογικοί, τὸν ζῳδιακὸν κύκλον μέγιστον ὄντα τῶν κατ’ οὐρανὸν δυοκαίδεκα ζῳδίοις, ἀφ’ ὧν καὶ τὴν ἐπωνυμίαν ἔσχε, κατηστερίσθαι, ἥλιον δὲ καὶ σελήνην ἀεὶ περὶ αὐτὸν εἱλουμένους ἕκαστον διεξέρχεσθαι τῶν ζῳδίων, οὐκ ἰσοταχεῖς, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀριθμοῖς καὶ χρόνοις ἀνίσοις, τὸν μὲν ἐν ἡμέραις τριάκοντα, τὴν δὲ δωδεκατημορίῳ τούτων μάλιστα, ὅπερ ἡμερῶν δυεῖν καὶ ἡμίσους ἐστίν.
2:113ἔδοξεν οὖν ὁ τὴν θεόπεμπτον φαντασίαν ἰδὼν ὑπ’ ἀστέρων ἕνδεκα προσκυνεῖσθαι, δωδέκατον συντάττων ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὴν τοῦ ζῳδιακοῦ συμπλήρωσιν κύκλου.
2:114μέμνημαι δὲ καὶ πρότερόν τινος ἀκούσας ἀνδρὸς οὐκ ἀμελῶς οὐδὲ ῥᾳθύμως τῷ μαθήματι προσενεχθέντος, ὅτι οὐκ ἄνθρωποι μόνοι δοξομανοῦσιν, ἀλλὰ καὶ οἱ ἀστέρες καὶ περὶ πρωτείων ἁμιλλώμενοι δικαιοῦσιν οἱ μείζους | ἀεὶ πρὸς τῶν ἐλαττόνων δορυφορεῖσθαι.
2:115ταῦτα μὲν οὖν, ὅπως ἂν ἀληθείας ἢ εἰκαιολογίας ἔχῃ, παρετέον τοῖς μετεωροθήραις σκοπεῖν. λέγομεν δὲ ἡμεῖς, [ὡς] ὅτι ὁ σπουδῆς ἀκρίτου καὶ φιλονεικίας ἀλόγου καὶ κενῆς δόξης ἐραστής, ἀεὶ φυσώμενος ὑπ’ ἀνοίας, οὐ μόνον ἀνθρώπους ὑπερκύπτειν ἀλλὰ καὶ τὴν τῶν ὄντων φύσιν ἀξιοῖ.
2:116καὶ νομίζει μὲν ἑαυτοῦ χάριν τὰ πάντα γεγενῆσθαι, ἀναγκαῖον δ’ εἶναι δασμὸν ἕκαστον ὡς βασιλεῖ φέρειν αὑτῷ, γῆν, ὕδωρ, ἀέρα, οὐρανόν· καὶ τοσαύτῃ τῆς εὐηθείας ὑπερβολῇ χρῆται, ὥστε οὐκ ἰσχύει λογίσασθαι, ὃ κἂν παῖς ἄφρων ἐννοηθείη, ὅτι τεχνίτης οὐδεὶς ἕνεκα μέρους ποτὲ ὅλον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ ὅλου μέρος δημιουργεῖ· μέρος δὲ τοῦ παντὸς ἄνθρωπος, ὥστε γεγονὼς εἰς τὸ συμπλήρωμα τοῦ κόσμου δικαίως ἂν αὐτὸς ἐκείνῳ συντελοίη.
2:117φλυαρίας δὲ ἄρα τοσαύτης γέμουσί τινες, ὥστε ἀγανακτοῦσιν, εἰ μὴ ὁ κόσμος τοῖς βουλήμασιν αὐτῶν ἕποιτο. διὰ τοῦτο Ξέρξης μὲν ὁ Περσῶν βασιλεύς, βουλόμενος τοὺς ἐχθροὺς καταπλῆξαι, μεγαλουργίας ἐπίδειξιν ἐποιεῖτο, καινουργῶν τὴν φύσιν·
2:118γῆν μὲν γὰρ μετεστοιχείου καὶ θάλατταν, ἀντιδιδοὺς πελάγει μὲν ἤπειρον, ἠπείρῳ δὲ πέλαγος, τὸν μὲν Ἑλλήσποντον ζευγνὺς γεφύραις, ὄρος δὲ τὸν Ἄθω ῥηγνὺς εἰς βαθεῖς κόλπους, οἳ πληρούμενοι θαλάττης ὁ νέος καὶ χειρόκμητος εὐθὺς πόντος ἦσαν, τὸ παλαιὸν τῆς φύσεως ἐξαλλοιωθείς·
2:119τὰ δὲ περίγεια, ὡς ἐδόκει, θαυματουργήσας ἀνέβαινε ταῖς τετολμημέναις ἐπινοίαις συνανάγων ἀσέβειαν ἑαυτῷ καὶ εἰς οὐρανὸν ὁ δύστηνος, ὡς τὰ ἀκίνητα κινήσων καὶ τὸν θεῖον στρατὸν καθαιρήσων, καί, τὸ λεγόμενον, ἀφ’ ἱερᾶς ἤρχετο·
Book 2, §§95–119
2:95And, indeed, this is the natural state of the case. For when right reason is powerful in the soul, vain opinion is put down; but when right reason is weak, vain opinion is strong. As long, therefore, as the soul has its own power still safe, and as long as it is not mutilated in any part of it, it may well have confidence to attack and aim its arrows at the pride which resists it, and it may indulge in freedom of speech, saying, "You shall not be a king, you shall not be a lord either over us, or during our lifetime over others;
2:96but we, with our body-guards and shield-bearers, the offspring of wisdom, will overthrow your attacks and baffle your threats with one single sally of ours. In reference to which circumstances it is said, "They began to hate him because of his dreams and because of his words."
2:97But are not all the images which pride sets up and worships mere words and dreams, while, on the contrary, those things alone deserve to be called actions and real energies which are referable to correct life and right reason? And the one class are worthy of hatred as being false, and the other class deserve friendship as being full of desirable and lovely truth.
2:98Let no one, therefore, venture to bring accusations against the virtues of such men, as if they exhibited a specimen of an inhuman and unbrotherly disposition; but let any one who is disposed to do so, learn that it is not a man who is now being judged of, but the disposition which exists in the soul of each individual, which is mad on the subject of glory and arrogant pride; let him embrace these men who have adopted irreconcileable enmity and hatred towards this disposition, and let him never love what is hated by them.
2:99Knowing thoroughly that such judges are never deceived so as to wander from a sound opinion, but that, having learnt from the beginning to understand who is the true king, namely, the Lord, they indignantly refuse to worship him who deprives God of his honour, and seeks to appropriate it to himself, and who invites his fellow servants to do him service.
2:100On which account they say with confidence, "Shall you be a king and reign over us?" Are you ignorant that we are not independent, but that we are under the government of an immortal king, the only God? And why should you be a lord and lord it over us? for are we not under domination, and have we not now, and shall we not have for ever, and ever the same one Lord? in being whose servants we rejoice more than any one else can do in his liberty; for to be the servant of God is the most excellent of all things which are honoured in creation.
2:101I, therefore, should pray that I myself also might be able to abide firmly in the things which have been decided by these men; for they are accurate investigators, and superintendents, and overseers of things, not of bodies, and just, and sober all their lives, so as never to be deceived by any of those things which are accustomed to deceive mankind.
2:102But up to this time I am in a state of intoxication, and I am labouring under much uncertainty, and I have need of a staff and of a guide like a blind man; for if I had a staff to support me, then, perhaps, I might neither stumble nor fall.
2:103But if any persons who are conscious that they are but inconsiderate and precipitate, pay no attention to and do not care to follow those who have investigated all necessary matters with diligence and circumspection, nor, though they themselves are ignorant of the road, submit to the guidance of those who are acquainted with it, let them know that they have entered a course which it is very difficult to travel through, and that they are entangled in it, and will not be able to advance further;
2:104but I am so bound by treaties to these men, the moment I have a little recovered from my intoxication, that I think the same person both a friend and an enemy. But at present I will drive from me and hate that dreamer no less than they do; for no one in his senses could blame me for this, that the majority of opinions and votes does always prevail;
2:105but when he changes to a better course of life, and no longer dreams, and no longer worries himself by entangling himself in the vain imaginations of the slaves of vain opinion, and when he no longer dreams about night, and darkness, and the changes of uncertain matters which cannot be guessed at;
2:106he, then, having awakened from deep sleep, continues awake and receives certainty instead of indistinctness, and truth instead of false conceptions, and day instead of night, and light instead of darkness, and rejects an Egyptian wife, that is to say, the pleasure of the body, when she invites him to come in to her, and to enjoy her conversation, out of an indescribable love of continence and admiration for piety,
2:107and asserts his right to a share in those kindred and inherited blessings from which he appeared to be alienated, again desiring to recover that portion of virtue which properly belongs to him. For proceeding by small and gradual improvements, as if he were now established on the summit and perfection of his own life, he cries out, what indeed he knows to a certainty from what has happened to him, that he "belongs to God," and that he belongs no more to any object of external sense which can affect any creature;
2:108and then his brethren will come to a permanent reconciliation with him, changing their hatred into friendship, and their malignity into good will. But I who am the follower of these men, for I have learnt to obey them as a servant obeys his master, will never cease to praise him for his change of mind.
2:109Since Moses, also, that priest of sacred things, preserves his change of mind as what is worthy of love and of being preserved in men’s recollection, from being forgotten, by the symbol of the bones which he did not think proper to have buried in Egypt for ever, looking upon it as a hard thing, if the soul put forth any beautiful flower to suffer that to wither away, and to be overwhelmed and destroyed by the torrents which the Egyptian river of the passions, namely the body, which is incessantly flowing through all the outward senses, sends forth.
2:110The vision, therefore, which appeared proceeding from the earth, with reference to the sheaves and the interpretation thereof, has now been sufficiently discussed. It is time now to consider the other vision; and to examine how that is interpreted by the art of the explanation of dreams.
2:111"He saw then," says the scripture, "a second dream, and he related it to his father, and to his brethren, and he said, I saw that the sun, and the moon, and the eleven stars worshipped me. And his father rebuked him, and said, What is this dream that thou hast dreamed? Shall I, and thy mother, and thy brethren, come forward and advance, and fall down to the earth and worship thee? And his brethren were jealous of him; but his father regarded his words."
2:112The studiers of sublime wisdom now say that the zodiac, the greatest of all the circles in heaven, is studded with twelve animals (ζώδια), from which it has derived its name. And that the sun and the moon are always revolving around it, and go through each of the animals, not indeed with equal rapidity, but in unequal numbers and periods; the one doing so in thirty days, and the other in as near as may be a twelfth part of that time, that is in two days and a half;
2:113therefore, he who saw this heaven-sent vision, thought that he was being worshipped by eleven stars, ranking himself among them as the twelfth, so as to complete the whole circle of the zodiac.
2:114And I recollect having before now heard some man who had applied himself to learning in no careless or indolent spirit, say that men were not the only beings which went mad with vain opinions, but that the stars did so too. And they also, said he, contend with one another for precedence, and those which are the greater claim to be attended by the lesser stars as their guards;
2:115these matters, however, we may leave for the studiers of sublime subjects to investigate, and to settle how much truth and how much random assertion there is in them. But we say, that the lover of indiscriminate study, and unreasonable contention, and vain opinion, being always puffed up by folly, wishes to assert a precedence, not only over men, but also above the nature of all existing things;
2:116and he thinks that all things were created for his sake, and that it is necessary that everything, whether earth or heaven, or water or air, should bring him tribute; and he has gone to such an extravagant pitch of folly, that he is not able to reason upon such matters as even a young child might understand, and to see that no artist ever makes the whole for the sake of the part, but rather makes the part for the sake of the whole. Now the part of the whole is the man, so that he is properly asserted to have been made for the sake of perfecting the world in which he is rightly classed.
2:117But some persons are full of such exceeding folly, that they are indignant if the whole world does not follow their intentions: for this reason Xerxes, the king of Persia, being desirous to strike terror into his enemies, made a display of very mighty undertakings, altering the whole face of nature;
2:118for he changed the nature of the elements of the earth and of the sea, giving land to the sea and sea to the land, by joining the Hellespont with a bridge, and breaking up Mount Athos into deep gulfs, which, being filled with sea, became so many new and artificially-cut seas, being entirely changed from the ancient course of nature.
2:119And having worked wonders with respect to the earth, according to his wishes, he mounted up upon daring conceptions, like a miserable man as he was, contracting the guilt of impiety, and seeking to soar up to heaven, as if he would move what cannot be moved, and would subjugate the host of heaven, and, as the proverb has it, he began with a sacred thing.
Book 2, §§120–144
2:120τὸν γὰρ ἄριστον τῶν ἐκεῖ, τὸν ἡγεμόνα ἡμέρας ἥλιον, ἐτόξευεν, ὥσπερ οὐκ αὐτὸς ἀφανεῖ βέλει φρενοβλαβείας τιτρωσκόμενος οὐ μόνον διὰ τὸ ἀδυνάτων ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὸ ἀνοσιωτάτων ἔργων ἐρᾶν, ὧν καὶ θάτερον μεγάλη τῷ ἐγχειροῦντι δύσκλεια ἦν.
2:121Γερμανῶν δὲ πολυανθρωποτάτην μοῖραν — ἀμπωτίζει δὲ παρ’ αὐτοῖς ἡ θάλαττα — λόγος ἔχει κατὰ τὰς ἐκεῖ παλιρροίας ἐπιδρομὰς ὠθουμένους μετὰ σπουδῆς, ἐπανατεινομένους γυμνὰ τὰ ξίφη, θέοντας ὡς στῖφος πολεμίων τὸ κυματούμενον πέλαγος ὑπαντιάζειν·
2:122οὓς ἄξιον μισεῖν μέν, ὅτι ἐναντία ὅπλα δι’ ἀθεότητα κατὰ τῶν ἀδουλώτων τῆς φύσεως αἱρεῖσθαι τολμῶσι μερῶν, χλευάζειν δέ, ὅτι ἀδυνάτοις ἐγχειροῦσιν ὡς δυνατοῖς, νομίζοντες ὡς ζῷον καὶ ὕδωρ κεντεῖσθαι, τιτρώσκεσθαι, κτείνεσθαι δύνασθαι, καὶ πάλιν ἀλγεῖν, δεδιέναι, φόβῳ τῶν ἐπιόντων ἀποδιδράσκειν καὶ ὅσα ψυχῆς πάθη κατά τε ἡδονὰς καὶ ἀλγηδόνας
2:123ἀναδέχεσθαι. χθὲς δ’ οὐ πρῴην ἄνδρα τινὰ οἶδα τῶν ἡγεμονικῶν, ὅς, ἐπειδὴ τὴν προστασίαν καὶ ἐπιμέλειαν εἶχεν Αἰγύπτου, τὰ πάτρια κινεῖν ἡμῶν διενοήθη καὶ διαφερόντως τὸν ἁγιώτατον καὶ φρικωδέστατον περὶ τῆς ἑβδόμης ὑπάρχοντα νόμον καταλύειν καὶ ὑπηρετεῖν ἠνάγκαζεν αὐτῷ καὶ τὰ ἄλλα ποιεῖν παρὰ τὸ καθεστὼς ἔθος, νομίζων ἀρχὴν ἔσεσθαι καὶ τῆς περὶ τὰ ἄλλα ἐκδιαιτήσεως καὶ τῆς τῶν ὅλων παραβάσεως, εἰ τὸ ἐπὶ τῇ ἑβδόμῃ πάτριον ἀνελεῖν δυνηθείη.
2:124καὶ μήθ’ οὓς ἐβιάζετο ὁρῶν εἴκοντας τοῖς ἐπιτάγμασι μήτε τὴν ἄλλην πληθὺν ἠρεμοῦσαν, ἀλλὰ βαρέως καὶ τραχέως φέρουσαν τὸ πρᾶγμα καὶ ὡς ἐπ’ ἀνδραποδισμῷ καὶ πορθήσει καὶ κατασκαφῇ πατρίδος πενθοῦντάς τε καὶ κατηφοῦντας, ἠξίου λόγῳ διδάσκειν παρανομεῖν, φάσκων·
2:125εἰ πολεμίων ἔφοδος αἰφνίδιον γένοιτο ἢ κατακλυσμοῦ φορὰ τοῦ ποταμοῦ ταῖς πλημμύραις παραρρήξαντος τὸ χῶμα ἢ ῥιπὴ πυρὸς ἢ κεραυνία φλὸξ ἢ λιμὸς ἢ λοιμὸς ἢ σεισμὸς ἢ ὅσα ἄλλα κακὰ χειροποίητα καὶ θεήλατα, μεθ’ ἡσυχίας πάσης οἴκοι διατρίψετε;
2:126ἢ μετὰ τοῦ συνήθους σχήματος προελεύσεσθε, τὴν μὲν δεξιὰν εἴσω χεῖρα συναγαγόντες, τὴν δὲ ἑτέραν ὑπὸ τῆς ἀμπεχόνης παρὰ ταῖς λαγόσι πήξαντες, ἵνα μηδ’ ἄκοντές τι τῶν εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι παράσχησθε;
2:127καὶ καθεδεῖσθε ἐν τοῖς συναγωγίοις ὑμῶν, τὸν εἰωθότα θίασον ἀγείροντες καὶ ἀσφαλῶς τὰς ἱερὰς βίβλους ἀναγινώσκοντες κἂν εἴ τι μὴ τρανὲς εἴη διαπτύσσοντες καὶ τῇ πατρίῳ φιλοσοφίᾳ διὰ μακρηγορίας ἐνευκαιροῦντές τε καὶ ἐνσχολάζοντες;
2:128ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἀποσεισάμενοι πάντα ταῦτα πρὸς τὴν ἑαυτῶν καὶ γονέων καὶ τέκνων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων οἰκειοτάτων καὶ φιλτάτων σωμάτων, εἰ δὲ δεῖ τἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν, καὶ κτημάτων καὶ χρημάτων, ὡς μηδὲ ταῦτα ἀφανισθείη, βοήθειαν ἀποδύσεσθε.
2:129καὶ μὴν οὗτος αὐτὸς ἐγὼ τὰ λεχθέντα, ἔφη, πάντα εἰμί, τυφώς, πόλεμος, κατακλυσμός, κεραυνός, λιμηρὰ καὶ λοιμώδης νόσος, ὁ τινάττων καὶ κυκῶν τὰ παγίως ἑστῶτα σεισμός, εἱμαρμένης ἀνάγκης οὐκ ὄνομα, ἀλλ’ ἐμφανὴς ἐγγὺς ἑστῶσα δύναμις.
2:130τί οὖν τὸν ταῦτα λέγοντα ἢ διανοούμενον αὐτὸ μόνον εἶναι φῶμεν; ἆρ’ οὐκ ἐκτόπιον; ὑπερωκεάνιον μὲν οὖν ἢ μετακόσμιόν τι καινὸν κακόν, εἴ γε τῷ πάντα μακαρίῳ ὁ πάντα βαρυδαίμων ἑαυτὸν ἐξομοιοῦν ἐτόλμησεν.
2:131ὑπερθεῖτ’ ἂν οὗτος ἥλιον καὶ σελήνην καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἀστέρας βλασφημεῖν, ὁπότε τι τῶν ἐλπισθέντων κατὰ τὰς ἐτησίους ὥρας ἢ μὴ συνόλως ἢ μὴ ῥᾳδίως ἀποβαίνοι, φλογμὸν μὲν θέρους, κρυμὸν δὲ [καὶ] χειμῶνος βαρὺν κατασκήπτοντος, ἔαρος δὲ καὶ μετοπώρου, τοῦ μὲν πρὸς εὐκαρπίαν ἐστειρωμένου, τοῦ δὲ πρὸς νοσημάτων γενέσεις εὐτοκίᾳ χρωμένου;
2:132πάντα μὲν οὖν ἀνασείων κάλων ἀχαλίνου στόματος καὶ κακηγόρου γλώττης, ὥσπερ τὸν εἰωθότα δασμὸν οὐκ ἐνεγκόντας τοὺς ἀστέρας αἰτιάσεται, τιμᾶσθαι μονονοὺ καὶ προσκυνεῖσθαι δικαιῶν ὑπὸ τῶν οὐρανίων τἀπίγεια καὶ περιττότερον ἑαυτόν, ὅσῳ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἄνθρωπος ὢν διενηνοχέναι ζῴων
2:133δοκεῖ. τοιοῦτοι μὲν οἱ κορυφαῖοι τῆς κενῆς ἡμῖν δόξης γράφονται, τοὺς δὲ χορευτὰς ἐν μέρει κατ’ αὐτοὺς ἴδωμεν. οὗτοι μὲν ἐπιβουλεύουσιν ἀεὶ τοῖς ἀσκηταῖς ἀρετῆς· οὓς ὅταν ἴδωσι σπουδάζοντας τὸν αὐτῶν βίον ἀληθείᾳ ἀδόλῳ φαιδρύνειν καὶ ὡς πρὸς σεληνιακὸν ἢ τὸ ἀφ’ ἡλίου καθαρὸν φέγγος αὐγάζειν, ἀπατῶντες ἢ βιαζόμενοι κωλύουσιν, εἰς τὸν ἀσεβῶν ἀνήλιον χῶρον εἰσελαύνοντες, ὃν ἐπέχουσι νὺξ βαθεῖα καὶ σκότος ἀτελεύτητον καὶ εἰδώλων καὶ φασμάτων καὶ ὀνειράτων ἔθνη μυρία, κἀκεῖ καταδύσαντες προσκυνεῖν ὡς δεσπότας ἀναγκάζουσι.
2:134τὸν μὲν γὰρ φρονήσεως ἀσκητὴν ὑπολαμβάνομεν ἥλιον, ἐπειδήπερ ὁ μὲν τοῖς σώμασιν, ὁ δὲ τοῖς κατὰ ψυχὴν πράγμασιν ἐμπαρέχει φῶς, τὴν δὲ παιδείαν, ᾗ κέχρηται, σελήνην — ἐν νυκτὶ γὰρ ἡ ἑκατέρας εἱλικρινεστάτη καὶ ὠφελιμωτάτη χρῆσίς ἐστιν —, ἀδελφοὺς δὲ τοὺς παιδείας καὶ ἀσκητικῆς ψυχῆς ὡς ἂν ἐγγόνους ἀστείους λόγους, οὓς πάντας ὀρθὴν ἀτραπὸν εὐθύνοντας τοῦ βίου παλαίσμασι πολυτρόποις καὶ πολυμηχάνοις αὐχενίζοντες ἐκτραχηλίζειν καὶ καταρράττειν ὑποσκελίζοντες οἱ μηδὲν ὑγιὲς μήτε λέγειν μήτε φρονεῖν ἐγνωκότες ἀξιοῦσι.
2:135διὸ καὶ ἐπιτιμᾷ τῷ τοιούτῳ τιθασῶς ὁὁ πατήρ, οὐκ Ἰακώβ, ἀλλ’ ὁὁ καὶ τούτου πρεσβύτερος ὀρθὸς λόγος φάσκων· „τί τὸ ἐνύπνιον τοῦτο ἐνυπνιάσθης“ (Gen. 37, 10) ;
2:136ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐνύπνιον εἶδες; ἢ ὑπέλαβες, ὅτι τὰ φύσει ἐλεύθερα ἀνθρωπείων ἀνάγκῃ δοῦλα ἔσται καὶ ὑπήκοα τὰ ἄρχοντα καί, τὸ ἔτι παραδοξότερον, οὐκ ἄλλων ὑπήκοα ἀλλὰ τῶν ἀρχομένων, οὐδ’ ἑτέρων δοῦλα ἀλλὰ τῶν δουλευόντων; εἰ μὴ ἄρα κράτει θεοῦ τοῦ μόνου πάντα δυνατοῦ, ᾧ καὶ τὰ ἀκίνητα κινεῖν καὶ τὰ φορούμενα θέμις ἱδρύσασθαι, μεταβολὴ τῶν καθεστώτων γένοιτο πρὸς τἀναντία.
2:137ἐπεὶ τίνα ἕξει λόγον τὸ ὀργίζεσθαι καὶ ἐπιτιμᾶν τῷ τὴν καθ’ ὕπνον φαντασίαν ἰδόντι; μὴ γὰρ ἑκὼν εἶδον αὐτήν; ἐρεῖ, τί μοι τὰ τῶν ἐκ προνοίας ἠδικηκότων ἐπάγεις ἐγκλήματα; τὸ προσπεσὸν ἔξωθεν καὶ πλῆξάν μου τὴν διάνοιαν αἰφνίδιον ἄκοντος διηγησάμην.
2:138ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὐκ ἔστι περὶ ὀνείρατος ὁ παρὼν λόγος, ἀλλὰ περὶ πραγμάτων ἐοικότων ἐνυπνίοις· ἃ τοῖς μὴ λίαν κεκαθαρμένοις μεγάλα καὶ λαμπρὰ καὶ περιμάχητα εἶναι δοκεῖ, μικρὰ ὄντα καὶ ἀμυδρὰ καὶ χλεύης ἐπάξια παρ’ ἀδεκάστοις ἀληθείας βραβευταῖς.
2:139Ἆρ’ οὖν, φησίν, ἐλεύσομαι μὲν ὁ ὀρθὸς λόγος, ἐγώ, ἀφίξεται δὲ καὶ ἡ τοῦ φιλομαθοῦς θιάσου [ψυχὴ] μήτηρ ὁμοῦ καὶ τροφός, ἀρετῶσα παιδεία, συντενοῦσι δὲ καὶ οἱ ἀμφοτέρων ἡμῶν ἔγγονοι καὶ στάντες ἀντικρὺς οὕτω κατὰ στοῖχον ἐν κόσμῳ τὰς χεῖρας ἐξάραντες προσευξώμεθα τῦφον πρότερον ἀφέντες;
2:140εἶτα καταβαλόντες ἑαυτοὺς εἰς τὸ ἔδαφος ποτνιᾶσθαι καὶ προσκυνεῖν ἐπιχειρήσωμεν; ἀλλὰ μὴ ἐπιλάμψαι ποτὲ τούτοις γινομένοις ἥλιος, ἐπεὶ βαθὺ μὲν σκότος κακοῖς, τηλαυγὲς δὲ φῶς ἀγαθοῖς ἐφαρμόζει. τί δ’ ἂν γένοιτο μεῖζον κακὸν ἢ τὸν πλαστὸν καὶ φένακα τῦφον ἀντὶ τῆς ἀπλάστου καὶ ἀψευδοῦς ἀτυφίας ἐπαινεῖσθαί τε καὶ θαυμάζεσθαι;
2:141παγκάλως δὲ προσδιέσταλται τὸ "διετήρησεν ὁ πατὴρ τὸ ῥῆμα“ (Gen. 37,11)· ψυχῆς γὰρ οὐ νεωτέρας οὐδὲ ἀγόνου καὶ ἐστειρωμένης, ἀλλὰ τῷ ὄντι πρεσβυτέρας καὶ γεννᾶν ἐπισταμένης ἔργον ἐστὶ συζῆν εὐλαβείᾳ καὶ μηδενὸς καταφρονεῖν τὸ παράπαν, ἀλλὰ τὸ ἄδραστον καὶ ἀνίκητον τοῦ θεοῦ κράτος κατεπτηχέναι καὶ περιαθρεῖν ἐν κύκλῳ, τί ἄρα ἀποβήσεται τὸ τέλος αὐτῇ.
2:142διὰ τοῦτο καὶ τὴν Μωυσέως ἀδελφὴν — ἐλπὶς δὲ παρ’ ἡμῖν τοῖς ἀλληγορικοῖς ὀνομάζεται — φασὶν ἀποσκοπεῖν μακρόθεν (Exod. 2, 4) οἱ χρησμοί, πρὸς τὸ τοῦ βίου δήπου τέλος ἐμβλέπουσαν, ἵνα αἴσιον ἀπαντήσῃ, τοῦ τελεσφόρου καταπέμψαντος αὐτὸ ἄνωθεν ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ.
2:143πολλοὶ γὰρ πολλάκις ἄπλωτα πελάγη διαβαλόντες καὶ μακρὸν πλοῦν οὐρίοις πνεύμασιν ἀκίνδυνοι παραπεμφθέντες ἐν αὐτοῖς λιμέσιν ἐξαίφνης ἐναυάγησαν, μέλλοντες ἤδη προσορμίζεσθαι.
2:144μυρίοι δὲ καὶ βαρεῖς καὶ πολυετεῖς πολέμους ἀνὰ κράτος ἑλόντες καὶ ἄτρωτοι διατελέσαντες, ὡς μηδ’ ἐπιφάνειαν ἄκραν νυχθῆναι, ἀλλ’ ὥσπερ ἐκ πανηγύρεως κοινοδήμου καὶ δημοτελοῦς ἑορτῆς τελεῖν * * * ὁλοκλήροις καὶ παντελέσι, μεθ’ ἱλαρᾶς ἐπιστρέψαντες εὐθυμίας ἐν ταῖς ἰδίαις ὑφ’ ὧν ἥκιστ’ ἐχρῆν ἐπεβουλεύθησαν οἰκίαις, τὸ λεγόμενον τοῦτο, „βόες ἐπὶ φάτνῃ“ σφαγέντες.
Book 2, §§120–144
2:120For he aimed his arrows at the most excellent of the heavenly bodies, the sun, the ruler of the day, as if he had not himself been wounded by the invisible dart of insanity, not only because of his desiring things which were impossible, but such as were also most impious, either of which is a great disgrace to him who attempts them.
2:121It is related, also, that the very populous nation of the Germans, and theirs is a country where the sea is subject to the ebb and flow of the tide, ran down to the reflux which occurs in their country with great impetuosity, and drawing their naked swords charged and encountered the billowy sea as if it were a phalanx of enemies:
2:122and these men deserve to be hated because they dare impiously to take up the arms of enemies against the free and invincible parts of nature; but they deserve also to be ridiculed for attempting what is impossible, as if they thought it practicable to wound the water as though it were a living animal, or to stab it and kill it. And again, one should grieve at the sight of such men, and fear, and flee out of fear at their attacks, and submit to all the affections of the soul which are conversant with pleasures and pains.
2:123Moreover, it is only a very short time ago that I knew a man of very high rank, one who was prefect and governor of Egypt, who, after he had taken it into his head to change our national institutions and customs, and in an extraordinary manner to abrogate that most holy law guarded by such fearful penalties, which relates to the seventh day, and was compelling us to obey him, and to do other things contrary to our established custom, thinking that that would be the beginning of our departure from the other laws, and of our violation of all our national customs, if he were once able to destroy our hereditary and customary observance of the seventh day.
2:124And as he saw that those to whom he offered violence did not yield to his injunctions, and that the rest of our people was not disposed to submit in tranquillity, but was indignant and furious at the business, and was mourning and dispirited as if at the enslaving, and overthrow, and utter destruction of their country; he thought fit to endeavour by a speech to persuade them to transgress, saying:
2:125"If an invasion of enemies were to come upon you on a sudden, or the violence of a deluge, from the river having broken down all its barriers by an inundation, or any terrible fire, or a thunderbolt, or famine, or pestilence, or an earthquake, or any other evil, whether caused by men or inflicted by God, would you still remain quiet and unmoved at home?
2:126And would you still go on in your habitual fashion, keeping your right hand back, and holding the other under your garments close to your sides, in order that you might not, even without meaning it, do anything to contribute to your own preservation?
2:127And would you still sit down in your synagogues, collecting your ordinary assemblies, and reading your sacred volumes in security, and explaining whatever is not quite clear, and devoting all your time and leisure with long discussions to the philosophy of your ancestors?
2:128Nay: rather shaking off all these ideas, you would gird yourselves up for the preservation of yourselves, and of your parents, and of your children, and, if one must tell the plain truth, of your possessions and treasures, to save them from being utterly destroyed.
2:129And, indeed, I myself, am," said he, "all the evils which I have just enumerated: I am a whirlwind, I am war, and deluge, and thunderbolt, and the calamity of famine, and the misery of pestilence, and an earthquake which shakes and overthrows what stood firm before, not being merely the name of a necessity of fate, but actual, visible power, standing close to you."
2:130What then can we say that a man who says, or who merely thinks such things as these, is? Is he not an evil of an extraordinary nature? He surely must be some foreign calamity, brought from over the sea, or from some other world, since he, a man in every respect miserable, has dared to compare himself to the all-blessed God.
2:131We must likewise add, that he is daring here to utter blasphemies against the sun, and the moon, and the rest of the stars, whenever anything which had been looked for according to the seasons of the year, either does not happen at all, or is brought about with difficulty; if, for instance, the summer causes too much heat, or the winter too excessive a cold, or if the spring or autumn were unseasonable, so that the one were to become barren and unfruitful, and the other to be prolific only in diseases.
2:132Therefore, giving all imaginable license to an unbridled mouth and abusive tongue, such a man will reproach the stars as not bringing their customary tribute, all but claiming for the things of earth the reverence and adoration of the heavenly bodies, and for himself above them all, in proportion as he, as being a man, looks upon himself as superior to the other animals.
2:133Such men then are classed by us as the very teachers of vain opinion. Let us now in turn look at their followers by themselves. These men are always laying plots against the practisers of virtue, and when they see them labouring to make their own life pure with guileless truth, and to exhibit it, as one may say, to the light of the moon, or of the sun, as able to stand inspection, they endeavour by deceit, or even by open violence, to hinder them, trying to drive them into the sunless country of impious men, which is occupied by deep night, and endless darkness, and ten thousand tribes of images, and appearances, and dreams, and then, having thrust them down thither, they compel them to fall down and worship them as masters.
2:134For we look upon the practiser of virtue as the sun, since the one gives light to our bodies, and the other to the things which belong to the soul: and the education which such a man uses we look upon as the moon, for the use of each is most pure and most useful in the night; and the brethren are those virtuous reasonings which are the offspring of instruction, and of a soul devoted to the practise of virtue, all of which make straight the right path of life, and which they, therefore, by all kinds of wary and cunning wrestlings, seek to overcome, and to trip up, and overthrow, and break the neck of, because they have determined neither to think nor to say anything sound themselves.
2:135For this reason his father rebukes this intractable youth (I do not mean Jacob, but right reason, which is older even than he), saying,
2:136"What is this dream which thou hast dreamt?" but thou hast not seen any dream at all; hast thou fancied that things which are free by nature are to be of necessity slaves to human things, and that things which are rulers are to become subjects? and, what is more paradoxical still, subject, not to anything else but to the very things which they govern? and to be the slaves of no other things except those very things which are their own slaves? unless indeed a change of all established things to their direct contraries is to take place, by the power of God, who is able to effect all things, and to move what is immovable, and to fix what is in a constant state of agitation.
2:137Since on what principle can you be angry with or reproach a man who sees a vision in his sleep? For he will say, I did not see it intentionally, why do you bring accusations against me, for errors which I have not committed from any deliberate purpose? I have related to you what fell upon me and made an impression on my mind suddenly, and without my desiring it.
2:138But the present question is not about dreams, but about things which resemble dreams; which, to those whose minds are not highly purified appear great, and beautiful, and desirable things; while they are, in reality, trifling, and obscure, and deserving of ridicule, in the eyes of honest judges of the truth.
2:139Shall I then, says he, I, that is to say, right reason, come to you? And shall the soul, which is both the mother and nurse of the company devoted to learning virtuous instruction, also come to thee?
2:140And are the offspring of us too to come likewise? And are we all to stand in a row, laying aside all our former dignity, and holding up our hands and praying to thee? And are we then to prostrate ourselves on the ground, and endeavour to propitiate and adore thee? But may the sun never shine upon such transactions, since deep darkness is suited to evil deeds, and brilliant light to good deeds. And what could be a greater evil than for pride, that deceiver and beguiler, to be praised and admired, instead of sincere and honest simplicity?
2:141And it is with great propriety that the statement is added, "And his father took notice of his words." For it is the occupation of a soul which is not young, nor barren, nor wholly unfruitful, but rather of one which is really older and able to beget offspring, to cohabit with prudent caution, and to despise and overlook nothing whatever, but to have a reverential fear of the power of God, from which we cannot escape, and which we cannot overcome; and to look all around to see what its very end shall be.
2:142For this reason they say, that the sister of Moses also (and she is called Hope by us, when speaking in a figurative manner) was contemplated at a distance by the sacred scriptures, inasmuch as she kept her eyes fixed on the end of life, hoping that some good fortune might befall her, sent by the Giver of all good from above, from heaven;
2:143for it has often happened that many persons, after having taken long voyages, and having sailed over a great expanse of sea with a fair wind, and without any danger, have suddenly been shipwrecked in the harbour itself, when they have been on the very point of casting anchor;
2:144and many persons too, who have successfully come to the end of formidable wars of long duration, and have come off unwounded so as never to have received even a scratch on the surface of the skin, but to have escaped whole and entire as if they had only been at some popular assembly or national festival, having returned home with joy and cheerfulness, have been plotted against in their houses by those who, of all the world, least ought to have done so; being, as the proverb says, like oxen slain in their stall.
Book 2, §§145–169
2:145ὥσπερ δὴ ταῦτα ἀπροσδόκητοι καὶ ἀτέκμαρτοι συντυχίαι κατασκήπτειν φιλοῦσιν, οὕτω καὶ τὰς περὶ ψυχὴν δυνάμεις ἀντωθοῦσι πρὸς τἀναντία καὶ ἀντιμετακλίνουσιν, ἢν οἷαί τε ὦσι, καὶ ἀνατρέψαι βιάζονται. τίς γὰρ εἰς τὸν ἀγῶνα τοῦ βίου παρελθὼν ἄπτωτος ἔμεινε;
2:146τίς δ’ οὐχ ὑπεσκελίσθη; εὐδαίμων δ’ ὁ μὴ πολλάκις. τίνι δ’ οὐκ ἐφήδρευεν ἡ τύχη, διαπνέουσα καὶ συλλεγομένη ῥώμην, ἵνα συμπλακεῖσα εὐθὺς ἐξαρπάσῃ, πρὶν φθάσαι τὸν ἀντίπαλον κονίσασθαι;
2:147οὐκ ἤδη τινὰς ἴσμεν ἐκ παίδων εἰς γῆρας ἀφιγμένους, οἳ μηδεμιᾶς ἐπῄσθοντο ταραχῆς εἴτε δι’ εὐμοιρίαν φύσεως εἴτε διὰ τὴν τῶν τρεφόντων καὶ παιδευόντων ἐπιμέλειαν εἴτε καὶ ἀμφότερα, βαθείας δ’ εἰρήνης ἀναπλησθέντας τῆς ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἣ πρὸς ἀλήθειάν ἐστιν εἰρήνη, τῆς κατὰ τὰς πόλεις ἀρχέτυπον, καὶ διὰ τοῦτ’ εὐδαίμονας νομισθέντας, ὅτι τὸν ὑπὸ τῶν παθῶν ἀναρριπιζόμενον ἐμφύλιον πόλεμον, ἀργαλεώτατον ὄντα πολέμων, οὐδ’ ὄναρ ἐπῄσθοντο, εἶτ’ ἐν αὐταῖς τοῦ βίου ταῖς δυσμαῖς ἐξοκείλαντάς τε καὶ ναυαγήσαντας ἢ περὶ γλῶτταν ἄθυρον ἢ περὶ γαστέρα ἄπληστον ἢ περὶ τὴν τῶν ὑπογαστρίων ἀκράτορα λεγνείαν;
2:148οἱ μὲν γὰρ τὸν μειρακιώδη τῶν ἀσώτων, ἄτιμον, ἀποκήρυκτον, αἰσχρὸν βίον ἐζήλωσαν „ἐπὶ γήραος οὐδῷ“, οἱ δὲ τὸν πανοῦργον καὶ συκοφάντην καὶ ῥᾳδιουργόν, ἀπαρχόμενοι φιλοπραγμοσύνης, ὅτε εἰκὸς ἦν ἤδη καὶ παλαιὰν οὖσαν καταλῦσαι.
2:149διὸ χρὴ τὸν θεὸν ποτνιᾶσθαι καὶ λιπαρῶς ἱκετεύειν, ὅπως τὸ ἐπίκηρον ἡμῶν γένος μὴ παρέλθῃ, κελεύσῃ δὲ διαιωνίζειν αὐτοῦ τὸν σωτήριον ἔλεον· χαλεπὸν γὰρ εἰρήνης ἀκράτου γευσαμένους κωλυθῆναι κορεσθῆναι.
2:150ἀλλὰ φέρε, δίψης κουφότερόν ἐστι κακὸν ὁ λιμὸς οὗτος, ἔρωτα καὶ πόθον ἔχων παρηγοροῦντας. ὅταν δὲ ἀφ’ ἑτέρας πηγῆς, ἧς θολερὸν καὶ νοσερὸν τὸ νᾶμα, διὰ τὸν τοῦ πιεῖν ἵμερον ἐμφορεῖσθαι δέῃ, τότε ἀνάγκη γλυκυπίκρου πληρουμένους ἡδονῆς ἐν ἀβιώτῳ βίῳ διαζῆν, τοῖς βλαβεροῖς ὡς ὠφελίμοις ἐπιτρέχοντας ἀγνοίᾳ τοῦ συμφέροντος.
2:151ἡ δὲ τῶν κακῶν ἀνιαροτάτη φορὰ γίνεται τούτων, ἐπειδὰν αἱ ἄλογοι δυνάμεις τῆς ψυχῆς ἐπιθέμεναι ταῖς τοῦ λογισμοῦ κρατήσωσιν.
2:152ἕως μὲν γὰρ ἢ βουκόλια βουκόλοις ἢ ποιμέσι ποίμνια ἢ αἰπόλοις αἰπόλια πειθαρχεῖ, τὰ περὶ τὰς ἀγέλας κατορθοῦται· ἐπειδὰν δὲ ἀσθενέστεροι τῶν θρεμμάτων οἱ ἐπιστατοῦντες ἀγελάρχαι γίνωνται, πλημμελεῖται τὰ πάντα καὶ συμβαίνει ἀταξία μὲν ἐκ τάξεως, ἀκοσμία δ’ ἐξ εὐκοσμίας, ταραχὴ δ’ ἐξ εὐσταθείας καὶ σύγχυσις ἐκ διακρίσεως, ἅτε μηδεμιᾶς ἔτι νομίμου καθεστώσης ἐπιστασίας· εἰ γὰρ ἦν, ἤδη καθῄρητο.
2:153τί οὖν; οὐκ οἰόμεθα καὶ ἐν ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς θρεμμάτων μὲν ἀγέλην εἶναι, παρόσον ἀποτέτμηται ψυχῆς τὸ ἄλογον στῖφος, ἀγελάρχην δὲ τὸν ἡγεμόνα νοῦν; ἀλλ’ ἕως μὲν ἔρρωταί τε καὶ ἱκανὸς ἀγελαρχεῖν ἐστιν, ἐνδίκως ἅπαντα καὶ συμφερόντως ἐπιτελεῖται.
2:154ὅταν δὲ ἀσθένειά τις ἐπιγένηται τῷ βασιλεῖ, συγκάμνειν ἀνάγκη καὶ τὸ ὑπήκοον· καὶ ὅτε μάλιστα ἠλευθερῶσθαι δοκεῖ, τότε μάλιστα γίνεται ἑτοιμότατον ἆθλον κείμενον τοῖς βουλομένοις αὐτὸ μόνον κονίσασθαι. πέφυκε γὰρ ἀναρχία μὲν ἐπίβουλον, ἀρχὴ δ’ εἶναι σωτήριον, καὶ μάλισθ’ ᾗ νόμος καὶ δίκη τετίμηται· αὕτη δ’ ἐστὶν ἡ σὺν λόγῳ.
2:155Τὰ μὲν δὴ τῆς κενῆς δόξης ὀνείρατα ὧδε ἠκριβώσθω· τὰ δὲ τῆς γαστριμαργίας εἴδη πόσις τε καὶ βρῶσις, ἀλλὰ τῇ μὲν οὐ ποικίλων, τῇ δὲ μυρίων ὅσων ἡδυσμάτων καὶ παραρτυμάτων χρεία. ταῦτα μέντοι δυσὶ φροντισταῖς ἐπανατίθεται, τὰ μὲν τῆς περιέργου πόσεως ἀρχιοινοχόῳ, τὰ δὲ τῆς ἀναγκαιοτέρας ἐδωδῆς ἀρχισιτοποιῷ. σφόδρα δ’ ἐξητασμένως μιᾷ νυκτὶ φαντασιούμενοι τοὺς ὀνείρους εἰσάγονται·
2:156πρὸς γὰρ τὴν αὐτὴν χρείαν σπεύδουσιν ἀμφότεροι, τροφὴν οὐχ ἁπλῆν, ἀλλὰ τὴν μεθ’ ἡδονῆς καὶ τέρψεως εὐτρεπιζόμενοι. καὶ ἑκάτερος μὲν περὶ τροφῆς ἥμισυ πονεῖται, ἀμφότεροι δὲ περὶ πᾶσαν.
2:157ἔστι δὲ καὶ θάτερον μέρος ὁλκὸν θατέρου· καὶ γὰρ οἱ φαγόντες εὐθὺς ὀρέγονται ποτοῦ καὶ αὐτίκα ἐδωδῆς οἱ πιόντες· ὥστε οὐχ ἥκιστα καὶ διὰ τοῦτο χρόνον τὸν αὐτὸν τῆς φαντασίας ἀμφοτέροις ἀναγεγράφθαι.
2:158ὁ μὲν οὖν ἀρχιοινοχόος οἰνοφλυγίαν, ὁ δὲ ἀρχισιτοποιὸς λαιμαργίαν ἔλαχε. φαντασιοῦται δὲ ἑκάτερος τὰ οἰκεῖα, ὁ μὲν οἶνον καὶ τὸ γεννητικὸν οἴνου φυτόν, ἄμπελον, ὁ δ’ ἐπὶ κανῶν διακειμένους ἐκκεκαθαρμένους ἄρτους καὶ κανηφοροῦντα ἑαυτόν (Gen. 40, 16. 17).
2:159ἁρμόττον δὲ ἂν εἴη πρότερον τὸ πρότερον ἐξετάζειν ὄναρ, ἔστι δὲ τοιόνδε· „ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ μου ἦν ἄμπελος ἐναντίον μου· ἐν δὲ τῇ ἀμπέλῳ τρεῖς πυθμένες καὶ αὐτὴ θάλλουσα ἀνενηνοχυῖα βλαστούς· πέπειροι βότρυες σταφυλῆς. καὶ τὸ ποτήριον Φαραὼ ἐν τῇ χειρί μου· καὶ ἔλαβον τὴν σταφυλὴν καὶ ἐξέθλιψα αὐτὴν εἰς τὸ ποτήριον, καὶ ἔδωκα τὸ ποτήριον εἰς τὰς χεῖρας Φαραώ“ (Gen. 40, 9 — 11).
2:160θαυμασίως γε προανεφθέγξατο καὶ ἀψευδῶς ἔχει τὸ „ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ μου.“ τῷ γὰρ ὄντι ὁ μὴ τὴν δι’ οἴνου μέθην μᾶλλον ἢ τὴν δι’ ἀφροσύνης ἐπιτηδεύων, ὀρθότητι καὶ ἐγρηγόρσει δυσχεραίνων, ὥσπερ οἱ κοιμώμενοι καταβέβληται καὶ παρεῖται καὶ καταμέμυκε τὰ τῆς ψυχῆς ὄμματα, οὐδὲν οὔθ’ ὁρᾶν οὔτ’ ἀκούειν τῶν θέας καὶ ἀκοῆς ἀξίων οἷός τε ὤν·
2:161ἡττημένος δὲ τυφλὴν καὶ ἀχειραγώγητον, οὐχ ὁδόν, ἀλλ’ ἀνοδίαν τοῦ βίου διεξέρχεται, βάτοις καὶ τριβόλοις περιπειρόμενος, ἔστι δ’ ὅτε καὶ κατὰ κρημνῶν κυλιόμενος καὶ ἄλλοις ἐπιφερόμενος, ὡς ἐκείνους τε καὶ ἑαυτὸν οἰκτρῶς διαφθείρειν.
2:162ὁ δὲ βαθὺς καὶ διωλύγιος ὕπνος, ᾧ πᾶς κατέχεται φαῦλος, τὰς μὲν ἀληθεῖς καταλήψεις ἀφαιρεῖται, ψευδῶν δὲ εἰδώλων καὶ ἀβεβαίων φαντασμάτων ἀναπίμπλησι τὴν διάνοιαν, τὰ ὑπαίτια ὡς ἑπαινετὰ ἀναπείθων ἀποδέχεσθαι. καὶ γὰρ νυνὶ λύπην ὡς χαρὰν ὀνειροπολεῖ καὶ οὐκ αἰσθάνεται, ὅτι τὸ ἀφροσύνης καὶ τοῦ παραπαίειν * * * φυτόν, ἄμπελον, ὁρᾷ.
2:163„ἦν“ γάρ φησιν „ἄμπελος ἐναντίον μου“ (Gen. 40, 9), τὸ ποθούμενον τῷ ποθοῦντι, κακία κακῷ· ἣν καθ’ ἑαυτῶν λελήθαμεν οἱ ἀνόητοι γεωργοῦντες, ἧς τὸν καρπὸν ἐσθίομέν τε καὶ πίνομεν εἰς ἑκάτερον τροφῆς κατατάττοντες εἶδος, ἧς ὡς ἔοικεν οὐκ ἐφ’ ἡμισείᾳ τῇ βλάβῃ ἀλλ’ ἀρτίῳ καὶ ὁλοκλήρῳ καὶ παντελεῖ μεταποιούμεθα.
2:164Προσήκει δὲ μὴ ἀγνοεῖν, ὅτι τὸ ἀμπέλιον μέθυσμα τοὺς χρησομένους ἅπαντας οὐχ ὁμοίως, ἀλλὰ πολλάκις ἐναντίως διατίθησιν, ὡς τοὺς μὲν ἀμείνους, τοὺς δὲ χείρους ἑαυτῶν ἐξετάζεσθαι.
2:165τῶν μὲν γὰρ τὸ σύννουν καὶ σκυθρωπὸν ἐπανῆκε καὶ τὰς φροντίδας ἐχάλασεν ὀργάς τε καὶ λύπας ἐπράυνε τά τε ἤθη πρὸς τὸ ἐπιεικὲς ἐπαιδαγώγησε καὶ τὰς ψυχὰς ἑαυταῖς ἵλεως ἐποίησε· τῶν δὲ ἔμπαλιν τοὺς θυμοὺς ἐπήλειψε καὶ τὰς ὀδύνας ἐπέσφιγξε καὶ τοὺς ἔρωτας ἐκίνησε καὶ τὰς ἀγροικίας ἀνήγειρεν, ἄκλειστον στόμα καὶ γλῶτταν ἀχαλίνωτον καὶ αἰσθήσεις ἀθύρους καὶ λελυττηκότα πάθη κἀξηγριωμένον καὶ ἐπτοημένον πρὸς πάντα νοῦν ἀποτελοῦν·
2:166ὡς δοκεῖν τὴν μὲν τῶν προτέρων κατάστασιν ἢ τῇ κατὰ τὸν ἀέρα νηνέμῳ αἰθρίᾳ ἢ τῇ κατὰ θάλατταν ἀκύμονι γαλήνῃ ἢ τῇ κατὰ τὰς πόλεις εἰρηνικωτάτῃ εὐσταθείᾳ ἐοικέναι, τὴν δὲ τῶν ὑστέρων ἢ βιαίῳ καὶ συντόνῳ πνεύματι ἢ χειμαίνοντι καὶ κυματουμένῳ πελάγει ἢ στάσει, ἀσπόνδου καὶ ἀκηρύκτου πολέμου δυσωνυμωτέρᾳ ταραχῇ.
2:167δυεῖν γοῦν συμποσίων τὸ μὲν πέπλησται γέλωτος, παιδιᾶς, ἐπαγγελλομένων, ἀγαθὰ ἐλπιζόντων, χαριζομένων, εὐθυμίας, εὐφημίας, ἱλαρότητος, εὐφροσύνης, ἀδείας·
2:168τὸ δὲ συννοίας, κατηφείας, προσκρουσμάτων, λοιδοριῶν, τραυμάτων, βριμουμένων, ὑποβλεπομένων, ὑλακτούντων, ἀγχόντων, καταπαγκρατιαζόντων, ἀκρωτηριαζόντων ὦτα καὶ ῥῖνας καὶ ἅπερ ἂν τύχῃ τοῦ σώματος μέρη καὶ μέλη, τὴν [τοῦ] παντὸς τοῦ βίου μέθην καὶ παροινίαν ἐν ἀνιέρῳ ἀγῶνι μετὰ αἰσχρουργίας τῆς πάσης ἐπιδεικνυμένων.
2:169ἀκόλουθον οὖν ἂν εἴη λογίζεσθαι, ὅτι καὶ ἄμπελος δυεῖν σύμβολον πραγμάτων ἐστίν, ἀνοίας τε καὶ εὐφροσύνης. ἑκάτερον δέ, καίτοι μηνυόμενον ἐκ πολλῶν, ἵνα μὴ μακρηγορῶμεν, δι’ ὀλίγων ἐπιδείξομεν.
Book 2, §§145–169
2:145As these unexpected events, which no one could ever have anticipated, do frequently happen in this manner and overthrow people, so also do they often drive the powers of the soul in a contrary direction to the proper one, and drag it in an opposite way, according to their power, and compel it to change its course: for what man, who has ever descended into the arena of life, has come off without a fall?
2:146And who is there who has never been tripped up in that contest? He is happy who has not often been so. And for whom has not fortune laid snares, blowing upon him at intervals, and collecting its strength, that it may twine itself around him, and speedily carry him off before its adversary is ready for the contest?
2:147Do we not know, that some persons have come from infancy to old age who have never been sensible of any irregularity, whether it be from the happy condition of their nature, or from the care of those who brought them up and educated them, or owing to both circumstances? But then, being filled with profound peace in themselves, which is real peace, and the archetypal model of that which exists in cities, and being considered happy on that account, because they have never had a notion, not even in a dream, of the intestine war which arises from the violence of the passions, and which is the most piteous of all wars, have at last, at the very close of their lives, run on shore and made shipwreck, either through some intemperance of language or some insatiable gluttony, or some incontinent licentiousness of the parts below the belly.
2:148For some, while— "Still on the threshold of extreme old age," have admired the youthful, unhonoured, detestable, and disgraceful life of debauchees; and others have given in to the cunning, and wicked, and calumnious, and desperate way of life of others, pursuing the first fruits of a quarrelsome curiosity, when they ought rather to have discarded such habits now, even if they had been familiar to them.
2:149For which reason one ought to propitiate God, and to supplicate him perseveringly, that he will not pass by our miserable race, but that he will allow his saving mercy to be everlastingly shown towards us; for it is difficult for those who have tasted unalloyed peace to be prevented from glutting themselves with it.
2:150But, come now, this hunger is a lighter evil than thirst, inasmuch as it has love and desire for its comforters; but when, through the desire of drinking, it is necessary to to satisfy one’s self with that other fountain, the water of which is dirty and unwholesome, then it is indispensable for the drinkers, being filled with a bitter-sweet pleasure, to live an unenviable life, betaking themselves to pernicious things as though they were advantageous, from ignorance of what is really desirable.
2:151But the impetuous course of these evils is most grievous when the irrational powers of the soul attack the powers of the reason and get the better of them;
2:152for as long as the herds of oxen obey their drivers, and the flocks obey their shepherds, and the goats obey the goatherds, the herds and all belonging to them go on well; but when the herdsmen who are appointed to look after the cattle become weaker than the beasts committed to their care, then everything goes wrong, and instead of regularity there arises irregularity, and disorder in the place of order, and confusion instead of steadiness, and disturbance in the place of good arrangement, since there is no longer any lawful superintending power properly established; for if there had been such a thing, it would have been destroyed before this time.
2:153What then? Do we not think that even in ourselves there is a herd of irrational cattle, inasmuch as the irrational multitude of the soul is deprived of reason, and that the shepherd is the governing mind? But as long as that is vigorous and competent to act as the manager of the herd, everything goes on in a just, and prosperous, and advantageous manner;
2:154but when any weakness or want of power supervenes to the king, then it follows of necessity that the subjects also labour with a like infirmity; and when they most completely seem to be in enjoyment of liberty, then they are a prize, lying most entirely ready for any one who pleases to contend for it to seize; for the natural course is for anarchy to be treacherous, and for government to be salutary, especially in a state where law and justice are honoured. And this is such a state as is consistent with reason.
2:155We have now, then, spoken with sufficient accuracy about the dreams of vain opinion. Now, the different species of gluttony are conversant about drinking and eating. But the one has no need of any great variety, while the other requires a countless number of seasonings and sauces. These things, then, are referred to two managers. The matters relating to excessive drinking are referred to the chief butler, and those which belong to luxurious eating to the chief baker.
2:156Now these men are, with excessive propriety, recorded to have seen visions of dreams in one night; for they, each of them, labour to gratify the same need of their master, providing not simple food, but such as is accompanied with pleasure and extraordinary gratification; and each of them, separately, labours about half the food, but the two together are employed about the whole, and the one part draws on the other;
2:157for men, when they have eaten, immediately desire drink; and men who have drunk immediately wish to eat; so that it is in no slight degree on this account that a vision is ascribed to them both at the same time.
2:158Therefore the chief butler has the office of ministering to the appetite for wine, and the chief baker to the voracity. And each of them sees in his vision what relates to his own business: the one sees wine and the plant which engenders wine, namely the vine; the other sees white bread lying on dishes, and himself serving up the dishes.
2:159Now perhaps it may be proper first of all to examine the first dream. And it is as follows:—"In my sleep there was a vine before me; and on the vine were three branches, and it flourished and brought forth shoots, and there were on it ripe bunches of grapes. And Pharaoh’s cup was in my hand, and I took the bunch of grapes and pressed it into the cup, and I gave the cup into Pharaoh’s hand."
2:160He speaks here in an admirable manner, and the expression, "in my sleep," is quite correct. For, in real truth, he who follows not so much the inebriety which arises from wine as that which proceeds from folly, being indignant at an upright and wakeful position, like people asleep, is thrown down and relaxed, and shuts the eyes of his soul, not being able either to see or to hear anything which is worthy of being seen or of being heard.
2:161And being overthrown, he goes on a blind and guideless (I will not say path, but pathless) way through life, being pricked with thorns and briars; and sometimes too he falls down steep places, and tumbles down upon other people, so as to hurt both them and himself in a pitiable manner.
2:162But the deep and long-enduring sleep in which every wicked man is held, removes all true conceptions, and fills the mind with all kinds of false images, and unsubstantial visions, persuading it to embrace what is shameful as praiseworthy. For at one time it dreams of grief as joy, and does not perceive that it is looking at the vine, the plant of folly and error.
2:163"For," says the chief butler, "the vine was before me," the desired object was before him who desired it, wickedness was before the wicked man: which we, foolish men that we are, cultivate, without being aware that we are doing so to our own injury, the fruit of which we eat and drink, classing it under both species of food, which, as it would seem, we appropriate, not for one half the evils that affect us for the whole of our complete and entire misfortunes.
2:164But it is desirable not to be ignorant that the intoxication which proceeds from the vine does not affect all who indulge in it in a similar manner, but very often affects different people in contrary ways, so that it makes some better and others worse than they are naturally.
2:165For in the case of some men, it relaxes the sternness and moroseness of their character, and relieves them of their cares, and assuages their anger and their sorrow, and brings their dispositions into a milder mood, and makes their souls placable. But of others again, it cherishes the angry passions, and binds their pains firmly, and excites their feelings of love, and stimulates their rudeness; rendering their mouth talkative, their tongue unbridled, emancipating their external senses from all restraint, rendering their passions furious, and their whole mind violent and excited towards every object.
2:166So that the condition of the men first-mentioned appears to resemble an untroubled calm in fine weather, or a waveless tranquillity at sea, or a most peaceful and steady state of affairs in a city. But the condition of those whom I have last described, is more like a violent and unremitting gale, or a sea tossed by a storm into vast billows, or a sedition, an evil more fearful than even interminable and irreconcileable war.
2:167Therefore, of these two banquet parties, the one is filled with laughter, with men promising amusement, and hoping for good fortune, and enjoying cheerfulness, and pleasant language, and mirth, and joy, and freedom from anxiety;
2:168but the other is full of melancholy, and seriousness, and downcast looks, and offences, and reproaches, and wounds; of men gnashing their teeth, looking fiercely at one another, barking, strangling one another, contending with one another in every conceivable way, mutilating one another’s ears and noses, and whatever parts of the body they can reach, displaying the intoxication of their whole life and their drunkenness in this unholy contest, with every kind of unseemly behaviour.
2:169It would therefore be naturally consistent to consider next that the vine is the symbol of two things: of folly, and of mirth. And each of these two, though it is indicated by many circumstances, we will explain in a few words, to avoid prolixity.
Book 2, §§170–194
2:170ἡνίκα ἡμᾶς διὰ τῆς τῶν παθῶν καὶ ἀδικημάτων ἐρήμης ὁδοῦ, φιλοσοφίας, ἀγαγὼν καὶ ὥσπερ ἔμπορος ἀναβιβάσας τὸν ὀρθὸν λόγον ἔστησεν ἐπὶ σκοπῆς καὶ ἐκέλευε περιαθρεῖν τὴν ἅπασαν ἀρετῆς χώραν, εἴτε εὔγειος καὶ βαθεῖα καὶ χλοηφόρος καὶ καρποτόκος ἐστὶ καὶ ἀγαθὴ μὲν καὶ τὰ σπειρόμενα μαθήματα συναυξῆσαι, ἀγαθὴ δὲ τὰ φυτευόμενα καὶ δενδρούμενα δόγματα στελεχῶσαι, εἴτε καὶ τοὐναντίον, καὶ περὶ τῶν ὡσανεὶ πόλεων πράξεων, εἰ εὐερκέσταται καὶ ὀχυρώταται ἢ γυμναὶ καὶ ἀπημφιασμέναι οἷα κύκλων τὸ βέβαιον, καὶ περὶ οἰκητόρων, εἰ πρός τε πλῆθος καὶ πρὸς ἀλκὴν ἐπιδεδώκασιν ἢ δι’ ἀσθένειαν ὀλιγανδροῦσιν ἢ δι’ ὀλιγανδρίαν ἀσθενοῦσιν,
2:171τότε οὐ δυνηθέντες ὅλον τὸ σοφίας στέλεχος βαστάσαι κληματίδα μίαν καὶ βότρυν σταφυλῆς τεμόντες ἤραμεν χαρᾶς σαφέστατον δεῖγμα, κουφότατον ἄχθος, βλάστημα καὶ καρπὸν ὁμοῦ καλοκἀγαθίας ἐπιδειξόμενοι τοῖς διάνοιαν ὀξυδορκοῦσι τὴν εὐκληματοῦσαν καὶ βοτρυηφόρον ἄμπελον (cf.
2:172νυμ. 13). ταύτην, ἧς μοῖράν τινα λαβεῖν ἐδυνήθημεν, εὐσκόπως ἐξομοιοῦσιν εὐφροσύνῃ. μαρτυρεῖ δέ μοί τις τῶν πάλαι προφητῶν, ὃς ἐπιθειάσας εἶπεν· „ἀμπελὼν κυρίου παντοκράτορος οἶκος τοῦ Ἰσραήλ“ (Ies. 5,7).
2:173ὁ μὲν Ἰσραήλ ἐστι νοῦς θεωρητικὸς θεοῦ τε καὶ κόσμου — καὶ γὰρ ἑρμηνεύεται θεὸν ὁρῶν —, οἶκος δὲ διανοίας ὅλη ψυχή. αὕτη δ’ ἐστὶν ἀμπελὼν ἱερώτατος, τὸ θεῖον βλάστημα καρποφορῶν, ἀρετήν.
2:174οὕτω μέντοι τὸ φρονεῖν εὖ, τὸ εὐφροσύνης ἔτυμον, μέγα καὶ λαμπρόν, ὥστε φησὶ Μωυσῆς καὶ θεὸν αὐτῷ μὴ ἀπαξιῶσαι χρῆσθαι, καὶ τότε μάλιστα, ὁπότε τὸ ἀνθρώπων γένος ἐκτρέποιτο μὲν ἁμαρτήματα, ἐπικλίνοι δὲ καὶ ἐπιστρέφοι πρὸς δικαιοσύνην, ἑκουσίῳ γνώμῃ φύσεως νόμοις καὶ θεσμοῖς ἑπόμενον. „ἐπιστρέψει“
2:175γάρ φησι „κύριος ὁ θεός σου εὐφρανθῆναι ἐπὶ σὲ εἰς ἀγαθά, καθότι ηὐφράνθη ἐπὶ τοῖς πατράσι σου, ἐὰν εἰσακούσῃς τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ, φυλάσσειν πάσας τὰς ἐντολὰς καὶ τὰ δικαιώματα καὶ τὰς κρίσεις τὰς γεγραμμένας ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τοῦ νόμου τούτου“ (Deut. 30, 9. 10).
2:176τίς ἂν δύναιτο μᾶλλον ἀρετῆς ἵμερον ἢ καλοκἀγαθίας ζῆλον ἐμφῦσαι; βούλει, φησίν, ὦ διάνοια, εὐφραίνεσθαι θεόν; εὐφράνθητι αὐτὴ καὶ ἀνάλωμα μὲν μὴ εἰσενέγκῃς μηδέν — τίνος γὰρ τῶν σῶν χρεῖός ἐστιν; —, ἀλλ’ ἔμπαλιν ὅσα σοι δίδωσιν ἀγαθὰ χαίρουσα δέξαι.
2:177διδοὺς γάρ, ὅταν ἄξιοι χάριτος ὦσιν οἱ λαμβάνοντες, εὐφραίνεται· εἰ μὴ νομίζεις, ὅτι οἱ μὲν ὑπαιτίως ζῶντες παραπικραίνειν καὶ παροργίζειν ἐνδίκως λέγοιντ’ ἂν θεόν, οἱ δ’ ἐπαινετῶς οὐχὶ εὐφραίνειν.
2:178ἀλλὰ πατέρας μὲν καὶ μητέρας, τοὺς θνητοὺς γονεῖς, οὐδὲν οὕτως ὡς τέκνων εὐφραίνουσιν ἀρεταί, μυρίων ὅσων ἐνδεεῖς ὄντας· τὸν δὲ τῶν ὅλων γεννητὴν καὶ μηδενὸς ἐνδεᾶ τὸ παράπαν οὐχ ἡ καλοκἀγαθία τῶν λεγομένων;
2:179μαθοῦσα οὖν, ὦ διάνοια, ἡλίκον κακὸν μέν ἐστιν ὀργὴ θεοῦ, ἡλίκον δὲ ἀγαθὸν εὐφροσύνη θεοῦ, μηδὲν μὲν τῶν ὀργῆς ἀξίων ἐπ’ ὀλέθρῳ κίνει τῷ σεαυτῆς, μόνα δὲ δι’ ὧν εὐφρανεῖς θεὸν ἐπιτήδευε.
2:180ταῦτα δὲ εὑρήσεις οὐ μακρὰς καὶ ἀτριβεῖς διεξιὼν ὁδοὺς ἢ ἄπλωτα πελάγη περαιούμενος ἢ ἐπὶ τοὺς γῆς καὶ θαλάττης ἀπνευστὶ συντείνων ὅρους· οὐ γὰρ πορρωτάτω διῴκισται καὶ τῆς οἰκουμένης ἔξω πεφυγάδευται, ἀλλ’, ᾗ φησι Μωυσῆς (Deut. 30, 12 — 14), ἐγγὺς οὑτωσὶ τἀγαθὸν παρίδρυταί σοι καὶ συμπέφυκε, τρισὶ τοῖς ἀναγκαιοτάτοις μέρεσιν ἡρμοσμένον, καρδίᾳ, στόματι, χερσί, τὸ δ’ ἐστὶ διανοίᾳ, λόγῳ, πράξεσιν, ἐπειδὴ τὰ καλὰ καὶ φρονεῖν καὶ λέγειν καὶ ποιεῖν ἀναγκαῖον, συμπληρούμενον ἔκ τε εὐβουλίας καὶ εὐπραξίας καὶ εὐλογίας.
2:181Λέγωμεν οὖν τῷ θάτερον εἶδος γαστριμαργίας, πολυποσίαν, ἐπιτηδεύοντι ἀρχιοινοχόῳ· τί κακοπαθεῖς, ὦ ἀνόητε; δοκεῖς μὲν γὰρ τὰ ἀγωγὰ πρὸς εὐφροσύνην εὐτρεπίζεσθαι, τὸ δ’ ἀληθὲς ἀφροσύνης καὶ ἀκολασίας ἐξάπτεις φλόγα, πολλὴν αὐτῇ καὶ ἄφθονον ἐπιφέρων ὕλην. ἀλλ’, ἴσως ἂν εἴποι, μή με προπετῶς αἰτιῶ, πρίν με σκέψασθαι.
2:182οἰνοχοεῖν ἐτάχθην, οὐ μὴν δὴ σωφροσύνην καὶ εὐσέβειαν καὶ τὰς ἄλλας ἀρετὰς ἐνεσκευασμένῳ, ἀλλ’ ἀνδρὶ λαιμάργῳ καὶ ἀκρατεῖ καὶ ἀδίκῳ καὶ ἐπὶ ἀσεβείᾳ μέγα φρονοῦντι, ὃς ἐτόλμησέ ποτε εἰπεῖν· „οὐκ οἶδα τὸν κύριον“ (Exod. 5,2)· ὡς εἰκότως ἐγὼ τὰ ἐκείνῳ δι’ ἡδονῆς ἐπιτετήδευκα.
2:183μὴ θαυμάσῃς δέ, ὅτι τοῖς ἐναντίοις ὁ θεὸς καὶ ὁ ἀντίθεος νοῦς εὐφραίνεται, Φαραώ. τίς οὖν οἰνοχόος θεοῦ; ὁ σπονδοφόρος, ὁ μέγας ὄντως ἀρχιερεύς, ὃς τὰς τῶν ἀεννάων χαρίτων λαβὼν προπόσεις ἀντεκτίνει, πλῆρες ὅλον τὸ σπονδεῖον ἀκράτου μεθύσματος ἐπιχέων, ἑαυτόν. ὁρᾷς οἰνοχόων διαφορὰς τοῖς θεραπευομένοις ἀναλογούσας.
2:184διὰ τοῦτο ἐγὼ μὲν ὁ τοῦ Φαραὼ κατὰ τὰς ἀνέσεις ἐπιτεινομένου τὸν σκληραύχενα καὶ πάντων ἀκράτορα λογισμὸν εὐνοῦχός εἰμι (Gen. 40,1.2), τὰ γεννητικὰ τῆς ψυχῆς ἐκτετμημένος, μετανάστης μὲν τῆς ἀνδρωνίτιδος, φυγὰς δὲ καὶ τῆς γυναικωνίτιδος, οὔτ’ ἄρρεν οὔτε θῆλυ, οὔτε προέσθαι οὔθ’ ὑποδέξασθαι σπορὰν δυνάμενος, ἀμφίβολος, οὐδέτερος, ἀνθρωπείου παράκομμα νομίσματος, ἄμοιρος ἀθανασίας, ἣ τέκνων ἢ ἐγγόνων διαδοχαῖς εἰς ἀεὶ ζωπυρεῖται, συλλόγου καὶ ἐκκλησίας ἱερᾶς ἀπεσχοινισμένος· θλαδίαν γὰρ καὶ ἀποκεκομμένον ἄντικρυς διείρηται μὴ
2:185εἰσιέναι (Deut. 23, 1). ὁ δὲ ἀρχιερεὺς ἄμωμός ἐστιν, ὁλόκληρος, ἀνὴρ παρθένου (Lev. 21, 17. 13), τὸ παραδοξότατον, οὐδέποτε γυναικουμένης, ἀλλ’ ἔμπαλιν τὰ γυναικεῖα κατὰ τὴν πρὸς τὸν ἄνδρα ὁμιλίαν ἐκλιπούσης (Gen. 18,11), καὶ οὐκ ἀνὴρ μόνον οὗτος, ἀμιάντους καὶ παρθένους γνώμας σπείρειν ἱκανός, ἀλλὰ καὶ πατὴρ λόγων ἱερῶν·
2:186ὧν οἱ μὲν ἐπίσκοποι καὶ ἔφοροι τῶν τῆς φύσεως πραγμάτων, Ἐλεάζαρ καὶ Ἰθάμαρ (Exod. 28, 1), οἱ δὲ λειτουργοὶ θεοῦ, τὴν οὐράνιον φλόγα ἀνακαίειν καὶ ζωπυρεῖν ἐπειγόμενοι· τρίβοντες γὰρ ἀεὶ τοὺς περὶ ὁσιότητος λόγους καθάπερ ἐκ πυρείων τὸ θεοειδέστατον εὐσεβείας γένος ποιοῦσιν ἐκλάμπειν.
2:187ὁ δὲ τούτων ὑφηγητὴς ὁμοῦ καὶ πατὴρ οὐχ ἡ τυχοῦσα μοῖρα τῆς ἱερᾶς ἐκκλησίας ἐστίν, ἀλλ’ οὗ χωρὶς σύγκλητος οὐκ ἂν ἀθροισθείη ποτὲ τῶν τῆς ψυχῆς μερῶν βουλὴ τὸ παράπαν, ὁ πρόεδρος, ὁ πρύτανις, ὁ δημιουργός, ὁ καὶ χωρὶς ἄλλων μόνος ἐφ’ ἑαυτοῦ σκοπεῖν τε καὶ πράττειν ἕκαστα ἱκανός.
2:188οὗτος σὺν ἄλλοις μὲν ἐξεταζόμενος ὀλίγος, πολὺς δέ, ὅταν μονωθῇ, γίνεται, δικαστήριον ὅλον, ὅλον βουλευτήριον, ὅλος δῆμος, ὅλος ὄχλος, σύμπαν ἀνθρώπων γένος, μᾶλλον δέ, εἰ τἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν δεῖ, μεθόριός τις θεοῦ καὶ ἀνθρώπου φύσις, τοῦ
2:189μὲν ἐλάττων, ἀνθρώπου δὲ κρείττων. „ὅταν“ γάρ φησιν „εἰσίῃ εἰς τὰ ἅγια τῶν ἁγίων ὁ ἀρχιερεύς, ἄνθρωπος οὐκ ἔσται“ (Lev. 16, 17). τίς οὖν, εἰ μὴ ἄνθρωπος; ἆρά γε θεός; οὐκ ἂν εἴποιμι — τὸν γὰρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦδε κλῆρον ὁ ἀρχιπροφήτης ἔλαχε Μωυσῆς ἔτι ὢν ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ, προσρηθεὶς Φαραὼ θεὸς (Exod. 7, 1) — οὔτε ἄνθρωπος, ἀλλ’ ἑκατέρων τῶν ἄκρων, ὡς ἂν βάσεως καὶ κεφαλῆς, ἐφαπτόμενος.
2:190τὸ μὲν οὖν ἕτερον εἶδος ἀμπέλου, ὅπερ εὐφροσύνη κεκλήρωται, καὶ τὸ ἐξ αὐτῆς μέθυσμα, ἡ ἄκρατος εὐβουλία, καὶ ὁ ἀρυσάμενος οἰνοχόος ἐκ τοῦ θείου κρατῆρος, ὃν αὐτὸς ὁ θεὸς ἀρετῶν πεπλήρωκεν ἐπὶ χείλη, δεδήλωται.
2:191τὸ δὲ ἀνοίας καὶ λύπης καὶ παροινίας ἤδη μὲν τρόπῳ τινὶ τύπῳ δὲ ἕτερον ἐκτυποῦται διὰ τῶν ἑτέρωθι λεχθέντων ἐν ᾠδῇ τῇ μείζονι· „ἐκ γὰρ ἀμπέλου“ φησί „Σοδόμων ἡ ἄμπελος αὐτῶν, καὶ ἡ κληματὶς αὐτῶν ἐκ Γομόρρας· ἡ σταφυλὴ αὐτῶν σταφυλὴ χολῆς, βότρυς πικρίας αὐτοῖς· θυμὸς δρακόντων ὁ οἶνος αὐτῶν, καὶ θυμὸς ἀσπίδων ἀνίατος“ (Deut. 32, 32. 33).
2:192ὁρᾷς ὅσα τὸ ἀφροσύνης μέθυσμα ἐργάζεται, τὸ πικρόν, τὸ κακόηθες, τὸ ἀκρόχολον, τὸ περίθυμον, τὸ ἀτίθασον, τὸ δηκτικόν, τὸ ἐπίβουλον. ἐμφαντικώτατα δὲ ἀφροσύνης ἔρνος ἐν Σοδόμοις φησὶν εἶναι — τύφλωσις δὲ ἢ στείρωσις ἑρμηνεύεται Σόδομα —, ἐπειδὴ τυφλὸν καὶ ἄγονον καλῶν ἀφροσύνη, ὑφ’ ἧς ἀναπεισθέντες τινὲς μετρεῖν καὶ σταθμᾶσθαι καὶ ἀριθμεῖν πάντα καθ’ αὑτοὺς ἠξίωσαν· Γομόρρα γὰρ μεταληφθέν ἐστι μέτρον.
2:193Μωυσῆς δὲ στάθμην καὶ μέτρον καὶ ἀριθμὸν τῶν ὅλων ὑπέλαβεν εἶναι τὸν θεόν, ἀλλ’ οὐ τὸν ἀνθρώπινον νοῦν. δηλοῖ δὲ διὰ τούτων φάσκων· „οὐκ ἔσται ἐν μαρσίππῳ σου στάθμιον καὶ στάθμιον, μέγα ἢ μικρόν· οὐκ ἔσται ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ σου μέτρον καὶ μέτρον, μέγα ἢ μικρόν· στάθμιον ἀληθινὸν καὶ δίκαιον ἔσται σοι“ (Deut. 25, 13—15).
2:194ἀληθὲς δὲ καὶ δίκαιον μέτρον τὸ τὸν μόνον δίκαιον θεὸν ὑπολαβεῖν πάντα μετρεῖν καὶ σταθμᾶσθαι καὶ ἀριθμοῖς καὶ πέρασι καὶ ὅροις τὴν τῶν ὅλων περιγράψαι φύσιν, ἄδικον δὲ καὶ ψευδὲς τὸ νομίσαι κατὰ τὸν ἀνθρώπινον νοῦν ταῦτα συμβαίνειν.
Book 2, §§170–194
2:170When any one leading us along the road, deserted by the passions and by acts of wickedness, the road, that is, of philosophy, has led right reason to a height, and placed it like a scout upon a watch-tower, and has commanded it to look around, and to survey the whole country of virtue, and to see whether it be blessed with a deep soil, and rich, and productive of herbage and of fruit, since deep soil is good to cause the learning which has been sown in it to increase, and to make the doctrines which have been planted in it, and which have grown to trees, to form solid trunks, or whether it be of a contrary character; and also to examine into actions, as one might into cities, and see whether they are strongly fortified, or whether they are defenceless and deprived of all the security which might be afforded by walls around them. Also to inquire into the condition of the inhabitants, whether they are considerable in numbers and in valour, or whether their courage is weak and their numbers scanty, the two causes acting reciprocally on one another.
2:171Then because we were not able to bear the weight of the whole trunk of wisdom, we cut off one branch and one bunch of grapes, and carried it with us as a most undeniable proof of our joy, and a burden very easy to be borne, wishing to display at the same time the branch and the fruit of excellence to those who are gifted with acuteness of mental sight, to show them, that is, the strongly-shooting and grape-bearing vine.
2:172They then very fairly compare this vine of which we were only able to take a part, to happiness. And one of the ancient prophets bears his testimony in favour of my view of the matter, who speaking under divine inspiration has said, "The vineyard of the Lord Almighty is the house of Israel."
2:173Now Israel is the mind inclined to the contemplation of God and of the world; for the name Israel is interpreted, "seeing God," and the abode of the mind is the whole soul; and this is the most sacred vineyard, bearing as its fruit the divine shoot, virtue:
2:174thus thinking well (τὸ εὖ φρονει̃ν) is the derivation of the word joy (εὐφροσὑνη), being a great and brilliant thing so that, says Moses, even God himself does not disdain to exhibit it; and most especially at that time when the human race is departing from its sins, and inclining and bending its steps towards justice, following of its own accord the laws and institutions of nature.
2:175"For," says Moses, "the Lord thy God will return, that he may rejoice in thee for thy good as he rejoiced in thy fathers, if thou wilt hear his voice to keep all his commandments and his ordinances and his judgments which are written in the book of this law."
2:176Who could implant in man a desire for virtue and excellence, more strongly than is here done? Dost thou wish, says the scripture, O mind, that God should rejoice? Do thou rejoice in virtue thyself, and bring no costly offering, (for what need has God of anything of thine?) But, on the other hand, receive with joy all the good things which he bestows upon thee;
2:177for he rejoices in giving, when they who receive are worthy of his grace; unless you think that those men who live blameably may be justly said to make God indignant and to excite his anger, but that those who live in a praiseworthy manner do not make him rejoice.
2:178But there is nothing which gives so much pleasure to fathers and mothers, our mortal parents, as the virtues of their children, even though they may be in want of numbers of necessary things; And does not the excellence of these aforesaid persons in like manner rejoice the Creator of the universe, who is in no want of anything whatever?
2:179Do thou therefore, O mind, having learnt how mighty a thing the anger of God is, and how great a good the joy of God is, do not do anything worthy to excite his anger to thy own destruction, but study only such things as may be the means of your pleasing God.
2:180And you will find these actions to be not the making of long and unusual journeys, nor the passing over unnavigable seas, or wandering without stopping to take breath to the furthest boundaries of earth and sea: for good actions do not dwell at a distance and have not been banished beyond the confines of the habitable world, but, as Moses says, good is situated near you, and is planted along with you, being united to you in three necessary parts, in the heart, in the mouth, and in the hands: that is to say, in the mind, in the speech, and in the actions; since it is necessary to think and to say, and to do good things, which are made perfect by a union of good design, good execution, and good language.
2:181I say therefore to him whose occupation is to gratify one description of gluttony, the fondness for drinking, namely to the chief butler, "Why are you labouring hard, O unhappy man? For you think that you are preparing pleasant things to give delight, but in reality you are kindling a flame of folly and intemperance, and contributing great and abundant quantities of fuel to it."
2:182But perhaps he may reply, do not blame me precipitately before you have considered my case; I was appointed to pour out wine, not indeed for a man who was endowed with temperance, and piety, and all the other virtues, but for a violent, and intemperate, and unjust master, one who was very proud in his impiety, and who dared once to say, "I do not know the Lord;" so that I very naturally studied what would afford him gratification:
2:183and do not wonder that God is delighted with one thing, and the mind which is hostile to God, namely Pharaoh, with the contrary. Who then is the chief butler of God? The priest who offers libations to him, the truly great high priest, who, having received a draught of everlasting graces, offers himself in return, pouring in an entire libation full of unmixed wine. You see that there are differences between butlers in proportion to the differences existing between those whom they are waiting on;
2:184on this account I, the butler of Pharaoh, who exerts his stiff-necked, and in all respects intemperate reason, in the direction of indulgences of his passions, am a eunuch, having had all the generative parts of my soul removed, and being compelled to migrate from the apartments of the men, and am a fugitive also from the women’s chambers, inasmuch as I am neither male nor female; nor am I able to disseminate seed nor to receive it, being of an ambiguous nature, neither one thing nor the other; a mere false coin of human money, destitute of immortality, which is from time to time kept alive by the constant succession of children and offspring: being also excluded from the assembly and sacred meeting of the people, for it is expressly forbidden that any one who has suffered any injury or mutilation such as I have should enter in thereto.
2:185But the high priest of whom we are speaking is a perfect man, the husband of a virgin (a most extraordinary statement), who has never been made a woman; but who on the contrary, has ceased to be influenced by the customs of women in regard to her connection with her husband. And not only is this man competent to sow the seeds of unpolluted and virgin opinions, but he is also the father of sacred reasonings,
2:186some of which are overseers and superintendents of the affairs of nature, such as Eleazar and Ithamar; others are ministers of the worship of God, earnestly occupied in kindling and burning up the flame of heaven; for, as they are always uttering discourses relating to holiness, they cause it to shine, bringing forth the most divine kind of piety like fire from a flint;
2:187and the being who is at the same time the guide and father of those men is no insignificant part of the sacred assembly, but he is rather the person without whom the duly convened assembly of the parts of the soul could never be collected together at all; he is the president, the chairman, the creator of it, who, without the aid of any other being, is able by himself alone to consider and to do everything.
2:188He, when taken in conjunction with others, is insignificant in point of number, but when he is looked at by himself he becomes numerous; he is a tribunal, an entire council, the whole people, a complete multitude, the entire race of mankind, or rather, if one is to speak the real truth, he is a sort of nature bordering on God, inferior indeed to him, but superior to man;
2:189"for when," the scripture says, "the high priest goes into the Holy of Holies he will not be a man." What then will he be if he is not a man? Will he be God? I would not venture to say that (for the chief prophet, Moses, did receive the inheritance of this name while he was still in Egypt, being called "the god of Pharaoh;") nor again is he man, but he touches both these extremities as if he touched both the feet and the head.
2:190So now one kind of vine, which has been assigned as the portion of cheerfulness, and the intoxication which arises from it, namely unmingled goodness of counsel, and the cup-bearer too who drew the wine from the divine goblet, which God himself has filled with virtues up to the lip, has been explained;
2:191but the other kind, that of folly, and grief, and drunkenness, is also already depicted in a fashion but in another character, by other expressions which are used in the greater canticle; "for," says the scripture, "their vine is of the vine of Sodom and their tendrils are of the vine of Gomorrah; their grapes are the grapes of gall; their bunches are full of bitterness itself. Their wine is the madness of dragons and the incurable fury of asps."
2:192You see here what great effects are produced by the drunkenness of folly: bitterness, an evil disposition, exceeding gall, excessive anger, implacability, a biting and treacherous disposition. The lawgiver most emphatically asserts the branch of the vine of folly to be in Sodom; and the name Sodom, being interpreted, means "blindness," or "barrenness;" since folly is a thing which is blind, and also barren of all good things; though, nevertheless, some people have been so greatly influenced by it as to measure, and weigh, and count everything with reference to themselves alone.
2:193Gomorrah, being interpreted, means "measure;" but Moses conceived that God was the standard of weight, and measure, and number, in the universe, but he had not the same opinion of the human mind. And he shows this in the following passage, where he says, "There shall not be in thy sack one weight, and another weight, a great and a small; there shall not be in thy house one measure, and another measure, a great and a small;
2:194thy weight shall be a true and just one." But a true and just measure is, to conceive that it is the only just God alone who measures and weighs everything, and who has circumscribed the nature of the universe with numbers, and limitations, and boundaries. But it is unjust and false to imagine that these things are regulated in accordance with the human mind.
Book 2, §§195–219
2:195Ὁ δὲ εὐνοῦχος ἅμα καὶ ἀρχιοινοχόος τοῦ Φαραὼ τὸ ἀφροσύνης γεννητικὸν φυτόν, ἄμπελον, φαντασιωθεὶς προσαναζωγραφεῖ τρεῖς πυθμένας, ἵνα τὰς ἐν τῷ διαμαρτάνειν κατὰ τοὺς τρεῖς χρόνους ἐσχατιὰς
2:196παρεμφήνῃ· πυθμὴν γὰρ τὸ ἔσχατον. ἐπειδὰν οὖν ἀφροσύνη πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἐπισκιάσῃ καὶ κατασχῇ καὶ μηδὲν αὐτῆς ἄφετον μηδὲ ἐλεύθερον μέρος ἐάσῃ, οὐ μόνον ὅσα τῶν ἁμαρτημάτων ἰάσιμα δρᾶν ἀναγκάζει, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅσα ἀνίατα.
2:197τὰ μὲν οὖν θεραπείαν ἐνδεχόμενα ῥᾷστα καὶ πρῶτα γράφεται, τὰ δὲ ἀθεράπευτα παγχάλεπα καὶ ὕστατα, πυθμέσιν ἀναλογοῦντα.
2:198καὶ καθάπερ, οἶμαι, ἡ φρόνησις ἄρχεται μὲν ἀπὸ τῶν ἐλαττόνων ὠφελεῖν, λήγει δὲ εἰς τὰς ὑπερβολὰς τῶν κατορθωμάτων, τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον καὶ ἡ ἀφροσύνη καταβιάζουσα τὴν ψυχὴν ἄνωθεν καὶ κατ’ ὀλίγον ἀφιστᾶσα παιδείας μακρὰν ὀρθοῦ λόγου διοικίζει καὶ μέχρι τῶν ἐσχατιῶν καθαιρεῖ.
2:199τὸ δ’ ὄναρ ἐδήλου μετὰ τοὺς πυθμένας ἀνθοῦσαν καὶ βλαστάνουσαν καὶ καρποφοροῦσαν τὴν ἄμπελον — „αὐτὴ“ γάρ φησι „θάλλουσα ἀνενηνοχυῖα βλαστούς· πέπειροι βότρυες σταφυλῆς“ (Gen. 40, 10) —, ἣν εἴθε ἀκαρπίᾳ χρῆσθαι καὶ μηδέποτε χλοηφορῆσαι καὶ πάντα μεμαράνθαι τὸν αἰῶνα.
2:200τί γὰρ ἂν εἴη μεῖζον κακὸν [ἢ] θαλλούσης καὶ εὐφορούσης ἀφροσύνης; ἀλλὰ καὶ „τὸ ποτήριον Φαραώ“, ἡ δεξαμενὴ τῆς ἀνοίας καὶ παροινίας καὶ τῆς παρὰ πάντα τὸν βίον ἀπαύστου μέθης, „ἐν τῇ χειρί μου“ (Gen. 40, 11), φησίν, ἐστίν, ἴσον τῷ ἐν ταῖς ἐμαῖς ἐγχειρήσεσι καὶ ἐπιβολαῖς καὶ δυνάμεσιν· οὐ γὰρ ἄνευ γε τῶν ἐμῶν ἐπινοιῶν εὐοδήσει τὰ πάθος ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ.
2:201ὥσπερ γὰρ ἐν μὲν ταῖς τοῦ ἡνιόχου χερσὶ τὰς ἡνίας εἶναι προσῆκεν, ἐν δὲ ταῖς τοῦ κυβερνήτου τοὺς οἴακας — μόνως γὰρ οὕτως κατορθοῦται δρόμος μὲν ἅρματι, σκάφει δὲ πλοῦς —, οὕτως ἐν τῇ χειρὶ καὶ δυνάμει τοῦ θάτερον εἶδος τῆς γαστριμαργίας τεχνιτεύοντος, οἰνοφλυγίαν, ἡ τοῦ ἀκρατοῦς ἐστιν ἐκπλήρωσις.
2:202ἀλλὰ τί παθὼν ὑπέμεινεν αὐχεῖν ἐπ’ ἀρνήσεως μᾶλλον ἢ ὁμολογίας ἐπαξίῳ πράγματι; ἢ οὐκ ἄμεινον ἦν μὴ οὐχ ὁμολογεῖν διδάσκαλον ἀκρασίας εἶναι, ἀλλὰ τῷ ἀκρατεῖ τὰ ὑπεκκαύματα τοῦ πάθους ἐπαναθεῖναι ὡς εὑρετῇ καὶ αὐτουργῷ τεθρυμμένου καὶ κατεαγότος αἰσχίστου βίου;
2:203τοιοῦτον δ’ ἐστίν· ἀφροσύνη σεμνύνεται ἐφ’ οἷς εἰκὸς ἐγκαλύπτεσθαι· νυνὶ μὲν οὐ μόνον ἐπὶ τῷ τὴν δεξαμενὴν τῆς ἀκράτορος ψυχῆς, τὸ ποτήριον, περιφέρειν ἐν ταῖς χερσὶ καὶ ἐπιδείκνυσθαι πᾶσιν ἀγάλλεται, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τῷ τὴν σταφυλὴν εἰς αὐτὸ ἐκθλίβειν· τὸ δ’ ἐστὶ τὸ ἐκπληρωτικὸν τοῦ πάθους δημιουργεῖν καὶ κεκρυμμένον εἰς φῶς ἄγειν.
2:204ὡς γὰρ τὰ βρέφη γλιχόμενα τροφῆς, ὁπότε μέλλοι σπᾶν τοῦ γάλακτος, ἐκθλίβει καὶ πιέζει τὸν μαστὸν τῆς τρεφούσης, οὕτω τὴν πηγήν, ἀφ’ ἧς τὸ οἰνοφλυγίας ὀμβρεῖ κακόν, ὁ δημιουργὸς τῆς ἀκρασίας πιέζει κραταιῶς, ἵνα ταῖς ἐκθλιβομέναις λιβάσιν ἡδίστῃ τροφῇ χρῷτο.
2:205Τοιοῦτος μὲν ἡμῖν ὁ βεβακχευμένος ἀκράτῳ, παροίνιον καὶ παράληρον κακὸν καὶ ἀνίατον, γραφέσθω· τὸν δὲ συγγενῆ τούτου γάστρωνα καὶ αὐτὸν ὄντα, πολυφαγίας καὶ λαιμαργίας ἑταῖρον, τὰ περὶ ἐδωδὴν ἀκρατῶς τεχνιτεύοντα, πάλιν ἐπισκεπτέον.
2:206καίτοι οὐ πολλῆς δεῖ πρὸς τὴν θήραν αὐτοῦ φροντίδος· ἔστι γὰρ ἐκμαγεῖον ἐμφερέστατον αὐτοῦ τῆς εἰκόνος ὁ φανεὶς ὄνειρος. ἀκριβώσαντες οὖν αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον ὥσπερ ἔμφασιν ἐν κατόπτρῳ θεασόμεθα.
2:207„ᾤμην“ γάρ φησι „τρία κανᾶ χονδριτῶν αἴρειν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς μου“ (Gen. 40, 16). κεφαλὴν μὲν τοίνυν ἀλληγοροῦντές φαμεν εἶναι ψυχῆς τὸν ἡγεμόνα νοῦν, ἐπικεῖσθαι δὲ τούτῳ πάντα· καὶ γὰρ ἐξεφώνησέ ποτε ἐπ’ αὐτοῦ· „ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ἐγένετο ταῦτα πάντα“ (Gen. 42, 36).
2:208στειλάμενος οὖν πομπὴν ὧν ἐτεχνίτευσε κατὰ γαστρὸς τῆς ταλαίνης ἐπιδείκνυται, καὶ κανηφορῶν ὁ ἀνόητος οὐκ αἰδεῖται τοσούτῳ βαρυνόμενος τριττῷ κανῶν ἄχθει, τοῦτο δ’ ἐστὶ τρισὶ χρόνου μέρεσι.
2:209τὴν γὰρ ἡδονὴν οἱ θιασῶταί φασιν αὐτῆς ἔκ τε μνήμης τῶν παρεληλυθότων τερπνῶν καὶ ἐξ ἀπολαύσεως τῶν ἐνεστηκότων καὶ ἐξ ἐλπίδος τῶν μελλόντων συνεστάναι·
2:210ὥστε τὰ τρία κανᾶ τοῖς τρισὶ τοῦ χρόνου μέρεσιν ἐξομοιοῦσθαι, τὰ δ’ ἐπὶ τῶν κανῶν πέμματα τοῖς ἑκάστῳ τῶν μερῶν ἐφαρμόζουσι, παρεληλυθότων μνήμαις, ἐνεστηκότων μετουσίαις, μελλόντων προσδοκίαις, τὸν δὲ βαστάζοντα ταῦτα πάντα τῷ φιληδόνῳ, ὃς οὐκ ἀφ’ ἑνὸς γένους ἀκρασίας, ἀλλ’ ἀπὸ πάντων σχεδὸν εἰδῶν καὶ γενῶν τῆς ἀκολασίας ἄσπονδον καὶ φιλίων ἁλῶν ἐπιδεᾶ τράπεζαν ἐκπεπλήρωκεν.
2:211ἧς ἀπολαύει μόνος ὥσπερ ἐν δημοθοινίᾳ ὁ βασιλεὺς Φαραώ, σπορὰν καὶ σκέδασιν καὶ φθορὰν ἐγκρατείας ἐπιτετηδευκώς· ἑρμηνεύεται γὰρ σκεδασμός. ἔστι δὲ τὸ ὑπέρογκον καὶ βασιλικὸν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἐφ’ οἷς εἰκὸς σωφροσύνης ἀγαθοῖς ἀγάλλεσθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐν οἷς ἀπεικὸς βδελυρίας ἐπιτηδεύμασι σεμνύνεσθαι, πρὸς ἀπληστίαν καὶ λαιμαργότητα καὶ τὸ ἁβροδίαιτον ἐξοκείλαντι.
2:212τοιγάρτοι τὰ πτηνά, τὸ δ’ ἐστὶν αἱ ἐπιποτώμεναι ἔξωθεν ἀτέκμαρτοι συντυχίαι, πάντα πυρὸς τρόπον ἐπιδραμοῦνται καὶ ἀναφλέξουσι καὶ τῇ παμφάγῳ δυνάμει καταναλώσουσιν (Gen. 40, 17), ὡς μηδὲ λείψανον γοῦν ὑπολείπεσθαι πρὸς ἀπόλαυσιν τῷ κανηφοροῦντι, ὃς ἤλπισε τὰς εὑρέσεις καὶ τὰς ἐπινοίας αὑτοῦ μέχρι παντὸς αἰῶνος οἴσειν ἀναφαιρέτους ἐν βεβαίῳ.
2:213χάρις δὲ τῷ νικηφόρῳ θεῷ, ὃς ἀτελεῖς τὰς εἰς ἄκρον πεποιημένας σπουδὰς τοῦ φιλοπαθοῦς ἐργάζεται, πτηνὰς φύσεις ἐπιπέμπων ἀοράτως πρὸς ἀναίρεσιν καὶ φθορὰν αὐτῶν. περισυληθεὶς οὖν ὁ νοῦς ὧν ἐδημιούργησεν, ὥσπερ τὸν αὐχένα ἀποτμηθεὶς ἀκέφαλος καὶ νεκρὸς ἀνευρεθήσεται, προσηλωμένος ὥσπερ οἱ ἀνασκολοπισθέντες τῷ ξύλῳ τῆς ἀπόρου καὶ πενιχρᾶς ἀπαιδευσίας.
2:214ἕως μὲν γὰρ μηδὲν λυμαίνεται τῶν ἐξαπιναίως εἰωθότων ἀπροοράτως ἐπιφοιτᾶν, εὐοδεῖν δοκοῦσιν αἱ πρὸς ἀπόλαυσιν ἡδονῆς τέχναι· κατασκηψάντων δ’ ἐκ τοῦ ἀφανοῦς ἀνατρέπονται, καὶ ὁ δημιουργὸς αὐταῖς συνδιαφθείρεται.
2:215Τὰ μὲν οὖν τῶν διῃρημένων τὸ γεύσεως ἐργαστήριον ἐν ἑκατέρῳ τροφῆς εἴδει, πόσεώς τε καὶ βρώσεως οὐχὶ τῆς ἀναγκαίας ἀλλὰ περιττῆς καὶ ἀκράτορος, ὀνείρατα δεδήλωται· τὰ δὲ τοῦ τούτων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων, ὅσαι ψυχῆς δυνάμεις, βασιλεύειν δοκοῦντος, ὄνομα Φαραώ, κατὰ τὸ ἀκόλουθον αὐτίκα διερευνητέον.
2:216„ἐν γὰρ τῷ ὕπνῳ μου“ φησίν „ᾤμην ἑστάναι παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τοῦ ποταμοῦ· καὶ ὥσπερ ἐκ τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἀνέβαινον βόες ἑπτά, ἐκλεκταὶ ταῖς σαρξὶ καὶ καλαὶ τῷ εἴδει, καὶ ἐνέμοντο ἐν τῷ ἄχει. καὶ ἰδοὺ ἕτεραι ἑπτὰ βόες ἀνέβαινον ὀπίσω αὐτῶν ἐκ τοῦ ποταμοῦ, πονηραὶ καὶ αἰσχραὶ τῷ εἴδει καὶ λεπταὶ ταῖς σαρξίν, ἃς οὐκ εἶδον τοιαύτας ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Αἰγύπτῳ αἰσχροτέρας.
2:217καὶ κατέφαγον αἱ βόες αἱ λεπταὶ καὶ αἰσχραὶ τὰς ἑπτὰ βόας τὰς πρώτας τὰς καλὰς καὶ ἐκλεκτάς, καὶ εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὰς κοιλίας αὐτῶν· καὶ οὐ διάδηλοι ἐγένοντο ὅτι εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὰς κοιλίας αὐτῶν, καὶ αἱ ὄψεις αὐτῶν αἰσχραί, καθὰ καὶ τὴν ἀρχήν [εἶπον].
2:218ἐξεγερθεὶς δὲ ἐκοιμήθην, καὶ εἶδον πάλιν ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ μου, καὶ ὡς ἑπτὰ στάχυες ἀνέβαινον ἐν πυθμένι ἑνί, πλήρεις καὶ καλοί· ἄλλοι δὲ ἑπτὰ στάχυες λεπτοὶ καὶ ἀνεμόφθοροι ἀνεφύοντο ἐχόμενοι· καὶ κατέπιον οἱ ἑπτὰ στάχυες τοὺς καλοὺς καὶ τοὺς πλήρεις“ (Gen. 41, 17 — 24).
2:219ὁρᾷς μὲν δὴ τὸ προοίμιον τοῦ φιλαύτου, ὃς κινητὸς καὶ στρεπτὸς καὶ μεταβλητὸς ὢν κατά τε σῶμα καὶ ψυχήν φησιν· „ᾤμην ἑστάναι,“ καὶ οὐκ ἐλογίσατο, ὅτι μόνῳ θεῷ τὸ ἀκλινὲς καὶ πάγιόν ἐστιν οἰκεῖον καὶ εἴ τις αὐτῷ φίλος.
Book 2, §§195–219
2:195But the eunuch and chief butler of Pharaoh, having beheld the plant generative of folly, namely, the vine, adds besides to his delineation there stocks, that he may signify the three extremities of error according to the three different times; for a root is equivalent to extremity.
2:196When, therefore, folly has overshadowed and occupied the whole soul, and when it has left no portion of it unoccupied or free, it not only compels it to commit such errors as are remediable, but such also as are irremediable.
2:197Now those which admit of a remedy are set down as the easiest and the first; but those which are irremediable are altogether terrible, and are the last of all, being so far analogous to roots.
2:198And as, in my notions, wisdom begins to benefit a man in small matters, and ends at last in the absolute perfection of all well-doing, so, in the same manner folly, constraining the soul from above and leading it away from instruction by small degrees, establishes it at last at a long distance from right reason, and finally leads it to the extreme point, and utterly overthrows it.
2:199And the dream showed that after the roots appeared the vine flourished and put forth shoots and bore fruit; for, says the chief butler, "It was flourishing and bearing shoots, around which were bunches of grapes." The foolish man is accustomed to display barrenness, and never to put forth even leaves, and, in fact, to be withered all his life;
2:200for what could be a greater evil than folly flourishing and bearing fruit? But, says he, "the cup of Pharaoh," the vessel which is the receptacle of folly and drunkenness, and of the ceaseless intoxication of life, "is in my hand;" an expression equivalent to saying, depends upon my administration, and endeavours, and powers; for without my contrivances, the passion will not proceed rightly by its own efforts;
2:201for as it is proper that the reins should be in the hands of the charioteer, and the rudder in the hands of the pilot—for this is the only way in which the course of the chariot and the voyage of the vessel can proceed successfully—so, also, the filling of the goblet with wine is in the hands and depends upon the power of him who by his art brings to perfection one of the two kinds of gluttony, namely, satiety of wine.
2:202But why has he endured to boast in respect of a matter which deserved rather to be denied than to be confessed? Would it not have been better not to have confessed at all that he was a teacher of intemperance, and not to admit that he increased the excitement of the passions by wine in the case of the intemperate man, as being an inventor and producer of a luxurious, and debauched, and most disgraceful way of life.
2:203Such, however, is the case. Folly boasts of those things which ought to be concealed; and in this present case it prides itself, not only on holding in its hands the receptacle of the intemperate soul, that is to say, the cup of wine, and in showing it to all men, but also in pressing out the grapes into it; that is to say, in making that which satisfies the passion, and bringing what is concealed to light.
2:204For as children which require food, when they are about to receive the milk, squeeze and press out the breast of the nurse that feeds them, so likewise does the workman and cause of intemperance vigorously press the fountain from which the evil of abundance of wine pours forth, that he may derive food in a most agreeable manner from the drops which are squeezed out.
2:205Such a description then as I have here given may be applied to the man who is made frantic by the influence of unmixed wines, that he is a drunken, and foolish, and irremediable evil. We must now, in turn, investigate the character of the glutton, who is akin to the drunkard, and who is a sworn companion of all kinds of voracity and greediness, labouring, without any restraint, at the artificial gratification of his appetite.
2:206And yet it does not require a great deal of care to arrive at his true character; for the dream which was seen is a representation of his likeness very closely resembling him; and when we have accurately examined him, let us look upon him as we would upon a representation in a mirror;
2:207for "I thought," said the chief cook, "that I had three baskets of fine wheaten loaves upon my head." Now, using the word "head" in an allegorical manner, we mean by it the dominant part of the soul, that is, the mind, and we say that everything rests or depends upon that; for he once exclaimed concerning it, "All these things were in my charge."
2:208Therefore when he had completed the preparation of these things which he had devised against the miserable belly, he displayed himself also, and, like a foolish man as he was, he was not ashamed to be weighed down with so great a burden, namely, the weight of three baskets; that is to say, with three portions of time.
2:209For those who advocate the cause of pleasure affirm that it consists of three times, of the memory of past delights, and of the enjoyment of those that are present, and of the hope of what are to come;
2:210so that the three baskets are likened unto the three portions of time, and the cakes upon the baskets to those circumstances which are suitable to each of the portions; to the recollection of past joys, to the enjoyment of present pleasures, to the hope of future delights. And he who carries all these things is likened unto the lover of pleasure, who has filled his faithless table, a table destitute of all hospitable and friendly salt, not with one kind of luxury only, but with almost every description and species of intemperance;
2:211and this is enjoyed by king Pharaoh alone, as if he were sitting at a public banquet, and devoting himself to a dispersion, and scattering, and defeat, and destruction of temperance; for the name Pharaoh, being interpreted, means "dispersion." And it is a magnificent and royal piece of conduct in him not to exult in the specious advantages of wisdom, but to pride himself on those pursuits of profligacy which it is unseemly to mention, wrecking himself on insatiable appetite, and gluttony, and effeminacy of life.
2:212Therefore the birds, that is to say, the chances which never could have been anticipated by conjecture, coming from outward quarters and hovering around him, will attack and kindle every thing like fire, and will destroy every thing with their all-devouring power, so that there is not a single fragment left to the bearer of the baskets for his enjoyment though he had hoped to proceed with his inventions and contrivances, for ever and ever carrying them on in a safe place, so that they could never be taken from him.
2:213And thanks be to God who giveth the victory and who renders the labours of the man who is a slave to his passions, though ever so carefully carried out, still unproductive and useless, sending down winged natures in an invisible manner for their destruction and overthrow. Therefore, the mind, being deprived of those things which it had made for itself, having, as it were, its neck cut through, will be found headless and lifeless, and like those who are fixed to a cross, nailed as it were to the tree of hopeless and helpless ignorance.
2:214For as long as none of these things come upon one which arrive suddenly and unexpectedly, then those acts which are directed to the enjoyment of pleasure appear to be successful; but when such evils descend upon them unexpectedly, they are overthrown, and their maker is destroyed with them.
2:215The dreams, therefore, of those men who divide those things which produce the taste according to every species of food, whether it be meat or drink, and such as is not necessary but superfluous, and sought only by the intemperate, have been sufficiently explained. But those of Pharaoh, who appears to exercise sovereignty over these men and over all the powers of the soul, must now be investigated if we would proceed in order and consistently with our plan.
2:216Pharaoh says, "In my dream I thought that I was standing by the bank of a river, and seven oxen came up as it were out of the river, of eminent plumpness in their flesh, and beautiful to the view, and fed in the green marsh; and behold, seven other oxen came up out of the river after them, evil to look at and ill-favoured, and lean in their flesh, such that I never saw any leaner in all Egypt;
2:217and the lean and ill-favoured oxen devoured the seven former oxen which were beautiful, and picked out, and they entered into their stomachs, and still their appearance remained ill-favoured, as I have described it at first.
2:218And when I had awoke I fell asleep again; and again I saw in my dream, and as it were seven ears of corn grew up on one stalk, full and beautiful. And seven other ears of corn also came up, lean and wind-beaten, close to them, and these last seven ears did swallow up the seven beautiful and full ears."
2:219You see now the preface of the lover of self who being easily moved, and changeable, and fickle, both in his body and soul, says, "I thought that I was standing," and did not consider that unchangeableness and steadiness belong to God alone, and to him who is dear to God.
Book 2, §§220–244
2:220τῆς μὲν ἀκλινοῦς περὶ αὐτὸν δυνάμεως σαφεστάτη πίστις ὅδε ὁ κόσμος, ἀεὶ κατὰ τὰ αὐτὰ καὶ ὡσαύτως ἔχων — ὁπότε δὲ ὁ κόσμος ἀρρεπής, ὁ δημιουργὸς πῶς οὐ βέβαιος; —, εἶτα μέντοι καὶ οἱ ἀψευδέστατοι μάρτυρες ἱεροὶ χρησμοί·
2:221λέγεται γὰρ ἐκ προσώπου τοῦ θεοῦ· „ὧδε ἐγὼ ἕστηκα ἐκεῖ πρὸ τοῦ σὲ ἐπὶ τῆς πέτρας ἐν Χωρήβ“ (Exod. 17,6), ἴσον τῷ οὗτος ἐγὼ ὁ ἐμφανὴς καὶ ἐνταῦθα ὢν ἐκεῖ τέ εἰμι καὶ πανταχοῦ, πεπληρωκὼς τὰ πάντα, ἑστὼς ἐν ὁμοίῳ καὶ μένων, ἄτρεπτος ὤν, πρὶν ἢ σὲ ἤ τι τῶν ὄντων εἰς γένεσιν ἐλθεῖν, ἐπὶ τῆς ἀκροτάτης καὶ πρεσβυτάτης ἱδρυμένος δυνάμεως ἀρχῆς, ἀφ’ ἧς ἡ τῶν ὄντων γένεσις ὤμβρησε καὶ τὸ σοφίας ἐπλήμμυρε νᾶμα.
2:222ἐγὼ γάρ εἰμι „ὁ ἐξαγαγὼν ἐκ πέτρας ἀκροτόμου πηγὴν ὕδατος“ (Deut. 8, 15) ἐν ἑτέροις εἴρηται. μαρτυρεῖ δὲ καὶ Μωυσῆς περὶ τοῦ μὴ τρέπεσθαι τὸ θεῖον φάσκων· „εἶδον τὸν τόπον οὗ εἱστήκει ὁ θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ“ (Exod. 24, 10), τὸ μὴ μεταβάλλειν διὰ τῆς στάσεως καὶ ἱδρύσεως αἰνιττόμενος.
2:223ἀλλὰ γὰρ τοσαύτη περὶ τὸ θεῖόν ἐστιν ὑπερβολὴ τοῦ βεβαίου, ὥστε καὶ ταῖς ἐπιλελεγμέναις φύσεσιν ἐχυρότητος, ὡς ἀρίστου κτήματος, μεταδίδωσιν. αὐτίκα γέ τοι τὴν πλήρη χαρίτων διαθήκην ἑαυτοῦ — νόμος δ’ ἐστὶ καὶ λόγος τῶν ὄντων ὁ πρεσβύτατος — ὡς ἂν ἐπὶ βάσεως τῆς τοῦ δικαίου ψυχῆς ἄγαλμα θεοειδὲς ἱδρύσεσθαι παγίως φησίν, ἐπειδὰν λέγῃ τῷ Νῶε· „στήσω τὴν διαθήκην μου πρὸς σέ“ (Gen. 9, 11).
2:224παρεμφαίνει δὲ καὶ δύο ἕτερα, ἓν μὲν ὅτι τὸ δίκαιον ἀδιαφορεῖ διαθήκης θεοῦ, ἕτερον δὲ ὅτι οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι χαρίζονται τὰ διαφέροντα τῶν λαμβανόντων, ὁ δὲ θεὸς οὐ μόνον ταῦτα, ἀλλὰ αὐτοὺς ἐκείνους ἑαυτοῖς· ἐμὲ γὰρ ἐμοὶ δεδώρηται καὶ ἕκαστον τῶν ὄντων ἑαυτῷ· τὸ γὰρ „στήσω τὴν διαθήκην μου πρὸς σὲ“ ἴσον ἐστὶ τῷ „σοὶ δωρήσομαι.“
2:225σπουδάζουσι δὲ καὶ πάντες οἱ θεοφιλεῖς τὸν φιλοπραγμοσύνης χειμῶνα ἀποδιδράσκοντες, ἐν ᾧ σάλος καὶ κλύδων ἀεὶ κυκᾶται, τοῖς τῆς ἀρετῆς εὐδίοις καὶ ναυλοχωτάτοις ἐνορμίζεσθαι λιμέσιν.
2:226οὐχ ὁρᾷς, οἷα περὶ Ἀβραὰμ λέγεται τοῦ σοφοῦ, ὥς ἐστιν „ἑστὼς ἐνώπιον κυρίου“ (Gen. 18, 22) ; πότε γὰρ εἰκὸς δύνασθαι στῆναι διάνοιαν μηκέθ’ ὡς ἐπὶ τρυτάνης ταλαντεύουσαν ἢ ὅτε ἀντικρύς ἐστι θεοῦ, ὁρῶσά τε καὶ ὁρωμένη;
2:227διχόθεν γὰρ αὐτῇ τὸ ἀρρεπές, ἐκ μὲν τοῦ ὁρᾶν τὸν ἀσύγκριτον, ὅτι ὑπὸ τῶν ὁμοίων πραγμάτων οὐκ ἀνθέλκεται, ἐκ δὲ τοῦ ὁρᾶσθαι, ὅτι ἣν ἀξίαν ἔκρινεν εἰς ὄψιν ὁ ἡγεμὼν τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἐλθεῖν, τῷ ἀρίστῳ μόνῳ προσεκλήρωσεν, αὑτῷ. καὶ Μωυσεῖ μέντοι θεοπρόπιον ἐχρήσθη τοιόνδε· „σὺ αὐτοῦ στῆθι μετ’ ἐμοῦ“ (Deut. 5, 31), δι’ οὗ τὰ λεχθέντα ἄμφω παρίσταται, τό τε μὴ κλίνεσθαι τὸν ἀστεῖον καὶ ἡ τοῦ ὄντος περὶ πάντα βεβαιότης.
2:228καὶ γὰρ τῷ ὄντι τὸ τῷ θεῷ συνεγγίζον οἰκειοῦται κατὰ τὸ ἄτρεπτον αὐτοστατοῦν, καὶ ἠρεμήσας ὁ νοῦς, ἡλίκον ἐστὶν ἀγαθὸν ἠρεμία, σαφῶς ἔγνω καὶ θαυμάσας αὐτῆς τὸ κάλλος ὑπέλαβεν, ὅτι ἢ θεῷ μόνῳ προσκεκλήρωται ἢ τῇ μεταξὺ φύσει θνητοῦ καὶ ἀθανάτου γένους.
2:229φησὶ γοῦν· „κἀγὼ εἱστήκειν ἀνὰ μέσον κυρίου καὶ ὑμῶν“ (Deut. 5, 5), οὐχὶ τοῦτο δηλῶν, ὅτι ἐπὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ ποδῶν ἠρήρειστο, ἀλλ’ ἐκεῖνο βουλόμενος ἐμφῆναι, ὅτι ἡ τοῦ σοφοῦ διάνοια χειμώνων μὲν καὶ πολέμων ἀπαλλαγεῖσα, νηνέμῳ δὲ γαλήνῃ καὶ βαθείᾳ εἰρήνῃ χρωμένη κρείττων μέν ἐστιν ἀνθρώπου, θεοῦ δὲ ἐλάττων.
2:230ὁ μὲν γὰρ ἀγελαῖος ἀνθρώπειος νοῦς σείεται καὶ κυκᾶται πρὸς τῶν ἐπιτυχόντων, ὁ δ’ ἅτε μακάριος καὶ εὐδαίμων ἀμέτοχος κακῶν· μεθόριος δὲ ὁ ἀστεῖος, ὡς κυρίως εἰπεῖν μήτε θεὸν αὐτὸν εἶναι μήτε ἄνθρωπον, ἀλλὰ τῶν ἄκρων ἐφαπτόμενον, ἀνθρωπότητι μὲν θνητοῦ γένους, ἀρετῇ
2:231δὲ ἀφθάρτου. τούτῳ παραπλήσιόν ἐστι καὶ τὸ χρησθὲν λόγιον ἐπὶ τοῦ μεγάλου ἱερέως· „ὅταν“ γάρ φησιν „εἰσίῃ εἰς τὰ ἅγια τῶν ἁγίων, ἄνθρωπος οὐκ ἔσται, ἕως ἂν ἐξέλθῃ“ (Lev. 16, 17) ; εἰ δὲ μὴ γίνεται τότε ἄνθρωπος, δῆλον ὅτι οὐδὲ θεός, ἀλλὰ λειτουργὸς θεοῦ, κατὰ μὲν τὸ θνητὸν γενέσει, κατὰ δὲ τὸ ἀθάνατον οἰκειούμενος τῷ ἀγενήτῳ.
2:232τὴν δὲ μέσην τάξιν εἴληχεν, ἕως ἂν ἐξέλθῃ πάλιν εἰς τὰ τοῦ σώματος καὶ τῆς σαρκὸς οἰκεῖα. καὶ πέφυκεν οὕτως ἔχειν· ὅταν μὲν ἐξ ἔρωτος θείου κατασχεθεὶς ὁ νοῦς, συντείνας ἑαυτὸν ἄχρι τῶν ἀδύτων, ὁρμῇ καὶ σπουδῇ πάσῃ χρώμενος προέρχηται, θεοφορούμενος ἐπιλέλησται μὲν τῶν ἄλλων, ἐπιλέλησται δὲ καὶ ἑαυτοῦ, μόνου δὲ μέμνηται καὶ ἐξήρτηται τοῦ δορυφορουμένου καὶ θεραπευομένου, ᾧ τὰς ἱερὰς καὶ ἀναφεῖς καθαγιάζων ἀρετὰς ἐκθυμιᾷ.
2:233ἐπειδὰν δὲ στῇ τὸ ἐνθουσιῶδες καὶ ὁ πολὺς ἵμερος χαλάσῃ, παλινδρομήσας ἀπὸ τῶν θείων ἄνθρωπος γίνεται, τοῖς ἀνθρωπίνοις ἐντυχών, ἅπερ ἐν τοῖς προπυλαίοις ἐφήδρευεν,
2:234ἵνα αὐτὸ μόνον ἐκκύψαντα ἔνδοθεν ἐξαρπάσῃ. τὸν μὲν οὖν τέλειον οὔτε θεὸν οὔτε ἄνθρωπον ἀναγράφει Μωυσῆς, ἀλλ’, ὡς ἔφην, μεθόριον τῆς ἀγενήτου καὶ φθαρτῆς φύσεως· τὸν δὲ προκόπτοντα πάλιν ἐν τῇ μεταξὺ χώρᾳ ζώντων καὶ τεθνηκότων τάττει, ζῶντας μὲν καλῶν τοὺς συμβιοῦντας φρονήσει, τεθνηκότας δὲ τοὺς ἀφροσύνῃ χαίροντας.
2:235λέγεται γὰρ ἐπὶ Ἀαρὼν ὅτι „ἔστη ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν τεθνηκότων καὶ τῶν ζώντων, καὶ ἐκόπασεν ἡ θραῦσις“ (Num. 16, 48). ὁ γὰρ προκόπτων οὔτε ἐν τοῖς τεθνηκόσι τὸν ἀρετῆς βίον ἐξετάζεται, πόθον καὶ ζῆλον ἔχων τοῦ καλοῦ, οὔτε ἐν τοῖς μετὰ τῆς ἄκρας καὶ τελείας ζῶσιν εὐδαιμονίας — ἔτι γὰρ πρὸς τὸ πέρας ἐνδεῖ —, ἀλλ’ ἑκατέρων ἐφάπτεται.
2:236διὸ καὶ κυρίως ἐπιλέγεται τὸ „ἐκόπασεν ἡ θραῦσις“, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐπαύσατο· παύεται μὲν γὰρ ἐπὶ τῶν τελείων τὰ περιθραύοντα καὶ κατακλῶντα καὶ καταγνύντα τὴν ψυχήν, μειοῦται δὲ ἐπὶ τῶν προκοπτόντων ὡς ἂν αὐτὸ μόνον ἀνακοπτόμενα καὶ στελλόμενα.
2:237Τῆς οὖν στάσεως καὶ ἱδρύσεως καὶ τῆς ἐν ταὐτῷ κατὰ τὸ ἀμετάβλητον καὶ ἄτρεπτον εἰς ἀεὶ μονῆς πρῶτον μὲν ὑπαρχούσης περὶ τὸ ὄν, ἔπειτα δὲ περὶ τὸν τοῦ ὄντος λόγον, ὃν διαθήκην ἐκάλεσε, τρίτον δὲ περὶ τὸν σοφὸν καὶ τέταρτον περὶ τὸν προκόπτοντα, τί παθὼν ὁ φαῦλος καὶ πάσαις ἀραῖς ἔνοχος νοῦς ᾠήθη μόνος ἵστασθαι δύνασθαι, φορούμενος ὥσπερ ἐν κατακλυσμῷ καὶ κατασυρόμενος ταῖς τῶν ἐπιρρεόντων διὰ τοῦ νεκροφορουμένου σώματος δίναις ἐπαλλήλοις;
2:238„ᾤμην“ γάρ φησιν „ἑστάναι ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖλος τοῦ ποταμοῦ“ (Gen. 41, 17). λόγον δὲ συμβολικῶς ποταμὸν εἶναί φαμεν, ἐπειδὴ ἑκάτερος ἔξω τε φέρεται καὶ ῥέων συντόνῳ χρῆται τῷ τάχει καὶ τοτὲ μὲν εὐφορεῖ πλημμύραις ὁὁ μὲν ὕδατος, ὁὁ δὲ ῥημάτων καὶ ὀνομάτων, τοτὲ δὲ ἀφορεῖ χαλώμενος καὶ συνίζων·
2:239καὶ ὠφελοῦσι μέντοι ὁ μὲν ἄρδων τὰς ἀρούρας, ὁ δὲ τὰς τῶν φιληκόων ψυχάς, καὶ ἔστιν ὅτε βλάπτουσι κυμήναντες, ὁ μὲν τὴν ὅμορον γῆν ἐπικλύσας, ὁ δὲ ἀνακυκήσας καὶ συγχέας τὸν τῶν οὐ προσεχόντων λογισμόν. οὗτος μὲν εἰκάζεται ποταμῷ.
2:240διττὴ δὲ λόγου φύσις, ἡ μὲν ἀμείνων, ἡ δὲ χείρων, ἀμείνων μὲν ἡ ὠφελοῦσα, χείρων δὲ κατὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον ἡ βλάπτουσα.
2:241παραδείγματα δὲ ἑκατέρας τοῖς δυναμένοις ὁρᾶν ἀνέθηκε Μωϋσῆς ἀριδηλότατα· „ποταμὸς“ γάρ φησι "πορεύεται ἐξ Ἐδὲμ ποτίζειν τὸν παράδεισον· ἐκεῖθεν ἀφορίζεται εἰς τέσσαρας ἀρχάς“ (Gen. 2, 10).
2:242καλεῖ δὲ τὴν μὲν τοῦ ὄντος σοφίαν Ἐδέμ, ἧς ἑρμηνεία τρυφή, διότι, οἶμαι, ἐντρύφημα καὶ θεοῦ σοφία καὶ σοφίας θεός, ἐπεὶ καὶ ἐν ὕμνοις ᾄδεται· „κατατρύφησον τοῦ κυρίου“ (Psalm. 36, 4). κάτεισι δὲ ὥσπερ ἀπὸ πηγῆς τῆς σοφίας ποταμοῦ τρόπον ὁ θεῖος λόγος, ἵνα ἄρδῃ καὶ ποτίζῃ τὰ ὀλύμπια καὶ οὐράνια φιλαρέτων ψυχῶν βλαστήματα καὶ φυτά, ὡσανεὶ παράδεισον.
2:243ὁ δὲ ἱερὸς οὗτος λόγος ἀφορίζεται εἰς τέσσαρας ἀρχάς, λέγω δὲ εἰς τὰς τέσσαρας ἀρετὰς σχίζεται, ὧν ἑκάστη βασιλίς ἐστι· τὸ γὰρ ἀφορίζεσθαι εἰς ἀρχὰς οὐ τοπικοῖς ὅροις, ἀλλὰ βασιλείᾳ ἔοικεν, ἵν’ ἐπιδείξας τὰς ἀρετὰς εὐθὺς ἀποφήνῃ καὶ τὸν χρώμενον αὐταῖς σοφὸν βασιλέα, κεχειροτονημένον οὐ πρὸς ἀνθρώπων, ἀλλ’ ὑπὸ τῆς ἀψευδοῦς καὶ ἀδεκάστου καὶ μόνης ἐλευθέρας φύσεως.
2:244λέγουσι γὰρ τῷ Ἀβραὰμ οἱ κατιδόντες αὐτοῦ τὸ ἀστεῖον· „βασιλεὺς παρὰ θεοῦ εἶ σὺ ἐν ἡμῖν“ (Gen. 23, 6), δόγμα τιθέμενοι τοῖς περὶ φιλοσοφίαν διατρίβουσιν, ὅτι μόνος ὁ σοφὸς ἄρχων καὶ βασιλεὺς καὶ ἡ ἀρετὴ ἀνυπεύθυνος ἀρχή τε καὶ βασιλεία.
Book 2, §§220–244
2:220And the most evident proof of the unchangeable power which exists in him is this world, which is always in the same place and in the same condition. And if the world is immovable how can the Creator of it be any thing but firm? In the second place the sacred scriptures are likewise most infallible witnesses;
2:221for it is said in them, where the words are put into the mouth of God, "I stand here and there, before you were dwelling upon the rock," which is an expression equivalent to, Thus am I who am visible to you, and am here: and I am there and everywhere, filling all places, standing and abiding in the same condition, being unchangeable, before you or any one of the objects of creation had any existence, being beheld upon the highest and most ancient authority of power, from which the creation of all existing things was shed forth, and the stream of wisdom flowed;
2:222"for I am he who brought the stream of water out of the solid rock," is said in another place. And Moses also bears witness to the immutability of the Deity, where he says, "I saw the place where the God of Israel Stood;" intimating enigmatically that he is not given to change by speaking here of his standing, and of his being firmly established.
2:223But there is in the Deity such an excessive degree of stability and firmness, that he gave even to the most excellent natures a share of his durability as his most excellent possession: and presently afterwards he, the most ancient author of all things, namely God, says that he is about to erect firmly his covenant full of grace (and that means his law and his word) in the soul of the just man as on a solid foundation, which shall be an image in the likeness of God, when he says to Noah, "I will establish my covenant with thee."
2:224And besides this, he also indicates two other things, one that justice is in no respect different from the covenant of God, the other that other beings bestow gifts which are different from the persons who receive them; but God gives not only those gifts, but he gives also the very persons who receive them to themselves, for he has given me to myself, and every living being has he given to himself; for the expression, "I will establish my covenant with thee," is equivalent to, I will give thee to thyself.
2:225And all those who are truly lovers of God desire eagerly to escape from the storm of multiplied affairs and business in which there is always tempestuous weather, and rough sea, and confusion, and to anchor in the calm and safe untroubled haven of virtue.
2:226Do you not see what is said about the wise Abraham who "is standing before the Lord?" For when was it likely that the mind would be able to stand, no longer inclining to different sides like the balance in a scale, except when it is opposite to God, beholding him and being beheld by him?
2:227For perfect absence of motion comes to it in two ways, either from beholding him with whom nothing can be compared, because he is not attracted by anything resembling himself, or from being beheld by him, because which he considered worthy, the ruler has assigned to himself alone as the most excellent of beings. And indeed a divine admonition was given in the following terms to Moses: "Stand thou here with me," by which injunction both these things appear to be intimated, first, the fact that the good man is not moved, and secondly, the universal stability of the living God.
2:228For, in real truth, whatever is akin or near to God is appropriated by him, becoming steady and stationary by reason of his unchangeableness; and the mind, being at rest, well knows how great a blessing rest is, and admiring, its own beauty, it conceives that either it is assigned to God alone as his, or else to that intermediate nature which is between the mortal and the immortal race;
2:229at all events, it says, "And I stood in the midst between the Lord and you," not meaning by these words that he was standing on his own feet, but wishing to indicate that the mind of the wise man, being delivered from all storms and wars, and enjoying unruffled calm and profound peace, is superior indeed to man, but inferior to God.
2:230For the ordinary human mind is influenced by opinion, and is thrown into confusion by any passing circumstances; but the other is blessed and happy, and free from all participation in evil. And the good man is on the borders, so that one may appropriately say that he is neither God nor man, but that he touches the extremities of both, being connected with the mortal race by his manhood, and with the immortal race by his virtue.
2:231And there is something which closely resembles this in the passage of scripture concerning the high priest; "For when," says the scripture, "he goes into the holy of holies, he will not be a man till he has gone out again." But if at that time he is not a man, it is clear that he is not God either, but a minister of God, belonging as to his mortal nature to creation, but as to his immortal nature to the uncreated God.
2:232And he is placed in the middle class until he again goes forth among the things which belong to the body and to the flesh. And this is the order of things according to nature, when the mind, being entirely occupied with divine love, bends its course towards the temple of God, and approaches it with all possible earnestness and zeal, it becomes inspired, and forgets all other things, and forgets itself also. It remembers him alone, and depends on him alone, who is attended by it as by a body-guard, and who receives its ministrations, to whom it consecrates and offers up the sacred and untainted virtues.
2:233But when the inspiration has ceased, and the excessive desire has relaxed, then it returns from divine things and becomes a man again, mixing with human affairs, which were awaiting him in the vestibule, that they might carry him off while gazing only on the things in them.
2:234Moses therefore describes the perfect man as being neither God nor man, but, as I said before, something on the border between the uncreated and the perishable nature. Again, he classes him who is improving and advancing towards perfection in the region between the dead and the living, meaning by "the living" those persons who dwell with wisdom, and by "the dead" those who rejoice in folly;
2:235for it is said with respect to Aaron, that "He stood between the dead and the living, and the plague was stayed." For he who is making progress is not reckoned among those who are dead as to the life of virtue, inasmuch as he has a desire and admiration of what is honourable, nor among those who are living in extreme and perfect prosperity, for there is still something wanting to the end, but he touches both extremes;
2:236on which account the expression, "the plague was stayed," is very properly used rather than "the plague ceased;" for in those who are perfect the things which break, and crush, and destroy the soul cease; but in those who are advancing towards perfection, they are only diminished, as if they were only cut short and checked.
2:237Since then all steadiness, and stability, and the abiding for ever in the same place unchangeably and immovably, is first of all seen in the living God, and next in the word of the living God, which he has called his covenant; and in the third place in the wise man, and in the fourth degree in him who is advancing towards perfection, what could induce the wicked mind, which is liable to all sorts of curses, to think that it is able to stand by itself, while it is in reality borne about as in a deluge, and dragged hither and thither by the incessant eddies of things flowing in through the dead and agitated body?
2:238"For I thought," says the scripture, "that I was standing on the bank of the river:" and by the word river we say that speech is symbolically meant, since both these things are borne outward, and flow on with a vigorous and sustained speed. And the one is at one time filled up with a great abundance of water, and the other with a quantity of verbs and nouns, and at another time they are both empty and relaxed, and in a state of quiescence;
2:239again, they are of use inasmuch as the one irrigates the fields, and the other fertilizes the souls of those who receive it. And at times they are injurious by reason of overflowing, as then the one deluges the land on its borders, and the other troubles and confuses the reason of those who do not attend to it.
2:240Therefore speech is compared to a river, and the nature of speech is twofold, the one sort being better and the other worse; that is, the better kind which does good, and that of necessity is the worse kind which does harm;
2:241and Moses has given most conspicuous examples of each kind to those who are able to see, for he says, "For a river goes out of Eden to water the Paradise, and from thence it is divided into four branches:"
2:242and by the name Eden he means the wisdom of the living God, and the interpretation of the name Eden is "delight," because I imagine wisdom is the delight of God, and God is the delight of wisdom, as it is said also in the Psalms, "Delight thou in the Lord." And the divine word, like a river, flows forth from wisdom as from a spring, in order to irrigate and fertilize the celestial and heavenly shoots and plants of such souls as love virtue, as if they were a paradise.
2:243And this sacred word is divided into four beginnings, by which I mean it is portioned out into four virtues, each of which is a princess, for to be divided into beginnings, does not resemble divisions of place, but a kingdom, in order that any one, after having shown the virtues as boundaries, may immediately proceed to show the wise man who follows them to be a king, being elected as such, not by men, but by the only free nature which cannot err, and which cannot be corrupted;
2:244for those who behold the excellence of Abraham say unto him, "Thou art a king, sent from God among us:" proposing as a maxim, for those who study philosophy, that the wise man alone is a ruler and a king, and that virtue is the only irresponsible authority and sovereignty.
Book 2, §§245–269
2:245τοῦτον τὸν λόγον εἰκάσας ποταμῷ τις τῶν ἑταίρων Μωυσέως ἐν ὕμνοις εἶπεν· „ὁ ποταμὸς τοῦ θεοῦ ἐπληρώθη ὑδάτων“ (Psalm. 64, 10). καίτοι τινὰ τῶν ἐπὶ γῆς ῥεόντων ἄλογον κυριολογεῖσθαι· ἀλλ’, ὡς ἔοικε, πλήρη τοῦ σοφίας νάματος τὸν θεῖον λόγον διασυνίστησι, μηδὲν ἔρημον καὶ κενὸν ἑαυτοῦ μέρος ἔχοντα, μᾶλλον δέ, ὡς εἶπέ τις, ὅλον δι’ ὅλων ἀναχεόμενον καὶ αἰρόμενον εἰς ὕψος διὰ τὴν συνεχῆ καὶ ἐπάλληλον τῆς ἀεννάου πηγῆς ἐκείνης φοράν.
2:246ἔστι δὲ καὶ ἕτερον ᾆσμα τοιοῦτον· „τὸ ὅρμημα τοῦ ποταμοῦ εὐφραίνει τὴν πόλιν τοῦ θεοῦ“ (Psalm. 45, 5). ποίαν πόλιν; ἡ γὰρ νῦν οὖσα ἱερὰ πόλις, ἐν ᾗ καὶ ἅγιος νεώς ἐστι, μακρὰν ὥσπερ θαλάττης καὶ ποταμῶν συνῴκισται· ὡς δῆλον εἶναι, ὅτι τοῦ προφανοῦς ἕτερόν τι βούλεται δι’ ὑπονοιῶν παραστῆσαι.
2:247τῷ γὰρ ὄντι τοῦ θείου λόγου ῥύμη * * * καὶ συνεχῶς μεθ’ ὁρμῆς ἐν τάξει φερομένη πάντα διὰ πάντων ἀναχεῖ τε καὶ εὐφραίνει.
2:248πόλιν γὰρ θεοῦ καθ’ ἕνα μὲν τρόπον τὸν κόσμον καλεῖ, ὃς ὅλον τὸν κρατῆρα τοῦ θείου πόματος δεξάμενος ἠκρατίσατο καὶ γανωθεὶς ἀναφαιρέτου καὶ ἀσβέστου τῆς εἰς ἅπαντα τὸν [ἐπὶ τὸν] αἰῶνα εὐφροσύνης ἐπέλαχε, καθ’ ἕτερον δὲ τὴν ψυχὴν τοῦ σοφοῦ, ᾗ λέγεται καὶ ἐμπεριπατεῖν ὁ θεὸς ὡς ἐν πόλει· „περιπατήσω” γάρ φησιν „ἐν ὑμῖν, καὶ ἔσομαι [ἐν] ὑμῶν θεός“ (Lev. 26, 12).
2:249καὶ ψυχῇ δ’ εὐδαίμονι τὸ ἱερώτατον ἔκπωμα προτεινούσῃ τὸν ἑαυτῆς λογισμὸν τίς ἐπιχεῖ τοὺς ἱεροὺς κυάθους τῆς πρὸς ἀλήθειαν εὐφροσύνης, ὅτι μὴ ὁ οἰνοχόος τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ συμποσίαρχος λόγος, οὐ διαφέρων τοῦ πόματος, ἀλλ’ αὐτὸς ἄκρατος ὤν, τὸ γάνωμα, τὸ ἥδυσμα, ἡ ἀνάχυσις, ἡ εὐθυμία, τὸ χαρᾶς, τὸ εὐφροσύνης ἀμβρόσιον, ἵνα καὶ αὐτοὶ ποιητικοῖς ὀνόμασι χρησώμεθα, φάρμακον;
2:250ἡ δὲ θεοῦ πόλις ὑπὸ Ἑβραίων Ἱερουσαλὴμ καλεῖται, ἧς μεταληφθὲν τοὔνομα ὅρασίς ἐστιν εἰρήνης. ὥστε μὴ ζήτει τὴν τοῦ ὄντος πόλιν ἐν κλίμασι γῆς — οὐ γὰρ ἐκ ξύλων ἢ λίθων δεδημιούργηται —, ἀλλ’ ἐν ψυχῇ ἀπολέμῳ καὶ ὀξυδορκούσῃ τέλος προτεθειμένῃ τὸν [δὲ] θεωρητικὸν καὶ εἰρηναῖον βίον.
2:251ἐπεὶ καὶ τίνα σεμνότερον καὶ ἁγιώτερον εὕροι τις ἂν οἶκον ἐν τοῖς οὖσι θεῷ ἢ φιλοθεάμονα διάνοιαν, πάνθ’ ὁρᾶν ἐπειγομένην καὶ μηδὲ ὄναρ στάσεως ἢ ταραχῆς ἐφιεμένην;
2:252ὑπηχεῖ δέ μοι πάλιν τὸ εἰωθὸς ἀφανῶς ἐνομιλεῖν πνεῦμα ἀόρατον καί φησιν· ὦ οὗτος, ἔοικας ἀνεπιστήμων εἶναι καὶ μεγάλου καὶ περιμαχήτου πράγματος, ὅπερ ἀφθόνως — πολλὰ γὰρ καὶ ἄλλα εὐκαίρως ὑφηγησάμην — ἀναδιδάξω.
2:253ἴσθι δή, ὦ γενναῖε, ὅτι θεὸς μόνος ἡ ἀψευδεστάτη καὶ πρὸς ἀλήθειάν ἐστιν εἰρήνη, ἡ δὲ γενητὴ καὶ φθαρτὴ οὐσία πᾶσα συνεχὴς πόλεμος. καὶ γὰρ ὁ μὲν θεὸς ἑκούσιον, ἀνάγκη δὲ ἡ οὐσία· ὃς ἂν οὖν ἰσχύσῃ πόλεμον μὲν καὶ ἀνάγκην καὶ γένεσιν καὶ φθορὰν καταλιπεῖν, αὐτομολῆσαι δὲ πρὸς τὸ ἀγένητον, πρὸς τὸ ἄφθαρτον, πρὸς τὸ ἑκούσιον, πρὸς εἰρήνην, λέγοιτ’ ἂν ἐνδίκως ἐνδιαίτημα καὶ πόλις εἶναι θεοῦ.
2:254μηδὲν οὖν διαφερέτω σοι ἢ ὅρασιν εἰρήνης ἢ ὅρασιν θεοῦ τὸ αὐτὸ ὑποκείμενον ὀνομάζειν, ὅτι δὲ τῶν πολυωνύμων τοῦ ὄντος δυνάμεων οὐ θιασώτης μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἔξαρχός ἐστιν εἰρήνης.
2:255καὶ Ἀβραὰμ μέντοι τῷ σοφῷ δώσειν φησὶ κλῆρον γῆς „ἀπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ Αἰγύπτου ἕως τοῦ ποταμοῦ τοῦ μεγάλου Εὐφράτου" (Gen. 15, 18), οὐ χώρας ἀποτομὴν μᾶλλον ἢ τὴν περὶ αὐτοὺς ἡμᾶς ἀμείνω μοῖραν. Αἰγύπτου μὲν γὰρ ἀπεικάζεται ποταμῷ τὸ ἡμέτερον σῶμα καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ δι’ αὐτοῦ ἐγγινόμενα πάθη, τῷ δὲ Εὐφράτῃ ψυχὴ καὶ τὰ φίλα ταύτῃ.
2:256δόγμα δὴ τίθεται βιωφελέστατον καὶ συνεκτικώτατον, ὅτι ὁ σπουδαῖος κλῆρον ἔλαχε ψυχὴν καὶ τὰς ψυχῆς ἀρετάς, ὥσπερ ὁ φαῦλος ἔμπαλιν σῶμα καὶ τὰς σώματος καὶ διὰ σώματος κακίας.
2:257τὸ δὲ ἀπὸ δύο δηλοῖ, ἓν μὲν τὸ σὺν ἐκείνῳ ἀφ’ οὗ λέγεται, ἕτερον δὲ τὸ χωρὶς αὐτοῦ. ὅταν μὲν γὰρ λέγωμεν ἀπὸ πρωΐας ἄχρις ἑσπέρας ὥρας εἶναι δώδεκα καὶ ἀπὸ νεομηνίας ἄχρι τριακάδος ἡμέρας τριάκοντα, συγκατατάττομεν τήν τε πρώτην ὥραν καὶ τὴν νεομηνίαν· ὅταν δέ τις ἀπὸ τῆς πόλεως φῇ τὸν ἀγρὸν ἀπέχειν σταδίους τρεῖς ἢ τέτταρας, δίχα τῆς πόλεως δήπου φησίν.
2:258ὥστε καὶ νῦν τὸ „ἀπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ Αἰγύπτου“ νομιστέον τὸ χωρὶς ἐκείνου παραλαμβάνεσθαι· βούλεται γὰρ διοικίσας ἡμᾶς τῶν σωματικῶν, ἅπερ ἐν ῥύσει καὶ φθορᾷ φθειρομένῃ καὶ φθειρούσῃ θεωρεῖται, κλῆρον ψυχῆς λαβεῖν μετὰ τῶν ἀφθάρτων καὶ ἀφθαρσίας ἀξίων ἀρετῶν.
2:259οὕτω μέντοι τὸ εἰκάσθαι ποταμῷ λόγον ἐπαινετὸν ἰχνηλατοῦντες εὑρήκαμεν. ὁ δὲ ψεκτὸς αὐτὸς ἄρα ἦν ὁ Αἰγύπτιος ποταμός, ἀνάγωγός τις καὶ ἀμαθής, ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, ἄψυχος λόγος· οὗ χάριν καὶ εἰς αἷμα μεταβάλλει (Exod. 7, 20), τρέφειν οὐ δυνάμενος — ὁ γὰρ ἀπαιδευσίας λόγος οὐ πότιμος — καὶ εὐτοκεῖ μέντοι βατράχοις (Exod. 8,6) ἀναίμοις καὶ ἀψύχοις, καινὸν καὶ τραχὺν ἦχον, ἄλγημα ἀκοῆς, ἀπηχοῦσι.
2:260λέγεται δέ, ὅτι καὶ οἱ ἐν αὐτῷ πάντες ἰχθύες ἐφθάρησαν (Exod. 7, 21), οἳ συμβολικῶς εἰσι τὰ νοήματα· ταῦτα γὰρ ἐννήχεται καὶ ἐγγίνεται ὡς ἐν ποταμῷ τῷ λόγῳ, ζῴοις ἐοικότα καὶ ψυχοῦντα αὐτόν· ἐν δὲ ἀπαιδεύτῳ λόγῳ τέθνηκε τὰ ἐνθυμήματα· συνετὸν γὰρ οὐδὲν ἔστιν εὑρεῖν, ἀλλὰ κολῳῶν τινας ἀκόσμους καὶ ἀμετροεπεῖς, ὡς εἶπέ τις, φωνάς.
2:261Περὶ μὲν δὴ τούτων ἅλις. ἐπεὶ δὲ οὐ μόνον στάσιν καὶ ποταμόν, ἀλλὰ καὶ χείλη ποταμοῦ φαντασιωθῆναι ὁμολογεῖ φάσκων· „ᾤμην ἑστάναι παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τοῦ ποταμοῦ“ (Gen. 41, 17), ἀναγκαῖον ἂν εἴη καὶ περὶ χείλους τὰ καίρια ὑπομνῆσαι.
2:262φαίνεται τοίνυν ἕνεκα δυεῖν τῶν ἀναγκαιοτάτων ἡ φύσις χείλη ζῴοις καὶ μάλιστα ἀνθρώποις ἁρμόσασθαι· ἑνὸς μὲν ἡσυχίας — ἔρυμα γὰρ ταῦτα καὶ φραγμὸς ὀχυρώτατος φωνῆς —, ἑτέρου δὲ ἑρμηνείας· διὰ γὰρ τούτων τὸ τῶν λόγων νᾶμα φέρεται· συναχθέντων μὲν γὰρ ἐπέχεται, φέρεσθαι δ’ ἀμήχανον μὴ διαστάντων.
2:263ἐκ δὲ τούτου γυμνάζει καὶ συγκροτεῖ πρὸς ἄμφω, τὸ λέγειν καὶ ἡσυχάζειν, ἑκατέρου τὸν ἁρμόττοντα καιρὸν παραφυλάττοντας. οἷον ἀκοῆς ἄξιόν τι λέγεται; πρόσεχε μηδὲν ἐναντιούμενος ἐν ἡσυχίᾳ κατὰ τὸ Μωυσέως παράγγελμα, τὸ „σιώπα καὶ ἄκουε“ (Deut. 27, 9).
2:264τῶν γὰρ εἰς τὰς ἐριστικὰς γνωσιμαχίας ἀφικνουμένων οὐδ’ ἂν εἷς κυρίως οὔτε λέγειν οὔτ’ ἀκούειν νομισθείη, τῷ δὲ μέλλοντι πρὸς ἀλήθειαν * * * ὠφέλιμον.
2:265πάλιν ὅταν ἴδῃς ἐν τοῖς τοῦ βίου πολέμοις καὶ κακοῖς τὴν ἵλεω τοῦ θεοῦ χεῖρα καὶ δύναμιν ὑπερέχουσαν καὶ προασπίζουσαν, ἠρέμησον· οὐ γὰρ δεῖται συμμαχίας ὁ βοηθὸς οὗτος. ἔστι δὲ καὶ τούτου δεῖγμα τὸ ἐν ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἀναγραφαῖς κατακείμενον, τὸ „κύριος πολεμήσει ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς σιγήσεσθε“ (Exod. 14, 14).
2:266ἐάν γε μὴν ἴδῃς τὰ γνήσια ἔγγονα καὶ πρωτότοκα Αἰγύπτου φθειρόμενα (Exod. 11, 5), τὸ ἐπιθυμεῖν, τὸ ἥδεσθαι, τὸ λυπεῖσθαι, τὸ φοβεῖσθαι, τὸ ἀδικεῖν, τὸ ἀφραίνειν, τὸ ἀκολασταίνειν καὶ ὅσα τούτων ἀδελφὰ καὶ συγγενῆ, καταπλαγεὶς ἡσύχαζε, τὸ φοβερὸν τοῦ θεοῦ κράτος ὑποπτήξας.
2:267„οὐ γὰρ γρύξει“ φησί „κύων τῇ γλώσσῃ, οὐδ’ ἀπ’ ἀνθρώπου ἕως κτήνους“ (ibid. 7), ἴσον τῷ οὔτε τὴν κυνώδη γλῶσσαν ὑλακτοῦσάν τε καὶ κράζουσαν οὔτε τὸν ἐν ἡμῖν ἄνθρωπον, ἡγεμόνα νοῦν, οὔτε τὸ κτηνῶδες θρέμμα, τὴν αἴσθησιν, προσήκει γαυριᾶν, ὅταν ἀναιρεθέντος τοῦ παρ’ ἡμᾶς ὅλον ἔξωθεν τὸ συμμαχικὸν αὐτοκέλευστον ὑπερασπιοῦν ἥκῃ.
2:268πολλοὶ δὲ συμβαίνουσι καιροὶ μὴ ἐφαρμόζοντες ἡσυχίᾳ, τὰς δὲ καταλογάδην ῥήσεις ἐπιζητοῦντες· ὧν πάλιν ἰδεῖν ἔστιν ἀνακείμενα ὑπομνήματα. πῶς; ἀγαθοῦ τις γέγονεν ἀπροσδόκητος μετουσία; καλὸν οὖν εὐχαριστῆσαι καὶ τὸν ἐπιπέμψαντα ὑμνῆσαι. τί οὖν τὸ ἀγαθόν;
2:269τέθνηκε τὸ ἐπιτιθέμενον ἡμῖν πάθος καὶ πρηνὲς ἄταφον ἔρριπται; μὴ μέλλωμεν οὖν, ἀλλὰ χορὸν στησάμενοι τὴν ἱεροπρεπεστάτην ᾄδωμεν ᾠδήν, παρακελευόμενοι λέγειν πᾶσιν· „ᾄσωμεν τῷ κυρίῳ, ἐνδόξως γὰρ δεδόξασται· ἵππον καὶ ἀναβάτην ἔρριψεν εἰς θάλασσαν“ (Exod. 15, 1).
Book 2, §§245–269
2:245Accordingly, one of the followers of Moses, having compared this speech to a river, has said in the Psalms, "The river of God was filled with water;" and it is absurd to give such a title to any of the rivers which flow upon the earth. But as it seems the psalmist is here speaking of the divine word, which is full of the streams of wisdom, and which has no part of itself empty or desolate, or rather, as some one has said, which is diffused everywhere over the universe, and is raised up on high, on account of the continued and incessant rapidity of that ever-flowing spring.
2:246There is also another expression in the Psalms, such as this, "The course of the river makes glad the city of God." What city? For the holy city, which exists at present, in which also the holy temple is established, at a great distance from any sea or river, so that it is clear, that the writer here means, figuratively, to speak of some other city than the visible city of God.
2:247For, in good truth, the continual stream of the divine word, being borne on incessantly with rapidity and regularity, is diffused universally over everything, giving joy to all.
2:248And in one sense he calls the world the city of God, as having received the whole cup of the divine draught, and being gladdened thereby, so as to have derived from it an imperishable joy, of which it cannot be deprived for ever. But in another sense he applies this title to the soul of the wise man, in which God is said also to walk, as if in a city, "For," says God, "I will walk in you, and I will be your God in you."
2:249And who can pour over the happy soul which proffers its own reason as the most sacred cup, the holy goblets of true joy, except the cup-bearer of God, the master of the feast, the word? not differing from the draught itself, but being itself in an unmixed state, the pure delight and sweetness, and pouring forth, and joy, and ambrosial medicine of pleasure and happiness; if we too may, for a moment, employ the language of the poets.
2:250But that which is called by the Hebrews the city of God is Jerusalem, which name being interpreted means, "the sight of peace." So they do not look for the city of the living God in the region of the earth, for it is not made of wood or of stone, but seek it in the soul which is free from war, and which proposes to those who are endowed with acuteness of sight a contemplative and peaceful life;
2:251since where could any find a more venerable and holy abode for God amid all existing things, than the mind fond of contemplation, which is eager to behold every thing and which does not, even in a dream, feel a wish for sedition or disturbance?
2:252And again, the invisible spirit which is accustomed to converse with me in an unseen manner prompts me with a suggestion, and says, O my friend, you seem to be ignorant of an important and most desirable matter which I will explain to you completely; for I have also in a most seasonable manner explained many other things to you also.
2:253Know, then, O excellent man, that God alone is the truest, and most real, and genuine peace, and that every created and perishable essence is continual war. For God is something voluntary, and mortal essence is necessity. Whoever, therefore, is able to forsake war, and necessity, and creation, and destruction, and to pass over to the uncreated being, to the immortal God, to the voluntary principle, and to peace, may justly be called the abode and city of God.
2:254Do not, therefore, consider it a different thing whether you speak of the sight of peace or the sight of God, as they are the same thing; because peace is not only the companion but also the chief of the powers of the living God, which are distinguished by many names.
2:255And, moreover, he says to the wise Abraham, "that he will give him an inheritance of land from the river of Egypt to the great river, the river Euphrates," not meaning a portion of the land so much as a better portion in respect of our own selves. For our own body, and the passions which exist in it, and which are engendered by it, are likened to the river of Egypt, but the soul and the passions which are dear to that are likened to the river Euphrates.
2:256And here a doctrine is laid down, at once most profitable to life and of the highest importance, that the good man has received for his inheritance the soul and the virtues of the soul: just as, on the contrary, the wicked man has received for his share the body and the vices of the body, and those which are engendered by the body.
2:257And the expression "from," has a double sense. One, that by which the starting point from which it begins is included; the other that by which it is excluded. For when we say that from morning to evening there are twelve hours, or from the new moon to the end of the month there are thirty days, we are including in our enumeration both the first hour and the day of the new moon. And when any one says that such and such a field is three or four furlongs distant from the city, he clearly means to leave the city itself out of that measurement.
2:258So that now, too, we must consider that the expression, "from the river of Egypt," is to be understood so as not to include that river; for the writer intends to remove us to a distance from the things of the body which are seen to exist in a constant flow and course which is being destroyed and destroying, that so we may receive the inheritance of the soul with the imperishable virtues, which are, moreover, deserving of immortality.
2:259Thus, therefore, by tracing it out diligently, we have found that praiseworthy speech is likened to a river; but speech which is deserving of blame is the very river of Egypt itself, untractable, unwilling to learn, as one may say in a word, lifeless speech; for which reason it is also changed into blood, as not being able to afford sustenance. For the speech of ignorance is not wholesome, and it is productive of bloodless and lifeless frogs, which utter only a novel and harsh sound, a noise painful to the ear.
2:260And it is said, likewise, that all the fish in that river were destroyed. And by the fish are here figuratively meant the conceptions; for these things float about and exist in speech as in a river, resembling living things and filling the river with life. But in uninstructed speech all conceptions die; for it is not possible to find any thing intelligent in it, but only, as some one has said, some disorderly and unmusical voices of jackdaws.
2:261We have now then said enough on these subjects. But since he not only confesses that he saw in his dream, a standing and a river, but also the banks of a river, as his words are, "I thought that I was standing by the bank (χεῖλος) of the river." It must be desirable to say a few seasonable things also about the bank.
2:262Now there appears to be two most necessary objects on account of which nature has adapted lips (χείλη) to all animals, and especially to men; one for the sake of tranquillity, for they are the strongest bulwark and fortification of the voice; the other for the sake of distinctness, for it is through them that the stream of words issues forth. For when they are closed speech is checked; for it is impossible that it should be borne outward if they are not parted.
2:263And by these means nature prepares and trains man for both objects, speech and silence, watching the appropriate time for each employment. As for instance, is anything said worth listening to? Then attend, raising no obstacle, in perfect quiet, according to the injunction of Moses, "Be silent and hear."
2:264For of those persons who mix themselves up in contentious discussions there is not one who can properly be considered as either speaking or listening; but this is only advantageous to him who is about to do so.
2:265Again, when you see, amid the wars and disasters of life, the merciful hand of God and his favourable power held over you and standing in defence of you, be silent yourself; for that champion stands in no need of any assistance. And there are proofs of this fact recorded in the sacred writings; such, for instance, as the verse, "The Lord will fight for us, and ye shall be silent."
2:266And if you see the genuine offspring and the firstborn of Egypt destroyed, namely desire, and pleasures, and pain, and fear, and iniquity, and mirth, and intemperance, and all the other qualities which are similar and akin to these, then marvel and be silent, dreading the terrible power of God;
2:267for, say the scriptures, "Not a dog shall move his tongue, nor shall anything, man or beast, utter a sound;" which is equivalent to saying, It does not become either the impudent tongue to bark and curse—nor the man that is within us, that is to say, our dominant mind; nor the cattle-like beast which is within us, that is to say, the outward sense—to boast, when all the evil that was in us has been utterly destroyed, and when an ally from without comes of his own accord to hold his shield over us.
2:268But there are many occasions which are not well suited to silence: and if we go to the language of ordinary prose, of which we may again see memorials laid up, how did there, ever an unexpected participation in good take place to any one? It is well, therefore, to give thanks and to sing hymns in honour of him who bestowed it.
2:269What, then, is the good? The passion which is attacking us is dead, and is thrown out on its face without burial. Let not us delay, but standing still, let us sing that most sacred and becoming hymn, feeling that we are commanded to say to all men, "Let us sing unto the Lord, for he has triumphed gloriously; the horse and his rider hath he thrown into the sea."
Book 2, §§270–294
2:270ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἡ μὲν τοῦ πάθους φθορὰ καὶ μετανάστασις ἀγαθόν, ἀλλ’ οὐ τέλειον ἀγαθόν· ἡ δὲ σοφίας εὕρεσις ὑπερβάλλον καλόν· ἧς εὑρεθείσης ἅπας ὁ λεὼς οὐ καθ’ ἓν μέρος μουσικῆς, ἀλλὰ κατὰ πάσας αὐτῆς τὰς ἁρμονίας καὶ μελῳδίας ᾄσεται.
2:271„τότε“ γάρ φησιν „ᾖσεν Ἰσραὴλ τὸ ᾆσμα τοῦτο ἐπὶ τοῦ φρέατος“ (Num. 21, 17), λέγω δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς πάλαι μὲν κεκρυμμένης, ἀναζητηθείσης δὲ αὖθις καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἀνευρημένης βαθείας τὴν φύσιν ἐπιστήμης, ᾗ νόμος τὰς τῶν φιλοθεαμόνων ἄρδειν λογικὰς ἐν ψυχαῖς ἀρούρας.
2:272τί δέ; ὅταν συγκομίσωμεν τὸν γνήσιον διανοίας καρπόν, οὐ παραγγέλλει ἡμῖν ὁ ἱερὸς λόγος ὥσπερ ἐν καρτάλῳ (Deut. 26, 2. 4) τῷ λογισμῷ τὰς ἀπαρχὰς τῆς εὐφορίας ὧν ἤνθησεν, ὧν ἐβλάστησεν, ὧν ἐκαρποφόρησεν ἡ ψυχὴ καλῶν, ἐπιδεικνυμένους ἄντικρυς οὕτω ῥητορεύειν, τὰ εἰς τὸν τελεσφόρον θεὸν ἐγκώμια λέγοντας· „ἐξεκάθηρα τὰ ἅγια ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας μου“ (ibid. 13) καὶ ἐταμιευσάμην ἐν τῷ τοῦ θεοῦ οἴκῳ, ταμίας καὶ φύλακας αὐτῶν ἐπιστήσας τοὺς ἀριστίνδην ἐπιλελεγμένους πρὸς τὴν ἱερὰν νεωκορίαν.
2:273οὗτοι δέ εἰσι Λευῖται καὶ προσήλυτοι καὶ ὀρφανοὶ καὶ χῆραι (ibid.)· οἱ μὲν ἱκέται, οἱ δὲ μετανάσται καὶ πρόσφυγες, οἱ δὲ ἀπωρφανισμένοι καὶ κεχηρευκότες γενέσεως, θεὸν δὲ τὸν τῆς ψυχῆς θεραπευτρίδος ἄνδρα καὶ πατέρα γνήσιον ἐπιγεγραμμένοι.
2:274τοῦτον μὲν δὴ τὸν τρόπον καὶ λέγειν καὶ ἡσυχάζειν ἐμπρεπέστατον. τὸ δὲ ἐναντίον μεμελετήκασιν οἱ φαῦλοι· καὶ γὰρ ἡσυχίας ἐπιλήπτου καὶ ἑρμηνείας ὑπαιτίου ζηλωταὶ γεγόνασιν, ἑκάτερον ἐπ’ ὀλέθρῳ ἑαυτῶν τε καὶ ἑτέρων συγκροτοῦντες.
2:275τὸ δὲ πλέον ἐστὶν αὐτοῖς τῆς ἀσκήσεως ἐν τῷ λέγειν ἃ μὴ δεῖ· τὸ γὰρ στόμα διανοίξαντες καὶ ἐάσαντες ἀχαλίνωτον, καθάπερ ῥεῦμα ἀκατάσχετον, φέρεσθαι τὸν ἀκριτόμυθον, ᾗ φασιν οἱ ποιηταί, λόγον ἱᾶσι, μυρία τῶν ἀλυσιτελῶν προσεπισύροντα.
2:276τοιγαροῦν οἱ μὲν ἐπὶ συνηγορίαν ἡδονῆς καὶ ἐπιθυμίας καὶ πάσης πλεοναζούσης ὁρμῆς ἐτράποντο, ἄλογον πάθος ἐπιτειχίζοντες ἡγεμόνι λογισμῷ, ἔτι δὲ καὶ ταῖς ἐριστικαῖς φιλονεικίαις ἐπαποδυσάμενοι αποδυσάμενοι συνεπλάκησαν, ἐλπίσαντες τὸ ὁρατικὸν πηρῶσαι γένος καὶ κατὰ κρημνῶν καὶ βαράθρων, ἐξ ὧν οὐδ’ ἂν ἔτι γένοιτο διαναστῆναι, δυνήσεσθαι ῥῖψαι.
2:277ἔνιοι δὲ οὐ μόνον ἀντιπάλους ἑαυτοὺς τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης ἀπέφηναν ἀρετῆς, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῆς θείας· ἐπὶ τοσοῦτον ἀπονοίας ἤλασαν. τοῦ μὲν οὖν φιλοπαθοῦς ἔξαρχος ἀναγράφεται θιάσου τῆς Αἰγυπτίας χώρας ὁ βασιλεύς, Φαραώ· λέγεται γὰρ τῷ προφήτῃ· „ἰδοὺ αὐτὸς ἐκπορεύεται ἐπὶ τὸ ὕδωρ, καὶ στήσῃ συναντῶν αὐτῷ παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τοῦ ποταμοῦ“ (Exod. 7, 15).
2:278τοῦ μὲν γὰρ ἴδιον ἐπὶ τὴν φορὰν καὶ ἀνάχυσιν ἀεὶ τοῦ ἀλόγου πάθους ἐξιέναι· τοῦ δὲ σοφοῦ πολλῷ ῥέοντι τοῖς ὑπὲρ ἡδονῆς καὶ ἐπιθυμίας λόγοις ὑπαντιάσαι οὐ τοῖς ποσίν, ἀλλὰ τῇ γνώμῃ, βεβαίως καὶ ἀκλινῶς, ἐπὶ τοῦ ποταμίου χείλους, τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν ἐπὶ τοῦ στόματος καὶ τῆς γλώττης, ἅπερ ἦν ὄργανα λόγου· παγίως γὰρ ἐπιβὰς αὐτοῖς δυνήσεται τὰς συνηγορούσας τῷ πάθει πιθανότητας ἀνατρέψαι καὶ καταβαλεῖν.
2:279ὁὁ δὲ τοῦ ὁρατικοῦ γένους ἐχθρὸς ὁὁ τοῦ Φαραὼ λαός ἐστιν, ὃς ἐπιτιθέμενος καὶ διώκων καὶ δουλούμενος ἀρετὴν οὐκ ἐπαύσατο, ἕως κακὰς ὧν διέθηκε τὰς ἀμοιβὰς εὕρατο, πελάγει τῶν ἀδικημάτων καὶ τρικυμίαις, ἃς τὸ λυττῶν πάθος ἀνήγειρε, καταποντωθείς, ὡς ὑπερβάλλουσαν θέαν καὶ νίκην ἀνανταγώνιστον καὶ χαρὰν ἐλπίδος μείζονα τὸν καιρὸν ἐνεγκεῖν ἐκεῖνον.
2:280διὸ λέγεται· „εἶδεν Ἰσραὴλ τοὺς Αἰγυπτίους τεθνηκότας παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τῆς θαλάσσης“ (Exod. 14, 30). μεγάλη γε ἡ ὑπέρμαχος χείρ, ἀναγκάζουσα παρὰ στόματι καὶ χείλεσι καὶ λόγῳ πίπτειν τοὺς τὰ ὄργανα ταῦτα κατὰ τῆς ἀληθείας ἀκονησαμένους, ἵνα μὴ ὀθνείοις ἀλλὰ ἰδίοις ὅπλοις οἱ καθ’ ἑτέρων ἀναλαβόντες αὐτὰ θνῄσκωσι.
2:281τρία δ’ εὐαγγελίζεται τῇ ψυχῇ τὰ κάλλιστα, ἓν μὲν ἀπώλειαν Αἰγυπτιακῶν παθῶν, ἕτερον δὲ τὸ μὴ παρ’ ἑτέρῳ χωρίῳ, ἀλλὰ τῆς ἁλμυρᾶς καὶ πικρᾶς πηγῆς, ὡς ἂν θαλάττης, χείλεσι, δι’ ὧν ὁ πολέμιος ἀρετῆς σοφιστὴς λόγος ἐξεκέχυτο, τελευταῖον δὲ τὴν θέαν τοῦ πτώματος.
2:282μηδὲν γὰρ ἀόρατον εἴη καλόν, ἀλλὰ πρὸς * * * καὶ λαμπρὸν ἥλιον ἄγοιτο· καὶ γὰρ τοὐναντίον εἰς βαθὺ σκότος καὶ * * * ἄξιον τὸ κακόν. καὶ τοῦτο μὲν μηδ’ ἐκ τύχης ἰδεῖν ποτε γένοιτο, τὸ δὲ ἀγαθὸν μείζοσιν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἀεὶ περιαθροῖτο. τί δὲ οὕτως ἀγαθόν, ὡς ζῆσαι τὰ καλὰ καὶ ἀποθανεῖν τὰ φαῦλα;
2:283τρεῖς τοίνυν ἦσαν οἱ τὴν τῶν λόγων δεινότητα μέχρις οὐρανοῦ τείναντες. οὗτοι μελέτην κατὰ τῆς φύσεως, μᾶλλον δὲ κατὰ τῆς ἑαυτῶν ψυχῆς ἐμελέτησαν φάσκοντες, μόνον εἶναι τὸ αἰσθητὸν καὶ ὁρώμενον τοῦτο, οὔτε γενόμενόν ποτε οὔτ’ αὖθις φθαρησόμενον, ἀγένητον δὲ καὶ ἄφθαρτον, ἀνεπιτρόπευτον, ἀκυβέρνητον, ἀπροστασίαστον.
2:284εἶτ’ ἐπ’ ἄλλοις ἄλλα συνθέντες ἐπιχειρήματα, δόγμα ἀδόκιμον οἰκοδομοῦντες εἰς ὕψος οἷα πύργον ἐξῆραν. λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι „ἦν πᾶσα ἡ γῆ χεῖλος ἕν“ (Gen. 11,1), συμφωνία τῶν τῆς ψυχῆς μερῶν πάντων ἀσύμφωνος ἐπὶ τῷ κινῆσαι τὸ συνεκτικώτατον ἐν τοῖς οὖσιν, ἀρχήν.
2:285τοιγαροῦν ἐλπίσαντας αὐτοὺς εἰς οὐρανὸν ταῖς ἐπινοίαις ἀναδραμεῖσθαι ἐπὶ καθαιρέσει τῆς αἰωνίου βασιλείας ἡ μεγάλη καὶ ἀκαθαίρετος καταβάλλει χείρ, καὶ τὸ οἰκοδομηθὲν δόγμα συνανατρέψασα.
2:286κέκληται δὲ ὁ τόπος „σύγχυσις“, οἰκεῖον ὄνομα τῷ καινουργηθέντι τολμήματι. τί γὰρ ἀναρχίας συγχυτικώτερον; οὐκ οἰκίαι μὲν ἀνηγεμόνευτοι προσκρουσμάτων γέμουσι καὶ ταραχῆς; ἀβασίλευτοι δ’ ἐαθεῖσαι πόλεις ὑπὸ ὀχλοκρατίας, ἐναντίου καὶ μεγίστου, φθείρονται;
2:287καὶ χῶραι δὲ καὶ ἔθνη καὶ κλίματα γῆς, ὧν ἀρχαὶ κατελύθησαν, οὐ παλαιὰς καὶ μεγάλας εὐδαιμονίας ἀπέβαλον; καὶ τί δεῖ τὰ ἀνθρώπινα λέγεσθαι;
2:288οὐδὲ γὰρ αἱ ἄλλαι τῶν ζῴων ἀγέλαι, πτηνῶν, χερσαίων, ἐνύδρων, ἄνευ τινὸς ἀγελάρχου συνεστᾶσιν, ἀλλὰ ποθοῦσι καὶ περιέπουσιν αἰεὶ τὸν οἰκεῖον ἡγεμόνα, ὡς μόνον ἀγαθῶν αἴτιον, οὗ κατὰ τὴν ἀπουσίαν σκεδάννυνται καὶ διαφθείρονται.
2:289εἶτ’ οἰόμεθα τοῖς μὲν περιγείοις, ἃ βραχυτάτη μοῖρα τοῦ παντός ἐστιν, ἀρχὴν μὲν ἀγαθῶν, ἀναρχίαν δὲ κακῶν εἶναι αἰτίαν, τὸν δὲ κόσμον οὐ διὰ τὴν τοῦ βασιλεύοντος θεοῦ προήγησιν εὐδαιμονίας τῆς ἄκρας πεπληρῶσθαι;
2:290δίκην οὖν ἁρμόττουσαν οἷς ἐτίθεντο διδόασι· φύραντες γὰρ τὸ ἱερὸν περὶ * * * ἀναρχίας φυρόμενοι ἐπεῖδον, συγχυθέντες οὐ συγχέαντες. ἕως δὲ οὔπω τιμωρίαν δεδώκασιν, ὑπὸ φρενοβλαβείας φυσώμενοι τὴν μὲν τῶν ὅλων ἀρχὴν ἀνοσίοις λόγοις καθαιροῦσιν, αὑτοὺς δὲ ἄρχοντας καὶ βασιλέας ἀναγράφουσι, τὸ ἀκαθαίρετον τοῦ θεοῦ κράτος γενέσει τῇ ἀδιαστάτως ἀπολλυμένῃ καὶ
2:291φθειρομένῃ περιάπτοντες. ἐπιτραγῳδοῦντες γοῦν καὶ ἐπικομπάζοντες εἰώθασιν οἱ καταγέλαστοι λέγειν ταῦτα· ἡμεῖς οἱ ἡγεμόνες, ἡμεῖς οἱ δυναστεύοντες· ἐφ’ ἡμῖν ὁρμεῖ τὰ πάντα· ἀγαθῶν καὶ τῶν ἐναντίων τίνες αἴτιοι ὅτι μὴ ἡμεῖς; τὸ εὖ καὶ κακῶς ἐργάσασθαι τίσιν ὅτι μὴ ἡμῖν ἀψευδέστατα ἀνάκειται; φλυαροῦσι δὲ ἄλλως οἱ δυνάμεως ἀοράτου τὰ πάντα φάσκοντες ἐξῆφθαι, ἣν πρυτανεύειν τῶν κατὰ τὸν κόσμον ἀνθρωπείων τε καὶ θείων νομίζουσι.
2:292τοιαῦτα καταλαζονευσάμενοι, ἐὰν μὲν ὥσπερ ἐκ μέθης νήψαντες ἐν ἑαυτοῖς γένωνται καὶ τῆς παροινίας, ἣν παρῴνησαν, εἰς αἴσθησιν ἐλθόντες αἰδεσθῶσι καὶ κακίσωσιν ἑαυτοὺς ἐφ’ οἷς ὑπ’ ἀγνώμονος γνώμης ἐξαμαρτάνειν προήχθησαν, ἀκολακεύτῳ καὶ ἀδεκάστῳ χρησάμενοι συμβούλῳ μετανοίᾳ, τὴν ἵλεω τοῦ ὄντος δύναμιν ἐξευμενισάμενοι παλινῳδίαις ἀντὶ βεβήλων ἱεραῖς, ἀμνηστίαν εὑρήσονται παντελῆ.
2:293ἐὰν δὲ ἀφηνιασταὶ καὶ σκληραύχενες μέχρι τοῦ παντὸς γενόμενοι σκιρτῶσιν, ὡς αὐτόνομοι καὶ ἐλεύθεροι καὶ ἑτέρων ἡγεμόνες ὄντες, ἀπαραιτήτῳ ἀνάγκῃ καὶ ἀμειλίκτῳ τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἐν ἅπασι μικροῖς τε καὶ μεγάλοις οὐδένειαν αἰσθήσονται.
2:294ὁ γὰρ ἐπιβεβηκὼς ἡνίοχος ὡς ἅρματι πτηνῷ τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ χαλινὸν ἐμβαλὼν καὶ τὸ κεχαλασμένον τῶν ἡνιῶν ὀπίσω βίᾳ τείνας καὶ τοὺς κημοὺς ἐπισφίγξας, μάστιξι καὶ κέντροις ἀναμνήσει τῆς δεσποτικῆς ἐξουσίας, ἧς ἐπελάθοντο διὰ τὸ χρηστὸν καὶ ἥμερον τοῦ κρατοῦντος ὥσπερ οἱ κακοὶ δοῦλοι.
Book 2, §§270–294
2:270But the rout and destruction of the passions is indeed a good, but not a perfect good; but the discovery of wisdom is a surpassing good, and when that is found all the people will sing harmonies and melodies, not with one kind of music only, but with every sort;
2:271for then, says the scripture, "Israel sang this song at the well;" that is to say, in triumph for the fact that knowledge, which had long been hidden but which was sought for, had at length been found by all men, though lying deep by nature; the duty of which was to irrigate the rational fields existing in the souls of those men who are fond of contemplation.
2:272What, then, shall we say? When we bring home the legitimate fruit of the mind, does not the sacred scripture enjoin us to display in our reason, as in a sacred basket, the first fruits of our fertility; a specimen of the glorious flowers, and shoots, and fruits which the soul has brought forth, bidding us speak out distinctly, and to utter panegyrics on the God who brings things to perfection, and to say, "I have cleared away the things which were holy out of my house, and I have arranged them in the house of God:" appointing as stewards and guardians of them, men selected for their superior merit, and giving them the charge of these sacred things;
2:273and these persons are Levites, proselytes, and orphans, and widows. But some are suppliants, some are emigrants and fugitives, some are persons widowed and destitute of all created things, but enrolled as belonging to God, the genuine husband and father of the soul which is inclined to worship.
2:274In this way, then, it is most proper both to speak and to be silent. But the wicked adopt an exactly contrary course; for they are admirers of a blamable kind of silence, and of an interpretation open to reproach, practising both lines of conduct to their own destruction and that of others.
2:275But the greater part of their employment consists in saying what they ought not; for having opened their mouth and leaving it unbridled, like an unrestrained torrent, they allow their speech to run on indiscriminately, as the poets say, dragging on thousands of profitless sayings;
2:276therefore those who have devoted themselves to the advocacy of pleasure and appetite, and every sort of excessive desire, building up irrational passion as a fortification against dominant reason, and preparing themselves for a contentious sort of discussion, have come at last to a regular dispute, hoping to be able to blind the race which is endowed with the faculty of sight, and to throw it down precipices, and into depths from which it will not be able at any future time to emerge.
2:277But some have not only put themselves forward as rivals to human virtue, but have proceeded to such a pitch of folly as to oppose themselves also to divine virtue. Therefore Pharaoh, the king of the land of Egypt, is spoken of as the leader of the company which is devoted to the passions; for it is said to the prophet, "Behold, he is going forth to the river, and thou shalt stand in the way to meet him, on the bank of the river;"
2:278for it is the peculiar characteristic of the one man to go forth to the rapidity and continual pouring forth of the irrational passion; and it is also characteristic of the wise man to oppose with exceeding vigour the arguments on behalf of pleasure and desire, not with his feet, but with his mind, firmly and immoveably, standing on the bank of the river; that is to say, on the mouth and on the tongue, which are the organs of speech. For standing firmly on these, he will be able to overturn and defeat the plausible specious arguments which advocate the cause of passion.
2:279But the enemy of the race which is endowed with the power of seeing, is the people of Pharaoh, which never ceased attacking, and persecuting, and enslaving virtue, until ... it paid the penalty for the evils which it inflicted being overwhelmed in the sea of those iniquities ... which it excited ... So that that period exhibited an extraordinary sight, a victory which was in no doubt, and a joy greater than could have been hoped for.
2:280On which account it is said, "And Israel saw the Egyptians dead upon the sea-shore." Great indeed was the hand which fought for them, compelling those who had sharpened these organs against the truth to fall by the mouth, and lips, and speech, so that they who had taken up these weapons against others should perish by their own arms and not by those of others.
2:281And this announces three most glorious things to the soul; one, the destruction of the passions of Egypt; another, that this has taken place in no other spot than near the salt and bitter springs, as if on the shore of the sea, by which sophistical reason, that enemy of virtue, is poured forth; and, lastly, the sight of the disaster.
2:282For no glorious thing can be invisible, but should be brought to the light and brilliancy of the sun. For so also the contrary, namely evil, should be thrust into deep darkness, and should be accounted deserving of night. And may it indeed by chance happen to some one to behold this: but what is really good should be always beheld by more piercing eyes. And what is so good as that what is good should live, and what is evil should die?
2:283There were, therefore, three persons who uttered atrocious words which were to reach even to heaven; these men devoted themselves to studies against nature, or rather against their own souls, saying that this universe was the only thing which was perceptible to the outward senses, and visible, having never been created, and being never destined to be destroyed, but being uncreated and imperishable, not requiring any superintendence, or care, or regulation, or management.
2:284Afterwards piling up fresh attempts one upon another, they built up a doctrine which was not approved, and raised it to a height like a tower; for it is said, "And the whole earth spoke one language," an inharmonious agreement of all the portions of the soul, for the purpose of overthrowing that which is the most comprehensive of all existing principles, namely, authority.
2:285Therefore, a great and irresistible hand overthrew them when they were hoping to mount up even to heaven by their devices, for the purpose of destroying the everlasting kingdom; and it also dashed down the doctrine which they had built up; and the place is called confusion:
2:286a very appropriate name for such an audacious and wicked attempt; for what can be more productive of confusion than anarchy? Are not houses which have no manager full of offences and disturbances?
2:287And are not cities which are left unprovided with a king destroyed by the domination of the mob, the opposite evil to kingly power, and at the same time the greatest of all evils? And have not countries, and nations, and regions of the earth, the governments of which have been put down, lost all their ancient and great prosperity?
2:288And why need I speak of matters of human history? For even the other species of animals, flocks of birds, and herds of terrestrial beasts, and shoals of aquatic creatures, never exist without some leader of their company; but they always desire and always pay attention to their own leader, as being the sole cause of the advantages they receive; at whose absence they are scattered and destroyed.
2:289Do we suppose then, that in the case of earthly creatures, which are the most insignificant portion of the universe, authority is the cause of good things and anarchy the cause of evils, but that the world itself is not filled with extreme happiness by reason of the administration of God its king?
2:290Therefore they have suffered punishment corresponding to their iniquities: for having polluted the sacred doctrine, they saw themselves polluted in like manner, all authority being taken away from among them; and being thrown themselves into confusion, but not having really caused any. But as long as they were left unpunished, being puffed up by insane pride, they sought to overthrow the authority of the universe by unholy speeches; and they set themselves up as rulers and kings, attributing the irresistible power of God to creatures which are perpetually coming to an end and being destroyed.
2:291Therefore these ridiculous men giving themselves tragic airs and using inflated language, are accustomed to speak thus: we are they who are leaders; we are kings; On us all things depend. Who, except ourselves, is the cause of good and of the contrary? To whom, except to us, can the doing well or ill be truly attributed? They talk nonsense too in another manner, saying, that all things depend upon an invisible power, which they fancy presides over all human and divine affairs in the whole world.
2:292Uttering such insolent falsehoods as these, if after intoxication they have become sober, and have come to themselves again, and feel ashamed of the intoxication to which they have given way coming under the dominion of the external senses, and if they reproach themselves for the evil actions which they have been led on to commit by folly, giving ear to their new counsellor, which never flatters, and which cannot be corrupted, namely, repentance, having propitiated the merciful power of the living God by sacred hymns of repentance instead of profane songs, they will find entire forgiveness.
2:293But if they are restive and obstinate for ever, and indulge in wanton behaviour, as if they were independent, and free, and the rulers of others, then by a necessity which is deaf to all entreaties and implacable, they will learn to feel their own nothingness in all things both small and great;
2:294for the driver who mounts upon them, putting a bridle, upon this world, as though it were a winged chariot, drawing back with main strength the reins which before were loose, and pressing the bits severely, will remind them by whip and spur of his authority as master, which they, like wicked servants, have forgotten by reason of the gentle and merciful temper of their manager;
Book 2, §§295–302
2:295τὸ γὰρ τῶν δεσποτῶν ἐπιεικὲς εἰς ἀναρχίαν ἐκτρέποντες ἐπιμορφάζουσι τὸ ἀδέσποτον, μέχρις ἂν τὴν ῥοώδη τε καὶ πολλὴν αὐτῶν νόσον, ἀντὶ φαρμάκων τὰς τιμωρίας προσφέρων, ὁ κεκτημένος ἐπισχῇ.
2:296διὸ λέγεται· „ψυχὴ ἄνομος ἡ διαστέλλουσα τοῖς χείλεσι κακοποιῆσαι ἢ καλῶς ποιῆσαι· εἶθ’ ὕστερον ἐξαγορεύσει τὴν ἁμαρτίαν ἑαυτῆς“ (Lev. 5, 4). τί φῄς, ὦ γέμουσα ἀλαζονείας; οἶδας γάρ, τί ἐστι τὸ πρὸς ἀλήθειαν ἀγαθὸν ἢ καλὸν ἢ δίκαιον ἢ ὅσιον ἢ τίνα τίσιν ἐφαρμόττει;
2:297ἡ τούτων ἐπιστήμη τε καὶ δύναμις ἀνάκειται μόνῳ θεῷ, καὶ εἴ τις αὐτῷ φίλος. μάρτυς δὲ καὶ χρησμός, ἐν ᾧ λέγεται· „ἐγὼ ἀποκτενῶ καὶ ζῆν ποιήσω· πατάξω κἀγὼ ἰάσομαι“ (Deut. 32, 39).
2:298ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὐδὲ ἐπιπόλαιον ἔσχεν ἡ δοκησίσοφος ψυχὴ τὴν τῶν ὑπὲρ ἑαυτὴν ὀνείρωξιν, ἀλλ’ οὕτως ἡ δυστυχὴς ἐξηνεμώθη, ὡς καὶ ἐνώμοτον γενέσθαι περὶ τοῦ βεβαίως καὶ παγίως ταῦθ’ ἑστάναι, ἃ ψευδῶς ὑπέλαβεν.
2:299ἐὰν οὖν τὸ παλμῶδες καὶ παφλάζον τοῦ νοσήματος ἄρξηται χαλᾶν, τὰ τῆς ὑγείας ἐμπυρεύματα κατ’ ὀλίγον ἐκζωπυρούμενα βιάσεται τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ἐξαγορεῦσαι τὸ ἁμάρτημα, τὸ δ’ ἐστὶ κακίσαι ἑαυτήν, εἶτα πρὸς βωμοῖς ἱκέτιν γενέσθαι, ποτνιωμένην λιταῖς καὶ εὐχαῖς καὶ θυσίαις, αἷς ἀμνηστίας μόναις ἐπιλαχεῖν ἔστιν.
2:300Ἑξῆς δ’ ἄν τις εἰκότως ἐπαπορήσειε, τί δή ποτε τὸν ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ ποταμὸν μόνον ἀνέγραψεν ἔχοντα χείλη, τὸν δ’ Εὐφράτην ἤ τινα τῶν ἄλλων ἱερῶν ποταμῶν οὐκέτι. ὅπου μὲν γάρ φησι· „στήσῃ συναντῶν αὐτῷ παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τοῦ ποταμοῦ“ (Exod. 7, 15) * * *.
2:301καίτοι τινὲς ἴσως ἐπιχλευάζοντες ἐροῦσι, μὴ δεῖν τὰ τοιαῦτα εἰς τὰς ζητήσεις εἰσάγειν· γλισχρολογίαν γὰρ μᾶλλον ἢ ὠφέλειάν τινα ἐμφαίνειν. ἐγὼ δὲ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἡδυσμάτων τρόπον παρηρτύσθαι ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἀναγραφαῖς βελτιώσεως ἕνεκα τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ὑπολαμβάνω· καὶ οὐδεμίαν τῶν ζητούντων καταγνωστέον εὑρεσιλογίαν, ἀλλ’ εἰ μὴ ζητοῖεν, ἔμπαλιν ἀργίαν.
2:302οὐδὲ γὰρ περὶ ποταμῶν ἐστιν ἱστορίας ἡ παροῦσα σπουδή, περὶ δὲ βίων τῶν εἰκαζομένων ποταμίοις ῥεύμασιν, ἐναντιουμένων ἀλλήλοις. ὁ μὲν γὰρ τοῦ σπουδαίου βίος ἐν ἔργοις, ἐν λόγοις δὲ ὁ τοῦ φαύλου θεωρεῖται. λόγος δὲ γλώττῃ καὶ στόματι καὶ χείλεσι καὶ τοῖς * * *.
Book 2, §§295–302
2:295for bad servants, looking upon the gentleness of masters as anarchy, fancy themselves entirely free from the power of any master at all, until their owner checks their great and increasing disease by applying punishment as a remedy.
2:296For which reason the expression is used of "a lawless soul, which with its lips distinguishes well-doing and evil-doing, and then will subsequently announce its own sin." What sayest thou, O soul, full of insolence? For dost thou know what real good or real evil, real justice or real holiness, are? or what is suited to what?
2:297The knowledge of those things and the power of regulating them belongs to God alone, and to whoever is dear to him. And witness is borne to this assertion by the scripture in which it is said, "I will kill and I will cause to live; I will smite and I will heal."
2:298But the mind which was wise in its own conceit had not even a superficial dreaming intimation of the things placed above it; but, wretched that it was, it was so completely carried away by the wind of vain opinion that it swore that those things which it had erroneously imagined stood firmly and solidly.
2:299If, therefore, the violence and convulsion of the disease begin to relax, the sparks of returning health becoming gradually re-kindled, will compel it at first to confess its error, that is to say, to reproach itself, and afterwards to become a suppliant at the altar, entreating with prayers, and supplications, and sacrifices, that it may only obtain pardon.
2:300After this who can fairly raise the question why the historian of the scriptures has spoken of the river of Egypt only as having banks and has made no such mention of the Euphrates or of any other of the sacred rivers; for here he says, "Thou shalt stand in the way to meet him by the bank of the river."
2:301And yet perhaps some persons in a spirit of ridicule will say that it is not right to bring such matters as these forward for investigation, for that it rather displays a spirit of cavilling than does any good. But I imagine that such things, like sweetmeats, are prepared in the sacred scriptures, for the improvement of those who read them, and that we ought not to condemn the curiosity of those who investigate such matters, but that we should rather blame their indolence if they did not investigate them.
2:302For our present discussion is not about the history of rivers but about ways of life, which are compared to the streams of rivers, running in opposite directions to one another. For the life of the good man consists in actions; but that of the wicked man is seen to consist only in words. And speech in the tongue, and mouth, and lips, and